JP6952080B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a game called pachislot, which is provided with a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols provided on their respective surfaces, a start switch, a stop switch, a stepping motor provided corresponding to each reel, and a control unit. The machine is known. The start switch detects that the start lever has been operated by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "start operation") after the game value such as medals and coins has been inserted, and requests the start of rotation of all reels. Output the signal to be. The stop switch detects that the stop button provided corresponding to each reel is pressed by the player (hereinafter, also referred to as "stop operation"), and outputs a signal requesting that the rotation of the corresponding reel be stopped. do. The stepping motor transmits its driving force to the corresponding reels. Further, the control unit controls the operation of the stepping motor based on the signals output by the start switch and the stop switch, and performs the rotation operation and the stop operation of each reel.

In such a gaming machine, when a start operation is detected, a lottery process using random numbers (hereinafter referred to as "internal lottery process") is performed on the program, and the result of the lottery (hereinafter, "internal winning combination") is performed. The rotation of the reel is stopped based on the timing of the stop operation. Then, when the rotation of all the reels is stopped and the combination of symbols (display combination) related to the establishment of the winning is displayed, the player is given a privilege corresponding to the combination of the symbols. As an example of the privilege given to the player, the game value (medals, etc.) is given, and the operation of the re-game (hereinafter, also referred to as "replay") in which the internal lottery process is performed again without consuming the game value. , The operation of a bonus game that increases the chances of giving game value, etc. can be mentioned.

Further, in such a gaming machine, a function of notifying information of a stop operation advantageous to the player so as to increase the probability of establishment of a specific combination (for example, a combination related to the addition of game value), that is, an assist time (hereinafter referred to as assist time). , "AT"). In addition, when a specific condition such as displaying a specific symbol combination is satisfied, a function in which a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay is higher than the normal time is activated, that is, the replay time (hereinafter referred to as "RT") Some have functions. Further, some have an assist replay time (hereinafter referred to as "ART") function in which AT and RT operate at the same time.

In a conventional gaming machine, a non-advantageous section (normal section) and an advantageous section can be set as a state in which a game is played, an AT state can be set in the advantageous section, and a predetermined number of times have been set since the advantageous section started. When a game is played or when a specific number of games have been played since the end of the AT state, the initialization process is executed to shift to the non-advantageous section, and in this initialization process, the lottery state of the AT lottery is performed. Is known to be initialized to a low probability state (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2017-185099

By the way, with such a gaming machine, while it is possible to suppress excessively high gambling, there is a problem that the player's motivation and interest in playing may be reduced when shifting to a non-advantageous section. was there.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the player shifts to a non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be planned.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information, and a result display can be derived by starting and then stopping the variable display on the variable display unit, and a privilege corresponding to the derived result display can be given. It ’s a gaming machine,
A stop operation detecting means capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and
A section control means that can be controlled to any section of a non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and an advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section becomes the specified value, and before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined. When this is done, the advantageous section end control means capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section end control means,
In the non-advantageous section, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, the advantageous section start control means capable of shifting to the advantageous section and
The non-advantageous section is provided with a specific state control means capable of controlling the non-advantageous section to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state.
In the specific state, the specific state display is performed, and the specific state display can be continuously performed for at least a predetermined period after shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section.
When it is decided to shift to the special state in the specific state, the shift to the advantageous section and the specific precursor period are set, and the game is performed according to the set specific precursor period. Move to a special state,
A gaming machine characterized in that during the advantageous section in which the specific state display is performed, the predetermined period in which the specific state display continues is set according to the set specific precursor period.
A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
The non-advantageous section is provided with a specific state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling the non-advantageous section to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state.
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined in the advantageous section, a predetermined precursor period (for example, an advantageous section (end precursor)) is set, and the game of the set predetermined precursor period is performed. To the non-advantageous section according to
During the predetermined precursor period, it is possible to suggest a transition to the specific state, and it is notified that the transition to the specific state will occur in the final game.
And in the specific state, display a particular state (e.g., displayed in CZ state) is performed, the specific status, after the transition to the preferred segment from the non-preferred intervals, allows line Ukoto continuously at least a predetermined time period And
When it is determined to shift to the special state in the specific state, the transition to the advantageous section is performed and a specific precursor period (for example, an advantageous section (AT precursor)) is set, and the set specific precursor period is set. It shifts to the special state according to the game being played,
Wherein the above in advantageous interval specified status display is being performed, Yu Technical machine wherein said predetermined period is set to the specific state display continues in accordance with the specific aura period set.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When the advantageous section can be controlled to a specific state (for example, CZ state) in which the expectation of transition to the special state is higher than that of the normal state and the transition from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is performed, a predetermined precursor period (for example, an advantageous section (end precursor)). )) Is set, and the specific state display (for example, the display during the CZ state) performed in the specific state can be continued even in a predetermined period after the transition to the advantageous section. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest.

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the special state in the specific state, it shifts to the advantageous section and the specific precursor period (for example, the advantageous section (AT precursor)) is set, and the specific state is displayed. During the section, a predetermined period during which the specific state display continues may be set according to the set specific precursor period. As a result, the non-advantageous section is set to a specific state, and even when the specific state display is performed over the advantageous section, it is possible to perform the effect in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest in the game even when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section.

It is a figure for demonstrating the functional flow of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a perspective view which shows the appearance structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the selector provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the whole structure of the circuit provided in the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the microprocessor in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram which shows the internal structure of the sub-control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a block diagram of various registers which a main CPU has in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the memory map of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the security mode of the main control circuit in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state between the bonus state and the non-bonus state of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section, the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination, etc. in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination, etc. in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the hit request flag storage area, and the winning operation flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the carry-over combination storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the game state flag storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the operation stop button storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the pressing order storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of the symbol code storage area in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, lottery number, and winning combination number in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, lottery number, and winning combination number in one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the non-advantageous section in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in a normal advantageous section in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of various tables referred to in the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the display example of the display device of the line battle state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the flow of the game in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the ending effect performed in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between each game state, an internal winning combination, and navigation data in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the power-on (reset interrupt) processing executed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the game return processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change confirmation processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the setting change command generation storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the communication data storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the communication data pointer update process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the (external) processing at the time of power failure in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the checksum generation process (non-standard) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sum check process (non-standard) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the sum check process (non-standard) in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the main processing (main operation processing) executed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal acceptance / start check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal insertion process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal insertion check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal insertion check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of error processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the random number value acquisition processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the internal lottery processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the compressed data storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order storage process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the symbol code acquisition processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the logical product operation processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order acquisition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the pull-in priority order acquisition process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the reel stop control processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the prize search process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the illegal hit check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the winning check, medal payout processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the medal payout number check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the BB check process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of RT check processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the interrupt process executed by the main control circuit of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the communication data transmission processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the WDT setting process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 7-segment LED drive processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the 7-segment display data generation processing in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the example of the timer update process in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the example of the operation at the time of power-on of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a timing chart which shows the example of the operation at the time of inserting a medal of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating the production example (the 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 1) of the gaming property of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 1) of the gaming property of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 2) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 3) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 4) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 5) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 6) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (the 6) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows another example of the limiter of the advantageous section of the gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the control method of the number limiter of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the adjustment hitting method of the number limiter of the game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section of the gaming machine in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (gaming specification). It is a figure for demonstrating each mode in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of various tables in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of various tables in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination, etc. in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating each limit process in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a flowchart which shows the example of the cherry winning sound determination processing in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the mode suggestion effect (the 1) in one detailed example of another example (the 6) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the mode suggestion effect (the 2) in one detailed example of another example (the 6) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the mode suggestion effect (the 2) in one detailed example of another example (the 6) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the music production in pseudo-bonus in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the state suggestion effect in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating another control example of a stable state and a rough wave state in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating another control example (No. 2) of a stable state and a rough wave state in one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the modification of one detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating another example (7) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (7) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (7) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (7) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (8) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (8) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (8) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (9) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (9) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (10) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (10) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (10) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (10) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating an example of setting suggestion effect of a game machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section of the gaming machine in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (gaming specification). It is a figure which shows the transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section of the gaming machine in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (gaming specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol arrangement table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table selection table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table selection table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table selection table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table selection table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table selection table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table selection table in one detailed example (the 2) of the other example (the 6) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the priority table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the RUSH state in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the RUSH state in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the modified example of the RUSH state in one detailed example (the second) of the other example (the sixth) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the NBB state in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the NBB state in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the RB challenge production in one detailed example (the second) of another example (the sixth) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the RB challenge production in one detailed example (the second) of another example (the sixth) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the RB challenge production in one detailed example (the second) of another example (the sixth) of the game property (the game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship of the specific push order replay, push order, and stop symbol combination in one detailed example (part 2) of another example (the 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows the correspondence relationship of the specific push order replay, push order, and stop symbol combination in one detailed example (part 2) of another example (the 6) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the RB navigation MAP table in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the RB history display in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a schematic diagram which shows the appearance structure of the gaming machine in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the stop state in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the stop state in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the group definition of the stop permissible symbol combination in one detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (the game specification). It is a figure for demonstrating the group definition of the stop allowable symbol combination in the conventional example. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (11) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (11) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (11) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (11) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (11) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (11) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (11) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (11) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure for demonstrating another example (11) of the playability of a gaming machine in one Embodiment of this invention.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine will be described as an example of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention, and its configuration and operation will be described with reference to the drawings. In this embodiment, a pachi-slot machine having a bonus operation function, an AT function, and an ART function will be described.

<Functional flow>
First, the functional flow of the pachislot machine will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachislot machine of the present embodiment, a medal is used as a game medium for playing a game. In addition to medals, coins, game balls, point data for games, tokens, and the like can also be applied as the game medium. In addition, the game medium may be referred to as "game value" or "game value".

When a medal is inserted into the pachislot machine by the player and the start lever is operated, one value (hereinafter referred to as a random number value) is extracted from random numbers in a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535).

The internal lottery means draws a lot based on the extracted random number value, and determines the internal winning combination. This internal lottery means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. By determining the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols that are allowed to be displayed along the valid line (winning determination line) described later is determined in advance. The types of symbol combinations include those related to "winning" in which benefits such as medal payout, replay operation, bonus operation, etc. are given to the player, and other so-called "missing". Such things are provided. In the following, the role related to the payout of medals will be referred to as a "small role", and the role related to the operation of the replay (replay) will be referred to as a "replay role". In addition, the role related to the operation of the bonus (bonus game) is also referred to as a "bonus role". In addition, a winning combination (that is, a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established) may be simply called a "winning combination", and the internal winning combination is a "winning combination", a "predetermined result", or Sometimes referred to as "derivation tolerance". Further, the internal lottery means may be referred to as a "combination determining means", a "winning combination determining means", a "predetermining means", or a "derivation allowable condition determining means".

Further, when the start lever is operated, a plurality of reels are rotated. After that, when the stop button corresponding to the predetermined reel is pressed by the player, the reel stop control means controls to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel based on the internal winning combination and the timing when the stop button is pressed. conduct. This reel stop control means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. The operation means for performing the start operation is not limited to a lever shape such as a start lever, and any operation means may be used as long as the player can perform the start operation. .. Further, the operation means for performing the stop operation is not limited to a button shape such as a stop button, and any operation means may be used as long as the player can perform the stop operation. ..

In pachislot, basically, control is performed to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel within a specified time (190 msec) from the time when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within this specified time is referred to as the "number of sliding pieces". Then, in the present embodiment, when the specified period is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces (maximum number of sliding pieces) is set for four symbols.

When the internal winning combination that allows the combination display of the symbols related to the winning is determined, the reel stop control means usually sets the combination of the symbols to the effective line within the specified time of 190 msec (for 4 symbols). Stop the rotation of the reel so that it is displayed as much as possible along the line. In addition, the reel stop control means uses a predetermined time to stop the rotation of the reel so that the combination of symbols whose display is not permitted by the internal winning combination is not displayed along the effective line. The symbol displayed when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be referred to as "stop display" or "display result". Further, displaying a symbol on the effective line when the rotation of the reel is stopped may be expressed as "derivation of stop display" or "derivation of display result".

Further, the reel stop control means automatically stops each reel when a predetermined automatic stop time elapses after the reels rotate, even if the player does not perform the stop operation. Stop control may be performed. In this case, the reels are stopped without the player's stop operation, so even if one of the internal winning combinations is decided, the combination of symbols related to any winning is effective. It is desirable to stop the rotation of the reel so that it is not displayed along the line.

When all the rotations of the plurality of reels are stopped in this way, the winning determination means is such that the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line is related to winning (or other predetermined one). Determine if there is any. That is, it is determined whether or not the combination of symbols related to the winning (or other predetermined combination of symbols) is established. This winning determination means is also one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later. Then, the displayed combination of symbols is a combination of symbols related to winning (or other predetermined one) by the winning determination means (that is, a combination of symbols related to winning (or a combination of other predetermined symbols). ) Is established), a privilege such as a medal payout is given to the player, or various controls are performed with that as an opportunity. In pachislot, the above series of flows is performed as one game (unit game).

The winning determination means determines whether or not the combination of symbols displayed along the valid line corresponds to any combination of symbols among a plurality of predetermined combinations of symbols. It may be present, or it may be determined whether or not it corresponds to the combination of symbols related to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery means. That is, in the former, it may be determined whether or not it is a combination of symbols related to winning, separately from the internal winning combination. In this case, as long as the reel stop control means appropriately stops and controls the stop, the prevention of the occurrence of erroneous winning can be sufficiently ensured, so that the control burden related to the detection of erroneous winning can be reduced. On the other hand, in the latter case, it is possible to determine whether or not the combination of symbols related to the winning is the combination of the symbols for which the winning is permitted. Can be detected, so that security can be improved.

Further, in pachislot, in the flow of the above-mentioned series of game operations, various effects are produced by displaying an image by a display device, outputting light by various lamps, outputting sound by a speaker, or a combination of these. Is done.

Specifically, when the start lever is operated, a random value for production is extracted in addition to the random value used for determining the internal winning combination described above. When the random value for the effect is extracted, the effect content determining means determines the effect to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effect contents associated with the internal winning combination by lottery. This effect content determining means is one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the sub-control circuit described later. Further, when the main control circuit described later determines the effect content, the effect content determining means may be one of various processing means (processing functions) included in the main control circuit described later.

Next, when the effect content is determined by the effect content determining means, the effect execution means responds in conjunction with each opportunity such as when the reel starts rotating, when each reel stops rotating, and when it is determined whether or not there is a prize. To execute. In this way, in pachislot, for example, by executing the production content associated with the internal winning combination, the opportunity to know or anticipate the determined internal winning combination (in other words, the combination of symbols to be aimed at) is a game. It is provided to the player and can improve the interest of the player.

<Structure of pachislot>
Next, the structure of the pachislot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 5.

[Appearance structure]
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing the external structure of the pachislot machine 1.

As shown in FIG. 2, the pachislot machine 1 includes an exterior body (game machine main body) 2. The exterior body 2 has a cabinet (housing) 2a for accommodating a reel, a circuit board, and the like, and a front door (front door) 2b to which an opening of the cabinet 2a can be opened and closed.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R (variable display means, display row) are provided side by side in a horizontal row. Hereinafter, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (main reel) is also referred to as a left reel 3L, a middle reel 3C, and a right reel 3R, respectively. Each reel 3L, 3C, 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. A plurality of (for example, 20) symbols are drawn on the surface of the sheet material at predetermined intervals along the circumferential direction (rotation direction of the reel). In addition, each reel 3L, 3C, 3R may be expressed as "design display means", "variable display means", "variable display" and the like. Further, as these components, a symbol display area 4 described later may be included. Further, the "design" may be any information that can be visually identified by the player, and may be expressed as "identification information" in that sense.

The front door 2b includes a door body 9, a front panel 10, a waist panel 12, and a pedestal portion 13. The door body 9 is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable by using a hinge (not shown). The hinge is provided at the left side end of the door body 9 when viewed from the front side (player side) of the pachislot machine 1. The cabinet 2a can be simply referred to as a "box", and the front door 2b can be simply referred to as a "door" or a "front door". Further, since the cabinet 2a functions as a frame body for supporting or fixing the front door 2b, it may be expressed as a "support body", a "support frame", or a "fixed frame". Further, the front door 2b may be composed of a plurality of door members. For example, it may be composed of an upper door member attached to the upper side of the opening of the cabinet 2a and a lower door member attached to the lower side of the opening of the cabinet 2a, or may be composed of a lower door member attached to the lower side of the opening of the cabinet 2a when viewed from the front side of the gaming machine. The inner door member attached to the opening side of the cabinet 2a and the outer door member attached to the front side of the gaming machine may be used.

The front panel 10 is provided on the upper part of the door body 9. The front panel 10 is composed of a frame-shaped member having an opening 10a. The opening 10a of the front panel 10 is closed by the display device cover 30, and the display device cover 30 is arranged to face the display device 11 which will be described later and is arranged inside the cabinet 2a.

The display device cover 30 is made of a black translucent synthetic resin. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 described later through the display device cover 30. Further, in the present embodiment, by forming the display device cover 30 with a black translucent synthetic resin, the entry of external light into the cabinet 2a is suppressed, and the image (image) displayed by the display device 11 is suppressed. Is clearly visible.

A lamp group 21 is provided on the front panel 10. The lamp group 21 includes, for example, the lamps 21a and 21b provided on the upper part of the front panel 10 when viewed from the player side. Each lamp constituting the lamp group 21 is composed of an LED (Light Emitting Diode) or the like (see LED group 85 in FIG. 6 described later), and lights are turned on and off in a pattern corresponding to the effect content.

The waist panel 12 is provided at a substantially central portion of the door body 9. The waist panel 12 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source (LED included in the LED group 85 described later) that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

The pedestal portion 13 is provided between the front panel 10 and the waist panel 12. The pedestal portion 13 has a symbol display area 4, various devices to be operated by the player (medal insertion slot 14, MAX bet button 15a, 1 bet button 15b, start lever 16, 3 stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R, settlement button (not shown), etc.) are provided.

The symbol display area 4 is an area that overlaps the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is arranged at a position on the player side of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the three reels. A predetermined area in 3L, 3C, and 3R can be visually recognized. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window, and has a configuration in which the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R provided behind the symbol display area 4 can be visually recognized. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is referred to as a reel display window 4.

The reel display window 4 is arranged continuously among a plurality of symbols provided on the peripheral surface of each reel when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the reel display window 4 is stopped. It is configured so that one symbol is displayed in the frame. That is, when the rotation of the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R is stopped, one symbol is provided in each of the upper, middle, and lower regions for each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 (three in total). ) Is displayed (in the frame of the reel display window 4, the design is displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns).

Then, in the present embodiment, within the frame of the reel display window 4, the line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R, and the left reel 3L. The upper area, the upper area of the middle reel 3C, and the upper area of the right reel 3R (top line), the lower area of the left reel 3L, the lower area of the middle reel 3C, and the lower area of the right reel 3R. The line connecting the reels (bottom line) is defined (defined) as an effective line for determining whether or not a prize is won. The effective line may also be referred to as a "winning line" or a "judgment line".

In the present embodiment, for example, a line connecting the lower region of the left reel 3L, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R (cross-up line), and the left reel 3L. A line (cross-down line) connecting the upper region, the middle region of the middle reel 3C, and the lower region of the right reel 3R may be further defined as an effective line. Further, in the present embodiment, the effective lines are the above-mentioned three lines (or may be five lines as described here), but the number of the lines can be increased or decreased as appropriate. For example, only one center line may be an effective line, or only two lines, a top line and a bottom line, may be effective lines. Further, when defining an effective line, it is possible to define as an effective line instead of each line in which the above-mentioned symbols are arranged in a straight line, or at the same time, a line in which the symbols are not arranged in a straight line is defined as an effective line. That is, if the line passes through (the area of) any one of the symbols in each row (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, right reel 3R), one or a plurality of lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines are connected. It can be set as a valid line.

For example, a line (irregular line) connecting the middle region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R may be defined as an effective line. That is, in the present embodiment, since the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns in the frame of the reel display window 4, it is possible to define 27 effective lines. , At least one of them may be defined as a valid line.

The reel display window 4 is formed by the opening of the frame member 31 provided in the pedestal portion 13. Further, a pedestal region having a substantially horizontal plane is provided below the frame member 31 that defines the reel display window 4. When viewed from the player side, the medal insertion slot 14 is provided on the right side of the pedestal area, and the MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided on the left side.

The medal slot 14 is provided to receive medals dropped on the pachislot machine 1 from the outside by the player. The medals received from the medal slot 14 are used in one game up to a preset predetermined number (for example, 3), and the number of medals exceeding the predetermined number is deposited inside the pachislot machine 1. (So-called credit function (game medium storage means)).

The MAX bet button 15a and the 1-bet button 15b are provided to determine the number of medals to be used for one game from the medals deposited inside the cabinet 2a. Inside the MAX bet button 15a, a bet button LED (not shown) that lights up when a medal can be inserted is provided. In addition, the settlement button is provided to pull out (discharge) the medals deposited inside the pachislot machine 1 to the outside.

When the player presses the MAX bet button 15a, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated. On the other hand, one medal is inserted each time the 1-bet button 15b is pressed once. When the 1-bet button 15b is operated three times, medals for the number of bets (3) in the unit game are inserted and the effective line is activated.

In the following, the operation of the MAX bet button 15a, the operation of the 1-bet button 15b, and the operation of inserting medals into the medal insertion slot 14 (operations of inserting medals to perform a game) are all referred to as "insertion operations".

The start lever 16 is provided to start the rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R). The stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided corresponding to the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively, and each stop button is provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reel. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are also referred to as a left stop button 17L, a middle stop button 17C, and a right stop button 17R, respectively.

Further, an information display 6 is provided at substantially the center of the pedestal region on the substantially horizontal plane below the reel display window 4. The information display 6 is covered with a transparent window cover (not shown).

The information display 6 is a two-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter referred to as "the number of payouts") to the player. For digitally displaying (notifying) information such as (hereinafter referred to as "7-segment LED") and the number of medals deposited inside the pachislot 1 (hereinafter referred to as "credit number") to the player. A 2-digit 7-segment LED is provided. In the present embodiment, the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is a 2-digit 7-segment LED for digitally displaying (notifying) information on the occurrence of an error and the error type to the player. Is also used. Therefore, when an error occurs, the display mode of the 2-digit 7-segment LED for displaying the number of medals to be paid out is switched from the display mode of the number of medals to be paid out to the display mode of the information of the error type.

Further, the information display 6 is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying information on the stop operation necessary for displaying the symbol combination according to the winning combination determined as the internal winning combination along the effective line. ing. The instruction monitor (instruction display) is composed of, for example, a two-digit 7-segment LED. Then, the instruction monitor notifies the player of the necessary stop operation information by turning on, blinking, or turning off the two-digit 7-segment LED in a manner that uniquely corresponds to the stop operation information to be notified. do.

The mode that uniquely corresponds to the information of the stop operation to be notified here is, for example, in the case of notifying the push order "1st (performing the first stop operation on the left reel 3L)". When the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order "2nd (perform the first stop operation on the middle reel 3C)" is notified, the numerical value "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor and the push order is displayed. When notifying "3rd (performing the first stop operation on the right reel 3R)", the numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor. The mode of notifying the information of the stop operation on the instruction monitor (navigation data determined on the main side described later) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 45 and the like described later.

Further, the information display 6 is a state display (not shown) for notifying that the information display 6 is an advantageous section advantageous for the player (including a “normal advantageous section” and an “advantageous section” described later; see FIG. 14 described later). Is provided. The status display is composed of, for example, a 7-segment LED. As a general rule, the status indicator lights up at a predetermined timing during the game in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (for example, any timing from the start of the game to the end of the game), and the advantageous section continues. While it is on, the lighting continues. Then, when the advantageous section ends, the lighting ends and the lights go out. As a result, all the players are notified that the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player starts, that the advantageous section is in the advantageous section, and that the advantageous section ends, so that the fairness of the game is ensured. ..

As shown in FIG. 6 described later, the information display 6 is electrically connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the game operation display board 81, and the display operation of the information display 6 is mainly performed. It is controlled by the main control circuit 90 described later in the control board 71. Further, the control method of the various 7-segment LEDs described above is dynamic lighting control.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in addition to the instruction monitor controlled by the main control board 71, another means controlled by the sub-control board 72 is used to notify the information of the stop operation. Specifically, the information on the stop operation is notified by the display device 11 described later, which is composed of the projector mechanism 211 and the display unit 212 (see FIGS. 3 and 6 described later) described later.

When such a configuration is applied, the mode of notification in the instruction monitor and the mode of notification in other means controlled by the sub-control board 72 may be different from each other. That is, in the instruction monitor, the information of the stop operation to be notified may be notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation, and it is not always necessary to directly notify the information of the stop operation (for example, the numerical value "1" in the instruction monitor. Even if is displayed, it may not be possible to specify the content of the notification depending on the player, so it cannot be said that the notification is direct). On the other hand, in the notification on the sub side (sub control board side) by other means such as the display device 11 described later, the information of the stop operation may be directly notified. For example, when the push order "1st" is notified, the instruction monitor displays a numerical value "1" that uniquely corresponds to the push order to be notified, but other means (for example, the display device 11 or the like) display the left reel 3L. The instruction information for performing the first stop operation may be directly notified to the user.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 having such a configuration, it is possible to notify the information of the necessary stop operation according to the internal winning combination not only by the control of the sub control board 72 but also by the control of the main control board 71. In addition, the presence or absence of notification of such stop operation information can be controlled according to the gaming state. For example, it is possible that the stop operation information is not notified in the game state (normal state) in the normal section described later, and the stop operation information can be notified in each game state in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section described later. can.

Further, a sub display device 18 is provided on the left side of the reel display window 4 when viewed from the player side. As shown in FIG. 2, the sub-display device 18 is provided so as to stand substantially perpendicular to the pedestal region of the pedestal portion 13 in a substantially horizontal plane in the front portion of the door body 9. The sub-display device 18 is composed of a liquid crystal display and an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display, and displays various information.

Further, a touch sensor 19 is provided on the display surface of the sub display device 18 (see FIG. 6 described later). The touch sensor 19 operates according to a predetermined operating principle such as a capacitance method, and when it receives an operation of a player, it outputs a signal corresponding to the operation as touch input information. The pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment has a function of enabling the display of the sub-display device 18 to be switched according to the player's operation (touch input information output from the touch sensor 19) received via the touch sensor 19. Has. The sub display device 18 is controlled by the sub control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) based on the touch input information output from the touch sensor 19.

At the lower part of the door body 9, a medal payout outlet 24, a medal tray 25, two speaker holes 20L, 20R, and the like are provided. The medal payout outlet 24 guides the medals discharged by driving the hopper device 51 (medal payout device) described later to the outside. The medal tray 25 stores medals discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. Further, sound effects such as sound effects and music corresponding to the contents of the production are output from the two speaker holes 20L and 20R.

[Internal structure]
Next, the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 3 to 5. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal structure of the cabinet 2a, FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the internal structure on the back surface side of the front door 2b, and FIG. 5 is a diagram showing the internal structure on the back surface side of the front door 2b, which will be described later. It is a figure which shows the structure of a selector 66.

As shown in FIG. 3, the cabinet 2a has a top plate 27a, a bottom plate 27b, left and right side plates 27c and 27d, and a back plate 27e. A display device 11 is arranged in the upper part of the cabinet 2a.

The display device 11 has a projector mechanism 211 and a box-shaped projected member 212a on which the image light projected from the projector mechanism 211 is projected, and displays an image by projection mapping. Specifically, the display device 11 generates image light based on the position (projection distance, angle, etc.) and shape of the projected member 212a, which is a three-dimensional object, and the image light is emitted by the projector mechanism 211 to the projected member. It is projected on the surface of 212a. By providing such an effect function, it is possible to perform an advanced and powerful effect. Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, another projected member having a curved display surface is provided on the back side of the box-shaped projected member 212a, and one of the projected members is provided depending on the gaming state. , Used as a screen on which video light is projected. Therefore, the inside of the cabinet 2a is also provided with a function (not shown) for switching the projected member according to the gaming state. The display device 11 can also use various other display devices (for example, a liquid crystal display device) as long as it is a device capable of displaying an image for the player.

A medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device) 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged in the lower part of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 27b in the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large number of medals and ejecting them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds, for example, 50, or when the settlement button is pressed and the settlement of medals is executed. Then, the medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. Further, the medal auxiliary storage 52 is detachably attached to the bottom plate 27b of the cabinet 2a.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (power supply means) (see FIG. 6 described later). The power supply device 53 is arranged on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side plate 27c. The power supply device 53 converts the AC voltage 100V power supplied from the sub power supply device (not shown) into the DC voltage power required by each part, and supplies the converted power to each part.

Further, above the power supply device 53 in the cabinet 2a, a sub-control board case 57 for accommodating the sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged. A sub-control circuit 200 (see FIG. 9 to be described later) described later is mounted on the sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57. The sub-control circuit 200 is a circuit that controls the execution of an effect by displaying an image or the like. The specific configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 will be described later.

The sub-relay board 61 is arranged above the sub-control board case 57 in the cabinet 2a. The sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and the main control board 71, which will be described later, is mounted. Further, the sub-relay board 61 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the sub-control board 72 and a board arranged around the sub-control board 72, various device units (units), and the like is mounted.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 3, a cabinet-side relay board 44 (see FIG. 6 described later) is arranged in the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later), a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75 (see FIG. 6 described later), and a medal payout count switch (not shown). It is a relay board on which the wiring for connecting the above is mounted.

As shown in FIG. 4, a middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the front door 2b on the back surface side, and a reel display window 4 (see FIG. 2) is attached so as to be openable and closable from the back side. Although not shown in FIG. 4, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are attached to the reel display window 4 side of the middle door 41, and the main control is on the side of the middle door 41 opposite to the reel display window 4 side. A main control board case 55 in which the board 71 (see FIG. 6 described later) is housed is attached. A stepping motor (not shown) is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R via gears having a predetermined reduction ratio.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 has a main control circuit 90 (see FIGS. 7 and 8 described later) described later. The main control circuit 90 (main control means) is a circuit that controls the main flow of the game in the pachislot machine 1, such as determining the internal winning combination, rotating and stopping the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R, and determining whether or not there is a prize. .. Further, in the present embodiment, for example, the main control circuit 90 also controls processing related to determination regarding AT or ART, display processing of navigation information on an instruction monitor, transmission processing of various test signals, and the like. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 90 will be described later.

Speakers 65L and 65R are arranged below the middle door 41 on the back surface side of the front door 2b. The speakers 65L and 65R are arranged at positions facing the speaker holes 20L and 20R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

A selector 66 and a door open / close monitoring switch 67 are arranged above the speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device that detects medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14, and also is a device that selects whether or not the inserted medals are appropriate medals, and is selected as an appropriate medal. In that case, the medal is guided to the hopper device 51 side and driven so as to be housed in the hopper device 51, and if it is selected as not a proper medal, the medal is moved to the medal payout outlet 24 side. Is guided and driven so that the medal is discharged from the medal payout outlet 24. That is, the selector 66 is also a device that distributes the medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 14 to the hopper device 51 side or the medal payout outlet 24 side.

As shown in FIG. 5, the selector 66 includes a base 803 on which a medal rail (medal passage) 802 through which medals pass is formed, and a select plate that guides the inserted medals to the hopper device 51 side or the medal payout outlet 24 side. 804, a medal pusher 805 that pushes the inserted medal to the medal payout outlet 24 side when the inserted medal is not an appropriate medal, and an upstream medal sensor (first) that detects the inserted medal on the upstream side of the medal rail 802. It includes a medal sensor) 806 and a downstream medal sensor (second medal sensor) 807 that detects the inserted medal on the downstream side of the medal rail 802.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 5, the selector 66 has a medal guide (which forms a medal flow path from the selector 66 to the hopper device 51 when the medal is guided to the hopper device 51 side by the select plate 804. (Not shown) and a cancel chute (not shown) that forms a medal flow path from the selector 66 to the medal payout outlet 24 when the medal is placed on the medal payout outlet 24 side by the select plate 804 can be attached and detached. It is attached.

The select plate 804 is driven by a solenoid (not shown) included in the selector 66. The select plate 804 moves to a guide position that guides the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side when the solenoid is driven, but does not guide the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side when the solenoid is not driven. Move to the discharge position (that is, guide to the medal payout outlet 24 side). Specifically, when the solenoid is driven, the select plate 804 moves in the rearward direction of the pachislot 1 and guides the upper part of the medal, while when the solenoid is not driven, the select plate 804 moves toward the rear side of the pachislot 1 and guides the upper part of the medal. It is designed not to move forward and guide above the medal. The medal guide method using the select plate 804 is not limited to this, and for example, the guide position and the discharge position can be moved by using a mechanism that can move the pachislot 1 in the vertical direction. You may. That is, the select plate 804 has a guide position that does not prevent the passing medal from moving to the hopper device 51 side on the medal rail 802 by a solenoid or other drive source, and the passing medal moves to the hopper device 51 side. Any mechanism can be adopted as long as it is a mechanism that prevents the movement from being carried out and enables the transfer from the discharge position to be guided to the medal payout outlet 24 side.

For example, when the select plate 804 is moved to the guide position, the medal pusher 805 operates so as not to protrude in the rearward direction of the pachi-slot machine 1, and the select plate 804 is not moved to the guide position (discharge position). In the case of (moving to), it operates so as to project in the rearward direction of the pachislot machine 1. That is, when the medal pusher 805 is in a position where it does not protrude in the rearward direction of the pachislot 1, it becomes a guide position for guiding the passing medal toward the hopper device 51, and when it is in a position where it protrudes in the rearward direction of the pachislot 1. It is a discharge position that does not guide the passing medal to the hopper device 51 side (that is, guides it to the medal payout outlet 24 side).

The upstream medal sensor 806 and the downstream medal sensor 807 constitute a game medium detecting means for detecting that a medal has passed. Each medal sensor is composed of, for example, a pair or a plurality of pairs of light emitting elements and a reflective sensor composed of a light receiving element, irradiates the medal with light from the light emitting element, and emits the reflected light reflected from the medal. When the light receiving element receives light, the passage of the medal is detected. The configuration of the sensor can be changed as appropriate, and for example, a transmissive sensor or the like can be adopted. Further, the passage of medals may be detected only by the downstream medal sensor 807 without providing the upstream medal sensor 806. Further, specific control based on the detection result (medal sensor input state) of each medal sensor will be described later.

The door open / close monitoring switch 67 is arranged diagonally to the lower left of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back surface side. The door open / close monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the open / close of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachislot machine 1.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 4, a door relay terminal plate 68 is arranged on the back surface of the front door 2b, which is a region opened and closed by the middle door 41 and below the reel display window 4 (FIG. 4 described later). 6). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub relay board 61, a selector 66, a game operation display board 81, a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and the like. This is a relay board on which wiring for connecting each of the second interface boards 302 for a testing machine is mounted. Examples of the various buttons and switches include the MAX bet button 15a, the 1-bet button 15b, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, the BET switch 77 described later, the start switch 79, and the like.

<Control system provided by pachislot>
Next, the control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6 is a circuit block diagram showing the configuration of the control system of the pachislot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 provided on the middle door 41 and a sub control board 72 provided on the front door 2b. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 54 (setting switch), and a cabinet-side relay board 44 connected to the main control board 71. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, a reset switch 76, and a power supply device 53 connected to the main control board 71 via a cabinet-side relay board 44. Since the configuration of the hopper device 51 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The reel relay terminal plate 74 is arranged inside the reel main body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The setting key type switch 54 is provided in the main control board case 55. The setting key type switch 54 is used when changing the setting value (setting 1 to setting 6) of the pachi-slot 1 or when confirming the setting of the pachi-slot 1. The set value indicates the degree of the player's advantage in the game, and usually, the lower the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 1), the lower the degree of the player's advantage. Therefore, the higher the set value (for example, the closer to the setting 6), the higher the degree of advantage of the player. In the present embodiment, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the bonus combination described later, and the degree of the player's advantage can be changed. The higher the set value, the higher the AT or ART described later. It is also possible to change the degree of advantage of the player by increasing the winning probability of the lottery.

The cabinet-side relay board 44 is a relay board on which wiring for connecting the main control board 71, the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, the medal auxiliary storage switch 75, the reset switch 76, and the power supply device 53 is mounted. Is. The external centralized terminal plate 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachislot machine 1. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 is provided in the medal auxiliary storage 52, and detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals. The reset switch 76 is used, for example, when changing the setting of the pachislot machine 1.

The power supply device 53 includes a power supply board 53b and a power supply switch 53a connected to the power supply board 53b. The power switch 53a is pressed when supplying the necessary power to the pachi-slot machine 1. The power supply board 53b is connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44, and is also connected to the sub control board 72 via the sub relay board 61.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a selector 66, a door open / close monitoring switch 67, a BET switch 77, and a settlement switch 78, which are connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal plate 68 and the door relay terminal plate 68. It has a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, a sub-relay board 61, a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and a second interface board 302 for a testing machine. Since the selector 66, the door open / close monitoring switch 67, and the sub-relay board 61 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

The BET switch 77 (throwing operation detecting means) detects that the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b is pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button (not shown) has been pressed by the player. The start switch 79 (start operation detecting means) detects that the start lever 16 has been operated by the player (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 (stop operation detecting means) includes a circuit for stopping the rotating main reel and a circuit for displaying the stoptable main reel by an LED or the like. Further, the stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch (not shown). The stop switch detects that each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R is pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 is connected to the information display (7-segment display) 6 and the LED 82. The LED 82 is, for example, three LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals (hereinafter, "first LED" to "", which are lit according to the number of medals inserted in this game (hereinafter referred to as "the number of inserted medals"). An LED that lights a mark indicating that medals can be inserted, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark for replaying a game, etc., based on a signal input from the game operation display board 81 (referred to as "third LED"). Etc. are included. In the first LED to the third LED (display means), when one medal is inserted, the first LED lights up, and when two medals are inserted, the first and second LEDs light up, and three medals (game). When the number of startable medals is turned on, the first LED to the third LED are turned on. Since the information display 6 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

Both the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the second interface board 302 for the testing machine are relay boards used when outputting various signals related to the game to the testing machine in the certification test (test firing test) of the pachislot 1 (test firing test). Since these relay boards are not mounted on the Pachislot 1 as a release product for sale, the main control circuit 90 of the main control board 71 for sale includes the first interface board 301 for the testing machine and the testing machine. Various electronic components required for connecting to the second interface board 302 for use are also not mounted). For example, a test signal for controlling a main operation related to a game (for example, internal lottery, reel stop control, etc.) is output via a first interface board 301 for a testing machine, and is determined by, for example, a main control board 71. The test signal and the like related to the pushed order navigation are output via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

The sub-control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub-relay board 61. Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a speaker group 84, an LED group 85, a 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63, a touch sensor 19 and a display unit 212 connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61. Since the touch sensor 19 has been described above, the description thereof will be omitted here.

The speaker group 84 includes speakers 65L and 65R and various speakers (not shown). The LED group 85 includes a lamp group 21 provided on the front panel 10, a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel of the waist panel 12 from the back side, and the like. The 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 stores the open / close history information of the middle door 41. Further, the 24h door open / close monitoring unit 63 outputs a signal for displaying an error by the display device 11 to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 200) when the middle door 41 is opened. The display unit 212 includes, for example, a projected member 212a constituting the display device 11 and another projected member having a curved display surface provided on the back side of the projected member 212a.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 has a ROM cartridge board 86 and a liquid crystal relay board 87 connected to the sub-control board 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 and the liquid crystal relay board 87 are housed in the sub-control board case 57 together with the sub-control board 72.

The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing various control programs executed by the sub CPU 201, image (video) for production, audio (speaker group 84), light (LED group 85), and communication data. .. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the connection wiring between the sub-control board 72, the projector mechanism 211 constituting the display device 11, and the sub-display device 18. Since the projector mechanism 211 and the sub-display device 18 have been described above, their description will be omitted here.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the configuration of the main control circuit 90 mounted on the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 90 of the pachislot machine 1.

The main control circuit 90 functions as a game control unit that controls game operations, and includes a microprocessor 91, a clock pulse generation circuit 92, a power management circuit 93, a switching regulator 94 (power supply means), and a role ratio monitor (power supply means). (Not shown).

The microprocessor 91 is a microprocessor with a security function for a gaming machine. The microprocessor 91 of the present embodiment is provided with various instruction codes (hereinafter, referred to as "main CPU 101 dedicated instruction codes") specific to the microprocessor 91 that can be specified in the program. In the present embodiment, the processing efficiency and the reduction of the program capacity are realized by using the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101. The internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 8 described later, and the instruction code dedicated to the main CPU 101 provided in the microprocessor 91 will be described in detail in various processes executed by the main control circuit described later. do.

The clock pulse generation circuit 92 generates a clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU, and outputs the generated clock pulse signal to the microprocessor 91. The microprocessor 91 executes a control program based on the input clock pulse signal.

The power supply management circuit 93 manages fluctuations in the DC 12V power supply voltage supplied from the power supply board 53b (see FIG. 6). Then, the power supply management circuit 93 outputs a reset signal to the "XSRST" terminal of the microprocessor 91, for example, when the power is turned on (when the power supply voltage exceeds the starting voltage value (10V) from 0V). When a power failure occurs (when the power supply voltage falls below the power failure voltage value (10.5V) from 12V), the power failure detection signal is output to the "XINT" terminal of the microprocessor 91. That is, the power management circuit 93 is a means (starting means) for outputting a reset signal (starting signal) to the microprocessor 91 when the power is turned on, and a power failure detection signal (power failure signal) to the microprocessor 91 when a power failure occurs. Also serves as a means for outputting (power failure means).

The switching regulator 94 is a DC / DC conversion circuit, generates a DC drive voltage (power supply voltage of DC 5 V) of the microprocessor 91, and outputs the generated DC drive voltage to the “VCC” terminal of the microprocessor 91.

The combination monitor (not shown) is composed of, for example, a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and a calculation circuit 107 described later performs a predetermined ratio calculation on the total result related to the game information aggregated by the main CPU 101 described later. , The result of the ratio calculation is displayed as the ratio information. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of ratio calculations are performed, and the combination ratio monitor sequentially displays a plurality of types of ratio information based on the results.

In the upper two digits of the role ratio monitor, "abbreviation" which is the type information indicating the type of the ratio information is displayed, and in the lower two digits, the "ratio" which is the ratio information corresponding to the type information is displayed. It is supposed to be displayed. For example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "U" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "7U"). (When is displayed), the ART function that occupies the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) is activated (that is, a stop operation that is advantageous for the player) as ratio information in the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor. The ratio of the number of games (advantageous section ratio) (of the advantageous section in which the procedure of) was notified is displayed. Specifically, when the effective section ratio is 10%, "1" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "0" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed. The advantageous section ratio may display the ratio of the number of games in which the AT function and the ART function are activated.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Y" is displayed. (When "6Y" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor, as ratio information, the number of consecutive characters to be paid out in the number of game media paid out during a specific total number of games (6000 times). An actuating device (BB in the present embodiment. If a bonus continuous actuating device (MB) for continuously operating a second-class special accessory (CB) is mounted, the same applies hereinafter). The ratio of the number of game media to be paid out by operating (medium-time continuous combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time continuous combination ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "Y" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Y" is displayed. (When "7Y" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor, as ratio information, all the roles in the number of game media paid out during a specific total number of games (6000 times). (BB in the present embodiment. In addition to the above-mentioned MB, when the above-mentioned first-class special accessory (RB) is mounted alone, the above-mentioned second-class special accessory (CB) is alone. If it is installed, if a normal accessory (SB) is installed, all of them are included. The same shall apply hereinafter) and the ratio of the number of game media paid out (medium-time accessory ratio) ) Is displayed. Specifically, when the medium-time bonus ratio is 59%, "5" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "9" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "6" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "A" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Abbreviation" (When "6A" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the combination ratio monitor, as ratio information, the combination of the characters in the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) is continuous. The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the operating device (total consecutive combination ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total joint combination ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "5" is displayed in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

Further, for example, when "7" is displayed in the first digit (abbreviated 10th place) of the role ratio monitor and "A" is displayed in the second digit (abbreviated 1st place) (that is, the abbreviation "Abbreviation" (When "7A" is displayed), in the lower two digits of the role ratio monitor, as ratio information, all the combinations in the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times). The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the object (total accessory ratio) is displayed. Specifically, when the total accessory ratio is 25%, "2" is displayed in the third digit (ratio 10's place) and "5" in the fourth digit (ratio 1's place). Is displayed.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the main control circuit 90 directly includes the combination monitor is described as an example, but the display content of the combination monitor is controlled by the main control circuit 90. It is sufficient if the display content can be recognized when necessary (for example, when the main control board case 55 is visually recognized), and a configuration that the main control circuit 90 does not directly provide can be adopted. For example, the combination monitor may be connected to the game operation display board 81, and the main control circuit 90 may control the display contents via the game operation display board 81. Further, in this case, the role ratio monitor is also used as the information display 6, the LED 82, or the instruction monitor (instruction display), and one or more of them are used to display the predetermined ratio information. You may do so.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the predetermined ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitor, the advantageous section ratio, the medium-time continuous combination ratio, the medium-time bonus ratio, the total consecutive combination ratio, and the total bonus ratio are given as examples. As described above, ratio information other than these may be displayed. For example, the ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the ART function to the number of game media paid out during the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total advantageous section acquisition ratio). , The ratio of the number of game media paid out by operating the ART function to the number of game media paid out during a specific total number of games (6000 times) (medium time advantageous section acquisition ratio) , The ratio of the number of games in which the character continuous operation device is activated (the ratio of the middle-time continuous combination section) to the specific total number of games (6000 times), and the ratio of the specific total number of games (6000 times). The ratio of the number of games in which all the bonuses are activated (medium-time bonus section ratio), and the ratio of the number of games in which the continuous bonus activator is activated to the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) (total continuous combination section) The ratio), the ratio of the number of games in which all the bonuses are operated (total bonus section ratio), etc., among the predetermined total number of games (175,000 times) can also be displayed by performing the predetermined ratio calculation.

Further, in the present embodiment, as the parameter (denominator) of the predetermined ratio information displayed on the combination ratio monitor, the predetermined total number of games is set to "175,000 times" and the specific total number of games is set to "6000 times". However, the predetermined total number of games and the specific total number of games are not limited to this. For example, as the parameter (denominator) for calculating a part or all of the various ratios described above, the predetermined total number of games may be set to "17,500 times" and the specific total number of games may be set to "3000 times". .. However, various types of gaming machines are installed and operated in game stores, and the optimum number of games for ratio calculation may differ. Therefore, the number of games for calculating the various ratios described above is described above. It is not limited to the ones that have been made, but can be changed as appropriate. In this case, the number of games that can be the parameter (denominator) and the number of children (numerator) for calculating a part or all of the various ratios can be arbitrarily set on the game store side. good.

Further, in the present embodiment, the operation of the ART function is not included in all the accessories targeted in the medium-time bonus ratio and the total bonus ratio, but the operation of the ART function is a bonus. It is also possible to calculate the ratio of the medium-time bonus and the total bonus ratio by regarding the operation of. In addition, it goes without saying that even if the information is other than the above, as long as it is useful information, the two values can be aggregated and the ratio calculation can be performed, and the result of the ratio calculation can be displayed as the ratio information. No. Further, in the description of the role ratio monitor, the portion described as "the operation of the ART function" may include "the operation of the AT function" or may be excluded.

<Microprocessor>
Next, the internal configuration of the microprocessor 91 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing an internal configuration of the microprocessor 91.

The microprocessor 91 includes a main CPU 101 (arithmetic processing unit), a main ROM 102 (first storage unit), a main RAM 103 (second storage unit), an external bus interface 104, a clock circuit 105, a reset controller 106, and the like. It has an arithmetic circuit 107, a random number circuit 110, a parallel port 111, an interrupt controller 112, a timer circuit 113, a first serial communication circuit 114, and a second serial communication circuit 115. Each of these parts constituting the microprocessor 91 is connected to each other via a signal bus 116.

The main CPU 101 executes various control programs based on the clock pulse generated by the clock circuit 105 to perform control related to the overall game operation. Here, reel stop control will be described as an example of the control operation of the main CPU 101.

The main CPU 101 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motors of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 101 manages the rotation angle of each reel (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one revolution. This reel index is, for example, an optical sensor having a light emitting unit and a light receiving unit, and a detection piece provided at a predetermined position on each reel and interposed between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit by rotation of each main reel. It is detected by the provided reel position detection unit (not shown).

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3L (main reel) will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 103. Then, each time the output of a predetermined number of pulses required for the rotation of one symbol is counted by the pulse counter, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 103 is added one by one. The symbol counter is provided according to each reel. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detection unit (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, it is possible to manage how many symbols have been rotated since the reel index was detected. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel is detected with reference to the position where the reel index is detected.

The main ROM 102 stores various control programs executed by the main CPU 101, various data tables, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub-control circuit 200, and the like. The main RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program. The internal configuration (memory map) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 11 described later.

The external bus interface 104 is for electrically connecting the microprocessor 91 to an external signal bus (not shown) to which various components (for example, reels and the like) provided outside the microprocessor 91 are connected. It is an interface circuit. The clock circuit 105 is configured to include, for example, a frequency divider (not shown), and a clock pulse signal for CPU operation input from the clock pulse generation circuit 92 is transmitted by another component (for example, a timer circuit 113). Convert to a clock pulse signal of the frequency used. The clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 is also output to the reset controller 106.

The reset controller 106 resets the IAT (Illegal Address Trap) and the WDT (watchdog timer) based on the reset signal input from the power supply management circuit 93. The arithmetic circuit 107 includes a multiplication circuit and a division circuit. For example, when executing a "MUL" instruction on a program, the arithmetic circuit 107 executes a multiplication process based on the "MUL" instruction.

The random number circuit 110 generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535 or 0 to 255). Although not shown, the random number circuit 110 obtains a random number register 0 for obtaining a 2-byte hard-latch random number, a random number register 1 for obtaining a 2-byte soft-latch random number, and a 1-byte soft-latch random number. It is composed of random number registers 2 to 7. The main CPU 101 extracts one value from the random numbers in a predetermined range generated by the random number circuit 110, for example, as a random number value for internal lottery. The parallel port 111 is a port (memory map I / O) of signals input / output between the microprocessor 91 and various circuits (for example, power management circuit 93, etc.) provided outside the microprocessor 91. .. The parallel port 111 is also connected to the random number circuit 110 and the interrupt controller 112. The start switch 79 is also connected to any of the input ports of PI0 to PI4 of the parallel port 111, and latches from the parallel port 111 to the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 at the timing (on-edge) when the start switch 79 is turned on. A signal is output. Then, in the random number circuit 110, the random number register 0 is latched by the input of the latch signal, and a 2-byte hard latch random number is acquired.

The interrupt controller 112 interrupts processing by the main CPU 101 based on a power failure detection signal input from the power management circuit 93 via the parallel port 111 or a timeout signal input from the timer circuit 113 at a cycle of 1.1172 ms. Controls the execution timing of. When a power failure detection signal is input from the power management circuit 93, or when a timeout signal is input from the timer circuit 113, the interrupt controller 112 sends an interrupt request signal indicating an interrupt processing start command to the main CPU 101. Output to. The main CPU 101 has an input port check process, a reel control process, a communication data transmission process, a 7-segment LED drive process, and a timer based on an interrupt request signal input from the interrupt controller 112 in response to a timeout signal from the timer circuit 113. Various interrupt processing such as update processing (see FIG. 79 described later) is performed.

The timer circuit 113 (PTC) operates with a clock pulse signal generated by the clock circuit 105 (a clock pulse signal having a frequency obtained by dividing the clock pulse signal for operating the main CPU by a divider (not shown)) ( Count the elapsed time). Then, the timer circuit 113 outputs a timeout signal (trigger signal) to the interrupt controller 112 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec.

The first serial communication circuit 114 is a circuit that controls a serial transmission operation when data (various control commands (commands)) are transmitted from the main control board 71 to the sub control board 72. The second serial communication circuit 115 is a circuit that controls the serial transmission operation when data is transmitted from the main control board 71 to the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

<Sub-control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the configuration of the sub-control circuit 200 (sub-control means) mounted on the sub-control board 72 will be described. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub-control circuit 200 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub-control circuit 200 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 90, and performs processing such as determination and execution of the effect content based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The sub-control circuit 200 functions as an effect control unit that controls the effect operation, and basically includes a sub CPU 201, a sub RAM 202, a rendering processor 203, a drawing RAM 204, and a driver 205.

The sub CPU 201 is connected to the ROM cartridge board 86. The driver 205 is connected to the liquid crystal relay board 87. That is, the driver 205 is connected to the projector mechanism 211 and the sub-display device 18 via the liquid crystal relay board 87.

The sub CPU 201 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 90. The ROM cartridge board 86 is basically composed of a program storage area and a data storage area.

The control program executed by the sub CPU 201 is stored in the program storage area. For example, in the control program, the main board communication task for controlling the communication with the main control circuit 90 and the effect registration for extracting the random value for the effect and determining and registering the effect content (effect data). Contains various programs for executing tasks. Further, the control program includes a drawing control task that controls the display of an image by the display device 11 based on the determined effect content, a lamp control task that controls the output of light by a light source such as the LED group 85, and a sound by the speaker group 84. It also includes various programs for executing voice control tasks and the like that control the output of the LED.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data constituting each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to video creation. The data storage area also includes a storage area for storing sound data related to BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data related to a pattern of turning on and off light, and the like.

The sub RAM 202 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect content and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as a sub flag (internal winning combination) transmitted from the main control circuit 90.

The sub CPU 201, the rendering processor 203, the drawing RAM (including the frame buffer) 204, and the driver 205 create an image according to the animation data specified by the effect content, and display the created image on the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and /. Alternatively, it is displayed on the sub display device 18. The display device 11 (projector mechanism 211) and the sub-display device 18 are individually controlled by the sub-control board 72.

Further, the sub CPU 201 causes the speaker group 84 to output a sound such as BGM according to the sound data specified by the effect content. Further, the sub CPU 201 controls the lighting and extinguishing of the LED group 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect content.

<Various registers of the main CPU>
Next, various registers included in the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 10 is a schematic configuration diagram of various registers included in the main CPU 101.

As the main register, the main CPU 101 includes an accumulator A (hereinafter referred to as "A register"), a flag register F (flag register), a general-purpose register B (hereinafter referred to as "B register"), and a general-purpose register C (hereinafter referred to as "B register"). General-purpose register D (hereinafter referred to as "D register"), general-purpose register E (hereinafter referred to as "E register"), general-purpose register H (hereinafter referred to as "H register"), and general-purpose register L (hereinafter referred to as "H register"). , "L register"). Further, as sub-registers, the main CPU 101 includes an accumulator A', a flag register F', a general-purpose register B', a general-purpose register C', a general-purpose register D', a general-purpose register E', a general-purpose register H', and a general-purpose register L'. As a general-purpose register. Each register is composed of 1-byte registers.

Further, in the present embodiment, the B register and the C register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “BC register”), and the D register and the E register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as “DE register”). Further, in the present embodiment, the H register and the L register are used as a pair register (hereinafter, referred to as "HL register").

As shown in FIG. 10, predetermined flag information indicating the result of arithmetic processing and the like is set in each bit of the flag registers F and F'. For example, bit 6 (D6) is set with data (zero flag) indicating whether or not the calculation result is "0" in the calculation result determination process. Specifically, when the calculation result is "0", the data "1" is set in the bit 6, and when the calculation result is not "0", the data "0" is set in the bit 6. Then, in the calculation result determination process, the main CPU 101 makes a determination (YES / NO) with reference to the bit 6 data “0” / “1”.

Further, the main CPU 101 has an expansion register Q (hereinafter, referred to as “Q register”). The Q register is composed of a 1-byte register. In this embodiment, as described in various processing flows described later, various main CPU 101 dedicated instruction codes for specifying an address using this Q register are provided in the program, and the instruction code of this instruction code is provided. By using it, processing efficiency is improved and the capacity of the main ROM 102 is reduced. In various main CPU 101 dedicated instruction codes that specify an address using the Q register, the address data (address value) on the upper side of the address is stored in the Q register. Immediately after the reset of the main CPU 101, "F0H" is set in the Q register as an initial value. Further, in the "LDQ, n (8-bit data)" instruction using the Q register, the value of the Q register is changed by setting arbitrary 1-byte data in "n" and executing the instruction. Can be done.

Further, the main CPU 101 includes an interrupt page address register I and a memory refresh register R composed of 1-byte registers, and an index register IX and an index register IY composed of 2-byte registers. , The stack pointer SP and the program counter PC are provided as dedicated registers.

<Internal configuration of main ROM and main RAM (memory map)>
Next, the internal configurations (hereinafter referred to as “memory maps”) of the main ROM 102 and the main RAM 103 included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91) will be described with reference to FIGS. 11A to 11C. 11A is a diagram showing a memory map of the entire memory, FIG. 11B is a diagram showing a memory map of the main ROM 102, and FIG. 11C is a diagram showing a memory map of the main RAM 103.

In the memory map of the entire memory included in the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), as shown in FIG. 11A, from the head (0000H) side of the address, the memory area of the main ROM 102, the memory area of the main RAM 103, the built-in register area, and The XCS decoding areas are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order with an unused area in between.

In the memory map of the main ROM 102, as shown in FIG. 11B, the program area, the data area, the non-standard area, the trademark recording area, the program management area, and the security setting area are displayed from the head (0000H) side of the address of the main ROM 102. In order, they are arranged at predetermined addresses.

In the program area, control programs for various processes executed by the main CPU 101 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored. In the data area, various data used by the main CPU 101 (for example, a data table such as an internal lottery table, and various types for the sub-control circuit 200 in various control processes related to the playability of the game performed by the player). Data for transmitting control commands (commands), etc.) are stored. That is, the game ROM area (game storage area) composed of the program area and the data area is necessary for the control process (process related to the game property) related to the game playability of the game actually performed by the player at the game store. Various programs and various data are stored.

Further, in the non-standard area, control programs and data of various processes (processes that do not affect the playability) that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are stored. For example, programs and data used in the pachislot 1 certification test (test firing test), control programs and data used in checksum generation processing at the time of power failure and thumb check processing at power recovery, and fraud countermeasure programs. And the data required for it are stored in the non-standard area.

Further, in the program management area and the security setting area, various settings and management information related to the execution of the control program or the security function are stored. For example, setting and management information of the start address and end address (that is, data range) of the control program stored in the program area, setting and management information of the number of addresses of the RAM area that can be read, WDT reset setting and management information, Interrupt setting and management information, read permission / non-permission setting and management information of the control program stored in the program area, setting and management information related to activation and update method of the random number circuit 110, and security mode setting described later. And management information and the like are stored in the program management area and the security setting area. In the present embodiment, other settings and management information not related to the security function are stored in the program management area, and settings and management information related to the security function are stored in the security setting area. For example, these settings and management information may be stored as a single management area.

In the memory map of the main RAM 103, as shown in FIG. 11C, the game RAM area (predetermined storage area, game temporary storage area) and the non-standard RAM area (non-standard temporary) from the head (F000H) side of the address of the main RAM 103. Storage areas) are arranged at predetermined addresses in this order.

The game RAM area is provided with a work area and a stack area for temporarily storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing a control program related to the game playability performed by the player. .. Then, each of the various data is stored in the work area of a predetermined address in the game RAM area.

Further, the non-standard RAM area is provided with a non-standard work area that is a work area for various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player, and a non-standard stack. In the present embodiment, using this non-standard RAM area, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player, such as a checksum process, are executed.

As described above, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, various programs and various data (tables) used for various processes not directly related to the playability of the game performed by the player are used for the game in the main ROM 102. It is stored in a non-standard ROM area (non-standard storage area) located at an address different from the ROM area. In addition, various processes that are not directly related to the playability of the game performed by such a player are performed in the main RAM 103 using an out-of-specification RAM area located at an address different from the game RAM area. ..

In such a configuration of the main ROM 102, programs and data unnecessary for the game itself actually played by the player are arranged in the ROM area (non-standard ROM area) where the program or the like cannot be arranged according to the conventional rules. can do. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the gaming ROM area.

<Security mode>
Next, a security mode, which is a part of the security function of the main control circuit 90 (microprocessor 91), will be described with reference to FIG. Note that FIG. 12 is a diagram for explaining the security mode.

The security mode is, for example, an operating state in which the microprocessor 91 operates when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on and a reset signal is input from the power management circuit 93. During this security mode, the startup of the main CPU 101 is delayed for a period corresponding to the setting stored in the security setting area (that is, the main CPU 101 starts execution of the process at power-on (see FIG. 46 described later). Delay that). By starting the main CPU 101 through this security mode, the security of the microprocessor 91 is ensured, and the time required for the start control at the time of turning on the power is secured to stably start the main CPU 101.

In the present embodiment, for example, the reset controller 106 can delay the startup of the main CPU 101 by delaying the reset signal input when the power is turned on for a predetermined period, and the interrupt controller 112 can delay the startup of the main CPU 101. It is also possible to delay the startup of the main CPU 101 by delaying the interrupt permission of the reset interrupt process (see FIG. 46 described later) at the time of turning on the power for a predetermined period. It is also possible for each controller to work together to delay the startup of the main CPU 101. Further, for example, a delay circuit may be provided in the microprocessor 91 (or in the reset controller 106 or the interrupt controller 112), and the delay circuit may delay the startup of the main CPU 101. That is, the configuration (security unit) that executes the security function in the microprocessor 91 can be appropriately modified and applied according to the specifications.

As shown in FIG. 12, the delay period in the security mode can be set to a fixed extension time (fixed period) and a random extension time (variable period). In the present embodiment, for example, by selecting and setting one of the modes 1 to 8 in which different fixed extension times are associated with each other, one fixed extension from a plurality of fixed extension times is set. The time can be set, and by selecting and setting one of the modes 1 to 4 in which different random extension time ranges are associated with each other, a plurality of random extension time ranges can be set. It is possible to set a range of one random extension time from the inside.

For example, when "mode 4" is selected as the fixed extension time and "mode 4" is selected as the random extension time, and these settings are stored in the security setting area, the microprocessor 91 turns on the power of the pachislot 1. When the reset signal is input from the power management circuit 93, first, the start-up of the main CPU 101 is delayed for about 4 seconds (4000 ms) as the fixed extension time, and then the random extension time is in the range of 0 to 500 ms. One extension time is randomly selected to delay the startup of the main CPU 101 for the selected time.

The range of the fixed extension time and the random extension time can be set as appropriate, but in the present embodiment, the range of the random extension time is set from the viewpoint of shortening the time until the setting can be changed when the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned on. It is desirable to set "mode 1" in which the random extension time is always "0".

<Transition flow of game state>
Next, various gaming states managed by the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment and their transition flows will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. Note that FIG. 13 is a transition flow diagram of the basic gaming state of the pachislot machine 1, and FIG. 14 is a diagram in which the presence or absence of the notification (AT / ART) function is taken into consideration (that is, the gaming section is the normal section and the game section. It is a transition flow diagram of the game state (distinguished from the advantageous section).

[Basic game state transition flow]
In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a big bonus (hereinafter referred to as "BB") is provided as a type of bonus game. The BB is a continuous accessory actuating device for a regular bonus (hereinafter referred to as “RB”) called a first-class special accessory, and continuously operates the RB.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 manages the gaming state based on the presence or absence of winning / operating (winning) of the bonus combination. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 13, the main control circuit 90 wins / operates (wins) a bonus combination (internal winning combination of the names "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3", and "F_BB4" described later). ) Is present or absent, and three types of gaming states called "bonus non-winning state", "inter-flag state", and "bonus state" are managed.

The bonus non-winning state is a state in which the bonus is not winning and the bonus is not activated (winning), and the bonus state is a state in which the bonus is activated. Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the bonus combination is carried over as the internal winning combination over a plurality of games until the bonus is won. The inter-flag state is a state in which the bonus combination is carried over as an internal winning combination, that is, a state in which the bonus combination is won and the bonus is not activated.

Whether or not the bonus combination is won is managed based on the data stored in the hit request flag storage area (see FIG. 25 described later) and the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 26 described later) provided in the main RAM 103. Will be done. Further, whether or not the bonus is activated (winning) is managed based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) provided in the main RAM 103.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, in the gaming state in which the bonus is not activated (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state), the types of internal winning combinations related to the replay and the winning probabilities thereof are different from each other. Six types of states from the RT0 gaming state to the RT5 gaming state (hereinafter, referred to as "RT0 state" to "RT5 state", respectively) are provided. The RT1 state and the RT4 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is low, and the RT5 state is the gaming state in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is medium. It is a game state that becomes. Further, the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT3 state are gaming states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high. In the present embodiment, the RT state in the bonus non-winning state is any of the RT0 state to the RT4 state, and the RT state in the inter-flag state is the RT5 state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 is based on the type of the internal winning combination related to the replay and the winning probability thereof in the gaming state (bonus non-winning state and inter-flag state) in which the bonus is not activated. It also manages 6 types of states from RT0 state to RT5 state.

The RT0 state to the RT5 state are managed based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later) provided in the main RAM 103. Specifically, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, flags indicating six RT states of the RT0 state flag to the RT5 state flag are provided, and the RT state is managed by managing the on / off states of these flags by the main RAM 103. Is managed. Then, the main control circuit 90 specifies the RT state corresponding to the RT state flag that is in the ON state as the current RT state. The RT0 state flag may not be provided, and when all the RT state flags are off, the main control circuit 90 may specify that the current RT state is the RT0 state.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the bonus non-winning state (RT0 to RT4 state), the bonus combination (the internal winning combination of the names "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3", and "F_BB4" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination. When this is done (“bonus winning” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the bonus non-winning state to the inter-flag state (RT5 state). Further, when the bonus combination is won in the inter-flag state (“bonus is established” in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 shifts the game state from the inter-flag state to the bonus state.

Here, as the bonus state, a BB1 gaming state (BB1 state), a BB2 gaming state (BB2 state), a BB3 gaming state (BB3 state), and a BB4 gaming state (BB4 state) are provided. The main control circuit 90 turns on the BB1 state flag, the BB2 state flag, the BB3 state flag, and the BB4 state flag stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later), which will be described later, as in the RT state. / Manage bonus status according to off status. Further, as will be described later, since the RB game state (RB state) is always in the BB1 to BB4 states, the RB is also stored in the game state flag storage area (see FIG. 27 described later), which will be described later. It is managed according to the on / off status of the status flag.

In the bonus non-winning state, the name "F_BB1" described later is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the inter-flag state, when the corresponding symbol combination "C_red same color BB" is displayed on the effective line, the main control circuit 90 Shifts the game state from the inter-flag state to the BB1 state. In the BB1 state, it is always in the RB state, and when the specified number of medals "240" or more are paid out in the BB1 state, the BB1 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, when the name "F_BB2" described later is determined as the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination "C_blue same color BB" is displayed on the effective line in the inter-flag state, the main control is performed. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB2 state. In the BB2 state, it is always in the RB state, and when the specified number of medals "240" or more are paid out in the BB2 state, the BB2 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, when the name "F_BB3" described later is determined as the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination "C_red different color BB" is displayed on the effective line in the inter-flag state, the main control is performed. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB3 state. In the BB3 state, it is always in the RB state, and when more than the specified number of medals "165" are paid out in the BB3 state, the BB3 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

Further, in the bonus non-winning state, when the name "F_BB4" described later is determined as the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination "C_blue different color BB" is displayed on the effective line in the inter-flag state, the main control is performed. The circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the inter-flag state to the BB4 state. In the BB4 state, it is always in the RB state, and when the specified number of medals "165" or more are paid out in the BB4 state, the BB4 state ends ("bonus end" in FIG. 13), and the main control circuit 90 is in the gaming state. From the bonus state to the RT4 state.

In the RT4 state, when the combination of symbols described later "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT1 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT4 state to the RT1 state. Migrate to. Further, in the RT4 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the effective line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT4 state. Shift to RT3 state.

In the RT1 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT1 state to the RT3 state. Migrate to. Further, in the RT1 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT0 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line ("RT0 transition lip is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT1 state. It shifts to the RT0 state.

In the RT0 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT0 state to the RT3 state. Migrate to. Further, in the RT0 state, when the combination of symbols described later "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the effective line or the combination of symbols described later "S_RT1 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line (in FIG. 13, in FIG. 13). “RT1 transition RT1 transition lip is established”), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT0 state to the RT1 state. Further, in the RT0 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT2 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line ("RT2 transition lip is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT0 state. Shift to RT2 state. If the set value is changed, or if an initialization condition such as "RAM error" described later is satisfied (in FIG. 13, "setting change / initialization condition is satisfied"), the game state is set as the initial state. Is in the RT0 state.

In the RT2 state, when the combination of symbols described later "S_RT3 transition" is displayed on the valid line ("RT3 transition is established" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state from the RT2 state to the RT3 state. Migrate to. Further, in the RT2 state, when the combination of symbols described later "R_RT1 transition" is displayed on the effective line or the combination of symbols described later "S_RT1 transition lip" is displayed on the effective line (in FIG. 13). “RT1 transition RT1 transition lip is established”), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state from the RT2 state to the RT1 state.

In the RT3 state, when a game is played for a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, "8" game, that is, during eight games) ("8 game digestion" in FIG. 13), the main control circuit. 90 shifts the game state from the RT3 state to the RT0 state. The period during which the RT3 state continues can be set as appropriate. Further, the period during which the RT3 state continues may not be particularly specified. In this case, in the RT3 state, the internal winning combination in which the combination of symbols described later “S_RT0 transition lip” can be displayed on the effective line may be determined with a predetermined probability.

[Transition flow of game state considering whether or not the notification (AT / ART) function is activated]
In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 (main CPU 101) determines whether or not a function (AT / ART function) for notifying a stop operation advantageous to the player is activated. Therefore, in the present embodiment, not only the above-mentioned bonus non-winning state, inter-flag state, and bonus state, but also the activated / non-activated state of the AT / ART function is managed as a gaming state. In the present embodiment, the game section in which the AT function is operating is referred to as a "normal advantageous section", and the game section in which the ART function is operating is referred to as an "advantageous section". The section of the game in which none of them is operating is referred to as a "non-advantageous section" or a "normal section".

Further, in the present embodiment, when a bonus state is obtained in an advantageous section (including "normal advantageous section" and "advantageous section"), the bonus state is considered to be a series of advantageous game sections for the player, and the bonus state is advantageous. The number of games included in the section and forcibly ending the advantageous section (continuation is restricted) is counted as well as the period during which the above-mentioned status indicator continues to light (notification period during the advantageous section). (Regulatory monitoring period) (in this embodiment, "1500" games). However, as will be described later, when a bonus state is reached in the "non-advantageous section", the bonus state may shift to the "normal advantageous section" or the "advantageous section" after the end of the bonus state. The condition shall be included in the period described above. In addition, when the bonus state is reached in the non-advantageous section, the player does not shift to the "normal advantageous section" or the "advantageous section" after the end of the bonus state (when the "non-advantageous section" continues). Assuming that it is not a section of a series of advantageous games, the bonus state is not included in the advantageous section, and the bonus state is not included in the above-mentioned period. However, since the bonus state itself is an advantageous gaming state for the player, the bonus state is always an advantageous section regardless of whether or not it is a "normal advantageous section" or an "advantageous section" before and after that. It can also be included and included in the period described above.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14, the main control circuit 90 has a "normal state" as a gaming state in a non-advantageous section (normal section) and a "high accuracy 1 state" as a gaming state in a normal advantageous section. ~ "High accuracy 4 state" and "precursor state", "line battle ready state", "line battle state", "right acquisition lottery preparation state", "right acquisition lottery state", "right" as the game state of the advantageous section It manages the "acquisition state", "ending preparation state", "ending 1 state", and "ending 2 state".

(Game state of non-advantageous section (normal section))
The normal state, which is a gaming state in a non-advantageous section (normal section), is a gaming state (non-AT / non-ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player. When it is determined to shift to the normal advantageous section in the normal state (“normal advantageous section transition winning” in FIG. 14), the main control circuit 90 changes the gaming state to the normal advantageous section according to the determination trigger. Move to one of the gaming states. The details of the flow of the game in the normal state will be described later with reference to FIG. 33 described later.

In the present embodiment, when a specific combination other than the bonus combination (see FIG. 33 described later) is won in the bonus non-winning state in the normal state, any of the game states in the normal advantageous section (other than the high probability 4 state). It is usually advantageous to win an internal winning combination (other than "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including a bonus combination in which the same winning probability is set between each set value. If it is decided to shift to the high-probability 4 state of the section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state based on the bonus combination, the line battle state of the advantageous section is entered. When it is decided that it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, the high probability 4 state of the normal advantageous section is continued for a predetermined period (32 games).

In addition, in the bonus non-winning state in the normal state, when the internal winning combination ("F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including the bonus combination in which different winning probabilities are set between the set values is won, it is normal. It is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and after the end of the bonus state based on the bonus combination, the normal state of the non-advantageous section continues. Further, in the inter-flag state in the normal state, no matter which combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not determined to shift to the normal advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the normal state of the non-advantageous section is changed to the gaming state of any of the normal advantageous sections, the above-mentioned notification period during the advantageous section is started (that is, the lighting of the state indicator is started). At the same time, the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period is started (that is, the counting of the number of games of "1500", which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections, is started).

(Normally advantageous section game state)
Each gaming state in the normal advantageous section is a gaming state (AT) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player as compared with the normal state. In each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (including the case where it has already been decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal state), the normal advantageous section has ended. In the case (in FIG. 14, “normal advantage section end advantageous section transition winning”), the main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to any of the advantageous section gaming states according to the determination trigger. In addition, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, when it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section and the normal advantageous section ends (in FIG. 14, "normal advantageous section end advantageous section transition non-winning"". ), The main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to the normal state of the non-advantageous section. The details of the flow of the game in each game state of the normal advantageous section will be described later with reference to FIG. 34 described later.

In each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 has a small push order (“F_upper left bell 1”, “F_upper left bell 2”, “F_upper middle bell 1”, “F_upper middle bell 1” described later). Bell 2 ”,“ F_Upper Right / Left Bell 1 ”,“ F_Upper Right / Left Bell 2 ”,“ F_Upper Right Middle Bell 1 ”,“ F_Upper Right Middle Bell 2 ”,“ F_Middle Left Bell 1 ”,“ F_Middle Left "Bell 2", "F_Middle Right Middle Bell 1", "F_Middle Middle Bell 2", "F_Middle Right Left Bell 1", "F_Middle Right Left Bell 2", "F_Middle Right Middle Bell 1", "F_Middle Right Middle Bell 1" Bell 2 ”,“ F_Lower middle bell 1 ”,“ F_Lower middle bell 2 ”,“ F_Lower right / left bell 1 ”,“ F_Lower right / left bell 2 ”,“ F_Lower right middle bell 1 ”,“ F_Lower right middle bell 1 ” When any of the internal winning combinations of "Bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player, and it is decided to notify the information. , Information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player (that is, information on the stop operation in which the player can obtain the most medals) is notified (see FIG. 45 described later).

Further, in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 replays in the push order (“F_RT0 medium replay 1” to “F_RT0 medium replay 6”, “F_RT1 medium replay 1” to “F_RT1 medium replay 6” described later. , "Internal winning combination of" F_RT2 medium replay 1 "to" F_RT2 medium replay 3 ") is determined as an internal winning combination, and whether or not to notify the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is determined. Is not performed, and information on the stop operation advantageous to the player (that is, information on the stop operation capable of shifting to the RT state advantageous to the player or maintaining the advantageous RT state) is not notified (described later). (See FIG. 45). In this sense, the RT function does not operate (except when the push order is accidentally answered correctly), and only the AT function operates (AT game state).

Here, in the present embodiment, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, when the RT3 state or the RT5 state (that is, the state between eight games or between the flags after the RT3 transition to be described later is displayed). ), The push order notification of the push order small winning combination is usually performed until the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed only once. Therefore, even in the game state of the same normal advantageous section, if the RT state is different, the number of times the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed also changes, so that the profit of the player based on the push order also changes. There is.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state is reached in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section (more specifically, when the bonus combination is won during the normal advantageous section), the bonus state is set in the normal state. As in the case (more specifically, when winning a bonus combination during a non-advantageous section), in the bonus state, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player (that is, the player can obtain the most medals). Information on possible stop operations) is not notified (see FIG. 45 described later). Specifically, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when any of the push order small winning combinations in the bonus state (internal winning combinations of "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC1_6" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination. Does not determine whether or not to notify.

In the present embodiment, in the bonus non-winning state of each game state in the normal advantageous section, when a specific combination other than the bonus combination (see FIG. 34 described later) is won, the game is played even between the game states in the normal advantageous section. The state shift is performed, and the period (number of games) in which the normally advantageous section continues also fluctuates. In addition, when winning a bonus combination, if it has not already been decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is advantageous. If it is decided to shift to the line battle state of the section and it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, the high accuracy 4 state of the normal advantageous section will continue.

Here, in each game state of the normal advantageous section, the bonus combination is other than the internal winning combination ("F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including the bonus combination in which the same winning probability is set between each set value. ), But also the internal winning combination ("F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2") including the bonus combination in which different winning probabilities are set between each set value. Even if the winning is based on the above, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. That is, in the normal advantageous section, when the bonus combination is won, regardless of whether or not the internal winning combination including the bonus combination having a setting difference in the winning probability is determined as a common process in the normal advantageous section, Whether or not to shift to an advantageous section is decided. In this sense as well, each gaming state in the normally advantageous section is a gaming state that is more advantageous than the gaming state in the non-advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section is in the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period (that is, the state indicator is lit) and also in the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period (that is, in the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period). The number of games is being counted as "1500", which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections). However, when the normal advantageous section ends without shifting to the advantageous section, the above-mentioned notification period during the advantageous section ends (that is, the status indicator is turned off and then turned off), and the above-mentioned The regulated monitoring period is terminated (that is, the counting of the number of games of "1500", which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections, is terminated, and the counting result is initialized (cleared)).

(Game state of advantageous section)
Each game state in the advantageous section is a game state (ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, and is a game advantageous to the player as compared with each game state in the normal state and the normal advantageous section. It is in a state. In each gaming state of the advantageous section, the main control circuit 90 basically performs a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when either the push order small combination or the push order replay described above is determined as the internal winning combination. Information (that is, information on a stop operation in which the player can obtain the most medals, shift to the RT state advantageous to the player, or maintain the advantageous RT state) is notified (described later). (See FIG. 45). In this sense, the ART function is activated (ART gaming state). In each gaming state of the advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends without extension (continuation) (including the case where the advantageous section described later is forcibly ended) (“End of advantageous section” in FIG. 14). , The main control circuit 90 shifts the gaming state to the normal state of the non-advantageous section.

Here, in each gaming state of the advantageous section, as a result of the push order notification of the push order small winning combination and the push order replay described above, the RT2 state corresponds (maintains) as the basic RT state. ing. In addition, except for the RT4 state after the end of the bonus state, the RT3 state based on the display of the RT3 transition described later, and the RT0 state after the end of the RT3 state, each game state in the normal advantageous section is changed to each game state in the advantageous section. In the case of transition, in most cases, the RT state in each gaming state of the normal advantageous section corresponds to the RT1 state. Therefore, the line battle preparation state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state, and the ending preparation state, which are the game states of the advantageous section, may shift to the line battle state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the ending 1 state or the ending 2 state, respectively. When it is determined and the RT state is not the RT2 state, it is positioned as a preparatory state for raising the RT state to the RT2 state.

The main control circuit 90 basically changes the game state to the line battle state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the right acquisition lottery state when the RT state shifts to the RT2 state in the line battle preparation state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state, and the ending preparation state, respectively. And shift to the ending 1 state or the ending 2 state. The details of the flow of the game in each game state of the advantageous section will be described later with reference to FIGS. 35 to 44 described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, when a bonus state is reached in each gaming state of the advantageous section (more specifically, when a bonus combination is won during the advantageous section), the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section are defined. Unlike this, in the bonus state, information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player (that is, information on the stop operation that allows the player to obtain the most medals) is notified (see FIG. 45 described later). Specifically, information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player when any of the push order small winning combinations in the bonus state (internal winning combinations of "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC1_6" described later) is determined as the internal winning combination. Is always notified. Therefore, when the bonus state is set in the advantageous section, the profit given to the player is larger than when the bonus state is set in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. In this sense as well, each gaming state in the advantageous section is a more advantageous gaming state than each gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section.

Further, in the present embodiment, each gaming state of the advantageous section is in the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period (that is, the status indicator is lit) and also in the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period (that is, a series). The number of games is being counted as "1500", which is the upper limit for the advantageous game section to continue. If the number of games played during the advantageous section (including during the bonus state) does not reach the upper limit of "1500" times and the advantageous section ends, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period ends (that is,). Along with the end of the status indicator lighting and extinguishing, the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period ends (that is, the count of the number of games of "1500" which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections is counted. It is finished and the counting result is initialized (cleared)). In addition, when the number of games played in the advantageous section (including in the bonus state) reaches the upper limit of "1500" times, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (in the case of the bonus state, only the bonus state is available). In this case as well, the above-mentioned advantageous section notification period ends (that is, the status indicator is turned off and then turned off), and the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period is ended (that is, , The counting of the number of games of "1500" times, which is the upper limit for the continuation of a series of advantageous game sections, is completed, and the counting result is initialized (cleared)).

In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated based on the number of games played in the advantageous section (including in the bonus state) reaches the upper limit of "1500" times, for example, the advantageous section Even if it is decided to continue each of the gaming states in (given the right to continue), or even if the remaining number of games of each gaming state in the advantageous section remains, they are After all are initialized (cleared), it shifts to the normal state of the non-advantageous section. In addition, if the advantageous section is forcibly terminated while the advantageous section is in the bonus state, the push order notification of the above-mentioned push order small winning combination in the bonus state is also immediately terminated. .. However, in this case, as an exception, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination described above may be performed until the bonus state ends. Further, the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period is not limited to "1500", and the value can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, basically, the number of games (the number of games) is the period during which each gaming state corresponding to the above-mentioned normal advantageous section and the advantageous section continues, or the period during which each gaming state is extended (continuing period). ), But the method of managing the period of each game state is not limited to this. For example, among the above-mentioned normal advantageous sections and each gaming state corresponding to the advantageous section, the period of one or more gaming states, the number of medals paid out during that period, and the number of medals inserted from the period can be determined. It may be managed by the reduced difference number (net increase number), or it is managed by the number of notifications (the number of notifications) that affect the payout of medals (that is, the notification when the above-mentioned push order small winning combination is won). You may.

<Structure of data table stored in main ROM>
Next, the configurations of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102 will be described with reference to FIGS. 15 to 22. The various data tables used in the various lottery performed in each game state related to the game property described with reference to FIG. 14 will be described later together with the description of each game property.

[Design arrangement table]
First, the symbol arrangement table will be described with reference to FIG. The symbol arrangement table is data that specifies the position of each symbol in each rotation direction of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, and the type of the symbol arranged at each position (hereinafter, symbol code (in FIG. 15). (Refer to the symbol code table of)) and stipulate the correspondence with.

In the symbol arrangement table, when the reel index is detected, the position of the symbol located in the middle region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4 is defined as "0". Then, in each reel, in the order of proceeding in the reel rotation direction (direction from the symbol position "19" in FIG. 15 toward the symbol position "0") with reference to the symbol position "0", " "0" to "19" are assigned to each symbol as the symbol position.

That is, by referring to the value of the symbol counter ("0" to "19") and the symbol arrangement table, it is displayed in the upper region, the middle region, and the lower region of each reel in the frame of the reel display window 4. It is possible to specify the type of symbol. In this embodiment, the symbols are "red 7", "blue 7", "BAR", "cherry 1", "cherry 2", "bell", "watermelon", "replay", and "blank". Nine kinds of symbols are used.

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in the symbol code table, "00000001" is assigned as data to the symbol "red 7" (symbol code 1), and the symbol "blue 7" (symbol code 2) is assigned. "00000010" is assigned as the data. The symbol "BAR" (symbol code 3) is assigned "00000011" as data, the symbol "cherry 1" (symbol code 4) is assigned "00000100" as data, and the symbol "cherry 2" (symbol 2) is assigned. "000000101" is assigned to the code 5) as data.

"00000011" is assigned as data to the symbol "bell" (symbol code 6). The symbol "watermelon" (symbol code 7) is assigned "00000011" as data, the symbol "replay" (symbol code 8) is assigned "00001000" as data, and the symbol "blank" (symbol code 9) is assigned. ) Is assigned "000001001" as data.

[Internal lottery table]
Next, the internal lottery table referred to when determining the internal winning combination will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18. 16 and 17 are internal lottery tables referred to in each of the RT0 state to the RT5 state. Further, FIG. 18 is an internal lottery table referred to in the bonus state.

The internal lottery table is provided for each game state (see FIG. 13), and defines the correspondence between various internal winning combinations and the lottery value when each internal winning combination is determined. The lottery value is defined for each set value (settings 1 to 6) for adjusting the expected value of the internal winning such as a preset bonus combination or small combination. This setting is changed using, for example, a reset switch 76 and a setting key type switch 54 (see FIG. 7).

In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, first, the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 sets a random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical range (for example, 0 to 65535) corresponding to each internal winning combination. Add in sequence at the specified lottery value. Next, it is determined whether or not the lottery result (lottery value + random number value) exceeds 65535 (whether or not the lottery result overflows). Then, when the lottery result exceeds 65535 in the predetermined internal winning combination, it is determined that the internal winning combination has won. In the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, an example in which the lottery value is added to the extracted random number value to perform the lottery has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the lottery value is subtracted from the random number value. It may be determined whether or not the subtraction result (lottery result) is less than "0" (whether or not the lottery result is underflowed), and the winning / non-winning of the internal lottery may be determined.

Therefore, in the internal lottery process of the present embodiment, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the internal lottery combination will be determined. The winning probability of each internal winning combination can be expressed by "the lottery value specified in each winning number / the number of all random number values that may be extracted (random number denominator: 65536)".

In the internal lottery table referred to in each of the RT0 state to the RT5 state, as shown in FIG. 16, basically, the type and winning probability of the replay combination determined as the internal winning combination according to the type of the RT state. Changes. For example, the replay combination related to the names "F_RT0 medium replay 1 (No. 40)" to "F_RT0 medium replay 6 (No. 45)" is not determined as an internal winning combination except in the RT0 state, and is internally in the RT0 state. Determined as the winning role.

In FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 38" is an internal winning combination in which the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination are overlapped. For example, in "F_BB1 + F_confirmed lip (No. 1)", the bonus combination "F_BB1" and the replay combination "F_confirmed lip" are duplicated and won, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination "F_BB1" is "BB01". (See FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) and the combination of symbols "REP01" to "REP09" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) corresponding to the replay combination "F_fixed lip" are allowed to be derived (winning). Is allowed) It is an internal bonus.

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 39" to "No. 60" is an internal winning combination that the replay combination wins. For example, in "F_maintenance lip (No. 40)", the replay combination "F_maintenance lip" is won, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay combination "F_maintenance lip" is "REP02" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later). ) Is allowed to be derived (winning is allowed).

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 98" is an internal winning combination that the small combination wins. For example, in "F_chance eye A1 (No. 61)", the small role "F_chance eye A1" wins, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the small role "F_chance eye A1" is "NML14", "NML22", " It is an internal winning combination that allows the derivation of "NML26" and "NML30" (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) (winning is permitted).

Although not shown, when "F_chance eye A1 (No. 61)" to "F_chance eye B4 (No. 68)" are determined as internal winning combinations, "NZR01" (described later) will be described later. The derivation of FIGS. 19 to 22) is also permitted (stop display is permitted). Here, "HZR01" is not a combination of symbols related to winning, but a part of a combination of symbols that are out of order, but as a combination of symbols that shifts the gaming state from another RT state to the RT3 state (RT3 transition). It is a specified combination of symbols, and basically, derivation is not allowed except when any one of the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68" is determined. Therefore, it can be said that "NZR01" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68".

Similarly, when "F_upper left bell 1 (No. 77)" to "F_lower right middle bell 2 (No. 98)" are determined as internal winning combinations, "NZR02" (described later) will be described later. Derivation of 19 to 22) is also permitted (stop display is permitted). Here, "HZR02" is not a combination of symbols related to winning, but a part of a combination of symbols that are out of order, but as a combination of symbols that shifts the gaming state from another RT state to the RT1 state (RT1 transition). It is a specified combination of symbols, and basically, derivation is not allowed except when any one of the internal winning combinations indicated by "No. 77" to "No. 98" is determined. Therefore, it can be said that "NZR02" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 77" to "No. 98".

In the present embodiment, the bonus combination is not further determined in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), that is, in the state in which the bonus combination has already been determined (carried over) as the internal winning combination. Therefore, in the internal lottery table shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, "0" is set for the lottery value of the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 38" in the inter-flag state (RT5 state). ing. However, "No. 2" to "No. 10" and "No. 12" so that the winning probability of the small winning combination does not change between the flag-to-flag state (RT5 state) and the bonus non-winning state (RT0 to RT4 state). The lottery values related to the small winning combination assigned in the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 38" are "No. 61" to "No. 68" and "No. 68" in the inter-flag state (RT5 state). It is added to the lottery value of the internal winning combination indicated by "72" and "No. 73". That is, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 61" to "No. 68", "No. 72" and "No. 73" does not have a high winning probability in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), but is a bonus. The probability is the same between the gaming states other than the states.

Further, in FIGS. 16 and 17, "No. 0" indicates "off" in which derivation of any of the specified combinations of symbols (see FIGS. 19 to 22 described later) is not permitted. The higher the "out of place" assignment (lottery value), the more disadvantageous the player is. In the RT0 state and the RT2 state, "off" is not determined. Further, in the RT5 state, the probability that "off" is determined is described as "22289/65536", but in reality, one of the bonus combinations has already been determined as the internal winning combination (carried over). In that sense, there is no case where "off" is determined.

In addition, in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, the internal lottery table when the set value is "1" (setting 1) is described as an example, but "No. 21", "No. 30", and "No." For the internal winning combination other than the internal winning combination shown in ".39" and "No. 74", a common lottery value is set among the set values. That is, they have the same winning probability. On the other hand, for the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21", "No. 30", "No. 39" and "No. 74", between each set value (or a predetermined set value and a specific set value). Between), different lottery values are set. That is, the winning probabilities are different (see (* 1), (* 2) and (* 3) in FIGS. 16 and 17).

Specifically, for example, in the internal winning combinations shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30", when the set value is "1", the lottery value of "22" is set respectively, whereas the lottery value is set. When the set value is "6", a lottery value of "77" is set respectively (that is, as the set value becomes higher, the lottery is performed in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30". The value is increasing by "11"). Although not shown, in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), as the lottery value set for the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21" and "No. 30" increases, "No. 21" and "No. 30" are shown. The lottery value set for the internal winning combination shown in "No. 72" also increases.

Further, for example, in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 74", the set values are "2", "4" and "6" as compared with the case where the set values are "1", "3" and "5". In the case, the lottery value is set to be relatively high, and the lottery value is set to increase as the set value becomes higher.

Further, for example, in the internal winning combination shown in "No. 39", the set values are "2", "4" and "6" as compared with the case where the set values are "1", "3" and "5". In the case, the lottery value is set to be relatively low, and the lottery value is set to decrease as the set value increases. This is to adjust the increase in the lottery value of the internal winning combination shown in "No. 21", "No. 30" and "No. 74". Therefore, for example, in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, the probability that "off" is determined does not change and "0" is maintained. It should be noted that these are examples in which the winning probabilities of specific internal winning combinations differ between the set values.

In FIG. 18, the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 1" to "No. 7" is an internal winning combination in which a small winning combination is won, and when the winning combination is won, the corresponding symbol shown in FIG. 18 is used. Derivation of combinations is allowed (winning is allowed). In the present embodiment, the replay combination is not determined as the internal winning combination in the RB state (that is, the BB1 to BB4 states), but one of the replay combinations shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 Alternatively, a plurality of replay combinations may be determined as internal winning combinations.

[Design combination table]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, a symbol combination table that defines a combination of symbols related to winning or the like in the present embodiment will be described. In this embodiment, a symbol combination table is provided as an example of data for defining a combination of a plurality of symbols in advance, but the combination of symbols displayed on the main control circuit 90 side is identified. If possible, the data can be specified by other methods. For example, a combination of symbol codes may be defined so that the combination of symbols displayed by the combination can be identified.

As shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the symbol combination table prescribes combinations of a plurality of symbols, and data indicating the types of combinations of these symbols is defined as a display combination (winning operation flag). There is. Further, the symbol combination table is composed of 9 bytes of data so as to correspond to the hit request flag storage area, the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25 described later), and the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30 described later). At the same time, data indicating a different display combination (winning operation flag) is specified for each bit of each storage area.

In addition, in FIGS. 19 to 22, there is a place where "/" is added in the specified combination of symbols, but this constitutes the combination of the symbols in any of the indicated symbols. Show that. For example, the combination of "HZR01" is a combination of symbols in which the symbol on the left reel is "cherry 1", the symbol on the middle reel is "cherry 1", and the symbol on the right reel is "cherry 1" (that is, "cherry 1-"). Cherry 1-Cherry 1 ”) and a combination of symbols whose left reel symbol is“ Cherry 2 ”, middle reel symbol is“ Cherry 1 ”, and right reel symbol is“ Cherry 1 ”(ie,“ Cherry 2- It shows that "Cherry 1-Cherry 1") and is a combination of corresponding symbols.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "HZR01" is a combination of symbols that are out of order, but when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the RT state is changed from another RT state to the RT3 state. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination (“RT3 transition”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "HZR02" is a combination of symbols that are out of order, but when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the RT state is changed from another RT state to the RT1 state. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination (“RT1 transition”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "BB01", "BB02", "BB03" and "BB04" are combinations of symbols related to the bonus combination, and when each combination of symbols is displayed on the display valid line. , Activate the corresponding bonus state.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP01" to "REP06" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is performed. Activate. The combination of the symbols of "REP01" can be referred to as "parallel lip" or "straight line lip", and the combination of symbols of "REP02" can be referred to as "normal lip", and the symbol of "REP03". The combination of symbols can be referred to as "hit lip", the combination of symbols of "REP04" can be referred to as "special lip", and the combination of symbols of "REP05" can be referred to as "fake lip". , The combination of the symbols of "REP06" can be referred to as "BAR matching lip".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP07" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is activated and the RT state is changed to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols for shifting from a state (for example, RT1 state) to an RT0 state (“RT0 transition lip”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP08" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is activated and the RT state is changed to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols for shifting from a state (for example, RT0 state and RT2 state) to an RT1 state (“RT1 transition lip”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "REP09" is a combination of symbols related to the replay combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, the replay is activated and the RT state is changed to another RT. It is a combination of symbols defined as a combination of symbols for shifting from a state (for example, RT0 state) to an RT2 state (“RT2 transition lip”).

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML01" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, eight medals are paid out. The combination of the "NML01" symbols can be referred to as the "bell" symbol combination.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML02" to "NML13" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, one sheet is displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML02" to "NML13" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "batting order combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML14" to "NML30" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, one sheet is displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML14" to "NML30" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of the "chance combination".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML31" to "NML33" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, five cards are displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML31" to "NML33" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "special role".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML34" is a combination of symbols related to a small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, eight medals are paid out. The combination of the "NML34" symbols can be referred to as the "cross-down bell" symbol combination.

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML35" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when the combination of the symbols is displayed on the valid line, five medals are paid out. The combination of the symbols of "NML35" can be referred to as the combination of the symbols of "watermelon".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML36" and "NML37" are a combination of symbols related to a small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, eight pieces are displayed. The medal will be paid out. The combination of the symbols of "NML36" and "NML37" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "JACA".

The display combination (winning operation flag) "NML38" to "NML40" is a combination of symbols related to the small combination, and when any combination of these symbols is displayed on the valid line, two sheets are displayed. The medal will be paid out. In addition, the combination of the symbols of "NML38" to "NML40" can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "JACB".

In this embodiment, an example is described in which data indicating one display combination (winning operation flag) includes data to which a combination of a plurality of symbols is assigned, but one display combination (winning). It is also possible to configure the data so that only one symbol combination is assigned to the data indicating the operation flag).

[Correspondence between internal winning combination, stop operation order (batting order), display combination, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the stop operation order (batting order), the display combination, and the like will be described.

In the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment, a combination in which the symbol combinations displayed are different according to the player's stop operation order (pushing order), that is, a so-called "pushing order combination" (for example, the above-mentioned "pushing order small combination" or "pushing order") "Sequential replay") is provided. Since the stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided, there are a maximum of six stop operation orders (push order).

In FIGS. 23 and 24, the stop operation order (push order) is indicated as "left, middle, right" as "batting order 1", and the stop operation order (push order) is "left, right, middle". "Batting order 2" indicates that the order is "Batting order 2", and the stop operation order (pushing order) is indicated as "middle, left, right" as "Batting order 3", and the stop operation order (pushing order) is The order of "middle, right, left" is indicated as "batting order 4", and the stop operation order (pushing order) is indicated as "right, left, middle" as "batting order 5", and the stop operation is performed. The order (pushing order) is "right, middle, left", which is indicated as "batting order 6".

As shown in FIGS. 23 and 24, "F_fixed lip" is won regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation when it is determined as the internal winning combination instead of the pushing order combination. "Special lip" is established. In addition, depending on the timing of the stop operation, any of the other winning replay combinations may be established.

Here, "regardless of the timing of the stop operation" means that the effective lines are the "center line", the "top line", and the "bottom line", and the maximum number of sliding pieces is "4". It means that the corresponding symbols are arranged so that they can be stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, they are arranged within the range of 5 symbols). Is what you do. For example, in the left reel 3L, the symbol of "cherry 1" is stopped and displayed at a position where the symbol is not stopped and displayed within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (for example, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol positions "10" to "12" are in the middle stage. (When it is done), but if the stop operation is performed at that point, the symbol of "Cherry 2" is placed at the symbol position "13" so that the symbol of "Cherry 2" can be stopped and displayed. ing. Therefore, when the internal winning combination is determined, for example, the symbols "cherry 1" and "cherry 2" are allowed to be stopped and displayed as the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols corresponding to the internal winning combination. As a result, even if the corresponding symbol can be stopped and displayed on one of the effective lines within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces as a whole, the combination of the symbols is "regardless of the timing of the stop operation". It can be said that it holds. Hereinafter, the same applies to other display combinations (winning operation flags) and the like. However, in the push order combination, since the combination of symbols that are preferentially stopped and controlled based on the stop operation order changes, even if the symbols are arranged as described above, the type of stop operation order Depending on the case, the symbol may not be stopped and displayed on the valid line.

When "F_maintenance lip" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, one of the winning "normal rips" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. do.

"F_RT0 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 2", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 2", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 4" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 4", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 4", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT0 middle replay 6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT0 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 6", "RT2 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT2 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT1 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip). When the stop operation order is "batting order 5" and "batting order 6", the stop control is performed so that the "fake lip" is stopped preferentially over the other "maintenance lip". That is, if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, the "fake lip" is established, and if the timing of the stop operation is not the appropriate timing, another "maintenance lip" is established. This also applies to "F_RT1 medium replay 2" and "F_RT1 medium replay 3".

"F_RT1 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 2", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 2", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 4" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 4", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 4", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

"F_RT1 middle replay 6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT1 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 6", "RT0 transition" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. "Rip" is established, and the RT state shifts to the RT0 state. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6", any of the replay combinations other than the winning "RT0 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state becomes the RT0 state. The RT1 state is maintained without transition (maintenance lip).

In the present embodiment, when the "RT0 transition lip" is established, the "RT1 transition lip" may be established at the same time. In this case, the main control circuit 90 determines that the "RT0 transition lip" is established as "RT1". Judgment is prioritized over the establishment of "Transition Lip". That is, when the "RT0 transition lip" and the "RT1 transition lip" are established at the same time, it is determined that the "RT0 transition lip" is established and the RT state is shifted to the RT0 state, and the "RT1 transition lip" is established. I do not judge.

"F_RT2 middle replay 1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2", regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Instead, a replay combination other than the winning "RT1 transition lip" (for example, "normal lip") is established, the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT2 middle replay 2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4", regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Instead, a replay combination other than the winning "RT1 transition lip" (for example, "normal lip") is established, the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_RT2 middle replay 3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RT2 state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" and "batting order 6", regardless of the timing of the stop operation. Instead, a replay combination other than the winning "RT1 transition lip" (for example, "normal lip") is established, the RT state does not shift to the RT1 state, and the RT2 state is maintained (maintenance lip). On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and "batting order 6", the "RT1 transition lip" is established regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state.

When "F_upper lip" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, "parallel lip" is established at the top line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel (it becomes the "upper rip").

When "F_middle lip 1" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, a "parallel lip" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is,). The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel).

"F_Middle-stage lip 2" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" to "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, "F_middle batting order 4" is "regardless of the timing of the stop operation. If "middle rip" is established, the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and the stop operation timing is appropriate, "fake rip" is established and the stop operation timing is appropriate. Otherwise, the "middle rip" is established. In addition, since the game state is not changed regardless of which replay combination is established, "F_middle stage lip 2" is a push order combination, but the player's profit does not change depending on the stop operation order. It is a role.

"F_Middle-stage lip 3" is a push order combination, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, "F_middle stage lip 3" is "Battling order 1" and "Batting order 2" regardless of the timing of the stop operation. If the "middle rip" is established, the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2", and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, the "BAR alignment rip" is established and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If the timing is not right, the "middle rip" is established. In addition, since the game state is not changed regardless of which replay combination is established, "F_middle stage lip 3" is a push order combination, but the player's profit does not change depending on the stop operation order. It is a role.

When "F_lower lip" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, "parallel lip" is established at the bottom line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel).

When "F_hit lip" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, the "hit lip" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "Replay" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle row of the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C, but it is established so that it is not displayed in the middle row on the right reel 3R).

"F_JAC1_1" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 1", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

Since "bell" and "JACA" are a combination of symbols in which eight medals are paid out, if they are established at the same time as described above, "8 + 8 = 16" medals are originally paid out. However, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of medals that can be paid out in one game is set as "15", and even if more than 15 medals are won, 15 medals are paid. I try to put it out. This also applies to "F_JAC1_2" to "F_JAC1_6".

"F_JAC1_2" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 2", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 2", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_3" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 3", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_4" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 4", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 4", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_5" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 5", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

"F_JAC1_6" is a push order combination, and when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, if the stop operation order is "batting order 6", the "bell" and the winning combination are not related to the timing of the stop operation. One of the above "JACA" is established, and 15 medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6", all the winning "JACB" are established regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, "S_JACB1", "C_JACB2" and "S_JACB3" respectively. Is displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 6 medals are paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the RB state, when the push order is correct (when the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player), the "bell" and the "JACA" are duplicated and won a prize. By doing so, 15 medals are paid out, but the number of medals to be paid out is not limited to this. If any of the existing "JACA" is established, 15 medals may be paid out.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the RB state, when the push order is not correct (when the stop operation is not performed in the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player), a plurality of "JACBs" are duplicated. By winning a prize, 6 medals (2 x 3 lines) are paid out, but it is not limited to this, for example, the number of "JACB" medals to be paid out is set as "6", and the pushing order is set. If the answer is not correct, six medals may be paid out if any of the winning "JACB" is established.

"F_JAC2" is not a push order combination, but when it is determined as an internal winning combination in the RB state, it is either a "bell" or a winning "JACA" regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. Is established and 15 medals are paid out. Similarly, for example, the number of medals to be paid out for "JACA" is set to "15", and if any of the winning "JACA" is established, 15 medals will be paid out. It may be.

When "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" are determined as internal winning combinations instead of pushing order, the timing of the stop operation is If the timing is appropriate, the "chance role" will be missed and the "RT3 transition" will be displayed on the valid line. In this case, there is no medal payout, but there is a possibility that the RT state will shift to the RT3 state, so it is advantageous for the player to perform a stop operation that misses the "chance role" and displays the "RT3 transition". Is likely to be. Here, in that sense, it is explained that it is the timing of the "appropriate" stop operation that the "chance role" is missed. On the other hand, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one of the winning "chance roles" will be established and one medal will be paid out, but the RT state will not shift to the RT3 state. ..

Here, when any one of "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" is determined as the internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. Whether or not the timing is correct is determined based on, for example, the timing of the stop operation at the time of the third stop operation. Specifically, 3/4 of the timings of all the stop operations at the time of the third stop operation are set as appropriate timings, and when the stop operation is performed at the timings, the "RT3 transition" is set. When it is established and the stop operation is performed at the remaining 1/4 timing, the "chance combination" is established because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. As a general rule, the timing of such a stop operation is such that at least a part is different between "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4". Includes what is. Therefore, the appropriate timing can be changed depending on which internal winning combination is won, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game related to the stop operation.

In the present embodiment, when "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" are determined as internal winning combinations, it depends on the timing of the stop operation. Therefore, it is assumed that the "RT3 transition" or "chance role" is established, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, the "RT3 transition" is established, and when the stop operation is not performed in the correct push order, the "chance combination" is established. May be good. Further, the "RT3 transition" may be established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. In this case, the "RT3 transition" may be defined as a combination of symbols for which medals are paid out (for example, one medal is paid out).

"F_weak rare combination A" and "F_weak rare combination B" are won regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation when the internal winning combination is determined instead of the pushing order combination. One of the "chance roles" is established and one medal is paid out. As with "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4", the "chance role" may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation. You may do so. In this case, the "RT3 transition" may not be displayed. In the present embodiment, when any of "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4" is won, the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. There are cases where "chance role" is displayed, and cases where "F_weak rare role A" or "F_weak rare role B" is won and "chance role" is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to change the expectation of the bonus combination duplication winning and the expectation of the transition to RT3 depending on the internal winning combination and the stop operation mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

When "F_watermelon 1" and "F_watermelon 2" are determined not as push order but as internal winning combination, "watermelon" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing. One medal will be paid out. It should be noted that the “watermelon” may be missed depending on the timing of the stop operation.

When the "F_fixed combination" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, all the winning "special combination" are established (that is, regardless of the stop operation order and the timing of the stop operation). , "S_Special role 1", "C_Special role 2" and "S_Special role 3" are displayed on the valid line at the same time), and 15 medals are paid out. For example, even if the number of medals to be paid out for the "special role" is set to "15" and one of the winning "special roles" is established, 15 medals will be paid out. good.

When the "F_special bell" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, the "crossdown bell" is established regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing, and eight medals are awarded. It will be paid out.

When the "F_upper common bell" is determined not as a push order but as an internal winning combination, the "bell" is established at the top line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel (the "upper bell"), and eight medals are paid out.

When the "F_middle stage common bell" is determined not as a push order combination but as an internal winning combination, the "bell" is established at the center line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, "" The "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line on the middle of each reel (the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out.

In the present embodiment, when the internal winning combination is determined, the "bell" is established at the bottom line regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing (that is, the "bell" symbol is each reel. (It becomes the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line on the lower row), and eight medals are paid out. It is also possible to provide a winning combination so that the winning combination can be won with a predetermined probability in a gaming state other than the bonus state.

"F_upper left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_upper middle bell 1" and "F_upper middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_upper right / left bell 1" and "F_upper right / left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_upper right middle bell 1" and "F_upper right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

In the present embodiment, "F_upper stage" in which "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" (that is, the first stop on the left) are correct answers as the "upper stage bell" when the pressing order is correct. "Left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" and "F_upper middle bell 1" and "F_upper middle bell 2" where "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" (that is, the first stop in the middle) are correct answers. "F_Upper right and left bell 1" and "F_Upper right and left bell 2" where "Batting order 5" is correct, and "F_Upper right middle bell 1" and "F_Upper right middle bell 1" where "Batting order 6" is correct. 2 ”and are provided. That is, it is stipulated that the correct push order is 4 (4 choices) out of the maximum 6 push orders (6 choices), but this is the correct push order in the push order small winning combination. This is an example of the order, and the correct push order pattern (number of choices) is not limited to this.

For example, the correct push order may be specified to be 6 ways (6 choices) or 3 ways (3 choices). In the case of 3 ways (3 choices), the left 1st stop ("Batting order 1" and "Batting order 2"), the middle 1st stop ("Batting order 3" and "Batting order 4"), and the right 1st stop ("Batting order 3" and "Batting order 4") The internal winning combination related to the "upper bell" may be configured so that either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6") is the correct pushing order. The same applies to the internal winning combination related to the above-mentioned "RT0 transition lip" to "RT2 transition lip", the internal winning combination related to the "middle bell" and the internal winning combination related to the "lower bell" shown below. That is, in the push order combination, the correct push order pattern (number of choices) can be appropriately set, and the pattern (number of choices) is not limited to that described with reference to FIGS. 23 and 24.

"F_middle left bell 1" and "F_middle left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel as the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 1" and "batting order 2" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_Middle-stage middle bell 1" and "F_Middle-stage middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel as the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_middle right / left bell 1" and "F_middle right / left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "middle bell" displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_middle right middle bell 1" and "F_middle right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel as the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_lower middle bell 1" and "F_lower middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" when determined as an internal winning combination, Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" that is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. .. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 3" and "batting order 4" and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order combinations" is established and one piece. If the medals are paid out and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medals are not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_lower right / left bell 1" and "F_lower right / left bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 5" when determined as an internal winning combination, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" that is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 5" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

"F_lower right middle bell 1" and "F_lower right middle bell 2" are push order combinations, and if the stop operation order is "batting order 6" when determined as an internal winning combination, the stop operation is performed. Regardless of the timing, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. On the other hand, if the stop operation order is other than "batting order 6" and the stop operation timing is appropriate, one of the winning "batting order" is established and one medal is paid out. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the "RT1 transition" is established (RT1 transition) and the medal is not paid out. In this case, if the RT state is the RT0 state, the RT2 state, and the RT4 state, the state shifts to the RT1 state.

In this embodiment, any one of "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, and the stop operation is performed in the correct push order. If not, whether or not the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is determined based on, for example, the timing of the stop operation at the time of the third stop operation. Specifically, 1/2 of all the stop operation timings at the time of the third stop operation is set as an appropriate timing, and if the stop operation is performed at that timing, the winning " When any of the "batting order combinations" is established and the stop operation is performed at the remaining 1/2 timing, the "RT1 transition" is established because the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate.

Further, in the present embodiment, when any one of "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), Regardless of the stop operation order and the stop operation timing, the "bell" is established at the top line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "upper bell" displayed in a straight line on the upper row of each reel), and 8 medals. Medal will be paid out. Further, when any one of "F_middle left bell 1" to "F_middle right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the stop operation order and the stop operation order and Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the center line (that is, the "bell" symbol is displayed in a straight line in the middle of each reel as the "middle bell"), and eight medals are paid out. .. Further, when any one of "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" is determined as the internal winning combination and is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the stop operation order and the stop operation order and Regardless of the timing of the stop operation, the "bell" is established at the bottom line (that is, the "bell" symbol is the "lower bell" that is displayed in a straight line at the bottom of each reel), and eight medals are paid out. ..

That is, in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), the push order small combination is no longer the push order combination (the push order combination does not matter). However, it is not always necessary to configure in this way, and even in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), a combination of symbols in which eight medals are paid out if the batting order is correct as described above (“upper row”. "Bell", "Middle bell" or "Lower bell") is stopped and displayed, and if the push order is not the correct answer, one medal will be paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, the omission may occur. In this case, even if the "RT1 transition" is displayed, the gaming state does not shift to the RT1 state, so the "RT1 transition" may not be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the replay combination or the small combination and the bonus combination are determined as the internal winning combination (including the case where the bonus combination is carried over), the replay combination or the small combination is more than the bonus combination. Although the stop control for preferentially establishing the bonus combination is performed, the stop control for preferentially establishing the bonus combination may be performed over the replay combination or the small combination.

Here, the reel stop control (method for determining the stop symbol position) in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be briefly described. In the present embodiment, after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the reel stop control is performed so that the rotation of the corresponding reel stops within 190 msec. Specifically, any one of the number of sliding pieces "0" to "4" is added to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected, and the value corresponds to the obtained value. The symbol position is determined as the symbol position at which the rotation of the reel stops (hereinafter, referred to as "scheduled stop position"). The symbol position corresponding to the value of the symbol counter corresponding to the corresponding reel when the stop operation is detected is the symbol position where the rotation of the reel is started (hereinafter, referred to as "stop start position").

That is, the number of sliding pieces is the amount of rotation of the reel from the time when the stop operation is detected by the stop switch until the rotation of the corresponding reel is stopped. In other words, it is the number of symbols that pass through the middle region of the corresponding reel of the reel display window 4 in the period from the detection of the stop operation by the stop switch to the stop of the rotation of the corresponding reel. This is grasped by the value of the symbol counter updated after the stop operation is detected by the stop switch.

With reference to a stop table (not shown), the number of sliding pieces is acquired according to the stop start position of each reel. In the present embodiment, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table, but this is tentative, and the acquired number of sliding pieces does not immediately determine the scheduled stop position of the reel. In the present embodiment, when an appropriate number of sliding pieces exists based on the number of sliding pieces acquired based on the stop table (hereinafter referred to as “sliding piece number determination data”), a pull-in priority table (not shown) is referred to. And change the number of sliding pieces. Then, the sliding piece number determination data is referred to for determining the search order when comparing the priorities of each symbol from the stop start position to the symbol position four ahead, which is the maximum number of sliding pieces.

In the reel stop control of the present embodiment, first, the number of sliding pieces is acquired based on the stop table (not shown). However, if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces in addition to the number of sliding pieces based on the priority, the number of sliding pieces is changed to the appropriate number. That is, in the present embodiment, the more appropriate number of sliding pieces is determined based on the priority of the symbol combination that allows the stop display by the internal winning combination, regardless of the number of sliding pieces acquired by the stop table.

<Structure of storage area provided in main RAM>
Next, the configurations of various storage areas provided in the main RAM 103 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 to 30.

[Hit request flag storage area and winning operation flag storage area]
First, with reference to FIG. 25, the configuration of the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) and the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area) will be described. In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area (flag data storage area, winning flag data storage area) and the winning operation flag storage area (winning flag data storage area) have the same configuration.

In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area is composed of the hit request storage areas 1 to 9 each represented by 1 byte of data, and the winning operation flag storage area is each represented by 1 byte of data. It is composed of storage areas 1 to 9. The data stored in each storage area of the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area is only the 1-byte data in the "data" column in FIG. 25, but in FIG. 25, for convenience of explanation, each data is stored. "Combination" indicating the symbol combination of each reel associated with the bit of the storage area (in the figure, the symbol of the left reel 3L, the symbol of the middle reel 3C, and the symbol of the right reel 3R are described in this order), and the symbol thereof. The contents (see FIGS. 19 to 22) are also described.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the hit request flag storage areas 1 to 9, it indicates that the internal winning combination corresponding to the predetermined bit has won the internal winning. Further, when "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in each of the winning operation storage areas 1 to 9, it indicates that the display combination (winning operation flag) corresponding to the predetermined bit has won a prize. That is, when "1" is stored in the predetermined bit, it indicates that various symbol combinations of the internal winning combinations corresponding to the predetermined bit are displayed on the effective line.

The hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area include those in which a combination of a plurality of symbols is assigned to one bit (flag) in each storage area, as described above. , One symbol combination may be assigned to one bit (flag) in each storage area.

[Carryover storage area]
Next, the configuration of the carry-over combination storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the carry-over combination storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area.

When the internal winning combination "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" or "F_BB4" is determined as a result of the internal lottery, the internal winning combination (BB combination) is stored in the carry-over combination storage area as a carry-over combination. .. The carry-over combination stored in the carry-over combination storage area is retained without being cleared until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed on the valid line. Further, while the carry-over combination is stored in the carry-over combination storage area, the carry-over combination is stored in the winning request storage area in addition to the internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery.

[Game status flag storage area]
Next, the configuration of the game state flag storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 27. The game state flag storage area is composed of a 2-byte data storage area. In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 27, a unique bonus type or RT type is assigned to each bit in the game state flag storage area.

When "1" is stored in a predetermined bit in the game state flag storage area, it indicates that the operation of the bonus state or RT state corresponding to the predetermined bit is being performed. For example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1, it indicates that the game state is the BB1 state. Further, for example, when "1" is stored in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 2, it indicates that the game state is the RT3 state.

[Operation stop button storage area]
Next, the configuration of the operation stop button storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 28. The operation stop button storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area, and stores an operation stop button flag consisting of 1 byte. In the operation stop button flag, the operation state of the stop button is assigned to each bit.

For example, when the left stop button 17L is the stop button pressed this time, that is, the operation stop button, "1" is stored in bit 0 of the operation stop button storage area. Further, for example, when the left stop button 17L is a stop button that has not yet been pressed, that is, an effective stop button, "1" is stored in bit 4. The main CPU 101 distinguishes between the stop button pressed this time and the stop button that has not been pressed yet, based on the data stored in the operation stop button storage area.

[Press order storage area]
Next, the configuration of the pressing order storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 29. The press order storage area is composed of a 1-byte data storage area, and stores a press order flag consisting of 1 byte.

In the pressing order flag, each bit is assigned the type of pressing order of the stop button. For example, when the pressing order of the stop buttons is "left, middle, right", "1" is stored in bit 0 of the pressing order storage area.

[Design code storage area]
Next, the configuration of the symbol code storage area will be described with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, each of the symbol code storage areas is composed of symbol code storage areas 1 to 9 represented by 1 byte of data. The symbol code storage area has the same configuration as the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25).

In the symbol code storage area, "1" is stored in the bit corresponding to the combination of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line. After all the reels are stopped, the symbol code corresponding to the display combination (winning operation flag) is stored in the symbol code storage areas 1 to 9.

[Relationship between internal winning combination, lottery number, and winning combination number]
In the various game states related to the game playability described above, various data tables are referred to in various lottery by the main control circuit 90, but as a parameter used at this time, in this embodiment, not only the internal winning combination but also the internal winning combination is supported. Each parameter with a different name (hereinafter referred to as "lottery number") is also used. The lottery numbers are grouped by grouping the internal winning roles that play the same role (whether the winning combination is a lottery target, the winning probability, etc.) and assigning the same lottery number in various lottery related to playability by the main control circuit 90. It is information for making it identifiable. As a result, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to provide various data tables for each internal winning combination (for example, for each of "No. 0" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17), and the lottery number. Since various data tables may be provided for each, the amount of data can be compressed, and it is possible to avoid pressure on the capacity of the game ROM area.

Further, in the present embodiment, with respect to the internal winning combination, each parameter (hereinafter, referred to as “winning combination number”) having another name for identifying the internal winning combination in the unit game of this time is also used on the sub-control circuit 200 side. The winning combination number is a grouping of at least a part of the internal winning combination according to the gaming state (more specifically, whether it is a non-advantageous section or a normal advantageous section and an advantageous section). This is information for making the group recognizable by assigning the same winning combination number. As a result, in the present embodiment, unique information for identifying each internal winning combination (for example, for each of "No. 0" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) is provided. Since it is not necessary to transmit to the sub-control circuit 200 side, the amount of data can be compressed, the control load can be reduced, and appropriate information can be transmitted according to the gaming state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 31 and 32, the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number will be described. 31 and 32 are diagrams showing an example of the basic correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number.

As shown in FIG. 31, the internal winning combination (including the bonus combination) in which the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination are won at the same time ("No. 1" to "No. 38" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is The lottery number "13" is assigned to the indicated internal winning combination), except for "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities between the set values. Further, a lottery number "0" is assigned to "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2".

In the present embodiment, the non-advantageous section (“normal” in FIGS. 31 and 32; the same applies hereinafter) and the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section (“advantageous” in FIGS. 31 and 32; the same applies hereinafter) are used. Although the lottery numbers are not different in the above, for example, when different lottery or processing is performed between "normal" and "advantageous", different lottery numbers can be assigned between "normal" and "advantageous". For example, in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" are won, ART lottery is not performed and it is not decided to shift to the normal advantageous section, but in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, it is not decided. , "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" are also drawn in the same way as the internal winning combination including other bonus combinations. Therefore, in "normal", the lottery number is assigned as described above. , In "advantage", a common lottery number "13" may be assigned.

Further, as shown in FIG. 31, in the internal winning combination including the bonus combination, the winning combination numbers "28" to "41" are assigned according to the type of the winning combination and the type of the replay combination or the small winning combination. One of the winning bonus numbers is assigned. As a result, on the sub-control circuit 200 side, it is possible to execute different effects depending on the type of the winning bonus combination and the type of the winning replay combination or small combination.

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the internal winning combination of the replay or the small winning combination (the internal winning combination indicated by "No. 39" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and "No." shown in FIG. 18 A lottery number of any one of "0" to "12" is assigned to each of the internal winning combinations indicated by ".1" to "No. 7").

Here, for example, "F_RT0 middle replay 1" to "F_RT0 middle replay 6" and "F_RT2 middle" that win in the RT0 state and the RT2 state, which are game states in which the probability that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination is high. The same lottery number "1" is assigned to "Replay 1" to "F_RT2 Medium Replay 3". Further, for example, in the RT state other than the RT5 state, there is a possibility of shifting to the RT3 state, and "F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye B4" which shift from the non-advantageous section to the normal advantageous section. Is assigned the same lottery number "6".

Further, for example, the same lottery number "10" is assigned to "F_upper common bell" and "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2" where the same "upper bell" may be displayed. The same lottery number "11" is assigned to "F_Middle-tier common bell" and "F_Middle-tier left bell 1" to "F_Middle-tier right middle bell 2" that are assigned and may display the same "Middle-tier bell". The same lottery number "12" is assigned to "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2", which may display the same "lower bell".

Further, as shown in FIG. 32, the internal winning combination of the replay or the small winning combination (the internal winning combination shown by "No. 39" to "No. 98" shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and the "No." shown in FIG. 18 For the internal winning combination indicated by ".1" to "No. 7"), any winning combination number of "0" to "27" is assigned in "normal" or "advantageous", respectively.

Here, focusing on the winning combination numbers assigned to "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2", the same winning combination number "22" is assigned to each in "normal". On the other hand, in "advantage", the winning combination number "23" is assigned to "F_upper left bell 1" to "F_upper right middle bell 2", and "F_middle left bell 1" to "F_middle right middle bell 2" are assigned. The difference is that the winning combination number "24" is assigned to "2", and the winning combination number "25" is assigned to "F_lower middle bell 1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2".

That is, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section (see FIG. 35 described later), when these internal winning combinations are won, the “bell” symbols are lined up in the middle of each reel (“middle bell”). When the "bell" symbol is lined up on the upper row of each reel (when the "upper bell" is established), and when the "bell" symbol is lined up on the lower row of each reel ("lower bell") The number of medals paid out is the same in both cases), but the degree of continuation of the line battle state may fluctuate. , "F_Upper Left Bell 1"-"F_Upper Right Middle Bell 2", "F_Middle Left Bell 1"-"F_Middle Right Middle Bell 2", "F_Lower Middle Bell 1"-"F_Lower Right Middle Bell 1" By assigning different winning numbers to "Bell 2", there is a possibility that the "Bell" symbols will be lined up on any effective line before the stop display (before the stop operation) of the symbols on the sub-control circuit 200 side. In the line battle state, it is possible to perform a production with a different degree of expectation based on the receipt of this winning combination number. An example of the effect in the line battle state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41 described later.

From the same viewpoint, for example, "F_upper lip", "F_middle lip 1" to "F_middle lip 3", and "F_lower lip" are assigned the same winning combination number in "normal". , In "advantage", different winning combination numbers may be assigned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 90 sets the winning combination number as the information regarding the internal winning combination in the communication parameter of the start command, and is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200, which will be described later. Information corresponding to navigation data (see FIG. 45 described later) is set in the communication parameter of the start command (or may be another command), and is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. However, the mode in which the sub-control circuit 200 side transmits information that can recognize the internal winning combination or the navigation data is not limited to this.

For example, for "F_RT0 medium replay 1" to "F_RT0 medium replay 6", the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. You may. Further, regarding "F_RT1 medium replay 1" to "F_RT1 medium replay 6", the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. You may. Further, regarding "F_RT2 medium replay 1" to "F_RT2 medium replay 3", the same winning combination number is assigned in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers are assigned in the advantageous section. You may. That is, regarding the push order replay, in each game state (advantageous section) in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified, the winning combination number is transmitted as information that can identify the internal winning combination, which is advantageous to the player. In each gaming state (non-advantageous section and normal advantageous section) in which the information of the stop operation cannot be notified, the winning combination number may be transmitted as information that the internal winning combination cannot be specified.

This also applies to the push order small role. In this case, the same winning combination number may be assigned in the non-advantageous section, and different winning combination numbers may be assigned in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section. Then, regarding the assignment of the winning combination number in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, for example, which effective line the symbol of "bell" may be displayed on, and the type of stop operation advantageous to the player The winning combination number may be further subdivided and assigned so that both can be identified.

In this way, for example, in each game state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified of the push order small combination and the push order replay, the winning combination number is transmitted as information that can identify the internal winning combination. In each game state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player cannot be notified, if the winning combination number is transmitted as information that the internal winning combination cannot be specified, the navigation data described later (FIG. 45 described later). It may not be necessary to transmit the information corresponding to (see) to the sub-control circuit 200. In this case, the process of transmitting the information corresponding to the navigation data (see FIG. 45 described later) to the sub-control circuit 200, which will be described later, can be omitted, and the control load can be reduced.

In FIG. 32, as an example of the correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number, the presence or absence of the winning combination (carry-over) of the bonus combination is not considered, but the bonus combination is carried over. The correspondence between the internal winning combination, the lottery number, and the winning combination number may be changed depending on whether or not the winning combination is used. For example, in the inter-flag state, various lottery related to game playability is basically not performed. Therefore, in the inter-flag state, all lottery numbers may be assigned to "0".

<Playability in non-advantageous section (normal state)>
Next, with reference to FIG. 33, the flow of the game in the non-advantageous section (normal state) will be described. Note that FIG. 33 shows an outline of the gaming state that is transitioned when each internal winning combination shown in the figure is won in the normal state.

(At the time of winning the role of weak rare)
If a weak rare role ("F_weak rare role A" and "F_weak rare role B") is won in a non-advantageous section and a bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 has a high probability of 1 in the game state. Along with shifting to the state (normal advantageous section), the "9" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, during at least nine games from the next game, the state is controlled to a high accuracy 1 state from the next game.

(At the time of chance)
When the chance eye ("F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4") is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state. , The main CPU 101 shifts the game state to the high accuracy 2 state (normal advantageous section), and sets the "9" game in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, the high accuracy 2 state is controlled from the next game to at least 9 games.

At this time, as a result of the player's stop operation, the "RT3 transition" is displayed and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state, and the "RT3 transition" is not displayed and the RT state does not shift to the RT3 state ( That is, there is a case where the RT state other than the RT3 state continues). In each case, there is no change in shifting to the high accuracy 2 state, but it is advantageous for the player that the RT state is the RT3 state. This point will be described in detail later.

The chance eye is an internal winning combination that can be won in duplicate with the bonus combination, but if the winning combination is duplicated in the bonus combination, the processing related to the bonus combination (see "When winning the bonus combination" described later). ) Is prioritized, so the control to shift to the high accuracy 2 state is not performed.

(At the time of winning 1 watermelon)
When the watermelon 1 (“F_watermelon 1”) is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 performs the ART lottery. Specifically, for example, with a probability of 8/256, it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section via the main precursor state of the normal advantageous section (that is, the ART winning is determined), 248 /. With a probability of 256, it is usually decided to shift to the high probability 3 state of the advantageous section, but not to shift to the advantageous section (that is, to determine the ART non-winning). In this case, it may be possible to further determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section via the present precursor state of the normal advantageous section.

In both cases where the ART winning is determined and the ART non-winning is determined, the main CPU 101 determines the game period (precursor period) of the normally advantageous section to be transferred based on the watermelon 1 winning. Lottery is done. Specifically, for example, the precursor period of any one of the precursor period "9" to "16" games is determined by lottery. In this case, for example, when the precursor period "9" game is determined, the "9" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section, and when the precursor period "16" game is determined, the game period of the normal advantageous section is determined. The "16" game is set in. In this case, the number of one game may be determined with different probabilities depending on whether the transition destination is in the present precursor state or the high-accuracy 3 state. For example, in the case of shifting to the present precursor state, the lottery probability can be set so that a relatively long precursor period can be easily determined as compared with the case of shifting to the high probability 3 state.

In this way, when the watermelon 1 is won, if the ART winning is determined, it is controlled to the main precursor state of the normal advantageous section during at least the number of games determined by the lottery for the precursor period from the next game, and the present precursor state. After the end of, it is controlled to the ending preparation state of the advantageous section (see FIG. 34 described later). Further, if the ART non-winning is determined, it is controlled to the high accuracy 3 state of the normal advantageous section from the next game to at least the number of games determined by the lottery during the precursory period.

(At the time of winning the bonus role)
When the bonus combination ("F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" and "F_BB4") is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 performs the ART lottery. If "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" having different winning probabilities is determined as the internal winning combination, the ART lottery is not performed. That is, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, the state between the flags of the non-advantageous section (normal state) is reached without shifting to each gaming state of the normal advantageous section. After that, the non-advantageous section (normal state) becomes a bonus state, and when the bonus state ends, the non-advantageous section (normal state) returns to the bonus non-winning state.

In the ART lottery at the time of winning the bonus role, specifically, for example, with a probability of 64/256, after the end of the bonus state, the player shifts to the line battle state of the advantageous section via the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section. Decide (that is, determine the ART winning), and with a probability of 192/256, decide to shift to the high probability 4 state of the normal advantageous section, but not to shift to the advantageous section (that is, determine the ART non-winning). do). In this case, it may be possible to further determine, with a predetermined probability, to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section via the ending preparation state of the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state.

In either case, when the ART winning is determined and when the ART non-winning is determined, the main CPU 101 first shifts the gaming state to the high-accuracy 4 state (normally advantageous section). As a result, it is controlled to the high accuracy 4 state from the next game. The period during which the high-accuracy 4 state continues in the inter-flag state may be until the transition from the inter-flag state to the bonus state (until the carried-over bonus combination is established), or after the high-accuracy 4 state is established. It may be between "9" games (that is, the same as in the high accuracy 1 state and the high accuracy 2 state). Further, when the ART winning is determined, the inter-flag state may be shifted to the present precursor state (normally advantageous section) instead of the high accuracy 4 state. Further, in the inter-flag state, since various lottery as the high-accuracy 4 state is not actually performed, this inter-flag state is usually an advantageous section, but the high-accuracy 1 to high-accuracy 4 state and this precursor. It may be defined as a state different from the state (for example, "normal advantageous state between flags"), and when a bonus combination is won, the state may be shifted to the normal advantageous state between flags (normal advantageous section).

Then, after the bonus state is reached, when the bonus state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section if the ART winning is determined, and if the ART non-winning is determined. , The high accuracy 4 state of the normal advantageous section is continued, and the "32" game is set in the game period of the normal advantageous section. As a result, it is controlled to the high accuracy 4 state for at least 32 games after the end of the bonus.

<Playability during normal advantageous section>
Next, with reference to FIG. 34, the flow of the game during the normal advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 34 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the normal advantageous section. In the present embodiment, as described above, in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, the high accuracy 1 state that is transferred based on winning the weak rare role, and the high accuracy that is transferred based on winning the chance. It has been decided to shift to 2 states, 3 high-accuracy states that are transferred based on winning the watermelon 1, 4 high-accuracy states that are transferred based on winning the bonus combination, and an advantageous section (ART). Has this precursory state.

First, when the main CPU 101 is in the inter-flag state (RT5 state) or the bonus state, and when it is in the bonus non-winning state and is in the present precursor state (that is, when it has already been determined to shift to the advantageous section). ), The ART transitionable state lottery is performed for each unit game. In this ART shiftable state lottery, it is determined whether or not the state is determined to shift to the advantageous section (ART shiftable state) when the bonus combination is won in the normal advantageous section. In this ART transitionable state lottery, if it is decided to be in the ART transitionable state (if the ART transitionable state lottery is won) and the bonus combination is won, it is based on the bonus combination. When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, and it is not decided to make it into the ART shiftable state (when the ART shiftable state lottery is not won), when the bonus combination is won Is determined not to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state based on the bonus combination, and to continue the normal advantageous section (more specifically, the high probability 4 state).

In the ART transitionable state lottery, specifically, for example, in the case of the high accuracy 1 state and the high accuracy 2 state, the ART transitionable state is set with a probability of 64/256 (the ART transitionable state is won). , 192/256, the ART transitionable state is not set (the ART transitionable state is not won). Further, for example, in the case of the high accuracy 3 state and the high accuracy 4 state, the ART transitionable state is set with a probability of 128/256 (winning to the ART transitionable state), and the ART transition is performed with a probability of 128/256. Do not set the possible state (not win the ART transitionable state). The winning probability of the ART transitionable state is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it is possible to set the winning probability to increase in the order of high accuracy 1 state, high accuracy 2 state, high accuracy 3 state, and high accuracy 4 state, or simply, the winning probability is different in each gaming state. It can also be set to.

In addition, the ART transitionable state lottery is performed for each unit game, but once the ART transitionable state is set in the normal advantageous section, the lottery is performed until the normal advantageous section ends. It is also possible to maintain the ART transitional state. In this case, once the ART shiftable state is set, it is not necessary to perform the ART shiftable state lottery until the end of the normal advantageous section thereafter. On the other hand, in the case of performing each unit game, at the start of the unit game, before determining whether or not the bonus combination has been won, first, whether or not the unit game is in the ART transitionable state is determined. The lottery may be performed, and then it may be determined whether or not the bonus combination has been won in the unit game.

Further, in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" having different winning probabilities is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. However, in the normal advantageous section, even if "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" or "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2" is determined as the internal winning combination, if it is in the ART transitionable state, it is based on the bonus combination. It is decided to shift to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs control processing such as transition between states. In this inter-state transition control process, the transition control of each game state in the normal advantageous section is performed based on the internal winning combination, and the game period of the normal advantageous section is reset according to a predetermined condition. conduct. The details of the control process such as transition between states will be described in detail below.

(At the time of chance)
When the chance eye ("F_chance eye A1" to "F_chance eye A4" and "F_chance eye B1" to "F_chance eye B4") is won when it is a normal advantageous section and the bonus is not won. If the current state is the high-accuracy 1 state or the high-accuracy 2 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, the main CPU 101 sets the high-accuracy 2 state and plays a "9" game during the game period of the normal advantageous section. Reset. For example, if a player wins a chance when playing 5 games in a high-accuracy 1 state (9 games), the "9" game is reset, which is substantially a normal advantageous section. The game period will be extended by 5 games.

Further, if the current state is the high accuracy 3 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, the "9" game is reset in the game period of the normal advantageous section. Further, if the current state is the high accuracy 4 state and the RT state is not the RT3 state, and the number of remaining games in the game period of the current normal advantageous section is 8 games or less, the game period of the normal advantageous section is changed to " 9 ”Reset the game. That is, the game period of the normal advantageous section is appropriately extended based on the winning of the chance.

In the above, when the RT state is the RT3 state, the game period of the normal advantageous section is not reset even if the player wins the chance. In the RT3 state, the winning probability of the replay combination that is advantageous to the player is set. Although it is a game state that has been played, it is basically a game state that lasts only for 8 games, and as will be described later, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section, as in the inter-flag state (RT5 state), Since the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed without limitation, the end of the normal advantageous section and the end of the RT3 state are linked, and the player's expectation for the bonus winning combination even in the RT3 state. This is so as not to impair the feeling.

However, when the normal advantageous section is in the RT3 state, the game period of the normal advantageous section is set so that the end of the normal advantageous section is always one game later than the end of the RT3 state. That is, the game period of the normally advantageous section is set to be at least longer than the game period (8 games) in the RT3 state. In the present embodiment, the lighting of the status indicator is started when the normal advantageous section is started, and when the normal advantageous section is changed to the advantageous section, the lighting is continued, while the normal advantageous section is changed to the advantageous section. If not, the lighting usually ends when the advantageous section ends.

Therefore, for example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section or the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, when the same expectation effect (the effect of making the player expect the bonus winning combination or the ART winning) is performed, the normal advantageous section and RT3 If the game ends in the same state as the state, the state indicator may end lighting during the execution of the expectation effect. In this case, the player will be recognized as non-winning before the result is finally notified by the expectation effect. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section and the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the same expectation effect is executed for eight games, and the expectation effect is finally achieved in the eighth game. Although we are trying to notify the correctness of the game, we usually continue the advantageous section for one game after that so that the game cannot be recognized depending on the lighting mode of the status indicator, and the player's interest is maintained. Is possible.

Further, in the normal advantageous section, even when the RT3 state ends, the remaining period (for example, between one game) is still the normal advantageous section, so it is usually advantageous depending on the type of the internal winning combination here. Since the section may be extended, for example, even if it is notified that the bonus role has not been won in the expectation production, the player usually wishes to extend the advantageous section and continues the game. I think. In this sense as well, it is possible to maintain the interest of the player.

The expected feeling effect that can be executed may be, for example, a continuous effect by the image displayed on the display device 11, or a continuous effect performed by another effect device (for example, the speaker group 84 or the LED group 85). There may be. Further, it is not always necessary to be a continuous production, and any production may be used as long as it is performed to raise the expectation of the player. For example, in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section or the predetermined number of times (for example, the eighth game) of the game in the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the success or failure of the game may be notified. In this case, the number of games in which the predetermined number of games is played may be arbitrarily determined within the range not exceeding 8 games, or by lottery.

Further, regardless of the RT state, the above-mentioned expectation effect may be performed in the present precursor state of the normal advantageous section. In this case, the period during which the expectation effect can be executed may be the same as the RT3 state or the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, or may be executed over a longer period.

In addition, when the current state is the present precursor state and the RT state shifts to the RT3 state (that is, when the "RT3 transition" is displayed), the "8" game is played during the game period of the normal advantageous section. Reset. In this case, when the normal advantageous section ends, the section shifts to the advantageous section. Therefore, by completely linking the end of the RT3 state and the end of the normal advantageous section, the advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player (without leaving the normal advantageous section) Priority is given to the transition to. Further, in this case, if the above-mentioned expectation effect has already been performed, the expectation effect may be performed as it is until the end, or a new expectation effect may be performed again for eight games. You may be asked. Further, the expectation effect may be extended based on the shift of the RT state to the RT3 state.

(At the time of winning 1 watermelon)
When the watermelon 1 ("F_watermelon 1") is won in the normal advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 must be in the present precursor state (that is, the ART winning state has not been determined yet). B), ART lottery will be conducted in the same way as in the non-advantageous section.

Then, if the current state is one of the high-accuracy 1 to high-accuracy 3 states, the RT state is the RT3 state, and the ART non-winning state, the main CPU 101 sets the high-accuracy 3 state. Normally, the game period of the advantageous section is not reset. In addition, if the current state is one of the high-accuracy 1 to high-accuracy 4 states, the RT state is the RT3 state, and the ART is won, this precursor state is set and the number of remaining games in the RT3 state is set. Reset the number of games in the normal advantageous section to the game period.

Further, if the current state is the high accuracy 1 or high accuracy 2 state, the RT state is not the RT3 state, and the ART is not won, the high accuracy 3 state is set, and the above-mentioned precursor period lottery is performed again. Determine the game period of the normally advantageous section to be set. If the current state is one of the high-accuracy 1 to high-accuracy 4 states, and the RT state is not the RT3 state but the ART winning state, this precursor state is set, and the high-accuracy 1 state and high-accuracy state are set. In the case of 2 states or 4 high accuracy states, the game period of the normal advantageous section to be reset is determined by performing the above-mentioned precursor period lottery again. In addition, in the case of the high accuracy 3 state, the game period of the normal advantageous section is not reset.

(At the time of winning the bonus role)
When the bonus combination ("F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" and "F_BB4") is won in the normal advantageous section and the bonus non-winning state, the main CPU 101 has the current normal advantageous section ART. If it is not in the transitionable state, the high accuracy 4 state is set, and the "32" game is reset in the game period of the normal advantageous section in the high accuracy 4 state after the end of the bonus state. If the current normal advantageous section is in the ART transitionable state, the present precursor state is set, and the "0" game is reset to the game period of the normal advantageous section in the present precursor state after the end of the bonus state (that is,). Immediately after the end of the bonus state, shift to the line battle preparation state of the advantageous section).

When the push order small winning combination is won in the normal advantageous section, the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state, the main CPU 101 notifies the pushing order of the pushing order small winning combination. Specifically, on the instruction monitor, a numerical value corresponding to the navigation data is displayed, and a command including information corresponding to the navigation data is transmitted so that the push order notification can be performed on the sub-control circuit 200 side.

Here, in the present embodiment, if the RT state is the RT3 state or the RT5 state, the push order notification is performed every time the push order small winning combination is won, while the RT state is the RT3 until the end of the normal advantageous section. Except for the state and the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed only once during the normal advantageous section. When the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the upper limit of the push order notification is not limited to one, and can be set as appropriate. For example, it may be "twice" or "three times".

Further, in the present embodiment, when the RT state is the RT3 state, the push order notification is performed every time the push order small winning combination is won until the end of the normal advantageous section. After the RT3 state is reached and eight games are digested, the RT3 state ends, but the usually advantageous section may continue. In this case, once the RT3 state is reached, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination may be continued until the end of the normal advantageous section even after the end of the RT3 state, or the RT3 state may be continued. In conjunction with the end of, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is also terminated, and only the normal advantageous section may be continued. That is, the push order notification can be performed only during the period when the RT state is the RT3 state.

Further, for example, when the RT state is not the RT3 state, the transition to the normal advantageous section may occur, and the RT state may become the RT3 state in the normal advantageous section. In this case, if the push order notification has already been performed once, the upper limit number of times may be valid even in the subsequent RT3 state so that the push order notification is not performed, or the upper limit number of times in the subsequent RT3 state. May be disabled so that the push order notification is performed. Further, in this case, if the push order notification has not been performed even once, the push order notification may be performed only once by validating the upper limit number of times even in the subsequent RT3 state. In the RT3 state of, the upper limit number of times may be invalidated so that the push order notification is performed. The same applies to the case where the RT state shifts to the normal advantageous section when the RT state is not the RT5 state, and the RT state becomes the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section.

Assuming that the upper limit of the push order notification when the RT state is other than the RT3 state and the RT5 state is 1, the RT state becomes the RT3 state or when the push order notification is performed twice or more in the normal advantageous section. It is confirmed that it is in the RT5 state. In the present embodiment, since the chance eye can be won at the same time as the bonus combination, for example, in the non-advantageous section, the chance eye is won and the RT3 transition is not displayed and the normal advantageous section is entered. If so, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the bonus combination is won (that is, whether or not the RT5 state is the inter-flag state) when the first push order notification is performed. When the second push order notification is performed, it is confirmed that the player is not in the RT3 state, and as a result, it is possible to recognize that the bonus combination has been won.

On the other hand, for example, when the RT3 transition is displayed and the transition is made to the normal advantageous section, whether or not the bonus combination is won in the number of push order notifications (that is, whether the RT5 state is the inter-flag state). Whether or not it is difficult to recognize, for example, it is possible to recognize that the bonus role is won by the final production content of the above-mentioned expectation effect.

That is, the RT3 state has a high probability of winning the replay combination, and is, for example, a gaming state in which the RT state does not change even if the RT1 transition or the RT1 transition lip is displayed, and if it is a normal advantageous section, the number of times is increased. Since the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed without limit, the game in the normal advantageous section can be advanced more advantageously than the game in the normal advantageous section in other RT states, but on the other hand, it is normal. In the advantageous section, it is difficult to recognize whether or not the player has won the bonus role.

In the present embodiment, when a bonus combination is won during an advantageous section and a bonus state based on the bonus combination is activated, information (pushing order) of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified in the bonus state. On the other hand, if the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination is activated, the stop operation advantageous to the player is performed in the bonus state. Information (pushing order) is not notified. This is the same even when the bonus combination is won when the ART transition is possible in the normal advantageous section. In this case, although the section shifts to the advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, the information (pushing order) of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified during the bonus state. The specific content of the push order notification will be described later with reference to FIG. 45 described later.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described in FIG. 24, when the push order small winning combination is won in the inter-flag state, unlike the bonus non-winning state, the "upper bell" and the "middle stage" are irrespective of the stop operation order. "Bell" or "lower bell" is established and eight medals are paid out, but even on this premise, the normal advantageous section ends in the inter-flag state (RT5 state) of the normal advantageous section. Until, the push order notification similar to the bonus non-winning state is made. That is, in the RT5 state of the normal advantageous section, the same push order notification as in the RT3 state of the normal advantageous section is sent at the time of winning the push order combination, regardless of whether or not the profit actually given by the push order fluctuates. It is supposed to be done. As described above, this is done from the viewpoint of making it difficult to recognize whether or not the bonus role is won, and trying to maintain the expectation.

As described above, when the push order small winning combination is won in the inter-flag state, the number of medals to be paid out can be changed according to the stop operation order as in the bonus non-winning state. In this case, in the inter-flag state (RT5 state) of the normally advantageous section, there is a high possibility that the profit given by the push order notification will increase, so whether the bonus combination is won. Not only can you raise the expectation of whether or not, but you can also raise the expectation of the benefits to be granted.

Further, when it is a normal advantageous section and the bonus is not won, the main CPU 101 updates the game period of the normal advantageous section for each unit game. Specifically, the number of games played during the normal advantageous section is subtracted by "1", and then whether or not the normal advantageous section game period is exhausted (that is, whether the subtraction result is "0"). To judge. In updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, the number of games is added by "1" for each unit game, and then whether or not the addition result reaches the number of games of the game period of the normal advantageous section. It may be determined whether or not the game period of the normally advantageous section has been exhausted by the determination of.

As a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, if the game period of the normal advantageous section is not digested (“period undigested” in FIG. 34), the normal advantageous section is continued and the bonus of the normal advantageous section is not won. The game in the state will be repeated.

In addition, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted as a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, and it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, "period digestion ART non-winning" ”), The normal advantageous section is terminated, and the non-advantageous section is shifted to the bonus non-winning state.

As a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, even if the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is not performed even once in the normal advantageous section ( That is, if the push order small combination is not won), the normal advantageous section may be continued until the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed once. In this way, it is possible not only to guarantee that the player obtains the minimum profit in the usually advantageous section, but also, for example, until the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is performed after the period is exhausted. , If it becomes possible to shift to ART and win a bonus role, it will be possible to shift to an advantageous section after the end of the bonus state, so that the gameplay will be more diverse and the interest of the game will be improved. Can be done.

In addition, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted as a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, and it is decided to shift to the line battle state of the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, "period". In the "digestion line battle win"), the normal advantageous section is terminated, and the advantageous section is shifted to the line battle preparation state (bonus non-win state). In addition, since the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state, in the present embodiment, before shifting to the line battle state of the advantageous section, the line battle preparation state is shifted as a preparation period until the transition to the RT2 state. However, if the RT2 state is accidentally reached at the end of the normally advantageous section, the line battle state may be directly shifted to the line battle state without going through the line battle preparation state. Further, since both the RT0 state and the RT2 state are game states in which the winning probability of the replay combination is the highest (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the RT0 state is accidentally set to the RT0 state when the normal advantageous section ends. If so (or if the RT3 state has ended and the RT0 state has been entered), the line battle ready state may be directly shifted to the line battle state.

In addition, as a result of updating the game period of the normal advantageous section, when the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted and it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section (in FIG. 34, "period". In the digestion ending 1 winning state), the normal advantageous section is ended, and the ending preparation state (bonus non-winning state) of the advantageous section is shifted. It should be noted that, when the advantageous section usually ends, the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, before shifting to the ending 1 state of the advantageous section, until the transition to the RT2 state is performed. As a preparation period, we try to shift to the ending preparation state, but if it happens to be in the RT2 state at the end of the advantageous section, we will shift directly to the ending 1 state without going through the ending preparation state. You may. Further, since both the RT0 state and the RT2 state are game states in which the winning probability of the replay combination is the highest (see FIGS. 16 and 17), the RT0 state is accidentally set to the RT0 state when the normal advantageous section ends. If so (or if the RT3 state has been shifted to the RT0 state based on the end), the ending 1 state may be directly shifted to without going through the ending preparation state.

<Summary of playability in non-advantageous sections and normal advantageous sections>
In the following, the main parts of the playability in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section (including some of the playability in the advantageous section) will be briefly described.

(1) The "chance eye" can be determined as an internal winning role at the same time as the bonus role.
(2) When the "chance eye" is won, the RT state becomes the RT5 state if the bonus combination is also determined as the internal winning combination at the same time. In this case, if it is a non-advantageous section, it shifts to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high probability 4 state" or "normal advantageous state between flags").
(3) When the "chance eye" is won, the "RT3 transition" is displayed based on the fact that the bonus combination is not determined as the internal winning combination at the same time and the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. If so, the RT state becomes the RT3 state. In this case, regardless of whether or not the "RT3 transition" is displayed, if it is a non-advantageous section, it is shifted to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high accuracy 2 state").
(4) The normal advantageous section (for example, "high accuracy 2 state") that has been transferred to the "chance eye" is at least longer than the period during which the RT3 state continues (for example, between 8 games) (for example, 9). (Between games), it is possible to continue.

(5) When the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination is completed, if the ART winning is determined, the player shifts to the advantageous section (for example, "line battle ready state").
(6) When a bonus combination is won in a non-advantageous section and the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, if the ART winning is not determined (if the ART non-winning is determined), a specific period (for example, if the ART non-winning is determined) (Between 32 games), shift to a normal advantageous section (for example, "high accuracy 4 state").
(7) If a bonus combination is won in a non-advantageous section, and if the bonus combination is a bonus combination in which the winning probabilities are the same among a plurality of set values, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART). However, in the case of a bonus combination in which the winning probabilities differ among a plurality of set values, it is not determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART).
(8) When a bonus combination is won in a normal advantageous section, the bonus combination is a bonus combination having the same winning probability among a plurality of set values, and a bonus combination having a different winning probability among a plurality of set values. In any case, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART).

(9) When the RT state is the RT3 state in the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed until the end of the normal advantageous section.
(10) When the RT state is the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed until the end of the normal advantageous section.
(11) In the normal advantageous section, when the RT state is not the RT3 state or the RT5 state, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed only a predetermined number of times (for example, once).
(12) When a bonus combination is won in an advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small combination is performed in the bonus state based on the bonus combination, but when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. , In the bonus state based on the bonus combination, the push order notification of the push order small combination is not performed regardless of whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the "chance eye" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to control the normal advantageous section for at least 9 games, and when the ART winning combination is determined, the advantageous section. It is possible to shift the RT state to the RT3 state when the "RT3 transition" is displayed, and when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the RT state is changed to RT5. It is possible to change to a state. In addition, it is possible to determine the "chance eye" and the bonus role as the internal winning role at the same time. Then, in the case of the RT3 state and the RT5 state, which are usually advantageous sections, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player is notified about the push order small winning combination.

As a result, in the normal advantageous section, the possibility that the number of medals to be awarded will increase as compared with the non-advantageous section will increase, and the expectation of whether or not to transition to the bonus state will also increase, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the normally advantageous section can be continued (9 games) is set to a period longer than the period during which the RT3 state can be continued (8 games).

As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation regardless of whether or not a specific game state (RT3 state) ends, so that the interest in the transition of the state that is advantageous to the player can be further improved. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the "chance eye" is a case where the "RT3 transition eye" is displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, an appropriate timing) and is not performed in the specific mode. In the case of an internal winning combination in which "RT3 transition" is not displayed, and the normal advantageous section is in the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the player is advantageous for the push order small combination until the normal advantageous section ends. When the procedure of the stop operation is notified and it is not in the RT3 state and the RT5 state in the normal advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player for the push order small combination is limited to a predetermined number of times (for example, once). Is to be notified.

As a result, when the "chance eye" is won, the degree of advantage and content of the normal advantageous section are determined by whether or not the bonus combination is also determined as the internal winning combination and whether or not the "RT3 transition" is displayed. Since it can be changed, it is possible to further improve the interest in the transition of the state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the bonus state based on the winning bonus combination in the non-advantageous section ends, if the ART winning is determined, the game is shifted to the advantageous section, and if the ART winning is not determined. Is designed to shift to a normal advantageous section (for example, high accuracy 4 state) for a specific period (for example, between 32 games).

Further, in the present embodiment, when the game is in any of the normally advantageous sections, either a bonus combination having the same winning probability among the plurality of set values or a bonus combination having a different winning probability among the plurality of set values. Even if the winning is won, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, but in the non-advantageous section, it is advantageous if the winning probability is different among a plurality of set values. It is not decided whether or not to shift to the section.

As a result, the transition of the subsequent game state (game section) can be made more diverse depending on the game state and its type when the bonus combination is won, so that the interest regarding the transition of the state that is more advantageous to the player is further enjoyed. Can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal advantageous section and the advantageous section, it is possible to notify the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the push order small combination, and even when the push order is controlled to the bonus state in the advantageous section, the push order is small. It is possible to notify the player of the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player for the combination, but when the bonus state is controlled in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player for the push order small combination is performed. It is not possible to notify.

As a result, it is possible to provide a normal advantageous section, which is a game section in which the expectation of shifting to the advantageous section is increased and the possibility that the number of medals to be awarded is also increased. It is possible to improve the interest, and even if such a game section is provided, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive, and the player's gambling spirit is excessively fueled. It is also possible to suppress being struck.

<Playability during line battle>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 41, the flow of the game during the line battle state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 35 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the line battle state of the advantageous section. Further, FIG. 36 shows an example of various data tables stored in the main ROM 102, which are various tables referred to at least in the line battle preparation state and the line battle state in the advantageous section. Further, FIGS. 37 to 41 show a display example of the display device 11 in order to explain an mode in which the degree of continuation of whether or not the line battle state is continued varies. In the present embodiment, the line battle state has an interval state, a battle state, and a continuous lottery state. Further, in the present embodiment, the line battle state is basically a gaming state in which the line battle state is transferred via the line battle preparation state.

(Preparing for line battle)
When the ART winning is determined based on winning the bonus combination in the non-advantageous section or the normal advantageous section, the main CPU 101 shifts to the line battle preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends. .. In addition, in the line battle ready state and the line battle state of the advantageous section, the bonus combination is won, and when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, the line battle ready state is shifted (that is, the line battle state is restored). ). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the line battle ready state is maintained until the RT state shifts to the RT2 state.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. When the RT3 state is entered, the line battle preparation state may be terminated and the line battle state may be entered.

Further, as described above, for example, in a non-advantageous section or a normal advantageous section, when an ART lottery is performed based on winning a specific combination other than a bonus combination (for example, "watermelon 1"), the winning result. When it is possible to decide to shift to the line battle state as a result, when the normal advantageous section ends, the shift to the line battle ready state is performed. Also in this case, the line battle ready state is maintained until the RT state shifts to the RT2 state.

However, for example, when the RT state is the RT0 state, even though the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is performed, the stop operation is performed without following the push order notification. As a result, when "RT1 transition" or "RT1 transition lip" is displayed and the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the line battle state may be shifted even if the RT state is not the RT2 state. .. The same applies to the right acquisition lottery preparation state and the ending preparation state. That is, when a push order error occurs in each preparation state, the game state may be shifted to the corresponding gaming state even if the RT state is not the RT2 state.

In the line battle preparation state, an enemy selection table lottery, an ally selection table lottery, and an ally acquisition lottery are performed. It should be noted that the lottery related to these playability is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the line battle preparation state. In addition, the lottery regarding these game characteristics can be performed even in each game state of the normal advantageous section. In this case, when the normal advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, the lottery result in the normal advantageous section is reflected in the line battle state, and when the normal advantageous section does not shift to the advantageous section, the lottery in the normal advantageous section is reflected. The result may be discarded (cleared).

In the enemy selection table lottery, an enemy selection table for selecting information corresponding to the enemy character to be battled in the battle state described later is determined. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the enemy selection table lottery table shown in FIG. 36A, and selects any of the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 based on the number of enemy defeats and the lottery value. Here, the number of times the enemy is defeated is the number of times the enemy HP becomes "0" in the battle state described later and is transferred to the right acquisition state, and the number of times the line battle state is determined to continue in the continuous lottery state described later. As the cumulative number of times (that is, the number of times the line battle state has continued), the number of times stored in a predetermined area in the main RAM 103 is shown.

In the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 36A, each information is assigned so that the continuation degree of the line battle state can be changed according to the number of times the enemy is defeated. In the enemy selection tables 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 36A, "low" indicates that the player's degree of advantage with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state is relatively low, and "medium" indicates the degree of continuation of the line battle state. Indicates that the player's degree of advantage is medium, and "high" indicates that the player's degree of advantage is high with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the present embodiment, as information corresponding to the enemy character to be battled, "A" (enemy character A), "B" (enemy character B), "C" (enemy character C), and "D" ( Enemy character D) is set, and one of them is determined in the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the degree of expectation that the line battle state will continue in the order of "A", "B", "C", and "D" is gradually increased. That is, the degree of advantage of the player is gradually increased in the order of "A", "B", "C", and "D".

Then, in the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "low", the enemy character (for example, "A") having a relatively low degree of advantage of the player is determined. Enemy characters that are easy to play and have a relatively high degree of advantage for the player (for example, "D") are difficult to determine, and if the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "high", the player's It is difficult to determine an enemy character with a relatively low degree of advantage (for example, "A"), and it is easy to determine an enemy character with a relatively high degree of advantage of a player (for example, "D"). If the information indicated by the determined enemy selection table is "medium", the probability is between them. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the ally selection table lottery, the ally selection table for selecting the information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle advantageously in the battle state described later is determined. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the ally selection table lottery table shown in FIG. 36B, and selects any of the ally selection tables 1 to 8 based on the number of enemy defeats and the lottery value. Since the number of times the enemy has been defeated has already been explained, the explanation here will be omitted.

In the present embodiment, as information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle advantageously, "1" (friend character 1), "2" (friend character 2), "3" (friend character 3), and "4". "(Friend character 4) is set, and it is determined whether or not one or more ally characters are given in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the higher the number of assigned ally characters, the higher the expectation that the line battle state will continue. That is, the greater the number of ally characters given, the higher the degree of advantage of the player.

Then, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "extremely low", the ally character is rarely given, and the information indicated by the determined ally selection table. If is "low", it is difficult to assign a ally character, and even if it is assigned, it is one, and if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "medium", the ally character is likely to be assigned. However, it is difficult to assign a plurality of ally characters, and if the information indicated by the determined ally selection table is "high", the ally character is likely to be assigned and a plurality of ally characters are likely to be assigned. In this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player with respect to the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

In the ally acquisition lottery, it is determined in advance whether or not to grant the right to acquire the ally character, in addition to the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. Whether or not the main CPU 101 acquires a ally character with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/2) based on winning a specific role (for example, "chance eye" or "watermelon 1"). decide. The table referred to in the ally acquisition lottery is not shown.

Here, if it is decided to grant the right as a result of the ally acquisition lottery, the number of the ally character that was not granted as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle described later at the time of entering the battle state is the most. A small numbered ally character is given. For example, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, when the ally character "2" is given, if the right is acquired, the ally character "1" will be further given. That is, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, it is determined whether or not the ally character is given including the specific ally character type, whereas in the ally acquisition lottery, at least one of the ally characters is given. It is decided whether or not to decide.

In addition, the right decided to be granted as a result of the ally acquisition lottery basically disappears when the subsequent battle state ends, and in order to obtain the right again, it is necessary to win the ally acquisition lottery again. .. In this sense, the right may be said to be a "limited right" different from the "permanent right" described later.

(Interval state)
As described above, when the line battle preparation state is completed, the main CPU 101 first shifts to the interval state at the start of the line battle state. The interval state is a state in which the game continues for three games, and when the game period in the interval state elapses three games, the battle state is entered. In the interval state, the above-mentioned ally acquisition lottery is performed.

When the interval state ends, the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle and the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle are performed.

In the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, based on the enemy selection table (any of 1 to 8) determined as a result of the above-mentioned enemy selection table lottery, information on the degree of expectation according to the current number of enemy defeats ("low" ~ Any of "high") is referred to, and information (any of "A" to "D") corresponding to the enemy character to be battled is determined. The table referred to in the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle is not shown.

In the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, based on the ally selection table (any of 1 to 8) determined as a result of the above-mentioned ally selection table lottery, information on the degree of expectation according to the current number of enemy defeats ("extremely low"" ~ (Any of "high") is referred to, and the information corresponding to the ally character for advancing the battle in an advantageous manner is determined. In the lottery by ally type at the time of entering the battle, for example, "1" wins, "2" wins, "3" wins, "4" wins, "1.2". While it can be decided that multiple ally characters will be granted, such as "winning", ... "winning" 1 to 4 ", etc., as a permanent right (or limited right) described later," If "1" is given and "winning for" 1 "" is determined, the lottery result is discarded (not reflected). Also, in this case, if "winning for" 1 and 2 "" is decided, only the part of "winning for" 1 "" is discarded (not reflected), and "winning for" 2 "". The part of is reflected. Therefore, if no other rights are granted in the ally acquisition lottery, the ally characters in this case are "1" and "2". In addition, the table referred to in the lottery by ally type at the time of entering the battle is not shown.

Also, when the interval state ends, the initial value "32" is set for the enemy HP and the ally HP. Then, the enemy type is set according to the result of the enemy type lottery at the time of entering the battle, and as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, the existence of the limited right granted based on the result of the ally acquisition lottery, and the permanence described later. The ally type is set according to the presence or absence of the permanent right granted based on the result of the right acquisition lottery.

(Battle state)
As described above, when the interval state ends, the main CPU 101 then shifts to the battle state during the line battle state. The battle state is a state that continues for at least 31 games, and during this period, if the ally side attacks, the enemy HP decreases by the damage of the attack, and if the enemy side attacks, the damage of the attack ally It has the playability of reducing HP. Then, if the enemy HP becomes "0" or less before the end of the battle state, it shifts to the right acquisition lottery state, and if the enemy HP does not become "0" or less before the end of the battle state, it shifts to the right acquisition lottery state. , Shift to the continuous lottery state described later.

In the battle state, when the "weak rare role" or the "chance eye" is won, the winning game is not included in the count target of the game period in the battle state. That is, the game period in the battle state is extended by the number of times the "weak rare role" or "chance eye" is won. Also, in the battle state, if the "chance eye" is won and the "RT3 transition eye" is displayed and the RT state becomes the RT3 state, the game period of the battle state is counted during the eight games in the RT3 state. Is not included in. That is, the game period in the battle state is extended by the number of games in which the RT3 state continues.

In the battle state, a counter lottery at the time of hitting rip, a damage lottery at the counter, a defense lottery at the time of hitting rip, a damage lottery at the time of hitting rip, and a damage lottery at the time of hitting can be performed. It should be noted that the lottery related to these playability is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the battle state.

Here, with reference to FIGS. 37 to 41, the relationship between the lottery related to various playability performed in the battle state and the information corresponding to the ally character will be described.

FIG. 37 shows the case where there is no ally in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) (that is, when none of "1" to "4" is given as the information corresponding to the ally character). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device 11.

First, the display device 11 displays the current "status" of the player's own self-character ("self" in FIGS. 37 to 41) corresponding to the player himself / herself as the basic display content during the battle state. At the same time, the enemy character on the enemy side determined as a result of the above-mentioned lottery for the enemy type at the time of entering the battle (“enemy A” in FIGS. 37 to 41. In this case, it is assumed that the enemy type “A” is selected). Shows the current "status" of.

The status is information corresponding to the remaining numerical range of the ally HP and the enemy HP set at the time of entering the battle state, and in this embodiment, the remaining numerical range is "32 to" for each of the ally HP and the enemy HP. When "25", the status "normal" is set, when the remaining numerical range is "24 to 17", when the status "small damage" is set, and when the remaining numerical range is "16 to 9". , When the status "Medium damage" is set and the remaining numerical range is "8 to 1", the status "Wreck" is set and the remaining numerical range is "0" or less, the status "Destroy" Is set. In addition, the status "defeat" may be set for the enemy HP, but the status "defeat" may not be set for the ally HP, and when the remaining numerical range of the ally HP is "1" or less, The ally HP is fixed at "1" and cannot be subtracted below it.

Then, the display device 11 displays "Middle line attack effective" when there is no ally. This is related to the change in the degree of continuation of the line battle state only in the center line (“DL1” in FIGS. 37 to 41) when none of the ally characters “1” to “4” is assigned in the battle state. It means that it functions as a judgment line.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of no ally, when the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed is determined. When it is done), it becomes an attack on the ally side, and while the damage lottery described later is performed, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell". (The internal winning combination that can be displayed is not determined), and if you win the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip"), it will be an attack on the enemy side, and the damage lottery described later will not be performed, and the shot rip described later will not be performed. When damage is drawn, lottery is done.

FIG. 38 shows the display device 11 in the case of acquiring the ally "1" (that is, when "1" is given as the information corresponding to the ally character) in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state). It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of. Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description here is omitted.

When the ally "1" is acquired, the display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective" and "upper line attack effective". This is because when the ally character "1" is assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41) are line battles. It means that it functions as a judgment line regarding fluctuations in the degree of continuation of the state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring the ally "1", when the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed as an internal winning. When the winning combination is determined) and when the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is displayed (that is, when the internal winning combination in which the "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is determined) Will be an attack on the ally side, and the damage lottery described later will be performed, while the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" will not be displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell" may be displayed. The internal winning combination is not determined), the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is not determined), and " When it hits the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip"), it becomes an attack on the enemy side, and the damage lottery described later is not performed, but the damage lottery at the time of the shot rip described later is performed.

In FIG. 39, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state), when allies "1" and "2" are acquired (that is, "1" and "2" are added as information corresponding to the ally characters. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device (11). Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description here is omitted.

The display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", and "lower line attack effective" when allies "1" and "2" are acquired. This means that when the ally characters "1" and "2" are assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41). ) And the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) mean that they function as a determination line regarding a change in the degree of continuation of the line battle state.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2", when the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell" is displayed. When the internal winning combination that can be played is determined), when the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display the "upper lip" or "upper bell" is determined. When the above-mentioned "lower lip" or "lower bell" is displayed (that is, when the internal winning combination in which the "lower lip" or "lower bell" can be displayed is determined), the ally side While the damage lottery described later is performed, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, the "middle rip" or "middle bell" can be displayed. (Not), the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "upper lip" or "upper bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the above-mentioned "lower lip" Or, when the "lower bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "lower bell" or "lower bell" can be displayed is not determined) and the "hit lip" ("F_hit lip") is won. Is an attack on the enemy side, and the damage lottery described later is not performed, but the damage lottery at the time of the impact rip described later is performed.

In FIG. 40, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state), in the case of acquiring allies "1" to "3" (that is, "1" to "3" are given as information corresponding to the ally character. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device (11). Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description here is omitted.

The display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", "lower line attack effective", and "counter available" when allies "1" to "3" are acquired. This means that when the ally characters "1" to "3" are assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41). ) And the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state, and when the “hit lip” (“F_hit lip”) is hit. It means that the counter lottery at the time of hitting and the damage lottery at the time of the counter, which will be described later, can be performed.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring allies "1" to "3", in the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2", the damage lottery described later and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip described later are performed. Is the same, but in addition to that, the above-mentioned "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "middle-stage lip" or "middle-stage bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the above-mentioned The "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display the "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not determined), and the above-mentioned "lower lip" or "lower bell" Is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "lower rip" or "lower bell" can be displayed is not determined), and when the "hit rip" ("F_hit rip") is won, the hit rip described later Before the time damage lottery is performed, a counter attack is performed at the time of hitting to decide whether or not to activate the counter attack, and if this is won, it will be an attack on the ally side, and the counter time damage lottery described later will be performed. Is performed, and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip, which will be described later, is not performed.

In FIG. 41, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state), when allies "1" to "4" are acquired (that is, "1" to "4" are given as information corresponding to the ally characters. It is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the display device (11). Since the basic display contents are the same as those in FIG. 37, the description here is omitted.

The display device 11 displays "middle line attack effective", "upper line attack effective", "lower line attack effective", "counter available", and "defense available" when allies "1" to "4" are acquired. doing. This means that when the ally characters "1" to "4" are assigned in the battle state, the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41) and the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41). ) And the bottom line (“DL3” in FIGS. 39 to 41) function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state, and when the “shot lip” (“F_shot lip”) is won. It means that the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip and the damage lottery at the time of counter can be performed, and even if the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip described later is not won, the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip described later can be performed. ing.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of acquiring allies "1" to "4", in the case of acquiring allies "1" and "2", the damage lottery described later, the damage lottery at the time of the impact rip described later, and the impact described below. The mode in which the counter lottery at the time of rip and the damage lottery at the time of counter are performed is the same, but in addition, the above-mentioned "middle rip" or "middle bell" is not displayed (that is, "middle rip" or "middle bell". The internal winning combination that can display "" is not determined), the above-mentioned "upper lip" or "upper bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination that can display "upper lip" or "upper bell" is determined. (Not), the above-mentioned "lower lip" or "lower bell" is not displayed (that is, the internal winning combination in which the "lower lip" or "lower bell" can be displayed is not determined), and the "hit lip" (" In the case of hitting "F_Bombed Lip"), a counter lottery at the time of hitting rip is performed to determine whether or not to activate a counter attack before the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip described later is performed, and this is won. If you do not do so, a defense lottery will be performed at the time of hitting rip, and if you win this, it will be an attack on the enemy side, but the defense will be successful and the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip will not be performed. ..

In the present embodiment, the damage lottery described later is performed only when the "replay" symbol and the "bell" symbol are actually aligned on the line set as the determination line. If the "bell" symbols are not actually aligned due to a player's push order error even though the push order notification has been made, the damage lottery described later may not be performed. , When the internal winning combination that the "replay" symbol or "bell" symbol can be aligned (can be displayed) is determined on the line set as the judgment line, the "replay" symbol or "bell" is actually determined. The damage lottery described later may be performed regardless of whether or not the symbols of "" are aligned. Any of these methods can be adopted. When the latter method is adopted, the "judgment line" is no longer the line in which the "judgment" itself is actually performed, but it has the meaning of making it possible to notify the player, for example, that the damage lottery will be performed. As it becomes a thing, it still has an important meaning for the player.

Further, in FIGS. 37 to 41, an example in which the ally characters "1" to "4" increase in order is described. However, depending on the result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, for example, " It may be given only "2", only "3", only "4", or "2" and "3", "3" and "4". Therefore, in the following, the functions of the information "1" to "4" corresponding to the ally character will be briefly described again.

When the information "1" corresponding to the ally character is set, in addition to the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41), the top line ("DL2" in FIGS. 38 to 41) is in a line battle state. It comes to function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of.

When the information "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, in addition to the center line ("DL1" in FIGS. 37 to 41), the bottom line ("DL3" in FIGS. 39 to 41) is in a line battle state. It comes to function as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of.

When the information "3" corresponding to the ally character is set, even if the ally HP is reduced due to the attack on the enemy side, the enemy HP is reduced due to the attack on the ally side. Will come to be.

When the information "4" corresponding to the ally character is set, the ally HP may not be reduced even if the ally HP is originally reduced due to the attack on the enemy side.

Here, regardless of whether the information "1" or "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). When the winning combination numbers "7", "8", or "24" are transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 blinks, for example, the part displayed as "middle line attack effective" on the display device 11. Perform processing such as making it appear or highlighting it. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the ally side expect to attack.

Further, when the information "1" corresponding to the ally character is set, the winning combination number "6" is set from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). Or, when "23" is transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 performs processing such as blinking or highlighting the portion displayed as "upper line attack effective" on the display device 11, for example. I do. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the ally side expect to attack.

Further, when the information "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the winning combination number "10" is set from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side) to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). Alternatively, when "25" is transmitted (see FIG. 32), the sub CPU 201 blinks or highlights the portion displayed as "lower line attack effective" on the display device 11, for example. Is processed. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that makes the ally side expect to attack.

However, the mode of production that makes the ally side expect to attack is not limited to this. For example, it may be an effect performed by another effect device (for example, a speaker group 84 or an LED group 85). Further, even when the winning combination number of the internal winning combination that is not in the above-mentioned correspondence relationship is transmitted, one of the above-mentioned effects may be performed with a predetermined probability.

The types and functions of information corresponding to the ally character are not limited to those described above. For example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "5") is set, the damage dealt determined in the damage dealt lottery described later increases (for example, the determined damage dealt is doubled). ) May be provided. Further, for example, when the information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "6") is set, the damage received in the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip, which will be described later, is reduced (for example, the determined damage received). May be halved).

Further, the line that functions as the determination line is not limited to the effective line. For example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character is set, even if it is a line different from the effective line, it may be set as a special line and this special line may be made to function as a determination line. Specifically, for example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "5") is set, the cross-down line functions as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state in addition to the center line. You may try to do it. Further, for example, when information corresponding to a specific ally character (for example, "6") is set, in addition to the center line, the cross-up line functions as a judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state. You may.

In such a case, the symbols displayed on the actual effective line are not the "Replay" symbol alignment or the "Bell" symbol alignment, but the symbols displayed on such a special line are the "Replay" symbols. If it is configured so that the symbols of "" or "bell" are aligned, the player can recognize that the degree of advantage fluctuates in the same way as the effective lines, regardless of the actual number of effective lines. However, it is possible to provide the same playability. From this point of view, the judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state does not necessarily include the effective line. For example, when the effective line is one line of the cross-up line, the line battle The determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the state may be composed of a maximum of three lines of a center line, a top line, and a bottom line. That is, it is also possible to configure the judgment line regarding the fluctuation of the continuation degree of the line battle state only from the special line different from the effective line.

Further, when defining the determination line, similarly to the above-mentioned effective line, it is possible to define as an effective line instead of each line in which the symbols are aligned, or at the same time, a line in which the symbols are not aligned in a straight line. .. That is, if the line passes through (the area of) any one of the symbols in each row (left reel 3L, middle reel 3C, right reel 3R), one or a plurality of lines composed of straight lines or polygonal lines are connected. It can be set as a judgment line.

For example, a line connecting the upper region of the left reel 3L, the lower region of the middle reel 3C, and the upper region of the right reel 3R (irregular line at V) may be defined as the determination line. That is, in the present embodiment, since the symbols are displayed in the form of 3 rows × 3 columns in the frame of the reel display window 4, it is possible to define 27 kinds of determination lines. , At least one of them may be defined as a determination line.

Here, the explanation of the battle state is returned to again. As described above, when the information "3" corresponding to the ally character is set, when the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip") is won, the counter lottery at the time of the hit rip is performed. In the counter lottery at the time of hitting, the main CPU 101 determines with a predetermined probability whether to activate the counter attack (winning) or not to activate the counter attack (non-winning). The table referred to in the counter lottery at the time of hitting is not shown.

If the counter lottery at the time of hitting is won, the damage damage lottery at the time of the counter is subsequently performed. In the counter-time damage lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the counter-time damage lottery table shown in FIG. 36C, and determines the value of any one of the damages given based on the lottery value. When the value of the damage dealt is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the enemy HP, and the value of the enemy HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the enemy is updated as appropriate. Further, in this case, the damage lottery is not performed at the time of hitting the rip.

On the other hand, when the counter lottery at the time of hitting is not won, the information "4" corresponding to the ally character is set, and the information "3" corresponding to the ally character is not set, but " If "4" is set, a defensive lottery will be performed when the ball is hit. In the hit counter lottery, the main CPU 101 determines with a predetermined probability whether to activate the defense (winning) or not to activate the defense (non-winning). In addition, the table referred to in the defense lottery at the time of hitting is not shown.

If you win the defensive lottery at the time of hitting rip, the damage lottery at the time of hitting rip will not be performed. On the other hand, if the defensive lottery at the time of hitting rip is not won, the information "4" corresponding to the ally character is not set but "3" is set, and the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip is won. If there is no information, and if the information "3" and "4" corresponding to the ally character are not set and the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip") is hit, the hit rip is received. Damage lottery is done.

In the hit rip damage lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the hit rip damage lottery table shown in FIG. 36D, and determines one of the damage values based on the enemy type and the lottery value. .. When the value of the damage received is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the ally HP, and the value of the ally HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the ally is updated as appropriate.

When the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the ally character are not set, and the internal winning combination in which the "middle lip" or "middle bell" can be displayed is determined, and the watermelon (in this case). , "F_watermelon 1" or "F_watermelon 2" may be included. The same shall apply hereinafter in this section), a damage lottery will be drawn. It is said.

When the information "1" corresponding to the ally character is set, the internal winning combination in which the "middle rip" or "middle bell" or the "upper rip" or "upper bell" can be displayed has been determined. If, and if the watermelon is determined to be the internal winning combination, a damage lottery will be conducted.

When the information "2" corresponding to the ally character is set, the internal winning combination in which the "middle rip" or "middle bell" or the "lower rip" or "lower bell" can be displayed has been determined. If, and if the watermelon is determined to be the internal winning combination, a damage lottery will be conducted.

When the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the ally character are set, "middle rip" or "middle bell", "upper rip" or "upper bell", or "lower rip" or "lower rip" or " When the internal winning combination in which the "lower bell" can be displayed is determined, and when the watermelon is determined as the internal winning combination, a damage lottery is performed.

In the damage-damage lottery, the main CPU 101 refers to the damage-damage lottery table shown in FIG. 36E, and determines any one of the damage-damaged values based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value. When the value of the damage dealt is determined, the value is subtracted from the value of the enemy HP, and the value of the enemy HP is updated. Along with this, the above-mentioned "status" of the enemy is updated as appropriate.

Here, focusing on the RT state, the line battle state of the advantageous section basically corresponds to the RT2 state, but when the "RT3 transition" is displayed, it can also be the RT3 state. Referring to FIG. 16, in the RT2 state, the lottery value of "F_middle rip 1" is "5000", the lottery value of "F_upper rip" and "F_lower rip" is "2450", and "F_shot". While the lottery value of "rip" is "8970", in the RT3 state, the lottery value of "F_middle lip 2" is "32768" and the lottery value of "F_shot lip" is "0".

That is, if it is possible to shift to the RT3 state in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) of the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not the information "1" or "2" corresponding to the ally character is set. Instead, as a result of determining the internal winning combination that can display the "middle rip" with a high probability, it is possible to make the damage lottery performed with a high probability, and the internal winning combination that can display the "hit rip" can be displayed. As a result of not being determined, it is possible to prevent the damage lottery from being performed at the time of hitting the rip. Therefore, in the line battle state (more specifically, the battle state) of the advantageous section, the RT3 state is the most advantageous RT state.

In the battle state, if the enemy HP becomes "0" or less (that is, "defeat" as the status) before the battle state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right-granting lottery state of the advantageous section from the next game. If the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state has not ended, the battle state is continued. In addition, when the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state ends, the game shifts to the continuous lottery state in the line battle state from the next game.

In the present embodiment, when the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip") is won, the counter lottery at the time of the hit rip, the defense lottery at the time of the hit rip, and the damage lottery at the time of the hit rip are performed. The lottery method in the battle state is not limited to this. For example, if an internal winning role (excluding "weak rare role", "chance eye", and bonus role) that is not subject to the damage lottery is determined, "shot lip" ("F_shot lip") ), The counter lottery at the time of the hit rip, the defense lottery at the time of the hit rip, and the damage lottery at the time of the hit rip may be performed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the "shot rip" ("F_shot rip") is hit, the combination of the "shot rip" symbols is displayed on the center line. For example, a plurality of hit rips are displayed. It is configured as a different internal winning combination, or "shot lip" ("F_shot lip") is configured as a push order replay, and the combination of the "shot lip" symbols is displayed on the top line according to the procedure of the stop operation. , Or may be displayed on the bottom line. In this case, if the top line or bottom line is the judgment line, the counter lottery at the time of hitting rip, the defense lottery at the time of hitting rip, and the damage receiving lottery at the time of hitting rip may be performed. The lottery may not be held. Also, if the top line or bottom line is the judgment line, the stop operation procedure may be notified so that the combination of the "shot lip" symbols is not displayed on the top line or bottom line. good.

(Continuous lottery state)
As described above, when the enemy HP is not "0" or less and the game period in the battle state ends, the main CPU 101 next shifts to the continuous lottery state in the line battle state. The continuous lottery state is a state in which it continues for 4 games or 7 games, and finally, if it is decided to shift from the line battle state to the right acquisition lottery state, the right acquisition lottery state is entered. If it is decided to continue the line battle state, the game shifts to the interval state in the line battle state again, and if none of these decisions are made, the line battle state ends ( That is, the advantageous section ends), and the normal state of the non-advantageous section is entered.

In the continuous lottery state, continuous lottery and continuous lottery result rewriting lottery can be performed according to the enemy type and the damage state. It should be noted that the lottery related to these playability is an example, and other lottery can be performed in the continuous lottery state.

First, the main CPU 101 performs continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state when shifting from the battle state to the continuous lottery state. In the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state, the main CPU 101 refers to the continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 36F, and determines the enemy type, the damage state (that is, synonymous with the above-mentioned "status"), the lottery value, and the lottery value. Based on the above, the game period in the continuous lottery state is 4 games, but it is not decided whether to shift to the right acquisition lottery state or to continue the line battle state (“4G defeat”), and the game period in the continuous lottery state. Is 7 games, but it is not decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state or to continue the line battle state ("7G defeat"), the game period of the continuous lottery state is 4 games, and the line battle state is changed. It is decided to continue ("4G continuation"), the game period in the continuous lottery state is 7 games, and it is decided to continue the line battle state ("7G continuation"), the continuous lottery state The game period is 4 games and it is decided to shift to the right acquisition lottery state (“4G promotion”), and the game period in the continuous lottery state is 7 games and it is possible to shift to the right acquisition lottery state. One of the things to be decided (“7G promotion”) is decided.

In addition, in the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state, at least the lottery result (“4G continuation”, “7G continuation”, “4G promotion”, and “7G promotion” described above) in which the advantageous section is not completed is determined. As a general rule, the probability increases in the order of enemy type "A", "B", "C", "D", and ally status is "wreck", "medium damage", "small damage". The order of "break" and "normal" is increased, and the enemy status is increased in the order of "normal", "small damage", "medium damage", and "wreck". That is, the three parameters of the enemy type, the ally status, and the enemy status are referred to, and whether or not the advantageous section continues is determined.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the battle state is entered, the information corresponding to which enemy character is set, how the ally status changes during the battle state, and which enemy status is during the battle state. It is possible to change the degree of continuation of the line battle state depending on how it changes. In addition, when changing the ally status and the enemy status, the type of information corresponding to the ally character (for example, the number of judgment lines) is important, and the degree of continuation of the line battle state is advantageous to the player. The probability of fluctuating the game or fluctuating it to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player also fluctuates.

In the continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 36F, when the ally status is "wreck" and the enemy status is "wreck", it is exceptionally determined that at least the lottery result in which the advantageous section is not completed is determined. It has become. In this way, when the ally status is a specific status and the enemy status is a specific status, contrary to the above-mentioned principle, the probability that the advantageous section continues is increased or the probability that the advantageous section continues is decreased. You can also do it.

Further, when the main CPU 101 shifts from the battle state to the continuous lottery state, the lottery result of the continuous lottery according to the enemy type and the damage state is the lottery result at which the advantageous section ends (the above-mentioned "4G defeat" and "4G defeat" and ". In the case of "7G defeat"), the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed in the continuous lottery state. Specifically, in the continuous lottery state, when the "chance eye" or the bonus combination is won, for example, if "4G defeat" is determined as the lottery result of the continuous lottery, it is rewritten to "4G continuation", for example. If "7G defeat" has been decided, rewrite it as "7G continuation". Further, when a watermelon (in this case, only "F_watermelon 1" or "F_watermelon 2" may be included) is won, a continuous lottery is performed with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/2). Decide to rewrite the lottery result of. When it is decided to rewrite the lottery result of the continuous lottery, the lottery result of the continuous lottery is appropriately rewritten in the same manner as described above.

In the present embodiment, after the continuous lottery is performed according to the enemy type and the damage state, the continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed, but the lottery method in the continuous lottery state is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous lottery state, first, a continuous lottery result rewriting lottery is performed (that is, a lottery is performed for each game to determine whether or not to continue the line battle state based on the internal winning combination), and the lottery is performed. If it is not decided to continue the line battle state as a result of, when the continuous lottery state ends, the continuous lottery may be performed according to the enemy type and the damage state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section, whether one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether it is an effective line) is used as a determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous section. It is possible to determine, and in the battle state during the line battle state, when the "replay" or "bell" symbols are displayed side by side on the determined judgment line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section is set to the degree advantageous to the player. It is possible to make it fluctuate, and in the continuous lottery state during the line battle state, it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous section based on the degree of continuation of the determined advantageous section.

As a result, the degree of continuation of the advantageous section can be changed according to the determination result of the determination line, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the continuation of the advantageous state for the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the battle state during the line battle state, when the determined determination line displays, for example, the combination of the symbols of the "shot lip", the degree of continuation of the advantageous section is disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to change it to a certain degree.

As a result, it is possible to increase the tension during the advantageous section (for example, during the battle state during the line battle state), the game during the advantageous section does not become monotonous, and the interest regarding the continuation of the advantageous state for the player is It can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to shift the RT state in the line battle state of the advantageous section to the RT2 state, and when the "RT3 transition" is displayed, the RT state in the line battle state of the advantageous section is displayed. Can be transferred to the RT3 state, and a specific internal winning combination (for example, "F_middle rip 1" and "F_middle rip 1") in which a combination of symbols of "middle rip" can be displayed on the determined judgment line The probability of determining any of the "rip 2") is higher in the RT3 state than in the RT2 state.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the RT2 state, it is possible to determine a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, "F_shot lip") in which the combination of the symbols of the "shot lip" can be displayed, and in the RT3 state, this predetermined value. It is not possible to determine the internal winning combination of.

As a result, in the advantageous section (for example, during the battle state during the line battle state), the degree of the player's advantage further varies depending on which RT state is in the game. It is possible to make the game more versatile and to improve the interest in continuing the state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 1", "F_upper left bell 1" and "batting order 1" in which a combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the top line When the stop operation is performed with, "F_middle left bell 1" where the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the center line, and when the stop operation is performed with "batting order 3", at the top line "F_Upper middle bell 1" that displays the combination of "bell" symbols and "F_" that displays the combination of "bell" symbols on the center line when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 3" "Middle middle bell 1" can be determined at least as an internal winning combination, and as shown in FIG. 32, for example, "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_upper middle bell 1" is determined in the advantageous section. In that case, "23" is transmitted as the winning combination number, and when "F_middle left bell 1" or "F_middle middle bell 1" is determined, "24" is transmitted as the winning combination number. It has become. Then, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute different effects according to the transmitted winning combination number.

As a result, for example, when the player has a playability in which the degree of advantage of the player varies depending on the line on which the symbol is displayed, such as the line battle state of the advantageous section, the effect related to the combination of the displayed symbols. Therefore, it is possible to perform a more appropriate effect without increasing the control load.

<Right acquisition lottery state and playability during the right acquisition state>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the flow of the game during the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 42 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the right acquisition lottery state and the right acquisition state.

(Right acquisition lottery preparation status)
The main CPU 101 wins a bonus combination in the right acquisition lottery preparation state, the right acquisition lottery state, and the right acquisition state of the advantageous section, and shifts to the right acquisition lottery preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends. (That is, return to these states). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the right acquisition lottery preparation state is maintained until the RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT2 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, if the bonus role is the right acquisition state, the right acquisition state is entered, and if the bonus role is the right acquisition lottery state, the right acquisition lottery state is entered. Let me.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. When the state shifts to the RT3 state, the right acquisition lottery preparation state is terminated, and when returning to the right acquisition state, the right acquisition state is returned, and when returning to the right acquisition lottery state, the right acquisition lottery state is set. It may be restored.

(Right acquisition lottery state)
As described above, when the right acquisition lottery preparation state is completed and when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right acquisition lottery state. The right acquisition lottery state is in a state of continuing for 20 games, and of course, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified during this period. And even if it does not shift to the right acquisition state, it returns to the line battle state. Therefore, this right acquisition lottery state is a game state in which the game period of the advantageous section can be extended by itself. In the right acquisition state lottery, the right acquisition state transition lottery is performed.

In the right acquisition state transition lottery, for example, in the right acquisition state lottery state, the main CPU 101 may be only the "chance eye" or the watermelon (in this case, "F_watermelon 1" or includes "F_watermelon 2". If you win, it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state from the next game. In addition, when a common bell (“F_upper common bell” and “F_middle common bell”) is won, it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state from the next game with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4). Even if it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state, the transition to the right acquisition state may occur when the game period (20 games) in the right acquisition lottery state ends. In addition, when it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state, the precursor period is determined within the range of the remaining number of games in the game period in the right acquisition lottery state, and when this precursor period elapses, the transition to the right acquisition state is performed. You may do so. In addition, when shifting from the right acquisition lottery state to the right acquisition state, if the number of remaining games in the game period in the right acquisition lottery state occurs, the remaining number of games is added to the game period in the right acquisition state. Alternatively, it may be added to the game period in the right acquisition lottery state next time (when the right acquisition state returns to the right acquisition lottery state).

(Right acquisition status)
As described above, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition state in the right acquisition lottery state, and when returning from the right acquisition lottery preparation state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the right acquisition state. The right acquisition state is a state in which it continues for 10 games, and of course, information on a stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified during this period. Then, regardless of whether or not the permanent right is acquired, the right acquisition lottery state is returned. Therefore, this right acquisition state is a game state in which the game period of the advantageous section can be extended by itself. In the right acquisition state, a permanent right acquisition lottery is performed.

In the permanent right acquisition lottery, it is decided in advance whether or not to grant the right to permanently acquire the ally character (until the end of the advantageous section), in addition to the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later. NS. The main CPU 101 decides to grant a permanent right, for example, when a bonus combination is won in the right acquisition state. In addition, for example, based on winning a specific combination (for example, "watermelon 1"), it may be decided to grant a permanent right with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/4).

Here, if it is decided to grant the permanent right as a result of the permanent right lottery, each time the battle state is entered, the number of the ally character that was not granted as a result of the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle is the highest. A small numbered ally character is given. For example, in the ally type lottery at the time of entering the battle, which will be described later, when the ally character "2" is given, if the permanent right is acquired, the ally character "1" will be further given. The function of the granted permanent right is not limited to this. For example, if it is decided to grant the perpetual right as a result of the perpetual right lottery, the number of the ally character to which the perpetual right is not granted is fixedly assigned to the lowest number. You may. For example, when the perpetual right is first granted, the ally character "1" is granted as the right content of this perpetual right, and when the perpetual right is granted next, the ally character "2" is granted as the right content of this perpetual right. May be given.

In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the permanent right is granted in the right acquisition state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the above-mentioned limited right is granted in the right acquisition state. It may be decided whether or not to do so. In this case, for example, a lottery similar to the above-mentioned ally acquisition lottery may be performed, or the above-mentioned limited right is provided so that the probability of granting the limited right is higher than that of the above-mentioned ally acquisition lottery. It may be decided whether or not it is granted. Further, for example, in the right acquisition state, whether or not the above-mentioned limited right is granted is determined for each unit game with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/10) regardless of the internal winning combination. May be good. If a permanent right or a limited right is granted at an opportunity other than the bonus winning combination, a plurality of rights can be acquired in the right acquisition state.

In this case, as described above, for example, when two rights are granted (when the information "1" and "2" corresponding to the ally character are set), the upper limit number of judgment lines is set in the battle state. (DL1 to DL3) will be set. In addition, for example, when three rights are granted (when the information "1" to "3" corresponding to the ally character is set), in addition to this, the counter may be activated in the battle state. Will be. In addition, for example, when four rights are granted (when information "1" to "4" corresponding to the ally character is set), in addition to this, defense may be activated in the battle state. Will be. Here, for example, when five or more rights are granted in the right acquisition state, the rights for more than four may be carried over to the next battle state or destroyed (cleared). It may be done. Further, for example, when five or more rights are granted in the right acquisition state, it may be determined that the advantageous section will always continue in the continuous lottery state after the end of the next battle state.

Further, in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not a permanent right is granted so that the line battle state of the advantageous section can be advanced advantageously (information corresponding to the ally character can be set) in the right acquisition state. However, the content of rights that can be granted in the state of acquisition of rights is not limited to this. For example, in the continuous lottery state of the line battle state, the continuation right that the line battle state is forcibly continued regardless of the lottery result (that is, the right to extend the advantageous section. "Stock" or "number of sets" It may be decided whether or not the right acquisition lottery state is granted, or the right acquisition lottery state is forcibly continued regardless of the lottery result in the right acquisition lottery state. It may be determined whether or not the right to continue (that is, the right to extend the advantageous section, sometimes referred to as "stock", "number of sets", etc.) is granted. That is, in the right acquisition state, the content of the right that can be granted can be appropriately set as long as it brings benefits to the player.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the line battle state of the advantageous section, whether one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether it is an effective line) is used as a determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous section. It is possible to make a decision, and the result of the decision varies depending on whether or not the right has been granted in the state of acquisition of the right. That is, it is possible to determine the determination line based on the rights granted in the right acquisition state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the right of the upper limit number or more of the judgment line is granted in the right acquisition state, first, the judgment line of the upper limit number is determined by using the right of the upper limit number. Then, in the battle state during the line battle state, for example, when the combination of the symbols of "shot lip" is displayed on the determined determination line, if the granted right does not remain, the advantageous section is continued. If the degree is changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player and the granted right remains, it is possible not to change the degree of continuation of the advantageous section to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the perpetual right is granted, a plurality of determination lines are always determined, and when the perpetual right is not granted, one or more determination lines are determined. One of the lines is determined as the judgment line.

As a result, the role of each gaming state in the advantageous section can be diversified, and the degree of continuation of the advantageous section can be varied in various ways. be able to.

<Playability during ending 1 state and ending 2 state>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 43 and 44, the flow of the game during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state of the advantageous section will be described. Note that FIG. 43 shows an outline of the flow of the game during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state. Further, FIG. 44 shows an outline of the ending effect performed during the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state.

(Preparing for ending)
The main CPU 101 wins a bonus combination in the ending preparation state, the ending 1 state, and the ending 2 state of the advantageous section, and shifts to the ending preparation state when the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends (that is, these). To return to the state of). In this case, the RT state when the bonus state ends is the RT4 state (see FIG. 13), and the ending state is maintained until the RT state shifts from the RT4 state to the RT2 state. When the RT state shifts to the RT2 state, if the bonus combination is in the ending 1 state, the process shifts to the ending 1 state, and if the bonus combination is won in the ending 2 state, the process shifts to the ending 2 state.

In this case, since the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is not performed until the "RT1 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state. After the RT state shifts to the RT1 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. Further, in this case, even when the "RT3 transition" is displayed in the RT4 state and the state shifts to the RT3 state, the push order notification for the push order small winning combination and the push order replay is started. When the RT3 state is entered, the ending preparation state is terminated, and when returning to the ending 1 state, the ending 1 state is restored, and when returning to the ending 2 state, the ending 2 state is restored. You may.

Further, when the main CPU 101 is determined to shift to the ending 1 state in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, for example, by the ART lottery at the time of winning the watermelon 1, the game period of the normal advantageous section is exhausted. At that time, it shifts to the ending ready state (that is, waits for the transition to the ending 1 state until it shifts to the RT2 state).

(Ending 1 state)
As described above, when the ending preparation state is completed and the process shifts (returns) to the ending 1 state, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending 1 state. The ending 1 state is a state in which it continues for 100 games, and during this time, of course, information on a stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified. Then, when the ending 1 state is completed, the line battle state is entered. It is the same as the line battle state in that it is in the gaming state of the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section transitioning from the normal advantageous section, but the gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the line battle state. In the ending 1 state, a permanent right acquisition lottery is performed in the same manner as in the right acquisition state.

As with the lottery in the right acquisition state, in the ending 1 state, it may be determined whether or not the above-mentioned limited right is granted, or the continuation right for extending the advantageous section is granted. It may be decided whether or not it is done.

Further, for example, in the ending 1 state, if the bonus combination is won, the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, and the game returns to the ending 1 state via the ending preparation state, the game period of 100 games is repeated. It may be counted from the beginning, or it may be counted by taking over the game period in the game that won the bonus role. In the latter case, for example, the bonus combination is won in the 10th game (90 games remaining) in the ending 1 state, the bonus state based on the bonus combination ends, and the player returns to the ending 1 state via the ending preparation state. In that case, the game period of the ending 1 state may be 90 games.

Further, the game period in the bonus state may be included in the game period in the ending 1 state. For example, in the 10th game (90 games remaining) in the ending 1 state, the bonus combination is won, the game period of the bonus state based on the bonus combination is 17 games, the bonus state ends, and the ending preparation state is passed. When the game is returned to the ending 1 state, the game period of the ending 1 state may be 73 games.

(Ending 2 state)
When the number of games played in the advantageous section is "1200" or more and the interval state of the line battle state ends, the main CPU 101 shifts to the ending 2 state. The ending 2 state is a state in which it continues for 131 games, and during this time, of course, information on a stop operation that is advantageous for the player is notified. Then, when the ending 2 state ends, the advantageous section itself also ends, and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section.

In this case, when the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period reaches "1200" times (or more times, for example, "1369" times), the game may be shifted to the ending 2 state. good. Further, in this case, even when there are other gaming states in the advantageous section, the transition from these gaming states to the ending 2 state may be performed. Further, the mode of counting the game period in the ending 2 state is the same as the mode of counting the game period in the ending 1 state.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the ending 2 state ends, the advantageous section itself ends, and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, but the present invention is not limited to this. When the ending 2 state ends, if the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period has not yet reached "1500" times, the line battle state may be shifted again. Alternatively, the ending 2 state may be continued until the above-mentioned regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times.

(Ending production)
Next, with reference to FIG. 44, an ending effect that can be performed in the ending 1 state and the ending 2 state will be described.

As the phrase indicates, the ending effect is basically an effect that suggests that the advantageous section will be terminated soon when the period controlled by the advantageous section becomes "1200" times or more. It has become. Further, considering the probability that the period controlled in the advantageous section will be "1200" times or more, the special effect has a lower probability of being executed than other effects.

The ending production is configured as, for example, a series of story productions consisting of episodes 1 to 8 and the final episode, and as the game period in the ending 2 state progresses, the content of the story also progresses. There is. As described above, in the case where the ending 2 state is configured to be continuous from the period when the ending 2 state is controlled to the advantageous section is "1200" times until the regulation monitoring period is "1500" times. The content of the story may be advanced according to the game period until the regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times.

Here, in the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state when the advantageous section is started, the ending 1 state is started even though the advantageous section has just started. The ending effect is executed inside.

However, in the ending 1 state, a part of the above-mentioned series of story productions is executed, and not all of them are executed. Specifically, the first to eighth episodes of the first to eighth episodes and the final episodes are executed, but the final episode is not executed. In this case as well, as in the ending 2 state, basically, the content of the story progresses as the game period in the ending 1 state progresses.

A specific example in which a part of the above-mentioned series of story effects is executed in the ending 1 state will be described with reference to FIG. 44. For example, in the ending preparation state, an introduction effect of the ending effect is performed. Then, when the ending 1 state is started (ART start), the ending effect is started, and the story progresses in sequence, such as the first episode, the second episode, the eighth episode, and so on. Then, when the eighth episode is completed, a character such as "continue" is displayed on the display device 11, indicating that the story is not completed.

On the other hand, in the ending 2 state, when the ending 2 state is started (advantageous section ≥ 1200 interval state ends), the ending effect is started, and the first episode, the second episode, ... The story goes on. Then, when the eighth episode is completed, the story of the final episode is developed next, and when the story of the final episode is completed, a character such as "THE END" is displayed on the display device 11, indicating that the story is completed. ..

It should be noted that the above-mentioned production content of the ending effect shows an example of the production content of the ending effect that can be executed over a plurality of games, and the production content of the ending effect is not limited to this. Any production content may be used as long as it is a production content that is valuable to the player.

For example, if there is an animation or character used as a motif of pachislot 1, in the ending effect in the ending 2 state, a special image of the animation or a special image of the character that cannot normally be seen is displayed on the display device 11. It should be. In this case, in the ending effect in the ending 1 state, the contents of these images are made shorter than the ending effect in the ending 2 state (for example, summarized, halfway through, or as a separate content) and displayed on the display device 11. It should be. However, instead of or in combination with these, each ending effect can be performed according to the music and sound output from the speaker group 84 and the light emitting mode by the LED group 85.

In addition, the ending effect may be such that the content of the effect progresses regardless of the number of remaining games. For example, the time required for a unit game is tentatively set to "6 seconds" (this value is arbitrary), and the ending effect in the ending 2 state is set as a series of "6 seconds x 131 games = 786 seconds". This series of effects is started at the timing controlled to the ending 2 state, and the ending effect in the ending 1 state is a part of the series of effects of "6 seconds x 100 games = 600 seconds". It is also possible to start a part of this series of effects at the timing controlled to the ending 1 state. In this way, it is not necessary to advance the ending effect according to the number of games, so that the control burden related to the effect can be reduced. Further, in this case, when the execution of the above-mentioned series of effects is completed at a timing before the end of the advantageous section, the screen at the end is displayed as it is until the end of the advantageous section. Alternatively, the series of effects described above may be started again from the beginning (or from the middle) (that is, may be executed in a loop). Further, in this case, if the advantageous section ends at a timing before the execution of the above-mentioned series of effects is completed, the above-mentioned series of effects may be forcibly ended even in the middle of the process. However, the series of effects described above may be executed to the end.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, in the advantageous section, until the game period in the advantageous section becomes "1200" times (or until the ending 1 state is entered). , It is decided to continue the advantageous section (for example, it is decided to continue the line battle state in the continuous lottery state of the line battle state, or the right acquisition lottery state ends and then shifts to the interval state. ) Every time, the display device 11 executes a suggestion effect that suggests a guideline for the period controlled in the advantageous section.

Specifically, for example, a progress bar or a map divided into 12 squares is displayed in a predetermined area in the display device 11, and 1 square is displayed every time 100 games are played during the game period in the advantageous section. Suggestion effects such as making the display mode different one by one are executed. In this way, it becomes possible to grasp the approximate number of game periods in the advantageous section. In addition, for example, a section such as a progress bar or a map may be set to 15 squares, and the degree of digestion during the regulation monitoring period may be displayed. Further, these are examples of the display contents of the suggestion effect, and the display contents are not limited to this. For example, the actual number of games played during the game period in the advantageous section may be displayed.

Further, the suggestion effect may be displayed only during the first game in the interval state, or may be displayed during the interval state (between three games). Further, it may be displayed only in the line battle state where the advantageous section may end, or it may be always displayed in each game state in the advantageous section.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ending 2 state is reached, the ending effect (special effect) can be executed, and when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the ending 1 is performed. When it is decided to shift to the state, it is possible to execute a part of the ending effect (special effect) in the ending 1 state.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the special effect, which is a part of the special effect that can be executed at the end of the game in a state advantageous to the player, satisfies a predetermined execution condition. , It can be executed in the early stage of the game in a state favorable to the player. As a result, the player will play the game while wanting to see all the special effects, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased and the interest of the effects can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, the regulation monitoring period becomes "1500" times, which is advantageous from the time when the ending 2 state is reached to the end of the advantageous section after 131 games have passed, or from the time when the ending 2 state is reached. It is possible to execute the ending effect (special effect) until the end of the section. As a result, even when the acquisition of the game medium is restricted, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, each time it is determined to continue the advantageous section until the game period in the advantageous section becomes "1200" times of the game or until the game shifts to the ending 1 state, the advantageous section is controlled. It is possible to carry out a suggestion effect that suggests a guideline for the period of time. As a result, the player can generally grasp the time when the execution of the special effect is started and the time when the advantageous section ends, so that it is possible to provide the player with appropriate information while enhancing the interest of the game. can.

(Other examples of ending control)
In the present embodiment, when the advantageous section reaches, for example, 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section, the limit process for ending the advantageous section is executed even if the number of remaining games remains, but the stage where it is confirmed that the limit process will be performed in the future. (For example, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section becomes equal to or higher than the specified value), the main control board 71 sets the ball ejection state to "ending" (for example, ending 2 state). Transition. On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 does not immediately shift the effect state on the sub side to the "ending" even when the ball ejection state is shifted to the "ending" on the main side, and is predetermined. The production state is shifted to "ending" when the condition is used. In particular, the details of the control in which the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the “ending” will be described below. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section may include a "normal advantageous section" or the like, but in this example, the "advantageous section" and the "ART" will be described as being in exactly the same gaming state.

In this example, a main side counter that counts on the main (main control board 71) side and a sub side counter that counts on the sub (main control board 71) side are provided in relation to the advantageous section. The main control board 71 uses the first counter to count the number of games elapsed during the advantageous section (the number of digested games), and uses the second counter to continue the advantageous section for a period (the number of remaining games). ) Is counted. When the value of the first counter reaches "1500", the main control board 71 performs limit processing, ends the advantageous section regardless of the value of the second counter, and the value of the first counter becomes "1500". If the value of the second counter reaches "0" before reaching, the advantageous section ends.

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 uses the third counter to count the number of games elapsed during the advantageous section (the number of digested games), and uses the fourth counter to continue the advantageous section for a period of time (the number of games that have been digested). The period of notification to the player (number of games remaining) is counted, and the game during the period (number of games remaining) during which the advantageous section can be continued using the fifth counter. The unreported period (the number of unreported games (= the number of hidden additional games)) is counted for the person. When the sub-control board 72 notifies the number of hidden additional games, the number of notified games is added and the number of unreported games is subtracted by the number of notified games.

Since the number of digested games counted in both the main and sub is basically the same, the value of the first counter on the main side and the value of the third counter on the sub side are the same (note that the advantageous section). If "ART" and "ART" do not match, the limit processing is not performed on the sub side, so there is no need to count the number of digested games in the advantageous section on the sub side, and the number of digested games in "ART" should be counted. Therefore, the values of both counters do not completely match, but they are not related to the control described below).

Further, on the sub side, since the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that are kept unreported are individually counted, the value of the second counter on the main side and the fourth counter on the sub side are counted individually. Also, the value of the second counter on the main side and the value of the fifth counter on the sub side do not match. However, since the sum of the number of remaining games that have been notified and the number of remaining games that are kept unreported matches the number of remaining games counted on the main side, the value of the second counter on the main side and the sub The sum of the value of the 4th counter and the value of the 5th counter on the side are the same.

The main control board 71 controls the transition to the "ending" based on the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section. For example, as a result of adding the number of games, the advantageous section When the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games exceeds the specified value, the payout state is shifted to "ending".

On the other hand, the sub-control board 72 "ends (that is, the total value excluding the number of unreported games) of the sub-side effect state according to the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section. END) ”. Here, the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the "ending" by referring to, for example, a sub_ending transition lottery table (not shown).

For example, the sub_ending transition lottery table defines the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games as a reference item, and the lottery result of whether or not to shift to the "ending" for each total value (non-winning, non-winning, The lottery value information for the winning) is specified. According to such a sub_ending transition lottery table, for example, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games is "1000 to 1199G", there is a probability of 24576/32768 to the "ending". The transition lottery is not won, and the transition lottery to the "ending" is won with a probability of 8192/32768.

Further, for example, the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect state to the “ending” with a higher probability as the total value of the number of digested games and the number of notified games in the advantageous section increases. Then, when the effect state is shifted to the "ending", the sub-control board 72 shifts the effect stage to the dedicated "ending stage" and maintains the effect stage at the "ending stage" until the advantageous section ends. If the ball ejection state has not shifted to the "ending" on the main side, it is not necessary to perform a lottery to shift to the "ending" on the sub side, so that the sub control board 72 is in the ball ejection state on the main side. Is shifted to the "ending" (that is, when the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games in the advantageous section exceeds the specified value in the counter managed by the main side), the sub-side production A lottery may be performed as to whether or not to shift the state to the "ending".

By shifting to the dedicated production stage at the time of shifting to the "ending" in this way, the player can know in advance that the limit processing will be performed. Since it is confirmed that the limit processing will be performed after the transition to the "ending stage", there is no point in performing an additional notification effect on the number of games. Therefore, the sub-control board 72 does not perform the additional notification effect after shifting to the "ending stage".

In addition, the transition to the "ending stage" is performed with a higher probability as the total value on the sub side (excluding the number of unreported games) increases while the total value on the main side has reached the specified value or more. Therefore, the probability of transition to the "ending stage" is higher as the number of additional games held unannounced (number of unannounced games) is smaller, and the greater the number of additional games held unannounced. It has a low probability.

In addition, after shifting to the "ending stage", in principle, the production of the "ending stage" is continued until the end of the advantageous section, the production of the "ending stage" is ended in the game in which the advantageous section ends, and the game ends. At the time or at the start of the next game, the stage shifts to the production stage corresponding to the normal section.

In addition, during the stay of the "ending stage", even if the bonus is activated, the limit processing will still be performed in the near future, so it is desirable to maintain the "ending stage". Here, in a game immediately before the end of the advantageous section (for example, a game in which the value of the first counter is "1499"), a predetermined number of games such as BB1 to BB4 are applied to the bonus required for digestion, and the bonus is activated. In this case, the first counter reaches "1500" during the operation of the bonus, the limit processing is performed, and the advantageous section ends. At this time, if the "ending stage" is terminated and the stage is shifted to another production stage (the production stage corresponding to the normal section or the production stage during the bonus operation) even though the bonus operation is in a state where the number of balls is increased. , May give the player a sense of discomfort. Therefore, when the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the operation of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 continues the production stage as the "ending stage" until the end of the bonus, and at the end of the bonus (of the advantageous section). It is also possible to shift to the production stage corresponding to the normal section (by performing end notification, immersive prevention display, etc.).

Further, even when the bonus combination is determined as the internal winning combination immediately before the limit processing is activated such that the value of the first counter is "1498" to "1500" and is carried over without winning, the sub-control board 72 It is preferable to perform the delay processing of the end of the ending state in which the "ending stage" is continued, the bonus combination being carried over wins a prize, and the end of the activated bonus is waited for to end the "ending stage". In this case, the sub-control board 72 is used because the "ending stage" is temporarily continued even if the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing and the push order and the like are not notified (normal section). It is preferable that the "ending stage" in such a non-advantageous section has a different effect from the "ending stage" in the advantageous section to clearly indicate to the player that the machine is not out of order. In addition, the sub-control board 72 wins a bonus role in a game in which a bonus role can be won in the "ending stage" of the non-advantageous section (a game that does not win a role that hinders the winning of the bonus role such as replay). It is also possible to inform the player of the situation in an easy-to-understand manner by notifying the player that the "ending stage" will end after the end of the bonus and the notification that the instruction function has ended. Further, when the advantageous section ends due to the limit processing during the bonus operation, or when there is a high possibility that the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation, the sub-control board 72 is different from the other bonus operating. The effect (for example, an effect that congratulates a large amount of acquisition or an effect that includes some advantageous information such as setting suggestion information) may be performed at the start, operation, or end of the bonus.

Further, when the advantageous section ends, the main control board 71 performs a game operation (for example, an operation of inserting a medal for the next game or an operation of automatically reinserting or starting by operating a re-game) for a predetermined time after all reels are stopped. Etc.) may not be accepted, and freeze processing may be performed at the end of the advantageous section. At this time, the sub-control board 72 uses the freeze time at the end of the advantageous section to display information on the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section, the number of digested games, or the number of sets. In addition, the entanglement prevention display may be displayed in accordance with these. Further, as described above, when the end of the advantageous section by the limit process occurs during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 causes a freeze at the end of the advantageous section by the limit process so as not to hinder the digestion of the bonus. Instead, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section may be performed at the end of the bonus. In addition, regardless of the end of the advantageous section, the predetermined time at the end of the bonus is for the purpose of securing time for displaying information about the advantageous section such as the number of medals acquired during the advantageous section at the end of the bonus. If the freeze of the advantageous section occurs during the bonus operation, the freeze at the end of the advantageous section is not performed at the end of the advantageous section or at the end of the bonus, and the main control board 71 Only the freeze at the end of the bonus may be performed at the end of the bonus, and during the freeze at the end of the bonus, the sub-control board 72 may display information regarding an advantageous section, a display for preventing immersiveness, and the like. By suppressing the occurrence of multiple game delays due to freezes, it is possible to prevent the tempo of the game from becoming worse. The contents described so far may be applied even when the advantageous section ends during the bonus operation due to the limit processing of another example described later, and the specification designer may apply the above depending on the type of limiter to be activated. Whether the process is applied or not can be arbitrarily decided in consideration of the flow of the production and the like.

(Variable limiter)
Up to this point, the conditions for executing the limit processing for ending the advantageous section have been described on the premise that the execution conditions for the limit processing are constant, for example, when the advantageous section reaches 1500 G after the start of the advantageous section. However, the execution condition of the limit processing by the main control board 71 does not necessarily have to be constant, and it is sufficiently excessive gambling if the advantageous section is not continued beyond at least the upper limit value (for example, 1500 G from the start of the advantageous section). Can exert the effect of suppressing. Therefore, when the first counter (the number of digested games) satisfies the predetermined end condition, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section before the first counter (the number of digested games) exceeds the upper limit value. The limit processing to be terminated may be performed.

For example, in a set number management type pachislot where "ART" is fixed at 50G per set, the timing is halfway for the number of games in one set due to the period of "normal advantageous section" and the bonus during "ART". For example, the "ART" of this set may end at 1480G), which is the remaining 20G up to the upper limit. In such a case, the next set of "ART" cannot be performed for all one set (50G), and limit processing is performed in the middle of the set. Even though the next set of "ART" has started, the player may be dissatisfied if it is forcibly terminated immediately. Therefore, although the main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section at the end of the "ART" of this set, which is well separated, although it is before reaching the upper limit value. As a result, the advantageous section (“ART”) always ends at a well-separated timing, so that the possibility that the player feels dissatisfied can be reduced.

Further, depending on the pachislot machine, it is conceivable to perform a predetermined ending control when performing the limit processing, and therefore, a case of performing such an ending control will also be described. For example, in a set number management type pachislot in which "ART" is fixed at 50 G per set, the total value of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games from the start of the advantageous section is in the range of 1400 to 1450 G (with a predetermined end condition). When the setting range) is reached, the main control board 71 sets an advantageous section (“ART”) of 50G as one set for the ending regardless of the number of remaining undigested sets, and one set for the ending is set. The limit processing may be executed on the assumption that a predetermined end condition is satisfied at the time of end, and the advantageous section may be ended. That is, the limit processing is reserved at the time of 1400 to 1450 G from the start of the advantageous section, and is executed from 1450 to 1500 G. By allowing a certain amount of range in the execution timing of the limit processing in this way, it is possible to appropriately suppress gambling while preventing the advantageous section from ending at an unnatural timing and giving the player a sense of discomfort. .. Also, even if the number of games per set of "ART" is fixed, the timing at which one set for the ending is decided is due to the addition of bonus activation and additional specialization state that is different from the basic set. Since it is not always exactly 1400 games, which is a multiple of 50, it is preferable to have a range in the setting range of the predetermined end condition (the period during which the limit processing can be reserved).

As will be described later, the limit processing can be performed not only based on the number of games but also based on the difference number of medals acquired by the player during the advantageous section and the number of occurrences of navigation (number limiter, payout number limiter, which will be described later). Navi count limiter). The above description of the variable limiter is applicable regardless of the type of limit processing. That is, the main control board 71 is not limited to the case where the limit processing execution timing reaches the limiter activation threshold value (upper limit value) of the limit processing activation counters (game number counter, payout number counter, navigation number counter, etc.). When the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the limit process may be performed before the limiter activation threshold value is reached. The predetermined end condition is arbitrary, but as an example, if the next set "ART" is started in the set number management type "ART", the limiter is activated in the middle of the next set "ART". It can be adopted that it is predicted that the game will be done (in Pachislot, the amount of increase in medals per game in "ART" and the winning probability of each role can be grasped from the design specifications. Even when the number limiter, the payout number limiter, or the navigation number limiter described later is used, it can be predicted that the limiter will be activated in the middle of the "ART" of the next set).

The technical ideas on this point can be summarized as follows.
The second numerical value (the number of remaining games that can be continued in the advantageous section, the number of differences, the number of navigations), which indicates the remaining period during which a specific game state (advantageous section) can be continued, reaches the end threshold (0 games remaining, 0 cards, 0 times). When it reaches, the specific gaming state is terminated, and at least the first numerical value (number of digested games, etc.) counted by the counting means is a predetermined end condition (for example, advantageous section 1500 game digestion in which limit processing is executed). Alternatively, if a range is allowed for the execution timing of the limit processing as in the modified example, the value of the second numerical value is the end if any of the set number of games from 1450 to 1500 is reached, etc.). A specific state ending means (main control board 71) that terminates the specific gaming state even when the threshold value has not been reached.
In addition, although the specific state termination means is described collectively for both the process of ending the advantageous section based on the fact that the right of the advantageous section becomes zero such as "ART" and the case of ending the advantageous section by the limit process. , It may be provided as a separate process in the program.

In the present embodiment, in the lottery using the various data tables (including those not shown) described so far (including the lottery not particularly described as the lottery using the table), the random number circuit 110 The random number values for lottery (random number values for production) extracted from a predetermined range of numerical values (0 to 255) are sequentially subtracted by the specified lottery values by the random number registers 2 to 7, and the result of the subtraction is negative. An internal lottery is performed by determining whether or not (whether or not a so-called "digit" has occurred). That is, the winning / non-winning is determined by subtracting the lottery value from the lottery random number value, but the lottery method is not limited to this, and the lottery value is added to the extracted lottery random number value, and the addition result is It may be determined whether or not it exceeds 256 (whether or not a so-called "digit overflow" has occurred), and the winning / non-winning may be determined.

<Notification function controlled by the main side>
In the conventional pachislot machine, the sub (sub-control board 72) side controls whether or not to notify the player of advantageous stop operation information (pushing order, etc.). However, since the presence or absence of this notification affects the profit of the player (so-called ball ejection), in recent years, it has been required to control the profit of the player on the main (main control board 71) side. .. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as described above, the information display 6 controlled on the main side is provided with an instruction monitor (not shown) for notifying the information of the stop operation, and is controlled by the main side. A function for notifying (instructing) information on the reel stop operation is provided.

Here, FIG. 45 shows the correspondence between each game state controlled on the main side, the internal winning combination, and the navigation data in the pachislot machine 1 of the present embodiment. The navigation data "1" to "6" shown in FIG. 45 represent the numerical values displayed on the instruction monitor and the notification contents of the stop operation information. Further, the navigation data "0" shown in FIG. 45 indicates that the stop operation information is not notified. Further, in FIG. 45, only the push order small winning combination and the push order replay are described and described. However, the navigation data is basically "0" for the internal winning combination other than the pushing order small winning combination and the pushing order replay.

In each gaming state of the non-advantageous section, the navigation data "0" is set and the stop operation information is not notified regardless of which internal winning combination shown in FIG. 45 is determined. When the navigation data "0" is set, in the present embodiment, none of the numerical values is displayed on the instruction monitor, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the numerical value of "0" is displayed on the instruction monitor. You may do so. Further, when the navigation data "0" is set, in the present embodiment, the information corresponding to this is not transmitted to the sub side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the information corresponding to this is transmitted to the sub side. You may try to do it.

Navi data "1" is set when the internal winning combination of either "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_middle left bell 1" is determined in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state of the normal advantageous section. NS. The navigation data "1" corresponds to "batting order 1". Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_upper left bell 2" or "F_middle left bell 2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set. The navigation data "2" corresponds to "batting order 2".

Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper middle bell 1", "F_middle middle bell 1", and "F_lower middle bell 1" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set. The navigation data "3" corresponds to "batting order 3". Further, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper middle bell 2", "F_middle middle bell 2", and "F_lower middle bell 2" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set. The navigation data "4" corresponds to "batting order 4".

In addition, "F_upper right / left bell 1", "F_upper right / left bell 2", "F_middle right / left bell 1", "F_middle right / left bell 2", "F_lower right / left bell 1", and "F_lower right / left bell 2". If any of the internal winning combinations of, is determined, the navigation data "5" is set. The navigation data "5" corresponds to "batting order 5". In addition, "F_upper right middle bell 1", "F_upper right middle bell 2", "F_middle right middle bell 1", "F_middle right middle bell 2", "F_lower right middle bell 1", and "F_ If any of the internal winning combinations of "lower right middle bell 2" is determined, and if any of the internal winning combinations is determined, the navigation data "6" is set. The navigation data "6" corresponds to "batting order 6".

In the present embodiment, for example, when the internal winning combination of any one of "F_upper left bell 1" and "F_upper left bell 2" is determined, if it is "batting order 1" or "batting order 2", Since the batting order is correct, the navigation data can be used as common navigation data. However, in the present embodiment, due to the configuration of the internal winning combination, a maximum of 6 selections of push order can be set for the small combination of push order, but this is set as a 4-choice push order. If the internal winning combination of "F_upper left bell 1" is determined, the navigation data "1" is set and the internal winning combination of "F_upper left bell 2" is determined so as not to cause a sense of discomfort. In that case, the navigation data "2" is set. The same applies to other push order small roles.

Further, when the internal winning combination of any of the push order replays is determined in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state in the normal advantageous section, the navigation data "0" is set. That is, the push order notification of the push order replay is not performed in the bonus non-winning state and the inter-flag state in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state of the normal advantageous section, when the internal winning combination of any of the pushing order small winning combination is determined, the navigation data "0" is set. That is, in the bonus state of the normal advantageous section, the push order notification of the push order small winning combination is not performed.

When the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 1" or "F_RT1 medium replay 1" is determined in each game state of the advantageous section, the navigation data "1" is set. The navigation data "1" corresponds to "batting order 1". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 1" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "1" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "1" is also determined. 1 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "1" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_1" is determined, the navigation data "1" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 2" or "F_RT1 medium replay 2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set. The navigation data "2" corresponds to "batting order 2". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 1" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "2" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "2" is also determined. 2 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "2" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_2" is determined, the navigation data "2" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 3" or "F_RT1 medium replay 3" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set. The navigation data "3" corresponds to "batting order 3". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 Medium Replay 2" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "3" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "3" is also determined. 3 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "3" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_3" is determined, the navigation data "3" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 4" or "F_RT1 medium replay 4" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set. The navigation data "4" corresponds to "batting order 4". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 Medium Replay 2" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "4" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "4" is also determined. 4 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "4" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_4" is determined, the navigation data "4" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 5" or "F_RT1 medium replay 5" is determined, the navigation data "5" is set. The navigation data "5" corresponds to "batting order 5". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 medium replay 3" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "5" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "5" is also determined. 5 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "5" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_5" is determined, the navigation data "5" is set.

Further, when the internal winning combination of either "F_RT0 medium replay 6" or "F_RT1 medium replay 6" is determined, the navigation data "6" is set. The navigation data "6" corresponds to "batting order 6". In addition, when the internal winning combination of "F_RT2 Medium Replay 3" is determined and it is determined that the navigation data "6" is set by lottery (probability of 1/2), the navigation data "6" is also determined. 6 ”is set. The mode in which the navigation data "6" is set in the push order small winning combination (bonus non-winning state and flag-to-flag state) is the same as in the normal advantageous section. Further, in the bonus state, when the internal winning combination of "F_JAC1_6" is determined, the navigation data "6" is set.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the main (main control board 71) side notifies the information of the reel stop operation by displaying the numerical values of "1" to "6" on the instruction monitor. Further, the numerical values of "1" to "6" displayed on the instruction monitor uniquely correspond to the contents of the stop operation notified by each.

Although the numerical values "1" to "6" notified on the main side (instruction monitor) uniquely correspond to the content of the stop operation to be notified, all players are clear based on the numerical values. It is not always possible to grasp the content of the notification. For example, it may not be possible for some players to grasp the content of the notification simply by displaying the numerical value "6" on the instruction monitor on the main side.

Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the information related to the stop operation of the stop button is notified on the sub side as well as the notification on the main side. Specifically, the display device 11 (projector mechanism 211 and display unit 212) controlled on the sub side is used to notify the information related to the stop operation under the control of the sub side.

For example, when notifying the push order "middle, left, right" (batting order 3), the numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the middle reel 3C in the display screen of the display device 11 is displayed on the sub side. The numerical value "1" is displayed above the left reel 3L, the numerical value "2" is displayed above the left reel 3L, and the numerical value "3" is displayed above the right reel 3R. Notify that the order is "right".

The timing of notification on the main side can be set to any timing as long as it is at least the period of one game in which notification is performed. For example, the main side may be notified at the timing when the player's start operation is detected (accepted), the main side may be notified at the start of reel rotation, and the first stop operation to the third stop operation may be performed. The main side may be notified at the timing when any of the stop operations is detected. On the other hand, the timing of performing the notification on the sub side is preferably at least a timing before the first stop operation. Therefore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the game of notifying the information of the stop operation in the advantageous section, after the internal lottery process (see S204 of FIG. 56 described later), the reel stop control process (see FIG. 56 described later). S213) is started, a command including this navigation data (or information corresponding thereto) is transmitted from the main (main control board 71) side to the sub (sub control board 72) side. It should be. In this case, the existing command (for example, the start command or the reel rotation start command) may include the parameter of the navigation data (or the information corresponding thereto), or the navigation data (or the equivalent thereof). You may send a dedicated command to send the information to be sent. This makes it possible to notify the stop operation information on both the instruction monitor on the main side and the display device 11 on the sub side.

Further, as another method, in the game of notifying the information of the stop operation in the advantageous section, as described above, the winning combination number may be transmitted from the main side to the sub side as information that can identify the internal winning combination. good. According to this method, the sub side can specify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player without sending the information corresponding to the navigation data, so that the amount of data to be transmitted can be reduced.

<Explanation of operation of main control circuit>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 46 to 84, the contents of various processes executed by the main CPU 101 of the main control circuit 90 by using the program will be described.

[Processing when power is turned on (reset interrupt)]
First, the power-on (reset interrupt) processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing when the power is turned on (reset interrupt). In the power-on (reset interrupt) processing shown in FIG. 46, when the power management circuit 93 detects that the supply of the power supply voltage to the microprocessor 91 has started, the reset signal is sent to the microprocessor 91. It is output to the "XSRST" terminal, and after undergoing a delay operation by the security mode, it is executed based on the interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (S1). In this process, the main CPU 101 initially sets the timer circuit 113. Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the frequency division ratio in the timer prescaler register (not shown), sets the timer control register (not shown) to interrupt enable, etc., and sets the timer counter (not shown). Set the initial count value.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs initialization processing of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) between the main control circuit 90 and the sub-control circuit 200, and the second serial communication circuit 115 (SCU2) for the second interface board. Initialization processing is performed (S2). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of the random number circuit 110 (RDG) (S3). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a write test of the main RAM 103 (S4).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed as a result of the writing test (S5).

In S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has not been performed normally (when the determination in S5 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described later. On the other hand, in S5, when the main CPU 101 determines that the writing to the main RAM 103 has been normally performed (when the determination in S5 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the state of the timer control register (not shown) of the timer circuit 113. (S6).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process based on the acquired state of the timer control register (S7). Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not 1.1172 ms has elapsed from the start of the timer count based on the acquired state of the timer control register.

In the present embodiment, when the timer time 1.1172 ms is set by the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 in S2, the count process of the CPU built-in timer is started. After that, the status of the timer circuit 113 can be acquired by reading the information of the timer control register (not shown). Then, in the present embodiment, a bit (discrimination bit) capable of discriminating (seeing) whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process (whether or not it is the timer interrupt state) in the timer control register. ) Is provided.

Therefore, in the process of S6, the main CPU 101 reads the information of the timer control register (not shown), and in the process of S7, the main CPU 101 is in the ON / OFF state of the discrimination bit in the timer control register (not shown). By referring to "1" / "0"), it is determined whether or not the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process. When 1.1172 ms has elapsed from the start of counting by the timer circuit 113 (if the count value of the timer circuit 113 is 0), the discrimination bit is turned on.

In S7, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is not the timing at which the interrupt process occurs (when the determination in S7 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S6 and repeats the processes after S6.

On the other hand, in S7, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current state is the occurrence timing of the interrupt process (when the determination in S7 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the command transmission start timer (S8). The command transmission start timer is a timer for managing the start delay period (see FIG. 85 described later), which will be described later, and the period from when the command transmission start timer is set until it becomes 0 is the main control circuit 90 (see FIG. 85 described later). Command data is not transmitted from the main control board 71) to the sub control circuit 200 (sub control board 72) (see FIG. 80 described later). As a result, when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the time required for the startup control of the sub CPU 201 (the time until the command can be received) is secured. That is, by setting the command transmission start timer, the transmission of communication data (command data) by the communication data transmission process is delayed for a period corresponding to the timer. In the present embodiment, in S8, "21801" (21801 x 1.1172 ms = about 24.3561 seconds) is set as the value of the command transmission start timer. However, the value of the command transmission start timer can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the sub-control circuit 200 mounted at the same time.

The command transmission start timer is a software timer allocated in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 in 2 bytes, and is arranged at an address that is not erased by the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a thumb check process (non-standard) (S9). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a thumb check process of the main RAM 103, and this process is performed in an unspecified work area (see FIG. 11C) in the main RAM 103. Further, the program used in this thumb check process is stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 11B). The details of the thumb check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55 described later.

After the process of S9, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (S10).

In S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (when the determination in S10 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S15 described later. On the other hand, in S10, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S10 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the thumb check based on the result of the thumb check process in S9. It is determined whether or not the result is normal (S11).

In S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the thumb check determination result is not normal (when the determination in S11 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S13 described later. On the other hand, in S11, when the main CPU 101 determines that the thumb check determination result is normal (when the determination in S11 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the game return process (S12). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of returning the game state to the state before the power failure detection. The details of the game return process will be described later with reference to FIG. 47 described later.

When the determination in S5 or S11 is NO, the main CPU 101 displays the character string "88" indicating the occurrence of an error on the information display 6 (7-segment LED display) (S13). After that, the main CPU 101 repeats the WDT clearing process (S14).

Here, returning to the process of S10 again, if S10 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change confirmation process (S15). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a setting change command generation / storage process at the start of the setting change. The details of the setting change confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 48 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S16). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the time of RAM abnormality or at the start of setting change" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and the game starts from the start address. Erase (clear) the information up to the final address of the RAM area for use. Then, after the processing of S16, the main CPU 101 starts the main processing described later (see FIG. 56 described later).

[Game return processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 47, the game return process performed in S12 during the power-on (reset interrupt) process (see FIG. 46) will be described. Note that FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the game return process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer (SP) at the time of power failure (S21). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the command transmission start timer has counted up (S22). In S22, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has not counted up (when the determination in S22 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S22.

On the other hand, in S22, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has counted up (when the determination in S22 is YES), the main CPU 101 has the on-edge data before the input port interrupt processing and the current Clear (off) the set on-edge data (S23). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the backup data of the output port from the output port backup storage area (not shown) of the main RAM 103, and sets the backup data in the output port (S24). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data of the input port and stores the data in the data storage area (input port storage area 1 and input port storage area 2) of the input port at present and before the interrupt processing (S25). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the rotating cylinder control data storage area (S26). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of reels to be checked (“3” in this embodiment) (S27).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires reel control management information (data related to fluctuation control of the display column when a power failure occurs) of a predetermined reel based on the address of the set rotation cylinder control data storage area (S28). The reel control management information (variation control management information in the display column) is information related to the control state (rotation status) of each reel, and is backed up and saved in the event of a power failure.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel control management information is information corresponding to the rotation status during reel acceleration, constant speed waiting, or constant speed (S29).

In S29, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition of S29 is not satisfied (when the determination in S29 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S32 described later. On the other hand, in S29, when the main CPU 101 determines that the condition of S29 is satisfied (YES in S29), the main CPU 101 clears the spinning control data (reel control management information) (S30). By this process, after returning to the game, the rotation control of the reel is started from the acceleration process. Next, the main CPU 101 sets the reel operation timing value (execution start timing “1” of the rotation cylinder control data) (S31). When "1" is set for the reel operation timing, the excitation change timing is set in the reel control process (see S903 in FIG. 79 described later), so that the main CPU 101 accelerates the reel rotation control. Start from.

After the processing of S31 or when the determination in S29 is NO, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the number of reels (S32). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the number of reels after subtraction is "0" (S33).

In S33, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of reels after subtraction is not "0" (when the determination in S33 is NO), the main CPU 101 changes the reel to be checked and shifts the processing to the processing of S28. Return and repeat the processing after S28.

On the other hand, in S33, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of reels after subtraction is "0" (when the determination in S33 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the RAM initialization process (S34). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address “at the time of power recovery” in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and the final address of the game RAM area is set from the start address. Delete (clear) the information up to the address.

Next, the main CPU 101 restores the data of all the registers saved at the time of power failure detection to all the registers (S35). Then, after the process of S35, the main CPU 101 ends the game return process and returns the process to the process at the time of power failure detection.

In the present embodiment, the game return process is performed as described above. In the game return processing of the present embodiment, as described above, the input / output state of each port at the time of power failure is secured at the time of power recovery, and when the reel is rotating at the time of power failure, reel control management is performed at the time of power recovery. The information is acquired and the processing necessary for starting the re-rotation of the reel is also performed (see the processing of S26 to S33). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the reel re-rotation control can be stably performed even when the reel is recovered from the electric power failure during the rotation of the cylinder, and the player is not discomforted.

[Setting change confirmation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 48, the setting change confirmation process performed in S15 during the power-on (reset interrupt) process (see FIG. 46) will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the setting change confirmation process. If the setting key type switch 54 is turned on (that is, in the case of "setting confirmation" to confirm the current setting value) after the power of the gaming machine is turned on, this setting change confirmation is performed from S44 described later. The process may be started.

First, the main CPU 101 performs an initialization process of an unspecified RAM area in the main RAM 103 (S41). Next, the main CPU 101 performs one interrupt wait process (S42). In this process, when the command transmission start timer is counting up, a non-operation command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 80) described later. If the command transmission start timer does not count up, no command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. Therefore, if the command transmission start timer does not count up, this process is omitted. You may.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S43). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address "at the time of RAM abnormality or at the start of setting change" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and the game starts from the start address. Erase (clear) the information up to the final address of the RAM area for use.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (S44). The setting key (not shown) inserted into the setting key type switch 54 is an operation key for setting the setting value (settings 1 to 6) of the pachislot machine 1, and is set when the setting key is turned on. The key type switch 54 is turned on.

In S44, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S44 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the setting change confirmation process and turns on the power (reset interrupt). ) Move to the processing of S16 of the time processing (see FIG. 46). On the other hand, in S44, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the ON state (when the determination in S44 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S45). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven, and the inserted medals are ejected from the medal payout outlet 24 (see FIG. 2).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the setting change start or setting confirmation start information (005H: first value) in the L register, and performs the generation and storage process of the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (S46). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 generates setting change command data (first command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 at the start of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, and generates the command data. It is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the setting change command generation and storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 described later. Further, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) saved in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the error count relay to the ON state (S47). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display setting process of the set value (S48). By this process, the current set value can be displayed by the 7-segment LED in the information display 6.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting change or the setting confirmation has been performed (S49). In S49, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has not been changed (the setting has been confirmed) (when the determination in S49 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S54 described later.

On the other hand, in S49, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has been changed (the setting has not been confirmed) (when the determination in S49 is YES), does the main CPU 101 have the reset switch 76 turned on? Whether or not it is determined (S50).

In S50, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reset switch 76 is in the ON state (when the determination in S50 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the set value (S51). That is, each time the reset switch 76 is operated, the main CPU 101 sequentially updates the set value within the range of "1" to "6". After the processing of S51, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S48, and repeats the processing after S48. On the other hand, in S50, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reset switch 76 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S50 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is in the ON state (S52). ..

When the main CPU 101 determines in S52 that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S52 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process in S48 and repeats the processes after S48. On the other hand, in S52, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (when the determination in S52 is YES), the main CPU 101 is set in the set value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. Store the value (S53).

When the determination in S49 is NO or after the processing in S53, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state (S54).

In S54, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is not in the off state (when the determination in S54 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S54. On the other hand, in S54, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state (when the determination in S54 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether the setting is changed or the setting is confirmed. (S55).

In S55, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has not been changed (the setting has been confirmed) (when the determination in S55 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S57 described later. On the other hand, in S55, when the main CPU 101 determines that the setting has been changed (the setting has not been confirmed) (when the determination in S55 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the RAM initialization process (S56). .. In this process, the main CPU 101 uses the address (the address next to the setting value storage area) of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C at the end of the setting change, which is not shown, as the start address of the initialization start. It is set and the information from the start address to the final address of the game RAM area is erased (cleared).

After processing S56 or when S55 determines NO, the main CPU 101 sets the setting change end or setting confirmation end information (004H: second value) in the L register, and sets the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end). ) Is generated and stored (S57). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates setting change command data (second command data) transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 at the end of the setting change process or the setting confirmation process, and generates the command data. It is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the setting change command generation and storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 described later. Further, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) saved in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described with reference to FIG. 80 described later. Then, after the processing of S57, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change confirmation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S16 of the power-on (reset interrupt) processing (see FIG. 46).

[Setting change command generation and storage processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the setting change command generation and storage process performed in S46 and S57 during the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) will be described. Note that FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure for generating and storing the setting change command.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the information of the set values (1 to 6) in the E register (S61). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT state information in the C register (S62). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the command type information (02H) of the setting change command in the A register (S63).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data storage process (S64). In this process, the main CPU 101 has the information set in each register in S61 to S63 and the information set in the L register in S46 or S58 (see FIG. 48) (setting change start / setting change end / setting status). Setting change command data is generated by using (setting confirmation start / setting confirmation end), and the generated command data is saved in the communication data storage area. The details of the communication data storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 50 described later.

After the process of S64, the main CPU 101 ends the setting change command generation and storage process. When the setting change command generation and storage process performed in S46 during the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) is terminated, the main CPU 101 performs the process after the process of S64 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48). Move to the process of S47. Further, when ending the setting change command generation and storage process performed in S57 during the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48), the main CPU 101 ends the setting change command generation and storage process after the process of S64, and also sets the settings. The change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) is also completed.

[Communication data storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 50, for example, the communication data storage process performed in S64 during the setting change command generation and storage process (see FIG. 49) will be described. The communication data storage process is executed not only when the setting change command is generated but also when other commands are generated. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing a procedure of communication data storage processing.

First, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the A register as communication command type data in the communication data temporary storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S71). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the H register and the L register in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 as parameters 1 and 2 of the communication command, respectively (S72).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the D register and the E register as the parameters 3 and 4 of the communication command in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S73). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the data set in the B register and the C register as the data of the parameter 5 of the communication command and the RT state, respectively, in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S74).

Next, the main CPU 101 generates BCC data (sum value) of the communication command from the data values set in the A register to the L register (S75). Next, the main CPU 101 stores the generated BCC data in the communication data temporary storage area in the main RAM 103 (S76).

After the processing of S76, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a vacancy in the communication data storage area in the main RAM 103 (S77). In this embodiment, a maximum of nine command data can be stored in the communication data storage area.

In S77, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no free space in the communication data storage area (when the determination in S77 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data storage process and, for example, sets change command generation and storage process (when the communication data storage area is determined to be NO). (See FIG. 49) also ends.

On the other hand, in S77, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a vacancy in the communication data storage area (when the determination in S77 is YES), the main CPU 101 is stored in the communication data temporary storage area by the above-mentioned processes S71 to S76. Each of the data is stored (registered) in the communication data storage area as communication data (command data) (S78).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the communication data pointer update process (S79). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly updates the communication data pointer indicating the storage address of the communication data in the communication data storage area. The details of the communication data pointer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 51, which will be described later.

Then, after the process of S79, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data storage process and, for example, the setting change command generation and storage process (see FIG. 49).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when creating one packet (8 bytes) of communication data (command data), various parameters are transferred from the register and stored in the communication data temporary storage area (communication buffer). In such a command data creation method, the data stored in each register at the time of command generation is stored as it is in the communication data temporary storage area as various parameters of the command data. Therefore, when command data including unused parameters is created, the value of the unused parameters becomes an indefinite value each time it is created. This makes it difficult to analyze communication data and suppresses fraudulent acts such as goto, and since it is not necessary to add unnecessary goto countermeasure processing, the program of the main control circuit 90 by adding the goto countermeasure processing. The pressure on the capacity can be suppressed.

[Communication data pointer update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 51, the communication data pointer update process performed in S79 during the communication data storage process (see FIG. 50) will be described. Note that FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the communication data pointer update process.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the currently set communication data pointer (S81).

Next, the main CPU 101 adds and updates the value of the communication data pointer by one packet (8 bytes) (S82). In this process, when the value of the updated communication data pointer is equal to or greater than the upper limit size of the communication data storage area, the main CPU 101 sets the updated communication data pointer value to "0". This invalidates all the command data stored in the communication data storage area (makes it the same state as the discarded state).

In the present embodiment, the amount of data (1 packet) transmitted in one transmission operation is 8 bytes. That is, in the present embodiment, one command data can be transmitted by one transmission operation. Further, in the present embodiment, since a maximum of nine command data can be stored in the communication data storage area, the upper limit size of the communication data storage area is 72 bytes (= 8 bytes × 9). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the range of the communication data pointer is set to "0" to "71", and in the process of S82, the value of the communication data pointer after the update (when the communication data pointer is updated by +8) is "71 (when the communication data pointer is updated by +8). If the value exceeds "upper limit value)", set the updated communication data pointer value to "0" (return the communication data storage destination address to the start address) and store the communication data. Disable all command data stored in the area (make it the same as the discarded state). If the value of the communication data pointer is set to "0", the next time the command data is stored in the communication data storage area, it is stored from the start address of the communication data storage area, so it is stored before that. The command data will be overwritten with new command data. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is not necessary to initialize (clear) the communication data storage area when the value of the communication data pointer exceeds "71 (upper limit value)".

Then, after the process of S82, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data pointer update process and also ends the communication data storage process (see FIG. 50).

[Processing at the time of power failure (external)]
Next, the power failure (external) processing of the pachi-slot machine 1 performed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing a procedure of (external) processing at the time of power failure. In the power interruption (external) process shown in FIG. 52, when the power supply management circuit 93 detects a decrease in the power supply voltage (power interruption) supplied to the microprocessor 91, the power interruption detection signal is transmitted to the microprocessor 91. Is output to the "XINT" terminal of the above, and is executed based on the interrupt request signal output from the interrupt controller 112 of the microprocessor 91 to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the data set in all the registers (S91). Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data set in the power failure detection port (S92).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure detection port is in the ON state (S93).

In S93, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption detection port is not in the ON state (when the determination in S93 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the interrupt processing permission (S94). Then, after the processing of S94, the main CPU 101 ends the (external) processing at the time of power failure. It should be noted that these processes performed when S93 is a NO determination correspond to the process of countermeasures against momentary power failure that occurs when the power supply management circuit 93 momentarily detects a power failure or the like.

On the other hand, in S93, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power failure detection port is in the ON state (when the determination in S93 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets that the medal cannot be inserted and sets the stop of the hopper device 51. (S95).

Next, the main CPU 101 saves the currently set value of the stack pointer (SP) in the stack area of the game RAM area in the main RAM 103 (S96).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a checksum generation process of the main RAM 103 (S97). This process is performed in the non-standard work area (see FIG. 11C) in the main RAM 103. Further, the program used in this checksum generation process is stored in the non-standard area in the main ROM 102 (see FIG. 11B). The details of the checksum generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 53 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets access prohibition to the main RAM 103 (S98). Then, after the processing of S98, the infinite loop processing is performed until the power supply is stopped (until the power supply voltage reaches a voltage at which the main CPU 101 cannot operate).

[Checksum generation process (non-standard)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the checksum generation process performed in S97 during the power failure (external) process (see FIG. 52) will be described. Note that FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum generation process.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the current stack pointer (SP) value (the address in use of the stack area of the game RAM area) in the non-standard stack area of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103 (S101). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the non-standard stack area in the stack pointer (S102). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address value (F0H) on the upper side of the RAM address (address of the non-standard stack area) in the Q register (S103). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the power failure occurrence flag (S104).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the stack pointer with the calculation start address of the sum value in the game RAM area, and sets the sum calculation counter with the value obtained by dividing the number of bytes of the sum value calculation target storage area by "2". Set (S105). The sum calculation counter is a counter for determining the end trigger of the sum value calculation, and is provided in the main RAM 103. Then, when the sum calculation counter set in S105 becomes "0", the sum value calculation process of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 is terminated.

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the HL register to 0 (sets the value “0”) (S106). By this process, the initial value "0" of the sum value is set.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes an instruction code called a "POP instruction" and stores data (stored value) in an area of 2 bytes from the address of the storage area of the main RAM 103 set in the stack pointer (SP) in the DE register. Read (S107).

When the "POP" instruction is executed, the data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the lower register of the pair register and specified by the stack pointer. The data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address where the updated address is updated by 1 is loaded into the register on the upper side of the pair register. When the "POP" instruction is executed, an address update process for 2 bytes (a process of adding "2" to the address) is performed on the address set in the stack pointer (SP).

Therefore, in the processing of S107, the data (memory contents) stored at the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the E register and saved at the address specified by the stack pointer plus "1". The data (memory contents) is loaded into the D register.

After the process of S107, the main CPU 101 performs a process of calculating the sum value (S108). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the value stored in the DE register to the value stored in the HL register, and stores the added value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S109). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S110).

In S110, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S110 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S107 and repeats the processes after S107. That is, the processes of S107 to S110 are repeated until the sum value calculation process of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 is completed.

On the other hand, in S110, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S110 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the DE register in the non-standard RAM area in the main RAM 103. The calculation start address of the sum value is set, and the non-standard sum count value is set in the sum calculation counter (S111). The non-standard sum count value is the number of bytes in the non-standard storage area. Therefore, when the sum calculation counter set in S111 becomes "0", the sum value calculation process of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103, that is, the sum value calculation process of the entire main RAM 103 is completed.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data (stored value) of one byte from the address of the non-standard RAM area set in the DE register into the A register (S112).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation process (S113). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the value stored in the A register to the value stored in the HL register, and stores the added value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address stored in the DE register and subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S114). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S115).

In S115, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S115 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing in S112 and repeats the processing after S112. That is, the processes of S112 to S115 are repeated until the process of adding the sum value of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103 to the sum value of the gaming RAM area is completed.

On the other hand, in S115, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S115 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the value stored in the HL register when a power failure occurs. As the sum value of, it is stored in the sum value storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S116). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the stack pointer (SP) saved in the non-standard stack area in S101 in the stack pointer (S117). Then, after the processing of S117, the main CPU 101 ends the checksum generation processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S98 at the time of power failure (external) processing (see FIG. 52).

[Sum check processing (non-standard)]
Next, the thumb check process performed in S9 during the power-on processing (see FIG. 46) will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. 54 and 55 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the thumb check process.

First, the main CPU 101 saves the current stack pointer (SP) value in the non-standard stack area (S121). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the sum value storage area in the stack pointer, and sets the value obtained by dividing the number of bytes of the sum value calculation target storage area by "2" in the sum calculation counter (S122). The sum calculation counter set here is a counter for determining the end trigger of the sum value calculation (sum value subtraction process), and is provided in the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a sum value (checksum) from the sum value storage area (S123). By this process, the checksum (initial value before subtraction) generated when the power failure occurs is stored in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the "POP" instruction and reads the data (stored value) of the area of 2 bytes from the address of the storage area of the main RAM 103 set in the stack pointer (SP) into the DE register (S124). .. At this time, by executing the "POP" instruction, the data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the address specified by the stack pointer is loaded into the E register, and the address specified by the stack pointer is used. 1 The data (memory contents) stored in the 1-byte area of the updated address is loaded into the D register. Further, when the "POP" instruction is executed, an address update process for 2 bytes (a process of adding 2 addresses) is performed on the address set in the stack pointer (SP).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation (subtraction) process (S125). Specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value stored in the DE register from the value stored in the HL register (initial value of the sum value or the sum value after the previous subtraction process), and the subtraction is performed. The value is stored in the HL register as a sum value.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S126). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S127).

In S127, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S127 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S124, and repeats the processes after S124. That is, the processes of S124 to S127 are repeated until the subtraction process of the sum value is completed over the entire area of the game RAM area of the main RAM 103.

On the other hand, in S127, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S127 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the DE register in the non-standard RAM area in the main RAM 103. The calculation start address of the sum value is set, and the non-standard sum count value is set in the sum calculation counter (S128). The non-standard sum count value is the number of bytes in the non-standard RAM area.

Next, the main CPU 101 reads the data (stored value) of one byte of the area from the address of the non-standard RAM area set in the DE register into the A register (S129).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a sum value calculation (subtraction) process (S130). Specifically, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value stored in the A register from the value stored in the HL register, and stores the subtracted value as a sum value in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address stored in the DE register and subtracts 1 from the value of the sum calculation counter (S131). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the updated sum calculation counter is “0” (S132).

In S132, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is not "0" (when the determination in S132 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S129, and repeats the processing after S129. That is, the processes of S129 to S132 are repeated until the subtraction process of the sum value is completed over the entire area of the non-standard RAM area of the main RAM 103.

On the other hand, in S132, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the sum calculation counter is "0" (when the determination in S132 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets "sum error" in the determination result of the thumb check process. (S133). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the calculated sum value is “0” (S134).

In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the state (1/0) of the zero flag (bit 6) of the flag register F to determine whether or not the sum value is “0”. In the present embodiment, the sum value becomes "0" when the value of the sum calculation counter set in S128 becomes "0", that is, when the subtraction process of the sum value is completed over the entire area of the main RAM 103. If, the zero flag in the flag register F is set to "1", and if the sum value is not "0", the zero flag in the flag register F is set to "0". Therefore, if "1 (on state)" is set in the zero flag of the flag register F at the time of processing S134, the main CPU 101 determines that the sum value is "0".

In S134, when the main CPU 101 determines that the calculated sum value is not "0" (when the determination in S134 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S139 described later. On the other hand, in S134, when the main CPU 101 determines that the calculated sum value is "0" (when the determination in S134 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets "power failure" in the determination result (S135). ).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the power failure occurrence flag (S136). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the power failure generation flag is in the state without power failure (off state) (S137).

In S137, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption occurrence flag is in the state of no power interruption (when the determination in S137 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S139 described later. On the other hand, in S137, when the main CPU 101 determines that the power interruption occurrence flag is not in the state without power interruption (when the determination in S137 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets "normal" in the determination result (S138).

After the processing of S138, if S134 is a NO determination or S137 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 saves the determination result in the thumb check determination result and clears (offs) the power failure occurrence flag (S139). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the stack pointer (SP) saved in the non-standard stack area in S121 to the stack pointer (S140). Then, after the processing of S140, the main CPU 101 ends the thumb check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S10 of the power-on processing (see FIG. 46).

[Main processing of pachislot under the control of the main CPU]
Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the main process (main operation process) of the pachi-slot machine 1 executed under the control of the main CPU 101 will be described. Note that FIG. 56 is a flowchart (hereinafter referred to as a main flow) showing the procedure of the main process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a RAM initialization process (S201). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the address of "at the end of one game" in the game RAM area of the main RAM 103 shown in FIG. 11C as the start address of the initialization start, and from the start address to the game RAM area. Delete (clear) the information up to the final address. The storage area in this range is, for example, a storage area in which data needs to be erased for each unit game (game) such as an internal winning combination storage area and a display combination storage area.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs medal acceptance / start check processing (S202). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs an input check process for each medal sensor (see FIG. 5), a start switch 79, and the like. The details of the medal reception / start check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a random number value acquisition process (S203). In this process, the main CPU 101 uses a random number value for internal winning combination lottery (0 to 65535: a value of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes a hard latch random number) and a random number value for production used in various lottery related to playability (0 to 65535: a random number value for production used in various lottery related to playability). 0 to 65535: the value of the random number register 1 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes the soft latch random number, 0 to 255: the value of each of the random number registers 2 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 that becomes the soft latch random number), etc. The random number value is stored in the random number value storage area (not shown) provided in the main RAM 103. The details of the random number value acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an internal lottery process (S204). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of determining the internal winning combination by lottery based on the random number value (hard latch random number) extracted in S203. The details of the internal lottery process will be described later with reference to FIG. 64 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol setting process (S205). In this process, the main CPU 101, for example, generates an internal winning combination from the hit request flag status (flag status information), expands the hit request flag data, and stores the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area. And so on. The details of the symbol setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 65, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a start command generation / storage process (S206). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates start command data to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The start command is configured to include parameters (winning combination number, etc.) for specifying the internal winning combination and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the second interface board control process (S207). The second interface board control process is executed in the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process for outputting, for example, a test signal related to the push order navigation determined by the main control board 71 via the second interface board 302 for the testing machine.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a game start state-based control process (S208). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs at the start of the game among the various controls in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, and each gaming state of the advantageous section described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44. Performs various processes to perform various controls that need to be performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop initial setting process (S209). In this process, the main CPU 101 refers to the reel stop initial setting table (not shown) and acquires the pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, and the stop table number based on the internal winning combination and the game state. And the process of storing "3" in the stop button non-operation counter.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start process (S210). In this process, the main CPU 101 requests the start of rotation of all reels. Then, when the start of rotation of all reels is requested, three stepping motors (not shown) are driven by an interrupt process (see FIG. 79 described later) executed at a constant cycle (1.1172 msec). Controlled, the rotation of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R is started. Each reel is then accelerated and controlled until its rotational speed reaches a constant speed, after which it is controlled to maintain that constant speed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel rotation start command generation / storage process (S211). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data for a reel rotation start command to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The reel rotation start command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The reel rotation start command is configured to include a parameter indicating that the reel rotation start operation has been started.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage process (S212). In this process, the main CPU 101 acquires the attraction priority data and stores it in the attraction priority data storage area. The details of the pull-in priority storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 67 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop control process (S213). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the rotation stop of the corresponding reel based on the timing at which the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R are pressed and the internal winning combination. The details of the reel stop control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 72 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning search process (S214). In this process, the main CPU 101 stores the data in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the display combination is displayed on the effective line, and sets the number of medals to be paid out based on the determination result. The details of the winning search process will be described later with reference to FIG. 73, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an illegal hit check process (S215). In this process, the main CPU 101 synthesizes a hit request flag (internal winning combination) and a winning operation flag (display combination), and determines whether or not there is an illegal hit error based on the combination result. The details of the illegal hit check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 74 described later. Further, as long as each reel is stopped without causing an erroneous winning by the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72 described later), this illegal hit check process can be omitted from the viewpoint of reducing the control load.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a winning check / medal payout process (S216). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of generating a winning operation command. Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 drives the hopper device 51 and updates the number of credits based on the number of payouts of the display combination determined in S214, and performs the medal payout process. The details of the winning check / medal payout process will be described later with reference to FIG. 75, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a BB check process (S217). In this process, the main CPU 101 controls the operation and termination of the bonus state. The details of the BB check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an RT check process (S218). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs RT state transition control based on the symbol combination stopped and displayed on the effective line. The details of the RT check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a state-based control process at the end of the game (S219). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs at the end of the game among the various controls in the normal state of the non-advantageous section, each gaming state of the normal advantageous section, and each gaming state of the advantageous section described with reference to FIGS. 33 to 44. Performs various processes to perform various controls that need to be performed. Then, after the processing of S219 (after the end of one game), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S201.

[Medal reception / start check processing]
Next, the medal acceptance / start check process performed in S202 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 and 58. 57 and 58 are flowcharts showing the procedure of medal reception / start check processing.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (whether or not there is an automatic insertion request) (S221). In this process, when the automatic insertion medal counter is "1" or more, the main CPU 101 determines that there is an automatic insertion request. Further, the automatic insertion medal counter is data for identifying whether or not the display combination related to the replay is established in the previous unit game. When the display combination related to the re-game is established, the number of medals inserted in the previous unit game is automatically inserted into the automatic insertion medal counter.

In S221, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (when the determination in S221 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S225 described later.

On the other hand, in S221, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (when the determination in S221 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion process (S222). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process, an LED lighting control process for the number of medals inserted, and the like. The details of the medal insertion process will be described later with reference to FIG. 59 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts the value of the automatic insertion medal counter (S223). In this process, the main CPU 101 may subtract the value of the automatic insertion medal counter at a time (for example, "3") or may subtract "1" at a time. Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the automatically inserted medal counter after subtraction is "0" (S224).

In S224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is not "0" (when the determination in S224 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S222 and repeats the processes after S222.

On the other hand, in S224, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the automatic insertion medal counter is "0" (when S224 is a YES determination), or when S221 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 is used for medal auxiliary storage. The storage switch check process is performed (S225). In this process, the main CPU 101 detects whether or not the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals based on the on / off state of the medal auxiliary storage switch 75.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion state check process (S226). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal can be inserted based on the result of the medal insertion state check process (S227).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S227 that the medal cannot be inserted (when the determination in S227 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S231 described later.

On the other hand, in S227, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal insertion is possible (when the determination in S227 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion check process (S228). In this process, the main CPU 101 credits the medal, for example, based on the medal sensor input state, a process of determining whether or not the medal has passed normally, and when the number of medals inserted exceeds a specified number. Perform processing and so on. The details of the medal insertion check process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal insertion or credit is possible based on the result of the medal insertion check process (S229).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S229 that the medal can be inserted or credited (when the determination in S229 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S231 described later. On the other hand, in S229, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal cannot be inserted or credited (when the determination in S229 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S230). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven (the solenoid that has been excited is demagnetized), and the select plate 804 shifts from the guide position to the discharge position, so that the inserted medal is released. It will be discharged from the medal payout outlet 24.

After the processing of S230, if S227 is a NO determination or S229 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current number of inserted medals is the playable start number (S231). In the present embodiment, the number of cards that can be started is 3 regardless of the game state (that is, the game can be started only when 3 cards are inserted).

In S231, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current number of inserted medals is the number of playable start numbers (when the determination in S231 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S234 described later. On the other hand, in S231, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current number of inserted medals is not the playable start number (when the determination in S231 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a medal inserted (S232). ).

In S232, when the main CPU 101 determines that a medal has been inserted (when the determination in S232 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226. On the other hand, in S232, when the main CPU 101 determines that no medal has been inserted (NO in S232), the main CPU 101 performs the setting change confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 48 (S233). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a setting change command generation / storage process at the start of setting confirmation. This makes it possible to check the set values and hall menus (various history data (errors, power failure history, etc.)) regardless of whether the game state is a bonus state (special prize operating state). Cheating can be suppressed. In the setting change confirmation process performed in S233, even if the setting key type switch 54 is in the off state, a setting change command (setting confirmation start) including at least information on the current setting value is generated and stored. Therefore, the command data may be stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. Thereby, it may be possible to check whether or not the set value is appropriate (whether or not it is within the range of settings 1 to 6) for each game.

After the processing of S233 or when the determination in S231 is YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start switch 79 is in the ON state (S234).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S234 that the start switch 79 is not in the ON state (when the determination in S234 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226.

On the other hand, in S234, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start switch 79 is in the ON state (when the determination in S234 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a medal acceptance prohibition process (S235). By this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is not driven (the solenoid that has been excited is demagnetized), and the select plate 804 shifts from the guide position to the discharge position, so that the inserted medal is released. It will be discharged from the medal payout outlet 24.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a timer value (“72” in this embodiment) in the medal monitoring timer (S236). The medal monitoring timer is a timer for monitoring the period until the excited solenoid is degaussed (that is, the period until the select plate 804 moves from the guide position to the ejection position) in the selector 66. (See FIG. 86 described later), for example, when the period until the excited solenoid completes degaussing is 80 ms, a timer value for measuring at least a longer period (“about 80.44 ms”). Is set. That is, the medal monitoring timer actually operates after the start lever 16 is operated (the start switch 79 is turned on) and the control for prohibiting medal acceptance is started when the number of medals that can be played is inserted. Monitor a specific period of time before the acceptance of medals is (physically) banned. As a result, when a medal is inserted in the specific period in combination with the start lever ON flag described later, the medal insertion check 2 process described later, etc., the medal is accidentally swallowed (that is, the medal is inserted). However, it is prevented from being housed in the hopper device 51 without being counted). The value of the medal monitoring timer can be appropriately changed according to the specifications of the selector 66 (mainly the solenoid). Further, as long as it is guaranteed to prevent the medal from being swallowed, the period until the excited solenoid is completely degaussed can be set to a period shorter than the period until the demagnetization is completed.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the start lever ON flag to the ON state (S237). The start lever ON flag is information for identifying whether or not the start lever 16 has been operated (the start switch 79 has been turned on) when the number of medals that can be played has been inserted. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion check 2 process (S238). In this process, the main CPU 101 basically performs the same process as the medal insertion check process. The details of the medal insertion check process and the medal insertion check 2 process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the start lever ON flag is in the OFF state (S239). In S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start lever ON flag is in the OFF state (when the determination in S239 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S226 and repeats the processes after S226.

On the other hand, in S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the start lever ON flag is not in the off state (that is, is in the ON state) (when the determination in S239 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the medal monitoring timer to "0". It is determined whether or not there is (S240). In S239, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal monitoring timer is not "0" (that is, "1" or more) (when the determination in S240 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to S238, and after S238. Repeat the process of.

On the other hand, in S240, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal monitoring timer is "0" (when the determination in S240 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal acceptance / start check process and performs the process in the main flow (when the medal monitoring timer is determined to be YES). (See FIG. 56).

[Medal insertion process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 59, the medal insertion performed in S222 during the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) and S265 during the medal insertion check process (see FIGS. 60 and 61) described later. The processing will be described. Note that FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medal insertion process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the medal counter (S241). The medal counter is a counter for counting the number of inserted medals, and is provided in the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation / storage process (S242). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. That is, the medal insertion command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 each time one medal is inserted. The medal insertion command is configured to include parameters for specifying the number of inserted medals and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 turns off the first to third LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals included in the LED 82 (see FIG. 6) (S243). Next, the main CPU 101 calculates LED lighting data (lighting control data) corresponding to the number of inserted medals based on the number of inserted medals (value of the medal counter) (S244). In this process, for example, when the number of inserted medals is one, the LED lighting data for lighting only the first LED for displaying the number of inserted medals is calculated, and for example, when the number of inserted medals is three. LED lighting data for lighting all of the first to third LEDs for displaying the number of inserted medals is calculated. The method for calculating the LED lighting data will be described in detail later.

Next, the main CPU 101 uses the calculated LED lighting data to light the corresponding LED for displaying the number of inserted medals (S245). Then, after the process of S245, the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion process, and performs the process in S223 of the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) or the medal insertion check process (FIGS. 60 and 61) described later. (See) to S253.

[Medal insertion check process]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61, the medal insertion check process and the medal acceptance / start check process (FIGS. 57 and 58) performed in S228 during the medal acceptance / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58). The medal insertion check 2 process performed in S238 in (see) will be described. 60 and 61 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the medal insertion check process. The medal insertion check 2 process starts from S253 of the medal insertion check process, and the processes of S253 to S268 are the same as those in the medal insertion check process. The procedure of the input check process will be described.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game is being replayed (S251).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S251 that the replay is in progress (when the determination in S251 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process, and performs the medal acceptance / start check process (FIGS. 57 and 57). (Refer to 58), move to S229.

On the other hand, in S251, when the main CPU 101 determines that the replay is not in progress (when the determination in S251 is NO), the main CPU 101 permits medal acceptance (S252). In this process, the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5) is driven (the solenoid that has been degaussed is excited), and the select plate 804 shifts from the ejection position to the guide position, so that the medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 14. The medals that have been won are counted and accommodated in the hopper device 51.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a bet button check process (S253). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the bet button (MAX bet button 15a or 1-bet button 15b) has been operated based on the ON / OFF state of the BET switch 77. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the betting operation is completed based on the result of the betting button check processing in S253 (S254).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S254 that the betting operation has been completed (when the determination in S254 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process (or medal insertion check 2 process) and accepts the medal. The process proceeds to S229 of the start check process (see 57 and 58) (or S239 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)).

On the other hand, in S254, when the main CPU 101 determines that the betting operation has not been completed (when the determination in S254 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state (game medium reception state) at the time of the current processing. Acquires the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (S255). The medal sensor input state is information indicating the passing status of the medal received in the medal insertion slot 14 in the selector 66, and is generated based on the detection result of each medal sensor (see FIG. 5) of the selector 66.

In the present embodiment, the medal sensor input state is represented by 1-byte (8-bit) data, and the detection result of the first medal sensor 806 on the upstream side provided at the exit of the selector 66 in the direction of passing the medal is obtained. It corresponds to the information of bit 0 (“0” or “1”), and the detection result of the second medal sensor 807 on the downstream side corresponds to the information of bit 1 (“0” or “1”). When the passage of the medal is detected by the first medal sensor, "1" is set in bit 0, and when the passage of the medal is detected by the second medal sensor, "1" is set in bit 1. Will be done. Therefore, the medal sensor input state "0000000000B" indicates the state before or after passing the medal (at the time of passing), and the medal sensor input state "00000001B" indicates the state at the start of passing the medal, and the medal sensor input state "0000000000B". "00000011B" indicates a state in which the medal is passing, and "00000010B" in the medal sensor input state indicates a state immediately before the completion of passing the medal.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing has changed from the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (S256).

In S256, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing has not changed from the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (when the determination in S256 is NO), the main CPU 101 is described in S262, which will be described later. Perform processing.

On the other hand, in S256, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing has changed from the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (when the determination in S256 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the start lever ON flag. If is on, the start lever ON flag is set to the off state (S257). That is, in this process, the main CPU 101 inserts medals in a specific period from when the start operation is performed and the control for prohibiting medal acceptance is started until the medal acceptance is actually (physically) prohibited. When it is detected, a process of invalidating the start operation is performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 generates a normal value (normal change value) of the medal sensor input state obtained at the time of the current processing by arithmetic processing based on the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing (S258).

In this process, when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous process is "00000000000B" (when both the first and second medal sensors have not detected medals), it is regarded as a normal change value of the medal sensor input state. When "00000001B" (when the first medal sensor detects medals and the second medal sensor does not detect medals) is generated and the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is "00000001B", the medal sensor "00000011B" (when both the first and second medal sensors are medal detection) is generated as a normal change value of the input state. Further, in this process, when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous process is "00000011B", the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is "00000010B" (the first medal sensor has not detected a medal, and the second (When the medal sensor is medal detection) is generated, and when the medal sensor input state at the time of the previous processing is "00000010B", the normal change value of the medal sensor input state is "0000000000B" (first and second medals). If both sensors do not detect medals) is generated.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (S259). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not a medal retrograde error has occurred, and if the determination condition of S259 is not satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines that a medal retrograde error has occurred.

In S259, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is not the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (when the determination in S259 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the processing of S263 described later. conduct.

On the other hand, in S259, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the same as the normal change value generated in S258 (when the determination in S259 is YES), the main CPU 101 is at the time of the current processing. It is determined whether or not the medal sensor input state of the above is the state at the time of passing the medal (“00000000B”) (S260). In S260, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current process is the state at the time of passing the medal (when the determination in S260 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S264 described later.

In S260, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is not the state at the time of passing the medal (when the determination in S260 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the medal passing check timer (S261). The time set in the medal passage check timer in this process can be set to any time as long as it is possible to determine whether or not the medal has passed the selector 66. Further, the timer value set in this process may be changed according to, for example, the medal sensor input state at the time of the current process.

After the processing of S261 or when the determination of S256 is NO, the main CPU 101 indicates whether the medal sensor input state at the time of the current processing is the medal passing state (“000000111B”) and the medal passing check timer is stopped. (S262). In this determination process, it is determined whether or not a medal passing error (inserted medal passing time error) has occurred, and if the determination condition of S262 is satisfied, the main CPU 101 determines that a medal passing error has occurred.

In S262, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination condition of S262 is not satisfied (when the determination in S262 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S253 and repeats the processes after S253.

On the other hand, in S262, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination condition of S262 is satisfied (when S262 is a YES determination), or when S259 is a NO determination, that is, a medal passing error or a medal retrograde error has occurred. If it is determined, the main CPU 101 performs error processing (S263). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs various processes when an error occurs, such as an error command generation and storage process. The details of error handling will be described later with reference to FIG. 62 described later. Then, after the processing of S263, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253, and repeats the processing after S253.

Here, returning to the process of S260 again, if S260 is determined to be YES, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a specified number of medals (three medals in this embodiment) have already been inserted (S264). ..

In S264, when the main CPU 101 determines that the specified number of medals have not been inserted (NO in S264), the main CPU 101 performs the medal insertion process described with reference to FIG. 59 (S265). Then, after the processing of S265, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S253, and repeats the processing after S253.

On the other hand, in S264, when the main CPU 101 determines that a specified number of medals have already been inserted (when the determination in S264 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the credit counter (S266). ). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal insertion command generation and storage process (S267). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of a medal insertion command to be transmitted to the sub control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The medal insertion command stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of credits of the medal is the upper limit value (50 in the present embodiment) based on the value of the credit counter (S268).

In S268, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits for medals is not the upper limit value (when the determination in S268 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S253 and repeats the processes after S253. On the other hand, in S268, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits of medals is the upper limit value (when the determination in S268 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the medal insertion check process (or medal insertion check 2 process). , The process is transferred to S229 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58) (or S239 of the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)).

[Error handling]
Next, with reference to FIG. 62, for example, the error processing performed in S263 during the medal insertion check processing (see FIGS. 60 and 61) will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing an error handling procedure.

First, the main CPU 101 turns off the medal solenoid (S271). Specifically, the main CPU 101 stops driving the solenoid of the selector 66 (see FIG. 5). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the medal payout number display data (S272). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error table setting process (S273).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires an error factor (S274). The error factor acquired in this process changes according to the process in which the error process currently being processed is read. The error factors targeted in this embodiment include "hopper empty error", "hopper jam error", "inserted medal passing count error", "inserted medal passing check error", and "inserted medal passing check error". "Insert medal passing time error", "Insert medal retrograde error", "Insert medal auxiliary storage full error", "Illegal hit error" are specified. For example, when the error process is read after the process of S259 during the medal insertion check process, the "inserted medal retrograde error (Cr)" is acquired as an error factor in this process. Further, for example, when the error process is read after the process of S262 during the medal insertion check process, the "inserted medal passing time error (CE)" is acquired as an error factor in this process.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires error display data from the error table and the error cause (S275). For example, when the error factor is "insertion medal retrograde error (Cr)", the 1-byte data "001001110B" is used as the error display data to be output to the upper digit 7-segment LED among the 2-digit 7-segment LEDs in this process. Is acquired, and 1-byte data “000001001B” is acquired as error display data to be output to the lower digit 7-segment LED. In this case, the two characters "Cr" are displayed as error information on the two-digit 7-segment LED.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error command (generation) generation and storage process (S276). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of an error command when an error occurs, which is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The error command when an error occurs stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The error command when an error occurs includes a parameter indicating the occurrence of an error.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a standby process for an interrupt time (1.1172 ms) (S277). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the error has been cleared (S278).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S278 that the error has not been cleared (when the determination in S278 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process in S277 and repeats the processes after S277.

On the other hand, in S278, when the main CPU 101 determines that the error has been cleared (when the determination in S278 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the error factor clearing process (S279). This process is performed in a non-standard work area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a restoration process of the payout number display data of the medals saved in S272 (S280).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error command (release) generation and storage process (S281). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates data of an error command at the time of error cancellation to be transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and stores the command data in a communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The error command at the time of error cancellation stored in the communication data storage area is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. The error command at the time of error cancellation includes a parameter indicating error cancellation. Then, after the processing of S281, the main CPU 101 ends the error processing, and shifts the processing to, for example, S253 during the medal insertion check processing (see FIGS. 60 and 61). In the error release, the cause of the error is released, and the error state is released by pressing the reset switch 76.

[Random value acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 63, the random number value acquisition process performed in S203 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number value acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires a hard latch random number (0 to 65535) of the random number register 0 of the random number circuit, and uses the acquired random number value as a random number value for internal winning combination lottery, and uses a random number value storage area (non-standard) in the main RAM 103. It is stored in (shown) (S291).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a set process of the soft latch random number acquisition register for generating the soft latch random numbers (0 to 65535 or 0 to 255) of the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit (S292). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the acquisition number (for example, 7) of the soft latch random numbers (S293). The number of acquisitions can be appropriately increased or decreased according to the number of lottery that can be performed in one game.

Next, the main CPU 101 collectively acquires the number of acquired soft latch random numbers, and stores the acquired number of soft latch random numbers in the random number value storage area (S294). At this time, the soft latch random numbers (effect random number values) acquired from the random number registers 1 to 7 of the random number circuit 110 are hard latch random numbers (hard latch random numbers) acquired from the random number register 0 of the random number circuit in the random number value storage area. It is saved in an area different from the area where the internal winning combination lottery random number value) is stored. Then, after the processing of S294, the main CPU 101 ends the random number value acquisition processing, and shifts the processing to S204 of the main flow (see FIG. 56). In the present embodiment, in order to store one 2-byte random number (random number value for internal winning combination lottery) and six 1-byte random numbers (random number value for production), an 8-byte storage area is provided in the main RAM 103. It is allocated as a random number storage area. Further, in the present embodiment, the soft latch random number of the 2-byte random number is not used.

[Internal lottery processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 64, the internal lottery process performed in S204 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the internal lottery process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a set value / medal insertion number check process (S301). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks the set value (any of 1 to 6) of the current game and the number of inserted medals (3 in the present embodiment).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the internal lottery table for general games (see the internal lottery table in the “RT0” state shown in FIGS. 16 and 17) and the number of lottery (98 times in this embodiment) (S302). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RB is in operation (S303). When the main CPU 101 determines in S303 that the RB is not in operation (when the determination in S303 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S305 described later.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 101 determines in S303 that the RB is in operation (when the determination in S303 is YES), the main CPU 101 has an internal lottery table for RB (see the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 18) and The number of lottery (7 times in this embodiment) is set (S304). In this process, the internal lottery table and the number of lottery for general games set in S302 are overwritten by the internal lottery table and the number of lottery for RB.

After the processing of S304 or when the determination in S303 is NO, the main CPU 101 acquires the determination data (data related to the address) of the lottery target combination from the set internal lottery table, and updates the lottery table address (S305).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data is RT state-specific data (S306). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired lottery target combination is an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to the RT state. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address defined in the currently acquired lottery target combination determination data is an address in the lottery value selection table (not shown) for each RT state. ..

In S306, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the RT state-specific data (when the determination in S306 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S308 described later. On the other hand, in S306, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is the data for each RT state (when the determination in S306 is YES), the main CPU 101 selects data from the RT state lottery value selection table based on the determination data. Is acquired, and the acquired selection data is set in the determination data (S307).

After the processing of S307 or when the determination in S306 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination data of the lottery target combination is the data for each setting (S308). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired lottery target combination is an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to the set value. Specifically, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the address defined in the currently acquired lottery target combination determination data is an address in the internal lottery value table (not shown) for each setting.

In S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is not the setting-specific data (when the determination in S308 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S310 described later. On the other hand, in S308, when the main CPU 101 determines that the determination data is the data for each setting (when the determination in S308 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds the set value data (any of 0 to 5) to the determination data. Then, the added value is set in the determination data (S309). The set value data added to the determination data in this process is the data associated with the set value, but the set value data "0" to "5" are not the values of the set value itself, but are "0" to "5", respectively. It is the data corresponding to "setting 1" to "setting 6".

After the processing of S309 or when the determination in S308 is NO, the main CPU 101 calculates the address of the area in which the lottery value of the lottery target combination is stored based on the set determination data (address data), and sets the address to the address. The stored lottery value is acquired (S310).

For example, in the case of an internal winning combination whose lottery value changes according to both the RT state and the set value, the lottery value is referred to both the RT state lottery value selection table and the internal lottery value table for each setting. Is obtained. That is, for example, in an internal lottery table for a general game state (see FIGS. 16 and 17), an internal winning combination (for example, "F_maintenance lip") in which the lottery value fluctuates when the RT state is different based on the RT0 state. For the internal winning combination (for example, "F_maintenance lip"), the lottery value is changed according to the game state (RT1 to RT5 state), and the lottery value is changed when the set value is different. The lottery value is changed according to the set value (settings 1 to 6).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires a random number value (any of 0 to 65535) for the internal winning combination lottery stored in the random number storage area (S311).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a lottery execution process (S312). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the random number value acquired in S311 to the lottery value acquired in S310, and sets the addition result as the lottery result (winning / non-winning of the lottery target combination). In this lottery execution process, when the sum of the lottery value and the random number value exceeds 65535 (overflow), it is determined that the lottery target combination has been won (the lottery target combination has been determined as the internal winning combination). NS.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores a value obtained by adding the lottery value to the random number value (random number value after the lottery execution) as a new random number value in the random number storage area (S313). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the lottery execution process has won (whether or not an overflow has occurred) (S314).

In S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning is won in the lottery execution process (when the determination in S314 is YES), the main CPU 101 refers to the internal lottery table and refers to the winning request flag status corresponding to the winning internal winning combination (the winning request flag status (when the determination is YES in S314). For example, the special prize winning number (that is, information that can identify the type of the winning bonus combination) and the small winning combination winning number (that is, the winning small winning combination or replay combination) corresponding to "No." in FIGS. 16 to 18 The value of (information that can identify the type)) is acquired (S315). Then, after the processing of S315, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S314, when the main CPU 101 determines that the lottery has not been won in the lottery execution process (when the determination in S314 is NO), the main CPU 101 updates the lottery target combination to the next combination in the internal lottery table, and draws the lottery. The number of times is subtracted by 1 (S316). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of lottery after subtraction is "0" (S317).

In S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lottery after subtraction is not "0" (when the determination in S317 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S305 and repeats the processes after S305.

On the other hand, in S317, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of lottery after subtraction is "0" (when the determination in S317 is YES), that is, when the internal winning combination is "missing", the main CPU 101 determines. Set the loss status (S318). The "missing status" corresponds to the winning request flag status in which both the special prize winning number and the small winning combination winning number are "0". Then, after the processing of S318, the main CPU 101 ends the internal lottery processing, and shifts the processing to S205 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Design setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 65, the symbol setting process performed in S205 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 extracts the special prize winning number and the small winning combination winning number based on the winning request flag status acquired in the internal lottery process, and extracts the extracted special winning winning number and the small winning combination winning number in the main RAM 103. It is stored in the winning number storage area (not shown) (S321).

In the present embodiment, the special prize winning numbers "1" to "4" are associated with the internal winning combinations "F_BB1", "F_BB2", "F_BB3" and "F_BB4", respectively. In addition, the small winning combination "1" to "23" are associated with the internal winning combination "F_confirmed lip" to "F_shot lip" (see FIG. 23), and the small winning combination numbers "24" to "23" are associated with each other. Internal winning combinations "F_chance eye A1" to "F_lower right middle bell 2" are associated with "61" (see FIG. 24), and small winning combinations "62" to "68" are associated with each other. Internal winning combinations "F_JAC1_1" to "F_JAC2" are associated with each other (see FIG. 23). Then, the value of the winning request flag status is composed of a value obtained by multiplying the special prize number indicating these values by the value of the special prize winning number and adding the small winning combination winning number. Therefore, in the process of S321, in order to extract the special prize winning number and the small winning combination winning number from the value of the winning request flag status, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 101 divides the value of the winning request flag status by the special prize number. This is an example of data compression for identifying the internal winning combination, and other data structures can be appropriately adopted as long as the special prize winning number and the small winning combination can be extracted.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has won based on the extracted small winning combination winning number (S322). In this process, if the small winning combination winning number is any of 1 to 68, the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has won, and if the small winning combination winning number is 0, , The main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has not been won.

In S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has not been won (when the determination in S322 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S331 described later. On the other hand, in S322, when the main CPU 101 determines that the small winning combination (or replay winning combination) has won (when the determination in S322 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the small winning combination winning number as the initial value of the subtraction result (when it is determined that S322 is YES). S323).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets a hit request flag table (not shown) (S324). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the subtraction result and updates the subtraction result (S325). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the subtraction result is less than "0" (S326).

In S326, when the main CPU 101 determines that the subtraction result is not less than "0" (when the determination in S326 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the bit number calculation process (S327). In the bit number calculation process of S327, the number of blocks in the storage area of the hit request flag data corresponding to the small winning combination winning number specified in the hit request flag table is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a bit number calculation process (S328). In the bit number calculation process of S328, the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in the block unit specified in the hit request flag table is calculated.

The above-mentioned processing of S325 to S328 is repeated as many times as the number of small winning combination winning numbers. When the processing of S325 to S328 is repeated a plurality of times, the number of blocks acquired in the bit number calculation processing of S327 and S328 and the number of bytes of the hit request flag data for each block are stored in another storage area. Will be done. Further, the number of blocks obtained by the above-mentioned processing of S325 to S328 and the number of bytes of the hit request flag data in the block unit are information (on-bit information) for designating the storage destination of the hit request flag data.

Here, returning to the processing of S326 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S326 that the subtraction result is less than "0" (when the determination in S326 is YES), the main CPU 101 is in the hit request flag storage area ( The internal winning combination storage area) is set (S329). At this time, the main CPU 101 checks (updates) the hit request flag based on the number of blocks obtained by the above-mentioned processes of S325 to S328 and the number of bytes (on-bit information) of the hit request flag data for each block. Set only the storage area. Specifically, the address of the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated) is stored in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a compressed data storage process (S330). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (expanding) the hit request flag data to a predetermined storage area in the hit request flag storage area to be checked (updated). The details of the compressed data storage process will be described later with reference to FIG. 66 described later.

After the processing of S330 or when the determination in S322 is NO, the main CPU 101 refers to the carry-over combination storage area (see FIG. 26) and determines whether or not there is a carry-over combination (S331). In S331, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a carry-over combination (when the determination in S331 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S334 described later.

On the other hand, in S331, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no carry-over combination (when the determination in S331 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the bonus combination (BB1 to BB4) based on the special prize winning number extracted in the process of S321. ) Wins or not (S332).

In S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination has not been won (when the determination in S332 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting process and shifts the process to S206 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Transfer.

On the other hand, in S332, when the main CPU 101 determines that the bonus combination has been won (when the determination in S332 is YES), the main CPU 101 stores the winning special prize winning number in the carry-over combination storage area (S333).

After the processing of S333 or when the determination in S331 is NO, the main CPU 101 sets the special prize winning number in the winning number storage area (not shown), sets the hit request flag data in the hit request flag storage area, and sets the RT state to RT5. Set to the state (S334). Then, after the processing of S334, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol setting processing and shifts the processing to S206 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Compressed data storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 66, for example, the compressed data processing performed in S330 during the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65) will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the compressed data storage process.

The compressed data storage process shown in FIG. 66 is executed not only in S330 during the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65) but also in S649 during the symbol code acquisition process (see FIG. 68 described later) described later. In the compressed data storage process executed in S330 during the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65), the flag data to be processed is the hit request flag data (flag data related to the winning combination), but the symbol code acquisition process described later In the compressed data storage process executed in S649 (see FIG. 68 described later), the flag data to be processed is the winning operation flag data (flag data related to the winning combination). Then, both processes are the same except that the types of flag data to be processed are different.

Therefore, in the flowchart of FIG. 66, the flag data to be processed is referred to as “process target flag data”, and the flag table to be processed is referred to as “process target flag table”. In addition, in accordance with this description, in the following description of the compressed data storage process, the winning request flag data or the winning operation flag data is referred to as "processing target flag data", and the winning request flag table or the symbol-corresponding winning operation table described later is used. (Not shown) is referred to as a "process target flag table".

First, the main CPU 101 sets the storage destination check bit (S341). In this process, the storage destination check bit is stored in a register other than the A register.

The storage destination check bit is 1-byte data for designating a block that is a storage destination (transfer destination) of the processing target flag data. In the present embodiment, the hit request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area are both composed of two blocks (blocks of storage areas 1 to 8 and blocks of storage area 9). Then, for example, when the internal winning combination "F_JAC1-1" is determined, the number of blocks of the storage destination becomes "2". Therefore, in the processing of S341, "00000011B" is set as the storage destination check bit. The bit 0 value (1/0) of this 1-byte data corresponds to the presence or absence of a storage destination in the blocks of the storage areas 1 to 8, and the bit 1 value (1/0) corresponds to the block of the storage area 9. Corresponds to the presence or absence of the storage destination in.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the value of the transfer counter in byte units to "8" (S342). In the present embodiment, since the number of bytes of at least one block is "8", "8" is set as the initial value of the transfer counter.

Next, the value of the transfer instruction bit is extracted from the storage destination check bit (S343). The transfer instruction bit corresponds to the data of bit 0 in the storage destination check bit, and in the processing of S343, the storage destination check bit stored in the 1-byte register is shifted to the right once (for 1 bit). As a result, the transfer instruction bit is extracted. Specifically, when the 1-byte register (register other than the A register) in which the storage destination check bit is stored is shifted to the right once, the data stored in bits 7 to 1 are changed to bits 6 to 0, respectively. As it moves, the data of bit 0 before the shift is output. Then, the data output by this shift process becomes the value of the transfer instruction bit.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a transfer instruction based on the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit (S344). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction when the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit is “1”. For example, when "00000011B" is set as the storage destination check bit, the transfer is performed in the first (corresponding to the first block of the storage area) and the second (corresponding to the second block of the storage area) determination process of S344. It will be judged that there is an instruction.

In S344, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no transfer instruction (when the determination in S344 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S354 described later.

On the other hand, in S344, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction (when the determination in S344 is YES), the main CPU 101 acquires byte unit storage destination designation information from the processing target flag table (S345). In this process, the transfer destination is stored at the start address of the area in which the flag data of the process target combination (winning combination or winning combination) in the processing target flag table is stored as the byte unit storage destination specification information. Byte data is retrieved.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) of the address to be referred to in the process target flag table (S346). Further, in this process, the main CPU 101 sets as an initial address an address that specifies the head storage area of the block that is the storage (transfer) destination of the processing target flag data. For example, in the processing of the first block, the address of the storage area 1 is set as the initial address in the processing of S346, and in the processing of the second block, the address of the storage area 9 is set as the initial address in the processing of S346. ..

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the transfer instruction bit from the byte unit storage destination designation information (S347). The transfer instruction bit referred to here corresponds to bit 0 of the byte unit storage destination specification information, and in the processing of S347, the byte unit storage destination specification information stored in the 1-byte register is shifted to the right once. Extracts the value of the transfer instruction bit (outputs bit 0 data).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a transfer instruction based on the value of the transfer instruction bit extracted in the process of S347 (S348). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction when the value of the extracted transfer instruction bit is “1”. For example, when "00000001B" is set as the byte unit storage destination designation information, the bit 1 data "1" is processed in S347 of the first time (storage area 1 of the first block or storage area 9 of the second block). Is output as the value of the transfer instruction bit and it is determined that there is a transfer instruction, but in the second to eighth processes of S347, it is determined that there is no transfer instruction.

In S348, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no transfer instruction (when the determination in S348 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S351 described later.

On the other hand, in S348, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is a transfer instruction (when the determination in S348 is YES), the main CPU 101 is the processing target flag stored in the address in the currently set processing target flag table. The data (winning request flag data or winning operation flag data) is transferred (copied) to the designated storage area (S349).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process (a process of adding 1 to the address) of the address to be referred to in the process target flag table (S350).

After the processing of S350 or when the determination in S348 is NO, the main CPU 101 performs an address update processing (a processing of adding 1 to the address) for designating a storage area to be a storage destination of the processing target flag data (S351). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the transfer counter (S352).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the transfer counter is "0" (S353). In S353, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the transfer counter is not "0" (when the determination in S353 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S347 and repeats the processing after S347.

On the other hand, in S353, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the transfer counter is "0" (when the determination in S353 is YES), does the main CPU 101 have a transfer instruction target remaining in the current storage destination check bit? Whether or not it is determined (S354). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a bit in which "1" is stored remains in the storage destination check bit at the time of the current process. Then, when the bit in which "1" is stored remains in the storage destination check bit, that is, when the block to be processed exists, the main CPU 101 gives a transfer instruction to the current storage destination check bit. Determine that the target remains.

In S354, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transfer instruction target remains in the current storage destination check bit (when the determination in S354 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S342, and the process after S342. repeat. On the other hand, in S354, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transfer instruction target does not remain in the current storage destination check bit (when the determination in S354 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the compressed data storage process and performs the process. For example, it is moved to S331 in the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65).

[Pull-in priority storage process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 67, the pull-in priority storage process performed in S212 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the pull-in priority storage process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets "3" to the number of search reels (S621). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority table selection process (S622). In this process, a pull-in priority table (not shown) is selected based on the internal winning combination and the operation stop button.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority storage area selection process (S623). In this process, the pull-in priority data storage area of the reel to be searched is selected. Next, the main CPU 101 sets "20" as the number of symbol checks (number of times) (S624).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol code acquisition process (S625). In this process, the symbol code is acquired by referring to the winning operation flag storage area and the symbol code storage area corresponding to the number of symbol checks. The details of the symbol code acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIG. 68 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product calculation process (S626). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation flag data generation process. The details of the logical product calculation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 69 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a pull-in priority acquisition process (S627). In this process, in the main CPU 101, the bit is set to "1" in the winning operation flag (winning combination) storage area (see FIG. 25), and the bit is set to "1" in the hit request flag storage area. The attraction priority data is acquired by referring to the attraction priority table (not shown) for the winning combination. The details of the pull-in priority acquisition process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71, which will be described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the acquired attraction priority data in the attraction priority data storage area (not shown) in the main RAM 103 (S628). At this time, the attraction priority data is stored in the attraction priority data storage area so that the value of each priority and the bit of the storage area correspond to each other.

The pull-in priority data storage area is provided with a priority data storage area for each type of main reel. In each attraction priority data storage area, the attraction priority data determined according to each symbol position "0" to "19" of the corresponding main reel is stored. In the present embodiment, by referring to this attraction priority data storage area, it is searched whether or not a more appropriate number of sliding pieces exists in addition to the number of sliding pieces determined based on the stop table.

The content of the priority pull-in data stored in the pull-in priority data storage area differs depending on the type of the pull-in priority table number in the pull-in priority table referred to when determining the pull-in priority data. Further, the pull-in priority data indicates that the larger the value, the higher the priority. By referring to the pull-in priority data, it is possible to relatively evaluate the priority among the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. That is, the symbol whose highest value is determined as the attraction priority data is the symbol having the highest priority. Therefore, it can be said that the pull-in priority data indicates the order between the symbols arranged on the peripheral surface of the main reel. If there are a plurality of symbols having the same value of the pull-in priority data, one symbol is determined according to the priority order defined by the priority order table.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the pull-in priority storage area (S629). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets a pull-in priority data storage area for the next check symbol. Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of symbol checks (S630). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of symbol checks is "0" (S631).

In S631, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of symbol checks is not "0" (when the determination in S631 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S625 and repeats the processes after S625. On the other hand, in S631, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of symbol checks is "0" (when the determination in S631 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a search target reel change process (S632).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of search reels (S633). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of search reels is "0", that is, whether or not the above-mentioned series of processes has been performed on all the main reels (S634).

In S634, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of search reels is not "0" (when the determination in S634 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S622 and repeats the processes after S622. On the other hand, in S634, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of search reels is "0" (when the determination in S634 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the attraction priority storage process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. 56), move to S213.

[Design code acquisition process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 68, the symbol code acquisition process performed in S625 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol code acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 clears the winning operation flag storage area (S641). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets "0" in all the storage areas in the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the first reel symbol arrangement table (not shown) (S642).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped (S643).

In S643, when the main CPU 101 determines that the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped (when the determination in S643 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S647 described later. On the other hand, in S643, when the main CPU 101 determines that the first reel (left reel 3L) is not stopped (when the determination in S643 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the second reel symbol arrangement table (not shown). (S644). In this process, the first reel symbol arrangement table set in the process of S642 is overwritten by the second reel symbol arrangement table.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the second reel (middle reel 3C) is stopped (S645).

In S645, when the main CPU 101 determines that the second reel (middle reel 3C) is stopped (when the determination in S645 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S647 described later. On the other hand, in S645, when the main CPU 101 determines that the second reel (middle reel 3C) is not stopped (when the determination in S645 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the third reel symbol arrangement table (not shown). (S646). In this process, the second reel symbol arrangement table set in the process of S644 is overwritten by the third reel symbol arrangement table.

After the processing of S646, or when S643 or S645 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 performs a symbol check process at the time of executing the stop operation on the reel to be stopped controlled, and corresponds to the symbol corresponding to the symbol acquired by the symbol check process. Acquire a winning operation table (not shown) (S647). The symbol-corresponding winning operation table is a table for identifying the type of winning combination (symbol combination) that can be won if the corresponding symbol stops on the effective line in the reel to be stopped and controlled.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the winning operation flag storage area (S648). Next, the main CPU 101 performs the compressed data storage process described with reference to FIG. 66 (S649). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs a process of transferring (expanding) the winning operation flag data that can be won in the symbol-corresponding winning operation table to the corresponding storage area in the winning operation flag storage area.

For example, when the first reel (left reel 3L) is stopped and the symbol located on the effective line during the stop operation is "blank", the symbol combinations (combinations) that can be won are FIGS. 19 to 22. As shown in, "S_XD lip", "S_bar lip 2", "S_RT1 transition lip", and "S_special role 1".

After the processing of S649, the main CPU 101 sets the winning operation flag storage area updated by the compressed data storage processing, sets the symbol code storage area, and sets the data length of the winning operation flag storage area (9 bytes in this embodiment). Is set (S650). Then, after the processing of S650, the main CPU 101 ends the symbol code acquisition processing, and shifts the processing to S626 of the pull-in priority storage processing (see FIG. 67).

[Logical product operation processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 69, for example, the logical product calculation process performed in S626 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the logical product calculation process. The logical product calculation process shown in FIG. 69 is performed not only in S626 in the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) but also in S686 in the attraction priority acquisition process (see FIGS. 70 and 71 described later). Is also executed.

In the logical product operation process executed in S626 during the pull-in priority storage process (see FIG. 67), the two data to be ANDed are stored in the winning operation flag set in S650 during the above-mentioned symbol code acquisition process. It is the data of the area and the data of the symbol code storage area. The former data corresponds to the "logical product destination data" described later, and the latter data corresponds to the "logical product source data" described later. Further, in this case, the number of bytes "9" of the data length (9 bytes) set in S650 during the above-mentioned symbol code acquisition process corresponds to the "number of logical products" described later.

On the other hand, in the logical product calculation process executed in S686 in the pull-in priority acquisition process described later (see FIGS. 70 and 71 described later), the two data to be logically ANDed are stored in the hit (pull-in) request flag storage area. Data and data of the winning operation flag storage area. The former data corresponds to the "logical product destination data" described later, and the latter data corresponds to the "logical product source data" described later. Further, in this case, the number of bytes "1" of the data length (1 byte) of the RT operation combination display flag described later corresponds to the "logical product number" described later.

First, the main CPU 101 acquires the logical product source data (for example, the data of the symbol code storage area) (S661). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a logical product operation of the logical product source data and the logical product destination data (for example, data in the winning operation flag storage area), and saves the calculation result as the logical product destination data (S662).

Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the logical product source data to be acquired (S663). Next, the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the logical product destination data to be referred to (S664).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the number of logical products (S665). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of logical products is "0" (S666).

In S666, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of logical products is not "0" (when the determination in S666 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S661 and repeats the processes after S661. On the other hand, in S666, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of logical products is "0" (when the determination in S666 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the logical product calculation process and stores the process, for example, in the pull-in priority order. The process moves to S627 of the process (see FIG. 67).

[Pull-in priority acquisition process]
Next, the attraction priority acquisition process performed in S627 during the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67) will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 and 71. 70 and 71 are flowcharts showing the procedure of the attraction priority acquisition process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is time to check the right reel 3R (specific display column) (S671).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S671 that it is not the time to check the right reel 3R (when the determination in S671 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S674 described later. On the other hand, in S671, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is the time to check the right reel 3R (when the determination in S671 is YES), the main CPU 101 "ANY combination" in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination. It is determined whether or not (a combination of predetermined symbols) is included (S672). The "ANY combination" here means a combination in which the winning is confirmed regardless of at least the stop symbol of the right reel 3R (at least the winning combination in which the stop symbol of the right reel 3R is an arbitrary symbol). However, in this embodiment, the "ANY role" is not defined.

In S672, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination does not include the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S672 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S674 described later. On the other hand, in S672, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the internal winning combination includes the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S672 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines that the "ANY combination" in the winning operation flag storage area. The storage area corresponding to the "combination" is masked (S673). Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets "1" in the bit corresponding to the "ANY combination" in the winning operation flag storage area. If the "ANY combination" is not specified for the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination, the processes of S671 to S673 may not be required. Further, when the "ANY combination" defines the stop symbol of the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C as an arbitrary symbol, the processing of S672 and S673 is performed even when the left reel 3L or the middle reel 3C is checked. It may be performed (the same applies to the processes of S681 to S683 described later).

After the processing of S673, or when S671 or S672 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) by adding "1" to the address of the last storage area. Is set, the stop prohibition data is set, and the winning operation flag data length (data length of the winning operation flag storage area: 9 bytes in this embodiment) is set (S674). Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the stop button operation counter and the stop button operation state (S675). The stop button operation counter is a counter for managing the number of stop buttons for which a stop operation is detected. Further, the operation stop button operation state is acquired by referring to the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the address of the set winning operation flag storage area by 1 (S676). Next, the main CPU 101 generates hit request flag data from the set winning operation flag storage area and the corresponding hit request flag storage area (see FIG. 25), and based on the generated hit request flag data. Generate a prohibited winning operating position (S677).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the stop operation position is the prohibited winning operation position (S678).

In S678, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation position is not the prohibited winning operation position (when the determination in S678 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S678, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop operation position is the prohibited winning operation position (when the determination in S678 is YES), the value of the stop button operation counter of the main CPU 101 is the value of the third stop. Whether or not it is determined (S679).

In S679, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is the value of the third stop (when the determination in S679 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S705 described later. On the other hand, in S679, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is not the value of the third stop (when the determination in S679 is NO), the value of the stop button operation counter of the main CPU 101 is the second stop. It is determined whether or not it is a value (S680).

In S680, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is not the value of the second stop (when the determination in S680 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S680, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the stop button operation counter is the value of the second stop (when the determination in S680 is YES), whether or not the main CPU 101 is after the right reel 3R is stopped. (S681).

In S681, when the main CPU 101 determines that the right reel 3R has been stopped (when the determination in S681 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S681, when the main CPU 101 determines that the right reel 3R has not been stopped (when the determination in S681 is NO), the main CPU 101 has a flag that the hit request flag may be interfered with by the "ANY combination". It is determined whether or not (whether or not "ANY combination" is not included in the symbol combination (winning combination) related to the internal winning combination) (S682).

In S682, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag is not a flag that may be interfered with by the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S682 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S684 described later. On the other hand, in S682, when the main CPU 101 determines that the hit request flag is a flag that may be interfered with by the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S682 is NO), the main CPU 101 currently checks "ANY". It is determined whether or not it is time to check the hit request flag including the "combination" (S683).

In S683, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is at the time of checking the hit request flag including the "ANY combination" (when the determination in S683 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S705 described later.

On the other hand, in S683, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current check is not at the time of checking the hit request flag including "ANY combination" (when S683 is NO determination), when S678 or S680 is NO determination, or S681. Alternatively, when the determination in S682 is YES, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the winning operation flag data length (S684). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning operation flag data length is “0” (S685).

In S685, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data length is not "0" (when the determination in S685 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S676 and repeats the processing after S676.

On the other hand, in S685, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data length is "0" (when the determination in S685 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a stop control pull-in request flag setting process (S686). .. In this process, for example, the main CPU 101 performs the logical product operation process described with reference to FIG. 69. In the logical product operation process executed in the process of S686, as described above, the data of the hit (pull-in) request flag storage area is set in the "logical product destination data", and the data of the winning operation flag storage area is set. It is set in the "logical product source data", and the number of bytes "1" of the data length (1 byte) of the RT operation combination display flag is set in the "logical product count". The RT operation combination display flag is a storage area in which the symbol combination related to the RT transition is defined in the winning operation flag storage area, and in the present embodiment, it is only the storage area 1 as shown in FIG. 25.

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the pull-in priority table address storage area and acquires the pull-in priority table (S687). In this process, the initial value "1 (001H)" of the pull-in priority data is set at the currently set address, and one of the pull-in priority tables is acquired.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the data in the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is the end code (000H) (S688).

In S688, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is the end code (when the determination in S688 is YES), the main CPU 101 uses S705, which will be described later. Is processed. On the other hand, in S688, when the main CPU 101 determines that the data in the pull-in priority table stored at the currently set address is not the end code (when the determination in S688 is NO), the main CPU 101 operates the winning operation. The flag storage area is set (S689).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the attraction priority data based on the attraction priority table stored in the currently set address (S690). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the block counter of the pull-in priority table (S691).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of checks of the attraction priority table, and adds 1 (+1 update) to the address of the attraction priority table to be referred to (S692).

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires check data based on the updated address of the pull-in priority table, and extracts check bits from the check data (S693).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the extracted check bit is “1” (S694).

In S694, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the extracted check bit is not "1" (when the determination in S694 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S699 described later. On the other hand, in S694, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the extracted check bit is "1" (when the determination in S694 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the reference pull-in priority table. (+1 update), and based on the updated address, the determination data is acquired from the pull-in priority table (S695).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the currently acquired winning operation flag data is the determination target based on the determination data acquired in S695 (S696). In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the currently acquired winning operation flag data with the determination data, determines whether or not the former corresponds to the latter, and the former corresponds to the latter. In that case, it is determined that the currently acquired winning operation flag data is the determination target.

In S696, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data is not the determination target (when the determination in S696 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S699 described later. On the other hand, in S696, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning operation flag data is the determination target (when the determination in S696 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the attraction priority data (S697). In this process, the main CPU 101 updates (overwrites) the currently set attraction priority data with the attraction priority data associated with the determination data acquired in S697.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates the check data (S698). In this process, the main CPU 101 shifts the check data by one bit to the right (direction from bit 7 to bit 0). In this process, "0" is set in the bit 7 of the check data after the shift.

After the processing of S698, or when S694 or S696 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is a bit to be checked (a bit in which "1" is set) in the check data (S699).

In S699, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no bit to be checked in the check data (when the determination in S699 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S702 described later. On the other hand, in S699, when the main CPU 101 determines that the check data has a bit to be checked (when the determination in S699 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the winning operation flag storage area to be checked (+1 update). ), And the number of checks is subtracted by 1 (S700).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of checks is "0" (S701). In S701, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of checks is not "0" (when the determination in S701 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S698 and repeats the processes after S698.

On the other hand, in S701, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of checks is "0" (when the determination in S701 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the number of checks in the address of the winning operation flag storage area currently referred to. In addition, the address of the winning operation flag storage area is updated, and the value of the block counter is decremented by 1 (S702). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the block counter is "0" (S703).

In S703, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the block counter is not "0" (when the determination in S703 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S692 and repeats the processes after S692.

On the other hand, in S703, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the block counter is "0" (when the determination in S703 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the address of the pull-in priority table to be referred to (+1 update). ) (S704). Then, after the processing of S704, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S688, and repeats the processing after S688.

Here, returning to the processing of S679, S683 or S688 again, if S679, S683 or S688 is a YES determination, the main CPU 101 uses the attraction order data set at this time as the final attraction priority data. Set (S705). If S679 or S683 is YES, the main CPU 101 sets "0 (00H)" as the final pull-in priority data. In this case, since the end code is assigned to the pull-in priority data "0 (00H)", no pull-in data (stop prohibition) is set. Then, after the processing of S705, the main CPU 101 ends the attraction priority acquisition process, and shifts the process to S628 of the attraction priority storage process (see FIG. 67).

[Reel stop control process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 72, the reel stop control process performed in S213 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reel stop control process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop enable signal OFF process (S711). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs the port output process of the reel stop enable signal OFF data. Further, this process is performed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached a predetermined constant speed (whether or not the speed has reached a "constant speed") (S712). In S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all reels are not "constant speed" (when the determination in S712 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S712.

On the other hand, in S712, when the main CPU 101 determines that the rotation speeds of all the reels have reached "constant speed" (when the determination in S712 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop enable signal ON process (S713). In this process, the main CPU 101 mainly performs the port output process of the reel stop enable signal ON data. Further, this process is performed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a valid stop button has been pressed (S714).

In S714, when the main CPU 101 determines that the valid stop button has not been pressed (when the determination in S714 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S713 and repeats the processes after S713. On the other hand, in S714, when the main CPU 101 determines that a valid stop button has been pressed (when the determination in S714 is YES), the main CPU 101 updates the operation stop button storage area (see FIG. 28), and the stop button is not yet pressed. The value of the operation counter is subtracted by 1 (S715).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines the search target reel from the operation stop button (S716). Further, in this process, the address (start address) set process of the rotation cylinder control data storage area in which the reel control management information of the search target reel is stored is also performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop enable signal OFF process (S717). Similar to S711, this process is performed using the non-standard work area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 stores the stop start position in the main RAM 103 based on the value of the symbol counter (S718).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel stop selection process (S719). Although detailed description is omitted, in this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of selecting the number of sliding pieces.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines a scheduled stop position based on the stop start position and the number of sliding pieces determined in S719, and stores the determined stop scheduled position in the main RAM 103 (S720). In this process, the main CPU 101 adds the number of sliding pieces to the stop start position, and sets the addition result as the stop scheduled position.

Next, the main CPU 101 executes the symbol code storage process (S721). In this process, the symbol code corresponding to the scheduled stop position is stored in the symbol code storage area. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (third stop) (S722). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (third stop) based on the value of the stop button non-operation counter, and the value of the stop button non-operation counter is set. When it is "0", it is determined that the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop.

In S722, when the main CPU 101 determines that the reel to be controlled is not the reel of the final stop (when the determination in S722 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the control change process (S723). In this process, the stop information group used for stopping the reel is updated when the reel is at a specific stop position. Next, the main CPU 101 performs the pull-in priority storage process described with reference to FIG. 67 (S724).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a stop interval remaining time standby process (S725). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a standby process until a preset predetermined reel stop interval time elapses. Then, after the processing of S725, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S711, and repeats the processing after S711.

Here, returning to the process of S722 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S722 that the reel to be controlled is the reel of the final stop (when the determination in S722 is YES), the main CPU 101 excites all the reels. Determines whether or not is in the stopped state (S726). In S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is not in the stopped state (when the determination in S726 is NO), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S726.

On the other hand, in S726, when the main CPU 101 determines that the excitation of all reels is in the stopped state (when the determination in S726 is YES), the main CPU 101 keeps the stop button operated for the third stop in the ON state. It is determined whether or not (the stop button is not released) (S727). In S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop button operated by the third stop operation remains in the ON state (when the determination in S727 is YES), the main CPU 101 repeats the process of S727. On the other hand, in S727, when the main CPU 101 determines that the stop button operated by the third stop operation is not in the ON state (when the determination in S727 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the reel stop control process and performs the process. Move to S214 of the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Prize search process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 73, the winning search process performed in S214 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the winning search process.

First, the main CPU 101 transfers and stores the data of each storage area stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) to the corresponding storage area of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) (S761). .. Then, at the end of this processing, the address at the end of the winning operation flag storage area is set in the DE register.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the payout number data table (not shown) that defines the payout number (see FIGS. 19 to 22) of the winning combination (symbol combination) in the HL register (S762). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the number of payout number tables (for example, "4" in this embodiment) as the initial value of the winning search counter, and sets the initial value in the B register (S763).

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the data of the number of medals to be paid out (in this embodiment, any one of 1, 2, 5, and 8) in the C register based on the address set in the HL register. , The determination target data is set in the A register, and "2" is added (+2 update) to the address set in the HL register (S764). In the payout number data table, the data of the payout number of medals is defined as, for example, "payout number (1, 2, 5 or 8) * 2 + 0". Further, in the following, the data "0" in the data "number of medals to be paid out (1, 2, 5 or 8) * 2 + 0" set in the C register will be referred to as a "judgment bit". This determination bit is information indicating whether or not the block is the determination target block of the winning search.

Next, the main CPU 101 extracts the value of the determination bit from the data of the number of medals to be paid out set in the C register (S765). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the block is a determination target block based on the value of the extracted determination bit (S766). In this process, the main CPU 101 determines that the block is a determination target block when the value of the extracted determination bit is "1". In the present embodiment, regardless of the number of medals to be paid out, the value of the determination bit is always defined as "0", so that the processing of S766 is always a NO determination.

In S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is not the determination target block (when the determination in S766 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S768 described later. On the other hand, in S766, when the main CPU 101 determines that the block is the determination target block (when the determination in S766 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register (-). 1 update) (S767).

After the processing of S767 or when the determination in S766 is NO, the main CPU 101 extracts the data of the storage area specified by the address of the winning operation flag storage area set in the DE register as the determination data (S768).

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the determination result is a prize based on the determination target data set in the A register in S764 and the determination data extracted in S768 (S769). In this process, if the determination target data set in the A register in S764 is the same as the determination data extracted in S768, the main CPU 101 determines that the determination result is a prize.

In S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is not a prize (when the determination in S769 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S776 described later. On the other hand, in S769, when the main CPU 101 determines that the result of the determination is a prize (when the determination in S769 is YES), the main CPU 101 has three current games (a game in which the number of medals bet is three). ) (S770).

In S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is a three-card game (when the determination in S770 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S772 described later. On the other hand, in S770, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current game is not a three-card game (when the determination in S770 is NO), the main CPU 101 pays out a two-card game (a game in which the number of medals bet is two). The number of sheets is set in the C register (S771). In this embodiment, since there is no two-card game, the processing of S770 and S771 becomes unnecessary.

After the processing of S771 or when the determination in S770 is YES, the main CPU 101 updates the number of payouts (S772). Specifically, the main CPU 101 adds the number of medals to be paid out set in the C register to the current value of the winning number counter, and sets the added value to the number of payouts.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the number of payouts is less than the maximum number of payouts "15" (S773).

In S773, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of payouts is less than the maximum number of payouts "15" (when the determination in S773 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S775 described later. On the other hand, in S773, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the number of payouts is not less than the maximum number of payouts "15" (when the determination in S773 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the maximum number of payouts "15" to the number of payouts. (S774).

After the processing of S774 or when the determination in S773 is YES, the main CPU 101 stores the payout number in the winning number counter (S775).

After the processing of S775 or when the determination in S769 is NO, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is another prize (S776). In S776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is another prize (when the determination in S776 is YES), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S769 and repeats the processes after S769.

On the other hand, in S7776, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no other prize (when the determination in S776 is NO), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (updates -1) the value of the prize search counter (S777). Note that, for example, when there is only one valid line, a plurality of small winning combinations will not be won in duplicate, so the determination process of S776 will always be a NO determination.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning search counter is "0" (S778).

In S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning search counter is not "0" (when the determination in S778 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S764 and repeats the processing after S764. On the other hand, in S778, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning search counter is "0" (when the determination in S778 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning search process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. 56) Move to the process of S215 in.

[Illegal hit check processing]
Next, the illegal hit check process performed in S215 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 74. Note that FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the illegal hit check process. An illegal hit is a special prize winning number and a small winning combination winning number (internal winning combination) that are drawn by the internal lottery process (see FIG. 64) and stored in the winning number storage area by the symbol setting process (see FIG. 65). Based on this, it is a term indicating that the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R are stopped on the effective line with a combination of symbols that cannot be established (symbol combination is not established).

First, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the winning operation flag storage area (see FIG. 25) (S781). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the size of the winning operation flag storage area (the number of bytes, “9” in the present embodiment) to the value of the check counter (S782).

Next, the main CPU 101 is based on the address of the winning operation flag storage area currently set, and the internal winning combination stored in the storage area in the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area) corresponding to the address. Data (hit request flag data) is acquired (S783). Next, the main CPU 101 synthesizes the winning combination data (winning operation flag data) stored in the address of the currently set winning operation flag storage area and the internal winning combination data (winning request flag data) ( S784).

In this synthesis process, the main CPU 101 first obtains the exclusive OR of the winning combination data (winning operation flag data) and the internal winning combination data (winning request flag data). Next, the main CPU 101 obtains the logical product of the calculated exclusive OR calculation result and the winning combination data (winning operation flag data), and uses the calculated logical product as the synthesis result. If no illegal hit error has occurred, the value of this synthesis result is "0".

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not an illegal hit error has occurred based on the result of the synthesis process of S784 (S785).

In S785, when the main CPU 101 determines that an illegal hit error has not occurred (NO in S785), the main CPU 101 updates the address of the winning operation flag storage area to be referred to by +1 (S786). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the check counter (S787). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the check counter is "0" (S788).

In S788, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the check counter is not "0" (when the determination in S788 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the process to the process of S783 and repeats the processes after S783. On the other hand, in S788, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the check counter is "0" (when the determination in S788 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the illegal hit check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. FIG. 56) Move to the process of S216 in.

Here, returning to the processing of S785 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S785 that an illegal hit error has occurred (when the determination in S785 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the error processing described with reference to FIG. 62. (S789). By this process, the two-digit 7-segment LED (both for displaying the number of payouts and for displaying the error) included in the information display 6 is used to display the two characters "EE" indicating the occurrence of an illegal hit error as error information. Error display data is output. The state in which the illegal hit error occurs (error state) is released by pressing the reset switch 76 (see FIG. 6).

Next, the main CPU 101 clears the value of the winning number counter and the data of the hit request flag storage area (S790). Then, after the processing of S790, the main CPU 101 ends the illegal hit check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 25, the configuration of the winning operation flag storage area (display combination storage area) is the same as that of the hit request flag storage area (internal winning combination storage area), so that the winning operation flag The winning request flag storage area and the winning operation flag storage area arranged in the main RAM 103 at the time of combining the combination of the storage area combination and the internal winning combination can have the same configuration. Therefore, the calculation result of S784 in the illegal hit check process of the present embodiment (the result of synthesizing the data of the winning combination and the data of the internal winning combination) is simply a logical product of the data of the winning combination and the data of the internal winning combination. It is obtained by executing (for example, executing with the "AND" instruction). As a result, in the present embodiment, the illegal hit check process can be made more efficient and simplified, the free space of the main control program can be secured (increased), and the increased free space can be used for playability. It becomes possible to increase.

[Prize check / medal payout process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 75, the winning check / medal payout process performed in S216 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described. Note that FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of winning check / medal payout processing.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a winning operation command generation process (S801). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the winning operation command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. The winning operation command is configured to include a parameter for specifying a winning operation flag (display combination) and the like.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the communication data storage process described with reference to FIG. 50 (S802). By this process, the winning operation command data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The winning operation command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the winning number counter is "0" (S803). In S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is "0" (when the determination in S803 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout process, and performs the process in the main flow (when the winning check / medal payout process is completed). (Refer to FIG. 56), the process proceeds to S217.

On the other hand, in S803, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning number counter is not "0" (when the determination in S803 is NO), the main CPU 101 has the maximum number of medals credited (stored). In the embodiment, it is determined whether or not the number is 50 or more (S804).

In S804, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of credits for medals is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (when the determination in S804 is NO), the main CPU 101 adds "1" to the value of the credit counter (updates +1). S805). The added value of the credit counter is displayed by a 2-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the number of stored sheets included in the information display 6. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a medal payout number check process (S806). The details of the medal payout number check process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the payout of medals has been completed (S807). In S807, when the main CPU 101 determines that the medal payout has been completed (when the determination in S807 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout process, and the process is in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S217.

On the other hand, in S807, when the main CPU 101 determines that the payout of medals has not been completed (when the determination in S807 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs a payout interval standby process (S808). In this process, the main CPU 101 waits until the preset medal payout interval time (60.33 msec in this embodiment: 54 cycles of the interrupt process (1.1172 msec cycle) described later with reference to FIG. 79) elapses. Wait. Then, after the processing of S808, the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S803, and repeats the processing after S803.

Here, returning to the process of S804 again, when the main CPU 101 determines in S804 that the number of credits for medals is equal to or greater than the upper limit (50) (when the determination in S804 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines. The medal payout process is performed (S809). By this process, the medals that are not stored as the number of credits are paid out. In the process of S809, the processes of S806 to 806 may be repeated every time one medal is paid out until the payout of medals is completed. Then, after the processing of S809, the main CPU 101 ends the winning check / medal payout processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[Check process for paying out medals]
Next, with reference to FIG. 76, the medal payout number check process performed in S806 during the winning check / medal payout process (see FIG. 75) will be described. Note that FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the medal payout number check process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the medal OUT counter (S811). The medal OUT counter is a counter for counting the number of times the medal is paid out. Next, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the payout number counter (S812). The payout number counter is a counter for counting the payout number of medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a payout number 7SEG display process (S813). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a control process of displaying the value of the payout number counter by a 2-digit 7-segment LED (not shown) for displaying the payout number included in the information display 6.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an update process of the winning combination end number counter (S814). In addition, the bonus combination will win a prize in the counter for the number of end-of-roles (combinations "C_red same color BB", "C_blue same color BB", "C_red different color BB" or "C_blue different color BB" are available). Then, when the bonus game starts, the number of payouts that can be paid out in the bonus game is set (see Fig. 77 below), the remaining number of medals to be paid out during the bonus game is counted, and the end of the bonus game is completed. It is a counter for making a judgment (see S822 of FIG. 77 described later). In this process, the main CPU 101 compares the value of the combination end number counter with the lower limit value “0”, and if the value of the combination end number counter is larger than the lower limit value “0”, the combination end number counter. The value of the counter is subtracted by 1 (updated by -1), and when the value of the winning combination end number counter is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the value of the winning combination ending number counter is held at "0". The number of payouts set in the combination end number counter does not mean the number actually paid out to the player. For example, 240 pieces are set in the combination end number counter and the combination end number counter is 240. If 15 medals are paid out in this state, the actual number of medals to be paid out will be 255. The number of counters for the end of the combination is set to "0" after 240 sheets are paid out, and thereafter, the lower limit value "0" of the value of the counter for the number of end of the combination is maintained.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (updates -1) the value of the winning number counter (S815).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a credit information command generation process (S816). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates type data and various communication parameters included in the credit information command transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. The credit information command is configured to include a parameter for specifying the number of credits for medals.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs the communication data storage process described with reference to FIG. 50 (S817). By this process, the credit information command data is stored in the communication data storage area provided in the main RAM 103. The credit information command is transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200 by the communication data transmission process described later with reference to FIG. 80. Then, after the process of S817, the main CPU 101 ends the medal payout number check process, and shifts the process to the process of S807 during the winning check / medal payout process (see FIG. 75).

[BB check process]
Next, the BB check process performed in S217 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 77. Note that FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the BB check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is a bonus state (S821). In S821, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is not the bonus state (when the determination in S821 is NO), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S831 described later.

On the other hand, in S821, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is the bonus state (when the determination in S821 is YES), is the main CPU 101 having a value of "0" or less for the number of consecutive ends? Whether or not it is determined (S822). In S822, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning combination end number counter is not "0" or less (when the determination in S822 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the BB check process and performs the process in the main flow (FIG. 56) Move to the process of S218 in.

On the other hand, in S822, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the winning combination end number counter is "0" or less (when the determination in S822 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the bonus end processing (S823). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears various information in the bonus state. Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT4 state flag to the ON state (S824). In this process, the main CPU 101 sets the RT state after the end of the bonus state to the RT4 state. Then, after the processing of S824, the main CPU 101 ends the BB check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

Here, returning to the processing of S821 again, when S821 is determined to be NO, the main CPU 101 uses the symbol combination (combination "C_red same color BB", "C_blue same color BB", "C_red different color BB") related to the BB combination. Or, it is determined whether or not the symbol combination of "C_blue different color BB") is displayed (S825). In S825, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is not displayed (when the determination in S825 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the BB check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move on to the processing of S218 inside.

On the other hand, in S825, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the BB combination is displayed (when the determination in S825 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the bonus operation time processing (S826). In this process, various processes necessary for starting the operation of the bonus, such as setting the bonus state in the game state of the next game, are performed. Next, the main CPU 101 sets a predetermined value (the number of payouts that triggers the end of the bonus: "240" in BB1 and BB2, and "165" in BB3 and BB4) in the value of the combination end number counter (in this embodiment). S827). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the RT5 state flag to the off state (S828). In this process, the main CPU 101 clears the RT state before the start of the bonus state. Then, after the processing of S828, the main CPU 101 ends the BB check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

[RT check processing]
Next, the RT check process performed in S218 in the main flow (see FIG. 56) will be described with reference to FIG. 78. Note that FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the RT check process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is in the bonus state (S831). In S831, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is in the bonus state (when the determination in S831 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S219 inside.

On the other hand, in S831, when the main CPU 101 determines that the current gaming state is not in the bonus state (when the determination in S831 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether the RT state is the RT5 state (inter-flag state). Is determined (S832). In S832, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is the RT5 state (when the determination in S832 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of.

On the other hand, in S832, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is not the RT5 state (when the determination in S832 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RT state is the RT3 state (S833). When the main CPU 101 determines in S833 that the RT state is not the RT3 state (when the determination in S833 is NO), the main CPU 101 shifts to the process of S837.

On the other hand, in S833, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT state is the RT3 state (when the determination in S833 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the RT game number counter (S834). That is, the main CPU 101 manages the game period in the RT3 state. Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RT game number counter has become 0 (S835). In S835, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT game number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S835 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in the main flow (see FIG. 56). Move to the processing of S219 inside.

On the other hand, in S835, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RT game number counter has become 0 (when the determination in S835 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT0 state flag to the on state and turns the RT3 state flag off. Set (clear) to (S836). By this process, the RT state becomes the RT0 state. Then, after the processing of S836, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S833 that the RT state is not the RT3 state (when the determination in S833 is NO), has the main CPU 101 displayed a combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition (combination "S_RT3 transition")? Whether or not it is determined (S837). In S837, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition is displayed (when the determination in S837 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT3 state flag to the ON state and sets the RT game number counter to the RT game number counter. 8 is set (S838). In this case, the other RT status flags are set to the off status. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT3 state. Then, after the processing of S838, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S837, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT3 transition is not displayed (when the determination in S837 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition (combination "R_RT1"). It is determined whether or not the symbol combination of "transition eye") is displayed (S839). In S839, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition is not displayed (when the determination in S839 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition lip (combination "S_RT1 transition lip"). It is determined whether or not the symbol combination) is displayed (S840).

In S839, when the main CPU 101 determines that the symbol combination related to the RT1 transition is displayed (when the determination in S839 is YES), and in S840, the main CPU 101 displays the symbol combination related to the RT1 transition lip. When it is determined (S840 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT1 state flag to the ON state (S841). In this case, the other RT status flags are set to the off status. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT1 state. Then, after the processing of S841, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S840, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT1 transition lip is not displayed (when the determination in S840 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip (combination "S_RT2"). It is determined whether or not the "combination of symbols of the transition lip") is displayed (S842). In S842, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip is displayed (when the determination in S842 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT2 state flag to the ON state (S843). In this case, the other RT status flags are set to the off status. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT2 state. Then, after the processing of S843, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56).

On the other hand, in S842, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT2 transition lip is not displayed (when the determination in S842 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines the combination of symbols related to the RT0 transition lip (combination "S_RT0"). It is determined whether or not the "combination of symbols of the transition lip") is displayed (S844). In S844, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT0 transition lip is displayed (when the determination in S844 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets the RT0 state flag to the ON state (S845). In this case, the other RT status flags are set to the off status. By this process, the RT state becomes the RT0 state. Then, after the processing of S845, the main CPU 101 ends the RT check processing and shifts the processing to the processing of S219 in the main flow (see FIG. 56). On the other hand, in S844, when the main CPU 101 determines that the combination of symbols related to the RT0 transition lip is not displayed (when the determination in S844 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the RT check process and performs the process in the main flow (when the RT check process is completed). (Refer to FIG. 56), the process proceeds to S219.

[Interrupt processing controlled by the main CPU (1.1172 msec)]
Next, with reference to FIG. 79, the interrupt processing performed by the main CPU 101 at a cycle of 1.1172 msec will be described. Note that FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the interrupt process. The interrupt process repeatedly executed at a cycle of 1.1172 msec is generated based on the output timing of the timeout signal of the timer circuit 113 set in the initialization process of the timer circuit 113 (PTC) (see S2 in FIG. 46). This is a process executed when the interrupt request signal from the interrupt controller 112 is input to the main CPU 101.

First, the main CPU 101 performs a register save process (S901). Next, the main CPU 101 performs an input port check process (S902). In this process, various switches such as a start switch 79 and a stop switch connected via the external bus interface 104, index sensors (not shown) provided on each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, etc. The signals input from various sensors are checked. In the present embodiment, these various switches and various sensors pass through the cabinet side relay board 44, the door relay terminal board 68, the reel relay terminal board 74, etc., and the input port IC (not) via the external bus interface 104. It is connected to the input terminal of the input IC connected to the output terminal (shown in the figure). Further, in the main RAM 103, an input port storage area (not shown) for the main CPU 101 to store the state of the input port IC (simply referred to as "input port" in this embodiment) connected to the external bus interface 104. ) Is assigned. Here, the input port storage area includes, for example, an input port storage area 1 for storing the current state of the input port and an input port storage area 2 for storing the state of the input port before the interrupt processing. Consists of. Then, in this process, the main CPU 101 first stores various information stored in the input port storage area 1 in the input port storage area 2, and then stores various information read from the input port in the input port storage area 1. do. The connection configuration of various switches and various sensors and the configuration of the input port storage area are not limited to those described above. That is, the configuration may be such that the main CPU 101 can recognize the on / off states of various switches and various sensors.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a reel control process (S903). In this process, the main CPU 101 starts rotating the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R when all the reels are requested to start rotating, and then each reel rotates at a constant speed. Drive and control three stepping motors. When the number of sliding pieces is determined, the main CPU 101 updates the symbol counter of the corresponding reel by the number of sliding pieces. Then, the main CPU 101 waits for the updated symbol counter to match the value corresponding to the scheduled stop position (the symbol at the scheduled stop position reaches the area on the effective line of the display window) of the corresponding reel. The corresponding stepping motor is driven and controlled so that the rotation is decelerated and stopped.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data transmission process (S904). In this process, various commands stored in the communication data storage area are mainly transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200 via the first serial communication circuit 114 (see FIG. 8) of the main control circuit 90. The details of the communication data transmission process will be described later with reference to FIG. 80 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a insertion medal passage check process (S905). In this process, the main CPU 101 checks whether or not the inserted medal has passed the selector 66 based on the detection result (medal sensor input state) of each medal sensor (see FIG. 5).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment LED drive process (S906). In this process, the main CPU 101 drives and controls various 7-segment LEDs included in the information display 6, and displays, for example, the number of medals paid out, the number of credits, the stop button pressing order data, and the like. The details of the 7-segment LED drive process will be described later with reference to FIG. 82 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a timer update process (S907). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a count (subtraction) process of various set timers. The details of the timer update process will be described later with reference to FIG. 84 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs an error detection process (S908). Next, the main CPU 101 performs a door open / close check process (S909). In the door open / close check process, the main CPU 101 checks the open / closed state of the front door 2b (see FIG. 2) by checking the on (door closed) / off (door open) state of the door open / close monitoring switch 67.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a test firing test signal control process (S910). In this process, control process is performed when various test signals are output to the testing machine via the second interface board or the like. Further, this process is executed using the non-standard work area (see FIG. 11C) of the main RAM 103. In the present embodiment, this process is also performed at a time other than the test firing test (after the pachislot machine 1 is installed in the game store), but at this time, the main control board 71 passes through the second interface board or the like. Since it is not connected to the testing machine, various test signals are generated but not output.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a register reset process (S911). Then, after the processing of S912, the main CPU 101 ends the interrupt processing.

[Communication data transmission processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 80, the communication data transmission process performed in S904 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the communication data transmission process.

First, the main CPU 101 performs the WDT setting process (S961). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of restarting the WDT in the reset controller 106 and the like. The details of the WDT setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 81 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the command transmission start timer has counted up (S962). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of communication data is being delayed. In S962, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has not counted up (when the determination in S962 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission process and interrupts the process (FIG. 79). (See) Move to the process of S905 in.

On the other hand, in S962, when the main CPU 101 determines that the command transmission start timer has counted up (when the determination in S962 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the communication data has been transmitted (S963). .. Specifically, the main CPU 101 refers to the data stored in the command status register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1), and if the data indicating the completion of transmission is stored, the communication data. Determines that the transmission is completed, and if the data indicating the transmission completion is not stored, it is determined that the communication data has not been transmitted.

In S963, when the main CPU 101 determines that the communication data has not been transmitted (NO in S963), the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission process and interrupts the process (see FIG. 79). Move to the processing of S905 inside. On the other hand, in S963, when the main CPU 101 determines that the communication data has been transmitted (YES in S963), the main CPU 101 performs the communication data acquisition process (S964). In this process, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring communication data (command data) from the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not there is untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (S965). In S965, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (when the determination in S965 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S969 described later.

On the other hand, in S965, when the main CPU 101 determines that there is no untransmitted data in the acquired communication data (when the determination in S965 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets the non-operation command data in each register (S966). ). The non-operation command data is information related to the player's game operation (for example, input operation, start operation, stop operation, etc. as an operation for advancing the game) (for example, these operations have been performed). Each parameter is set so as not to include the information indicating the above, or, for example, the information indicating the internal winning combination determined based on the start operation). Note that each parameter of the non-operation command data includes, for example, a parameter indicating the on / off state of each switch in the pachislot 1 and a parameter indicating the on / off state of each sensor (for example, the input port storage area 1). And the information stored in the input port storage area 2) may be set. As a result, the possibility of malfunction or failure of these switches and sensors may be determined on the sub-control circuit 200 side.

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data storage process (see FIG. 50) (S967). That is, the main CPU 101 performs a process of storing the non-operation command data generated in S966 in the communication data storage area of the main RAM 103. Next, the main CPU 101 performs a communication data acquisition process (S968). That is, the main CPU 101 performs a process of acquiring non-operation command data stored in the communication data storage area in S967.

As described above, in the present embodiment, at least no operation command is transmitted for each interrupt process (see FIG. 79) even when there is no communication data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. It has become like. Therefore, it is possible to prevent unauthorized communication data from being transmitted from the outside due to the absence of communication data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 90 to the sub control circuit 200. From this point of view, the non-operation command data does not include information related to the player's game operation, but the content of each parameter to be set is not limited to this and can be changed as appropriate. Is.

After the processing of S968 or when the determination in S965 is YES, the main CPU 101 sets the buffer size for one packet in the transmission counter (S969). In the present embodiment, since the transmission data for one packet is 8 bytes, the buffer size for one packet is also composed of 8 bytes. Further, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of communication data (command data) are stored in the communication data storage area, they are transmitted in the order in which they are stored (first in the oldest storage) (FIFO format). ..

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires transmission data from the communication buffer and sets it in the transmission data register (S970). Specifically, the main CPU 101 sets the transmission data in the transmission data register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1) in 1-byte units. As a result, the set transmission data is transferred to the transmission shift register (not shown) of the first serial communication circuit 114 (SCU1), and is transmitted one packet at a time.

Next, the main CPU 101 updates (+1) the address of the communication buffer (S971). Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts "1" from the transmission counter (S972). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission counter is "0" (S973). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the transmission of the transmission data for one packet is completed. In S973, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transmission counter is not "0" (when the determination in S973 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S970 and repeats the processing after S970.

On the other hand, in S973, when the main CPU 101 determines that the transmission counter is "0" (when the determination in S973 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs a communication data pointer update process (see, for example, FIG. 51) (S974). ). Then, after the processing of S974, the main CPU 101 ends the communication data transmission processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S905 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

[WDT setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the WDT setting process performed in S961 during the communication data transmission process (see FIG. 80) will be described. Note that FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the WDT setting process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the WDT clear register (not shown) in the WDT in the reset controller 106 (S981). Next, the main CPU 101 sets clear data (for example, "55H") at the set address (S982). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the restart data (for example, "AAH") at the set address (S983).

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the command transmission start timer with its lower limit value "0", and if the command transmission start timer is larger than the lower limit value "0", the command transmission start timer is subtracted by 1 (-1 update). If the command transmission start timer is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the command transmission start timer is held at "0" (S984). Then, after the processing of S984, the main CPU 101 ends the WDT setting processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S962 of the communication data transmission processing (see FIG. 80).

As described above, in the present embodiment, the WDT reset setting and management information (WDT permission / prohibition, reference clock, timeout time (for example, 419.4 ms), etc.) are stored in the program management area, and S982 and By performing the process of S983, the set timeout time is remeasured. When a reset signal is output due to a timeout and the main CPU 101 is restarted, the checksum generation process (see FIG. 52) is performed because the system is restarted without executing the power failure (external) process (see FIG. 52). The sum value calculated by 53) is not stored in the main RAM 103 (sum value storage area). Therefore, in this case, the thumb check determination result in the power-on processing (see S11 in FIG. 46) is not normal (that is, as "RAM error"), and an error occurs in the information display 6 (7-segment LED display). The character string "88" indicating the occurrence is displayed.

[7-segment LED drive processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 82, the 7-segment LED drive process performed in S906 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 7-segment LED drive process.

First, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the interrupt counter (S921). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number (S922).

When the main CPU 101 determines in S922 that the value of the interrupt counter is not an odd number (when the determination in S922 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment LED drive process and interrupts the process (see FIG. 79). ) Moves to the processing of S907. That is, in the present embodiment, the 7-segment LED drive process is performed every two interruption cycles. In the present embodiment, an example of executing the 7-segment LED drive process when the value of the interrupt counter is even has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the 7-segment LED drive process is not limited to this when the value of the interrupt counter is odd. The LED drive process may be executed, or the execution timing of the 7-segment LED drive process may be determined by using the quotient or the remainder when the value of the interrupt counter is divided by an arbitrary integer.

On the other hand, in S922, when the main CPU 101 determines that the value of the interrupt counter is an odd number (when the determination in S922 is YES), the main CPU 101 acquires navigation data from the navigation data storage area (S923). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the push order display data storage area for storing the push order display data output to each cathode of the 7-segment LED (S924).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display data generation process (S925). In this process, the main CPU 101 creates push order display data (7-segment display data) based on the navigation data, and stores the generated push order display data in the push order display data storage area. The details of the 7-segment display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires the value of the credit counter (S926). Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the credit display data storage area for storing the credit display data output to each cathode of the 7-segment LED (S927).

Next, the main CPU 101 performs a 7-segment display data generation process (S928). In this process, the main CPU 101 generates credit display data (7-segment display data) based on the value of the credit counter, and stores the generated credit display data in the credit display data storage area. The details of the 7-segment display data generation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 83 described later.

Next, the main CPU 101 sets the address of the 7-segment common counter storage area for storing the value of the 7-segment common counter described later (S929). Next, the main CPU 101 adds (+1 update) to the value of the 7-segment common counter (S930). In this process, when the updated 7-segment common counter value becomes "8", the main CPU 101 sets the 7-segment common counter value to "0". In the present embodiment, since the 7-segment LED is dynamically controlled, the value of the 7-segment common counter is updated every 8 times.

Next, the main CPU 101 creates common selection data based on the value of the 7-segment common counter, and addresses the target cathode data storage area (push order display data storage area or target storage area in the credit display data storage area). Is set (S931). Next, the main CPU 101 outputs clear data to the cathode of the 7-segment LED (S932). This process is performed in order to temporarily turn off the 7-segment LED to eliminate the influence of the afterimage.

Next, the main CPU 101 acquires and sets 7-segment cathode output data from the target cathode data storage area (S933). Next, the main CPU 101 generates 7-segment common output data from the 7-segment common backup data and the common selection data (S934).

Next, the main CPU 101 stores the 7-segment common output data and the 7-segment cathode output data in the 7-segment common backup data and the 7-segment cathode backup data, respectively (S935). Next, the main CPU 101 outputs 7-segment cathode output data and 7-segment common output data (S936). Then, after the processing of S936, the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment LED drive processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S907 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

[7-segment display data generation process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 83, the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S925 and S928 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82) will be described. Note that FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the 7-segment display data generation process.

The "display data" described later, which is generated in the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S925 during the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), corresponds to the push order display data and corresponds to the 7-segment LED drive process (FIG. 82). The "display data" described later generated in the 7-segment display data generation process performed in S928 in (see 82) corresponds to the credit display data.

First, the main CPU 101 divides the display data set in the cathode data storage area by "10", acquires the quotient value of the division result as the display data of the upper digit of the 2-digit 7-segment LED, and divides the data. The remaining value of the result is acquired as the display data of the lower digit (S941). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not to display the upper digit based on the acquired display data of the upper digit (S942).

In S942, when the main CPU 101 determines that the upper digit display is to be performed (when the determination in S942 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs the process of S944 described later. On the other hand, in S942, when the main CPU 101 determines that the upper digit is not displayed (when the determination in S942 is NO), the main CPU 101 sets no display of the upper digit (S943).

After the processing of S943 or when the determination in S942 is YES, the main CPU 101 refers to the 7-segment cathode table (not shown) and acquires the display data of the upper digit (S944). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the acquired high-order digit display data in the high-order digit display data storage area (not shown) (S945).

Next, the main CPU 101 refers to the 7-segment cathode table (not shown) and acquires the display data of the lower digits (S946). Next, the main CPU 101 saves the acquired low-order digit display data in the low-order digit display data storage area (not shown) (S947).

Then, after the processing of S947, the main CPU 101 ends the 7-segment display data generation processing. At this time, if the executed 7-segment display data generation process is the process of S925 during the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), the main CPU 101 changes the process to the process of S926 during the 7-segment LED drive process. Transfer. On the other hand, when the executed 7-segment display data generation process is the process of S928 in the 7-segment LED drive process (see FIG. 82), the main CPU 101 shifts the process to the process of S929 in the 7-segment LED drive process. ..

[Timer update process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 84, the timer update process performed in S907 during the interrupt process (see FIG. 79) will be described. Note that FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the timer update process.

First, the main CPU 101 sets the update start address of the 2-byte timer storage area (not shown) in the HL register, and sets the number of 2-byte timers in the B register (S951). The 2-byte timer storage area is used to manage a time of 286 ms (256 × 1.1172 ms) or more (that is, a timer value exceeding 1 byte).

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the number of 2-byte timers with the lower limit value "0", and if the number of 2-byte timers is larger than the lower limit value "0", subtracts 1 from the number of 2-byte timers (updates -1). When the number of 2-byte timers is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the number of 2-byte timers is held at "0" (S952). Further, in the process of S952, the main CPU 101 subtracts 2 (-2 updates) the update start address of the 2-byte timer storage area set in the HL register. Note that, for example, since the command transmission start timer also has a 2-byte timer, the update may be performed in this process (see FIG. 81).

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register by 1 (S953). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (S954).

In S954, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is not "0" (when the determination in S954 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S952, and after S952. Repeat the process.

On the other hand, in S954, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 2-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (when the determination in S954 is YES), the main CPU 101 stores the 1-byte timer in the HL register. The update start address of is set, and the number of 1-byte timers is set in the B register (S955). The 1-byte timer storage area is used to manage the time less than 286 ms (256 × 1.1172 ms) (that is, the timer value not exceeding 1 byte). For example, the medal monitoring timer is updated as a 1-byte timer.

Next, the main CPU 101 compares the number of 1-byte timers with the lower limit value "0", and if the number of 1-byte timers is larger than the lower limit value "0", subtracts 1 from the number of 1-byte timers (-1 update). However, when the number of 1-byte timers is equal to or less than the lower limit value "0", the number of 1-byte timers is held at "0" (S956). Further, in the process of S956, the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 (-1 update) the update start address of the 1-byte timer storage area set in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 101 subtracts (updates -1) the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register by 1 (S957). Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (S958).

In S958, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is not "0" (when the determination in S958 is NO), the main CPU 101 returns the processing to the processing of S956, and after S956. Repeat the process.

On the other hand, in S958, when the main CPU 101 determines that the number of 1-byte timers set in the B register is "0" (when the determination in S958 is YES), the main CPU 101 performs an electromagnetic counter control process (S959). ). In this process, an output control process is performed when a signal indicating IN / OUT of the medal is output to the external centralized terminal plate 47. Then, after the processing of S959, the main CPU 101 ends the timer update processing, and shifts the processing to the processing of S908 in the interrupt processing (see FIG. 79).

<Explanation of operation when the power is turned on>
Next, with reference to FIG. 85, the operation of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention when the power is turned on will be described. FIG. 85 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pachi-slot machine 1 when the power is turned on.

In FIG. 85, “Main CPU” indicates the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90), and “SubCPU” indicates the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

Further, in FIG. 85, the operating state "security mode" of the "Main CPU" indicates the state of being in the above-mentioned security mode, and the operating state "startup delay period" of the "Main CPU" is described above after the end of the security mode. Indicates the period until the command transmission start timer is set and the set command transmission start timer becomes "0" (that is, the period during which the setting can be changed but the transmission of communication data is delayed). The operation state "normal operation period" of the "Main CPU" indicates a state in which the delay in the transmission of the communication data has ended and the communication data can be transmitted to the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200).

Further, in FIG. 85, the operating state "initialization" of the "SubCPU" is the initialization (startup) process (hard boot time, bios (driver) initialization, kernel) when the power of the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200) is turned on. (OS) booting, etc.) indicates a state (that is, a state in which communication data transmitted from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90) cannot be received), and the operating state "normal operating period" of the "SubCPU" is It shows a state in which the initialization (startup) process at the time of turning on the power is completed and the communication data transmitted from the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90) can be received.

Further, in FIG. 85, in the "setting operation A", the setting change is started in the "startup delay period" (for example, the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on while the setting key type switch 54 is on), and then "normally". The operation when the setting change is completed in the "operation period" is shown, and the "transmission mode A" is the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change in the case of the "setting operation A". Indicates the transmission timing of the command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2). Further, in the "Main CPU setting change process" under the "transmission mode A", the setting change command is the communication of the main RAM 103 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) by the main CPU 101 in the case of the "transmission mode A". The timing of storage (registration) in the data storage area (see also the setting change command generation storage process in FIG. 49 and the communication data storage process in FIG. 50) is shown.

Further, in FIG. 85, in the "setting operation B", the setting change is started in the "startup delay period" (for example, the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on while the setting key type switch 54 is on), and then the "setting operation B" is described. The operation when the setting change is completed in the "startup delay period" is shown, and the "transmission mode B" is the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting in the case of the "setting operation B". Indicates the transmission timing of the change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2). Further, in the "Main CPU setting change process" under the "transmission mode B", the setting change command is the communication of the main RAM 103 in the setting change confirmation process (see FIG. 48) by the main CPU 101 in the case of the "transmission mode B". The timing of storage (registration) in the data storage area (see also the setting change command generation storage process in FIG. 49 and the communication data storage process in FIG. 50) is shown.

When the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on and a reset signal is input, the operating state of the security mode is controlled by the security unit (not shown) of the microprocessor 91. In the security mode, the main CPU 101 is delayed in starting for a period corresponding to the setting stored in the security setting area. When the security mode ends, the main CPU 101 delays the transmission of communication data for a predetermined period. The main CPU 101 can change the setting even when the transmission of communication data is delayed.

Here, as shown in "setting operation A", when the setting change is started during the delay in the transmission of the communication data and the setting change is completed after the delay in the transmission of the communication data is completed, the main CPU 101 communicates. When the delay in data transmission ends, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200, and when the setting change is completed, the setting change command (setting) (Change / setting confirmation end) (COM2) is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200.

On the other hand, as shown in "setting operation B", when the setting change is started during the delay in the transmission of the communication data and the setting change is completed during the delay in the transmission of the communication data, the main CPU 101 uses the communication data. When the transmission delay ends, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2) are sequentially transmitted to the sub-control circuit 200. .. That is, when the delay in transmitting the communication data ends, the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation start) (COM1) and the setting change command (setting change / setting confirmation end) (COM2) are sent to the communication data storage area. If registered, these communication data are transmitted in the registered order.

As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, by delaying the start-up of the main CPU 101 when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the main control circuit 90 can be started stably and the main CPU 101 is started. By delaying the transmission of the communication data after the delay is completed, the time required for starting the sub-control circuit 200 can be secured and the sub-control circuit 200 can be started stably.

Then, after the delay in starting the main CPU 101 is completed, the setting can be changed even before the delay in transmitting the communication data is completed. Therefore, for example, when opening a store in a game store, a pachislot machine is used. When the power of 1 is turned on (that is, when a reset signal is input accordingly), the setting can be changed in advance without waiting for the completion of starting the sub-control circuit 200, so that the setting can be changed at the time of turning on the power. It is possible to improve the work efficiency in.

Further, if the setting change is made before the delay of the transmission of the communication data ends, the communication data indicating these is registered at the start of the setting change or the end of the setting change, and the delay of the transmission of the communication data is delayed. Since these communication data are transmitted in the order in which they are registered when the operation is completed, even if the setting is changed in advance without waiting for the completion of the activation of the sub-control circuit 200. As a result, it is possible to prevent a discrepancy in the information held between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. Further, for example, even when the sub control circuit 200 is configured to determine fraudulent activity, error, or the like according to the order of communication data transmitted from the main control circuit 90, the result of such determination is obtained. It is possible to make an accurate judgment without affecting the above.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the communication data transmission process is performed, at least no operation command data is transmitted even if the communication data is not registered. For example, it is possible to prevent communication data from being transmitted from the outside by an unauthorized means such as illegally accessing the connection line between the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. Further, since the registration / transmission of the non-operation command data is not performed before the delay in the transmission of the communication data is completed, it is possible to reduce the control load when the power of the pachislot 1 is turned on. From the viewpoint of preventing fraudulent activity, the non-operation command data may not include information related to the player's game operation.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the delay period for starting the main CPU 101 is composed of a fixed period and a variable period, and these periods (or a range thereof) can be appropriately selected and set. Therefore, it is possible to set an appropriate delay time according to the specifications of the main control circuit 90 and the sub control circuit 200. From the viewpoint of shortening the period until the setting can be changed, it is possible to set a predetermined period range (for example, "no setting" in the random extension period) in which 0 is always determined as the variable period. In that case, the range of the predetermined period may be set.

In this embodiment, an example will be described in which a setting value setting operation (setting change operation) is possible during a period in which the transmission of communication data is delayed (“startup delay period”) after the end of the security mode. However, the operations that can be executed during the period in which the transmission of communication data is delayed (“startup delay period”) are not limited to this. For example, the setting key type switch 54 is turned on during the period in which the power of the pachislot machine 1 is turned on while the setting key type switch 54 is off and the transmission of communication data is delayed (“startup delay period”). In this case, the setting value confirmation operation (setting confirmation operation) may be enabled during the period. As a result, for example, when opening a game store, even if the setting is not changed but the current setting value is to be confirmed, the setting confirmation is performed in advance without waiting for the start completion of the sub-control circuit 200. Since this can be done, it is possible to improve the work efficiency when the power is turned on.

<Explanation of operation when inserting medals>
Next, with reference to FIG. 86, the operation of the pachi-slot machine according to the embodiment of the present invention at the time of inserting medals will be described. FIG. 86 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation of the pachi-slot machine 1 when the medal is inserted.

In FIG. 86, the “start switch” indicates the start switch 79, and the “medal sensor” is the detection state of the upstream medal sensor (first medal sensor) 806 and the downstream medal sensor (second medal sensor) 807. (Medal sensor input state), the "medal acceptance signal" indicates that the on state ("ON") indicates that the medal acceptance is permitted (medal acceptance permission), and the off state ("OFF") indicates the medal. Indicates a state in which the reception of medals is prohibited (see FIGS. 57 and 58).

Further, in FIG. 86, the “solenoid” indicates the solenoid of the selector 66 (the drive source that shifts the select plate 804 to the guide position or the discharge position), and the “monitoring timer” indicates the medal monitoring timer (FIGS. 57 and 57). (Refer to 58), the "operating state" is a state in the pachislot machine 1 that enables the progress of the game after the start operation ("during the game") and a state that does not allow the progress of the game after the start operation ("game wait"). "), And.

When the number of medals that can start the game (three in this embodiment) is inserted, the main CPU 101 can accept the start operation for the start lever 16. As shown in FIG. 86, in this state, if medals can be stored as the number of credits (if the number of credits is less than 50), until the start operation for the start lever 16 is performed (started by the start switch 79). Until the operation is detected), the state in which the medal acceptance is permitted (the state in which the medal acceptance signal is "ON") continues. Although not shown, in this state, if medals cannot be stored as the number of credits (if the number of credits is 50), the acceptance of medals is prohibited (the medal acceptance signal is "OFF". It has changed to the state).

The main CPU 101 is started by the start switch 79 (the first start on the left side in FIG. 86) in a state where the number of medals that can start the game (three in this embodiment) is inserted and the medals can be stored as the number of credits. When an operation (transition of the start switch 79 from "OFF" to "ON") is detected as "start operation A"), the medal acceptance is permitted (the medal acceptance signal is "ON"). It shifts from a certain state) to a state where medal acceptance is prohibited (a state where the medal acceptance signal is "OFF"), starts shifting the solenoid of the selector 66 to a demagnetized state, and monitors with a medal monitoring timer (a state). Measurement) is started. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned on.

When a medal is inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the excited state to the degaussed state), the main CPU 101 inputs the medal sensor of each medal sensor. When it is determined that medals have been inserted based on the state), the inserted medals are counted by changing the solenoid of the selector 66, which was in the process of changing from the excited state to the degaussed state, to the excited state again. It is guided into the hopper device 51. Further, in this case, the "start operation A" is detected by the start switch 79, but based on the detection, the operation state is changed to the state in which the game can proceed after the start operation ("during the game"). Do not change. At this time, the above-mentioned start lever ON flag is turned off. That is, in this case, "start operation A" is invalidated.

In the main CPU 101, when a medal is inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the transition from the excited state to the demagnetized state of the solenoid of the selector 66 is completed), the medal of each medal sensor is inserted. When it is determined that a medal has been inserted based on the sensor input status), the acceptance of medals is further permitted from the state in which the acceptance of medals is prohibited (the state in which the medal acceptance signal is "OFF"). It may be changed to a state (a state in which the medal reception signal is "ON").

After that, the main CPU 101 again presses the start operation 79 (in FIG. 86, the second start operation on the right side (transition of the start switch 79 from "OFF" to "ON") is referred to as "start operation B"). When is detected, the solenoid of the selector 66 is changed from the excited state to the degaussed state again, and monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is started again. At this time, the start lever ON flag described above is turned on again.

Then, when the main CPU 101 does not insert medals during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the solenoid of the selector 66 completes the transition from the excited state to the degaussed state), the main CPU 101 does not insert medals (of each medal sensor). When it is not determined that a medal has been inserted based on the medal sensor input state), the operating state is completed after the monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is completed (that is, after the solenoid of the selector 66 has been transferred from the excited state to the degaussed state). Is changed to a state that enables the progress of the game after the start operation (“during the game”), and the game can be progressed (that is, after the medal reception / start check process (see FIGS. 57 and 58)). Executes the processing of).

Although not shown, the main CPU 101 detects the "start operation A" by the start switch 79 and is permitted to accept medals (the medal acceptance signal is "ON"). The reception of medals is prohibited (the medal reception signal is "OFF"), the solenoid of the selector 66 is changed to the demagnetized state, and monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is started. Later, during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer (that is, before the transition from the excited state to the demagnetized state of the solenoid of the selector 66 is completed), if no medal is inserted (medal sensor input state of each medal sensor). Even when it is not determined that a medal has been inserted based on the above), as in the case where "start operation B" is detected by the start switch 79, after monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer is completed (that is, the solenoid of the selector 66 is excited) After the transition from the state to the demagnetized state is completed, the operating state is changed to a state that enables the progress of the game after the start operation (“during the game”), and the game can be progressed (that is, the medal reception). -The processing after the start check processing (see FIGS. 57 and 58) can be executed).

As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game is started with the start operation of the player, for example, a medal monitoring timer for preventing the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals is provided. It is set. By this medal monitoring timer, in the selector 66, the inserted medals are discharged to the outside of the game machine from the state where the inserted medals are stored inside the game machine (the state where the select plate 804 is in the guide position due to the solenoid being excited). The time until the select plate 804 is physically transferred to the state (the state in which the select plate 804 is in the discharge position due to the solenoid being in the degaussed state) is secured.

If a medal is inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the start operation that is the basis of the medal is invalidated, and in the selector 66, the inserted medal is placed inside the gaming machine. Return to the stored state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals and appropriately process the inserted medals.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, even if a medal is inserted during monitoring (measurement) by the medal monitoring timer, the medal is counted, so that the inserted medal can be counted. It is possible to prevent omission of counting and to process the inserted medals more appropriately.

Further, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, the timer value of the medal monitoring timer (for example, “72”) is changed from the state in which the inserted medals are stored inside the game machine to the state in which the inserted medals are discharged to the outside of the game machine. Since the period until the physical transition (for example, 80 ms) or more (for example, "72" x 1.1172 ms) is set, the occurrence of "swallowing" of medals is surely prevented. Therefore, it becomes possible to process the inserted medals more appropriately. When the drive unit is a solenoid as in the present embodiment, such an effect becomes more remarkable.

<Other effects that can be performed in this embodiment>
Next, in addition to the above-described effects, an example of other effects that can be performed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 87 to 91. In the following, as an example of other effects, it is explained that the bonus combination winning notification effect for notifying whether or not the bonus combination is won can be executed, but its use is as a bonus combination. It is not limited to the one that notifies whether or not the player has won.

For example, it may be executed to notify whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, or in the line battle state of the advantageous section, the advantageous section. May be performed to signal whether it has been decided to continue. Further, it may be executed to notify whether or not it is decided to shift to the right acquisition state in the right acquisition lottery state of the advantageous section, or in the right acquisition state of the advantageous section. It may be performed to inform whether it has been decided to grant the right. That is, it can be used as an effect executed to notify the player whether or not the privilege is given.

(Example of production of bonus role winning notification production (1))
First, with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88, an production example (No. 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect will be described. 87 and 88 show, for example, a bonus winning combination that can be displayed on the display device 11 with a predetermined probability when an internal winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined. An production example (No. 1) of the notification effect is shown. In addition, FIG. 87 shows a display example when the bonus combination is not won (when the bonus combination is not won), and FIG. 88 shows a display example when the bonus combination is won (in the case of the bonus combination winning). Is shown.

As shown in FIGS. 87 and 88, in the production example (No. 1) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an effect entitled "Spot the difference effect" is performed. This "spot the difference effect" is based on an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work, for example, when there is an original work such as a manga, animation, or game used as a motif of Pachislot 1. It is an image that allows the player to search for any differences (that is, mistakes) with respect to the base image. In this case, the predetermined image may be an image as it is (that is, the same) as the original work, or the image of the original work is A / D converted, the approximation ratio is changed, and the resolution is changed. Or it may be a remastered (ie, approximate) image. Further, although the image is based on the original work to the last, it may be an image newly created for use in the production of pachislot 1.

The base image is not limited to the one described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, even if there is no original work (for example, when it is an original motif), an image that is the same as or similar to an image that can be displayed in other productions in pachislot 1 may be set. Further, for example, an image that is the same as or similar to the image printed in the booklet distributed at the amusement store may be set to explain the specifications of the pachislot machine 1. Further, for example, the base image does not have to be a still image, may be a moving image, or the still images may be sequentially displayed in a slide format.

In the upper part of FIG. 87, an image in which five characters are displayed is displayed together with the characters "All gathered!". The image is the same as the base image. Also, below the image, there is a message and cursor that urges you to point out the differences from the base image, such as "If there is a part that is different from the image you know, move the cursor to decide!" Is displayed.

At this time, the player moves the cursor to a desired position (performs a selection operation) by tracing a predetermined area on the display surface of the sub display device 18 provided with the touch sensor 19 with a finger, and the sub display is also performed. Touch the decision button (not shown) displayed on the display surface of the device 18 (perform the decision operation), and specify the part that you think is wrong.

The means for detecting various operations related to the effect such as the player's selection operation and determination operation is not limited to the sub display device 18. For example, when the display device 11 is a display device such as a liquid crystal display device, a touch sensor is provided in at least a part of the display device 11 (for example, a place where the display in the upper part of FIG. 87 is performed). When the touch sensor detects the movement of the player's finger (when the selection operation is performed), the cursor is moved accordingly, and the enter button displayed at the place where the touch sensor is provided. When (not shown) is pressed (when a determination operation is performed), an effect of notifying the result may be performed accordingly. Further, for example, when a physical operation means (for example, a cross key and an effect button, a jog dial, etc.) capable of detecting various operations related to an effect such as a selection operation or a decision operation is provided, such a physical operation means. The selection operation and the decision operation may be detected by. That is, any means that can detect various operations related to the player's production can be applied.

Here, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 87, it is assumed that the player specifies the portion where the rightmost character is displayed. Then, since the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 87 does not differ from the base image, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 87, it is notified that the result of the error search in the "spot the difference effect" was a failure. The message "Out of place ~ sorry" is displayed.

On the other hand, in the upper part of FIG. 88, an image in which four characters are displayed is displayed together with the characters "All gathered!". The image is different from the base image in the portion where the rightmost character is not displayed. Also, at the bottom of the image, as in FIG. 87, it should be pointed out that there is a difference from the base image, such as "If there is a part different from the image you know, move the cursor to decide!" A message prompting you to do so and a cursor are displayed.

Here, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 88, it is assumed that the player specifies a portion in which the rightmost character is not displayed. In this case, since the designated part is different from the base image, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 88, the "spot the difference effect" for notifying that the result of the mistake search was successful is ". Along with the message "Hit ~", the message "Bonus confirmed!" Is displayed to notify that the bonus role has been won.

On the other hand, for example, in the image displayed in the upper part of FIG. 88, it is assumed that the player specifies the portion where the leftmost character is displayed. In this case, since the designated part is not a part different from the base image, as in the lower part of FIG. 87, the “missing” for notifying that the result of the error search in the “spot the difference effect” was a failure. The message "~ Sorry" is displayed, and even if you win the bonus role, you will not be notified that you have won the bonus role.

Note that the effect modes shown in FIGS. 87 and 88 show an example of the effect mode in the "spot the difference effect", and for example, the following effect mode can be adopted.

For example, the base image is based on a predetermined theme in the original work (for example, the first episode in the original work), and a plurality of (for example, five) images (for example, a digest image) are displayed in a slide format. Suppose it is a thing. If the bonus combination is not won, the slide images are displayed in sequence as they are, and then each image of the slide is displayed as a thumbnail. On the other hand, when the bonus combination is won, slide images in which some of the slide images are different are displayed in sequence, and then each image of the slide is displayed in a thumbnail shape.

The player searches for whether each image displayed in the thumbnail form is based on a theme different from the predetermined theme (for example, the number of episodes different from the first episode in the original work), and determines. Perform a selection operation and a decision operation on an image that is thought to be an image with a theme different from that of. Then, when an image of a theme different from the predetermined theme is included and the player specifies the image, the result of the spot the difference in the "spot the difference effect" should be successful. Just do it. Specifically, for example, in the first episode in the original work, although only character A and character B appear, in the slide image displayed when the bonus role is won, the third and subsequent episodes in the original work are displayed. An image in which the character C appearing only in is displayed may be included. In this way, for example, a player who is attached to the original work can perform the "spot the difference production" with particular feelings, so that it is possible to further improve the interest in the production.

Further, as described above, when displaying an image that is at least partially different from the base image in the "spot the difference effect", the part different from the base image does not have to be only one place, and a plurality of places may be different. .. In this case, for example, the number of different parts may differ depending on the type of winning bonus combination. For example, if there is one part different from the base image, there is a high possibility that it has won BB3 or BB4, and if there are multiple parts different from the base image, there is a possibility that it has won BB1 or BB2. It may be made higher. In this way, it is possible to suggest the type of bonus role that is won.

In addition, when notifying that the result of the spot the difference in the "spot the difference effect" was a failure, for example, a message such as "???" is displayed to clearly indicate that the result of the spot the difference was a failure. You may not do it.

In addition, multiple types of base images are provided. For example, when a "chance eye" is won, one of these multiple types of base images is determined, and then whether or not the bonus role is won. Depending on the situation, it may be decided whether to display the base image as it is, or to display it as an image having at least a part different part. Further, in this case, the difficulty level of finding a mistake may be different depending on the type of the base image to be determined.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in order to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition (for example, winning a bonus combination) that can be controlled to a bonus state advantageous to the player is satisfied, the predetermined advantageous condition If is satisfied, the first specific image (for example, an image that is partially different from the base image) is displayed, and if the predetermined advantageous conditions are not satisfied, the second specific image (for example, the base image) is displayed. (Same image as) can be displayed, and when the first specific image is displayed and the player performs an operation to specify a part different from the second specific image, a predetermined image is displayed. It is possible to display a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") Notifying that the advantageous condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied by a new production mode in which a predetermined operation of the player is also involved. Can be planned.

Further, in the present embodiment, the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work used as a motif of the gaming machine. As a result, the player who is attached to the original work can easily recognize whether or not the predetermined advantageous conditions are satisfied, so that the motivation for playing can be increased and the interest in the production can be further enhanced.

(Example of production of bonus role winning notification production (Part 2))
Next, an production example (No. 2) of the bonus winning combination notification effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 and 90. FIG. 89 shows, for example, a bonus combination winning notification effect that can be displayed on the display device 11 with a predetermined probability when an internal winning combination (for example, a “chance eye”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined. The timing chart of the effect example (No. 2) is shown, and FIG. 90 shows a display example of the effect example (No. 2) of the bonus winning combination notification effect. In addition, in the production example (No. 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an example in which the effect is executed by the display device 11 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other production devices (for example, the speaker group 84 and the like) The effect can also be executed by the LED group 85).

As shown in FIGS. 89 and 90, in the production example (No. 2) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an effect entitled "long press effect" is performed. In this "long-press effect", for example, when the stop operation in the third stop operation is long-pressed in the following manner, an effect different from the case where the long-press is not performed is performed. be.

In the present embodiment, the operation means to be "long-pressed" is the stop button (either the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, or the right stop button 17R) in the third stop operation. It is not limited to. For example, it may be a stop button (one of the left stop button 17L, the middle stop button 17C, and the right stop button 17R) in the first stop operation, or a stop button (left stop button 17L, middle stop button 17C) in the second stop operation. And either of the right stop button 17R). Further, the stop button may be operated at a timing not directly related to the stop operation. That is, when any of the stop buttons is operated, the "long press effect" can be performed.

Further, for example, the operating means to be "long-pressed" may be a bet button (MAX bet button 15a or 1-bet button 15b) or a start lever 16. In this case, the bet button can be targeted for "long press" when it is operated at the timing of the medal insertion operation, and when it is operated at a timing different from the medal insertion operation timing, it is "long". It can also be the target of "pushing". Further, in this case, the start lever 16 can be targeted for "long press" when it is operated at the timing of the start operation, and "long press" when it is operated at a timing different from the timing of the start operation. It can also be the target of.

Further, for example, the operation means to be "long-pressed" is not limited to the operation means for performing the above-mentioned operation related to the game, and may be the operation means for performing the operation related to the effect. For example, it may be a sub-display device 18 provided with a touch sensor 19, a display device 11 provided with a touch sensor at least in a part thereof described above, or a physical operating means described above.

As shown in FIG. 89, for example, when it is determined that the "long press effect" is executed, the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation, and the stop switch is turned on (on edge). When 3 seconds have passed (when pressed for a long time), "effect 1" is executed, and then when the stop button in the third stop operation is finished and the stop switch is in the off state (off edge), "Direction 2" is executed. That is, when the stop button in the third stop operation is pressed and held for a predetermined period (3 seconds), "effect 1" and "effect 2" are executed. When the stop switch is turned off (off-edge) during the execution of the "effect 1", the execution of the "effect 1" is terminated and the execution of the "effect 2" is started even in the middle of the process.

On the other hand, for example, when it is determined that the "long press effect" is executed, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, but the stop switch is in the on state (on edge). When the stop button in the third stop operation is finished and the stop switch is in the off state (off edge) (when pressed for a short time) before 3 seconds have elapsed, "Production 1" is not executed and "Production 1" is not executed. Only "Direction 2" is executed.

The effect pattern of the "long press effect" is not limited to the one described above. For example, when the press of the stop button in the third stop operation is started and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds (when pressed for a long time), "effect 1" followed by "effect 2". It may have an effect pattern to be executed. That is, when the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation and the stop switch is in the on state (on edge) for 3 seconds (when pressed for a long time), the stop switch is in the off state (off edge). Regardless of whether or not it becomes, it may have an effect pattern in which "effect 1" and "effect 2" are executed. Further, for example, when the press of the stop button in the third stop operation is started and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds (when pressed for a long time), only "effect 2" is executed. It may have an effect pattern.

Further, for example, the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is started, but the pressing of the stop button in the third stop operation is completed before 3 seconds have elapsed in the state where the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge). Then, when the stop switch is in the off state (off-edge) (when pressed for a short time), it may have an effect pattern in which "effect 1" is executed and then "effect 2" is executed. That is, even before 3 seconds have passed with the stop switch in the on state (on-edge), if the stop switch is in the off state (off-edge), "effect 1" and "effect 2" are displayed. It may have an effect pattern to be executed. Further, for example, even before 3 seconds have elapsed in the state where the stop switch is in the on state (on edge), if the stop switch is in the off state (off edge), only "effect 1" is executed. It may have an effect pattern.

When having a plurality of effect patterns in this way, for example, one of the plurality of effect patterns is selected with a different selection probability depending on whether or not the bonus combination is won. It should be. Further, in such a case, even when the stop button is started to be pressed in the third stop operation and the stop switch is in the on state (on-edge) for 3 seconds, the "effect 2" is already executed. If so, the "effect 1" may not be executed.

An example of the mode in which the “effect 1” and the “effect 2” shown in FIG. 89 are executed will be described with reference to FIG. 90. In addition, in FIG. 90, a display example of each of the long press and the short press when the bonus combination is won will be described.

First, when it is decided that the "long press effect" is executed, first, at least at a predetermined timing before the stop operation of the third stop operation is performed, for example, "hold down". A message is displayed, and an effect of urging that the stop button should be pressed and held during the stop operation of the third stop operation is executed.

After that, when the player keeps pressing the stop button for 3 seconds or more during the stop operation of the third stop operation, for example, "STEP 1" to "STEP 3" are sequentially displayed in "Production 1". Is executed. Then, when the player finishes pressing the stop button, for example, "effect 2" for notifying that the bonus combination is won is executed by displaying "WIN!". If the bonus combination has not been won, it may be notified in "Direction 2" that the bonus combination has not been won, for example, "LOSE" may be displayed. Further, in "Direction 1", for example, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus combination may be notified. In this case, for example, if the effect pattern is displayed up to "STEP1", the effect pattern is displayed up to "STEP2", and the effect pattern is displayed up to "STEP3", and the bonus combination is won. It is easy to select the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 3", and if the bonus combination is not won, the effect pattern displayed up to "STEP 3" may be difficult to select. In this way, by pressing and holding it for a long time, the degree of expectation of winning the bonus role will be notified, so it is possible to further improve the interest in the production in which the content changes according to the operation of the player. Can be done.

On the other hand, if the player does not keep pressing the stop button for 3 seconds or more during the stop operation of the third stop operation, for example, the expectation degree of winning the bonus combination as described above is notified. "Production 1" is not executed, and only "Production 2" that notifies whether or not the bonus combination is won is executed.

Various methods can be adopted as the method for recognizing the pressing time of the stop button on the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side). For example, in the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72), when the main CPU 101 transmits a reel stop command each time the stop switch detects that a valid stop button has been pressed, the sub CPU 201 has a number of positions. 3 When the reel stop command based on the press of the stop button of the stop operation is received, the time is started, and when the time is 3 seconds, "effect 1" is executed and the third stop operation is performed. When the pressing of the stop button of the above is completed and the winning operation command transmitted from the main CPU 101 is received, the "effect 2" may be executed. Further, whether or not the sub CPU 201 executes the "effect 1" and the "effect 2" based on the parameters indicating the on / off state of the stop switch included in the non-operation command transmitted from the main CPU 101. The execution timing may be controlled. In this way, in the main CPU 101 (main control circuit 90 side), it is not necessary to time the pressing time of the stop button, so that the control load related to the effect of changing the content according to the operation of the player is reduced. be able to.

When the "long press effect" is controlled by the sub CPU 201 (sub control circuit 200 side), for example, by the operation time for the touch panel or the physical operation means described above, the sub CPU 201 is independent. It is possible to time the time during which the operating means is operated and to control the content of the effect according to the timed result. Here, in a gaming machine as described in the present embodiment, there is a capacity limitation on the main control circuit 90 side, but there is generally no particular limitation on the sub control circuit 200 side, so at least If such an effect is controlled by the sub CPU 201, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

Further, the predetermined condition for controlling the execution of the "effect 2" is not limited to the completion of the operation on the operating means, and can be appropriately set. For example, it is possible to set a predetermined condition that an operation is performed on an operation means different from the target operation means, and when the number of operations on the target operation means is less than the predetermined number of times, "effect" When the production is generated in the order of "1" and "effect 2" and the number of operations to the target operating means reaches a predetermined number, the predetermined condition is satisfied and the "effect 1" is not generated and the "effect 1" is not generated. 2 ”may be generated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the operation of a specific operating means (for example, on-edge) is detected, the time measurement is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the start of the time measurement, " Control to execute "effect 1", and when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an off-edge is detected), control to execute "effect 2" is performed before the predetermined time elapses from the start of timing. When a predetermined condition is satisfied, it is possible not to control the execution of the "effect 1".

As a result, even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of the specific operation means, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

(Example of production of bonus role winning notification production (3))
Next, with reference to FIG. 91, a production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect will be described. FIG. 90 shows, for example, a case where an internal winning combination (for example, “watermelon 2”) that expects a (simultaneous) winning of a bonus combination is determined, and when a bonus combination is also won, a display device has a predetermined probability. A display example of a production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect that can be displayed in 11 is shown. In addition, in the production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an example in which the effect is executed by the display device 11 is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and other production devices (for example, the information display 6). , LED82, or an instruction monitor (instruction display)) can be used to execute the effect.

For example, the game value display unit (VL) shown in FIG. 91 may be displayed on the display device 11 in a predetermined area (payout number display unit) in which the payout number can be displayed when a small winning combination is established. , If it is an advantageous section, it may be displayed in a predetermined area (acquired number display unit) where the cumulative number of payouts in the advantageous section can be displayed, or an area different from the payout number display unit and the acquired number display unit. It may be displayed in a predetermined area of. Further, as described above, the 7-segment display such as the information display 6 controlled on the main control circuit 90 side should function as the game value display unit (VL) when the effect is executed. Just do it.

As shown in FIG. 91, in the production example (No. 3) of the bonus combination winning notification effect, an effect entitled "Number ahead display effect" is performed. In this "number ahead display effect", for example, the number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (the number of medals to be acquired) is notified before the operation of the bonus state starts, so that the player wins the bonus role. It is a production that informs you that you have done it.

In the following, an example in which the value of the winning combination end number counter is displayed as the planned acquisition number to be notified in the "number of sheets ahead display effect" is described, but it is notified in the "number of sheets ahead display effect". The mode of the number of sheets to be acquired is not limited to this. For example, in the BB3 state or the BB4 state, the value of the winning combination end number counter is "165", but if all "15" medals are paid out in each game in the bonus state, the BB3 state Alternatively, in the BB4 state, "12 times" of games can be played, and the actual number of payouts is "180". Therefore, the actual number of payouts, "180", may be displayed as the number of scheduled acquisitions. Also, even in the BB3 state or the BB4 state, it is necessary to insert three medals to play the game. Therefore, if the value of the winning combination counter is "165", all the games are in the bonus state. If "15" medals are paid out, the net increase in the number of medals for each game is "15-3 = 12". Therefore, the cumulative planned number of net additions is set to "12" x "11 times" = "132" according to the value of the counter for the number of end-of-roles, and this "132" is displayed as the planned number of acquisitions. You may do so. In addition, as described above, since the game can actually be played "12 times", the cumulative planned number of net increases can be "12" x "12 times" = "12 times" according to the number of times the game can actually be played. The number of "144" sheets may be set, and the number of "144" sheets may be displayed as the planned number of acquisitions.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the push order small winning combination is won in the BB1 to BB4 states, the medals to be paid out for each game depending on whether or not the pushing order is correct at the time of winning the pushing order small winning combination. The number of medals also fluctuates (“15” or “6”; see FIG. 23). In addition, when the bonus combination is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section, the push order notification is not performed in the bonus state based on the bonus combination, and when the bonus combination is won in the advantageous section, the bonus combination is obtained. In the bonus state based on, push order notification is performed.

Therefore, for example, when a bonus combination (for example, "F_BB3") is won in an advantageous section, the above-mentioned "144" cards ("180" cards when the number of inserted cards is not taken into consideration) is displayed as the planned number of acquisitions. However, the probability that "15" medals will be paid out when the bonus combination (for example, "F_BB3") is won in the non-advantageous section and the normal advantageous section and the push order notification is not performed in the bonus state. If it is set to 50%, ("12 sheets" x "8 times" = 96 sheets) + ("3 sheets" x "8 times" = 24 sheets) = "120" sheets (when the number of inserted sheets is not considered) ("15 sheets" x "8 times" = 120 sheets) + ("6 sheets" x "8 times" = 48 sheets) = "168" sheets) may be displayed as the number of planned acquisitions. .. That is, the planned acquisition number notified in the "number-first display effect" may be the expected value of the payout number (or net increase number) in the bonus state.

As shown in FIG. 91, for example, when a predetermined internal winning combination including a bonus combination (for example, “F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2”) is determined, it is determined that the “number of sheets ahead display effect” is executed. If so, when the rotation of all reels is stopped (that is, after the third stop), the game value display unit (VL) displays the number of planned acquisitions "165". As a result, the player is notified that he / she has won the bonus combination (“F_BB3” or “F_BB4” in the example shown in FIG. 91). In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols related to the small combination and the replay combination is preferentially stopped and controlled over the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination. Therefore, basically, the game (bonus combination) that wins this bonus combination. In the winning game), the combination of symbols related to the small combination and the replay combination (“C_watermelon” in the example shown in FIG. 91) is displayed, and the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination (in the example shown in FIG. 91, “C_red”). Different color BB ") is not displayed. Of course, in the bonus combination winning game, it is possible to display the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, but in this case, the "number of sheets ahead display effect" may not be executed, and will be described later. As described above, the game value display unit (VL) displays the remaining number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (or the number of medals actually paid out). It can also be executed.

After that, until the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed (until the bonus combination is established), the display of the number of planned acquisitions "165" in the game value display unit (VL) is continued. Then, even if the operation of the bonus state is started, the display of the planned number of acquisitions "165" in the game value display unit (VL) continues, for example, a combination of symbols related to the small winning combination in the bonus state (example shown in FIG. 91). Then, when "Bell + JACA: 15 sheets") is displayed (a prize is generated during the bonus state), the number of sheets displayed in the game value display unit (VL) is appropriately subtracted and updated to be displayed. That is, the game value display unit (VL) displays the planned number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state before the bonus state is started, and in the bonus state, the number of medals actually paid out. Depending on the situation, the remaining number of medals that can be paid out in the bonus state (or the number of medals actually paid out) is displayed.

In addition, in this embodiment, when a bonus combination is won, it may be decided to shift to an advantageous section. Therefore, for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section when winning a bonus combination, the number of cards to be acquired in this advantageous section (generally the expected value may be used. For example, the line battle state is average). 40 games will continue, and if the average number of medals per game increases in a line battle state, "40") will be added (added) to the number of planned acquisitions in the bonus state, and the game will be played. It may be displayed on the value display unit (VL).

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) is granted (for example, a bonus combination is won), the decision is made. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect to be notified (for example, "number of sheets ahead display effect"), and in this specific notification effect, a predetermined game value that can be acquired in an advantageous state generated based on the right decided to be granted. It is possible to display a value (for example, a value of a number counter for the number of consecutive ends as a planned number of acquisitions).

As a result, it is possible to perform a production that specifically informs the value of the right (winning content) obtained by the player, so that the interest related to the production can be enhanced and the interest related to the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the predetermined value is displayed in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is acquired in the advantageous state, the acquired value is obtained. The display of the predetermined value is updated based on the value of the game value.

As a result, a series of effects for notifying the value can be appropriately performed before and after the occurrence of the advantageous state, so that the interest in the effects can be further enhanced.

<Modification example, etc.>
The configuration and operation of the gaming machine of the present invention according to the present embodiment have been described above, including their effects. However, the invention according to the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications can be made as long as the gist of the invention according to the present embodiment is not deviated.

[Modification example]
In the present embodiment, at least in the non-advantageous section, when "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities between the set values, are won, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. It was not decided (ART lottery is not performed), but even if "F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2" and "F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2", which have different winning probabilities between each set value, are won, between each set value. In the same way as other internal winning combinations including bonus winning combinations having the same winning probability in, it may be decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART lottery is performed). In this case, in the ART lottery, the probability of being determined to shift to the advantageous section may be the same winning probability between the set values. That is, by defining a bonus combination that has a different winning probability between the set values, the probability that the transition to the advantageous section is determined may vary between the set values.

Further, in the present embodiment, information on the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified even in the normally advantageous section, but the probability that the normal advantageous section is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined. Is given preferential treatment over the non-advantageous section, but it can also be configured as a section in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. In this case, if the state indicator is not turned on when the non-advantageous section is shifted to the normal advantageous section, the status indicator is turned on only when the transition is made to the advantageous section. good.

In addition, regardless of whether or not the information of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, the normal advantageous section is the period during which the player's medals decrease as a whole (that is, the ball output rate is less than "1". The period) may be sufficient, and the advantageous section may be a period during which the player's medals increase as a whole (that is, a period during which the payout rate exceeds "1"). Further, even if there is a period in which the medals of some players decrease (for example, each of the above-mentioned preparation states) in the advantageous section, the period may be included in the advantageous section.

That is, when the game section is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, the advantageous section raises the expectation of the player, but the increase in the number of balls is not expected to increase (for example, the "normal" of the present embodiment. It may be configured to include an "advantageous section") and an increasing section (for example, the "advantageous section" of the present embodiment) in which an increase in the number of balls actually can be expected.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the RT2 state during the advantageous section, even if the push order notification is performed, the player shifts (falls) to the RT1 state due to a push order error of the player. , The game period of the advantageous section is supposed to progress (update), but in this case, the game period of the advantageous section should not progress (renew) until it shifts (returns) to the RT2 state. You can also. Further, in this case, for example, a part of the number of games required from falling to the RT1 state to returning to the RT2 state (for example, a game required from falling to the RT1 state to returning to the RT2 state). If the number is 10 games, only 5 games of 1/2, or 2 games regardless of the number of games required from falling to the RT1 state to returning to the RT2 state) are the games in the advantageous section. The period may be advanced (renewed).

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the "chance eye" is determined as the internal winning combination, it is not directly determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (ART lottery is not performed). However, the internal winning combination and conditions in which the ART lottery is performed can be appropriately modified and set. For example, if the "chance role" is determined as the internal winning combination, if the "chance role" is established, the ART lottery is not performed, and if the "chance role" is missed and the "RT3 transition" is established (this). In that case, an ART lottery may be performed (regardless of whether or not the state shifts to the RT3 state). That is, when a specific internal winning combination is won, the ART lottery may not be performed if a prize is generated, and the ART lottery may be performed if the prize is missed and no prize is generated.

In addition, for example, a small winning combination that pays out medals less than the number of inserted medals (for example, 3) is determined as an internal winning combination with a high probability, and in principle, a bonus combination is not established in the state between flags, and the game is played. It is also possible to adopt a specification that allows the game to be performed with the basic game state as the state between flags. Further, in this case, the bonus state may be configured as a state in which the acquired medals are reduced or maintained.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period is set to "1500 times", but the number of games corresponding to the regulation monitoring period may be less than or more than that. May be good. In addition, the regulation monitoring period may be changed according to the situation of the game. For example, the regulation monitoring period is determined by the net increase (or payout number) of medals, and the net decrease (that is, the player inserts medals) in the predetermined pachislot 1 during the predetermined business day of the game store. However, if the number of medals that are not returned to the player by the payout and that is beneficial to the game store (or simply the number of medals that are inserted) is "500", the medals correspond to the predetermined regulatory monitoring period. It is also possible to add the "500" to the "1500" number of medals and prevent the advantageous section from being forcibly terminated until the "2000" medals are obtained in a series of advantageous sections.

[Other examples of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in this embodiment]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 99, another example of the playability (that is, the game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, as the game state, a bonus state (special game state) in which the bonus is activated to be a game period advantageous to the player, and a game period in which the player is not in the bonus state are relatively disadvantageous to the player. It is explained that there is a non-bonus state (normal game state), and even in the non-bonus state, there are a plurality of RT states in which the winning probability of the replay role is different, so that the degree of advantage of the player is changed. (See FIG. 13). Further, in the present embodiment, as the game section, an advantageous section (advantageous state) that becomes a game section advantageous to the player by notifying the player of stop operation information, and a relatively advantageous section that is not the advantageous section. It has been described that there is a non-advantageous section (normal state) that is a disadvantageous game section for the player (see FIG. 14). Then, various modifications can be made to various conditions such as the game state and the start / continuation / end of the game section and their contents. Unless otherwise specified, in the other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) of the game playability (game specifications) shown below, the game state, the game section, the internal winning combination, the combination of symbols, etc. in the present embodiment are used. Game elements can be used as appropriate.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (1)]
First, with reference to FIGS. 92 and 93, another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 92 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification), and FIG. 93 is a diagram for conceptually explaining another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification). It is a figure which shows an example of the expected value of the game value given in.

As shown in FIGS. 92 and 93, the player usually starts the game from the (A) non-advantageous section. (A) In the non-advantageous section, the amount of game value decreases because the player is not notified of the stop operation information. That is, the expected value (inclination value) of the game value given per unit game in the advantageous state becomes a negative value, and becomes a downward inclination.

In the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) the non-advantageous section shifts to (B) the advantageous section. (B) In the advantageous section, the amount of game value increases (at least does not decrease) due to the information of the stop operation being notified to the player. That is, the expected value (inclination value) of the game value added per unit game in the advantageous state becomes a positive value (at least not a negative value) and becomes an upslope (at least does not become a downslope). For convenience of explanation, in this example, the expected value of grant in the prepared state and the expected value of grant in the bonus state are not considered.

The expected value of grant can be calculated (designed) as follows. For example, if the push order (for example, 5 choices) is correct, 15 medals will be paid out, and if the push order (for example, 5 choices) is incorrect, no medals will be paid out. In the case of (32768/65536), if it is necessary to bet 3 medals in one game in principle, 30 medals are required in 10 games. And, in the case of (A) non-advantageous section, when the push order small role is won during 10 games, the push order is correct and 15 medals can be paid out is 1/10. Since it is (1/2 x 1/5), if the probability is correct, the amount of medals will be -15 (15-30) during 10 games, so the expected value of grant is 1 time. It will be "-1.5 sheets" per game. On the other hand, in the case of (B) advantageous section, if the information of the stop operation is notified for all the push order small wins and the player performs the stop operation according to the information, the push order small win is won during 10 games. Since it is 1/2 that the correct answer is sometimes that 15 medals can be paid out, the amount of medals is +45 (75) during 10 games if the probability is correct. Since it is -30), the expected value of grant is "+4.5 cards" per game. However, these are just examples for convenience of explanation, and it is also possible to calculate (design) the expected value of grant by taking into account the winning probability of the replay role and the winning probability of the bonus role (and the expected value of grant during the bonus state). Is.

In this example, in (B) advantageous section, the expected value (inclined value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value (expected value α) (B-1) advantageous section 1 Then, the expected value (inclined value) of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the second expected value (expected value β) different from the first expected value (expected value α) (B-2). ) Advantageous section 2 and (2) When the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, (B-1) Advantageous section 1 shifts to (B-2) Advantageous section 2. In this example, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) the non-advantageous section is first shifted to (B-1) the advantageous section 1, and (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is (2). When the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, (B-2) shifts to the advantageous section 2, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, (A) non-advantageous first. It is possible to shift from the section to (B-2) advantageous section 2 and shift to (B-1) advantageous section 2 when (2) expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied in (B-2) advantageous section 2. ..

Further, for example, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it may be determined whether to shift to (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2. , (1) Regarding the start condition of the advantageous section, (B-1) the start condition (1-1) of the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) the start condition (1-2) of the advantageous section 2 are determined respectively. (A) In the non-advantageous section, shift to (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2 depending on which start condition (1-1 or 1-2) is satisfied. It may be.

Then, in (B) advantageous section ((B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2), when the end condition of (3) advantageous section is satisfied, (B) advantageous section to (A) non-advantageous section Transition to the advantageous section (that is, the advantageous section ends). In this example, it is assumed that the transition control of (A) non-advantageous section and (B) advantageous section is performed in this way.

Here, in this example, the expected value α in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is configured to be larger than the expected value β in the (B-2) advantageous section 2 (that is, (B-). 2) The expected value β in the advantageous section 2 is configured to be smaller than the expected value α in (B-1) advantageous section 1). Specifically, for example, when the above example is used, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, the probability (notification probability) that the stop operation information is notified at the time of winning the push order small winning combination is 100% (that is, that is). By setting (notification 5 times out of 5 wins), the expected value α is set to "+4.5 sheets", while in (B-2) advantageous section 2, information on the stop operation is provided when the push order small winning combination is won. By setting the probability of being notified (notification probability) to 40% (that is, notifying twice in five winnings), the expected value β is set to "+ -0 sheets".

The expected value α and the expected value β can be arbitrarily set. For example, if (B-1) advantageous section 1 is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than (A) non-advantageous section, the notification probability in advantageous section 1 is set to 1 to 100%. It can be set to any notification probability. Further, for example, (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in an advantageous state that is more advantageous to the player than (A) non-advantageous section, and the notification probability is lower than that of (B-1) advantageous section 1. If so, the notification probability in the advantageous section 2 can be set to any notification probability from 1 to 100%.

Further, each of the notification probability in the advantageous section 1 and the notification probability in the advantageous section 2 may be a predetermined probability or may vary depending on the game value granting situation. For example, when the expected value α and the expected value β are set to “+3.0 sheets” and “+1.0 sheets”, respectively, (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 In each of the above, the expected value of grant is calculated for each predetermined number of games (for example, 10 times), and the calculated expected value of grant is a predetermined threshold (for example, plus or minus) than the expected value α and the expected value β, respectively. If the deviation exceeds 1), the notification probability is appropriately changed in the subsequent game, and in each period of (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. The final expected value to be given may be (approximate) the expected value α and the expected value β.

Further, the method of setting the expected value α and the expected value β is not limited to the above-mentioned method of varying the notification probability. For example, (B-1) advantageous section 1 is set to a state where the winning probability of the replay combination is high (high RT state), and (B-2) advantageous section 2 is set to a state where the winning probability of the replay combination is low (low RT state). By making the winning probability (winning probability) of the replay combination different, the expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α (in this case, the winning probability of the replay combination is added to the given expected value. In addition, the notification probability may or may not be changed). That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by controlling the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 to different RT states.

Further, for example, (B-1) the advantageous section 1 is set to a state in which the bonus (bonus state) is not difficult to operate, and (B-2) the advantageous section 2 is set to the state in which it is difficult to operate the bonus. By making the operating probability (winning probability) of the bonus different, the expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α (in this case, the expected value given is the operating probability of the bonus and the grant during the bonus state. The expected value is taken into account. Further, the notification probability may or may not be changed). That is, with respect to the operation of the bonus, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by controlling the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2 to different control states. .. The state in which it is not difficult or difficult for the bonus to operate is the type of internal winning combination (including carry-over combination), the type of gaming state, the control content of stop control according to them, or the stop operation. It is possible to appropriately create the information by adding the notification contents of the above information in a complex manner (for an example, see the description of FIGS. 94 to 99 described later).

Further, for example, with respect to the push order small winning combination in the above example, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode, 15 medals are paid out, and the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the above predetermined mode. If this is done, six medals shall be paid out, and (B-1) when the push order small winning combination is won in the advantageous section 1, the information of the stop operation indicating the above-mentioned predetermined mode shall be notified. (B-2) When the push order small winning combination is won in the advantageous section 2, the information of the stop operation indicating the above specific mode shall be notified, and by making the number of payouts different, the expected value β is higher than the expected value α. May be set to be small (in this case, the notification probability may or may not be changed).

Further, for example, a plurality of types of push order small winning combination (for example, pushing order small winning combination A and pushing order small winning combination B) are provided, and the winning probability of pushing order small winning combination B is the winning probability of pushing order small winning combination A. It is set lower than the probability, and (B-1) When the push order small winning combination A wins in the advantageous section 1, the stop operation information is notified, while when the pushing order small winning combination B wins, the stop operation is performed. The information is not notified (although the information of the stop operation may be notified), and (B-2) When the push order small winning combination B is won in the advantageous section 2, the information of the stop operation is notified. , The expected value β may be set to be smaller than the expected value α by not notifying the information of the stop operation when the push order small winning combination A is won. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed by making the notification target combination different between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2. The winning probabilities of the push order small winning combination A and the pushing order small winning combination B are the same (or substantially the same), but the number of payouts at the time of the correct push order is different as 15 and 6 as described above. Then, the expected value α and the expected value β may be changed.

Further, for example, the internal winning combination has a push order small combination (for example, 6 choices) and the push order replay (for example, 6 choices), and the game state has a high RT state and a low RT state. When the push order replay is won, if the push order is correct, the combination of symbols that shifts to the high RT state if it is in the low RT state and maintains the high RT state if it is in the high RT state is displayed. On the other hand, if the push order is incorrect, the low RT state is maintained if it is in the low RT state, and the state shifts to the low RT state if it is in the high RT state (see, for example, FIG. 23), (B). -1) In the advantageous section 1, the correct push order is notified regardless of whether the push order small combination or the push order replay is won, so that the medals increase when the push order small combination is won. When the push order replay is won, the expected value α is set so as to shift to the high RT state or maintain the high RT state, and in (B-2) advantageous section 2, one of these is the correct answer. The expected value β may be set by not notifying the pressing order.

In this case, if (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in a state where the correct push order is notified for the push order small winning combination and the correct push order is not notified for the push order replay, the high RT is set. It is difficult to shift to the state or maintain the high RT state (the stay rate in the low RT state is high), but it is easy to increase the medals when winning the push order small role. Can be created. Further, when (B-2) advantageous section 2 is in a state in which the correct push order is notified for the push order replay and the correct push order is not notified for the push order small winning combination, the high RT state is set. Although it is easy to shift to or maintain a high RT state (the stay rate in the high RT state is high), it is difficult to increase the number of medals when winning a small winning combination. can do. That is, even if the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by different types of internal winning combinations to be notified between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2. (In this case, the notification probability may or may not be changed). In (B-2) advantageous section 2, the expected value β is set by preventing the correct push order from being notified when either the push order small winning combination or the push order replay is won. You can also do it.

Further, for example, with respect to the push order small combination (for example, 6 choices), in the (B-1) advantageous section 1, at least the push order (that is, the correct push) is the correct answer for the first stop operation and the second stop operation. The expected value α is set by notifying (all of the order), and in (B-2) advantageous section 2, the push order that is the correct answer only for the first stop operation (that is, a part of the correct push order). ) May be notified to set the expected value β. Specifically, for example, when the first stop operation is "left", the second stop operation is "middle", and the third stop operation is "right", the push order is the correct answer. (B-1) In the case of advantageous section 1, the push order of "left → middle → right" is notified, and if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the number of medals can be increased with a 100% probability. (B-2) In the case of advantageous section 2, the push order of "left →? →?" Is notified, and even if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, the remaining two choices must be answered correctly by the player himself. Therefore, there is only a 50% chance that the number of medals can be increased. That is, the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by making the notification content (selection number) of the stop operation information different between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2. (In this case, the notification probability may or may not be changed).

Further, for example, (B) the information of the stop operation is always notified in the advantageous section, and the expected value is "+ 10.0 sheets", which is a high net increase, but the duration of one time is relatively short (for example, between 8 games). ) It is configured as an increasing section (special advantageous section), and (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 are not notified of stop operation information (or are notified with a predetermined probability less than that of the special advantageous section). However, it is configured as an effect section (normal advantageous section) in which the expected value is different for each transition to the special advantageous section, and can be mutually transferred between the special advantageous section and the normal advantageous section. do. Then, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, a lottery for transition to the special advantageous section (AT lottery) is performed, and in the lottery, for example, it is determined that the lottery shifts to the special advantageous section with a probability of about 1/5. The transition probability is set so as to (win the AT lottery) (that is, the expected value α is set by the increase rate of the game medium in the increase section and the transfer probability to the increase section), while (B- 2) The AT lottery is also performed in the advantageous section 2, and in the lottery, for example, the transition probability is set so as to win the AT lottery with a probability of about 1/20 (that is, the increase of the game medium in the increase section). An expected value β smaller than the expected value α is set depending on the rate and the probability of transition to the increase interval).

That is, the expected value α and the expected value β are changed by making the transition probability to the increasing section (special advantageous section) different between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2. You may. The migration probability described above can be set as appropriate. Further, the AT lottery may not be performed in the (B-2) advantageous section 2, and in this case, in the (B-2) advantageous section 2, for example, there is a probability of (B-) of about 1/20. 1) Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section 1 is drawn, and if the lottery is won, the shift from (B-2) advantageous section 2 to (B-1) advantageous section 1 may be performed. Further, the conditions for shifting from (B-1) advantageous section 1 to (B-2) advantageous section 2 can be appropriately set. In this case, for example, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, the game is played for a predetermined period (for example, during 5 games) without winning the AT lottery, and the fall is performed when the AT lottery is not won. The lottery was won, the number of consecutive transitions to the increase section (special advantage section) became a predetermined number (for example, 5 times), and the number of acquisitions in the increase section (special advantage section) was a predetermined number (for example, 400). It is possible to adopt the fact that it has become (more than one sheet). As described above, it is possible to further diversify the game playability by the transition specifications between the (B-1) advantageous section 1 and the (B-2) advantageous section 2.

In this example, the expected value α is set (B-1) in the advantageous section 1 and the expected value β is set in the advantageous section 2 (B-2) as states in which different expected values are set. Although the description has been given by giving an example of having two states, there may be three or more states in which different expected values are set, and these states can be set as appropriate. For example, it may further have an advantageous section 3 in which the expected value γ is set (B-3). In this case, the expected value to be given can be set so that α ≧ γ ≧ β or α ≧ β ≧ γ. That is, (B-3) advantageous section 3 which is an intermediate expected value to be given is set between (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2, or (B-2) advantageous section. By setting an advantageous section 3 whose expected value of grant is smaller than 2 (B-3) and gradually changing the expected value of grant each time the fluctuation condition is satisfied, the expected value of grant can be further subdivided. It may be possible to make adjustments.

(First aspect in another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification))
Subsequently, the first aspect of the game specification on the premise of another example (No. 1) of the game property (game specification) described above will be described. In this first aspect, for example, the expected value α is set to “+3.0 sheets” and the expected value β is set to “+2.0 sheets”. However, as described above, the expected value of grant can be set arbitrarily.

In this first aspect, in the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process shifts to (B-1) advantageous section 1. As for (1) the start condition of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the condition for determining the transition to ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type.

(B-1) After shifting to the advantageous section 1, the expected value of grant is the expected value α (for example, “+3”) for at least a predetermined period (a predetermined arbitrary game period can be set, for example, between 50 games). .0 sheets ") (B-1) Advantageous section 1 continues. Further, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section. As the conditions for determining the continuation of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the conditions for determining the continuation of ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type of.

(B-1) When the game of the above-mentioned predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, if it is decided to continue the advantageous section, (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, and (B-2) ) Move to the advantageous section 2. (B-2) After shifting to the advantageous section 2, at least for a specific period (a predetermined arbitrary game period, for example, between 100 games), the expected value of grant is the expected value β (for example, "+2"). (0.0 sheets) ”) (B-2) Advantageous section 2 continues. In (B-2) advantageous section 2, it is not determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section. (B-2) When the game of the specific period is performed in the advantageous section 2, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and (A) the transition to the non-advantageous section occurs.

On the other hand, when the game of the above-mentioned predetermined period is performed in (B-1) advantageous section 1, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied even if it is not decided to continue the advantageous section, and (3) A) Shift to a non-advantageous section.

In addition, (B-1) when the game of the above-mentioned predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, if it is decided to continue the advantageous section, (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. In this case, the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is once shifted to the (A) non-advantageous section, and a predetermined waiting period (for example, an arbitrary precursor state between 4 to 32 games) has elapsed in the (A) non-advantageous section. After that, the (A) non-advantageous section may be shifted to (B-2) advantageous section 2 to continue the advantageous section.

Further, in this first aspect, (B-2) advantageous section 2 is assumed to continue for the above-mentioned specific period, but this specific period is not set as a predetermined arbitrary gaming period, for example, (B-1). The period until the expected value of grant becomes the expected value β (for example, “+2.0 sheets”) in the entire (B) advantageous section including the advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 may be set. That is, in the early stage of the advantageous section (B-1), the expected value of grant is increased by the expected value α, and in the subsequent advantageous section (B-2), the expected value of grant is adjusted (smaller) by the expected value β. You may. In this case, the predetermined waiting period may be included in the entire advantageous section (B) or included in the entire advantageous section in order to adjust the given expected value according to the expected value β. It may not be possible.

Specifically, for example, when the game value as expected value α is given in the (B-1) advantageous section 1, the amount of the game value given in the (B-1) advantageous section 1 is 3 cards × 50 games. It becomes "150 sheets". After that, in (B-2) advantageous section 2, a certain standard (for example, 50 games as in the above predetermined period, longer games, shorter games, or actual game time may be used. In addition, other criteria can be adopted as appropriate), and (B) the notification probability is appropriately adjusted so that the expected value of the entire advantageous section becomes the expected value β. For example, when (B) the entire advantageous section is set to 100 games, the game value of "150 cards" is given in (B-1) advantageous section 1, so that the remaining advantageous section is (B-2) advantageous. In the section 2, the notification probability is adjusted so that the game value of "50 cards" is given between 50 games, and (B) the game value of "200 cards" may be given in the entire advantageous section. ..

According to the gaming machine of the first aspect, a state in which the expected value of the game value is relatively high (expected value α is set) for a predetermined period after the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) is started. (B-1) It becomes possible to play a game in the advantageous section 1), and a state in which the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set) for a specific period after the advantageous state is continued (expected value β). B-2) It becomes possible to play a game in the advantageous section 2). Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

In the gaming machine of the first aspect, it may not be decided to continue the advantageous state for a specific period ((B-2) advantageous section 2) after the advantageous state is continued. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately.

Further, in the gaming machine of the first aspect, even when it is decided to continue the advantageous state during the advantageous state, the advantageous state is temporarily terminated, and after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed, the advantageous state is reached. May be continued (restarted). In this way, not only can the ball output rate be managed more appropriately, but also the interest of the game can be improved with respect to whether or not the advantageous state continues.

(Second aspect in another example (No. 1) of game playability (game specification))
Subsequently, a second aspect of the game specification on the premise of another example (No. 1) of the game property (game specification) described above will be described. In this second aspect, for example, the expected value α is set to “+7.5 sheets” and the expected value β is set to “+ −0 sheets”. However, as described above, the expected value of grant can be set arbitrarily.

In this second aspect, in the (A) non-advantageous section, when (1) the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process shifts to (B-1) the advantageous section 1. As for (1) the start condition of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the condition for determining the transition to ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type.

(B-1) After shifting to the advantageous section 1, the expected value of grant is the expected value α (for example, “+7”) for at least a predetermined period (a predetermined arbitrary game period can be set, for example, between 100 games). .5 sheets ”) (B-1) Advantageous section 1 continues. In addition, this predetermined period may be, for example, a period from the start of (B-1) advantageous section 1 until the given game value reaches (or exceeds) a predetermined amount (for example, 1000 sheets). However, (B-1) the game time from the start of the advantageous section 1 may be a period until (or exceeds) a predetermined time (for example, 0.25 hours).

(B-1) When the game of the above-mentioned predetermined period is performed in the advantageous section 1, (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied, and (B-2) the process shifts to the advantageous section 2. (B-2) After shifting to the advantageous section 2, (3) the expected value of grant becomes the expected value β (for example, “+ -0 sheets”) until the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (B-2) advantageous. Section 2 continues. In this second aspect, (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is set to, for example, (B) the game is played for a specific period (for example, during 1500 games) after the advantageous section is started, or ( B) It can be determined that the game value given after the advantageous section is started has reached a specific amount (for example, a net increase of 3000 sheets) (such end processing of the advantageous section is the limit described above or described later. See processing). Further, even before the end condition determined in this way is satisfied (for example, before the limit processing is executed), the bonus combination is won (the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed and the bonus state is activated. ), Regardless of whether it is (B-1) advantageous section 1 or (B-2) advantageous section 2, (B) advantageous section ends, and (B) advantageous section to (A) Move to a non-advantageous section. That is, it is one of the end conditions of (3) the advantageous section that the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination that enables the transition to the bonus state is displayed in (B) the advantageous section.

As for (3) the end condition of the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, the condition determined to end in ART) can be adopted, and the internal winning combination can be adopted. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type. Further, in (B-2) advantageous section 2, for example, until the end condition of (3) advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section ((B-2)) is set for each predetermined unit (for example, 50 games in one set). ) When it is decided whether or not to continue the advantageous section 2) and it is decided to continue the advantageous section, when it is not decided to continue the advantageous section by a predetermined unit and to continue the advantageous section. (3) may end the advantageous section even before the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. In this case, various conditions described in the present embodiment (for example, conditions for determining to continue ART) can be adopted as the conditions for determining to continue the advantageous section. It is also possible to adopt the lottery result of the transition lottery based on (or not based on) the type of internal winning combination.

Further, in the second aspect, it is possible to execute the specific notification in the advantageous section (B) by using, for example, the display device 11. This specific notification is a notification effect for suggesting to the player that the bonus role has been won (carried over). However, in this second aspect, since the advantageous section ends when the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed, this specific notification displays (the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. Suggests information that allows the player to choose between ending the advantageous section or continuing the advantageous section (by avoiding displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination). It can be said that it is a notification effect for doing so. In addition, it may be a notification effect to suggest that it is possible to shift to the bonus state by simply displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination, or the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. It may be a notification effect for suggesting that the advantageous section can be continued if the above is avoided.

For example, in this second aspect, in the (B) advantageous section, when the bonus combination is won (or carried over), the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed. In the case of a game, the specific notification can be configured to be executed. In addition, in this embodiment, since the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination is performed, when the bonus combination and the replay combination or the small combination are both won (or the bonus combination is won). If the replay combination or the small combination is won in duplicate when it is carried over), in principle, the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is not displayed. That is, "a game in which a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination can be displayed" is not such a situation, and if the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate, the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be used. It means that it is a game that can be displayed.

When the specific notification is configured to be executed as described above, the player can play the game period until (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, until the limit processing of the advantageous section is executed). Within the range of, the advantageous section can be continued by avoiding the transition to the bonus state. From this point of view, it is not always necessary to divide the (B) advantageous section into (B-1) advantageous section 1 and (B-2) advantageous section 2 (that is, the expected value of grant is the expected value α). And the expected value β do not need to be different), and (B) the expected value of grant in the advantageous section may be a constant expected value of grant (for example, “+1.5 sheets”).

Further, for example, in this second aspect, in (B-1) advantageous section 1, when the bonus combination is won (or carried over), and (2) the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. Can be configured so that (2) the specific notification is executed when the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied. In this case, similarly to the above, in the game after the specific notification can be executed, when the specific notification is "a game in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed", the specific notification is sent. It may be configured to be executed. In addition, if (2) the bonus combination is won in (B-2) advantageous section 2 after the expected value fluctuation condition is satisfied and before (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, at this time, It can be configured to execute the specific notification. In this case, similarly to the above, in the game after the specific notification can be executed, when the specific notification is "a game in which a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be displayed", the specific notification is sent. It may be configured to be executed. Further, in the case of winning the bonus combination (or carrying over) in the advantageous section 1 (B-1) after the configuration in this way, "a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. If it is a "game that can be played", the specific notification may be configured to be executed.

When the specific notification is configured to be executed as described above, the player can play the game period until (3) the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (for example, until the limit processing of the advantageous section is executed). Within the range of, for example, in the game period of (B-1) advantageous section 1, the game value is dramatically increased by setting the expected value α, so that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed. This is avoided and the advantageous section is continued. (B-2) In the game period of the advantageous section 2, the expected value β is set and the game value does not increase dramatically. It is also possible to display the combination of symbols to end the advantageous section, and in the subsequent game, select (1) to establish the start condition of the advantageous section again and (B-1) to shift to the advantageous section 1. You can do it, or you can choose to end the game as it is if you do not have time to spare. On the other hand, in the game period of (B-2) advantageous section 2, the game value does not increase dramatically by setting the expected value β, but it is more advantageous to the player than (A) the non-advantageous section. Since there is no change in the situation, it is possible to choose to continue the advantageous section by avoiding the display of the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination in order to enjoy the game.

Further, in this second aspect, when the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed and (B) the advantageous section is terminated, it is possible to give a special privilege by using, for example, a display device 11. ing. Among the various benefits given to the player, this special benefit is a benefit that is not related to the addition of the game value (that is, does not affect the ball output rate). It should be noted that the special privilege is a privilege related to the addition of the game value (that is, it affects the ball output rate) (for example, the right to establish the transition condition of the advantageous section, or the information of the stop operation during the bonus state. It does not prevent the right to be notified, etc.), but from the viewpoint of optimizing gambling, it should be a privilege that is not related to the addition of game value (that is, does not affect the ball output rate). Is desirable.

Specific examples of the special privilege include, for example, the execution of a special effect (for example, the various ending effects and other premier effects described above) that are usually unlikely to be executed, and the special notification that informs the player of useful information (for example. For example, execution of suggestion notification of set values, expectation notification for each production content, history notification such as winning probability of bonus role and transition probability of advantageous section), information provided via the Internet using the player's mobile terminal. The points can be given on the provided service and the release of specific conditions can be mentioned.

When configured to have the above special benefits as described above, the player does not enjoy the direct benefits such as the addition of the game value, but the indirect benefits that are of high interest in enjoying the game. Since it can be enjoyed, the advantageous section can be set early, especially in a state where the game value does not increase dramatically due to the setting of the expected value β, as in (B-2) Advantageous section 2. It can also be given an incentive to terminate.

According to the gaming machine of the second aspect, in the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section), when a predetermined end condition ((3) end condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied, or a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It ends when it shifts to the special game state (bonus state) before. Then, in the advantageous state, when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is executed. Therefore, the player can continue the advantageous state by avoiding the transition to the special gaming state as long as it is within the specified predetermined end condition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

Further, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, the predetermined termination condition is when a certain privilege is given (or is assumed to be given) to the player (for example, the limit processing described above or described later). May be terminated (by). In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the game is played from the start of the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) to the establishment of a specific fluctuation condition ((2) expected value fluctuation condition). It is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of value is relatively high (expected value α is set (B-1) advantageous section 1), and the advantageous state ends after a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Until the game is played, the game can be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set (B-2) advantageous section 2). Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the second aspect, the game is played from the start of the advantageous state ((B) advantageous section) to the establishment of a specific fluctuation condition ((2) expected value fluctuation condition). It is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of value is relatively high (expected value α is set (B-1) advantageous section 1), and the advantageous state ends after a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Until the game is played, the game can be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low (expected value β is set (B-2) advantageous section 2). Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Further, when the advantageous state ends with the transition to the special game state, it is possible to give special benefits not related to the addition of the game value. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. In addition, when the player shifts to the special gaming state and ends the advantageous state, a special privilege that is not granted when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is terminated is given, so that the player is in an advantageous state. Can also be given an incentive to terminate early. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

In the gaming machine of the second aspect, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and when it is possible to shift to the special gaming state, it indicates that fact. The specific notification may be executed. In this way, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to further maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine of the second aspect, the expected value of the game value given in the advantageous state is adjusted by the probability (notification probability) that the information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified during the advantageous state. You may. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (Part 2)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 94, another example (No. 2) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 2) of the game playability (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 94, in this example, there are a general gaming state (CZ state), (A) BB1 state, (B) BB2 state, and (C) BB3 state. The general game state (CZ state) is a game state in which the probability of winning the replay role is low and the transition to the advantageous section does not occur. In that it is possible to shift to the (B) BB2 state or the (C) BB3 state, it is positioned as a gaming state (chance zone. Special prize consecutive villa state) that is more advantageous than the (A) BB1 state. Further, the general gaming state (CZ state), the (B) BB2 state, and the (C) BB3 state are positioned as a series of increasing sections described later. In the general gaming state (CZ), as in the case of the (A) BB1 state, an advantageous section can be configured to occur for a specific period when a specific notification condition is satisfied.

In the general game state (CZ state), when BB1 (for example, BB1 and BB2 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (1) BB1 start condition is satisfied. Then, the game shifts from the general gaming state (CZ state) to the (A) BB1 state. As will be described later, this is positioned as a transition of the gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player. Further, in the general game state (CZ state), when BB2 (for example, BB3 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied. Then, the state shifts from the general gaming state (CZ state) to the (B) BB2 state. Further, in the general game state (CZ state), when BB3 (for example, BB4 in the present embodiment) is won and the combination of symbols related to BB3 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (5) BB3 start condition is satisfied. Then, the game shifts from the general gaming state (CZ state) to the (C) BB2 state. As will be described later, these are positioned as transitions of gaming states that are relatively advantageous to the player.

Here, in the general game state (CZ state), once the BB1 is won, the BB1 is carried over until the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (display of the combination of symbols related to BB1 is permitted). Since the BB1 permission state is continued), BB2 and BB3 are not won in the general game state (CZ state). Further, once the BB2 or BB3 is won in the general gaming state (CZ state), the BB2 or BB3 is carried over until the combination of symbols related to the BB2 or BB3 is stopped and displayed on the valid line (related to the BB2 or BB3). Since the BB2 permitted state or the BB3 permitted state in which the display of the combination of symbols is permitted continues), the BB1 is not won in the general game state (CZ state). That is, in the general gaming state (CZ state), if any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won, the bonus state corresponding to the winning bonus combination ends and the general gaming state (CZ state) is not entered again. As long as it is configured not to win other bonus roles.

In this example, the combination of symbols related to BB2 is configured as a combination of symbols such as "red 7-red 7-red 7", and the combination of symbols related to BB3 is, for example, "blue 7-blue 7-blue". It is configured as a combination of symbols such as "7". Further, the combination of symbols related to BB1 is configured as a combination of symbols such as "red 7-red 7-cherry 1" and "blue 7-blue 7-cherry 1" (see FIG. 15). In this example, in the case of winning any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) in the general gaming state (CZ state) after the configuration in this way, the winning notification suggesting that the bonus combination has been won is performed. You may be asked. Specifically, a display such as "Aim for 7!" May be displayed to indicate to the player that the "Red 7" symbol or the "Blue 7" symbol should be aimed. In this case, for example, when the player aims at the "Red 7" symbol and hits the BB2, the "Red 7" is aligned and the state shifts to the BB2 state, and the BB3 is won. In the case, "Red 7" is not aligned, and the combination of symbols related to BB1 is not displayed, it is recognized that the winner is BB3, and when the winner is BB1, the combination of symbols related to BB1. Is displayed and the state shifts to the BB1 state. In this way, in the playability of this example, it is possible to further improve the interest in notification. Further, the above-mentioned winning notification may be performed unconditionally when any of the bonus combinations (BB1 to BB3) is won in the general game state (CZ state), for example, the general game. When it is possible to generate an advantageous section in the state (CZ state), it may be performed only during the advantageous section.

The (A) BB1 state is composed of (A-1) BB1 in general, (A-2) BB1RB flags, and (A-3) BB1RB. In the (A) BB1 state, BB1 to BB3 are not newly drawn, and therefore, as long as the (A) BB1 state continues, the general gaming state (CZ state), (B) BB2 state, and (C) There is no case of shifting to the BB3 state.

(A-1) In BB1 in general, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is set to "0" (that is, the replay) is not drawn. To)) Set. In addition, the push order small winning combination (for example, 9 medals are paid out with the correct push order of 6 choices, 1 medal is paid out if the push order is incorrect but the stop operation timing is appropriate, and the stop operation timing is also with the push order incorrect answer. (If it is inappropriate, no medal is paid out, etc.), RB for activating the RB state in which the winning probability of any small winning combination is improved compared to the non-operating state, and (A) Whether or not the BB1 state is an advantageous section. The advantageous section lottery for which the determination is made is set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability.

(A-2) Among the BB1RB flags, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is "0" (that is, the replay) is not drawn. As)) set. Further, the push order small winning combination, the advantageous section lottery winning combination, and the like are set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. The basic configuration of the push order small combination (1/6 is the correct push order answer and 5/6 is the incorrect push order answer) is the same as in (A-1) BB1 general. In addition, since the RB has been carried over, it will not be newly drawn, but the winning state (permitted state) continues. Further, the winning probability of the replay combination may be the same or different between (A-1) BB1 general and (A-2) BB1RB flag.

(A-3) In BB1RB, the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is low (or the winning probability of the replay (replay) role is set to "0" (that is, the replay) is not drawn. )) Set. Further, the push order small winning combination, the advantageous section lottery winning combination, and the like are set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. The basic configuration of the push order small combination (1/6 is the correct push order answer and 5/6 is the incorrect push order answer) is the same as in (A-1) BB1 general. Further, in (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, the winning probabilities of the push order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery winning combination are the same. It may be present or it may be different. Alternatively, in (A-3) BB1RB, as the internal winning combination different from the pushing order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery combination, the pushing order small winning combination and the advantageous section lottery combination having the same roles are won. You may do so. Further, the winning probability of the replay combination may be the same between (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, respectively. It may be different.

In the general gaming state (CZ state), when (1) BB1 start condition is satisfied, the process first shifts to (A-1) BB1 general. (A-1) In BB1 general, when the above RB is determined as an internal winning combination, it shifts between (A-2) BB1RB flags, and during (A-2) BB1RB flags, it is a symbol related to RB. Continues until the combination of is stopped and displayed on the valid line (the permission state in which the display of the combination of symbols related to RB is permitted continues). When the combination of symbols related to RB is stopped and displayed on the effective line between the (A-2) BB1RB flags, the process shifts to (A-3) BB1RB. (A-3) In BB1RB, the end condition of the RB state (for example, 8 or less arbitrary predetermined number of winnings, or 12 or less arbitrary predetermined number of games played) is satisfied. When it is established, it shifts to (A-1) BB1 general. It should be noted that, during the (A-2) BB1RB flag, the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination (RB) is performed, so that the combination of symbols related to the RB is on the effective line. It may be difficult to display the stop (or not to display the stop), and as a result, it may be difficult (or not) to move into (A-3) BB1RB.

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 in general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, the number of medals to be paid out in the (A) BB1 state became the specified number. In the case (for example, when the number of cards exceeds 285), (2) the end condition of BB1 is satisfied, and (A) the state shifts from the BB1 state to the general gaming state (CZ state).

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, if the winning combination of the advantageous section lottery is won, it is a non-advantageous section. Whether or not to shift to the advantageous section is determined, and if it is an advantageous section, whether or not to extend the advantageous section is determined. In this case, for example, an advantageous section of 30 games is granted or extended by one winning. It should be noted that the opportunity for determining the granting or extension of the advantageous section and the period thereof are not limited to those described above. For example, depending on not only the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning the advantageous section lottery, but also the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning another internal winning combination, the result of the winning / failing lottery not based on the internal winning combination, etc. It may be possible to determine the granting or extension of the advantageous section. Further, when the grant or extension of the advantageous section is decided, the duration of the advantageous section may be separately determined by lottery or the like. Further, (A) at an arbitrary timing before the BB1 state is started (for example, when the BB1 is won, or when the general game state (CZ state) after the BB1 is won and the advantageous section lottery is won). It may be possible to determine whether or not the entire period (or a part of the period) of the BB1 state is regarded as an advantageous section.

In any of the states of (A-1) BB1 general, (A-2) BB1RB flag, and (A-3) BB1RB, if it is an advantageous section, for example, in the above-mentioned push order small combination. In the winning game, the information of the stop operation (which is the correct answer in the push order) is notified, and as a result of the stop operation being performed according to the notification, the advantageous section becomes an increase period in which the game value increases (or at least does not decrease). .. On the other hand, in the case of a non-advantageous section, for example, in the game winning the push order small winning combination, the information of the stop operation (which is the correct answer in the push order) is not notified, and as a result, the game value of the non-advantageous section decreases. It will be a period.

As described above, in this example, the (A) BB1 state does not end until the number of medals paid out in the BB1 state exceeds "285". Therefore, for example, the case where a replay combination or other small combination is won is not considered, and the case where one piece is paid out in the push order small combination is not considered, and the total winning probability of the push order small combination is not considered. When is set to about 1/2 (32768/65536), the number of payouts of 9 sheets required to end the (A) BB1 state is "32 times" (32 times x 9 sheets = 288 sheets), and the above push If the forward and small winning combination wins according to the probability, the shortest number of games that can end the (A) BB1 state is "64 times" (32 times ÷ 1/2). Therefore, when all of the (A) BB1 states are advantageous sections, if the game is played "64 times", the game value increases during the game period, and the (A) BB1 state is generally terminated at an early stage. It is possible to shift to the gaming state (CZ state). On the other hand, (A) When all the BB1 states are non-advantageous sections, the probability that 9 cards will be paid out in the game in which the above-mentioned push order small winning combination is won is basically reduced to 1/6, so (A) The standard number of games that can end the BB1 state is "384 times" (64 times ÷ 1/6), and the game value also decreases during the game period.

The (B) BB2 state is composed of (B-1) BB2 in general, (B-2) BB2RB flags, and (B-3) BB2RB. In the (B) BB2 state, BB1 to BB3 are not newly drawn, and therefore, as long as the (B) BB2 state continues, the general gaming state (CZ state), (A) BB1 state, and (C) There is no case of shifting to the BB3 state.

(B-1) In BB2 in general, the winning probability of the replay role is low (or the winning probability of the replay role is relatively high, but (B-2) BB2RB flag (Lower than) set. In addition, the push order small winning combination (for example, 9 medals are paid out with the correct push order of 6 choices, 1 medal is paid out if the push order is incorrect but the stop operation timing is appropriate, and the stop operation timing is also with the push order incorrect answer. (If it is inappropriate, no medal is paid out, etc.), RB for activating the RB state in which the winning probability of any small winning combination is improved compared to the non-operating state, and (B) General game state (CZ state) after the end of the BB2 state. In the case of shifting to the (A) BB1 state via Is set to.

(B-2) Among the BB2RB flags, the winning probability of the replay combination is set high. Further, the push order small winning combination, the advantageous section lottery winning combination, and the like are set so as to win each with an arbitrary predetermined probability. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is different from (B-1) BB2 general, so that 9 cards will be paid out regardless of which push order the stop operation is performed (that is, incorrect answer). The control is changed (so that there is no push order). In addition, since the RB has been carried over, it will not be newly drawn, but the winning state (permitted state) continues.

(B-3) In BB2RB, the replay is set so as not to be drawn. Further, the push order small winning combination is set to win with a high probability, and the advantageous section lottery winning combination or the like is set to win with an arbitrary predetermined probability. In addition, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is different from (B-1) BB2 general, so that 9 cards will be paid out regardless of which push order the stop operation is performed (that is, incorrect answer). The control is changed (so that there is no push order). Alternatively, in (B-3) BB2RB, as the internal winning combination different from the pushing order small combination and the advantageous section lottery combination, the RB small and medium-sized combination and the advantageous section lottery combination having the same roles are won. It may be.

However, in the (B) BB2 state, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is set in (B-3) BB2RB so that the space between the (B-2) BB2RB flags is most advantageous, and (B-1) BB2. The same configuration as in general (1/6 is correct answer in push order) and 5/6 may be incorrect answer in push order). That is, in the (B) BB2 state, on the premise that the information of the stop operation is not notified, (B-1) BB2 in general and (B-3) BB2RB are set as relatively disadvantageous periods (decrease period). (B-2) The period between the BB2RB flags may be configured as an advantageous period (increase period). In this way, in (B-1) BB2 in general, the RB is won at an early stage to shift between the (B-2) BB2RB flags, and then stopped so as not to shift to the (B-3) BB2RB. If the operation is performed (or by performing such stop control), the player can play the game in the most advantageous state, so that the playability in the state advantageous to the player can be further diversified. It is possible to improve the interest of the game without making it monotonous. In addition, by not increasing the gaming state, which is an increase period more than necessary, it is possible to simplify the ball ejection design and make the gambling property appropriate.

Further, as described above, in the (B) BB2 state, when the configuration is such that the space between the (B-2) BB2RB flags is the most advantageous, the game in which the RB wins, and the combination of the symbols related to the RB thereafter. In the game in which RB can be displayed, it may be notified that the RB has won or that the combination of symbols related to the RB can be displayed. By the notification, the player can perform a stop operation so as not to display the combination of symbols related to RB. In addition, the notification may simply indicate or suggest that the combination of symbols related to RB should not be displayed.

In this way, it is specified in a special gaming state in which a special combination (for example, BB, which is a continuous operation device for a first-class special accessory) is won and is operated by displaying a combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination. Corresponds to the first gaming state, which is a non-winning state of a combination (for example, RB, which is a first-class special bonus), the second gaming state, which is the winning state (carry-over state) of the specific combination, and the specific combination. It has a third gaming state (specific gaming state) that is activated by displaying a combination of symbols, and in the second gaming state, the stop control of a predetermined combination (for example, a push order small combination) is advantageous for the player. The specifications in which the control is changed and the second game state can be maintained by the player's stop operation or internal control are, of course, other game features (game specifications) other than this embodiment and this example. It can also be applied to the bonus state (or other increase period (increase section)) described in the example. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the specifications of such a bonus state will be referred to as a "special bonus state".

In the general game state (CZ state), when the (3) BB2 start condition is satisfied, the process first shifts to (B-1) BB2 general. (B-1) In BB2 in general, when the above RB is determined as an internal winning combination, it shifts between (B-2) BB2RB flags, and during (B-2) BB2RB flags, a symbol related to RB is used. Continues until the combination of is stopped and displayed on the valid line (the permission state in which the display of the combination of symbols related to RB is permitted continues). (B-2) When the combination of symbols related to RB is stopped and displayed on the effective line between the BB2RB flags, the process shifts to (B-3) BB2RB. (B-3) In BB2RB, the end condition of the RB state (for example, 8 or less arbitrary predetermined number of winnings, or 12 or less arbitrary predetermined number of games played) is satisfied. When it is established, it shifts to (B-1) BB2 general. In addition, during the (B-2) BB2RB flag, the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination (RB) is performed, so that the combination of the symbols related to the RB is on the effective line. It may be difficult to display the stop (or not to display the stop), and as a result, it may be difficult (or not) to move into (B-3) BB2RB.

In any of the states of (B-1) BB2 in general, (B-2) BB2RB flag, and (B-3) BB2RB, the number of medals to be paid out in the (B) BB2 state became the specified number. In the case (for example, when the number of cards exceeds 150), (4) the end condition of BB2 is satisfied, and (B) the state shifts from the BB2 state to the general gaming state (CZ state).

In this example, the winning RB in (A-1) BB1 general and the winning RB in (B-1) BB2 general are not described separately, but for example, (A-1). ) In BB1 general, the winning RB is set to "RB1" (the corresponding combination of symbols is "combination of symbols related to RB1", the corresponding RB state (A-3) is "RB1 state"), and (B-1). In BB2 in general, the winning RB is set to "RB2" (the corresponding combination of symbols is "combination of symbols related to RB2", the corresponding RB state (B-3) is "RB2 state"), and different RB combinations can be won. By configuring the above, the basic configuration of the push order small combination is the same as that of (A-1) BB1 general in the middle of the (A-2) BB1RB flag (“RB1 permission state”). (B-2) In the middle of the BB2RB flags (“RB2 permission state”), the basic configuration of the push order small combination may be configured to be different from that of (B-1) BB2 general.

During (B-2) BB2RB flags and (B-3) BB2RB, 9 cards are paid out regardless of which push order is used in the game winning the push order small winning combination. As a result of the above, the period is an increase period in which the game value increases (or at least does not decrease). On the other hand, in (B-1) BB2 in general, if the stop operation is performed in the push order that is the correct answer in the game that wins the push order small winning combination, 9 cards are paid out, but the push that is not the correct answer is made. If the stop operations are performed in order, nine cards will not be paid out, and as a result, the period will be a reduction period in which the game value will decrease. However, since the transition is made from (B-1) BB2 in general to (B-2) between the BB2RB flags with the winning of RB, (B) when looking at the entire BB2 state, the period is an increase period in which the game value increases. It is positioned as.

It should be noted that (B) the method of setting the entire BB2 state as a period (increase period) advantageous to the player is not limited to the above-mentioned method. For example, it is assumed that the RB state is always controlled from (3) the BB2 start condition is satisfied to (4) the BB2 end condition is satisfied, and in the RB state, the stop operation is performed in any pressing order. Even so, the RB small and medium-sized winning combination in which 9 (or more than 15) payouts occur may be configured to win with an extremely high probability. Alternatively, without changing the control of the basic configuration of the push order small combination, the push order is always controlled in an advantageous section from (3) the BB2 start condition is satisfied to (4) the BB2 end condition is satisfied. When a small winning combination is won, the increase period may be set by notifying the push order of the correct answer at least with a predetermined probability that the expected value of grant is positive.

In any of the states of (B-1) BB2 in general, (B-2) BB2RB flag, and (B-3) BB2RB, if the winning combination of the advantageous section lottery is won, (4) BB2 end condition. The right to win BB1 in the general gaming state (CZ state) in which is established and transferred, and (1) the right to set the BB1 state in which the BB1 start condition is established and transferred (A) the BB1 state as an advantageous section (for example, the number of sets, stock, etc.) ) Is given or not. In this case, with one win, for example, the right to set an advantageous section between 30 games is granted. The timing and period for which the grant of the right is decided are not limited to those described above. For example, depending on not only the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning the advantageous section lottery, but also the result of the winning / failing lottery when winning another internal winning combination, the result of the winning / failing lottery not based on the internal winning combination, etc. The grant of the right may be decided. Further, when the grant of the right is decided, the duration of the advantageous section may be separately decided by lottery or the like. Further, at an arbitrary timing (for example, when BB2 wins or when BB2 ends) between (3) when the BB2 start condition is satisfied and (4) when the BB2 end condition is satisfied, the BB1 state It may be possible to decide whether or not to grant the right to make the entire period (or a part of the period) advantageous.

The (C) BB3 state is composed of (C-1) BB3 in general, (C-2) BB3RB flags, and (C-3) BB3RB. If BB2 is replaced with BB3, the start conditions of (C-1) BB3 in general, (C-2) BB3RB flags, (C-3) BB3RB, and (5) BB3 can be changed to (B-). 1) BB2 in general, (B-2) between BB2RB flags, (B-3) in BB2RB, and (3) BB2 start conditions are the same, so the description here will be omitted. Further, (6) the end condition of BB2 is satisfied when (C) the number of medals to be paid out in the BB3 state reaches a specified number (for example, when it exceeds 60 medals).

Based on this premise, the flow of the game in this example will be described. In this example, since the (A) BB1 state, which is a non-advantageous section, is positioned as during a normal game that is not advantageous to the player, the player usually starts the game from the (A) BB1 state, which is a non-advantageous section. ..

In the (A) BB1 state, there is no transition to another gaming state until the end condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied. Here, if (A) the BB1 state is an advantageous section, the section functions as an increase period, so that not only the game value can be increased, but also the opportunity to receive the payout increases, so that the section can be used at an early stage (A). 2) It is possible to satisfy the end condition of BB1 (that is, the game period until the transition to the general game state (CZ state) can be shortened). On the other hand, (A) if the BB1 state is a non-advantageous section, the section functions as a decrease period, so that the game value decreases, and the opportunity to receive the payout does not increase, so that (2) It is not possible to satisfy the end condition of BB1 (that is, the game period until the transition to the general game state (CZ state) cannot be shortened).

In the (A) BB1 state, when the end condition of (2) BB1 is satisfied, the state shifts to the general game state (CZ state). In the general gaming state (CZ state), if BB2 or BB3 can be won before winning BB1, the general gaming state (CZ state) → (B) BB2 state (or (C) BB3 state) → general gaming state It is configured as a state (a series of increasing sections) in which a bonus state advantageous to the player can be repeatedly operated, such as (CZ state) → (B) BB2 state (or (C) BB3 state) ... However, if the BB1 is won before the BB2 or BB3 is won, it becomes impossible to repeatedly operate the bonus state that is advantageous to the player, and the series of increase sections ends. In order to shift to a series of increasing sections again, it is necessary to end the (A) BB1 state, which is a decreasing period unless it becomes an advantageous section.

That is, in the (A) BB1 state, the player desires to shift to the advantageous section or continue the advantageous section, and if the player actually shifts to the advantageous section or continues the advantageous section, the game value is increased. It is possible to shorten the game period until the state shifts to the general game state (CZ state). Further, in the general gaming state (CZ state), if it is desired to win BB2 or BB3 before winning BB1, and if it is possible to actually win BB2 or BB3, (B) BB2 state or (C) ) The game value can be increased in the BB3 state. The same applies when these gaming states are completed and the game returns to the general gaming state (CZ state). In the case of the (B) BB2 state or the (C) BB3 state, it is desired that the right to make the (A) BB1 state an advantageous section is granted. In this example, for example, in the total probability of winning the bonus combination (BB1 to BB3), the winning probability of BB1 is about 50%, the winning probability of BB2 is about 25%, and the winning probability of BB3 is about 25%. Therefore, BB2 or BB3 does not always continue to win in the general gaming state (CZ state). However, if (A) the right to make the BB1 state an advantageous section is granted in advance, even if the BB1 is won before winning the BB2 or BB3, if the (A) BB1 state is in the increasing period, The game value is increased, and the game can be returned to the general game state (CZ state) at an early stage. In this example, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by such playability.

According to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal gaming state (general gaming state (CZ state)), when the second special combination (BB2 or BB3) is won before the first special combination (BB1) is won, the first 2 The special gaming state ((B) BB2 state or (C) BB3 state) is shifted, and the second special gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if the first special role is won before the second special role is won, the state shifts to the first special game state ((A) BB1 state), and the stop operation is performed in the first special game state. When the operation information regarding the above is not notified (in the case of a non-advantageous section), the first special gaming state functions as a reduction period in which the gaming value decreases.

Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the player can continue the advantageous gaming period by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state without shifting to the first special gaming state, but the first special When the game state is changed, the player cannot continue the advantageous game period unless the first special game state is terminated and the game state is changed to the normal game state.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, when a specific notification condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to an advantageous section, or when it is determined that the right to be an advantageous section is granted. In the first special game state, the operation information related to the stop operation in which a predetermined number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given when a predetermined combination (pushing order small combination) is won is notified. Become. Since the first special game state ends when a specified number (for example, more than 285 pieces) of game value is given, such information is notified to end the first special game state. You can advance the time. That is, depending on whether or not the operation information related to the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state, the period until the normal gaming state in which the transition to the second special gaming state can be achieved can be changed. Therefore, by making the period until the transition to the advantageous state variable, the playability can be made rich in variety.

In the gaming machine of this example, the period in which the operation information related to the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state may also function as an increase period. In this way, the interest of the game can be maintained even during the period until the state of transition to the advantageous state is reached.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, in the first special gaming state, it is possible to further shift to the first specific permission state (during the (A-2) BB1RB flag), and in the second special game state, the second specific permission is further permitted. It is possible to shift to the state (between (B-2) BB2RB flags or (C-2) between BB3RB flags), and in the first special game state, the stop operation is performed regardless of whether or not it is the first specific permission state. The period in which the operation information related to the game is not notified may be made to function as a decreasing period, and in the second special gaming state, the period in which the second specific permission state is not notified may be made to function as an increasing period. In this way, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (Part 3)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 95, another example (No. 3) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 95 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 3) of the game playability (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 95, in this example, there are a gaming state of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state. The (A) RT0 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is lower than that of the (C) RT1 state, and it is possible to shift to either the (B) BB state or the (C) RT1 state. (A) In the RT0 state, when it is not controlled in the advantageous section, (A-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and when it is controlled in the advantageous section. Is an increasing period in which (A-2) becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the BB (bonus combination) is won, the BB is controlled between the BB flags (BB permission state) in which the BB is carried over until the combination of symbols related to the BB is stopped and displayed on the valid line. Between the BB flags, even if the bell spill, which will be described later, is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the state does not shift to the (C) RT1 state. In this example, the BB is duplicated with one of the small winning combinations (for example, a so-called rare winning combination with a relatively low winning probability, which may be a replay winning combination) so as not to win alone. In addition, in the present embodiment, the stop control for preferentially establishing the replay combination or the small combination over the bonus combination is performed, so that the combination of the symbols related to the BB is displayed in the game that wins the BB. BB will be carried over to the next game or later. Then, the combination of symbols related to BB is a stop operation in a game in which the internal lottery result is "missing" between the BB flags (that is, a game in which no other replay combination or small combination is won). It is possible to display (win a prize) when the timing is appropriate. In this example, (A) the probability of "loss" in the RT0 state is defined as about "1/12". However, as long as "loss" can occur, this "loss" probability can be any value. In addition, there may be a case where the BB wins alone, and in this case, it is assumed that the combination of the symbols related to the BB can be displayed in the game in which the BB wins.

(A) In the game where the BB flags are between in the RT0 state and the internal lottery result is "missing", when the combination of the symbols related to BB is displayed, (1) the BB start condition is satisfied, and (A) It shifts from the RT0 state to the (B) BB state. The (B) BB state is a gaming state that does not shift to the (C) RT1 state, and is a gaming state that is an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In addition, (B) the method of setting the BB state as the increase period is various methods described in this embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example, such as the above-mentioned "special bonus state". Can be adopted. (B) In the BB state, when a specified number of game values (for example, more than 140 cards) are given, the game value is given an upper limit, (2) the BB end condition is satisfied, and (B) from the BB state to (A). ) Shift to RT0 state.

(A) In the RT0 state, if (3) the bell spill is stopped and displayed on the valid line before the BB flag is reached (that is, between the BB non-flags), the (C) RT1 state is set. Transition. The bell spill is, for example, a combination of the same symbols as the "R_RT1 transition" in the present embodiment, and in the game in which the push order small winning combination is won, the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate. It is a combination of symbols displayed in the case. Therefore, if the (A) RT0 state is the (A-2) advantageous section, the correct push order is notified, and therefore, it is not displayed as long as the stop operation is performed according to the notification. A-1) In the normal case (non-advantageous section), the correct push order is not notified, so the possibility of being displayed is high. In this example, for example, if the winning probability of BB is about 1/20 (3276/65536), the total winning probability of the push order small winning combination is about 1/3 (21845/65536), which is higher than that. It should be designed to. As for the push order small combination, various specifications described in this embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted. For example, in the push order (for example, 6 choices). If the answer is correct, 9 cards will be paid out and the bell spills will not be displayed. If the answer is not correct in the pressing order, 1 sheet will be paid out if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. If the timing is not appropriate, 0 cards will be paid out, and a specification in which bell spills are displayed can be adopted.

The (C) RT1 state is a gaming state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that of the (A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state does not occur. Even in the (C) RT1 state, as in the (A) RT0 state, if it is not controlled in the advantageous section, it becomes (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases. If it is controlled to an advantageous section, (C-2) it becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

Even in the (C) RT1 state, when the BB (bonus combination) is won, the control is performed between the BB flags (BB permission state) as in the (A) RT0 state. However, in the (C) RT1 state, the winning probability of the replay role is increased by the amount of the "loss" probability "1/12" in the (A) RT0 state, and the "loss" probability is "0". (That is, so that "loss" does not occur). Therefore, even if it is between the BB flags, there is no case where the combination of symbols related to BB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state. However, even if the "loss" occurs with an extremely low probability (for example, 1/8192) and the combination of symbols related to the BB can be displayed in the game in which the "loss" occurs between the BB flags. It is good (that is, the (C) RT1 state may be configured as a state in which it is more difficult to display the combination of symbols related to the BB than the (A) RT0 state).

If "loss" can be generated even in the (C) RT1 state, and if the combination of symbols related to BB cannot be displayed in the unit game in which the "loss" occurs, the state is changed to (B) BB. Since the transition cannot be made and the (C) RT1 state continues after the next game, if the stop operation is performed in a manner in which the combination of symbols related to BB cannot be displayed in the unit game in which the "loss" occurs, the game is played. The loss of the person becomes extremely large. Therefore, in order to suppress the occurrence of such a loss, in the unit game in which "loss" occurs in the (C) RT1 state, the combination of symbols related to BB is used between the start operation and the effective stop operation. An effect that suggests that the display is allowed, an effect that notifies that the combination of symbols related to BB should be aimed, a freeze effect that delays the start of rotation of each reel after the start operation, and the time required for the stop operation to be effective. It is desirable to make it possible to execute one or more effects such as a stop operation invalidation effect that takes a longer time than usual so that the player can easily display the combination of symbols related to the BB.

When (4) a specified number of games (for example, 500 games) are digested in the (C) RT1 state, the state shifts from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state. That is, when the (C) RT1 state ends and the BB flags are between, the combination of symbols related to BB can be displayed when "loss" occurs. Even when the state shifts from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state, there is a possibility that the state may fall to the (C) RT1 state again when the BB non-flag is not set. Therefore, in such a case, (A) the advantageous section is continued until the BB flag is reached in the RT0 state (that is, until the BB is won), and the player is relieved. You may do so.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is set, and when the normal game state ((A) RT0 state), the combination of special symbols (BB) (Combination of symbols related to) can be displayed to shift to the special gaming state ((B) BB state), while the specific gaming state ends in the specific gaming state ((C) RT1 state). Until then, it is not possible to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. In addition, in the specific game state, when a specific combination (small combination of push order) is won in a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a specific symbol is not performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the correct answer is in the push order). Transition based on the combination of (bell spills) displayed. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal gaming state and the specific period (advantageous section) in the specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. If this is done, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state is performed without shifting to the specific gaming state. Not only is it possible to repeat (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value given when a specific role is won is increased. In addition, when the operation information related to a specific mode is notified in the specific game state, it is not possible to shift to the special game state until the specific game state is completed, but when the specific combination is won. The game value given to is increased. In addition, even if the operation information regarding a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during a specific period, the transition to the special gaming state may be repeated without shifting to the specific gaming state. ..

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, whether it is in a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state, whether it is a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or whether it is specified in the specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the above-described aspect is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine of this example, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. By doing so, since the game value may increase even in the specific game state, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even in the specific game state in which the special game state does not occur.

(Modified example of this example)
In this example, it has a gaming state of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state, and in (A) RT0 state, BB as a special role is a push order small combination as a specific role. If it wins earlier than that, it shifts to the (B) BB state without shifting to the (C) RT1 state, and by making it possible to repeat such a transition, a series of increase sections is created. It was possible to do. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, when the push order small combination as a specific combination is won before the BB as a special combination, if the player's stop operation is appropriate, the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state. However, if the player's stop operation is not appropriate, (C) the state shifts to the RT1 state, and a series of increasing sections is terminated. Then, in the (C) RT1 state, the transition to the (A) RT0 state is assumed unless a certain transition condition (in this example, digestion of a specified number of games) is satisfied. However, the method of starting, continuing, and ending such a series of increasing sections is considered to have room for further deformation, and will be described below.

In the modified example, it is the same as this example in that it has a gaming state of (A) RT0 state, (B) BB state, and (C) RT1 state, but it relates to MB (type 2 special character) as a specific combination. When the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the effective line by using the accessory continuous operation device), the state shifts to (D) MB state. The winning probability of BB is set to about 1/10 (6553/65536), and the winning probability of MB is also set to about the same. MB is a bonus role, and once it is won, it shall be carried over until the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed (between MB flags, MB permitted state). The MB always wins in duplicate with any special small role group among a plurality of special small role groups (for example, special small role groups 1 to 3), and does not win alone.

(A) In the RT0 state, when MB + special small winning combination group 1 wins more than once, the stop operation is a predetermined correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is in the second range below and the third third below. If it is performed in a mode that is a first range different from the range, or a mode in which a stop operation is performed at the left first stop, etc.), the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line, and ( D) Shift to the MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predefined correct mode, the combination of symbols related to MB is not displayed as a stop on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small winning combination (specific). (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB + special small winning combination group 2 wins in duplicate, the stop operation is a predetermined correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is in the above first range and the following third range. If it is performed in a mode that is a second range different from the range, or a mode in which the stop operation is performed at the middle first stop, etc.), the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line, and ( D) Shift to the MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predefined correct mode, the combination of symbols related to MB is not displayed as a stop on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small winning combination (specific). (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags.

(A) In the RT0 state, when the MB + special small winning combination group 3 wins in duplicate, the stop operation is a predetermined correct answer mode (for example, the timing of the stop operation for the reel 3L is in the first range and the second. If it is performed in a mode that is a third range different from the range, or in a mode in which the stop operation is performed at the first right stop, the combination of symbols related to MB is stopped and displayed on the valid line, and ( D) Shift to the MB state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in a predefined correct mode, the combination of symbols related to MB is not displayed as a stop on the valid line, and the combination of symbols related to any special small winning combination (specific). (Combination of symbols) is stopped and displayed on the valid line, for example, one medal is paid out, and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags.

In this modified example, when a plurality of MBs (for example, MB1, MB2, and MB3) are used as specific combinations and the combination of symbols related to any of the MBs is stopped and displayed on the effective line (D). It may be the one that shifts to the MB state. In this case, the total winning probability of MB may be set to be about the same as the winning probability of BB. In addition, MB1, MB2, and MB3 may always win the prize in duplicate with the special small role group, and may not win by themselves. Then, when the MB1 + special small winning combination wins in duplicate, the same control as in the MB + special small winning combination group 1 is performed, and when the MB2 + special small winning combination group wins in duplicate, the same as in the MB + special small winning combination group 2. Is controlled, and when the MB3 + special small winning combination wins in duplicate, the same control as in the MB + special small winning combination group 3 may be performed.

That is, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, if the mode of the stop operation is appropriate in the game winning the MB (for example, when the above three choices are answered correctly), the (D) MB state. Move to. (D) The MB state is, for example, a bonus state in which two medals are always paid out with a two-card bet, and when a specified number (more than two) of game value is given, the upper limit of the game value is given. Then, the MB end condition is satisfied, and the state shifts from the (D) MB state to the (A) RT0 state. Here, the (D) MB state itself is not an increase period in which the game value increases (however, it is not a decrease period but a non-increase / decrease period), but after the end, it shifts to the (A) RT0 state, so that (D) MB The transition to the state is positioned as a transition to the series of increase sections described above, or a continuation of the series of increase sections.

On the other hand, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, if the mode of the stop operation is not appropriate in the game winning the MB (for example, when the above three choices are not answered correctly), (C) It shifts to the RT1 state. In this modification, the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags does not end until the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Then, (C) the probability of "loss" in the RT1 state is set to about "1/300". That is, in order to end the (C) RT1 state and shift to the (A) RT0 state, the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed in the game in which the "loss" occurs in the (C) RT1 state (D). ) It is necessary to shift to the MB state and (D) digest the game in the MB state. It should be noted that (C) it may be possible to display the combination of symbols related to MB even when the above-mentioned three choices are correctly answered when the above-mentioned special small combination group is won in the RT1 state.

(Flow of the game of the modified example of this example)
In this modification, since the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags is positioned as during a normal game that is not advantageous to the player, the player usually starts the game from the (C) RT1 state between the MB flags. do.

In the (C) RT1 state, there is no transition to the (A) RT0 state without the transition to the (D) MB state. The player waits for the "loss" to occur before playing the game. If the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the game in which "loss" occurs, the state shifts to (D) MB state, and after the end of (D) MB state, the state shifts to (A) RT0 state.

(A) In the RT0 state, when a bonus combination is won, the probability that the bonus combination is BB is 1/2 (50%), and the probability that the bonus combination is MB is also 1/2 (50%). When the transition from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state and the first winning bonus combination is BB, a series of increase sections is started. After winning the BB, there is no winning in the MB (that is, without shifting to the (C) RT1 state), and when the combination of symbols related to the BB is displayed, (B) shifts to the BB state and (B) ) The game value can be increased in the BB state. The (B) BB state is configured as, for example, the above-mentioned "special bonus state". When (B) the BB state ends, it returns to the (A) RT0 state again, and if the BB can be won before winning the MB again with a probability of 50%, a series of increase sections will continue. That is, the series of increase sections are game sections that can be looped (with a loop rate of 50%) with a probability of 50%. Note that this loop rate is an example, and can be set to an arbitrary value by appropriately changing the lottery value (winning probability) of the bonus combination.

In the (A) RT0 state, which is a series of increasing sections, if the MB is won before the BB is won, and if the combination of symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the game that is won in the MB, ( D) It is possible to return to the (A) RT0 state again through the transition to the MB state. In this case as well, a series of increasing sections continues. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols related to the MB cannot be displayed in the game won by the MB, the state shifts to (C) RT1 state. In this case, a series of increasing sections ends.

Further, when the transition from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state and the first winning bonus combination is MB, a series of increase sections is not started. However, as described above, if the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the game that wins the MB, it may return to the (A) RT0 state again through the transition to the (D) MB state. can. In this case, it may be possible to start a series of increasing sections in the returned (A) RT0 state. On the other hand, if the combination of symbols related to the MB cannot be displayed in the game won by the MB, the state shifts to (C) RT1 state. In this case, it may not be possible to start a series of increasing intervals. In the above explanation, the start of a series of increase sections is when the bonus combination that is first won after shifting from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state is BB, but the (C) RT1 state The transition from (A) RT0 state to (A) RT0 state may be the start of a series of increase sections, or the first winning bonus combination from (C) RT1 state to (A) RT0 state is BB. (B) When the combination of symbols according to the above is displayed and the state shifts to the BB state, the start of a series of increase sections may be set.

(The first aspect of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, the first aspect of the advantageous section specification when the game property (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted will be described. The first aspect is a specification in which an advantageous section is not provided.

As described above, in the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, (A) RT0 state → (B) BB state → (A) RT0 state → (B) BB state ... Since a series of increasing sections can be created by repeating the A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state, even if the player is not notified of the stop operation information, the game has a high degree of fun. It is possible to do. Therefore, as in this first aspect, it is possible not to provide an advantageous section.

Also in this first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be given, and the RB is won in the (B) BB state. When this happens, a notice or suggestion to that effect can be made. On the other hand, when the MB is won in the (A) RT0 state and when the combination of the symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state, at least the combination of the symbols related to the MB is displayed. It is desirable not to make such announcements or suggestions. Here, "notification or suggestion that a game method in which a combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" means, for example, directly announcing or suggesting that a combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed. It is not limited to those that do, but include those that announce or suggest that the above-mentioned special small role group has won, or that the combination of symbols related to the winning special small role group has been won. This is because if the probability that the (C) RT1 state is substantially terminated by such a notification or suggestion is increased, the gambling property of the game may become excessively high. However, since the (C) RT1 state is not included in the series of increase sections at least, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state, "the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. An announcement or suggestion that the game method may be inferred may be made.

(Second aspect of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, a second aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game property (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. The second aspect is the specification that the transition to the advantageous section is possible only in the (B) BB state.

As described above, in the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, the game value given can be changed according to the mode of the player's stop operation, such as the push order small combination in the (B) BB state. Since the internal winning combination can be determined, (B) if the player is notified of the stop operation information with the BB state as an advantageous section, the expected value of the game value given during the (B) BB state can be determined. It can be maximized, which not only improves the interest of the player, but also contributes to ensuring the fairness of the game and making it easier to manage the payout rate. Therefore, as in this second aspect, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section only during the (B) BB state. In this case, the advantageous section may be started when the (B) BB state is started, and the advantageous section may be ended when the (B) BB state is finished.

In this second aspect as well, as in the first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. On the other hand, when the MB is won in the (A) RT0 state and when the combination of the symbols related to the MB can be displayed in the (C) RT1 state, at least the combination of the symbols related to the MB is similar to the first aspect. It is desirable not to make any announcement or suggestion that the game method in which is displayed is presumed.

(Third aspect of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, a third aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. The third aspect is a specification capable of shifting to an advantageous section in the (A) RT0 state and the (C) RT1 state.

This third aspect is basically the same as that described in this example. In the (A) RT0 state, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, (A-1) normal (non) Shift from (advantageous section) to (A-2) advantageous section, and when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, shift from (A-2) advantageous section to (A-1) normal (non-advantageous section). Further, in the (C) RT1 state, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) is shifted to (C-2) advantageous section, and the advantageous section is changed. When the end condition is satisfied, the transition from (C-2) advantageous section to (C-1) normal (non-advantageous section) is performed.

However, in this example, when the (A-2) advantageous section is reached in the (A) RT0 state, the push order that is the correct answer for the push order small winning combination is notified, so that the (C) RT1 is substantially. Information that can avoid the transition to the state is also notified, but in this third aspect, the information that can avoid the transition to the (C) RT1 state is not notified. That is, in the (A-2) advantageous section, when the push order small combination is won, the correct push order is notified, so that (A-1) more than the normal (non-advantageous section). Although the game value is given, when the MB is won, "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed is guessed" is not made, and the player makes the MB by himself / herself. If the combination of symbols can be displayed, (A) the RT0 state is maintained, but if the player cannot display the combination of symbols related to MB by himself / herself, (C). It is designed to shift to the RT1 state.

However, for example, when (A) RT0 state becomes (A-2) advantageous section and 50 games are given as the duration of the advantageous section, 10 games later (that is, the duration of the advantageous section remains 40 games). If the MB is won and the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed and the state shifts to the (C) RT1 state, the duration may be 40 games (C-2) to shift to the advantageous section. .. That is, the duration of the given advantageous section may be inherited from the (A) RT0 state to the (C) RT1 state, or from the (C) RT1 state to the (A) RT0 state (note that in the latter case). The game period in the (D) MB state may or may not be included in the advantageous section).

Further, since the (A) RT0 state is a game period included in the series of increase sections, the (A) RT0 state does not provide the (A-2) advantageous section, and the game is not included in the series of increase sections. It is a period, and the (C-2) advantageous section may be provided only in the (C) RT1 state, which is relatively disadvantageous to the player. That is, in this third aspect, it is advantageous for the purpose of relieving the player who plays the game during the game period ((C) RT1 state), which is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and preventing the deterioration of the interest of the game. A section ((C-2) advantageous section) may be provided.

In this third aspect as well, as in the first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. However, as in this third aspect, when the advantageous section is positioned as a game section that facilitates winning of the internal winning combination (for example, small combination) related to the winning, the BB is set in the (A) RT0 state. When there is a mode of stop operation (push order or timing of stop operation) that facilitates the display of the combination of symbols related to BB when winning, the stop operation is performed based on the advantageous section. Although it is not desirable that the mode is directly notified, such notification may be performed.

In this modification, the second aspect and the third aspect are described as different aspects, but an advantageous section aspect in which the second aspect and the third aspect are combined is adopted. You can also do it. In this case, if the (A) RT0 state that hits the BB is the (A-2) advantageous section, the stop operation information is notified even in the (B) BB state, and (A-1) the normal (non-advantageous section). ), The stop operation information may not be notified even in the (B) BB state. Further, in this case, in the (A-2) BB state shifted from the advantageous section, the duration of the advantageous section is sequentially updated as the game progresses (that is, the duration of the given advantageous section is changed. It may be set to decrease), or the duration of the advantageous section may not be updated (that is, the duration of the granted advantageous section may not decrease).

(Fourth aspect of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, a fourth aspect of the advantageous section specification will be described when the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted. The fourth aspect is the specification that enables the transition to the advantageous section in the (A) RT0 state.

In this fourth aspect, contrary to the third aspect described above, in the case of (A) RT0 state and (A-2) advantageous section, when the MB is won, "the combination of symbols related to MB is By making a notification or suggestion that the displayed game method can be guessed, (C) information that can avoid the transition to the RT1 state is notified, but when the push order small role is won, the answer is correct. The push order is not notified. Further, in the case of (C) RT1 state and (C-2) advantageous section, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "a game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed. By making such a notification or suggestion, (A) information that enables the transition to the RT0 state is notified, but when the push order small combination is won, the correct push order is not notified. It is a thing.

In this fourth aspect, for example, the advantageous section may be provided with only the (A-2) advantageous section and not the (C-2) advantageous section. That is, the advantageous section is configured to have a function for continuing a series of increasing sections ((A) continuing the RT0 state) and (C) not having a function for ending the RT1 state. You may.

Further, in the fourth aspect, the advantageous section is managed by the number of times (the number of times of navigation) that "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" is performed. It is preferable to do so. For example, (C) the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed in the RT1 state, (D) shifts to the MB state, (D) the MB state ends, and (A) shifts to the RT0 state. At an arbitrary timing, it is decided whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and if it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the number of navigations to be given is determined. Then, in the shifted (A) RT0 state ((A-2) advantageous section), for the determined number of navigations, "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed". Should be done. However, in the (A) RT0 state, for example, the BB is won, the combination of the symbols related to the BB is displayed, the state shifts to the (B) BB state, the (B) BB state ends, and the (A) RT0 state ends. At any timing of the transition, it is decided whether or not to shift (extend) to the advantageous section, and if it is decided to shift (extend) to the advantageous section, the number of navigations to be given is determined. You may. Although the management based on the number of navigations has been described as preferable, it does not prevent the adoption of other management methods (for example, management based on the number of games).

In this fourth aspect as well, as in the first aspect, for example, when the BB is won in the (A) RT0 state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. (B) When the RB is won in the BB state, a notification or suggestion to that effect can be made. However, as in this fourth aspect, when the advantageous section is positioned as a game section that facilitates the continuation of a series of increasing sections, (A) when the BB is won in the RT0 state, the BB is involved. When there is a mode of stop operation (pushing order or timing of stop operation) that facilitates the display of a combination of symbols, the mode of the stop operation is directly notified based on the advantageous section. Although it is not desirable, such notification may be performed.

In this modification, the above-mentioned third aspect and the above-mentioned fourth aspect are described as different aspects, but the aspect of the advantageous section which combines the above-mentioned third aspect and the above-mentioned fourth aspect is adopted. You can also do it. In this case, in the case of (A-2) advantageous section, when the push order small combination is won, the correct push order is notified, so that (A-1) more than normal (non-advantageous section). When the game value is given and the MB is won, the transition to the (C) RT1 state is avoided by making a "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to the MB is displayed is guessed". It suffices to be notified of possible information. In addition, in the case of (C-2) advantageous section, when the push order small winning combination is won, the correct push order is notified, so that (C-1) more games than normal (non-advantageous section). When the value is given and the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "notification or suggestion that the game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed" is performed, so that (A) RT0 Information that enables the transition to the state may be notified. As described above, even in the (C-2) advantageous section, when the combination of symbols related to MB can be displayed, "a game method in which the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed is presumed. No announcement or suggestion may be made.

(Advantageous section limiter in the modified example of this example)
Subsequently, the game property (game specification) of the modified example of this example described so far is adopted, and as the advantageous section specification, at least the third aspect or the fourth aspect is included. The limit processing of the advantageous section when is adopted will be described.

In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the gambling property from becoming excessively high due to the advantageous section continuing for too long, it is possible to perform the limit processing described above or described later. For example, if the "number of games limiter" is used, the advantageous section continues for "1500 games", and if the "number of games limiter" is used, if "2400" medals are won in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is still in the advantageous section. Even if the number of games, the number of sets, the number of stocks, the number of navigations, the number of differences, etc. remain, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by executing the limit process and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section.

However, according to the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, a series of increasing sections may continue even after the advantageous section ends due to the execution of such limit processing. That is, there is a problem that the significance of setting a certain restriction on the continuation of the advantageous section that is advantageous to the player may be lost due to the series of increasing sections. Therefore, in order to provide a gaming machine capable of limiting the advantageous section in consideration of the provision of a series of increasing sections, it is desirable to take the following measures.

For example, in the game playability (game specification) of the modified example of this example, the advantageous section is started at the same time as the series of increase sections is started, or before the series of increase sections are started. As a specific example, when it is determined that a series of increasing sections starts when the BB is hit in the (A) RT0 state, it is the same as when the BB is hit in the (A) RT0 state, or (A). The advantageous section is started when the state shifts to the RT0 state. Further, as another specific example, when it is determined that a series of increase sections start when the transition to the (A) RT0 state occurs, the same time as the transition to the (A) RT0 state, or the (D) MB state Start an advantageous section when shifting to. The start of the advantageous section here means the start of the advantageous section in terms of limit processing (control), and the actual duration of the advantageous section (number of games, number of sets, stock, etc.) at the start time is not necessarily the same. It does not mean that the number of navigations, the number of differences, etc.) is given. Therefore, regarding the duration of the advantageous section, for example, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example are adopted, and the duration is given (or extended) in each game state. It may be decided whether or not the item is correct or not, and it may be granted (or extended) according to the result of the decision. However, even at the time of the start, it may be decided whether or not to grant (or extend) the duration of the advantageous section.

Here, in the case of the "game number limiter", the upper limit of the number of games is, for example, "1500 games", but from this "1500", a bonus state (for example, (B) BB state. If there is a bonus state of, the expected number of games (average number of games) of the longest number of games (the one that may continue for the longest number of games) is converted to the threshold according to the loop rate (the loop rate is converted to the number of games). The value multiplied by (a variable determined as the multiplication rate) is subtracted, and the value is calculated as the number of designated stop games (or specified in advance). For example, in the modified example of this example, when the expected number of games in the bonus state is "20 games" and the threshold value corresponding to the loop rate of 50% is "6", the number of instruction stop games is "1500 games-20 games". × 6 = 1380 games ”.

Here, in the case of the "number limiter", the upper limit of the number of acquired sheets is, for example, "2400 sheets", but from this "2400", a bonus state (for example, (B) BB state. If there is a bonus state, the expected number of medals (the one that may be awarded the most medals) is converted to the threshold value according to the loop rate (the loop rate is converted to the number of medals won). The value obtained by multiplying the value (variable determined as the multiplication rate) is subtracted, and the value is calculated as the number of instructed stop acquisitions (or specified in advance). For example, in the modified example of this example, when the expected acquisition number of bonus states is "120" and the threshold value corresponding to the loop rate of 50% is "6", the instruction stop acquisition number is "2400-120". × 6 = 1680 sheets ”.

Then, when the limit processing is configured to be performed by the "game number limiter", when the advantageous section started at the above start time continues as it is and the number of games reaches the "1380 game" (number of instructed stop games). If the duration of the advantageous section remains (in terms of control), the advantageous section will continue, but in the subsequent games, the stop operation information will not be notified (that is, the instruction function will stop). ).

In addition, when the limit processing is configured to be performed by the "number limiter", when the advantageous section started at the above start time continues as it is and the acquired number reaches "1680 sheets" (instructed stop acquired number). If the duration of the advantageous section remains (in terms of control), the advantageous section will continue, but in the subsequent games, the stop operation information will not be notified (that is, the instruction function will stop). ..

In addition, it is a process after the instruction function is stopped based on the number of instruction stop games or the number of instruction stop acquisitions, but if a series of increase sections is completed before the limit process is executed, At the same time, or after the end, the advantageous section is terminated. As a specific example, when it is determined that a series of increasing sections wins the MB in the (A) RT0 state and ends when the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed and the transition to the (C) RT1 state is performed. , (C) The advantageous section is terminated at the same time as the transition to the RT1 state, or when the next game of the game transitioned to the (C) RT1 state is started. In addition, in the (A) RT0 state and the (B) BB state, since a series of increasing sections may still continue, it is at least (C) RT1 that the process of terminating the (controllably) advantageous section is performed. It is desirable to be in the state. However, this does not apply when the advantageous section is terminated by executing the limit processing. That is, in the (A) RT0 state and (B) BB state, when "1500 games" is reached in the case of "game number limiter", and when "2400 cards" is reached in the case of "number limiter". It may be possible to end the advantageous section by executing the limit process.

It should be noted that when the advantageous section continuously reaches the number of designated stop games or the number of designated stop acquisitions, the instruction function is stopped, which is substantially synonymous with the end of the advantageous section. Therefore, the above-mentioned "1500 games" of the "game number limiter" and "2400 cards" of the "number of number limiter" are defined as the regulation values of the gaming machines that can be installed in the game store, and are modified examples of this example. In the case of a gaming machine equipped with a series of increasing sections such as the game playability (game specifications) of, the number of instruction stop games or the number of instruction stop acquisitions is calculated from the regulation value as described above, and the calculated instruction stop is calculated. The value of the number of games and the number of times the instruction is stopped may be set in advance as the value of the "number of games limiter" or the "number of number limiter" so that the limit process is executed. That is, when there is a possibility that the increase period in which the game value increases due to the installation of a series of increase sections greatly exceeds the planned ball ejection design or the range of the predetermined regulation value, this protrusion Any method can be adopted as long as it is possible to regulate the advantageous section (advanced), taking into account the part that will be lost.

Further, the technical concept regarding the game playability (game specification) described in the modified example of this example, the first to fourth aspects of the advantageous section specification in the modified example of this example, and the advantageous section limiter in the modified example of this example are described in the present invention. The game machine according to the modified example of the example is described as an example, and is not applied only to the game machine related to the modified example of this example. That is, it can be appropriately modified and applied to the gaming machines described in the present embodiment, this example, and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (4)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 96, another example (No. 4) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 96 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 4) of the game playability (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 96, in this example, (A) RT0 state, (B) RT1 state non-flag, (C) RT1 state MB flag, (D) RT2 state BB flag, (E) BB state, And (F) there is a gaming state in the MB state. The (A) RT0 state and the (E) BB state are positioned as the above-mentioned series of increasing sections.

In the (A) RT0 state, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least lower than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state, (B) between the RT1 state non-flags, (D) between the RT2 state BB flags, and ( F) It is a gaming state that can shift to the MB state. It should be noted that BB, MB, push order small role, bell spilled eyes, etc. are the same as those described in other examples (3) (including modified examples) of game playability (game specifications), so here. The description in is omitted. However, in this example, the MB wins in duplicate with any of the small wins or replay wins (for example, the rare win mentioned above) so as not to win alone, and in the game in which the MB wins, the combination of symbols related to the MB is used. In a game that is not displayed and the internal lottery result is "missing" between the MB flags, the symbol related to the MB is always displayed regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (that is, the mode of the stop operation). The combination is configured to be displayed, but as described in the modified example of the other example (No. 3) of the game playability (game specification), the MB depends on the mode of the player's stop operation and the like. It can also be configured so that the combination of symbols related to MB may be displayed in the game won in.

(A) In the RT0 state, when it is not controlled in the advantageous section, (A-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and when it is controlled in the advantageous section. Is an increasing period in which (A-2) becomes an advantageous section and the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

In the (A) RT0 state, when (1) BB is won, the transition is made between the (D) RT2 state BB flags as the BB permitted state. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, when the MB is won, the state shifts between the MB flags as the MB permitted state, but the RT state does not change. Further, between the MB flags in the (A) RT0 state, even if the bell spilled eye is stopped and displayed on the effective line, the transition is not made between the MB flags in the (C) RT1 state. Further, in the (A) RT0 state, the "loss" probability is set to be at least higher than that in the (B) (C) RT1 state (for example, "1/6"), so that the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Therefore, (4) it is easy to satisfy the MB start condition. Further, in (A) RT0 state, (5) Bell spills are effective before shifting between (D) RT2 state BB flags or before MB flags (that is, between non-flags). When the stop is displayed on the line, (C) shifts between the RT1 state non-flags.

During (B) RT1 state non-flag, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is at least higher than (A) RT0 state, (A) RT0 state, (C) RT1 state MB flag, and (D) RT2. State A gaming state that can be transferred between the BB flags. (B) If the RT1 state non-flag is not controlled in the advantageous section, (B-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and the game value is controlled in the advantageous section. If there is, (B-2) it becomes an advantageous section and it becomes an increase period in which the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

When (1) BB is won between (B) RT1 state non-flags, it shifts between (D) RT2 state BB flags as BB permitted state. Further, when (6) MB is won between (B) RT1 state non-flags, it shifts between (C) RT1 state MB flags as MB permitted state (RT state does not change). In this example, since the game in which the MB is won is configured so that the combination of symbols related to the MB is not displayed, the transition from the (B) RT1 state non-flag to the (F) MB state is not performed. However, as described above, it can be configured so that the (B) RT1 state non-flagged state may shift to the (F) MB state. It should be noted that (B) between the RT1 state non-flags and (C) between the RT1 state MB flags are basically the same RT state (RT1 state), regardless of which of the RT1 states (B) and (C). (9) When the number of games played in the RT1 state reaches the specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) (that is, when 1500 games are exhausted), the state shifts to (A) RT0 state. At this time, if it is between (B) RT1 state non-flags, it shifts between (A) RT0 state non-flags, and if it is (C) between RT1 state MB flags, it shifts between (A) RT0 state MB flags. ..

(C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least higher than that of the (A) RT0 state, and the game state can be changed to the (A) RT0 state and the (F) MB state. .. (C) If the RT1 state MB flag is not controlled in the advantageous section, (C-1) becomes normal (non-advantageous section) and the game value decreases, and the game value is controlled in the advantageous section. If there is, (C-2) it becomes an advantageous section and it becomes an increase period in which the game value increases. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

(C) Between the RT1 state MB flags, the "missing" probability is set to be at least extremely lower than that of the (A) RT0 state (for example, "1/8192"), so that the combination of symbols related to MB is displayed. Therefore, it is difficult to satisfy (7) MB start condition. Since (C) the RT1 state MB flag is in the MB permitted state, there is no case where the MB is newly won or the BB is won.

Between the (D) RT2 state BB flags, the winning probability of the replay combination is at least lower than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state, and the game state can be shifted to the (E) BB state. (D) When the combination of symbols related to BB is displayed between the RT2 state BB flags, (2) the BB start condition is satisfied, and (E) the state shifts to the BB state. Further, since the "missing" probability is set to be at least higher than that of the (B) (C) RT1 state (for example, "1/12") between the (D) RT2 state BB flags, the symbol related to the BB The combination is displayed, and (2) it is easy to satisfy the BB start condition. Since the BB permission state is between (C) RT2 state BB flags, there is no case where a new BB is won or an MB is won.

(E) The BB state is, for example, a gaming state that is composed of the above-mentioned "special bonus state" and has an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. (E) In the BB state, when a specified number of game values (for example, more than 140 cards) are given, the game value is given an upper limit, (3) the BB end condition is satisfied, and (B) from the BB state to (A). ) Shift to RT0 state.

(F) The MB state is a game state that is configured as a normal bonus state and is an increase period in which the game value increases. It should be noted that, as described in the modified example of the other example (No. 3) of the game playability (game specification), it can be configured as a non-increasing / decreasing period. In the (F) MB state, when a specified number of game values (for example, more than 13 cards) are given, the game value is given an upper limit, (8) the MB end condition is satisfied, and (A) the state shifts from the RT0 state. If it is, it shifts from (F) MB state to (A) RT0 state, and if it shifts from (C) RT1 state MB flag, it shifts from (F) MB state to (B) RT1 state non-flag. Move to.

That is, the (F) MB state does not change the RT state depending on its operation or termination (more specifically, the (B) (C) RT1 state operates through the (F) MB state). ing. Here, the (B) and (C) RT1 states do not end during the specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) after the start. Therefore, the operation or termination of the (F) MB state does not affect the specified number of games. However, the period during the (F) MB state may be included in the counting target of the specified number of games, or the counting of the specified number of games may be interrupted (not included).

The transition control between the (F) MB state and the (B) (C) RT1 state is not limited to that described above. For example, when the (F) MB state ends, even if it has shifted from between the (C) RT1 state MB flags, it may be shifted to the (A) RT0 state. That is, the RT1 state may be terminated when the MB state is activated or terminated. In this example, when shifting between (C) RT1 state MB flags, the specified number of games is exhausted and shifting between (A) RT0 state MB flags, (F) MB state is activated, and (A) RT0 Unless it shifts between the non-flags of the state, or (F) activates the MB state and (B) shifts between the RT1 state non-flags, and wins the BB there, it will not shift to a series of increasing sections. Therefore, when the (F) MB state ends, the frequency of transitioning to a series of increasing sections can be increased by shifting between the non-flags of the (A) RT0 state. This may be appropriately selected according to the intended ball output rate and its contents.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when a special combination (BB) is won, it becomes a special permission state (BB permission state) and shifts to the second specific game state ((D) RT2 state), and the special symbol It is not difficult to display the combination (combination of symbols related to BB) and shift to the special game state ((E) BB state), but when the special role (MB) is won, the special permission state (MB permission) However, the game state does not shift, and if it is the first specific game state (between (C) RT1 state MB flags), a combination of special symbols (symbols related to MB) until the end of the first specific game state is completed. It is difficult to display the combination of) and shift to the special gaming state ((F) MB state), and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal gaming state ((A) RT0 state). In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination (small combination of push order) is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the correct answer is in the push order). Is not performed and the transition is made based on the fact that the combination of specific symbols (bell spilled eyes) is displayed. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the specific period (advantageous section) in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the operation information is stopped according to the notification. When the operation is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special combination or the special role is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if a special role is won and a special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal game state via the special game state.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the special combination (BB) is won, the special permission state (BB permission state) is set and the game shifts to the second specific game state ((D) RT2 state), which is special. It is not difficult to display the combination of symbols (combination of symbols related to BB) and shift to the special game state ((E) BB state), but when the special role (MB) is won, the special permission state ( MB permission state), but the game state does not shift, and if it is the first specific game state (between (C) RT1 state MB flags), a specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) are played and the first It is difficult to display the special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to MB) and shift to the special gaming state ((F) MB state) until the specific gaming state ends, and as a result, the normal gaming state ((A) ) It is difficult to shift to the RT0 state). In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination (small combination of push order) is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a stop operation is performed in a specific mode (a mode in which the correct answer is in the push order). Is not performed and the transition is made based on the fact that the combination of specific symbols (bell spilled eyes) is displayed. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the specific period (advantageous section) in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the operation information is stopped according to the notification. When the operation is performed, the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given.

Here, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special combination or the special role is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, if a special combination is won and a special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal gaming state via the special gaming state until a predetermined number of games are played.

Under such playability, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is entered without shifting to the first specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat the transition (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value that will be given when a specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the first specific game state, for example, in the case of the special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although it is difficult, the game value given when winning a specific role will increase. In addition, even if the operation information related to a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during the specific period, the transition to the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is performed without shifting to the first specific gaming state. May be possible to repeat.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the first specific gaming state, in what order the special role, the special role or the specific combination wins in the normal gaming state, the first specific game. Regarding the order in which the special role or the special role is won in the state, whether or not the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific mode in the first specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine of this example, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In this way, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even in the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made to.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 5)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 97, another example (No. 5) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 97 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example (No. 5) of the game playability (game specification).

As shown in FIG. 97, in this example, (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state), (B) BB1 state, (C) between BB1 flags, (D) between BB2 states, (E) between BB2 flags, ( There are F) BB3 state and (G) game state between BB3 flags. This example attempts to make the game playability different depending on whether or not the type of bonus combination won in the general gaming state (normal gaming state) and the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning game in the bonus combination are displayed. be.

The combination of symbols according to BB1 is configured in the same manner as, for example, "C_red same color BB" (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment. The combination of symbols according to BB2 is configured in the same manner as, for example, "C_blue same color BB" (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment. The combination of symbols according to BB3 is configured as, for example, "BAR-BAR-BAR" (see FIG. 15). At this time, the "red 7" symbol, the "blue 7" symbol, and the "BAR" symbol are arranged at equal intervals (or substantially equal intervals) on at least one reel (which may be all reels). When the stop operation is performed on the reel, the timing at which the "red 7" symbol is displayed, the timing at which the "blue 7" symbol is displayed, and the timing at which the "BAR" symbol is displayed overlap. Configure not to. That is, when the "Red 7" symbol is aimed at and pressed, the "Blue 7" and "BAR" symbols may not be displayed, and when the "Blue 7" symbol is aimed and pressed, "Blue 7" and "BAR" symbols are not displayed. The "Red 7" and "BAR" symbols are not displayed, and when the "BAR" symbol is aimed at and pressed, the "Red 7" and "Blue 7" symbols are not displayed. do. The combination of symbols according to BB3 may be configured in the same manner as, for example, "C_red different color BB" or "C_blue different color BB" (see FIG. 20) of the present embodiment.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), for example, when a bonus combination (any of BB1 to BB3) can be won with a predetermined probability (for example, 1/45 in total), the winning bonus combination is BB1. A certain probability is "45%" (the winning probability is "1/100"), and the probability that the winning bonus combination is BB2 is "45%" (the winning probability is "1/100"), and the winning is won. The probability that the bonus combination is BB3 is "10%" (the winning probability is "1/450"). It should be noted that this bonus winning ratio shows an example, and BB1 to BB3 may be won with the same winning probability (winning ratio), or may be won at a ratio different from the above. Further, in (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state), BB1, BB2, and BB3 are configured not to win as duplication with other replay combination or small combination, but to win each independently. In addition, as long as the combination of the corresponding symbols can be displayed in the winning game, the winning may be configured to overlap with other small winning combinations.

(A) In the general game state (non-bonus state), in any case, (1-1) BB1 is won, (2-1) BB2 is won, or (3-1) BB3 is won. A bonus winning notification will be given for the winning game. This bonus winning notification is configured as a predetermined notification that the fact that any one of BB1 to BB3 has been determined as the internal winning combination can be notified, but the type cannot be notified. In this predetermined notification, for example, it is notified that a character such as "big hit!" Is displayed or a WIN lamp is turned on to win a bonus role, but whether the BB1 is won or the BB2 is won. Or, it is not felt whether the player won the BB3.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), when (1-1) BB1 is won, the player succeeds in pressing the "Red 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB1 If the combination of symbols related to the above can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (1-2) BB1 is established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is changed to (B) BB1 state. In the (B) BB1 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases, and when the specified number (for example, more than 140 cards) of the game value is given in the (B) BB1 state, the game value is increased. It becomes the upper limit of grant, (1-4) BB1 ends, and it shifts from (B) BB1 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state).

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "Red 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the combination of symbols related to BB1 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (1- 3) BB1 is not established, and the transition from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) to (C) BB1 flag.

In this example, as in the present embodiment and other examples, there is a push order small combination, which will be described as a 6-choice push order small combination 1-6. In normal stop control, if the push order small winning combination 1 is the correct answer in the left middle right and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation, and the other push order is the incorrect answer in the push order and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. One piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout), and in the push order small winning combination 2, the right and left middle is the push order correct answer and 9 pieces are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing, and the other push order is the push order incorrect answer. If the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, 1 sheet is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout), and in the push order small winning combination 3, the middle and left are the correct push order, and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the stop operation timing, and other push orders. Is the wrong answer in the push order, and if the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one piece is paid out, if it is not appropriate, it is missed (no payout). If the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, one card is paid out. 9 cards are paid out regardless of the operation timing, 1 card is paid out if the other push order is incorrect and the stop operation timing is appropriate, if not, it is missed (no payout), and the push order small winning combination 6 is on the right. The middle left is the correct answer in the push order and 9 cards are paid out regardless of the timing of the stop operation. If the other push orders are incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate, 1 card is paid out. Become.

Between the (C) BB1 flags, the winning probability of the replay (replay) combination is higher than that of the (A) general game state (non-bonus state), and the "loss" probability is set to, for example, about "1/4000". Similar to the other examples, in this example as well, the combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed only in the game in which (C) BB1 flags are "lost". If the combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game that has become "lost", (1-2) BB1 is established, and the state shifts from between the (C) BB1 flags to the (B) BB1 state. Further, between the (C) BB1 flags, a bonus type notification is performed in which the winning bonus combination is BB1 (that is, the type of the bonus combination) is notified. This bonus type notification is configured as a specific notification for notifying that the BB1 has been won (display of a combination of symbols related to the BB1 is permitted) between the BB1 flags. In this specific notification, for example, it is possible to feel that the BB1 is won by displaying characters such as "Red 7 inside hitting" or turning on the lamp corresponding to "Red 7". ing. It should be noted that this specific notification can always be performed while (C) between the BB1 flags, or can be performed in a game in which a combination of symbols related to BB1 can be displayed between (C) BB1 flags. You can also make it happen.

Further, between the (C) BB1 flags, the stop control is changed for the push order small winning combination 1 to 6. Specifically, when the push order small winning combination 1, the pushing order small winning combination 3, and the pushing order small winning combination 5 are won, 9 cards are paid out regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (regardless of these factors). Therefore, if you win the push order small winning combination 2, the pushing order small winning combination 4, and the pushing order small winning combination 6, one card will be paid out regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (regardless of these factors). The stop control is changed to. Here, since the push order small winning combination 1 to 6 have the same winning probability, normal stop control is performed on the premise that the push order is not notified (A) General game. The return rate to the player is higher between the (C) BB1 flags than between the states (non-bonus state) and the (G) BB3 flags described later. It should be noted that (C) between the BB1 flags may be configured as a reduction period (however, the reduction rate is low when viewed from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) and (G-1) non-advantageous section described later). Alternatively, it may be configured as an increase period (however, the rate of increase is low when viewed from the (G-2) advantageous section described later). In addition, the expected value of grant may be configured as a non-increase / decrease period. Further, although it has almost no effect on the expected value of grant, even between (C) BB1 flags, for example, between (C-1) non-advantageous section and (C-2) advantageous section according to a specific notification condition. The transition control may be performed with.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), when (2-1) BB2 is won, the player succeeds in pressing the "blue 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and BB2 If the combination of symbols related to the above can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (2-2) BB2 is established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is changed to (D) BB2 state. In the (D) BB2 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases, and when the specified number (for example, more than 140 cards) of the game value is given in the (D) BB2 state, the game value is increased. It becomes the upper limit of grant, (2-4) BB2 ends, and it shifts from (D) BB2 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state).

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "Blue 7" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the combination of symbols related to BB2 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (2- 3) BB2 is not established, and the transition from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) to (E) BB2 flag. If BB1 is replaced with BB2 and "red 7" is replaced with "blue 7" between the (E) BB2 flags, it is basically the same as between the (C) BB1 flags, so the description here is omitted. do. The same applies to bonus type notification and the like.

(A) In the general gaming state (non-bonus state), when (3-1) BB3 is won, the player succeeds in pressing the "BAR" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is appropriate), and the BB3 is reached. If the combination of the symbols can be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (3-2) BB3 is established, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is changed to (F) BB3 state. In the (F) BB3 state, as in the other examples, the game value increases, and when the specified number (for example, more than 140) of the game value is given in the (F) BB3 state, the game value becomes It becomes the upper limit of grant, (3-4) BB3 ends, and it shifts from (F) BB3 state to (A) general game state (non-bonus state). The (F) BB3 state can also be configured as a decrease period or a non-increase / decrease period.

On the other hand, if the player fails to press the "BAR" symbol (the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate) and the combination of symbols related to BB3 cannot be stopped and displayed on the effective line, (3-3). ) BB3 is not established, and the transition from (A) general gaming state (non-bonus state) to (G) BB3 flag.

Between the (G) BB3 flags, the winning probability of the replay role is higher than that between the (C) BB1 flags and the (E) BB2 flags, and the "missing" probability is, for example, about "1/65536" or " It is set to "0". That is, between the (G) BB3 flags, the probability that the combination of symbols related to BB3 is displayed is extremely low, or the combination of symbols related to BB3 is not displayed. The setting of the "loss" probability is not limited to this, and may be set to the same degree as between (C) BB1 flags and (E) BB2 flags, or may be set to a higher probability than these. This may be appropriately selected according to the intended ball output rate and its contents. (G) Similarly, between the BB3 flags, the combination of symbols related to BB3 can be displayed only in the game in which "missing" occurs. If the combination of symbols related to BB3 can be displayed in the game that has become "lost", (3-2) BB3 is established, and the state shifts from between the (G) BB3 flags to the (F) BB3 state. Note that the bonus type notification is basically the same as between the (C) BB1 flags if "red 7" is replaced with "BAR", and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

Further, between the (G) BB3 flags, the stop control is not changed for the push order small winning combination 1 to 6, and the normal stop control is used. Therefore, assuming that the push order is not notified, the return rate to the player is higher between the (C) BB1 flag and the (E) BB2 flag, but between the (G) BB3 flags. When it is not controlled in the advantageous section, it becomes (G-1) a non-advantageous section and the game value decreases, but when it is controlled in the advantageous section, it becomes (G-2) advantageous. It becomes an increasing period in which the game value increases as a section, and in the (G-2) advantageous section, at least the push order that is the correct answer at the time of winning the push order small winning combination 1 to 6 is notified, and as a result, (C) between the BB1 flags. And (E) the return rate to the player is higher (the expected value of grant is higher) than between the BB2 flags. As the specific notification conditions that can be controlled in the advantageous section, various conditions described in the present embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

That is, if (1-1) BB1 is won and (1-2) BB1 is established, the game value is increased in the (B) BB1 state, and if (1-3) BB1 is not established, the game value is increased. (C) Between the BB1 flags, the game value gradually increases or gradually decreases. (C) Between the BB1 flags is configured to continue until (1-2) BB1 is established. In addition, if (2-1) BB2 is won and (2-2) BB2 is established, the game value is increased in the (D) BB2 state, and if (2-3) BB2 is not established, the game value is increased. (E) Between the BB2 flags, the game value gradually increases or gradually decreases. The space between the (E) BB2 flags is configured to continue until (2-2) BB2 is established.

In addition, if (3-1) BB3 is won and (3-2) BB3 is established, the game value is increased in the (F) BB3 state, and if (3-3) BB3 is not established, the game value is increased. Between the (G) BB3 flags, the game value sharply decreases in the (G-1) non-advantageous section, while the game value sharply increases in the (G-2) advantageous section. The (G) BB3 flags are configured to continue until (3-2) BB3 is established with an extremely low probability, or basically do not end once the transition is made. Since BB1 and BB2 have a higher winning probability than BB3, a sufficient period during which gambling can be suppressed can be secured. Further, usually, the former game property is provided at the beginning when it is installed in the game store, and it is highly possible that the latter game property is provided after a while. However, it is also possible to ensure that the game playability can be changed by the initialization operation as shown below.

For example, when there is a setting change operation (initialization operation for initializing the game state) between (C) BB1 flags, (E) BB2 flags, or (G) BB3 flags, a carry-over combination is performed. By clearing BB1, BB2, or BB3 as, (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state) is entered. That is, in the case of configuring not to end between the (G) BB3 flags, the BB3 as the carry-over combination is cleared based on the setting change operation, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state). ) May be used. However, when the setting change operation is performed, if (C) between the BB1 flags or (E) between the BB2 flags, BB1 or BB2 as the carry-over combination is cleared, and (A) the general gaming state (non-bonus state). ), But if it is between (G) BB3 flags, BB3 as a carry-over combination may not be cleared and (A) it may not shift to the general gaming state (non-bonus state). Further, even if the setting change operation is performed, it is possible to configure so that none of BB1, BB2 or BB3 as the carry-over combination is cleared.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the first special combination (BB1) or the second special combination (BB3) is won, the game is the game, or the first special permission state (between the BB1 flags) or the second after the winning. If it is not a game in which another internal winning combination has not been determined (so-called lost) in the special permission state (between the BB3 flags), the first special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to BB1) or the second special symbol (Combination of symbols related to BB3) cannot be displayed. Further, in the first special permission state, when the first predetermined winning combination (small winning combination 1, 3, 5 in pushing order) is won, a predetermined number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given regardless of the pushing order, and the second When a predetermined combination (small combination 2, 4, 6 in push order) is won, a predetermined number of game values are not given regardless of the push order. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the push order is correct, and a predetermined number of games are given if the push order is incorrect. No value is given. Then, at least in the specific period of the second special permission state, it is possible to be controlled to the advantageous state ((G-2) advantageous section) in which the information of the player's stop operation is notified.

That is, if the first special combination is won and the combination of the first special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the first special permission state ends. The profit does not fluctuate, and while the player can receive a certain amount of profit, the profit does not increase dramatically, so even if it becomes advantageous, the amount of increase in the game value is shown. The slope value is relatively low. On the other hand, if the second special combination is won and the combination of the second special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the second special permission state ends. The profit will fluctuate depending on the situation, and the player may suffer more disadvantages than the first special permission state. On the other hand, if the profit becomes advantageous, the profit will increase dramatically. The slope value indicating the amount of increase in value is relatively high. Therefore, by making the slope value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in variation.

In the gaming machine of this example, the winning probability of the first special role is made higher than the winning probability of the second special role, and the probability that the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state is the second. The probability that the combination of the second special symbols can be displayed may be higher than the probability that the combination of the second special symbols can be displayed in the special permission state. That is, the first special permission state may be set to a state in which it is easier to shift and end than the second special permission state, and the second special permission state may be set to a state in which it is harder to shift and end than the first special permission state. In this way, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, the combination of the first special symbol related to the first special role and the combination of the second special symbol related to the second special role cannot be aimed at the same time when the player pushes the ball. It may be configured to be arranged at intervals. In this way, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this example, when the first special role or the second special role is won, the fact that one of them is won is notified, but the type is not notified (bonus winning notification), and the first In the 1 special permission state and the 2nd special permission state, the type may be notified (bonus type notification). In this way, it is possible to notify the information desired by the player while making the game playability more varied.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 6)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 6) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. FIG. 98 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in another example of game playability (game specification) (No. 6), and FIG. 99 is a diagram for conceptually explaining another example of game playability (game specification) (No. 6). It is a figure which showed an example of the internal lottery table used in.

As shown in FIGS. 98 and 99, in this example, there are roughly classified into a general gaming state (normal gaming state) and a BB state, and in the general gaming state (normal gaming state), either BB1 or BB2 The state in which the bonus role of is not won is defined as (A) general game state (between non-flags), and the state in which BB1 is won (BB1 permitted state in which BB1 is carried over), and three cards are used. The state in which the medals are bet (hanged) and the game is played is defined as (B) a three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, and a state in which BB2 is won (BB2 permitted state in which BB2 is carried over). Therefore, the state in which three medals are bet and the game is played is defined as (C) the state in which three BB2 flags are bet, and the BB1 is permitted, and two medals are bet and the game is played. The state is defined as (D) a two-card bet state between BB1 flags, and a state in which two medals are bet and a game is played in a BB2 permitted state is defined as (E) a two-card bet state between BB2 flags. .. Further, the bonus state in which the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the effective line and started is defined as (F) BB1 state, and the combination of symbols related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the effective line and started. The bonus state is defined as the (G) BB2 state. That is, it is intended to make the game playability different according to the type of bonus combination that is won (winned) in the general game state (normal game state) and the number of bets (the number of times the game value is multiplied).

In the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 99, for convenience of explanation, each lottery value used in the (A) general game state (between non-flags) three-card bet state (see the column of “three-card bets between non-flags”). , (A) Each lottery value used in the 2-card bet state of the general game state (between non-flags) (see the column of "2-bet between non-flags"), (B) 3-bet state between BB1 flags and (C) ) In each lottery value used in the BB2 flag 3-bet state (see the column "3 flag-bet"), and (D) in the BB1 flag 2-bet state and (E) in the BB2 flag 2-bet state. Each lottery value used (see the column of "two bets between flags") is shown in each column, but this does not mean that the gaming state (RT state) is different. That is, the RT state can be controlled as a common RT state. However, it can also be controlled as another RT state. In addition, it is assumed that at least the internal winning combination, which is the target of the advantageous section grant determination described later, is a common lottery value among the set values.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when a 3-card bet is made, the winning of BB1 is possible and the winning of BB2 is not possible (see the column of "3 bets between non-flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, in the case of two bets, the winning of BB2 is possible and the winning of BB1 is not possible (see the column of "two bets between non-flags" in FIG. 99). In this example, the player can start the game (perform a start operation) in either case of betting two medals or betting three medals. There is. Further, "bet" means that the player inserts two or three medals into the medal slot 14 in order to use the bet, and the player operates the bet button to obtain two or three medals from the credit. It includes both medals for medals and medals for two or three medals are automatically hung by winning a replay role.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when a 3-card bet is won, the BB1 is won (the winning game may be carried over without displaying the combination of symbols related to the BB1). Shifts between the BB1 flags. (1-1) When a game is played with a three-card bet between the BB1 flags, (B) a three-card bet state between the BB1 flags is set (see the column of "three-card bet between flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when (2) a game is played with a two-card bet between the BB1 flags, (D) a two-card bet state between the BB1 flags is set (see the column of "two bets between flags" in FIG. 99).

(B) In the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 can be displayed in the game that has become "lost" as described in the other examples (BB1 can be established). .. The "loss" probability can be set as appropriate, but it is assumed that it is set to, for example, about "1 / 8.5". In addition, the state is a BB1 permitted state, and BB1 does not win a new prize or win a BB2 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). Further, when the push order bell A (see the internal winning combination of Nos. "20" to "31" in FIG. 99) is won, if the push order is correct (the push order displayed by "abbreviation" respectively), 9 If the answer is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (“○”), then one sheet is paid out, and if the answer is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (“×”). ) 0 cards will be paid out. Further, when the push order bell B (see the internal winning combination of Nos. "21" to "43" in FIG. 99) is won, 9 cards are paid out regardless of the push order and the timing of the stop operation. That is, in the (B) 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the push order of the push order bell B does not matter, and if the advantageous section is not taken into consideration, the 3-card bet in the (A) general game state (between the non-flags). The return rate is higher than that of the state and the three-card bet state between the (C) BB2 flags, which is advantageous to the player.

In addition, (B) in the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, when the chance is won (see the internal winning combination of Nos. "7" to "16" in FIG. 99) (or the combination of symbols related to the chance is). When winning a strong bell (see No. "17" and "18" in FIG. 99) and a strong bell (see No. "17" and "18" in FIG. 99), a definite combination (No. "19" in FIG. 99). When winning the internal winning combination (see the internal winning combination), when winning the cherry (see the internal winning combination of No. "44" in FIG. 99), and when winning the watermelon (see the internal winning combination of No. "45" in FIG. 99). ), The advantageous section grant determination (advantageous section grant lottery) is made with the probability corresponding to the internal winning combination (100% probability for the fixed combination). When it is decided to be granted as a result of the advantageous section grant determination, for example, an advantageous section of 50 games per set is granted (if it is already in the advantageous section, it is extended by 50 games per set). It should be noted that the mode of imparting the advantageous section is an example, and various modes described in this embodiment and other examples of game playability (game specifications) other than this example can be adopted.

Further, in the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, when the combination of symbols related to BB1 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (1-2) BB1 is established and the state shifts to (F) BB1 state. (F) The BB1 state is, for example, a gaming state configured as a "special bonus state" and having an increasing period in which the gaming value increases, and is an arbitrary specified number (for example, as described in other examples). , 140 cards), (1-3) BB1 ends, and (F) BB1 state shifts to (A) general game state (between non-flags).

(D) In the two-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the number of bets is different from the game in which the BB1 wins, although it is between the BB1 flags. Cannot be displayed (BB1 cannot be established). In addition, the state is a BB1 permitted state, and BB1 does not win a new prize or win a BB2 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). That is, the state is configured as a gaming state in which neither a winning combination nor a prize is won. However, in view of the fact that the flags are between the BB1 flags, it is possible to configure the game so that the combination of the symbols related to the BB1 can be displayed in the game that has become "missing".

In addition, (D) in the state of betting two cards between the BB1 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, two cards are paid out if the push order is correct, and the push order is incorrect and the answer is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate, one card will be paid out, and if the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one card will be paid out. However, for either or both of the push order bell A and the push order bell B, it is possible to configure the payout so that two cards are paid out regardless of the push order, and the expected value of grant is (B) 3 bets between the BB1 flags. It is also possible to reduce the lottery value as appropriate so as to be the same as the state, and then (B) pay out the same as the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags. It should be noted that (D) in the state of betting two cards between the BB1 flags, the above-mentioned advantageous section grant determination is not performed.

(A) In the general game state (between non-flags), when a two-card bet is won, BB2 is won (the winning game may be carried over without displaying the combination of symbols related to BB2). Shifts between the BB2 flags. (2) When a game is played with a 3-card bet between the BB2 flags, (C) a 3-card bet state between the BB2 flags is set (see the column of "3-card bet between flags" in FIG. 99). On the other hand, when (4-1) a game is played with a two-card bet between the BB2 flags, (E) a two-card bet state between the BB2 flags is set (see the column of "two bets between flags" in FIG. 99).

(C) In the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the number of bets is different from the game in which the BB2 wins, although it is between the BB2 flags. Cannot be displayed (BB2 cannot be established). In addition, the state is a BB2 permitted state, and BB2 does not win a new prize or win a BB1 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win). That is, the state is configured as a gaming state in which neither a winning combination nor a prize is won. However, considering that it is between the BB2 flags, it is possible to configure the game so that the combination of the symbols related to the BB2 can be displayed in the game that has become "missing".

In addition, (C) in the state of betting 3 cards between the BB2 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, 9 cards are paid out if the push order is correct, and the push order is incorrect and the answer is stopped. If the timing of the operation is appropriate, one card will be paid out, and if the push order is incorrect and the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate, one card will be paid out. That is, in the (C) three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the return rate is higher than in the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, because the push order of the push order bell B does not matter and the advantageous section is not taken into consideration. It is low and disadvantageous to the player.

Further, in the (C) three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the advantageous section grant determination (advantageous section grant lottery) is performed as in the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags. Here, No. Focusing on "F_Rip B" of "4", (B) In the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, the "normal lip" wins regardless of the mode of the stop operation, and the advantageous section grant decision is not made. (C) In the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the "chance eye" is won and the advantageous section grant decision is made regardless of the mode of the stop operation. That is, (C) in the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the internal winning combination of "F_lip B" is promoted (converted) to the internal winning combination of "chance eye", so there are many opportunities to decide to grant an advantageous section. Therefore, when the advantageous section is taken into consideration, the probability of granting the advantageous section is higher than that of the (B) three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, which is advantageous to the player.

(E) In the two-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 can be displayed in the game that has become "lost" as described in the other examples (BB2 can be established). .. The "loss" probability can be set as appropriate, but it is assumed that it is set to, for example, about "1 / 8.5". In addition, the state is a BB2 permitted state, and BB2 does not win a new prize or win a BB1 (BB1 and BB2 cannot win).

In addition, (E) in the state of betting two cards between the BB2 flags, when either the push order bell A or the push order bell B is won, two cards are paid out if the push order is correct, and the push order is incorrect and the answer is stopped. If the operation timing is appropriate, 1 card will be paid out, and if the push order is incorrect and the stop operation timing is not appropriate, 0 card will be paid out. However, for either or both of the push order bell A and the push order bell B, it is possible to configure the payout so that two cards are paid out regardless of the push order, and the expected value of grant is (C) 3 bets between the BB2 flags. It is also possible to reduce the lottery value as appropriate so that it becomes the same as the state, and then (C) pay out the same as the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags. In addition, (E) in the state of betting two cards between the BB2 flags, the above-mentioned advantageous section grant determination is not performed.

Further, in the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state, when the combination of symbols related to BB2 is stopped and displayed on the valid line, (4-2) BB2 is established and the state shifts to (G) BB2 state. (F) The BB2 state is, for example, a game state configured as a "special bonus state" and has an increasing period in which the game value increases, and is an arbitrary specified number (for example, as described in other examples). When the game value of (60 cards) is given, (4-3) BB1 ends, and the state shifts from the (G) BB2 state to the (A) general game state (between non-flags). The (F) BB2 state can also be configured as a non-increase / decrease period.

In this example, when (B) the 3-card bet state between the BB1 flags and (C) the 3-card bet state between the BB2 flags are compared, in the (B) 3-bet state between the BB1 flags, the push order for the bell B is pushed. Is unquestioned, and since it is possible to shift to the (F) BB1 state, basically, the return rate (base value, ball output rate) is better in the (B) BB1 flag 3-card bet state. It is configured so that (may be good) is high. On the other hand, in the state of (C) three-card bet between BB2 flags, many chances of determining the advantageous section grant can be obtained, and the expected value of grant when the advantageous section is reached is also high. If the winning probability of the internal winning combination, the probability of determining the advantageous section grant at the time of winning the chance, and the duration of the advantageous section granted when the advantageous section grant decision is made are appropriately adjusted, the (C) BB2 flag It is also possible to configure the return rate in the 3-card bet state to be equal to or higher than the return rate in the 3-card bet state between (B) BB1 flags.

Further, in this example, comparing the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state and the (D) BB1 flag two-card bet state, the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state results in the (G) BB2 state. Basically, the return rate is higher in the two-card bet state between the (E) BB2 flags because the transition is possible. It should be noted that the return rate is high because the control is performed so that the push order of the push order bell B does not matter even in the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state as in the (B) BB1 flag three-card bet state. It may be configured to be.

When the player starts the game from (A) the general game state (between the non-flags), for example, the player can first select whether to make a 3-card bet or a 2-card bet. If you win the BB1 as a 3-card bet and do not shift to the (F) BB1 state in the winning game, there is no merit in the (D) BB1 state 2-card bet state, so the (B) BB1 flag 3-card bet state remains as it is. Advance the game. (B) Since the return rate is relatively high in the three-card bet state between the BB1 flags, does the player shift to the (F) BB1 state and increase the game value without reducing the game value so rapidly? Alternatively, it is possible to select whether to increase the game value by taking the opportunity of determining the advantageous section grant and shifting to the advantageous section (as a result of notifying the correct push order for the push order bell A). In addition, in the state of (B) betting three cards between the BB1 flags, the game value does not increase so rapidly even if the section shifts to the advantageous section, as compared with the state of betting three cards between the (C) BB2 flags.

On the other hand, if the player wins BB2 as a two-card bet and does not shift to the (G) BB2 state in the winning game, the player either advances the game in the three-card bet state between the (C) BB2 flags, or (E) BB2. It is possible to select whether to proceed with the game in the state of betting two cards between the flags. (C) In the three-card bet state between the BB2 flags, the return rate is relatively low and the game value does not shift to the bonus state. When the probability of obtaining is increasing and the player shifts to an advantageous section (as a result of being notified of the correct push order for push order bell A and push order bell B), the game value can be rapidly increased. there is a possibility. In addition, in the (E) BB2 flag two-card bet state, although the game value in a small role cannot be expected to increase, the return rate is relatively high, and the game value is increased by shifting to the (G) BB2 state. Can be increased. In this example, such playability (game specifications) can be provided.

According to the gaming machine of this example, when the bet game value is the first amount (3 cards), the first special role (BB1) can be won, while the second special role (BB2) can be won. Not possible. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (two cards), the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination ("F_rip B") is won, the combination of specific symbols (chance eye) cannot be displayed in the first special permission state (between the BB1 flags), and the second special permission state (BB2) is not displayed. If it is (between flags), it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols. Then, when the bet game value is the first amount, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, an advantageous state (advantageous section) is given. It is possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous section (determination of granting an advantageous section), and when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to grant an advantageous state.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when the bet game value is the first quantity, the first special symbol combination (combination of symbols related to BB1) can be displayed, while the second special symbol is displayed. (Combination of symbols related to BB2) cannot be displayed. Further, when the bet game value is the second quantity, the combination of the second special symbols may be displayed, but the combination of the first special symbols may not be displayed.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, as a state in which the game is played, for example, in the first special permission state, the game is played with the first amount of the game value bet ((B) BB1 flag). (3 bets between 3 cards), 2nd special permission state, where the game is played with the first amount of game value bet ((C) 3 bets between BB2 flags), 1st special permission state There is a state in which a second amount of game value is bet and a game is played ((D) a state in which two cards are bet between BB1 flags), and a second special permission state in which a second amount of game value is bet. It is possible to create a plurality of states, that is, a state in which the game is played ((E) a two-card bet state between the BB2 flags).

Then, according to the gaming machine of this example, for example, in the second special permission state, the state in which the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played is set as the state in which the granting of the advantageous state is given preferential treatment. The state in which the game value of 2 is bet and the game is played is defined as the state in which the advantageous state is not given. That is, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on which amount of the game value is bet and which special role is won in relation to the granting of the advantageous state. Therefore, by making the slope value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in variation.

In the gaming machine of this example, when the first predetermined combination (pushing order bell A) is won, for example, a predetermined number (for example, 9) if the pushing order is correct, regardless of which state it is in. The game value of (sheets) is given, and if the push order is incorrect, a predetermined number of game values are not given, and if the second predetermined combination (push order bell B) is won, the first special permission state is set. In a state where the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played, for example, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the push order, while in other states, the first predetermined amount is given. The same control as the combination may be performed. In this way, it is possible to make the state in which the first special permission state is bet and the game is played in the first amount of the game value, and the game value is given preferential treatment at the time of winning the predetermined combination. Therefore, the playability can be made more varied.

With reference to FIGS. 92 to 99, other examples (No. 1 to No. 6) of game playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment have been described above. The main points of (game specifications) are mainly explained, and the points that the explanations are omitted or briefly explained in these are the configurations described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified examples. It can be supplemented and applied as appropriate. It is also possible to combine a part or all of the configurations described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified example to form the present invention.

[Another example of advantageous section limiter (number limiter)]
Subsequently, another example of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIGS. 100 to 102. So far, as a limiter for the advantageous section, a limiter using the number of games digested during the advantageous section (hereinafter, "game number limiter") has been described, but the type of limiter for the advantageous section is not limited to the game number limiter. No. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing when the number of medals paid out during the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 2400) or more. A limiter using the number of medals paid out during such an advantageous section is hereinafter referred to as a "number limiter".

FIG. 100A is a diagram showing an outline of the number limiter. In the figure, the vertical axis is the difference number (= payout number-insertion number), and is also referred to as a net increase number. The plus and minus of the difference number is the value seen from the player, and if the number of medals paid out to the player is larger than the number of medals inserted (plus on the player side), plus or vice versa. In the case of, it becomes negative. The horizontal axis is the number of games, and the more to the right, the more games have been digested from the start of the advantageous section. The number limiter starts at the time when the number of medals is reduced to the maximum so that the player does not win an extremely large number of medals at one time, and forcibly ends the advantageous section when a positive difference of 2400 medals is obtained. It is something that makes you.

In the figure, about 100 medals have decreased since the start of the advantageous section. This means that, for example, if the start of the advantageous section is the start of the above-mentioned normal advantageous section, the number of medals is reduced due to the game period or the preparation state during the above-mentioned advantageous section. The number of medals has continued to increase from the start of the advantageous section to -100, and finally the number of medals has increased to about +2300. At this point, from the player's point of view, at least 2400 medals are at hand. Therefore, the main control board 71 activates the number limiter to forcibly terminate the advantageous section. Thereby, gambling can be appropriately suppressed.

The main control board 71 may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter, or may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number limiter, and may perform the limit processing of the advantageous section using only the number of games limiter and the number of games. The limit processing of the advantageous section may be performed by using both the limiter and the limiter. When both limiters are used, it is desirable that the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section when one of the limiter activation conditions is satisfied after the advantageous section starts. In this explanation, the number of games limiter is 1500 games and the number of game limiters is 2400, but this is an example, and a value smaller or larger than this is adopted according to the game specifications to make the gambling appropriate. It may be controlled to.

Here, a case where both the game number limiter and the number number limiter are used will be described. More specifically, it is the slope value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section (ART, AT, etc.) (expected net increase per game, expected net increase including increase due to bonus operation) and the activation condition of the number of games limiter. The relationship between the number of games B and the difference number C, which is a condition for activating the number limiter, will be described.
In the following, for convenience of explanation, it is assumed that the slope value A of the medal increase in the advantageous section is "3" and the number of games B which is the activation condition of the number of games limiter is "100 games".

In the first specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) × B (100 games) = C (300 sheets)) in which the inclination value A × the number of games of the number of games limiter B = the difference number of sheets C of the number of sheets limiter is Conceivable. Such a specification is the most basic specification, and it is possible to stably control an advantageous section and appropriately suppress gambling.

In the second specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) x B (100 games) <C (400 sheets)) is that the slope value A x the number of games in the limiter B <the difference number C in the number limiter. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows in consideration of the case where the limiter is activated.

If more than 400 medals are paid out before 100 games are paid out, the number limiter will be activated, and if 100 games are paid out before more than 400 medals are paid out, the number of games will be played. The limiter is activated. If the number of bonuses is drawn more than the expected value, or if the push order role with a large net increase is drawn extremely more than the expected value, the number limiter is activated, and if the game progresses at a value close to the expected value, the number of games The limiter is more likely to be activated. Since the inclination value is "3", as a result, when the limiter is activated, the number of games limiter by reaching 100G is easier to activate than the number limiter, and the player's consciousness is the game rather than the difference number. It will lean toward the number.

That is, since the inclination value is "3", 400 medals are paid out in 133.3 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number of games limiter will be reached before that. Therefore, the ease of activation is as follows: game number limiter> number number limiter. If you do not want to worry about the activation of the number limiter due to the difference in the number of sheets, it is better to use such specifications. For example, in the case of a type in which the end condition (not the limiter) such as ending with a net increase of 100 sheets per set is managed by the difference number, if such a limiter specification is used, the frequency of activation of the limiter can be suppressed and the player can use it. The limiter can reduce the frequency with which the advantageous section is cut off, and can suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

In the third specification, the specification (example: A (3 sheets) x B (100 games)> C (200 sheets)) in which the slope value A x the number of games in the limiter B> the difference number C in the number limiter is set. Conceivable. In the case of such a specification, it is as follows in consideration of the case where the limiter is activated.

If more than 200 medals are paid out before 100 games are paid out, the number limiter will be activated, and if 100 games are paid out before more than 200 medals are paid out, the number of games will be played. The limiter is activated. Since the slope value is "3", 200 medals will be paid out in about 66.6 games on average, and there is a high possibility that the number limiter will be reached before 100 games are exhausted. Therefore, the ease of activation is such that the number of games limiter <the number of games limiter. If you don't want to worry about the activation of the number of games limiter due to the number of games, you can use this specification. For example, for a specification in which the net increase in the number of games per game is relatively low, such as 0.1 to 1, but the number of games continues for a long time, such a specification can suppress the activation frequency of the limiter, and the player can use the limiter. As a result, the frequency with which the advantageous section is cut off can be reduced, and the decline in the interest of the game can be suppressed.

In any specification, the end condition of the advantageous section other than the limiter is more than the ratio of the end when the limiter is reached (for example, the ART continuability period (the number of ART games), the number of sets, the stock becomes zero, etc.). Therefore, it is desirable to suppress the occurrence of an event in which the right to digest the advantageous section is eliminated by activating the limiter as a ball ejection design in which the rate at which the advantageous section ends is high.

Next, the playability that can be realized when a plurality of limiters are provided will be described.

(Direction at the end of the advantageous section according to the type of limiter)
The sub-control board 72 may be able to execute different advantageous section end-time effects by using the display device 11 or the like when the number limiter is activated and when the game number limiter is activated. If each of them is a dedicated production, it will lead to a game motivation to see each production once. Further, the sub-control board 72 may have different distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section depending on the type of the limiter. For example, if the number limiter is used, the accuracy of setting suggestion may be higher than when the game number limiter is activated (the difference in coefficients for each setting is large, or it is easy to produce an effect in which a specific setting is fixed). By obtaining specific information such as setting suggestions or seeing a special effect, it is possible to reduce the discomfort that the advantageous section is cut off by the limiter. Further, the distribution of the effect performed at the end of the advantageous section may be set based on the above-mentioned limiter specifications. For example, in terms of specifications, it is easier for the player to determine the effect (for example, the accuracy of setting suggestion is high) that the sub-control board 72 is preferable to the case where the limiter that is difficult to activate is activated rather than the limiter that is easy to activate. May be good.

(Ending production according to the type of limiter)
Further, the sub-control board 72 has an ending effect A when the number limiter is activated heavily, and an ending effect B when the number of games limiter is activated heavily. There is no big difference in the rate of occurrence, but if at least one of them occurs more heavily, ending effect C (may be an effect with a branch to ending effect A or B), etc. In order to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable due to sudden termination at the end of the advantageous section, an advantageous section end suggestion effect period (ending) may be provided before the limiter is activated. In addition, "the situation where the number limiter is activated" means, for example, when the ART is managed based on information other than the difference number, the difference calculated from the difference number so far and the remaining ART period. The sum with the number of sheets (for example, "the number of remaining games x the inclination value" in the case of ART for managing the number of games) is set to the threshold value (for example, the difference number of sheets in which the number limiter is activated or a value slightly smaller than the difference number of sheets). When it reaches, for example, when ART is managed based on the difference number, the sum of the difference number and the remaining number reaches the threshold value. In addition, "the situation where the activation of the number of games limiter is concentrated" is calculated from the number of games that have passed so far and the remaining ART period, for example, when managing ART based on information other than the number of games. The sum of the number of games to be played (for example, "remaining difference number / gradient value" in the case of ART for managing the difference number) is slightly smaller than the threshold (for example, the number of games in which the number of games limiter is activated or the number of games concerned). (Small value) is reached, and for example, when ART is managed based on the number of games, the sum of the number of games that have passed so far and the number of remaining games reaches the threshold value.

(Notify or suggest the type of limiter activated on the history screen)
Further, the sub-control board 72 displays on the game history screen that the player can view on the menu screen about the type of the activated limiter or the effect generated corresponding to the limiter type (the type of the ending effect, etc.). Is also good. In this case, since a large number of balls have been obtained in the first place, it is possible to arouse the motivation to play that a high setting can be expected.

(Outputs an external signal according to the type of limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output an external signal of a type corresponding to the activated limiter so that the hall side can grasp which of the number limiter and the game number limiter is activated by a hall computer or the like. At this time, the main control board 71 may output an external signal for activating the limiter from different pins of the external terminal board. For example, in the case of the original ball ejection specification, the number of games limiter is mainly activated, and in the model where the number limiter is not activated so much, if the number limiter is activated frequently, some kind of goto action is performed or the game The hall clerk can detect the possibility of a connection error between the machine and the hall computer.

When the activation condition of the number limiter and the activation condition of the number of games limiter are satisfied in the same game, the main control board 71 may output one of the predetermined signals, or two types of signals may be output. It may be output in a predetermined order. When outputting in order, it is preferable to wait a predetermined time from the completion of the output of the signal to be output first to the output of the next signal so that the signal can be reliably received. Further, when the activation condition of the number limiter and the activation condition of the number of games limiter are satisfied in the same game, it is assumed that only one of the limit processing is performed and the other processing is not performed, and the main (main control board 71). In this case, the main control board 71 outputs an external signal according to the type of limiter performed.

(Outputs one external signal regardless of the type of limiter)
Further, if there is a margin in the capacity of the main (main control board 71) and the number of pins of the terminal board for external signal output, they may be different as described above, but the same external signal is used regardless of the type of limiter. May be output. The capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be saved.

(The same external signal is output at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter)
Further, the main control board 71 may output the same external signal at the end of the advantageous section other than the limiter and the end by the limiter, so that the hall computer or the like can detect that the advantageous section has ended. In this case, the capacity of the main (main control board 71) can be further saved.

(Example of external signal output when the limiter is activated during bonus operation (output immediately))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal immediately after the game or the end of the game. By doing this, for example, even if the number of shots obtained exceeds the number of number limiters, it does not mean that the limiter function was inadequate, and the bonus was activated near the number limiter reached by chance to win the ball. Can be confirmed on the hall side.

(External signal output when the limiter is activated while the bonus is operating (at the end of the bonus))
Further, when the limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the main control board 71 may start the output of the external signal at the end of the bonus or immediately after the end. Such a specification may be used when it is desired to accurately grasp the end of the game state in which the number of balls is substantially increased.

(Production when the player misses a small role in a game that may activate the number limiter)
For example, in a three-card game where the number of remaining cards until the number limiter is activated is six, nine medals are paid out at the time of the correct answer. Regardless, if the player makes a mistake in the push order, the number limiter may be activated in the game by looking at the situation at the start of the game, and the production when the number limiter is activated may be started from the start of the game. .. In such a case, as a result of making a mistake in the pushing order, the number limiter is not activated, but the sub-control board 72 is scheduled to activate the number limiter that started from the start of the game (for example, the number limiter is scheduled to be activated). The effect) may be continuously executed as it is, or the effect may be temporarily terminated or interrupted by determining that the number limiter is not activated.

(Production when the limiter to be activated is changed by the operation of the player)
In addition, the type of limiter to be activated may differ due to a player's operation error or the like. For example, in a situation where the number of remaining games until the number limiter is activated is 6 and the number of games remaining until the number of games limiter is activated is 2 games, 9 medals are paid out at the time of correct answer in a 3-card game. This corresponds to the case where the order of pushing the correct answer is notified by winning the small role. In such a case, if the player performs the stop operation according to the notification, the number limiter is activated in the game, but if the player makes a mistake in the pressing order without following the notification, the game number limiter is activated in the next game. (In addition, there is a possibility that the number limiter will be activated in the next game, but here, it is assumed that the number of games limiter is activated with priority when multiple limiter activation conditions are satisfied).

In such a case, the sub-control board 72 starts the effect when the number limiter is activated in the game in which the push order small combination is won, and at an arbitrary timing of the transition in which the non-activation of the number limiter is confirmed (first stop operation ~ When all reels are stopped, switch to the effect when the number of games limiter is activated at any timing after the display of the missing or small number of symbol combinations is confirmed), or the effect does not correspond to the suggestion of any limiter activation. It is preferable to perform a process of returning once and control so as to avoid a contradiction between the limiter to be activated and the effect.

(During the bonus operation, delay of the end effect and extension of the ending effect due to the activation of the limiter inside)
Regarding the effects and controls performed in connection with the limit processing described so far, if the limit processing is performed during the bonus operation described above, the bonus ends the timing of the production according to the end of the advantageous section by the limit processing. By using a method of delaying the time or until immediately after the end and extending the effect during the advantageous section such as the ending effect, the player's discomfort can be reduced.

[How to control the number limiter]
Subsequently, a method of controlling the number limiter will be described with reference to FIG. 101 (B). In the number limiter, the point where the absolute value of the medal has decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is set as the lowest point (starting point), and the plus amount from the latest lowest point is used as the difference number that triggers the activation of the number limiter. .. The figure shows an example in which the game progresses with the start of the advantageous section as the first game, the increase / decrease of medals is repeated in 1 to 8 games, and then the number of medals increases to reach the limiter (pushing order). The small role is written as "batting order bell").

In the figure, the point where the absolute value of medals decreased the most from the start of the advantageous section is "-9", so the number limiter is activated at the timing when the difference is "+2391" in the N game. ing. The counter for the limiter is reset to 0 with the activation of the number limiter. After that, as a result of correctly answering in the order of pushing in the N + 2 game and aligning the bells, the difference number from the starting point exceeds "+2400 sheets", but the number limiter has already been activated and the advantageous section (ART) has ended. , It's only temporary and there is no problem.

In the figure, the absolute difference number from the start of the advantageous section at the end of the payout of the game is shown, but it is a value for explanation, and the corresponding counter does not need to be mounted on the gaming machine. Of course, the corresponding counter may be mounted and used to show the player the number of acquired cards.

Further, the starting point flag is information indicating that the current game situation is the lowest point after the start of the advantageous section. It may be recognized as the lowest point simply because the value of the counter (number counter) used for the limiter is 0 without having the starting point flag, but whether or not the difference number subtraction until the number limiter is activated has started. Is produced on the sub (sub control board 72) side, etc., by referring to the starting point flag that can be performed only by ON / OFF judgment, and producing the value of the number counter without transmitting it to the sub side (main control board). The processing load of 71) can be reduced. In that case, the sub side receives the information on the number of input and the number of payouts transmitted from the main and performs the same processing as the number counter on the sub side, and produces the status of the number counter (notification of the number of sheets until the number limiter is activated). Etc.) may be performed.

The lowest point (starting point) may be updated either when the value becomes the same as or less than the latest lowest point. At the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, the absolute difference number becomes "-3" and then increases once, and at the end of the fourth game, the absolute difference becomes "-3" again. Therefore, the main control board 71 sets the starting point flag again at the end of the fourth game. Actually, since the number of medals has decreased since then, the absolute difference number at the end of the eighth game after the start of the advantageous section is "-9", which is the starting point in the number limiter.

In the figure, the first lowest point is the end of the first game after the start of the advantageous section, but the time before the digestion of one game at the start of the advantageous section (when the absolute difference number is 0) is set. It is set as the first lowest point, the end of one game is the second lowest point, the time when it becomes minus 9 is the third lowest point, and when 2400 sheets are increased from the third lowest point, the number limiter is activated. May be. Further, in the figure, when the replay wins a prize, the number counter is updated with 0 inserted and 0 paid out. As a result, it is not necessary to update the difference number of sheets at the time of replay, and the processing load can be reduced. On the other hand, it is also possible to pay out the number of inserted sheets at the time of winning the replay and update the number counter with the number of inserted sheets being three in the next game. By doing so, the value of the number counter between the time when the replay wins and the time when the start operation of the next game is performed can be matched with the actual difference number behavior, and the value of the number counter can be changed to the actual increase / decrease number. It becomes easy to divert it to the number display for production.

The sub-control board 72 may notify the value of the number counter on the display device 11 (liquid crystal screen) or the like so that the player can grasp or suggest the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated. Further, the sub-control board 72 does not directly display the remaining number of sheets until the number limiter is activated, and if the number of remaining sheets is 2000 or more until the number of sheets limiter is activated, the first production stage, if the remaining 1000 to 1999 sheets, the second production stage, and the remaining 999 sheets. If the number of sheets is less than the number of sheets, it may be suggested that the production stage such as the background is different depending on the number range until the number limiter is activated, as in the third production stage.

Further, the main control board 71 may output the value of the number counter as an external signal so that it can be displayed on a data display for viewing game data installed on a hall computer, an upper part of a pachislot machine, or the like. It is preferable that the main control board 71 maintains the values of the starting point flag and the number counter without erasing even when the power is cut off. On the other hand, the main control board 71 may erase the values of the starting point flag and the number counter when the setting is changed.

[Adjustment method of number limiter]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 102 (C), an adjustment striking method of the number limiter will be described. In the specification of forcibly ending the advantageous section using the number limiter, a method of activating the number limiter can be considered by adjusting the increase / decrease of medals immediately before the activation of the number limiter. For example, if the push order small winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, "9" medals are paid out and the stop operation is performed in the incorrect push order. In the specification that the payout of medals is "0", 3 medals are required in one game, so if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order at the time of winning the push order, the number counter will be set. "+6 sheets" is set, and if the stop operation is performed in the incorrect pressing order when the push order combination is won, the number counter is set to "-3 sheets". Therefore, for example, when the push order is won three times, if the push order is incorrect twice and the correct answer is made once, the value of the number counter is maintained, and as a result, the number limiter is not activated.

By adjusting the number-of-sheet limiter in this way, it is possible to wait for the winning of the bonus while keeping the ART (advantageous section) immediately before the number-of-sheet limiter is activated. In the example shown in the figure, such an adjustment striking method starts from the M game, and the adjustment striking method is performed up to the X game that wins the BB (bonus). As a result, in the X + 10th game, +2512 medals, which exceeds +2400 in which the number limiter is activated, have been obtained (note that the small role (15) in BB is described as "BB medium bell". ).

In Pachislot 1, it is possible to obtain the maximum profit for the player by suggesting or notifying that it is advantageous to intentionally oppose the batting order notification (stop different from the batting order navigation). Operation) may be prompted. It should be noted that such an effect may be performed by the sub-control board 72 via the display device 11 or the like, or may be performed by the main control board 71.

If there are multiple types of bonus roles such as a mini bonus with a net increase of about 15 cards and a relatively high winning probability (15 cards in the bonus operation cannot be missed or difficult) and a bonus with a net increase of 120 cards, the number limiter The effect of recommending the above adjustment striking method may be performed on a line in which the remaining difference number until the arrival is larger than the net increase number in the mini bonus. Further, for the small winning combination other than the pushing order combination, the number of payouts may be easily adjusted (for example, the number of payouts is 3) without increasing the number of payouts exceeding 3. In this way, by making the game playable so that the ball output rate can be improved by devising the way of hitting, the interest of the game is enhanced.

If you place importance on the disadvantages such as the complexity of the game being avoided by beginners, the number counter is not added by the actual net increase, but by the net increase when the game is played as instructed. You may do it. For example, in a three-card game, when a player wins a push order small winning combination in which nine medals are paid out at the time of a correct answer, the main control board 71 may perform an operation mode of the player on the condition that the correct push order is notified. Regardless of the winning result, the number counter is set to +6. As such a specification, a specification that seals such an adjustment striking method may be used.

[Playability with specifications that block the adjustment method]
Next, the playability that can be realized by the specification that seals such an adjustment striking method will be described.

(No bonus installed)
In the first place, if the internal winning combination is composed only of a small role and a replay without installing a bonus role, the player does not have to ask the player for the above-mentioned complicated striking method, and the playability becomes easy to understand.

(Equipped with a bonus that does not increase or decrease or decreases)
In addition, as another specification example of suppressing the above-mentioned striking method, the bonus may be a non-increasing / decreasing bonus in which only a small winning combination in which the same number of coins is paid out during operation is won, and the bonus is thrown during operation. It may be a reduced bonus in which only small wins are paid out, which is less than the number of cards. In this case, the bonus may be performed during the bonus operation or during the bonus operation in the lottery of the advantageous section instead of increasing the medals, and although the advantageous processing is not performed, the player at the game store As long as you play a normal game, the reel control will hinder the winning of the bonus, and the bonus may be difficult to win.

(The net increase in the number of cards during bonus operation is 3 or less)
Assuming a three-card game, there is no payout at the time of bonus winning, so the difference in the bonus winning game is minus three. Assuming that the bonus ends in one game with three cards, the maximum number of winnings that can be generated during the bonus operation is 6 cards or less. By doing so, the difference in the number of sheets from the time when the bonus is activated to the end of the bonus does not become a positive value, so that the value of the number counter does not increase due to the bonus operation, and the above-mentioned complicated striking The player does not have to do the law.

[Playability with specifications that allow adjustment batting]
Next, the playability that can be realized with the specifications that allow such an adjusted batting method will be described.

(Removing small roles during bonus operation or reducing the number of acquired cards)
In addition to the specifications that can be used for the above-mentioned striking method, if the number limiter is activated during the bonus operation, the number of bonuses obtained is intentionally reduced to end the bonus, and after the bonus, the above-mentioned striking method is used. In some cases, it is most advantageous to wait for the next bonus while extending the life of the advantageous section. Therefore, during the bonus operation, it is possible to drop a small winning combination in the pressing timing or pressing order, or to win a winning combination with a small number of payouts. In this case, it is desirable that the winning combination with a small number of payouts is less than the number of coins inserted during the bonus operation. For example, if a specific point is pressed, 14 cards are paid out, and if other points are pressed, 15 cards are paid out. A certain effect can be achieved even if a role that allows fine adjustment such as being received is provided.

(Normal roles other than push order are only replays or roles less than the number of inputs)
For example, it is assumed that three cards are hung while the bonus is not operating. The number of small push order roles is 9, but other roles such as so-called watermelon, cherry, and bell without the concept of push order are configured as a replay role or a role with 3 or less payouts. By doing so, even if another small role is drawn in a situation where the number limiter operates with the net increase of the remaining few sheets, the number limiter does not operate and the difficulty of the capture method is reduced, making it easier to play.

(The player can intervene at the frequency of winning a specific number of cards (1-2 cards) when the stop operation is different from the navigation of the push order role.)
There is a specification that one piece will be paid out or missed if the stop operation is different from the push order navigation. In this case, since the increase / decrease of the game occurs in two ways, minus 2 and minus 3, it is difficult to calculate and it may be confusing while playing. Compared to such specifications, when the number of sheets is fixed, such as when 1 or 2 sheets are always aligned when ignoring the navigation, the negative value when ignoring the navigation with the number of sheets at the last minute is fixed to, for example, minus 2. Therefore, it is easy to calculate, and the careless mistake that the player makes a mistake in the calculation and hits the part that should be ignored by the navigation one more time according to the navigation and takes the batting order bell is reduced.

It should be noted that a certain effect can be exhibited even if the sheet is generally stabilized, such as one sheet being paid out or being missed at a high frequency, not always. In addition, the number of payouts may be stable due to the pattern of ignoring navigation. For example, when the batting order navigation of "1, 2, 3" (left, middle, right is the correct batting order) occurs, the winning rate of 1 card is "middle 1st"> "right 1st", and 3 cards If you want to reduce it, you may choose the right first stop, and if you want to reduce the number of cards, you may choose the middle first stop. In addition, if you miss the second stop after the first stop is correct in the game, and if you stop in the order of "1.3.2", there is a higher probability than other navigation-ignored batting orders, or one card will always win. , It is good that the player can choose how to reduce by batting order.

(Navigation mode changes when navigation should be ignored)
When it is optimal to play according to the navigation, the sub-control board 72 displays the push order in the first mode (blue numbers, etc.), and when it is optimal to play against the navigation, the sub-control board 72. Displays the push order in the second mode (red numbers, etc.).

(Changes depending on the situation or production that should be ignored in navigation)
The main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 may be different depending on the situation in which the BGM, the image, the lamp, or the like is followed by the navigation and the situation in which the navigation is against the navigation. It is desirable to be able to grasp in advance whether or not the situation should be against the navigation when the navigation occurs in the next game before the navigation occurs.

(Lock or reel freeze when navigation should be ignored)
The main control board 71 may be provided with a reel rotation start delay (freeze or reel action) or a temporary operation acceptance invalidation period of the stop button immediately after the lever is turned on or after the reel rotation is started. As a result, the player can be alerted and the case where the advantageous section is accidentally ended can be prevented. Further, it is desirable that the main control board 71 or the sub control board 72 also alerts by audio or video.

[Another example of advantageous section limiter (payout number limiter)]
Here, in the above-mentioned number limiter, the difference number (= payout number-insertion number), that is, based on the value obtained by subtracting the number of medals used in the game from the number of medals paid out to the player. , Limit processing is to be performed, but it is not limited to this. The main control board 71 may perform limit processing using the number of medals paid out to the player, and such a limiter is called a payout number limiter. Specifically, the main control board 71 may perform limit processing for ending the advantageous section when a predetermined number of medals (for example, 2400 medals) are paid out during the advantageous section.

In the above-mentioned number limiter, the limit processing is performed based on the difference number obtained by subtracting the input number from the payout number, but in the payout number limiter, the payout number is referred to as it is without subtracting the input number from the payout number. When the number of payouts reaches the specified value, limit processing is performed. In such a payout limiter, the main control board 71 is an advantageous section (in this case, including, for example, the above-mentioned "normal advantageous section") or an increase section (that is, a game section in which medals actually increase. In this case, for example, for example. The payout number counter is initialized at the start of the above-mentioned "normal advantageous section"), and the payout number counter is updated every time a payout occurs due to a small winning combination. Then, when the value of the payout number counter reaches the specified value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section, and also performs various processing and a limit processing for initializing the value related to the advantageous section.

Even in such a payout number limiter, the method of updating the payout number counter when the winning combination related to the replay is won is arbitrary, and it may be counted as 3 payouts, or it is counted as 0 payout. However, it is desirable that the main control board 71 counts as 0 payouts when the winning combination related to the replay wins. By doing so, for example, in a 3BET game, there are cases where a three-card combination (a combination in which three medals are paid out when a prize is won) is won, and a case where a combination related to replay is won, and a payout number counter. Changes in the value of can be made different. That is, the number of payout counters does not advance when the combination related to the replay wins, compared to the case where the three-card combination wins, so that the player can feel a sense of profit, which is substantially the same. It is possible to make a difference in the value between the three-card combination, which is the value, and the combination related to the replay.

[Another example of advantageous section limiter (navigation number limiter)]
Further, as the type of the limiter used for the limit processing of the advantageous section, the navigation number limiter described below can also be used. When the navigation count limiter is used, the main control board 71 triggers the player to be notified (navigated) a predetermined number of times (for example, 400 times) during the advantageous section (that is, the number of navigations is a specified value). When the result is reached), the limit processing of the advantageous section is performed. Here, among the navigations performed for the player during the advantageous section such as ART, in addition to the navigation for increasing the medals during the advantageous section, the normal section is to maintain the medals or decrease the medals during the advantageous section. There is a navigation system to suppress it compared to the inside. The former navigation is, for example, in the 3BET game, when the correct answer is stopped (for example, when the push order is correct), more than 3 medals (for example, 9 medals) are paid out. It means to notify the mode of the stop operation, and the latter navigation is, for example, a navigation for maintaining the RT state at a high RT, three medals when the mode of the correct stop operation is in the 3BET game, or In the case of the correct answer stop operation mode, there are less than three medals, but in the case of the incorrect answer stop operation mode (for example, when the push order is incorrect), more medals are paid out. It means to notify the aspect of. The former role that is the target of navigation can be called an increasing role that increases medals during the advantageous section (ART) from that role. In pachislot, which of the plurality of roles should be used as an increasing combination can be arbitrarily designed from the viewpoint of game specifications.

When the navigation number limiter is used, the main control board 71 counts the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the increasing combination, which is a condition for generating the limit processing by the navigation number limiter, while the non-increasing combination. The number of navigations performed at the time of winning may be excluded from the counting target of the number of navigations, and the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role may also be included in the counting target of the number of navigations. May be good. By excluding the number of navigations performed at the time of winning the non-increasing role from the count target, the number of medals has increased too much, as in the case where many non-increasing roles were accidentally established after the start of the advantageous section (ART). If this is not the case, it is possible to prevent the advantageous section from ending due to an event unrelated to the purpose of the limiter, which is to suppress excessive ball ejection, and the player will not be dissatisfied.

In such a navigation count limiter, the main control board 71 initializes a navigation count counter (navigation counter), which is a condition for generating a limit process at the start of an advantageous section or an increase section, to generate a navigation to be counted. The value of the navigation count counter is updated each time. Then, when the value of the navigation count counter reaches the specified value for performing the limit processing, the main control board 71 ends the advantageous section, and also performs various processing and limiting processing for initializing the value related to the advantageous section. In the various limiters described so far, the method of updating the counter may be an addition type or a subtraction type.

[Another example of limiter period]
Further, in the above description, an example in which a limiter such as a game number limiter, a number number limiter, a payout number limiter, and a navigation number limiter is used only in an advantageous section has been described, but such a limiter is not in the advantageous section. It can be adopted at any time. For example, if you accidentally continue to hit the advantageous section, medals will be paid out only for the maximum number of medals in each advantageous section, but as a result of multiple transitions to the advantageous section, the total Then, many medals may be paid out, which may incite excessive gambling. Therefore, apart from the limiter in the advantageous section, a value (for example, the payout rate and the difference number) indicating the increase status of the period (for example, the latest 6000 games) for the latest predetermined number of games is a predetermined predetermined value. A special limiter may be provided to terminate the advantageous section when the number exceeds (for example, 170% or +10000 sheets from the viewpoint of the player). According to such a special limiter, when the activation condition of the special limiter is satisfied during the advantageous section, the main control board 71 has just started the advantageous section, and the game number limiter and the number number limiter are completely activated. Even if the situation is not possible, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated.

In the control of the advantageous section on the main control board 71, the right regarding the advantageous section currently acquired (for example, the duration of ART (the number of ART games), the number of sets and stock, the number of gainable differences, etc.) is issued. When there is a risk that the special limiter will be activated with reference to the ball rate, the main control board 71 will reduce the occurrence rate of the addition before reaching the specified value, and the possibility of activating the special limiter will be increased. It may be controlled so that the right of the increase interval (ART) to be lowered or erased when the special limiter is activated is reduced.

Further, the predetermined period used for determining the activation of the special limiter based on the value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the difference number of medals) may be based on a value other than the number of games, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 10). Determine the predetermined period for activating the special limiter by using information such as time) and a predetermined number of inserted sheets (for example, 18,000 inserted sheets) that can determine that the player has played the game over a predetermined period. May be.

The configuration of a pachislot machine using such a special limiter is shown below.
It is a gaming machine that can be played using the gaming value.
The right (pachislot) to make the gaming state an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player (for example, an advantageous section in pachislot, an increasing section (AT, ART), a probabilistic state in pachinko, or a shortened time state). It may be the AT stock, the number of AT games, etc. in the pachinko machine, or it may be the right to shift to the probabilistic state, the time saving state, etc. in pachinko). When,
A game state control means (for example, a main control board 71) that controls the game state to the advantageous game state until the end condition is satisfied based on the right.
Advantageous gaming state continuation means for continuing the advantageous gaming state when there is the right (for example, the main control board 71 (the AT state may be continued when there is the number of AT stocks in the pachislot machine, etc., and the pachinko machine). It may be a continuation of the probable change state or the time saving state in)),
An increase status storage means (for example, a difference number used by the main control board 71 to determine the activation condition of the special limiter) for storing a value indicating an increase status of the game value from a predetermined unit game to the elapse of a predetermined period. Counter for monitoring the payout rate) and
A gaming machine including a special termination means (special limiter) for terminating the advantageous state even if the player has the right when the value of the increase status storage means reaches a predetermined predetermined value.

Further, the above-mentioned special limiter is not limited to the latest predetermined period, and may be, for example, a daily limiter, or both may be used in combination. The method by which the main control board 71 grasps the daily unit is arbitrary. As an example, when the main control board 71 is cut off for a predetermined time (a time value that can be distinguished from a temporary power failure during business hours such as 2 hours and 4 hours and can be presumed to be a power failure during closing due to the closing of business). Or, a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, by resetting the information for the previous day) from the start point (starting point) of the day when the power is turned on after the power is turned off for a predetermined time or longer. The special limiter is controlled by monitoring the payout rate and the difference number. Further, the main control board 71 resets the information for the previous day from the starting point (that is, the information for the previous day) with the time when a predetermined time (1 hour or the like) or more has elapsed in the power-on state as the starting point (starting point) of the day. ), The special limiter may be controlled by monitoring a value indicating the increase status of medals (for example, the payout rate or the difference number). In any case, the timekeeping method can be realized by mounting a timekeeping means such as an RTC on the main control board 71.

[Penalty for navigation mistakes]
Further, in the pachi-slot machine 1, the main control board 71 may be given a predetermined penalty when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player during the advantageous section. For example, in the case of a specification in which an additional lottery of ART is performed while waiting for a transition to a high RT such as during ART preparation (each preparation state described above), the transition to a high RT is avoided and the ART is being prepared. By stretching it, you can receive a lot of extra lottery while preparing for ART. Therefore, the main control board 71 may not perform such an additional lottery of ART when the stop operation is performed without following the notification given to the player. Since it is not possible to determine whether the error is an accidental error or an intentional error, for example, the main control board 71 changes the degree of penalty according to the number of stop operations that do not follow the notification. May be.

<Detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specifications)>
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 103 to 122, a detailed example of another example (No. 6) of the game playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. Although another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification) has already been described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99, this detailed example will describe an example more embodied as a gaming machine. Further, among the inventions described in this detailed example, those that do not require the specifications of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specifications) can be appropriately applied to other game playability (game specifications). Suppose there is. Further, in this detailed example, a line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the left reel 3L, the middle stage region of the middle reel 3C, and the middle stage region of the right reel 3R is defined as an effective line in the frame of the reel display window 4. do.

[Playability of this detailed example]
First, the flow of the game in this detailed example will be described with reference to FIGS. 103 to 106. Note that FIG. 103 is a diagram showing a transition flow of a gaming state in a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section in this detailed example, and FIG. 104 is a diagram for explaining each mode in this detailed example, and FIGS. 105 and 105. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of various tables in this detailed example.

As shown in FIG. 103, in this detailed example, the state in which the player plays a game is roughly divided into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section, and the advantageous section is further divided into an effect section (advantageous section / normal game) and an increasing section. (Advantageous section / pseudo bonus) is provided. The non-advantageous section is a gaming state (non-AT / non-ART) in which information on a stop operation that is advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state that is disadvantageous to the player. The production section is a gaming state (non-AT / non-ART) in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state disadvantageous to the player, which is the same as the non-advantageous section, but will be described later. As such, it differs from the non-advantageous section in that the mode transition is performed.

That is, the non-advantageous section is defined as an initial state that is controlled when the game in the advantageous section is completed, when the setting change operation is performed, when other initialization conditions are satisfied, or when the product is shipped from the factory. The effect section is a control state as a normal state in which the expected degree of increase section transition (granting) can be changed by mode transition or the like, and the player plays a normal game.

On the other hand, the increasing section is a gaming state (AT / ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and is a gaming state advantageous to the player. That is, the increase section is a control state as an advantageous state in which the player can increase the game value. Both the production section and the increase section are advantageous sections, and are configured as a series of advantageous sections by shifting these sections to each other.

In this detailed example, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the non-advantageous section sub-flag as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 108 described later) is determined in the non-advantageous section. Will be done. This is information set for the same purpose as the "lottery number" described in the present embodiment, and in the non-advantageous section, a lottery using this non-advantageous section sub-flag is performed.

The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Ripbell" has internal winning roles of "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "F_Replay B" (No. "4"), and "F_Bell 123A1" to "F_Bell 321B2". "(No." 10 "to No." 33 "). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "weak che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_cherry" (No. "5"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "watermelon" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "fixed combination" is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_fixed cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach" (No. "8"). The non-advantageous section sub-flag "Middle Che" is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_Middle Cherry" (No. "7"). It should be noted that the non-advantageous section can also be configured so that the winning sub-flag and the winning sub-flag can be determined as in the advantageous section. Further, these correspondences are not limited to those described above.

Further, in this detailed example, as shown in FIG. 105 (a), the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined as the secondary information (sub-flag) according to the internal winning combination (see FIG. 108 described later) in the advantageous section. Will be done. Further, in the advantageous section, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section as secondary information (sub-flag) according to the combination of the displayed symbols is determined. These are information set for the same purpose as the "lottery number" described in the present embodiment, and in the advantageous section, lottery is performed using these advantageous section winning sub-flags and advantageous section winning sub-flags.

The sub-flag "bell" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is any one of "F_bell 123A1" to "F_bell 321B2" (No. "10" to No. "33"). The sub-flag "weak che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_cherry" (No. "5"). The sub-flag "watermelon" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"). The sub-flag "fixed combination" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is either "F_fixed cherry" (No. "6") or "F_reach eye" (No. "8"). .. The sub-flag "middle che" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined when the internal winning combination is "F_middle cherry" (No. "7").

The sub-flag "Tsu Lip 1" at the time of winning the advantageous section is "Right" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). It is determined when the combination of the symbols of "rising rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "rising rip to the right"). The sub-flag "Through Lip 2" at the time of winning the advantageous section is "parallel" when the internal winning combination is either "F_Replay A" (No. "3") or "F_Replay B" (No. "4"). It is determined when the combination of the symbols of "rip" is displayed (that is, when the winning combination is "parallel lip").

Here, in this detailed example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_replay A" (No. "3"), the space between the 3BB flags (that is, "F_3BB" (No. "2") is In the state where it is determined as the internal winning combination and it is carried over), the combination of the symbols of "upward rising lip" is displayed, and the space between the 2BB flags (that is, "F_2BB" (No. "1") is the internal winning combination. (A state in which it is carried over) and between non-flags (that is, a state in which neither "F_2BB" (No. "1") nor "F_3BB" (No. "2") is carried over). In, the combination of "parallel lip" symbols is displayed.

Therefore, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), "Through Lip 1" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section between the 3BB flags, and between the 2BB flags and the non-flags. "Tsu Lip 2" is now determined as a sub-flag when winning an advantageous section. Then, in this detailed example, when the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section are different in this way, various lottery to be described later (for example, a pseudo-bonus transition lottery using the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (c) or FIG. 106 ( The degree of advantage in the mode transition lottery) using the mode transition lottery table shown in f) is changed.

In this detailed example, for example, "F_replay A" (No. "3") is used as a role in which the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section changes depending on whether it is between the 3BB flags or between the 2BB flags. As explained by giving an example, the mode in which the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section changes is not limited to this. For example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_bell 123B1" (No. "12"), the stop control is different depending on whether it is between the 3BB flags and the 2BB flags. Therefore, when winning such a combination, the game value may not be changed, the combination of displayed symbols may be different, and different sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section may be determined. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, as will be described later, when the internal winning combination is "F_watermelon" (No. "9"), the pressing position (timing of stop operation) is appropriate regardless of which flag is between. If there is, the combination of "watermelon" symbols will be displayed, and if the pressing position is not appropriate, a dropout will occur and the combination of "watermelon spills" symbols will be displayed. In this case, different advantageous section winning sub-flags may be determined depending on whether the winning is possible without the omission occurring or the omission occurs. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

Further, for example, when the internal winning combination is "F_Replay A" (No. "3"), the stop operation is a specific mode between the 3BB flags (in this specific mode, for example, the stop operation is defined in advance. If it is performed in the batting order (correct answer pressing order), the pressing position (timing of the stop operation) is appropriate, or a combination of these, any aspect may be used). The combination of "parallel rip" symbols is displayed, and if it is not performed in a specific mode, the combination of "right-up rip" symbols is displayed, which determines a different advantageous section winning sub-flag. You may do so. Then, the degree of advantage in various lottery described later may be changed according to the difference in the sub-flags at the time of winning the advantageous section.

That is, in this detailed example, it is possible that the final stop display mode may differ depending on the number of bets, the game state, the mode of the stop operation, or any combination of these, and the specific combination is different. It is possible to apply all the modes in which different secondary information can be determined according to the stop display mode, whereby the degree of advantage can be changed.

Return to the description of the game playability of this detailed example. In the non-advantageous section, a lottery for shifting to the advantageous section is performed for each game. Specifically, the advantageous section transition lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (b) is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the non-advantageous section sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing, the transition destination mode and the like are determined according to the non-game section sub-flag. In this determination, when only the type of the mode when shifting to the advantageous section is determined (“start of advantageous section” in FIG. 103), not only the type of the mode but also the pseudo bonus may be shifted. There is a case where it is decided (in FIG. 103, "start of advantageous section + start of pseudo bonus"). However, in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to make the specifications so that it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus.

Here, each mode in this detailed example will be described with reference to FIG. 104. In this detailed example, the mode is control information (which may be paraphrased as a game state or a control state) for changing the degree of expectation of an increase section (pseudo-bonus) transition (grant) in an effect section (normal game). In the production section (normal game), according to this mode, it is decided whether or not there is a pseudo-bonus transition, the advantageous section is maintained, or the advantageous section is terminated and the transition to the non-advantageous section is determined. It has become.

The start mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section (directing section), and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see the figure below). (See (c) of 105), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 106 described later). Although not shown, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games" in the start mode. The number of ceiling games is used to forcibly shift to the pseudo-bonus when the period during which the pseudo-bonus does not shift becomes a certain period. Therefore, the smaller the number of ceiling games, the more advantageous to the player, and the larger the number of ceiling games, the more disadvantageous to the player.

Normally, the A mode is the mode in which the player is most likely to stay and is relatively disadvantageous in playing the game, and the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low ((c) in FIG. 105 described later). (See), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 106 described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games". Further, in FIG. 104, "about 999G after the pseudo-bonus" means that after the end of the pseudo-bonus, the mode shifts to the end A mode or the end B mode, which will be described later, and 32 games without shifting to the pseudo-bonus in the mode. If this normal A mode is selected when the game is played and once transitions to the non-advantageous section and then transitions from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the apparent number of ceiling games is "965 games" + end A. This is expressed because it is the game period "32 games" in the mode or the end B mode + the number of games required to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. Hereinafter, the same applies to the normal B mode, the heaven preparation mode, and the chance mode.

Normally, B mode is a mode that is relatively easy for the player to stay in playing a game and is relatively disadvantageous, but it is a mode that is more advantageous than normal A mode, and the degree of expectation to shift to a pseudo bonus is high. It is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 105 below), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) in FIG. 106 described later). In the normal A mode, the number of ceiling games is set to "965 games".

In the heaven preparation mode, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), but the number of ceiling games is set to "466 games", and when shifting to the pseudo bonus. After that, it is confirmed that the mode will shift to the heaven mode (see (f) in FIG. 106 described later), so that the mode is relatively advantageous in that sense.

In the chance mode, the expectation of shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is set to "222 games", which is relatively advantageous in that sense. Mode. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 106 described later).

End A mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode because it is easy to stay if you do not shift to heaven mode (including heaven preparation mode) after the transition to the pseudo bonus, and you expect to shift to the pseudo bonus. The degree is the lowest (see (c) of FIG. 105 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see (f) of FIG. 106 described later). In the end A mode, when 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section.

The end B mode is a relatively disadvantageous mode, but it is more advantageous than the end A mode because it is easy to stay when the pseudo bonus is changed and the heaven mode (including the heaven preparation mode) is not changed after the end. Since it is a mode, the expectation of shifting to a pseudo bonus is relatively low (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), and the expectation of shifting to a more advantageous mode is also relatively low (see the figure described later). 106 (see (f)). In the end B mode, as in the end A mode, when 32 games are played without shifting to the pseudo bonus after the end of the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section itself ends and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. The end A mode and the end B mode can also be collectively referred to as the "end mode".

The guarantee mode is a mode in which the player stays when the heaven C mode ends, and the expectation for shifting to the pseudo bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32 games". Since it is set to, it is a relatively advantageous mode in that sense. However, the degree of expectation for shifting to the heaven mode is not high (see (f) in FIG. 106 described later). That is, when the heaven C mode ends, it is positioned as a mode for maintaining (guaranteeing) a relatively advantageous state for a certain period of time in order to prevent a decrease in interest due to it.

Heaven A mode is a mode in which a pseudo-bonus can be expected to be a so-called consecutive villa, and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32". It is a relatively advantageous mode that is set to "Game" and the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to a medium level. Although not shown in FIG. 104, for example, a setting difference may be provided for the ceiling mode loop rate. For example, when the set value is an odd number (1,3,5), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 75%, and when the set value is an even number (2,4,6), the ceiling mode loop rate is about 67%. The lottery value can be set so as to be, or the lottery value can be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the ceiling mode loop rate. The same applies to the heaven B mode and the heaven C mode, which will be described later, and a setting difference can be provided for the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven B mode is a mode in which a pseudo-bonus can be expected to be a so-called consecutive villa, and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32". It is a relatively advantageous mode that is set to "game" and has a high probability that the ceiling mode will be maintained (heaven mode loop rate). That is, it is a mode that is even more advantageous than the heaven A mode in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate.

Heaven C mode is a mode in which a pseudo-bonus can be expected to be a so-called consecutive villa, and the expectation of shifting to a pseudo-bonus is relatively high (see (c) in FIG. 105 described later), and the number of ceiling games is "32". It is a relatively advantageous mode that is set to "game" and the probability that the ceiling mode is maintained (heaven mode loop rate) is set to be quite high. That is, in terms of the ceiling mode loop rate, the mode is more advantageous than the heaven A mode and the heaven B mode. Heaven A mode, heaven B mode, and heaven C mode can be collectively referred to as "heaven mode".

It should be noted that each of the above-mentioned modes is merely an example, and the mode configuration is not limited to this. It is possible to set a mode other than each of the above-mentioned modes, or it is possible not to set a part of each of the above-mentioned modes.

Further, up to this point, the non-advantageous section has been described as having a relatively lower advantage than the advantageous section, but the relationship between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section is not limited to such an aspect. For example, in the non-advantageous section, the transition rate to the increasing section is higher or the average number of games required to shift to the increasing section is shorter than when at least one or more modes are set in the advantageous section. It is also possible to make specifications such as squeezing, or specifications that make it easier for non-advantageous sections to be the most increasing sections. By doing so, an incentive to play the game is created even in a non-advantageous section such as after the setting is changed, which motivates the game to start even when the store is opened. Further, when 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo bonus, for example, even when the lighting of the advantageous section lamp described later is finished, it is not determined that the most disadvantageous state will be obtained, so that the game can be played even in such a case. It will be a motivation to continue. Further, up to this point, the effect section has been described as a gaming state in which information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, but a disadvantageous mode as compared with the increase section (for example, the frequency of notification is reduced or the target of notification is targeted. If it is (such as changing the winning combination), it is possible to set the game state in which the information of the stop operation is notified.

Return to the description of the game playability of this detailed example. In the production section (normal game), first, for each game, a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, during the game after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (c) is referred to, the internal winning combination is determined, and the advantageous section winning sub-flag is determined according to the internal winning combination. At a predetermined timing of, it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In addition, in (c) of FIG. 105, "non-winning" means not shifting to the pseudo-bonus, and "winning (this time game)" means shifting from this game to the pseudo-bonus. "Winning (next game)" means shifting from the next game to a pseudo bonus.

In this detailed example, when the "winning (this time game)" is decided, the game operation is performed at the start of the current game, and when the "winning (next game)" is decided, the game operation is performed at the start of the next game. The stop operation) is invalidated for a certain period of time, and during the invalid period, a reel effect (“red 7 aligned” effect) in which “red 7” symbols are aligned and displayed in the symbol display area 4 is performed, and then pseudo. If it is necessary to notify the information of the stop operation in the game in which the bonus is started and the "Red 7 Alignment" effect is performed, at least the invalid period ends and the game operation (stop operation) becomes effective. At times (or earlier), information on the stop operation is notified.

In the production section (normal game), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. As a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery described later will be performed. (At the time of winning) and mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) will not be held.

In the production section (normal game), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), for each game (more specifically, "F_replay A" or "F_replay"). In the game that wins "B"), a pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed with reference to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Specifically, during the game (next time) after the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (c) is referred to, the winning combination is determined, and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined according to the winning combination. At a predetermined timing (before the start of the game), it is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus according to the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section.

In the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (c), "passing lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, rather than when "passing lip 1" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. In that case, the percentage of decisions to shift to a pseudo-bonus is higher. However, the mode in which "communication lip 2" is given preferential treatment over "communication lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, similar to the one already described in another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specification), when "tsurip 2" is determined as a sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section, a pseudo bonus is given with a predetermined probability. However, if "tsurip 1" is determined as a sub-flag when winning an advantageous section, it may not be possible to determine the transition to a pseudo-bonus.

In the production section (normal game), if it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. As a result of the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed, the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) described later is not performed.

In the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f), "passing lip 2" was determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, rather than when "passing lip 1" was determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section. In the case, the rate at which it is decided to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player is higher. However, the mode in which "communication lip 2" is given preferential treatment over "communication lip 1" is not limited to this. For example, when "Through Lip 2" is determined as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, it may be decided to shift to the mode which is relatively advantageous to the player with a predetermined probability, but as the sub-flag when winning the advantageous section, " When the "passing lip 1" is determined, it may not be possible to decide to shift to a mode that is relatively advantageous to the player.

In the production section (normal game), if it is not decided to shift to the pseudo bonus as a result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the number of ceiling games is updated (addition method or subtraction method may be used), and the ceiling game. When the number reaches the number of ceiling games associated with the current mode, it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus. In this case, it is possible to make sure that the "winning (current game)" is decided, or it is possible to make sure that the "winning (next game)" is decided. Also, any of these can be determined by lottery.

In the production section (normal game), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus due to the arrival of the number of ceiling games, a mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode.

The processing related to the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of sub-flag, and the rest is the same processing content, so that the same lottery table and control flow Can be controlled using. In addition, the processing related to the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) and the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) differ only in the type of subflag, and the rest is the same processing content, so the same lottery table and control flow are used. Can be controlled.

In addition, if "winning (this time game)" is not provided as the type of winning of the pseudo-bonus, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is already determined at the timing when the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined, and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section is also determined. Since the number of ceiling games can also be updated, the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), the pseudo-bonus transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the pseudo-bonus transition processing at the time of reaching the ceiling can be performed together in one process. can. Similarly, the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), the mode transition lottery (at the time of winning), and the mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) can be collectively performed in one process.

Return to the description of the game playability of this detailed example. As described above, in the production section (normal game), when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus and the pseudo bonus is started (“pseudo bonus start” in FIG. 103), the shift to the increase section (pseudo bonus). do. Further, as described above, in the production section (normal game), when the game is controlled to the end A mode or the end B mode and the game of 32 games is digested without shifting to the pseudo bonus (in FIG. 103, "advantageous section". End (via end A / B) ”), shift to a non-advantageous section. Further, when the condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, is satisfied, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (“end of advantageous section (limit processing)” in FIG. 103), and as a result, Move to a non-advantageous section.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a ceiling shortening lottery is performed when the pseudo-bonus is started. Specifically, the ceiling shortening lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (e) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to shorten the number of ceiling games after the end of the pseudo bonus according to the current mode. In addition, in (e) of FIG. 106, "non-winning" means that the number of ceiling games is not shortened, and "winning (number of ceiling games = 0 update)" is "winning (number of ceiling games = 0 update)" regardless of the mode after the pseudo bonus ends. , Means that the number of ceiling games to be set is set to "0" (shortened). The ceiling shortening lottery can be performed not only when the pseudo-bonus is started, but also every game during the pseudo-bonus.

If it is decided not to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, and if you do not have the 1G consecutive stock described later when the pseudo bonus ends, the number of ceiling games according to the current mode Is set (in the case of the end A mode and the end B mode, the number of ceiling games "965 games" may be temporarily set, or the advantageous section ends and the non-advantageous section is passed again to the advantageous section. It may be set at times), the pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 103), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game). On the other hand, if it is decided to shorten the number of ceiling games as a result of the ceiling shortening lottery, "0 games" is set as the number of ceiling games when the pseudo bonus ends. As a result, the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus is started when the number of ceiling games is reached, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery (at the time of ceiling) is performed.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game in which "fixed combination" or "middle che" is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section). .. Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In addition, the transition destination mode may be determined even when the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section other than the above is determined, but in this case, in principle, the mode which is relatively disadvantageous compared to the current mode shifts. In order not to be determined as the first mode, another mode transition lottery table having a different lottery value from the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) may be referred to.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a mode transition lottery (at the time of winning) is performed for each game (more specifically, in the game that wins "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B"). Specifically, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) is referred to, and the transition destination mode is determined according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. In this case, as in the above, in principle, the mode transition lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (f) is a lottery value so that a mode relatively disadvantageous compared to the current mode is not determined as the transition destination mode. Another mode transition lottery table with a different value may be referenced.

In the increase section (pseudo-bonus), 1G consecutive lottery is performed for each game. Specifically, the 1G consecutive lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (d) is referred to, and it is determined whether or not to generate the 1G consecutive lottery according to the current mode and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section or the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Will be done. In addition, in (d) of FIG. 106, "non-winning" means that 1G series is not generated, and "winning (1G series + 1)" has one right to generate 1G series (1G series stock). It means that it is given (1G continuous stock counter is added by 1). A plurality of (maximum 255) 1G continuous stocks can be stocked (stored) by the 1G continuous stock counter. Therefore, a plurality of 1G continuous stocks may be given in one pseudo bonus. Further, the 1G continuous lottery table can be configured so that a plurality of 1G continuous lottery can be given by one 1G continuous lottery.

When the pseudo bonus ends, if the value of the 1G series stock counter is 1 or more (that is, if you have 1G series stock), one 1G series stock is consumed (1G series stock counter becomes (1 is subtracted), and the pseudo bonus will be started again from the next game after the pseudo bonus ends. In this case, since the pseudo bonus according to the right of 1G continuous stock is started, the above-mentioned mode transition lottery is not performed. On the other hand, when the value of the 1G series stock counter is not 1 or more at the end of the pseudo bonus (that is, when the 1G series stock is not held), or if the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery is not won, The number of ceiling games may be set according to the current mode (in the case of the end A mode and the end B mode, the number of ceiling games "965 games" may be temporarily set, or the advantageous section ends and is not again. It may be set when the game shifts to the advantageous section via the advantageous section), the pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 103), and the game shifts to the production section (normal game).

If you win the ceiling shortening lottery and also have 1G consecutive stock, the result of the ceiling shortening lottery will be prioritized, and after the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the 1G consecutive stock will be given. It may be executed, or the 1G continuous stock may be prioritized, and after the pseudo bonus corresponding to the 1G continuous stock is executed, the pseudo bonus according to the ceiling shortening may be executed. In the latter case, it is sufficient to separately store the information that can be carried over that there is a ceiling shortening.

In this detailed example, as an example of the configuration of the increase section (pseudo-bonus), a configuration in which a maximum of 275 cards can be obtained by continuing for "55 games" is given as an example, but the configuration of the pseudo-bonus is not limited to this. For example, the pseudo-bonus is configured as a "pseudo-BB (big bonus)", and a "pseudo-RB (regular bonus)", which is a pseudo-bonus that can be continued for "22 games" and can acquire up to 110 cards, is installed. You may do so. In this case, when it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus (grant the right) in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, when reaching the ceiling, in the 1G continuous lottery, the type (for example, "pseudo-BB") is used. Or "pseudo RB") may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, 50% each). The value of the "pseudo RB" may be different from that of the "pseudo BB" (more specifically, the value is lower than that of the "pseudo BB"). Therefore, for example, the number of continuous games is "pseudo BB". It is the same as "BB", but by setting the bell navigation rate (notification probability that information on the stop operation is notified) to be low, it is possible to make a difference in the maximum number of sheets that can be acquired and make the values different. Further, when starting the "pseudo RB", a reel effect in which the "BAR" symbols are displayed in the symbol display area 4 or a reel effect in which "red 7-red 7-BAR" is displayed is performed. You can do it like this. Furthermore, the increase interval is not limited to what is configured as a pseudo-bonus. For example, it can be configured as an AT state or an ART state in which the number of continuous games (game period) can be changed.

Further, if the execution condition of the limit processing shown in FIG. 114, which will be described later, is satisfied during the pseudo bonus, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated (in FIG. 103, “end of advantageous section by limit processing””. ), As a result, it shifts to a non-advantageous section.

In this detailed example, the above-mentioned game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is played in a three-card bet state. Therefore, when the game is played in the state of two bets, various lottery using the above-mentioned (a) to (d) of FIG. 105 and (e) and (f) of FIG. 106 is not performed, and the ceiling. The number of games is not updated either. In addition, if two cards are bet during the pseudo-bonus, the duration of the pseudo-bonus does not progress. However, since the game value does not increase in the two-card bet state, the increase section does not occur during the pseudo-bonus in the two-card bet state. That is, whether this detailed example and another example (No. 6) of the game playability (game specification) described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99 are between the 2BB flags or between the 3BB flags. Although the specifications are different depending on the specifications, the three-card bet state is the state in which the normal game is played, and the player is always disadvantaged when the game is played in the two-card bet state. ..

Further, in this detailed example, the above-mentioned game flow is basically based on the premise that the game is performed in a non-bonus state. Therefore, when the game is played in the bonus state (2BB state and 3BB state), various lottery using the above-mentioned (a) to (d) of FIG. 105 and (e) and (f) of FIG. 106 is performed. Also, the number of ceiling games is not updated. However, if the bonus state is reached during the pseudo-bonus, the duration of the pseudo-bonus will proceed. That is, this detailed example and another example (No. 6) of the game playability (game specification) described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99 can win a winning bonus combination or win a prize according to the number of bets. It is common in that the specifications are different by making the bonus combination (transferable bonus state) different, but it is different in that activating the bonus state may be disadvantageous to the player. There is.

(Invention 1 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in this detailed example, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the ceiling shortened lottery table shown in FIG. 106 (e), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, the heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode, 1 The ceiling shortening lottery is won with a probability of / 8 (32/256), while the ceiling shortening lottery is not won in other modes. That is, in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games", and in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than that, the "32 games" may be shortened to "0 games". The number of ceiling games is not reduced.

Even in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is larger than "32 games", the number of ceiling games has a lower probability (for example, 1/64) than in the mode in which the number of ceiling games is "32 games". May be determined to be shortened.

Further, the mode of reducing the number of ceiling games is not limited to the above. For example, if "32 games" is shortened to a predetermined number of games (0 to 31 games), the same effect can be exerted. Therefore, the number of games to be shortened when the ceiling shortening lottery is won is further determined. Alternatively, in the ceiling shortening lottery, the number of games to be shortened may be determined in advance.

Further, the opportunity for the ceiling shortening lottery to be performed is not limited to the above. For example, during the pseudo-bonus, a ceiling shortening lottery may be performed for each game. In addition, in the advantageous section (normal game), when the current mode is one of the guaranteed mode, the heaven A mode, the heaven B mode, and the heaven C mode, the ceiling shortening lottery is performed for each game. It may be. In these cases, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section and the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section may be referred to to determine whether or not to win the ceiling shortening lottery.

Further, as described above, in this detailed example, 1G continuous lottery is performed during the pseudo bonus. Here, looking at the 1G continuous lottery table shown in FIG. 105 (d), the 1G continuous stock may be given regardless of the current mode. That is, regardless of whether or not the mode is such that the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the right to continue the pseudo bonus can be granted.

The mode of granting the right is not limited to the above. For example, when the number of ceiling games is "32 games", the 1G continuous lottery is prevented in consideration of the fact that the ceiling shortening lottery is performed, and the number of ceiling games is larger than "32 games". It is possible to prevent the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high by performing the 1G continuous lottery at the time.

Further, the opportunity for the 1G continuous lottery to be performed is not limited to the above. For example, the 1G continuous lottery may be performed in the advantageous section (directing section) other than the pseudo bonus, and the 1G continuous stock stocked as a result may be digested in the next pseudo bonus.

Although not shown in FIGS. 103 to 106, in this detailed example, when the current mode is the heaven mode at the start of the pseudo-bonus or during the pseudo-bonus, the probability is different from normal. During the special bonus, the effect is such that a different song is output or a character lamp is lit to indicate that it is in an advantageous state. Therefore, when the effect during the special bonus is executed, it can be expected that the ceiling shortening lottery will be executed. In addition, the effect during this special bonus may be executed with a 100% probability when the ceiling shortening lottery is won. In this way, for example, if the special bonus mid-effect is executed at the start of the pseudo-bonus, it is suggested that he is at least staying in heaven mode, and it is expected that he may have won the ceiling shortening lottery. It can make you feel. Further, the effect during the special bonus may be executed with a predetermined probability or a 100% probability even when the 1G continuous lottery is won during the pseudo bonus. In this way, (1) heaven mode only, (2) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning, (3) heaven mode + 1G consecutive winning, (4) heaven mode + ceiling shortening winning + 1G consecutive winning, (5) 1G consecutive winning It is possible to suggest various possibilities such as winning only, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, when it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period (32 games) after the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) ends (for example,). In the case of heaven mode), the period can be further shortened, so even if the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited (for example, when limit processing is executed), the player can do as much as possible. It is possible to prevent a decline in the interest of the game by allowing the game to be played in a state of a high degree of advantage.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this detailed example, even when it is not determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends (for example, in the case of the end mode), Since the advantageous state may be started again by granting the right (for example, 1G continuous stock), it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, according to the gaming machine of this detailed example, since the continuation of a series of advantageous sections is restricted by the continuous gaming period or the amount of gaming value given, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high. However, the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

(Invention 2 according to this detailed example)
Although not shown in FIGS. 103 to 106, in this detailed example, when the “determined combination” is determined as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section (that is, “F_determined cherry” or “F_reach eye” is determined. If it is decided as an internal winning combination) and it is decided to shift to heaven C mode as a result of the mode transition lottery described above, there is a 1/2 probability (this probability is arbitrary). A special freeze effect can be performed. In addition, even when the sub-flag "middle check" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined (that is, when "F_middle cherry" is determined as the internal winning combination), the player also has a "fixed combination" as the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section. Since it is possible to receive the same benefits as when "" is determined, when the sub-flag "Middle Che" is determined when the advantageous section is won, and when "fixed combination" is determined as the sub-flag when the advantageous section is won. Similarly, a special freeze effect may be made feasible.

Here, since the "fixed role" is a role that also confirms the pseudo-bonus transition (see (c) in FIG. 105), the player shifts to the pseudo-bonus and shifts to the heaven C mode when the special freeze effect is executed. It has become possible to recognize that there was a problem, and it has become very interesting for players. The special freeze effect is configured as, for example, an effect in which the game operation (stop operation) is invalidated for about 20 seconds at the start of the game. During this period, a special reel effect such that each reel vibrates or rotates in the reverse direction may be performed, or a special image or the like that is not normally displayed may be displayed on the display device 11. May be good. Further, a special music that is not normally output may be output. Of course, it is also possible to produce by combining these. Further, although the game operation is not invalidated, these effects can be performed until the player performs the next game operation (that is, the effects are executed to the end or canceled halfway. It is also possible to leave it to the player to decide whether to proceed with the game).

However, in this detailed example, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 114, for example, even if the user stays in the heaven C mode, the advantageous section may be forcibly terminated by executing the limit process. In some cases, it may not be desirable to perform the special freeze effect described above many times.

Therefore, in this detailed example, the special freeze effect is executed only once within the same series of advantageous sections. Specifically, when it is first decided to execute the special freeze effect within a series of advantageous sections, the special freeze effect is executed, but the same conditions are subsequently applied within the same series of advantageous sections. Is controlled so that the special freeze effect is not executed even when is satisfied. As a method, once a special freeze effect is executed, information indicating that fact is stored, and if the information is stored within the same series of advantageous sections thereafter, it is special in the first place. The decision as to whether or not to execute the freeze effect may not be made, or the decision is made, but if the information is stored, the decision result indicates that the decision is executed. However, it may be rewritten to indicate that it will not be executed. Then, the stored information may be cleared when the advantageous section ends.

The mode in which the execution of the special freeze effect is restricted is not limited to the above. For example, the upper limit of the number of times that the execution of the special freeze effect is restricted may be set as "2 times" or "3 times" instead of "1 time". That is, the execution of the special freeze effect is restricted, but the upper limit may be set as a plurality of times. This can be appropriately set according to the expected value of the ball output per special freeze effect.

Further, the conditions for determining whether or not the special freeze effect is executed are not limited to those described above. That is, in the above, the mode transition is performed with the winning of the "fixed role" as an opportunity, and it is determined whether or not the special freeze effect is executed on the condition that the mode is the heaven C mode. However, for example, since the mode may shift to heaven C mode due to an opportunity other than the winning of the "fixed role" (see (f) in FIG. 106), a special freeze effect is also executed in these cases. It is assumed that a decision is made as to whether or not the game is played, and the special freeze effect is executed with a predetermined probability (the probability may be the same as or different from the case where the winning of the "fixed role" is triggered). It may be decided that it will be done.

In addition, for example, with the winning of the "fixed role" as an opportunity, first, it is assumed that whether or not the special freeze effect is executed is determined, and when it is decided that the special freeze effect is executed, heaven You may shift to C mode. That is, the special freeze effect may be executed according to the decision to shift to the heaven C mode, or the heaven C mode may be executed according to the decision to execute the special freeze effect. You may want to move to.

Further, for example, the degree of progress of the game in the advantageous section may be adopted as a condition for determining whether or not the special freeze effect is executed. For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later is less than "750", or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter or the control payout number counter described later is less than "1201". As described above, it is determined whether or not the special freeze effect is executed, and the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the control game number counter described later becomes "750" or more, or the advantageous section described later. When the value of the section payout counter or the control payout counter becomes "1201" or more, it is not determined whether or not the special freeze effect is executed in the same series of advantageous sections thereafter. You can also do it.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period (see FIG. 114 described later). Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information having a high degree of advantage for the player (for example, heaven C mode) is set a plurality of times, a special effect (for example, a special freeze effect) is provided each time. Is controlled so that is never done. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period (see FIG. 114 described later). Further, within a series of advantageous sections, it is determined that the control is controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) triggered by the winning of a specific combination (for example, "fixed combination"), and the degree of advantage for the player is determined. High control information (eg, heaven C mode) may be set. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs a plurality of times, it is controlled so that a special effect (for example, a special freeze effect) is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

(Invention 3 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in this detailed example, the secondary information (for example, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section) can be determined according to the determined internal winning combination, and the secondary information is determined according to the combination of the displayed symbols. Whether or not to make it possible to determine (for example, a sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section) and to give an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified according to the determined secondary information. Can be determined.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, not only when the internal winning combination is determined, but also when the combination of symbols is displayed, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation regarding the granting of the advantageous state, so that the advantageous state can be given. It is possible to diversify the playability related to the granting of.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols are both managed as common secondary information, which is advantageous. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of the information.

Further, as described above or as described later, in this detailed example, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is played. While it is possible to win, the second special role (for example, "F_2BB") is not allowed to win. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special combination can be won, but the first special combination cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "upward right lip") is displayed in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). In the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") can be displayed. Then, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, it is possible to determine different secondary information depending on whether the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed or the combination of specific symbols is displayed.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is set. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of the advantageous state.

(Invention 4 according to this detailed example)
As described above or as described later, in this detailed example, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") can be won. On the other hand, the second special role (for example, "F_2BB") cannot be won. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special combination can be won, but the first special combination cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "upward right lip") is displayed in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). In the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") can be displayed. In addition, at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state (pseudo-bonus).

Here, in this detailed example, since the combination of the predetermined symbol (for example, "right-up lip") and the combination of the specific symbol (for example, "parallel lip") are both combinations of symbols related to the replay game. Regardless of which one is displayed, the same privilege of operating the re-game will be given.

The mode of granting the same privilege is not limited to the above. For example, a specific role is configured as a specific small role related to the addition of game value. Then, when winning a specific small winning combination, for example, in the first special permission state, one card (this value is arbitrary and may be another value equal to or less than the bet game value, or bet. A combination of predetermined symbols to which the game value of (which may exceed the value of the game value) (a combination of symbols related to the addition of the game value corresponding to the "right-up lip") is displayed, and the second special permission is given. If it is in the state, the combination of specific symbols to which the same number of game values as when the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed (combination of symbols related to the grant of game value corresponding to "parallel lip") is displayed. You may.

In addition, the combination of the predetermined symbol and the combination of the specific symbol are both "off" symbol combinations (although it is possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state, so the symbol is different from the pure "off" case. It may be configured as a combination of identifiable symbols). Even in this case, the value remains the same.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is set. Therefore, it is possible to diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of the advantageous state. In addition, in a game in which a specific role is determined, the same privilege is given regardless of the special permission state, so even if the game playability is changed, the player directly disadvantages. It is possible to prevent it from being covered.

(Invention 5 according to this detailed example)
As described above or as described later, in this detailed example, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") can be won. On the other hand, the second special role (for example, "F_2BB") cannot be won. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special combination can be won, but the first special combination cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a combination of specific symbols is performed when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode in the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags) (for example, a combination of specific symbols (for example, between 2BB flags). For example, it is possible to display "parallel lip"), and it may not be possible to display a combination of specific symbols when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode.

Then, at least when a specific combination is won and a combination of specific symbols is displayed, it may be possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus).

Alternatively, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state is different depending on whether the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed. It may be possible.

In addition, when a specific combination is won, in the case of the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags), a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "upward right rip") is displayed, and the second special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags) is displayed. For example, when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (between 2BB flags), a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") is displayed, and when the stop operation is not performed in a specific mode, a predetermined symbol is displayed. The combination of may be displayed.

In this case, the specific combination displays a combination of specific symbols when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate on at least one reel (hereinafter, this may be described as "pressing position ○"), and the stop operation is performed. When the timing of is not appropriate (hereinafter, this may be described as “pressing position ×”), it can be configured that a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. As a result, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed due to the player's stop operation (timing), so that the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest of the game. can.

Further, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above. In this case, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate for at least one reel (when the pressing position is ○), the specific combination is used. The combination is displayed and a predetermined number of game values are given, and when the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate (when the pressing position is ×), the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values are given. can do. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, the predetermined number may be given more game value than the specific number. In addition, a predetermined number may be given a game value less than a specific number. Further, at least one of a combination of specific symbols and a combination of predetermined symbols may be used as a combination of symbols when an omission occurs. That is, either a predetermined number or a specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state be changed due to (timing) the player's stop operation, but also the content of the direct privilege can be changed, so that the player can change. It is possible to concentrate more on the game, further diversify the game playability, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific combination, the timing at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate is also limited. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations at different timings at which the timing of the stop operation is appropriate. For example, in one reel, when the timing of the stop operation is the first timing, the stop operation is appropriate and the combination of specific symbols is displayed, and when the timing is other than the first timing, the appropriate stop operation is performed. When the first specific combination and the stop operation timing are the second timing different from the first timing, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation. And when the timing is other than the second timing, the second specific combination in which the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation, and the timing of the stop operation is the first timing and the second timing. When the third timing is different, the specific symbol combination is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the timing is other than the third timing, the specific symbol combination is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation. A third specific combination is provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

Further, in this case, the specific combination is displayed when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), and when the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of the incorrect answer pressing order), the predetermined symbol combination is displayed. It can be configured as displayed. As a result, the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed due to the player's stop operation (procedure), so that the player can concentrate more on the game and improve the interest of the game. can.

In addition, the specific combination can be configured as a specific small combination as described above. In this case, when the batting order is appropriate (in the case of the correct answer pressing order), a combination of specific symbols is displayed and a predetermined number of games are played. When the value is given and the batting order is not appropriate (in the case of incorrect batting order), a combination of predetermined symbols is displayed and a specific number of game values can be given. In this case, the predetermined number may be the same as the specific number (that is, the same privilege). Further, the predetermined number may be given more game value than the specific number. In addition, a predetermined number may be given a game value less than a specific number. Further, at least one of a combination of specific symbols and a combination of predetermined symbols may be used as a combination of symbols when a dropout occurs. That is, either a predetermined number or a specific number may be set to "0". As a result, not only can the advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state be changed due to the player's stop operation (procedure), but also the content of the direct privilege can be changed, so that the player can change. It is possible to concentrate more on the game, further diversify the game playability, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, if there is only one type of specific combination, the appropriate batting order is also limited. Therefore, it is desirable to provide a plurality of specific combinations having different appropriate batting orders. For example, when the left first stop is performed, the specific symbol combination is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the middle / right first stop is performed, the specific symbol combination is not displayed without the appropriate stop operation. When the first specific combination and the middle first stop are performed, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the left / right first stop is performed, the specific symbol is not performed as an appropriate stop operation. The combination is not displayed. When the second specific combination and the right first stop are displayed, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed as an appropriate stop operation, and when the left / middle first stop is performed, the appropriate stop operation is not performed. A third specific combination in which the combination of specific symbols is not displayed is provided, and these may be won with the same winning probability.

(Penalty affecting the next game and beyond)
Up to this point, in the unit game that wins a specific combination, due to the stop operation mode (at least one or both of the timing and batting order of the stop operation), the process of determining the transition to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section It was stated that the judgment process regarding the granting of the advantageous state in (including the pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the mode transition lottery, and other processes for changing the advantage of the gaming situation in the advantageous section) is changed. , It may affect the unit game after the unit game that wins the specific role. For example, the internal winning is the (appropriate) stop operation mode in which it is recommended that the first specific combination described above (the stop operation is performed at the first timing or the stop operation is performed in the batting order of the left first stop). In the unit game that wins the winning combination, if the stop operation is not performed in an appropriate stop operation mode, the above-mentioned advantageous section is related to the above-mentioned advantageous section between the game and a predetermined game (for example, between 5 games) after the next game. It may be possible to set a disadvantageous state (penalty state) such as lowering the winning probability in the determination process or not performing the determination process related to the advantageous section described above. If it is not appropriate, the game may not be affected and the disadvantageous state may be set only between the predetermined games after the next game.

(Termination condition of penalty state)
Further, the disadvantageous state is not limited to the one that ends when the predetermined game is digested, and may be the one that ends when the predetermined cancellation condition is satisfied. Here, the predetermined release conditions are, for example, consumption of a predetermined number of game values, winning of a predetermined number of times such as a re-game combination, and stopping of a combination of specific symbols more than a predetermined number of times (stop operation in the order of pressing the correct answer). The number of games played has exceeded a predetermined number of times). Also, in this case, if the disadvantageous state is extremely prolonged, the player who created the cause of the transition to the disadvantageous state stops the game there, and as a result, the loss is passed on to another player who plays the game later. Since there are cases, it is desirable that the predetermined number of sheets is about 10, and the predetermined number of times is 1 to 3 times, which can be achieved relatively easily. Further, a plurality of cancellation conditions may be provided, and the disadvantageous state may end when any of the conditions can be achieved.

(Premium role during penalty)
In addition, for internal winning roles (premium roles), such as "fixed role" and "middle che", which have a low probability of winning but have a large benefit to the player, even if they win during a disadvantageous state, they are not in a disadvantageous state. It may be treated in the same way as when winning in a situation to prevent loss. However, it is possible to prevent the benefits from being given as a disadvantage. Further, in any case, if the premium combination is won during the disadvantageous state, the special notification described later can be performed.

(Warning about penalty transition)
In addition, when the stop operation is performed in a stop operation mode in which a transition to a disadvantageous state may occur, or when a predetermined combination of symbols causing the transition to a disadvantageous state is stopped and displayed, the image, sound, and lamp are emitted. -The configuration may be such that an arbitrary effect (warning notification) for calling attention, such as an extinguishing pattern or a lock that temporarily invalidates the game operation, can be generated.

(Penalty other than lottery cold treatment)
In addition, when a disadvantageous state occurs, not only is the judgment process regarding the advantageous section disadvantageous (cold treatment) as described above, but also the digestion time per unit game is prolonged, which is disadvantageous in the time efficiency of the game. You may do so. For example, in a disadvantageous state, a lock for a predetermined time (for example, about 10 seconds) may occur every game in the period from the start operation to the start of rotation of the reel. Further, in the disadvantageous state, only such a time disadvantage may be given, or such a time disadvantage and the above-mentioned ball-out disadvantage may be given.

(Disadvantageous conditions are treated as part of the advantageous section)
Further, for example, in the non-advantageous section, since it is not possible to have a plurality of states (for example, non-advantageous section A, non-advantageous section B, etc.) regarding the transition to the advantageous section, the disadvantageous state is the advantageous section (directing section). It may be controlled as one of the states in. For example, in addition to the modes described with reference to FIGS. 103 and 104, a unique mode corresponding to the disadvantageous state (disadvantageous state mode) is provided, and when the disadvantageous state is entered, the disadvantageous state is reached until the disadvantaged state ends. The mode may be set. For example, when the transition condition of the disadvantageous state is satisfied in the non-advantageous section, the transition to the advantageous section (effect section) and the disadvantageous state mode is performed. Here, the transition destination when the disadvantageous state ends is arbitrary, but from the viewpoint of providing a temporary cold treatment state (disadvantageous state), it is desirable to return to the state before the transition of the disadvantageous state. Although one type of disadvantageous state may be provided, a plurality of types may be provided to shift to one of the disadvantageous states according to the type of the disadvantageous state transition opportunity, for example, the player displays a predetermined combination of symbols. If the profit given when the game is played (for example, the number of game values given or the destination of the RT state) is large, the game should be moved to a state where the degree of disadvantage is relatively high even among the disadvantaged states. , It is desirable from the viewpoint of game balance.

(Penalty during increase section)
Further, even if the transition condition of the disadvantageous state is satisfied during the increase section (during the pseudo bonus), the disadvantageous state may be shifted. In this case, in the unfavorable state, the judgment process regarding the advantageous state may be treated coldly while giving the instruction regarding the addition of the game value (such as the navigation of the correct answer pushing order when the push order bell is won). It may be possible not to temporarily generate an instruction regarding the addition of game value. It should be noted that the disadvantageous state may be notified by a change in the lighting pattern of the advantageous section lamp described later. For example, the advantageous section lamp emits white light during the normal increase section, but when the disadvantageous state shifts to the disadvantageous state during the increase section, the advantageous section lamp may emit red light during the disadvantageous section.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, an advantageous state is given even when the same specific combination is determined according to which special permission state is in and the mode of the player's stop operation. Since it is possible to change the content of the decision regarding the game, it is possible to diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the granting of an advantageous state.

(Invention 6 according to this detailed example)
Further, as described above or as described later, in this detailed example, when the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is played. While it is possible to win, the second special role (for example, "F_2BB") is not allowed to win. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount (for example, two cards), the second special combination can be won, but the first special combination cannot be won. In addition, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, "upward right lip") is displayed in the first special permission state (for example, between 3BB flags). In the second special permission state (for example, between 2BB flags), a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") can be displayed.

Further, in this detailed example, when a specific combination is won, it is more likely that an advantageous state will be given when the combination of specific symbols is displayed than when the combination of predetermined symbols is displayed. There is. That is, on the premise of betting three cards, the second special permission state (between the 2BB flags) is a state in which the granting of an advantageous state is given preferential treatment over the first special permission state (for example, between the 3BB flags). ..

Further, in this detailed example, when a predetermined combination (for example, "pushing order bell B" shown in FIG. 98 and “pushing order bell B” shown in the explanation of FIG. 113 described later) is won, the first special permission state (for example, the first special permission state ( For example, in the case of (between 3BB flags), a combination of assigned symbols (for example, a combination of 9 or 8 symbols to which a game value is assigned) is displayed regardless of the batting order, while a second special permission state (for example, 2BB) is displayed. In the case of (between flags), if the batting order is the predetermined correct answer pressing order, the combination of the assigned symbols is displayed, but if the batting order is not the predefined correct answer pressing order, the assigned symbol is displayed. The combination is not displayed and the game value is not given. Either the combination of the symbols is missed, or the combination of the given symbols is given a smaller amount of the game value than when the combination of the given symbols is displayed (for example, the combination of the symbols corresponding to the one-card combination). Combination) will be displayed. That is, if the operation of the advantageous state is not taken into consideration, the first special permission state (for example, between the 3BB flags) is in a state in which the granting of the game value is given preferential treatment over the second special permission state (for example, between the 2BB flags). be.

That is, if the player wins 3BB with a 3-card bet and then carries over the 3BB (between the 3BB flags and the first special permission state) and plays the game with a 3-card bet, the probability of granting an advantageous state is Although it is not given preferential treatment, the probability of granting the game medium when the advantageous state is not operating is given preferential treatment, so the difference in the inclination value between when the advantageous state is operating and when it is not operating is relatively small. You can proceed with the game with. In this way, a state in which the player is less likely to be able to rapidly increase the game value but the player's game value is less likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a "stable state".

On the other hand, if the player wins 2BB with a 2-card bet and then carries over the 2BB (between the 2BB flags and the second special permission state) and plays the game with a 3-card bet, the probability of granting an advantageous state is Although preferential treatment is given, the probability of granting the game medium when the advantageous state is not operating is not given preferential treatment, so that the difference in the inclination value between when the advantageous state is operating and when it is not operating is relatively large. You can proceed with the game with. In this way, a state in which the player is likely to be able to rapidly increase the game value but the player's game value is likely to decrease can be defined as, for example, a "rough wave state".

Here, the method of creating the two states of the stable state and the rough wave state is not limited to the above-mentioned one. For example, in the "stable state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus is higher than in the "rough wave state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of the heaven mode is higher than in the "rough wave state". Lower. Further, in the "rough wave state", in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the transition probability of the pseudo-bonus is lower than that in the "stable state", while in the above-mentioned mode transition lottery, the transition probability of the heaven mode is lower than that in the "stable state". Increase. In this way, in the "stable state", it is easy to hit the pseudo bonus for the first time, but it is difficult to make a series of villas. Can be created. As described above, the stop control of the predetermined combination may be changed between the 2BB flags and the 3BB flags, or may be different from this (that is, no preferential treatment is given between the 3BB flags). ..

When such a method is applied to this detailed example, for example, a "stable state" and a "rough wave state" are further provided as a control state (which may be paraphrased as a game state or a mode) in a normal state. Then, when a predetermined symbol combination (“right-up lip”) is displayed without any control state being set, a “stable state” is set and a specific symbol combination (“parallel lip”). If is displayed, set "Rough wave condition". Then, each set control state may be maintained until the pseudo-bonus transition is determined (that is, it ends when the pseudo-bonus transition is determined). If a combination of specific symbols ("parallel lip") is displayed while "stable state" is set, the control state is updated to "rough wave state" and "rough wave state" is set. When a predetermined combination of symbols (“right-up lip”) is displayed in the present state, the control state may be updated to the “stable state”. That is, every time a combination of predetermined symbols or a combination of specific symbols is displayed, the control state may be updated to the corresponding control state.

Then, when the "stable state" is set, for example, in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the lottery is performed by using the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table in which the lottery value for which the winning is determined is set high. Therefore, in the mode transition lottery described above, the mode transition lottery table in which the lottery value determined to shift to the heaven mode is set to be low may be used so that the lottery is performed. Further, when the "rough wave state" is set, for example, in the above-mentioned pseudo-bonus transition lottery, the lottery is performed by using the pseudo-bonus transition lottery table in which the lottery value for which the winning is determined is set low. Therefore, in the mode transition lottery described above, the mode transition lottery table in which the lottery value determined to shift to the heaven mode is set to be high may be used so that the lottery is performed.

That is, in this detailed example, when a predetermined symbol combination (“right rising lip”) is displayed, it is controlled to the first grant state (“stable state”) and the specific symbol combination (“parallel lip”) is displayed. If so, it is controlled to the second grant state (“rough wave state”), the controlled grant state is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, and an advantageous state (pseudo bonus) is given according to the controlled grant state. It may be possible to decide whether or not to grant.

The condition for ending the set "stable state" or "rough wave state" (predetermined end condition) is not limited to the determination of the pseudo bonus transition. For example, it may have shifted to a non-advantageous section, a limit process may have been executed, a setting change operation may have been performed, or the power has been turned on again due to a power failure. It may be that a predetermined time (for example, 12 hours after the power is turned on, 2 hours for the non-gaming state to continue, etc.) has elapsed. In addition to these, various conditions can be adopted.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, the stop display mode can be different even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in the state. Since it is possible to change the giving state of the advantageous state, it is possible to diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the giving of the advantageous state.

[Design layout configuration of this detailed example]
Subsequently, the symbol arrangement configuration of this detailed example will be described with reference to FIG. 107. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an example of a symbol arrangement table of this detailed example. Since the description of the symbol arrangement table and the symbol code table itself has already been described with reference to FIG. 15, the description here will be omitted.

In this detailed example, the symbols are "red 7", "BAR", "replay", "bell", "watermelon", "cherry", "red blank", "yellow blank", "white blank 1" and "white blank 1". 10 kinds of symbols of "white blank 2" are used. Further, in this detailed example, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 10 are assigned to each symbol.

[Internal winning combination configuration of this detailed example]
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 108 to 113, the internal winning combination configuration of this detailed example will be described. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing an example of an internal lottery table of this detailed example. Since the description of the internal lottery table itself has already been described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18 or 99, the description thereof is omitted here. Further, FIGS. 109 to 112 are diagrams showing an example of the symbol combination table of this detailed example. Since the description of the symbol combination table itself has already been described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, the description here will be omitted. Further, FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination, the stop operation mode (for example, the stop operation order and the stop operation timing), the display combination, and the like in this detailed example. That is, in this section, any combination of symbols (display combination, winning combination, stop display) according to the type of the internal winning combination drawn in this detailed example and the stop operation mode when each internal winning combination is won. It can be rephrased as an aspect, a display result, etc.).

First, in this detailed example, in the internal lottery process (see FIG. 64), each internal winning combination shown in FIG. 108 wins with the probability (lottery value / probability denominator: 65536) shown in FIG. 108. The combinations of symbols that are permitted to be displayed when each internal winning combination is won are as shown in "corresponding symbol combinations" in FIG. 108. Further, in FIGS. 109 to 112, "BB" indicates a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination, "REP" indicates a combination of symbols related to a replay combination, and "FRU" indicates a combination of symbols related to a small combination. Is shown.

"F_2BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a two-card bet in a non-bonus state (more specifically, a non-flag state), while a game is played with a three-card bet. In that case, it is configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. The basic role is the same as that of "F_2BB" described with reference to FIG. 99. In a game in which "F_2BB" is won in a two-card bet state, or in a game in which "off" occurs between the 2BB flags, "BB01" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, and the 2BB state (based on 2BB) is displayed. Move to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 2BB flags, "BB01" may not be displayed in the 3-card bet state.

"F_3BB" can be determined as an internal winning combination when a game is played with a 3-card bet in a non-bonus state (more specifically, a non-flag state), while a game is played with a 2-card bet. In that case, it is configured so that it is not determined as an internal winning combination. The basic role is the same as that of "F_3BB" described with reference to FIG. 99. In a game in which "F_3BB" is won in a 3-card bet state, or in a game in which "missing" is made between the 3BB flags, "BB02" is displayed if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, and the 3BB state (based on 3BB). Move to the bonus state). On the other hand, even between the 3BB flags, "BB02" may not be displayed in the two-card bet state.

In the 2BB state and the 3BB state, the lottery value in the column of "bonus state" in FIG. 108 is referred to, and the internal winning combination is determined (the number of playable cards is only 3 bets). During the 2BB state and the 3BB state, it is always controlled to the state in which the RB, which is the first-class special accessory, is operating (RB state). In the RB state, control is repeated such that when two prizes are generated or two games are played after the operation, the RB state is once terminated and then activated again. In this detailed example, the end condition of the 2BB state is defined as that more than one game value is given in the 2BB state, and the end condition of the 3BB state gives more than 176 game values in the 3BB state. It is stipulated that it was done.

Here, when the 2BB state or the 3BB state ends, the special mode transition process is performed. For example, if the mode is changed to the bonus state (the mode is not changed during the bonus state, which is synonymous with the end of the bonus state), that is, if the current mode is "start mode", the transition destination Mode is "start mode". If the current mode is any of "normal A mode", "normal B mode", "heaven preparation mode", and "chance mode", the transition destination mode is "normal A mode". If the current mode is either "end A mode" or "end B mode", the transition destination mode is "end A mode". If the current mode is any of "guaranteed mode", "heaven A mode", "heaven B mode", and "heaven C mode", the transition destination mode is "guaranteed mode".

"F_Replay A" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. The basic role is the same as that of "F_lip B" described with reference to FIG. 99. When determined as an internal winning combination, between the non-flags and the 2BB flags, regardless of the stop operation mode, either "REP64" to "REP72" (these make the "replay" symbol a lower straight line or a middle straight line. Since they are to be displayed, they can be collectively referred to as "parallel rip". Further, "REP64" to "REP71" can be collectively referred to as "lower rip", and "REP72" is "middle rip". (Can be called "rip") is displayed, and a replay is given. On the other hand, between the 3BB flags, "REP73" (this can be referred to as "right-up lip" because the "replay" symbol is displayed upward to the right) regardless of the stop operation mode. It is displayed and a replay is given.

"F_Replay B" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When it is determined as an internal winning combination, "parallel lip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode in any state, and a replay is given.

"F_cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the "middle rip" is displayed and the replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pressing position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, either "REP28", "REP60" to "REP63" (these are for displaying the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L at the bottom. Because of this, these can be collectively referred to as "cherry rips"), and replays are granted. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, other rips (for example, “REP57” to “REP59”) are displayed, and a replay is given.

"F_confirmed cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the "middle rip" is displayed and the replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and if the pressing position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP42" to "REP56" (these are). The "cherry" symbol is displayed in the lower row on the left reel 3L, and a symbol such as "REP42" that can raise the expectations of the player in other symbol display areas is also displayed. These can be collectively referred to as "confirmed cherry lip"), and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, other rips (for example, the above-mentioned “cherry rip” and “REP29” to “REP41”) are displayed, and a re-game is given. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

"F_middle cherry" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the "middle rip" is displayed and the replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, if the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", and if the pressing position is ○ for at least the left reel 3L, any of "REP15" to "REP19" (these are). Since the "cherry" symbol is displayed in the middle stage on the left reel 3L, these can be collectively referred to as "middle stage cherry lip"), and a replay is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, other rips (for example, or “REP20” to “REP27”) are displayed, and a replay is given. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

The "F_reach eye" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. In the 3-card bet state, it can be determined as an internal winning combination, but in the 2-card betting state, it can be configured so as not to be determined as an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, the "middle rip" is displayed and the replay is given regardless of the stop operation mode in the two-card bet state. In the 3-card bet state, when the pushing order is any of "batting order 1" to "batting order 4", any one of "REP01" to "REP14" regardless of the stop operation mode (these are customarily a player). It is configured as a combination of symbols that can definitely notify (or suggest) the transition to a state that is advantageous to the player, and these can be collectively referred to as "reach eye lip"), and the replay is displayed. Granted. Further, when the batting order is either "batting order 5" or "batting order 6", "middle rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and a re-game is given.

"F_watermelon" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, if the pressing position is ○ for each reel, any one of "FRU10" to "FRU12" (since these are for displaying "watermelon" symbols side by side, these are displayed. "Watermelon") is displayed, and if it is in a 3-card bet state, 3 game values are given, and if it is a 2-card bet state, 2 game values are given. On the other hand, if the pressing position x, either "FRU08" or "FRU09" (since these are not displayed side by side with "watermelon" symbols, these can be collectively referred to as "watermelon spills"). Is displayed and one game value is given. In addition, in the case of the pressing position ×, it is also possible to configure so that the game value given by causing the omission is 0.

"F_Bell 123A1", "F_Bell 123A2", "F_Bell 132A1", "F_Bell 132A2", "F_Bell 213A1", "F_Bell 213A2", "F_Bell 231A1", "F_Bell 231A2", "F_Bell 231A2" "Bell 312A1", "F_Bell 312A2", "F_Bell 321A1", and "F_Bell 321A2" are configured to be determinable as internal winnings regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. The basic role is the same as that of "F_left middle right bell A01" to "F_right middle left bell A12" described with reference to FIG. 99. Also in this detailed example, they are collectively referred to as "pushing order bell A".

As shown in FIG. 113, the "pushing order bell A" serves as a small batting order of 6 choices (the batting order of any one of "batting order 1" to "batting order 6" is the correct batting order). If it is decided as an internal winning combination, and if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct batting order, the "downward bell" ("FRU03"), "upper bell" ("FRU01" and "FRU02") ), "Middle bell" ("FRU04"), "Right-up bell" ("FRU05"), "Koyama bell" ("FRU06"), and "Lower bell" ("FRU07"). Is displayed, 8 game values are given in the 3-card bet state, and 2 game values are given in the 2-card bet state. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operations have a 1/2 probability of being pressed at the pressing position ○, and at the pressing position ○. If there is, any of the winning "one-card combination" ("FRU13" to "FRU116") is displayed, and one piece of game value is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the game value is not given due to omission. In addition, if the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 chance that the pressing position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations, and if the pressing position is ○, any of the winning “single cards” will be displayed. One game value is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the game value is not given due to omission.

"F_Bell 123B1", "F_Bell 123B2", "F_Bell 132B1", "F_Bell 132B2", "F_Bell 213B1", "F_Bell 213B2", "F_Bell 231B1", "F_Bell 231B2", "F_Bell 231B2" The "bell 312B1", "F_bell 312B2", "F_bell 321B1", and "F_bell 321B2" are configured to be determinable as internal winnings regardless of the number of bets in the non-bonus state. The basic role is the same as that of "F_left middle right bell B01" to "F_right middle left bell B12" described with reference to FIG. 99. Also in this detailed example, they are collectively referred to as "pushing order bell B".

As shown in FIG. 113, the "push order bell B" does not have a push order small combination between the 3BB flags in the two-card bet state and the three-card bet state. If it is determined as an internal winning combination, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and if it is in a 3-card bet state, 8 game values are given, and if it is a 2-card bet state, it is given. Two game values are given.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, the “pushing order bell B” is a pushing order small winning combination in a state other than between the 3BB flags in the three-card bet state (between non-flags and between 2BB flags), and is an internal winning combination. When the winning combination is determined, if the stop operation is performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, one of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed, and if the bet is 3 cards, the game value of 8 cards is given. If the player is in a two-card bet state, two game values are given. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the corresponding correct pressing order, if the first stop operation is correct, the remaining stop operations have a 1/2 probability of being pressed at the pressing position ○, and at the pressing position ○. If there is, any of the winning "one-card combination" is displayed, and one piece of game value is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the game value is not given due to omission. In addition, if the first stop operation is not correct, there is a 1/8 chance that the pressing position will be ○ in the remaining stop operations, and if the pressing position is ○, any of the winning “single cards” will be displayed. One game value is given. On the other hand, if the pressing position is ×, the game value is not given due to omission.

"8 F_RB combinations" are configured to be determinable as internal winning combinations in the bonus state. When determined as an internal winning combination, any of the above-mentioned "bells" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and eight game values are given.

"One F_RB combination" is configured to be determinable as an internal winning combination in the bonus state. When it is determined as the internal winning combination, any of the above-mentioned "one-card combination" (more specifically, "FRU117" to "FRU120" are added) is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode, and one piece is displayed. The game value of is given.

The correspondence between the internal lottery table shown in FIG. 108, the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 109 to 112, and the internal winning combination shown in FIG. 113, the stop operation mode, the display combination, and the like is merely an example. The invention according to the above is not limited to this.

For example, in this detailed example, in a pure "off" state, in a 2-bet state in which "BB01" can be displayed, when "BB01" is missed and becomes "off", a 3-bet in which "BB02" can be displayed can be displayed. In the state, when "BB02" is missed and becomes "missing", when it becomes "missing" due to being in a 3-bet state between the 2BB flags, it means that it is in a 2-bet state between the 3BB flags. As a result, "off" may occur in various situations, such as when "off" occurs, when "pushing order small combination" is missed and "out" occurs, so some of these or In order to make the combination of symbols displayed as "off" different in all cases, the combination of these different symbols is specified in advance in the symbol combination table, and these also "correspond" according to the determined internal winning combination. By allowing the display as a "combination of symbols", it is possible to make the combination of symbols related to "off" displayed different depending on the state or the like.

[Limit processing configuration of this detailed example]
Subsequently, the limit processing configuration of this detailed example will be described with reference to FIG. 114. FIG. 114 is a diagram for explaining each limit process in this detailed example. As shown in FIG. 114, in this detailed example, normal limit processing (number of games), normal limit processing (number of payouts), special limit processing (number of games), special limit processing (number of payouts), and quasi-limit processing (number of games). ) And quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) are to be executed. Note that this is an example of executable limit processing, and it is possible to execute limit processing other than each of these limit processing, and some of these limit processing are executed. You can also prevent it from being done.

The normal limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1500 times). The advantageous section game number counter starts counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (including the production section), and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing). The counting is completed and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section game number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. Further, the advantageous section game number counter also counts in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

When the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section is executed. Migrate to. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the duration of the pseudo bonus, information on the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G ream All stock counter values, etc.) are also cleared (initialized).

The normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when the value of the payout number counter in the advantageous section becomes "2401" or more (that is, when the game value given during the advantageous section exceeds 2400). The advantageous section payout counter starts counting the number of game values given (here, for example, "net increase number (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the production section) is started, and the advantageous section is paid out. Is finished (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing), the counting is finished and cleared (initialized). Further, the advantageous section payout number counter counts the number of bets regardless of whether the number of bets is 2 or 3. In addition, the advantageous section payout number counter counts even in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. In addition, the advantageous section payout counter counts appropriately according to the actual number of payouts (for example, "-2" or "-3") when "missing" or "missing" occurs during the advantageous section. The value to be subtracted. Therefore, if the game value does not increase but decreases after the advantageous section starts, it may become a negative value. That is, the advantageous section payout counter can count from the lowest point of the number of added game values in the advantageous section to the defined maximum point (difference number: 2400) (see FIG. 101). ).

When the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates), the advantageous section is forcibly terminated regardless of whether it is in the production section or the increase section (pseudo bonus), and the non-advantageous section is executed. Migrate to. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the duration of the pseudo bonus, information on the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G ream All stock counter values, etc.) are also cleared (initialized).

The special limit process (number of games) is executed when the value of the control game number counter becomes "1445" or more (that is, when the games in the advantageous section are continuously played 1445 times). The control game number counter starts counting the number of games from the start of the advantageous section (including the effect section), and when the advantageous section ends (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing). The counting is completed and cleared (initialized). Further, the control game number counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Further, the control game number counter counts the number when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count it when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state. However, the control game number counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section game number counter.

When the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle. When is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the duration of the pseudo bonus, information on the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G ream All stock counter values, etc.) are also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo-bonus (that is, in the production section), first, it is forcibly shifted to the pseudo-bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the pseudo-bonus is transferred by executing this special limit process (number of games). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the transferred pseudo-bonus is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the duration of the pseudo bonus, information on the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G ream All stock counter values, etc.) are also cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section game number counter where the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates) is "1500", the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operates). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "1445", in this detailed example, the maximum number of games (sustainable period) in the pseudo bonus is "55 games" (see FIG. 103). ), This difference takes into account the playable period during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed when the game is played for a predetermined regulation period in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of games) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo-bonus or in the middle of the pseudo-bonus, the player feels distrust or loss, and the interest of the game is lowered. In some cases. Therefore, in this detailed example, the special limit processing (number of games) is executed in the game that is before the continuous period (55 games) per increase section than the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. This prevents the player from feeling distrust or loss due to the pseudo bonus ending in the middle.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, a special limit process (number of games) is executed in a game that is shorter than the game in which the normal limit process (number of games) is executed by the sustainable period (55 games x 2 sets = 110 games) per two increase sections. It may be done. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the continuation period (55 games) + grace period (2 games) per increase section is before the game in which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game of. Further, for example, in the case of a specification such as passing through a precursor state before shifting to a pseudo bonus, and if the maximum number of games in this precursor state is "4 games", the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. The special limit process (number of games) may be executed in the game that is equal to the continuous period (55 games) + maximum precursor period (4 games) before the increased section. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of games) is executed (operated) may be any timing as long as it is before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed, and is individual. It shall be possible to set as appropriate according to the game specifications of.

The special limit process (payout number) is executed when the value of the control payout number counter becomes "2126" or more (that is, when the game value given during the advantageous section exceeds 2125). The control payout counter starts counting the number of game values given (here, for example, "net increase number (difference number)") from the time when the advantageous section (including the effect section) is started, and the advantageous section Is finished (including the end due to the operation of the limit processing), the counting is finished and cleared (initialized). Further, the control payout number counter counts when the number of bets is 3, and does not count when the number of bets is 2. Further, the control payout counter counts the number when it is in the non-bonus state, and does not count it when it is in the 2BB state and the 3BB state.

Further, in the control payout number counter, when a "missing" occurs during the advantageous section, a value to be appropriately counted is subtracted according to the actual payout number (for example, "-3 sheets"). However, when the control payout counter is "missed" during the advantageous section (at least when there is a difference from the maximum number of game values given), "missed" (or difference) occurs. Assuming that there was no game value, the number of game values given is counted. Specifically, for example, in a game in which a "push order bell A" is won with a 3-card bet, if the batting order is appropriate, the number of game value grants (maximum value) is "8" (as a difference). On the other hand, if the batting order is not appropriate, the number of game value grants will be "1" (the difference is "-2") if the pressing position is appropriate, and the pressing position is appropriate. If not, the game value will be "0" (the difference is "-3") due to omission, but the control payout counter can be used in any case of the game. Count the difference number "+5".

Further, for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout counter becomes larger than the value of the control payout counter due to the operation of the 2BB state or the 3BB state, the value of the control payout counter is advantageous. It is corrected to the value of the section payout counter. The control payout counter may have the same configuration as the advantageous section payout counter.

When the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (actuated), if the pseudo bonus is in progress (that is, during the increase section), the pseudo bonus is not forcibly terminated in the middle. When is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the duration of the pseudo bonus, information on the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G ream All stock counter values, etc.) are also cleared (initialized).

On the other hand, if it is not in the pseudo-bonus (that is, in the production section), first, it is forcibly shifted to the pseudo-bonus. That is, even if the pseudo-bonus transfer lottery is not won, the pseudo-bonus is transferred by executing this special limit process (number of payouts). Then, when the transferred pseudo-bonus is completed, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated accordingly, and the transferred pseudo-bonus is shifted to the non-advantageous section. At this time, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the production section or the increase section, information on the current mode, information on the duration of the pseudo bonus, information on the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G ream All stock counter values, etc.) are also cleared (initialized).

Here, while the value of the advantageous section payout number counter that normally executes (operates) the limit process (number of payouts) is "2401", the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates). Focusing on the point that the value of the control game number counter is "2126", in this detailed example, the maximum number of acquired cards (amount of game value that can be granted) in the pseudo bonus is "275 cards" (Fig.). (See 103), this difference takes into account the amount of game value that can be granted during the pseudo-bonus.

That is, the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed when the game value corresponding to the predetermined regulated game value amount is given in the advantageous section in order to suppress the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high. However, for example, if this normal limit process (number of payouts) is executed immediately after the start of the pseudo bonus or during the pseudo bonus, the player feels distrust or loss, and the interest of the game is reduced. It may end up. Therefore, in this detailed example, when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount that can be granted per increase section (275 sheets) is given, which is smaller than the game value amount that is normally executed (the number of payouts). By executing the special limit processing (number of payouts), it is prevented that the pseudo bonus ends in the middle and the player feels distrust or loss.

From this point of view, the timing at which the special limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operated) is not limited to the above. For example, when a game value amount that is less than the game value amount that can be granted per two increase sections (275 sheets x 2 sets = 550 sheets) is given compared to the game value amount that is normally executed by the limit process (number of payouts). Special limit processing (number of payouts) may be executed. Also, for example, in order to give a slight grace period, the amount of game value that can be granted per increase section (275 sheets) + the grace period is equivalent to the amount of game value that is normally executed by the limit process (number of payouts). The special limit process (number of games) may be executed when a game value amount smaller than the game value amount (8 sheets) to be played is given. That is, the timing at which the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operated) may be any timing as long as it is before the timing at which the normal limit processing (number of payouts) is executed, and is individual. It shall be possible to set as appropriate according to the game specifications of.

In the quasi-limit processing (number of games), the value of the 1G continuous counter (when the ceiling shortening lottery is won and "with ceiling shortening" is added, "1" is further added to the value of the control game number counter. ) Multiplied by "55" (that is, the duration of the pseudo-bonus), and is executed when the addition result is "1390" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "55 x 2 = 110", so the value of the control game number counter is "1280". , The quasi-limit process (number of games) will be executed (operated).

For the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts), add "1" to the value of the control payout counter value (if the ceiling shortening lottery is won and "ceiling shortened" is displayed. ) Is multiplied by "275" (that is, the amount of game value that can be given a pseudo bonus), and this is executed when the addition result is "1851" or more. For example, when the value of the 1G continuous counter is "1" and "with ceiling shortening", the latter value is "275 x 2 = 550", so the value of the control payout counter is "1301". , The quasi-limit process (number of payouts) will be executed (operated). Since both the quasi-limit processing (number of games) and the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) regulate the same contents, after one operating condition is satisfied and the other operating condition is activated, the other operating condition is applied. Even if is established, it is not necessary to operate in duplicate.

When the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the preparation limit processing (number of payouts) is executed (operates), the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery are executed during the pseudo bonus in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. Will not be done. That is, the extension of the game period in the increasing section is suppressed. The method of suppressing the extension of the game period in the increasing section is not limited to this. For example, in the above-mentioned 1G lottery, the winning probability of the 1G series may be lower than usual, or in the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery, the winning probability of the ceiling shortening may be lower than usual. .. That is, although the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery and ceiling shortening lottery itself are executed, it may be difficult to win these lottery. Further, for example, in the production section after the execution of the quasi-limit process (number of games), the lottery value that is the winning in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery may be lowered to make it difficult to shift to the pseudo-bonus. Alternatively, in the mode transition lottery, the lottery value at which the mode transition advantageous to the player is determined may be lowered to make it difficult for the pseudo bonus to be consecutive.

Further, when the quasi-limit process (number of games) or the quasi-limit process (number of payouts) is executed (operates), in the subsequent series of advantageous sections, during the production section, a "fixed combination" ((FIG. 105) Special processing is performed at the time of winning a)). Hereinafter, this special process will be described by taking as an example a case where the “fixed combination” is “F_fixed cherry” (hereinafter, simply referred to as “fixed cherry”).

When neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, if the "confirmed cherry" is won during the production section (may be during the increase section), a pseudo bonus transition lottery is drawn. "Winning (next game)" is determined in (see (c) of FIG. 105). Further, in this detailed example, since the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L is a symbol with high expectations for the player, in the game in which the stop operation information is not notified, the player stops first on the left. The general procedure is to aim at the "cherry" symbol (aiming at the "BAR" symbol as a guide) and perform the stop operation. Therefore, when the game is played according to a general procedure, when the "confirmed cherry" is won, the "cherry" symbol is first stopped at the lower stage of the left reel 3L at the first left stop. If neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating and the "fixed cherry" is won, the left first stop ("batting order 1" and "batting order 2"). ") May be notified to the effect that it should be done. Further, the "winning (next game)" is not limited to the one in which the pseudo bonus is started from the next game, and the pseudo bonus may be started from the game after the next game.

Here, the skilled player stops aiming at the "BAR" symbol also in the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, for example, in order to further determine whether the player is "weak che" or "confirmed cherry". Perform the operation. As a result, it is recognized that the "BAR" symbols are aligned in the middle of each reel and the "confirmed cherry" is won (for example, see "REP42" in FIG. 109). On the other hand, the player without skill does not perform the stop operation aiming at the "BAR" symbol on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, or cannot perform the stop operation, so that the stop display mode is "weak check". It may not be possible to determine whether it is a "confirmed cherry" (see, for example, "REP28" in FIG. 109).

In this detailed example, when neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, the case where the "confirmed cherry" is won and the symbol of the "confirmed cherry lip" is obtained. When the combination of is displayed, a special winning sound is output. Also, in the case of winning the "confirmed cherry", the combination of the "confirmed cherry lip" symbols was not displayed, but the special winning sound was also displayed when the combination of the "cherry lip" symbols was displayed. It is designed to be output. The output of the special winning sound may be performed with a probability of 100% or may be performed with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 50%).

In any case, if neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, and if you win the "confirmed cherry", "7 reds will be aligned" at the start of the next game. It is notified that the production is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

On the other hand, if either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated and then the "confirmed cherry" is won during the production section (which may be during the increase section), a pseudo bonus shift is made. Although the "win (next game)" is once determined in the lottery (see (c) of FIG. 105), this determination result is rewritten to "win (current game)" by executing the special process. Then, at the start of the game this time, it is notified that the "red 7 matching" effect is performed and the pseudo bonus is started, and the pseudo bonus is started.

At this time, in this game, the stop operation for displaying the combination of the symbols of the "confirmed cherry lip" (including the combination of the symbols of the "cherry lip") and the combination of the symbols of the "middle stage lip" is performed. Information notification (special notification) is performed. For example, in this detailed example, a special notification is performed to the effect that the first right stop (“batting order 5” and “batting order 6”) should be performed (see FIG. 113). As a result, when neither the quasi-limit processing (number of games) nor the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is operating, the flow of the game is that "confirmed cherry lip" is displayed → the pseudo bonus starts from the next game. After either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the game is called "middle rip" display by starting the pseudo bonus from this game → stopping according to the special notification. It is changed to the flow of. It should be noted that the special notification may be performed by the control of the main (main control board 71) side, and as a result, the player does not suffer any disadvantage regardless of the shift to the pseudo bonus. It may be performed by the control only on the sub (sub control board 72) side.

It should be noted that, after either the quasi-limit processing (number of games) or the quasi-limit processing (number of payouts) is activated, the "confirmed cherry" is won, and even though the special notification is given, the "confirmation" is performed. When the combination of "Cherry Lip" symbols is displayed, the special winning sound is not output.

Further, in this detailed example, when "F_replay A" or "F_replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, basically the procedure of the stop operation is not notified. Therefore, assuming that the procedure of the stop operation is notified and the "middle stage lip" is displayed only when the above-mentioned special notification is performed, if such a state occurs, one of them is performed. There is a possibility that the player will be clearly aware that the quasi-limit process has been activated, and as a result, the interest of the game will be reduced. Therefore, in the advantageous section, regardless of whether or not any of the quasi-limit processes is activated (or even after the operation of any of the quasi-limit processes), "F_Replay A" or When "F_replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification may be performed with a predetermined probability. In this way, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling unnatural about the special notification being performed. Further, when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, the same notification as the special notification is performed even when the pseudo bonus transition lottery is won. Further, in this case, in the pseudo-bonus transition lottery when "F_Replay A" or "F_Replay B" is determined as the internal winning combination, even if the "winning (this time game)" can be determined with a predetermined probability. good.

Here, the cherry winning sound determination process performed in this detailed example will be described with reference to FIG. 115. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the cherry winning sound determination process executed by the sub CPU 201.

First, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning is a confirmed cherry (S2001). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of the "confirmed cherry lip" is displayed.

In S2001, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning is a confirmed cherry (when the determination in S2001 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S2005 described later. On the other hand, in S2001, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning is not a confirmed cherry (when the determination in S2001 is NO), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning is a cherry (S2002). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the combination of the "cherry lip" symbols is displayed.

In S2002, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning is not a cherry (when the determination in S2002 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the cherry winning sound determination process. On the other hand, in S2002, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning is a cherry (when the determination in S2002 is YES), the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the winning flag is a confirmed cherry (S2003). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the sub-flag (or non-advantageous section sub-flag) at the time of winning the advantageous section is a “determined combination”. The sub CPU 201 may determine in S2003 whether or not the internal winning combination is "F_determined cherry".

In S2003, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning flag is a confirmed cherry (when the determination in S2003 is YES), the sub CPU 201 performs the process of S2005 described later. On the other hand, in S2003, when the sub CPU 201 determines that the winning flag is not a confirmed cherry (when the determination in S2003 is NO), the sub CPU 201 sets the sound number to "cherry" (S2004). That is, the sub CPU 201 sets data for outputting a normal winning sound different from the special winning sound. The sub CPU 201 ends the cherry winning sound determination process after the process of S2004.

If S2001 is a YES determination, or S2003 is a YES determination, the sub CPU 201 sets the sound number to "confirmed cherry" (S2005). That is, the sub CPU 201 sets the data for outputting the special winning sound. Next, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not a navigation error has occurred (S2006). That is, the sub CPU 201 determines whether or not the stop operation according to the special notification has not been performed even though the special notification has been performed. In S2006, the sub CPU 201 may determine whether or not the quasi-limit processing has been performed.

In S2006, when the sub CPU 201 determines that no navigation error has occurred (when the determination in S2006 is NO), the sub CPU 201 ends the cherry winning sound determination process. That is, the sub CPU 201 can output a special winning sound when the advantageous section winning sub flag (or the non-advantageous section sub flag) is a "fixed combination" and the special notification is not performed. In S2006, the sub CPU 201 has a sub-flag (or non-advantageous section sub-flag) at the time of winning the advantageous section as a "fixed combination", no special notification is performed, and a combination of symbols of the "fixed cherry lip" is displayed. If this is the case, S2006 may be determined as NO. That is, if the sub-flag (or non-advantageous section sub-flag) at the time of winning the advantageous section is the "fixed combination" and the special notification is not performed, or if the combination of the symbols of the "fixed cherry lip" is displayed, it is special. While the winning sound can be output, the special winning sound may not be output when the combination of the "confirmed cherry lip" symbols is not displayed.

On the other hand, in S2006, when the sub CPU 201 determines that a navigation error has occurred (when the determination in S2006 is YES), the sub CPU 201 clears the sound number (S2007). The sub CPU 201 ends the cherry winning sound determination process after the process of S2007. That is, in the sub CPU 201, when the sub flag (or the non-advantageous section sub flag) at the time of winning the advantageous section is a "fixed combination", the special notification is performed and the stop operation according to the special notification is not performed. The winning sound cannot be output.

As described above, the advantageous section winning sub-flag (or non-advantageous section sub-flag) "fixed combination" (more specifically, "F_fixed cherry") and the advantageous section winning sub-flag (or non-advantageous section sub-flag). ) With "Middle Che", the "Cherry" pattern is displayed on the left reel, and the benefits that the player receives are the same. It can be read as and the same processing can be performed. Therefore, when the sub-flag "middle check" at the time of winning the advantageous section is determined after the operation of each of the above-mentioned quasi-limit processes, the special notification can be performed.

In addition, the above-mentioned cherry winning sound determination process is a process for determining the type of winning sound (or whether or not to output a specific winning sound) when the internal winning combination related to "cherry" is determined. This is an example. Then, in the cherry winning sound determination process described above, the elements of the type of the internal winning combination, the type of the combination of the displayed symbols, and whether or not the stop operation is performed according to the notified stop operation procedure are combined. It is possible to determine the type of winning sound (or whether or not to output a specific winning sound), but for internal winning roles other than the internal winning role related to "cherry", such elements are combined to make the winning sound. It is also possible to determine the type (or whether or not to output a specific winning sound).

Up to this point, in order to operate the normal limit processing, the special limit processing, and the quasi-limit processing, monitoring the duration of the advantageous section using the "number of games" and the "number of payouts" has been described as an example. The conditions under which each limit process is executed are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter, the value of the control game number counter, the value of the control payout number counter, and the value of the 1G continuous counter, assuming that each limit process is executed. And whether or not the ceiling is shortened (that is, a variable for operating the quasi-limit processing) can be appropriately changed according to the game specifications, market trends, and the like.

Further, the method for monitoring the duration of the advantageous section is not limited to the above. For example, if "navigation count" is used to monitor the duration of an advantageous section, normal limit processing (navigation count), special limit processing (navigation count), or quasi-limit processing (navigation count) is performed in the same manner as above. The number of times) can also be executed. That is, any element (parameter) whose value can be counted in order to monitor the duration of the advantageous interval can be adopted, and the value for which the normal limit processing is normally executed for the adopted element. By defining the value at which the special limit processing is executed and the value at which the quasi-limit processing is executed, it is possible to assume that each limit processing is executed in the same manner as described above.

(Invention 7 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in this detailed example, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, for example). When the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more), or the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). When becomes, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but the game period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more. ), Or when the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), which is advantageous. In the case of a state, a series of advantageous sections are terminated when shifting to a specific state.

That is, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, a series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and a series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the sustainable period of the advantageous state (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be granted (for example, "275 cards"). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely regulated while giving consideration to the emotions of the player.

(Invention 8 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in this detailed example, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo-bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the gaming period in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined period (for example, for example). When the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500" or more), or the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections is a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2401" or more). When becomes, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but the game period in this series of advantageous sections is shorter than a predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is "1445" or more. ), Or when the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is "2126" or more), which is advantageous. When it is not in a state, it shifts to an advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state, a series of advantageous sections is terminated.

That is, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, a series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and a series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it. Further, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is shifted to an advantageous state and then ended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the sustainable period of the advantageous state (for example, "55 games") or the amount of game value that can be granted (for example, "275 cards"). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely regulated while giving consideration to the emotions of the player.

(Invention 9 according to this detailed example)
Further, in the gaming machine of the detailed example, in addition to those described in the invention 7 according to the detailed example or the invention 8 according to the detailed example, the advantageous state is granted the right (for example, "1G continuous stock" and "1G continuous stock" and " Although it may be extended by "ceiling shortening"), the game period in a series of advantageous sections is shorter than a specific period, and a special period set according to the number of rights granted (for example, a control game number counter) When the value becomes the value at which the quasi-limit processing (number of games) is executed), or the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous sections is less than the specific amount, and is set according to the number of rights granted. When the special amount (for example, the value of the control payout counter is the value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed) is reached, the granting of the right is suppressed in the subsequent advantageous section. It has become. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the excessively high gambling.

(Invention 10 according to this detailed example)
Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in addition to those described in the inventions 7 to 9 according to the above detailed example, at least a second amount (the above-mentioned "specific amount") and a third amount (the above-mentioned "special amount"). In counting the amount "), for example, between the game value amount that was originally supposed to be given and the game value amount that was actually given due to the player's operation error or ignoring the instruction. Even if a difference occurs, the counting is performed based on the amount of game value that should have been originally given without considering the difference. As a result, a series of advantageous sections may be extended more than necessary due to the actions of such a player, and unfairness may occur between the player who has performed such an action and the player who has not performed such an action. Since it is possible to prevent it from being stored, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

(Invention 11 according to this detailed example)
Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in addition to those described in the inventions 7 to 10 according to the above detailed example, an advantageous state is obtained in a state in which the granting of rights is suppressed (for example, a state after the quasi-limit processing operation). When a definite combination (for example, "confirmed cherry") whose transition to is confirmed is won, a special combination of special symbols (for example, "confirmed cherry lip") that can clearly recognize the winning of this definite combination is not displayed. Notifications are being made. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this detailed example, when the special notification is performed, the advantageous state that was originally supposed to be started from the next game is started from this game. As a result, the player can be made to perform the stop operation according to the special notification in a natural flow, so that even when such a special notification is performed, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable. can.

The means for performing the special notification may be any means. For example, the above-mentioned instruction monitor or other effect device controlled on the main side, the above-mentioned display device 11, speaker group, LED group 85, or other effect device controlled on the sub side, or a combination thereof, etc., as required. Various effect devices (notification means) can be adopted.

(Invention 12 according to this detailed example)
Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in addition to those described in the inventions 7 to 11 according to the above detailed example, an advantageous state is obtained in a state in which the granting of rights is suppressed (for example, a state after the quasi-limit processing operation). When a definite combination (for example, "confirmed cherry") whose transition to is confirmed is won, a special combination of special symbols (for example, "confirmed cherry lip") that can clearly recognize the winning of this definite combination is not displayed. Notifications are being made. In addition, when the granting of rights is not suppressed and a combination of special symbols is displayed by winning a fixed combination, it is possible to perform special notification (for example, output of a special winning sound). It is not possible to give a special notification when a combination of special symbols is displayed by winning a fixed combination in a state where the grant of rights is suppressed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person.

In addition, according to the gaming machine of this detailed example, whether or not the special notification is given depending on whether or not the winning combination is won, whether or not the combination of special symbols is displayed, and whether or not the special notification is performed. I try to decide whether or not. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is performed.

The means for performing the special notification may be any means. For example, the above-mentioned instruction monitor or other effect device controlled on the main side, the above-mentioned display device 11, speaker group, LED group 85, or other effect device controlled on the sub side, or a combination thereof, etc., as required. Various effect devices (notification means) can be adopted.

(Invention 13 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in this detailed example, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter count regardless of the amount of game value bet, and as a result, not only in the 3-card bet state but also in the 2-card bet state. , Normal limit processing (number of games) and normal limit processing (number of payouts) can be executed.

Further, as described above, in this detailed example, the control game number counter and the control payout number counter count in the 3-card bet state, but do not count in the 2-card bet state. Therefore, in the 3-card bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit processing (number of payouts) can be executed, but in the 2-card bet state, special limit processing (number of games) and special limit It does not allow processing (number of payouts) to be performed. Therefore, in the two-card bet state, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated even during the pseudo bonus by executing the normal limit processing (number of games) or the normal limit processing (number of payouts).

In this detailed example, for example, the winning probability of the small winning combination and the number of game values given are different between the 3-card bet state and the 2-card bet state (see FIGS. 108 to 113). It is more disadvantageous for the player to play the game with two bets than to play the game. However, in this way, the method that is more disadvantageous to the player when playing the game in the state of two bets is not limited to this. For example, when a game is played in a two-card bet state during a pseudo-bonus, the player may be disadvantaged by not notifying the procedure of the stop operation.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present detail, when the gaming value of the first amount (for example, "3 cards") is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections are in the middle of the advantageous state. Is not forcibly terminated, and it is possible to terminate a series of advantageous sections within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the termination of the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said. On the other hand, when a second amount (for example, "2 cards") of the game value is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state. Therefore, since it is possible to make the player aware that the game was not performed by the intended game method, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game by the intended game method.

In a series of advantageous sections, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the game is played with the second amount of game value bet than when the game is played with the first amount of game value bet. Therefore, by enabling such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous state, and to play the game in a game method that the player does not intend. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the above.

[Mode suggestion effect of this detailed example (1)]
Subsequently, the mode suggestion effect (No. 1) that can be executed in this detailed example will be described with reference to FIG. 116. FIG. 116 is a diagram for explaining an effect example of the mode suggestion effect (No. 1).

In the present embodiment, the state indicator composed of the 7-segment LED is determined to shift to the advantageous section at a predetermined timing during the game (for example, any timing from the start of the game to the end of the game). The lighting starts at, and the lighting continues while the advantageous section continues, and when the advantageous section ends, the lighting ends, so that the advantageous section starts and the advantageous section is in progress. , And an example in which it is possible to notify all players of the end of the advantageous section has been described. Since such a status indicator is also referred to as, for example, an "advantageous section lamp", it is simply referred to as a "lamp" in this section.

In this detailed example, this lamp does not light only when it is decided to shift from the non-advantageous section to the production section, but when it is decided to shift from the production section to the increase section (pseudo-bonus) for the first time, The lighting is started at a predetermined timing before the game in the increasing section is started (or the stop operation is permitted). Then, the lighting is continued during the increase section. When the increase section ends, the player returns to the effect section except when the limit process is executed, but the lighting continues in the returned effect section. In both the effect section and the increase section, when a series of advantageous sections ends due to the execution of the limit process, the lighting ends with the end.

Here, when returning from the increase section to the production section, the returned production section can be roughly divided into three patterns. First, for example, as in the above-mentioned heaven mode, it is the first pattern in which it is confirmed that the transition to the increasing section is performed again within 32 games. In this case, the lamp that has been continuously lit in the returned production section remains lit until it shifts to the increasing section at a predetermined time within at least 32 games.

Next, for example, as in the above-mentioned end mode, if it is not confirmed that the section shifts to the increasing section again within 32 games and the section does not shift to the increasing section again within 32 games, the series of advantageous sections ends. This is the second pattern of shifting to a non-advantageous section. In this case, the lamp that has been continuously lit in the returned production section will end its lighting at the end of a series of advantageous sections when 32 games are exhausted.

At the end, for example, as in the above-mentioned heaven preparation mode, it is not certain that the section will shift to the increasing section again within 32 games, but even if the section does not shift to the increasing section again within 32 games, a series of advantages This is the third pattern in which the section does not end. The third pattern, the heaven preparation mode, is more advantageous to the player than the second pattern, the end mode (see FIG. 104).

Here, in FIG. 116, (a) shows the lighting mode of the lamp of the second pattern (in the case of the end mode), and (b) shows the lamp of the third pattern (in the case of the heaven preparation mode). Indicates the lighting mode of.

As shown in FIG. 116 (a), when it is first decided to shift to the pseudo bonus in the production section (“pseudo bonus (first time) start” in FIG. 116), the lamp starts to light. .. During the pseudo bonus, the lamp will continue to light. Next, when the pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 116), even if the pseudo-bonus shifts to the production section (end mode), the lighting of the lamp does not end and continues. As a result, even when the pseudo bonus ends and the mode shifts to the end mode, the player does not recognize it at this point, so that the player's expectation is not lost. Even in the end mode, the pseudo-bonus may actually shift to the pseudo-bonus again within 32 games (see (c) in FIG. 105). Next, when 32 games are digested within 32 games in the end mode without shifting to the pseudo bonus (“32G after the end of the pseudo bonus” in FIG. 116), the ramp is shifted to the non-advantageous section. Lighting ends. At this point, the player can recognize that the end mode has been set. When the mode is not changed to the heaven mode, the lighting mode is almost the same.

As shown in FIG. 116 (b), when it is first decided to shift to the pseudo bonus in the production section (“pseudo bonus (first time) start” in FIG. 116), the lamp starts lighting. .. During the pseudo bonus, the lamp will continue to light. Next, when the pseudo-bonus ends (“pseudo-bonus end” in FIG. 116), even if the pseudo-bonus shifts to the production section (heaven preparation mode), the lighting of the lamp does not end and continues. As a result, even if the pseudo bonus ends and the player shifts to the heaven preparation mode, the player does not recognize it at this point. Next, when 32 games are digested within 32 games in the heaven preparation mode without shifting to the pseudo bonus (“32G after the end of the pseudo bonus” in FIG. 116), heaven preparation without shifting to the non-advantageous section. Since the mode continues, the lighting of the lamp does not end and continues. At this point, the player can recognize that he was not in the end mode.

That is, as for the lighting mode of the lamp, it is not recognized which mode is stayed within 32 games after the pseudo bonus ends, and when 32 games are exhausted after the pseudo bonus ends, the lamp lights up. When it ends, it is recognized that it was in the end mode, and when it continues to light, it is recognized that it is in heaven preparation mode.

The means for performing such notification is not limited to the "advantageous section lamp", and any means may be used. For example, the above-mentioned instruction monitor or other effect device controlled on the main side, the above-mentioned display device 11, speaker group, LED group 85, or other effect device controlled on the sub side, or a combination thereof, etc., as required. Various effect devices (notification means) can be adopted.

In addition, even when the pseudo bonus ends and the mode shifts to the end mode, the lamp may continue to light for more than 32 games, or the pseudo bonus ends and the mode is set to heaven preparation mode. Even in the case of transition, the lighting of the lamp may end when 32 games are exhausted. For example, the number of games in which the lamp continues to light may be determined by lottery according to the current mode. In this case, the probability that the lamp will continue to light beyond 32 games is higher in the transition to heaven preparation mode than in the transition to end mode, and 32 games have been exhausted. Occasionally, the probability that the lamp will end lighting should be lower when transitioning to heaven preparation mode than when transitioning to end mode.

Further, whether or not the lamp continues to be lit for more than 32 games may be determined according to the pseudo-bonus transition probability in the mode shifted after the pseudo-bonus ends. For example, looking at (c) of FIG. 105, when the pseudo-bonus ends and then the end A mode is entered, the probability of shifting to the pseudo-bonus again is the lowest, and when the pseudo-bonus ends and then the other mode is changed, the pseudo-bonus again. The probability of shifting to is higher than that of shifting to the end A mode. Therefore, when the end A mode has a low pseudo-bonus transition probability, the lamp ends lighting when 32 games have passed after the end of the pseudo-bonus, and when the pseudo-bonus transition probability is higher than that, the pseudo-bonus transition probability is pseudo. The lamp may continue to be lit even after 32 games have passed since the end of the bonus. In this detailed example, the end A mode and the end B mode end in 32 games after the end of the pseudo bonus and shift to the non-advantageous section, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 32 games after the end of the pseudo bonus. It is also possible that the section does not end with and does not shift to the non-advantageous section. Further, in this case, the predetermined period during which the lamp can be continuously lit may not be limited to 32 games, which is the number of ceiling games in the heaven mode. For example, after the end of the pseudo-bonus, it is assumed that the lamp continues to be lit for at least 100 games (or 10 games less than 32 games), and 100 games (10 games in the case of 10 games) are played. When the lapse has elapsed, the lighting of the lamp may be ended in the end A mode, and the lighting of the lamp may be continued in the other modes. That is, a predetermined period during which the lamp can be continuously lit can be set as an arbitrary period. Further, in this detailed example, if the player shifts to the heaven preparation mode after the pseudo-bonus ends, it is determined that the player shifts to the heaven mode after the pseudo-bonus ends when the pseudo-bonus ends. For example, when the pseudo-bonus is controlled from the heaven preparation mode and the pseudo-bonus ends, there is a higher probability than when the pseudo-bonus is controlled from the end mode (or normal mode) and the pseudo-bonus ends. Anything that shifts to heaven mode will do. Also, the benefits of heaven preparation mode are not limited to this. For example, it may be a privilege that the pseudo-bonus transition probability is higher than that of the end mode, or it may be a privilege that the number of ceiling games is smaller than that of the end mode. That is, the content of the privilege suggested to the player by whether or not the lamp continues to light at a predetermined time after the end of the pseudo bonus may be any privilege as long as it is beneficial to the player. ..

(Invention 14 according to this detailed example)
As described above, according to the gaming machine of the present detailed example, when the advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) ends, the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state ends. A specific state (for example, heaven mode) that is determined to be, a first predetermined state (for example, end mode) in which it is not determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, and an advantageous state. It is not certain that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state again within a predetermined period after the end of the game, but it can be controlled to any state of the second predetermined state (for example, heaven preparation mode) which is more advantageous than the first predetermined state. ..

Then, from the time when the advantageous state is started, the same notification is performed in any state during the predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, and when the predetermined period elapses, the first predetermined state is reached. If so, the notification is terminated, and if it is in the second predetermined state, the notification may be continued. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this detailed example, if the notification continues even after a predetermined period has passed after the end of the advantageous state, if the next advantageous state is started, it will be in a specific state after the end. Since the possibility of transition is high, even if the transition to a specific state is not performed after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to maintain the motivation and interest in the game and perform the game.

In the gaming machine of this detailed example, when the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) ends, the first predetermined state (for example, end A mode) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state again is a predetermined probability, and again. It is possible to control to any of the second predetermined states (for example, heaven preparation mode) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than the predetermined probability, and the advantageous state is started from the time when the advantageous state is started. During the predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the state ends, the same notification is performed in any state, and when the predetermined period elapses, the notification ends if it is the first predetermined state. However, if it is in the second predetermined state, the notification may be continued. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained.

[Mode suggestion effect of this detailed example (Part 2)]
Subsequently, the mode suggestion effect (No. 2) that can be executed in this detailed example will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. FIG. 117 shows an example of the bet lamp change lottery table referred to in the mode suggestion effect (No. 2), and FIG. 118 is a diagram for explaining an effect example of the mode suggestion effect (No. 2). be.

In this detailed example, the bet lamp display unit (BL) shown in FIG. 118 is provided in a predetermined area on the display device 11, a predetermined area on the sub display device 18, or another predetermined area near the symbol display area 4. .. The bet lamp display unit (BL) is configured as a part of the display screen when it is provided on the display device 11 or the sub display device 18, for example, when it is provided in the vicinity of the symbol display device 4. Is configured as an LED. The basic function of the bet lamp display unit (BL) is to display the current number of bets. Therefore, for example, in the two-card bet state, BL1 and BL2 are lit, and BL3 is not lit, so that the bet game value is two. Further, for example, in a three-card bet state, BL1 to BL3 are lit to notify that the bet game value is three.

In this detailed example, the bet lamp display unit (BL) is further used to perform a mode suggestion effect capable of suggesting the current mode depending on the display mode of the bet lamp display unit (BL).

First, with reference to FIG. 118A, a display mode of the bet lamp display unit (BL) in the normal state (original bet number display) will be described.

For example, when the previous game was in a three-card bet state, the bet lamp display unit (BL) is in the display mode of (4). In the display mode of (4), if the re-game is not activated in the previous game, the same display mode is maintained until the player bets the game value in the current game. Then, when the player bets the game value in this game, first, the display mode of (4) changes to the display mode of (1). That is, each of BL1 to BL3 changes from being lit in the basic colors (blue, green, red) to being completely turned off. Here, if the bet game value is one, the display mode of (1) changes to the display mode of (2). Further, if the bet game value is two, the display mode of (1) changes to the display mode of (3). Further, if the bet game value is 3, the display mode of (1) changes to the display mode of (4). That is, the display mode changes according to the number of bets of the player (the number of bets recognized by the gaming machine).

For example, if the bet game value is one, the display mode of (1) changes to the display mode of (2), and if the bet game value is two, the display of (1) is displayed. After changing from the display mode to the display mode of (2), if the display mode is further changed to (3) and the bet game value is 3, the display mode of (1) is changed to the display mode of (2). After the change, the display mode may be changed to (3), and finally the display mode may be changed to (4). That is, even when the re-game is not activated in the previous game, the display modes of BL1 to BL3 may be sequentially changed as in the case where the re-game is activated.

Further, for example, when the previous game was in a three-card bet state, the bet lamp display unit (BL) is in the display mode of (4). In the display mode of (4), when the re-game is activated in the previous game, the same display mode is maintained until the re-game is started in the current game. Then, when the operation of the re-game is started in this game, first, the display mode of (4) changes to the display mode of (1). That is, each of BL1 to BL3 changes from a state in which the basic colors (blue, green, red) are lit to a state in which all are turned off. Then, according to the operation of the re-game, the display mode of (1) is changed to the display mode of (2), then the display mode is changed to (3), and finally the display mode is changed to (4). do. That is, the display mode changes in sequence according to the operation of the re-game on the gaming machine side.

In this detailed example, for example, "F_Replay A" and "F_Replay B" are displayed side by side, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the replay combination has won a prize. A normal replay combination in which the combination of (normal replay display mode) is displayed, and an appropriate stop operation (for example, a "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L, such as "F_confirmed cherry" or "F_middle cherry". As a result of displaying the "cherry" symbol in the lower or middle row of the left reel 3L, it is possible to recognize that a winning combination other than the replay (for example, a small winning combination) has been won. While the combination of symbols (special re-game display mode) is displayed, it is difficult to recognize which role has won the so-called "separate eyes" (that is, which role has been won) unless an appropriate stop operation is performed. There is a rare replay combination in which a combination (special replay display mode) is displayed. Further, when the rare replay combination is won, the normal replay display mode may be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (first right stop) (see FIG. 113).

Therefore, in this detailed example, at least, different bet effects are performed depending on whether the normal re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated and the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated. I have to. Specifically, when the normal re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated, the display mode on the bet lamp display unit (BL) is described from (1) to (2) and (2) as described above. While the bet effect is sequentially changed as in (3), (3) to (4), when the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated, as described above (1). A bet effect that suddenly changes from) to (4) is performed.

In addition, when the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated, any bet effect may be performed. Alternatively, when the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated, (1) to (4), (4) to (3), (3) to (2), (2) to (1) ), And then the bet effect of changing from (1) to (4) may be performed. That is, there are cases where the normal re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated, cases where the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated, and cases where the special re-game display mode is displayed and the re-game is activated. In some cases, different betting effects can be made.

Return to the explanation of the mode suggestion effect (Part 2). In this detailed example, in the production section, the bet lamp change lottery table shown in FIG. 117 is referred to, and the bet lamp changes according to the number of games, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, the sub-flag at the time of winning the advantageous section, and the current mode. A lottery will be held. In FIG. 117, the “number of games” indicates the number of games after the end of the pseudo bonus. For example, "1 to 500" indicates that the number of games is within 500 games after the end of the pseudo bonus, and "501 to" indicates that the number of games exceeds 500 after the end of the pseudo bonus. Here, in this detailed example, since the number of ceiling games in the heaven preparation mode is set to about 500 games, even if the pseudo bonus is not shifted to the pseudo bonus again within 32 games after the pseudo bonus ends. If you are in heaven preparation mode, it will be confirmed that you will shift to a pseudo bonus within 500 games at the latest. Therefore, in the bet lamp change lottery table shown in FIG. 117, if it is within 500 games after the end of the pseudo bonus, the probability of winning the bet lamp change lottery is increased as compared with the case where it exceeds 500 games after the end of the pseudo bonus. It is possible to maintain the player's motivation and interest in playing.

Further, in the bet lamp change lottery table shown in FIG. 117, when the current mode is the normal B mode and the heaven preparation mode, the probability of winning the bet lamp change lottery is higher than in the other modes. ing. As described above, the heaven preparation mode is an advantageous mode, but since the normal B mode is also at least a more advantageous mode than the normal A mode (see FIG. 104), the number of times the bet lamp change lottery is won is large. In this case, it can be suggested that there is a high possibility that a relatively advantageous mode has been determined. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the player's motivation and interest in playing.

It should be noted that in FIG. 117, the "missing" is caused by a pure "missing" (when the "missing" occurs due to the 3-bet state between the 2BB flags, the "missing" is due to the 2-bet state between the 3BB flags. (Including when it becomes "missing"), and does not include the case where it becomes "missing" as a result of "missing". Even in such a case, the bet lamp change lottery can be performed.

Further, even when a winning combination other than that shown in FIG. 117 is won, the bet lamp lottery can be appropriately performed. In this case, the mode of changing the bet lamp may be different depending on the type of the internal winning combination. For example, when the bet lamp change lottery was won at the time of "off", "white" was used as the special color described later, and the bet lamp change lottery was won at the time of "through lip 1" and "through lip 2". In this case, "blue" is used as the special color described later, "yellow" is used as the special color described later when the bet lamp change lottery is won for "bell", and the bet lamp change lottery is used for the "weak che". If you win, use "red" as the special color described later, and if you win the bet lamp change lottery for "watermelon", use "green" as the special color described later, and use "fixed role" and "middle". If the bet lamp change lottery is won at the time of "Che", "Rainbow" may be used as a special color described later. Further, for example, the mode of changing the bet lamp can be changed depending on the blinking speed or the like.

By the way, as in this detailed example, when a production (bet lamp change production) in which the frequency of occurrence changes with the passage of the number of games is installed, the pachislot 1 is set for the player who started the game immediately after the opening of the game store. There is a risk that it will be detected whether the change has been made or not (that is, the setting has been deferred).

Specifically, for example, when the number of games at the end of the previous day is 300 and 1 to 200 games (that is, 301 to 500 games in the case of deferred setting) are played from the opening of the day, the relevant game is concerned. Since the bet lamp change lottery table of the number of games "1 to 500" shown in FIG. 117 is referred to between the games, the frequency of occurrence of the effect is relatively high. On the other hand, if the game is played after 201 games (that is, 501 games or later in the case of deferred setting) from the opening of the store at the time of winning, and if the setting has been changed, FIG. 117 continues. Since the bet lamp change lottery table of the number of games "1 to 500" shown is referred to, the frequency of occurrence of the effect does not change, but in the case of the setting deferred, the number of games "501 to" shown in FIG. 117 Since the bet lamp change lottery table is referred to, the frequency of occurrence of the effect is reduced. That is, when the frequency of occurrence of the effect decreases after a specific number of games, it is highly likely that the setting has not been changed (that is, the setting has been left unchanged), and it is detected immediately after the store opens. There is. Then, if the operation data of the previous day that can be confirmed on the data display in the game store is presumed to have a low set value (low setting), the player "defers the low setting". The impression is that the setting value is high (high setting) and the expectation is lost early.

Therefore, when the setting is deferred and the power is restored (especially when the store is closed and the time that can be presumed to have been restored is elapsed, such as when more than 2 hours have passed after the power was cut) and When the setting is changed, the following specifications may be used so that it is difficult to detect whether or not the setting has been changed depending on the frequency of occurrence of the bet lamp change effect.

For example, in the first specification example, the current mode is referred to after the power failure is restored and the setting is changed, but the bet lamp change of the number of games "501-" shown in FIG. 117 is irrespective of the current number of games. The state at the time of opening when the lottery table is referred to. In this case, the state at the time of opening of the store may be canceled with the first pseudo bonus winning. In this way, even if the game is played immediately after the store opens, the frequency of occurrence of the bet lamp change effect does not change after a specific number of games, so the number of games at the end of the previous day and the number of games on the day are taken into consideration. However, it is possible to prevent it from being detected whether or not the setting has been changed. The first specification example can also be adopted in the reel side lamp effect described later. For example, in the state at the time of opening the store, the reel side lamp effect described later can be performed in the effect mode when the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect is always 0.

Further, for example, in the second specification example, after the power failure is restored and the setting is changed, the bet lamp change lottery is not performed at all until the first pseudo bonus winning. By doing so, it is possible not only to prevent the setting change from being detected, but also to reduce the processing load of the effect control. The second specification example can also be adopted in the reel side lamp effect described later. For example, in the prohibited state, it is possible to prevent the reel side lamp effect described later from being performed.

In addition, it is difficult to see the difference in the production frequency when the setting is changed and when the setting is deferred, and the specific number of games (that is, in the above example, the total of the number of games at the end of the previous day and the number of games on the day is 500 games). Specifications other than the above specification example can be adopted as long as the specifications do not change the production frequency or reduce the degree of change after the passage of time.

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 118 (b), a display mode of the bet lamp display unit (BL) in the bet lamp change effect executed when the bet lamp change lottery is won will be described. Note that FIG. 118B shows an example of the bet lamp change effect when the bet lamp change lottery is won and the re-game does not operate in the previous game.

As described above, for example, when the previous game was in a three-card bet state, the bet lamp display unit (BL) is in the display mode of (4). In the display mode of (4), if the re-game is not activated in the previous game, the same display mode is maintained until the player bets the game value in the current game. Then, when the player bets the game value in this game, first, the display mode of (4) changes to the display mode of (1). That is, each of BL1 to BL3 changes from being lit in the basic colors (blue, green, red) to being completely turned off. At this time, if the bet lamp change lottery is won, the display mode of (1) changes to the display mode of (5). That is, BL1 to BL3 suddenly light up in a special color (yellow) different from the basic color. As a result, the player recognizes that the display mode is different from the normal display mode.

As shown in FIG. 118 (b), the mode of the bet lamp display unit when the bet lamp change lottery is won is not limited to this. For example, when the player bets the game value in the game this time, the display mode of (4) suddenly changes to the display mode of (5) without changing from the display mode of (4) to the display mode of (1). You may try to do so. Further, for example, after the third stop of the previous game (when the pressing of the stop button at the time of the third stop is released), the display mode of (4) is changed to the display mode of (1), and then (1). The display mode of (5) may be changed from the display mode of (5). Further, for example, after the third stop of the previous game (when the pressing of the stop button at the time of the third stop is released), the display mode of (4) may be changed to the display mode of (5). .. Further, for example, when the player bets the game value in this game, or after the third stop of the previous game (when the press of the stop button at the third stop is released), from the display mode of (4). After changing to the display mode of (1), it may be changed to the display mode of (4) once, and then changed from the display mode of (4) to the display mode of (5).

Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 118 (c), a display mode of the bet lamp display unit (BL) in the bet lamp change effect executed when the bet lamp change lottery is won will be described. Note that FIG. 118 (c) shows an example of the bet lamp change effect when the bet lamp change lottery is won and the re-game is activated in the previous game.

As described above, for example, when the previous game was in a three-card bet state, the bet lamp display unit (BL) is in the display mode of (4). In the display mode of (4), when the re-game is activated in the previous game, the same display mode is maintained until the re-game is started in the current game. Then, when the operation of the re-game is started in this game, first, the display mode of (4) changes to the display mode of (1). That is, each of BL1 to BL3 changes from a state in which the basic colors (blue, green, red) are lit to a state in which all are turned off. At this time, if the bet lamp change lottery is won, the display mode of (1) is changed to the display mode of (6) according to the operation of the re-game, and then the display mode is changed to (7). Finally, the display mode changes to (8). That is, BL1 to BL3 are sequentially lit in a special color (yellow) different from the basic color. As a result, the player recognizes that the display mode is different from the normal display mode.

As shown in FIG. 118 (c), the mode of the bet lamp display unit when the bet lamp change lottery is won is not limited to this. For example, when the operation of the re-game is started in the game this time, the display modes (6) to (8) are displayed from the display mode of (4) without changing from the display mode of (4) to the display mode of (1). The mode may be changed sequentially. Further, for example, when the operation of the re-game is started in the game this time, the display mode of (4) is changed to the display mode of (1), and then the display mode is temporarily changed to (2) to (4). Then, the display mode of (4) may be changed to the display mode of (8).

Further, when the player bets and when the player operates the re-game (automatic insertion), the main CPU 101 transmits a medal insertion command each time the game value is input (see FIGS. 57 and 58). Each time the sub CPU 201 receives this medal insertion command, it makes a lighting request request so that the above-mentioned display mode is changed. When the MAX bet button 15a is operated and a bet is made, or when the re-game operation is performed (automatic insertion), the main CPU 101 gives information indicating that three game values have been inserted once. It may be transmitted to the sub CPU 201 by the input command. In this case, the sub CPU 201 delays each request request timing when, for example, the replay operation is performed (automatic input) and the display mode of FIGS. 118A and 118 is changed. By multiplying by (setting the delay time), control may be performed so that the display mode is sequentially changed.

Further, when the sub CPU 201 sequentially changes the above-mentioned display mode or sequentially changes the above-mentioned display mode, an error (including opening the door) occurs, and an error command is transmitted from the main CPU 101. If this is the case, during the error, the control for sequentially changing the display mode described above is not executed, but the control for displaying the final display mode is performed.

For example, when the display mode shown in FIG. 118 (c) is changed, the sub CPU 201 has (a) a request request for turning on BL1 in yellow, (b) a request for turning on BL2 in yellow, and (c). ) By sequentially performing request requests for turning on BL3 in yellow, control is performed so that the display mode is sequentially changed as shown in (6) to (8), but during an error, (c) By making only the request for turning on the BL3 in yellow, it is controlled so that it is suddenly displayed in the display mode shown in (8).

For example, the sub CPU 201 displays during an error to notify that the error is occurring. Such a display is requested in a dedicated process during an error. On the other hand, the request request for sequentially changing the above-mentioned display mode is requested within the normal processing. Therefore, in order to sequentially change the display mode even during an error, it is necessary to be able to determine the state and make a request request for sequentially changing the display mode even within the process dedicated to the error. The processing becomes complicated, and there is a high possibility that problems such as the display during an important error not being performed or the bet lamp display unit (BL) not lighting at all occur. Therefore, the above-mentioned display mode is not sequentially changed during the error, and the final display mode is displayed so as not to cause a difference in the information obtained by the player.

Return to the explanation of the mode suggestion effect (Part 2). In this detailed example, the bet lamp change effect itself described with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118 is also an effect suggesting a mode, but in this detailed example, according to the history of the bet lamp change effect. Therefore, it is possible to perform a mode suggestion effect using the reel side lamp display unit (SL) during non-game.

In this detailed example, the reel side lamp display unit (SL) shown in FIG. 118 is provided on the side surface of each reel (3L, 3C, 3R). For example, SL1 is provided on the left side surface of the reel 3L, SL2 is provided between the reel 3L and the reel 3C, SL3 is provided between the reel 3C and the reel 3R, and SL4 is provided on the right side surface of the reel 3R. Is provided. The reel side lamp display unit (SL) is provided, for example, by having a structure in which light from a back lamp (not shown) for illuminating each reel from the back side can be visually recognized from the side surface of each reel. It may be provided by installing a plurality of LEDs on the side surface of each reel, or may be provided by installing a liquid crystal display device or an EL on the side surface of each reel. .. Further, for example, when a liquid crystal display device is provided on the front side of each reel, the window frame of the portion of the liquid crystal display device in which the reel display window is formed is used as the reel side lamp display unit (SL). May be good.

In this detailed example, for example, when the game value is not input or stored and the game operation is not performed for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds), the game value is input or the game operation is performed next. It is determined to be in a non-gaming state until it is performed. Then, in the non-gaming state, a demonstration effect is performed at regular intervals. Then, in the demonstration effect, the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is referred to, the effect mode of the reel side lamp display unit (SL) is determined according to the number of executions, and the reel side according to the determined effect mode. Lamp production is performed.

For example, when the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is 0, the first effect mode is determined, and the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is 1 to 3 times. The second effect mode is determined, and when the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is 4 or more, the third effect mode is determined. The number of executions of the bet lamp change effect is started when the pseudo-bonus ends, and is cleared when it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus again.

The first effect mode is, for example, the reel side lamp display unit (SL) blinks all at once in the demonstration effect, and the second effect mode is, for example, the reel side lamp in the demonstration effect. The display unit (SL) blinks sequentially from left to right, and the second production mode is, for example, in the demonstration production, the reel side lamp display unit (SL) is directed from right to left. It is an effect mode such as blinking sequentially. It should be noted that the method for differentiating the first to third production modes is not limited to this. For example, the effect mode may be different depending on the emission color of the reel side lamp display unit (SL), or the effect mode may be different depending on the length of the effect to be executed.

In addition, the first to third production modes may be determined by lottery. In this case, when the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is 0, the probability that the first effect mode is determined is "high", and the probability that the second effect mode is determined is "high". The probability that the third effect mode is determined is "low", and when the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is 1 to 3, the first effect mode is determined. The probability is "low", the probability that the second effect mode is determined is "high", the probability that the third effect mode is determined is "low", and the number of executions of the bet lamp change effect between pseudo bonuses is 4. When it is more than once, the probability that the first production mode is determined is "low", the probability that the second production mode is determined is "low", and the probability that the third production mode is determined is "low". It should be "high".

Further, the effect according to the first to third effect modes may be performed during the game, not in the non-game state. In this case, for example, in the production section, when the result of the pseudo bonus transition lottery is non-winning, the production execution lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, the bet lamp change effect between the pseudo bonuses is executed according to the number of executions. The production may be performed.

The bet lamp display unit (BL) and the reel side lamp display unit (SL) are examples of the effect device, and other effect devices can be used respectively. For example, a predetermined area in the display device 11 is bet. Each effect may be performed by assuming that it corresponds to the lamp display unit (BL) and that the specific area in the display device 11 corresponds to the reel side lamp display unit (SL). That is, the effect means used in the mode suggestion effect (No. 2) may be any effect means.

(Invention 15 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in the normal state (for example, the effect section), the first effect (for example, the mode) has a different probability depending on the expected degree of grant (for example, the mode) of the advantageous state (for example, the pseudo bonus). , Bet lamp change effect), and further, it is possible to perform the second effect (for example, reel side lamp effect) in a different effect mode depending on the number of times the first effect is executed. That is, for example, even if the game is not performed from the beginning in the normal state, it may be possible to estimate the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the first effect and the effect mode of the second effect as clues. It has become. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained.

Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, since the second effect is performed in the non-gaming state, the effect mode of the second effect can be an effective index for the player who is going to play the game from now on. As a result, it is possible to increase the motivation for playing and improve the operation of the gaming machine.

(Invention 16 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in the normal state (for example, the effect section), the specific effect (for example, for example) has a different probability depending on the expected degree (for example, mode) of giving an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus). Bet lamp change production) is made possible. That is, there are cases where it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation of granting an advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the specific effect as a clue. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained. Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the specific effect is performed by changing the display mode of the bet number display. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect device or the like for performing a specific effect, and it is possible to perform the specific effect in a natural flow during the game. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances the motivation for playing and the interest in the game with a general-purpose configuration.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, a pseudo bet effect (for example, the effect shown in FIG. 118 (a)) is performed when the re-game is activated, and the specific effect also follows the flow of such a bet effect. It is designed to be performed in various manners. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the motivation for playing and the interest in the game in a more comfortable manner.

(Invention 17 according to this detailed example)
Further, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, in addition to the one described in the invention 16 according to the above detailed example, when the specific effect is performed during the occurrence of an error, the game machine does not follow the flow of the bet effect and is final. Only the displayed contents are displayed. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect and prevent the player from making a difference in the information obtained even when an error occurs.

(Invention 18 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of the present detailed example, either of the first stop display mode (for example, the normal re-game display mode) that makes it easy for the player to recognize that the player has won the re-game combination. The player recognizes that the prize is between the third stop display mode (for example, the special re-game display mode) that makes it difficult for the player to recognize whether the prize is a prize or the re-game combination. A first stop display mode that facilitates the game and a second stop display mode that allows the player to recognize that the winning combination is different from the replay combination (for example, a special replay display mode). It is possible to make the effect mode of the bet effect different from that of the third stop display mode, which makes it difficult for the player to recognize which role is won. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused even when the player has a plurality of stop display modes of the re-game combination.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, when a specific re-game combination (for example, "F_confirmed cherry") is won, a first stop display mode, a second stop display mode, and a third stop display mode are used. There is a possibility that any of the above will be displayed. For example, it is possible to change the playability depending on the difference in the stop display mode, but even in such a case, it is possible to perform an appropriate bet effect. It becomes. Furthermore, the playability can be suggested by the bet effect.

[Music production during the pseudo bonus of this detailed example]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 119, the music production during the pseudo-bonus that can be executed in this detailed example will be described. FIG. 119 is a diagram for explaining a production example of the music production during the pseudo-bonus.

First, in this detailed example, when the pseudo-bonus is started, the 1G stock is obtained when the above-mentioned ceiling shortening lottery is won and the result is "with ceiling shortening", or when the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery is won. When it is 1 or more, the music production is executed with a predetermined probability (for example, it may be a probability of 100% or an arbitrary probability of 1 to 99%). .. As a result, the player is notified that the pseudo bonus is extended.

Further, in this detailed example, when the 1G stock becomes 1 or more by winning the above-mentioned 1G continuous lottery during the pseudo bonus, a predetermined probability (for example, 100% probability may be used, or 1 to 99). It is also possible to execute the music production with an arbitrary probability of%).

The mode in which the music production is executed is not limited to this. For example, in order to enhance the interest in the pseudo-bonus, the music production may be executed with a predetermined probability regardless of whether or not it is decided that the pseudo-bonus is extended.

Further, for example, when it is determined that the production section after the end of the pseudo bonus is in the heaven mode (or only the heaven C mode), the music production may be executed with a predetermined probability. Further, the music production may be executed with a predetermined probability depending on whether or not it is decided that the pseudo bonus is extended and the production section after the pseudo bonus ends. Specifically, for example, when it is decided that the pseudo-bonus is extended and the production section after the pseudo-bonus ends is in heaven mode, the music production is executed with a 100% probability, and the pseudo-bonus is extended. Although it has been decided that it will be done, if the production section after the end of the pseudo bonus is not in heaven mode, there is a 50% chance that the music production will be executed and the pseudo bonus will not be extended, but the pseudo bonus When the production section after the end is in the heaven mode, the music production may be executed with a probability of 50%.

The music production data 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a) is a music pattern in which the music production is started at an arbitrary timing (for example, when the pseudo bonus is started) after the pseudo bonus is started, and is an intro section. It is a music pattern composed of A (unique part) and a music loop part (common part). The intro part A is a flow-out part in the music production, and may be music data (or data including character lines and sound effects) configured so as not to be repeatedly (looped) reproduced. Hereinafter, the intro part A may be used. B and the intro part C are also the same), and the music loop part is music data configured so that a music having a predetermined length is repeatedly (looped) played until the end of the pseudo bonus after the outflow portion.

The music production data 2 shown in FIG. 119 (b) is obtained at an arbitrary timing after the start of the pseudo-bonus (for example, when a special sound is output at the start of the pseudo-bonus, or after the start of the pseudo-bonus (for example, for example). It is a music pattern in which the music production is started from (when a special sound is output at the start of the next game), and is a music pattern composed of an intro part B (unique part) and a music loop part (common part). be. The intro part B is a flow-out part in the music production, and is music data configured so as not to be repeatedly (looped) reproduced. The music loop portion is the same as that in the music production data 1.

The music production data 3 shown in FIG. 119 (c) is predetermined to be notified at an arbitrary timing after the start of the pseudo bonus (for example, in the game of the 10th game after the start of the pseudo bonus). When the game of the 10th game is started, or when it is decided to announce that the 1G consecutive stock is 1 or more after the start of the pseudo bonus (for example, when the game winning the 1G consecutive lottery is started) ), Which is a music pattern composed of an intro part C (unique part) and a music loop part (common part). The intro part C is a flow-out part in the music production, and is music data configured so as not to be repeatedly (looped) reproduced. The music loop portion is the same as that in the music production data 1.

Here, in the intro part A, the intro part B, and the intro part C, for example, the music has the same content, but the presence or absence of the character's dialogue is different, the content of the dialogue is different, the presence or absence of the sound effect is different, or It can be configured as different music data in such a manner that the content of the sound effect is different, the music tone is different, or the tempo is different. Further, for example, it can be simply composed as different songs. Further, the time from the start to the end of the output may be the same (or substantially the same) or may be different. In addition, the timing at which the musical composition is started is not limited to the start of the game, but any timing within the unit game (for example, when the start lever is operated, when a specific stop button is operated, when all reels are stopped, etc.). Can be.

In the following, as an example, the intro section A has the longest time from the start to the end of output, the intro section C has the shortest time from the start to the end of output, and the intro section B has the shortest output. It is assumed that the time from the start to the end of is in the middle.

In this detailed example, regardless of which of the music production data 1 to 3 is used to execute the music production during the pseudo-bonus, for example, a power failure occurs, an error occurs, and the door is opened (front door 2b). When an interruption event such as (opening) occurs, the execution of the music production is also interrupted along with the interruption of the pseudo bonus. Then, when such an interruption event is resolved, the execution of the music production is resumed with the resumption of the pseudo bonus, but in this case, the music production is executed by any of the music production data 1 to 3. Even in this case, the music production data 3 is selected, and the music production according to the music production data 3 is controlled to be executed from the beginning.

Here, the music production data 3 is basically a music pattern configured on the assumption that the output of the music is started in the middle of the pseudo-bonus, and the intro portion is the shortest music pattern. Therefore, when the pseudo-bonus is interrupted and then restarted, the music pattern output from the beginning has the least discomfort given to the player. On the other hand, the music production data 1 and the music production data 2 are basically music patterns configured on the assumption that the output of the music is started when the pseudo bonus is started (or immediately after). In addition, the intro part is a music pattern longer than the music production data 3. Therefore, as compared with the music production data 3, when the pseudo-bonus is interrupted and then restarted, the music pattern output from the beginning has a lot of discomfort given to the player.

Further, depending on which of the music production data 1 to 3 is used to execute the music production, when the pseudo-bonus is interrupted, the interrupted portion of the music production data is memorized, and when the pseudo-bonus is restarted, It is also possible to control the music production to be restarted from the interrupted portion, and even if the music production is executed by any of the music production data 1 to 3, the music production is restarted after the pseudo bonus is interrupted. When it is done, it is possible to control so that only the music loop part (common part) is executed from the beginning, but in the former case, the interruption point must be memorized, and in the latter case. It is necessary to separately specify music production data such as executing only the music loop portion (common), and in either case, the control burden and the amount of information will increase. Therefore, it can be said that the method in this detail is the most efficient.

(Invention 19 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, only the outflow part (for example, intro parts A to C) is different, and a common music piece (for example, a music loop part) is output to a plurality of music productions (for example). , Music production according to music production data 1 to 3), no matter which music production is executed, an interruption event (for example, power failure, error, door opening, etc.) occurs. When resuming afterwards, a specific musical composition (for example, a musical composition according to the musical composition data 3) is restarted from the beginning. That is, the mode is the same when the interruption event occurs and then restarts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort when the music production is restarted after the interruption event occurs.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the musical composition effect is used as an effect of notifying the extension of a specific state (for example, a pseudo bonus). Then, when resuming after the interruption event occurs, the music production (for example, the music production according to the music production data 3) in which the extension of the specific state is always notified in the middle is restarted from the beginning. There is. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the music production and further reduce the discomfort when the production is resumed.

[State suggestion effect of this detailed example]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 120, the state suggestion effect that can be performed in this detailed example will be described. FIG. 120 is a diagram for explaining a state suggestion effect.

First, in this detailed example, the stop state notification unit 117 (not shown. For convenience of explanation, provided inside the stop button 17L), which is composed of a full-color LED, is stopped inside each of the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R. The state notification unit 117L is provided, the one provided inside the stop button 17C is referred to as the stop state notification unit 117C, and the one provided inside the stop button 17R is referred to as the stop state notification unit 117R). The stop state notification unit 117 is basically used to notify whether or not the current state is a state in which a stop operation is possible. The display mode of the stop state notification unit 117 is controlled by the sub CPU 201, but may be controlled by the main CPU 101.

That is, when the rotation of each reel is started, the rotation speed becomes a constant speed, and the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are activated, it is the "stop permission time", and each reel is stopped by the stop operation. Next, the period until the stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are activated is "other than when stop is permitted". The stop state notification unit 117 notifies the player whether or not the stop operation is possible by changing the display mode between "when stop is permitted" and "when stop is permitted".

Note that when each reel is spinning and all stop buttons are enabled,
The stop state notification units 117L, 117C, and 117R all display the "when stop is permitted". Here, for example, when a stop operation is performed on the stop button 17L and the left reel 3L is stopped, the stop button 17L is displayed. Is no longer a valid stop button, so the stop state notification units 117C and 117R remain in the display mode of "when stop is permitted", but the stop state notification unit 117L is in the display mode of "other than when stop is permitted". In this way, the stop state notification units 117L, 117C, and 117R can individually change the display mode.

Here, in this detailed example, as described above, neither "F_2BB" nor "F_3BB" has been won and carried over (between non-flags), and "F_2BB" in the two-card bet state. (2BB winning game), "F_3BB" winning in a 3-card bet state (3BB winning game), "F_2BB" being carried over after winning (between 2BB flags), "BB01" 2BB state (2BB is operating), "F_3BB" is won and then carried over (between 3BB flags), and "BB02" is displayed and transitioned to 3BB state (3BB is operating). It is possible to be controlled to any of the above states (game state).

Therefore, in this detailed example, the stop state notification unit 117 is controlled to which of the above-mentioned states, while maintaining the function of notifying the player whether or not the stop operation is possible. Is also configured so that it can be suggested.

As shown in FIG. 120, the stop state notification unit 117 takes a display mode of "green" color when "other than when stop is permitted" and "blue" color when "when stop is permitted" between the non-flags. Is displayed. Further, in the 2BB winning game, the display mode is "green" if it is "other than when stop is permitted", and the display mode is "white" if it is "when stop is permitted". Further, in the 3BB winning game, the display mode is "green" if it is "other than when stop is permitted", and the display mode is "orange" if it is "when stop is permitted". That is, the stop state notification unit 117 can suggest the type of the internal winning combination (more specifically, the bonus combination) or the type of the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed, depending on the display mode of "when stop is permitted". ..

Further, the stop state notification unit 117 may display a "red" color between the 2BB flags if it is "other than when stop is permitted" and display "BB01" when it is "when stop is permitted". If it is not possible, the display mode is "blue", and if it is possible to display "BB01", the display mode is "white". In addition, between the 3BB flags, if it is "other than when stop is permitted", the display mode is "purple", and if it is "when stop is permitted" and it is impossible to display "BB02", "blue" is displayed. If it is possible to display "BB02", the display mode is "orange". That is, the stop state notification unit 117 can suggest the type of the internal winning combination (more specifically, the bonus combination) or the type of the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed, depending on the display mode of "when stop is permitted". At the same time, it is possible to suggest the current state (game state) by the display mode of "other than when the stop is permitted".

Further, in the 2BB state, the stop state notification unit 117 takes a display mode of "yellow" if it is "other than when stop is permitted" and a display mode of "blue" if it is "when stop is permitted". Further, in the 3BB state, if it is "other than when stop is permitted", the display mode is "yellow", and if it is "when stop is permitted", the display mode is "blue". That is, the stop state notification unit 117 can suggest the current state (game state) by the display mode of "other than when stop is permitted".

Here, as described above, in this detailed example, the game playability varies depending on whether the game is played in the state of three bets between the 2BB flags or the game is played in the state of three bets between the 3BB flags. Therefore, whether the current state is between 2BB flags or between 3BB flags, or as a premise, it is better to shift to 2BB in a game that can shift to 2BB state, or not to shift. Whether it is better, or whether it is better to shift to 3BB in a game that can shift to the 3BB state, or whether it is better not to shift is of great concern not only to the player but also to the game store side. Therefore, by making the above-mentioned suggestions, it is possible to substantially select (variate) the playability.

The display mode of the stop state notification unit 117 described above is an example, and is not limited to this. That is, if it is possible to suggest the type of the internal winning combination or the type of the combination of the symbols for which the display is permitted, the display mode of "at the time of permission to stop" may be taken. Further, if it is possible to suggest the current state (game state) by the display mode of "other than when the stop is permitted", another display mode can be adopted.

In addition, various suggestions described above can be made by using a display means (notification means) other than the stop state notification unit 117. For example, the above-mentioned bed lamp display unit (BL) and reel side lamp display unit (SL) can be used, or the above-mentioned other effect device can be used.

Further, for example, it is possible to suggest the type of internal winning combination or the type of combination of symbols for which display is permitted, depending on the display mode of "other than when stop is permitted", and the display mode of "when stop is permitted". It is also possible to suggest the current state (game state).

Further, the information notified by using the stop state notification unit 117 is not limited to the above-mentioned information. For example, as the current state, an internal state other than the gaming state shown in FIG. 120 may be suggested as the gaming state. For example, each of the above-mentioned modes (FIG. 105) can be suggested as a gaming state, or simply suggesting whether the gaming section is a non-advantageous section, an effect section, or an increasing section. Of course, each internal state shown in the present embodiment can also be suggested as a gaming state.

Further, for example, as the type of the internal winning combination or the type of the combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed, the combination of the internal winning combination other than the bonus combination or the combination of the symbols that are permitted to be displayed is suggested for the internal winning combination other than the bonus combination. It may be possible. In this case, for example, it may be possible to suggest information on the stop operation during the increasing section.

(Invention 20 according to this detailed example)
As described above, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, it is possible to suggest information on game playability by using a notification means (for example, the stop state notification unit 117) for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted. As a result, it is not necessary to provide a notification means for notifying information on game playability. Therefore, information on game playability can be shown in a general-purpose configuration.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, any kind of special symbol combination (for example, "BB01" or 3BB which is a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is used according to the bet game value amount (2 or 3 cards). It is determined whether or not to allow the display of "BB02"), which is a combination of symbols according to the above. Further, even if the display of any special symbol combination is already permitted (for example, between the 2BB flags or the 3BB flags), it is bet whether or not the combination of the special symbols is displayed. It is designed to fluctuate according to the amount of game value. In addition, it is possible to change the game playability according to the bet game value amount and which type of special symbol combination is permitted to be displayed. Then, by using a notification means for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted, if there is a combination of special symbols that are permitted to be displayed in this game, that fact is notified and eventually. It is also notified that the display of the combination of special symbols of the type of is permitted. Therefore, even when the game playability is complicated, information on the game playability can be appropriately notified.

Further, in the gaming machine of this detailed example, the gaming state and the display are permitted by using the notification means (for example, the stop state notification unit 117) for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted. The combination may be suggested. Thereby, the information desired by the player can be appropriately notified in a general-purpose configuration.

[Another control example of stable state and rough wave state]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 121, another example in which each of the above-mentioned stable state and rough wave state can be controlled will be described in this detailed example. FIG. 121 is a diagram for explaining different control examples of the stable state and the rough wave state.

In this detailed example, when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won, a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel rip") is displayed (or displayed) in a three-card bet state between the 2BB flags. In the 3-card bet state between the 3BB flags, the combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel rip") is not displayed (or is difficult to be displayed), and the combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "upward rip") is not displayed. ) Is displayed (or is easily displayed).

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the 3-bet state itself between the 3BB flags a stable state and to make the 3-bet state itself between the 2BB flags a rough wave state. Alternatively, it is possible to control the stable state according to the display of the combination of predetermined symbols and to control the rough wave state according to the display of the combination of the specific symbols.

However, the variation of which state is set to the stable state or the rough wave state is not limited to this. For example, various specifications shown in FIG. 121 can be adopted. In FIG. 121, the number of bets (ie, the amount of game value bet. “3” or “2”) and the type of bonus carried over (ie, game state. Between non-flags (“none”), 2BB flags. The content of the stop control varies as shown in the figure depending on the interval (“2BB”) or the interval between the 3BB flags (“3BB”)). In FIG. 121, the combination of predetermined symbols is defined as "stable roll" and the combination of specific symbols is defined as "rough wave roll", and while the rough wave roll can be displayed, the stable roll cannot be displayed. "A: Rough wave output derivation" is defined as "A: Rough wave output derivation", which is a state in which control or stop control is performed in which a rough wave output is easily displayed while a stable output is difficult to be displayed. "B: Derivation of stable rolls" is a state in which stop control in which the eyes cannot be displayed or stop control in which stable rolls are easily displayed while stop control in which rough wave rolls are difficult to be displayed is performed.

It should be noted that the stop control of either "A: Rough wave roll derivation" or "B: Stable roll roll derivation" is performed not only when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is won. It may be the case that the other role is won. That is, in each state shown in FIG. 121 in which the bet game value amount and the game state are combined, for example, in the state where "A: rough wave roll derivation" is defined, "A: rough wave roll derivation" is relatively ". It is sufficient that the stop control of "B: stable roll derivation" is relatively easy to be performed in the state where "B: stable roll derivation" is defined.

As shown in FIG. 121, the first specification is, for example, a specification in which the stop control is changed according to the number of bets regardless of the type of bonus carried over. This specification makes it easy to switch states.

As shown in FIG. 121, the second specification is, for example, when the game is continued in a three-card bet state from the initial state (between non-flags), after a lottery in a rough wave state is performed for a while, and after a 3BB win. It is a specification that will be in a stable state. In addition, in the case of a game flow in which a bonus is awarded, the game flow returns to the rough wave state again after the bonus state ends, so that a sharp transition of ball output can be expected. On the other hand, in the case of a game flow in which no bonus is awarded, it is possible to control the stable state for a relatively long period of time, so that the gambling property can be made appropriate.

The third to seventh specifications are as shown in FIG. 121, and each has its own characteristics, but detailed description thereof will be omitted here.

Here, the game flow for winning a bonus is, for example, a game in which a player can win a ball or an advantageous game by winning a bonus when the bonus can be won in the flow of the game. If it is possible to win a bonus, such as being able to shift to a state, it means playability in which it is common to win a bonus.

On the other hand, the game flow in which the bonus is not won means that it is difficult to win the bonus in the flow of the game, or even if the bonus can be won, the bonus is not won, for example, for the player. It means playability in which it is common not to win a bonus, such as not to be disadvantaged in a lottery regarding an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus). In addition, here, "making it difficult to win a bonus" means that a small role or a replay role is preferentially drawn in, and the probability of "missing" is set to zero or an extremely low probability, so that the bonus is given. It means that the probability of winning a prize is zero or extremely low.

In addition, in FIG. 121, in any of the first to seventh specifications, it is stipulated that in the case of a two-card bet state, the state is "B: stable roll derivation" regardless of the game state. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be specified that the state of "A: Rough wave outcome derivation" may be obtained depending on the game state, as in the case of a three-card bet state. Further, in this case, in the predetermined specifications, the specifications corresponding to the gaming state are the same in the 3-card bet state and the 2-card state, but in the specific specifications, the 3-card bet state and the 2-card state are used. It may be specified that at least a part of the specifications corresponding to the gaming state is different. That is, in the 3-bet state, any of the specifications 1 to 7 shown in FIG. 121 is specified, and in the 2-bet state, the specifications are different from the specifications specified in the 3-bet state. Any of the first to seventh specifications shown may be specified.

In addition, it is possible to play in a one-card bet state, and a bonus combination ("F_1BB") that can be won only in a one-card bet state is provided. The above is described according to the number (whether it is a 1-card bet state to a 3-card bet state) and the type of bonus carried over (whether it is between non-flags, 1BB flags, or 3BB flags). The state of the stop control may be changed. In this case, as in the relationship between the 3-bet state and the 2-bet state, in the 1-card state, it may be specified that the state is "B: stable roll derivation" regardless of the game state, or at least. The same stop control as in the 3-bet state or the 2-bet state may be performed, or at least the specifications specified in the 3-bet state or the 2-bet state are different from those specified in the first to third bets shown in FIG. 121. Any of the seventh specification may be specified. In any case, it becomes possible to further diversify the game state and the variation of the game playability.

Further, as a method for creating a stable state and a rough wave state, a method other than the above-mentioned method can be used. For example, the winning probability of a specific replay combination (for example, "F_replay C") in which a lottery regarding an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus lottery) is performed (or the winning probability in the lottery is relatively high) is low. If the first RT state and the second RT state in which the probability of winning a specific replay combination is high are provided and the lottery regarding the advantageous state is won in the first RT state, the benefit of the winning is large (for example, the duration of the pseudo bonus). If you win the lottery related to the advantageous state in the 2nd RT state, the benefit of the winning is small (for example, continuation of pseudo bonus). By making the expected value such as the length of the possible period, the probability of winning the ceiling shortening lottery and the 1G continuous lottery low), the 1st RT state is set to the rough wave state and the 2nd RT state is set to the stable state to create each state. You can also do it. In this case, in the initial state (RT0 state), when "parallel lip" is displayed, it is controlled to the first RT state, and when "right rising lip" is displayed, it is controlled to the second RT state. For example, it may be returned to the initial state when the setting is changed or the bonus ends.

Further, for example, in the case of winning, if the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the first right stop), a "right-up lip" is displayed, and the stop operation is performed in a mode other than the specific mode. The first replay combination (for example, "F_replay D") that will display "parallel rip" when it is broken, and "right-up rip" regardless of the stop operation mode when winning The second replay combination (for example, "F_replay A'") in which is displayed, and the third replay combination in which "parallel rip" is displayed regardless of the stop operation mode when winning. (For example, "F_replay B") and the winning of the first replaying combination are possible, but the winning of the second replaying combination and the third replaying combination is not possible. (RT0 state) and the winning of the third replay combination is possible, but the winning of the second replay combination and the third replay combination is not possible. The winning of the first RT state and the second replay combination is possible. However, a first replay combination and a second RT state in which the winning of the third replay combination is not possible are provided, and in the initial state, the player stops in a specific mode when the first replay combination is won. Depending on whether or not the operation is performed, either a rough wave state or a stable state may be selected. In this case, since the third replay combination is won in the first RT state, the lottery regarding the advantageous section is given preferential treatment, while the lottery regarding the advantageous section is treated coldly because the third replay combination is not won in the second RT state. NS. Then, in the first RT state, which is an advantageous section (effect section), for example, since the procedure of the advantageous stop operation is not notified regarding the "push order bell B", the granting of the game medium is treated coldly, while the advantageous section (effect section). In the second RT state, for example, it is possible to give preferential treatment to the game medium by notifying the procedure of the advantageous stop operation regarding the “push order bell B”. As a result, each state can be created with the first RT state as the rough wave state and the second RT state as the stable state. As described above, when creating a rough wave state and a stable state using the RT state, a different bonus combination is won according to the number of bets, or a stop is made depending on which bonus flag is between. It is also possible to eliminate the need for different controls. Therefore, the number of games that can be played can be limited to "3".

[Another control example of stable state and rough wave state (Part 2)]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 122, in this detailed example, another example that can be controlled for each of the above-mentioned stable state and rough wave state will be described. FIG. 122 is a diagram for explaining another control example (No. 2) of the stable state and the rough wave state.

Unlike this detailed example, in this control example (No. 2), for example, when the set values are "1" to "5" (settings 1 to 5: set values other than specific set values) and set values. By making the winning probability of the bonus combination different from that in the case of "6" (setting 6: specific set value), the ball ejection state regarding the advantageous state is made different. Specifically, the winning probability of bonus 1 (for example, "F_2BB" in this detailed example) is set to "1/16384" in the case of settings 1 to 5, and "1/20" in the case of setting 6. do. Further, the winning probability of bonus 2 (for example, "F_3BB" in this detailed example) is set to "1/20" in the case of settings 1 to 5, and "1/16384" in the case of setting 6. Then, the carry-over information (information stored in the carry-over combination storage area) of the bonus combination carried over by winning is not deleted (cleared) when the setting is changed.

In this separate control example (No. 2), only bonus 1 may be provided without providing bonus 2. Also, the bonus 1 may be won only in the setting 6. That is, in this separate control example (No. 2), at least a specific setting value can be won (or, as described above, a specific setting value is easy to win, and a setting value other than the specific setting value is won. It suffices if a specific special role (bonus 1) is provided. Further, although the specific setting value will be described as the setting 6, a setting value other than the setting 6 may be set as the specific setting value.

As shown in FIG. 122, in this separate control example (No. 2), the setting 1 to 5 and the carry-over state of the bonus 1 are set to the rough wave state (rough wave mode), and the setting is 1 to 5 and the bonus. The non-carrying state of 1 is defined as a stable state (stable mode). Further, the state of setting 6 is defined as the EX state (extra mode). In FIG. 122, the “AT winning rate” indicates the expected value that can be shifted to the advantageous state (increasing section), and the “AT hitting property” is the case where the transition to the advantageous state (increasing section) is performed once. , Indicates the expected value of the period during which the advantageous state can be continued (or the villa can be continued).

Here, as described above, the advantageous section includes an increasing section (increasing state) in which the game value increases and a non-increasing section (directing section / non-increasing state) in which the game value does not increase. Therefore, if the advantageous state (increasing section) continues or stays in a row, it means that after shifting to the increasing section once, the increasing section ends once, and after a predetermined period of games in the non-increasing section, the game shifts to the increasing section again. As a whole, a series of advantageous sections continues, but in the meantime, it includes repeating mutual transition between increasing sections and non-increasing sections. That is, between the increasing section and the increasing section, the non-increasing section (the production section may be a decreasing period in which the game value decreases, or a maintenance period in which the game value is maintained). When the player is configured to continue the advantageous state (in this case, the advantageous section) of the game as a whole in the manner of sandwiching the above, the “AT hitting property” is the average period during which at least a series of advantageous sections continues. It means the degree of length of. Further, when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section, as described above, information on the advantageous section (for example, information for controlling the effect section or the increase section, information on the current mode, pseudo-bonus) Information related to the duration, information related to the presence or absence of ceiling shortening, 1G continuous stock counter value, etc.) are all cleared (initialized). This information can also be rephrased as information regarding the determination of transition to the advantageous section. Therefore, "AT hitting property" means at least the length of the average period from the start of the increasing state to the initialization of the information regarding the determination of the transition to the advantageous state by the end of the advantageous state (here, the advantageous section). It can also be said to mean the degree.

That is, in the rough wave state (rough wave mode), the expected value of shifting to the advantageous state is low (it is difficult to shift), but once the transition to the advantageous state is made, the expected value of the period during which the advantageous state continues (or stays in a row) is high. It is set as high (easy to continue, extend, or stay in a row), and in the stable state (stable mode), the expected value to shift to the advantageous state is high (easy to shift), but the advantage even if it shifts to the advantageous state. It is set as having a low expected value (difficult to continue, extend, or stay in a row) during the period in which the state continues (or stay in a row). Further, in the EX state (extra mode), the expected value of shifting to the advantageous state is higher (easier to shift) than in the stable state (stable mode), but the advantageous state continues even if the transition to the advantageous state is performed (the advantageous state continues). Alternatively, the expected value of the period (or staying in a row) is set as lower (more difficult to continue, extend, or stay in a row). Further, in the rough wave state (rough wave mode), at least the average period from the start of the increasing state to the initialization of the information regarding the determination of the transition to the advantageous state by the end of the advantageous state (here, the advantageous section) is the longest. In the stable state (stable mode), at least the average period from the start of the increasing state to the initialization of the information regarding the determination of transition to the advantageous state by the end of the advantageous state (here, the advantageous section) is the rough wave state (rough wave state). It is shorter than the rough wave mode), and the EX state (extra mode) is at least from the start of the increasing state to the initialization of the information regarding the determination of the transition to the advantageous state by the end of the advantageous state (here, the advantageous section). It can also be said that the average period is the shortest.

The method of varying the degree of advantage in each of the rough wave state (rough wave mode), the stable state (stable mode), and the EX state (extra mode) is not limited to the above. As already described, the degree of advantage may be changed by changing the expected value (inclination value) of the game value to be given per unit game in the advantageous state, or the degree of advantage may be changed while the bonus is not carried over and the bonus is carried over by 1. Depending on which state is in the middle or the bonus 2 carry-over state, for example, the stop control of the push order small winning combination may be changed, and the degree of advantage may be changed accordingly. Further, the degree of advantage may be varied by determining that the winning probability of each bonus and the amount of increase in the game value during the bonus are related to the above-mentioned degree of advantage in each of the above-mentioned states. .. In addition, the method of varying the degree of advantage described in other than this example can be appropriately adopted.

Further, when the bonus 1 is carried over, as a mode of the winning control of the bonus 1, the control of "making it difficult to win the bonus" is performed in any of (A) settings 1 to 6 (B). ) In settings 1 to 5, "make it difficult to win a bonus" control is performed, and in setting 6, "make it difficult to win a bonus" control is not performed. In any of settings 1 to 6, it is possible to win a bonus with 2 cards, but it is impossible to win a bonus with 3 cards. (D) Bonus 1 is 2 cards and setting 6 In any of settings 1 to 6, it is possible to win a bonus with 2 cards, but it is not possible to win a bonus with 3 cards. .. In the cases of (C) and (D) above, even if the two cards are hung, in the case of settings 1 to 5, the control of "making it difficult to win the bonus" is performed, and the setting 6 is the case of the two cards. In the case of, it can be configured so that the control that "makes it difficult to win the bonus" is not performed.

Further, when the bonus 2 is carried over, as a mode of controlling the winning of the bonus 2, the control of "making it difficult to win the bonus" is performed in any of the (A') settings 1 to 6 (A'). B') In settings 1 to 5, "make it difficult to win a bonus" control is performed, and in setting 6, "make it difficult to win a bonus" control is not performed. (C') Bonus 2 is multiplied by three. In any of settings 1 to 6, it is possible to win a bonus with 3 cards, but it is not possible to win a bonus with 2 cards. (D') Bonus 2 is 3 cards. It is a bonus that you can win only with settings 1 to 5, and in any of settings 1 to 6, you can win a bonus with 3 cards, but you can not win a bonus with 2 cards. Can be adopted. In the case of (C') and (D') above, even if three cards are hung, in the case of settings 1 to 5 (or setting 6), the control of "making it difficult to win a bonus" is performed. In the case of setting 6 (or setting 1 to 5) with three cards, it is possible to configure so that the control of "making it difficult to win a bonus" is not performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122, an example of the state transition of each state (mode) will be described. First, it is assumed that the initial state is setting 1 (other than setting 6) and is in a stable state in which the bonus is not carried over. At this time, if the setting is changed and the setting 6 is set, the setting 6 is set, and the state shifts to the EX state in which the bonus is not carried over. If the game is played in this state, the bonus 1 that is easy to win in setting 6 (or wins only in setting 6) is internally won. It should be noted that the bonus 1 is not a duplicate win with other replay wins and small wins, but is a single win (bonus 2 can also be configured in the same manner). In the game (establishment G) in which this bonus 1 is internally won, if the stop operation is performed so that the combination of symbols related to the bonus 1 is not stopped and displayed (avoid winning the bonus 1), the setting is 6 and the bonus 1 is set. It will be in the EX state that is being carried over. Then, when the setting is changed again and the setting 1 (other than the setting 6) is set, the setting 1 (other than the setting 6) is set, and the bonus 1 is carried over to the rough wave state.

Here, for example, in the case where the above (A) is adopted as the mode of winning control of the bonus 1, and the game is configured so that the game can be played only by hanging three cards, the setting 6 is set. , If the prize is avoided in the game that wins the bonus 1 internally, basically until the carry-over information of the bonus 1 is erased (cleared) by the initialization process other than the setting change (for example, RAM clear process). Since the state of carrying over bonus 1 continues, it is possible to set the rough wave state by setting settings 1 to 5, and the setting remains at setting 6 (the setting is changed to setting 1 to 5 once, and then the setting is changed to setting 6). (Including the case where it is done), it is possible to set the EX state.

Further, for example, in the case where the above (B) is adopted as the mode of winning control of the bonus 1, and the game is configured so that the game can be played only by hanging three cards, the setting 6 is set. If the prize is avoided in the game that wins the bonus 1 internally, the bonus is basically a bonus until the carry-over information of the bonus 1 is erased (cleared) by an initialization process other than the setting change (for example, RAM clear process). Since the state of 1 carrying over continues, it is possible to set the rough wave state by setting settings 1 to 5. On the other hand, if the setting is 6 (including the case where the setting is changed to the setting 1 to 5 once and then the setting is changed to the setting 6), it is possible to avoid winning the bonus 1 and continue the EX state. It is also possible to win a bonus 1 and return to a stable state.

Further, for example, when the above (C) to (D) are adopted as the mode of winning control of the bonus 1, and the game is configured to enable the game with two or three cards, three cards are used. When the game is played with, the stable state can be set by setting the settings 1 to 5, and the EX state can be set by setting the setting 6. On the other hand, in the state where the setting 6 is set, if the winning is avoided in the game in which the bonus 1 is internally won by the two-card game, and then the game is performed by the three-card game, the initialization process other than the setting change is performed. Until the carry-over information of bonus 1 is erased (cleared) by (for example, RAM clear processing), the state of carrying bonus 1 basically continues, so if settings 1 to 5 are set, the rough wave state can be set. It is possible to set the EX state by keeping the setting 6 (including the case where the setting is changed to the setting 1 to 5 once and then changed to the setting 6). In addition, if the game is played with two cards, it is possible to win a bonus 1 and return to a stable state.

Next, as shown in FIG. 122, an example of an operation instruction according to the state transition of each state (mode) will be described. The operation instruction (screen) indicates, for example, an example of a screen displayed on the display device 11, and the operation instruction (lamp) is, for example, the above-mentioned state display or the above-mentioned stop state notification unit 117. It shows an example of a display mode. Here, the operation instruction (screen) and the operation instruction (lamp) are mainly operation instructions to the clerk of the game store, and these operation instructions are in a predetermined state (for example, the setting key is turned on and the setting confirmation is performed. It should be displayed only in the possible state). However, if the operation instruction (lamp) is displayed in a mode that is difficult for the player to recognize (for example, the lighting state changes only for a few seconds at the time of state transition and then returns to the normal lighting state), it is predetermined. It may be displayed even if it is in a state other than the state of.

It is suggested that the state can be changed to the rough wave state (or EX state) by changing the setting to setting 6 when the setting is 1 (other than setting 6) and the bonus is not carried over to the stable state. .. Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is "1", the current mode is "stable" mode, and "when changing to rough wave mode, change to setting 6". "Please do." Is displayed, and the display mode of the operation instruction (lamp) is "lit in green".

Next, when the setting is changed, the setting 6 is set, the setting is 6, and the bonus is not carried over to the EX state, the state can be changed to the rough wave state by winning the bonus 1. It is suggested. Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is "6", the current mode is "EX" mode, and "when changing to rough wave mode, up to 1 bonus. "Please play a few games." Is displayed, and the display mode of the operation instruction (lamp) is "yellow lighting".

Then, when the game in which the bonus 1 is won starts (at least all reels are rotating) in the EX state, if the winning of the bonus 1 is avoided, the state is changed to the rough wave state. It is suggested that it is possible (it is possible to transition from non-carry-over of bonus to carry-over of 1 bonus). Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is "6", the current mode is "EX" mode, and "Bonus 1 has been won. Bonus 1 (7-BAR) -Aim the BAR at the left reel so that the BARs are not aligned. "Is displayed, and the display mode of the operation instruction (lamp) is" blinking yellow ".

Then, even in the EX state, the game in which the bonus 1 is won ends (at least all reels stop rotating), and the winning of the bonus 1 is avoided in the game (bonus 1 is being carried over). At that time (and in the game after the next game in which the bonus 1 is being carried over in the EX state), the state can be changed to the rough wave state by changing the setting to settings 1 to 5 (other than setting 6). Is suggested. Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is "6", the current mode is "EX" mode, and "Bonus 1 is being carried over. When changing to rough wave mode" , Please change the setting to settings 1 to 5. "is displayed, and the display mode of the operation instruction (lamp) is" blinking yellow "(EX state, bonus 1 is being carried over in the next game and subsequent games. , "Yellow lighting" or "blue lighting").

Next, when the setting is changed, setting 1 (other than setting 6) is set, setting 1 is in a rough wave state in which bonus 1 is being carried over, for example, as the mode of winning control of bonus 1, the above (C) If (D) is adopted, it is suggested that the state can be changed to a stable state by winning a bonus 1 by multiplying two cards. Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is "1", the current mode is "rough wave" mode, and "bonus 1 is being carried over. When changing to stable mode" , Please aim for bonus 1 (7-BAR-BAR) in the two-card game. ”Is displayed, and the display mode of the operation instruction (lamp) is“ blue lit ”.

Although not shown, the game is set to 1 (other than setting 6), and the game is in a stable state where the bonus is not carried over, and the game in which the bonus 2 is won has started (at least all reels are rotating). At that time, it may be suggested that if the winning of the bonus 2 is avoided, the state cannot be changed to the rough wave state (if the bonus 2 is carried over, the transition becomes impossible while the bonus 1 is carried over). .. Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is "1", the current mode is "stable" mode, and "I won the bonus 2. Bonus 2 (7-watermelon) -Please aim for BAR) "is displayed, and the display mode of the operation instruction (lamp) may be" blinking green ". Further, the same suggestion may be made even when the setting is 6 and the player is in the EX state in which the bonus is not carried over.

Further, when the setting 1 (other than the setting 6) is in a stable state in which the bonus 2 is being carried over, for example, when the above (B') is adopted as the mode of winning control of the bonus 2, the setting is changed. If it is set to 6, it may be suggested that the state can be changed to the rough wave state (or EX state). Specifically, in the operation instruction (screen), the current setting is "1", the current mode is "stable" mode, and "Bonus 2 is being carried over. When changing to rough wave mode" , Please change the setting to setting 6 and aim for bonus 2 (7-watermelon-BAR). ”Is displayed, and the display mode of the operation instruction (lamp) may be“ lit in green ”.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of this example, it is possible to set one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6) in which the player has a different degree of advantage. , The game store side can not only select the degree of advantage (playability) of the player (from the options for this set value), but also set a specific set value (for example, setting 6) to specify. It is possible to further select the degree of advantage (playability) of the player depending on whether or not the special role (for example, bonus 1) is carried over and which set value is set in the state. .. Therefore, it is possible to select the playability with more options than the number of preset setting stages.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, by enabling an operation instruction for selecting the advantage degree (gaming ability) of the player, the operator can perform the advantage degree (gaming ability) of the player regardless of the skill. ) Can be selected appropriately. Therefore, even if it is possible to select the playability with more options than the number of preset setting stages, it is possible to prevent the operator from being confused. The "operator" here is basically assumed to be a clerk of a game store, but the player can select his / her own advantage (gamability) within a certain range. When configured, it may include a player.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when a predetermined set value (for example, settings 1 to 5) is set, the specific special role is carried over when the specific special role is carried over. The average period from the start of at least the increasing state (for example, the increasing section) to the end of the advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) and the initialization of the information regarding the determination of transition to the advantageous state is longer than that of the non-existing state. By making it longer, it is possible to make the player's degree of advantage different. As a result, the playability can be selected in a manner more interesting to the player, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Another control example of stable state and rough wave state (3)]
Subsequently, in this detailed example, another example that can be controlled for each of the above-mentioned stable state and rough wave state will be described.

Unlike this detailed example, in this separate control example (No. 3), at least one reel (for example, the left reel 3L) cannot be aimed at the same time (when one is aimed and pressed, the other cannot be displayed). The first roll (first result display) and the second roll (second result display) composed of the symbols (arranged) are defined, and the first and second rolls are allowed to be derived. A specific role to be played is provided. For example, "BAR-bell-bell" (in this separate control example (No. 3), it is assumed that it is a combination of symbols related to a small winning combination to which a predetermined number of game values (for example, 3 cards) is given. ) Is configured as the first outcome, and "red blank-bell-bell" (in this separate control example (No. 3), it relates to a small winning combination in which a predetermined number of game values (for example, 3 cards) is given. (Assuming that it is a combination of symbols) is configured as the second number, and for example, it is assumed that it is possible to win the "F_common bell" instead of the "F_watermelon" (the winning probability is not limited to this). , When the "F_common bell" is won, the derivation of the first and second rolls is allowed, and when the timing of the player's stop operation is the first timing, the first roll is displayed and the first roll is displayed. It is assumed that the second result is displayed when the second timing is different from the first timing.

When the "F_common bell" is won, a combination of symbols to which a predetermined number of game values (for example, 3 cards) is given can always be displayed regardless of the timing of the stop operation (that is, omission occurs). It is also possible to configure the first and second rolls by a combination of a plurality of symbols (although, as described above, when one is aimed at and the other is not displayed, the other is not displayed). The relationship of being placed is maintained). The specific role can also be configured as a replay role. In addition, as for the specific combination, the first roll is displayed when the player's push order is the first push order, and the second roll is displayed when the player's push order is a second push order different from the first push order. Can be displayed. That is, the specific combination in this separate control example (No. 3) can also be configured as a push order combination.

Further, also in this separate control example (No. 3), three states (modes) of an EX state, a stable state, and a rough wave state are provided. Since each state has already been described, the description here will be omitted.

Further, in this separate control example (No. 3), when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, the control is performed in the initial state in which none of the EX state, the stable state, and the rough wave state is set. Then, when the player wins the "F_common bell" in the initial state, the player shifts to the EX state when the player presses the eye to stop the first roll. Further, when the player pushes the button to stop the second roll, the player shifts to the stable state. Even when the player performs an appropriate stop operation and any combination of symbols is displayed, the state shifts to the state corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols.

Further, when the "F_common bell" is won in the EX state, the EX state is maintained when the player pushes the eye to stop the first roll. Further, when the player pushes the eye to stop the second roll, the state shifts to the rough wave state. That is, a player who wants to continue the EX state can continue the EX state by continuing to aim at "BAR" on the left reel 3L. Further, the player who wants to shift to the rough wave state can shift to the rough wave state by continuing to aim at the "red blank" on the left reel 3L. In addition, the player who is performing the stop operation appropriately is more likely to display the second roll as a result, and thus is more likely to shift to the rough wave state.

In addition, when the player wins the "F_common bell" in the stable state, the stable state is maintained when the player pushes the eye to stop the second roll. Further, when the player pushes the eye to stop the first roll, the state shifts to the rough wave state. That is, the player who wants to maintain the stable state can continue the stable state by continuing to aim at the "red blank" on the left reel 3L. Further, the player who wants to shift to the rough wave state can shift to the rough wave state by continuing to aim at "BAR" on the left reel 3L. In addition, the player who is performing the stop operation appropriately is more likely to display the first roll as a result, and thus is more likely to shift to the rough wave state.

Once controlled to the rough wave state, the rough wave state continues until the state is initialized when the advantageous section ends and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. However, a method capable of shifting from the rough wave state to the EX state or from the rough wave state to the stable state may be provided in the advantageous section. For example, in a rough wave state, if the first roll is stopped three times in a row, the EX state is entered, and if the second roll is stopped three times in a row, the stable state is entered. May be good. Further, for example, another specific combination (second specific combination; the timing of the stop operation is the first specific combination (the above-mentioned first specific combination)) configured in the same manner as the specific combination (“F_common bell” is the first specific combination). If it is the same timing as the 1st timing or the same timing as the 2nd timing), the 3rd output is stopped and the 2nd specific timing (the same timing as the 2nd timing described above or the 1st timing). If the same timing is acceptable), the 4th roll will stop, and if the 3rd specific timing, the 5th roll will stop). When is stopped, it may be shifted to the EX state, when the fourth roll is stopped, it may be shifted to the stable state, and when the fifth roll is stopped, the rough wave state may be maintained.

In addition, when a specific role is won in a game in which the state can be changed, at least that fact may be suggested or notified. For example, if you win the "F_common bell" in the initial state, you will get a "chance to select playability. If you aim at the BAR on the left reel, you will get a gentle feeling of coming out. On the other hand, if you aim at the red blank on the left reel, it will be normal. A display such as "It feels like a ball is coming out." Is displayed on the display device 11. Also, if you win the "F_common bell" in the EX state, you will have a "chance to select playability. If you aim for BAR on the left reel, a gentle feeling of ball ejection will be maintained. On the other hand, if you aim for a red blank on the left reel. The display device 11 displays a display such as "It gives a feeling of rough waves." Also, if you win the "F_common bell" in a stable state, you will have a chance to select playability. If you aim for a red blank on the left reel, you will maintain a normal ball-out feeling. On the other hand, if you aim for BAR on the left reel The display device 11 displays a display such as "It gives a feeling of rough waves." In this way, the game to be pressed is clarified, and it becomes easy for the player to select the game playability. In addition, when the above-mentioned second specific combination is provided, the same notification can be made. However, it is possible not to give a clear suggestion or notification on the pachislot machine 1 as the selection of these playability is only a secondary factor. Even in this case, if the playability is introduced in a so-called booklet or the like, it is considered that the player can be prevented from being confused.

In this separate control example (No. 3), an example in which three states (modes) of an EX state, a stable state, and a rough wave state are provided is given, and such a state is described as a stable state and a stable state. Two states of rough wave state may be provided.

For example, when shifting from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, it is controlled to an initial state in which neither a stable state nor a rough wave state is set. Then, when the player wins the "F_common bell" in the initial state, the player shifts to the stable state when the player presses the eye to stop the first roll. Further, when the player pushes the eye to stop the second roll, the state shifts to the rough wave state. Even when the player performs an appropriate stop operation and any combination of symbols is displayed, the state shifts to the state corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols.

In addition, when the player wins the "F_common bell" in the stable state, the stable state is maintained when the player pushes the eye to stop the first roll. Further, when the player pushes the eye to stop the second roll, the state shifts to the rough wave state. That is, a player who wants to continue the stable state can continue the stable state by continuing to aim at "BAR" on the left reel 3L. Further, the player who wants to shift to the rough wave state can shift to the rough wave state by continuing to aim at the "red blank" on the left reel 3L. In addition, the player who is performing the stop operation appropriately is more likely to display the second roll as a result, and thus is more likely to shift to the rough wave state.

Further, when the "F_common bell" is hit in the rough wave state, the rough wave state is maintained regardless of whether the first or second roll is stopped. It should be noted that a method capable of shifting from a rough wave state to a stable state may be provided in the same manner as described above.

By appropriately combining the configurations of another control example (No. 1) to another control example (No. 3) and the configurations of this detailed example, it is possible to perform transition control of the ball ejection state such as the stable state and the rough wave state. However, it is also possible to construct another invention by combining some or all of these configurations. For example, also in this control example (No. 3), the transition control is performed according to which bonus flag is between, which bet state, or which setting value is used. It can also be configured so that it may or may not be done.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of this example, the first specific gaming state (for example, stable state) and the second specific gaming state to which different degrees of advantage are given when executing the processing related to the special gaming state (for example, advantageous state). A state (for example, a rough wave state) is provided, and the specific combination (for example, "F_common bell" in another control example (No. 3)) displays the first result (for example, the first result) according to the stop operation mode of the player. The roll) or the second result display (for example, the second roll) can be derived. Then, in the non-specific game state (for example, the initial state), when the first result display is derived, it is controlled to the first specific game state, and when the second result display is derived, the second specific game state is derived. In the first specific game state, when the first result display is derived, the first specific game state is maintained, and when the second result display is derived, the process shifts to the second specific game state. , In the second specific game state, the second specific game state is maintained even when either the first result display or the second result display is derived. As a result, it is possible to give the player room to select the playability with a simple configuration, so that the playability can be suppressed while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the granting of the advantageous state. Can be diversified.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, a first specific gaming state (for example, an EX state) and a second specific gaming state (for example, an EX state) to which different degrees of advantage are given when executing a process relating to a special gaming state (for example, an advantageous state). For example, a stable state) and a third specific gaming state (for example, a rough wave state) are provided, and a specific combination (for example, “F_common bell” in another control example (No. 3)) depends on the player's stop operation mode. The first result display (for example, the first result) or the second result display (for example, the second result) can be derived. Then, in the non-specific game state (for example, the initial state), when the first result display is derived, the control is performed to the first specific game state, and when the second result display is derived, the second specific game state is derived. In the first specific game state, when the first result display is derived, the first specific game state is maintained, and when the second result display is derived, the process shifts to the third specific game state. , In the second specific game state, when the second result display is derived, the second specific game state is maintained, and when the first result display is derived, the process shifts to the third specific game state. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to give the player room to select the playability with a simple configuration, so that the playability can be suppressed while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the granting of the advantageous state. Can be diversified.

In the gaming machine of this example, when the "F_common bell" is won in any of the initial state, the EX state, and the stable state, that is, the game state may be changed depending on the stop operation mode. In such a case, the operation invalidation state (so-called lock state) for a predetermined period may be generated before the stop operation detection by the stop button becomes effective. Further, in addition to the occurrence of the locked state, for example, as described above, a game in which the gaming state can be changed by any effect executing means such as an image display means (for example, a display device 11) or a speaker (for example, a speaker group 84). You may perform an effect of suggesting or notifying that the situation is true. As a result, it is suggested that the player has a chance to shift to the game state and that the stop operation should be performed carefully. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a prize is won and the player shifts to a state in which he or she does not want to shift.

By the way, in the type test of a gaming machine as in this example, an appropriate stop operation signal according to the gaming state is input to the gaming machine from the test equipment (also referred to as an automatic driving machine or a test interface board). As a result, a test is conducted assuming a game played by a player in a physical store. As described above, for a gaming machine with specifications that allow the player to select the playability related to ball ejection by the stop operation, it is necessary for the testing institution to confirm the ball ejection performance when each selection is made. Therefore, when the "F_common bell" is won in any of the initial state, the EX state, and the stable state, that is, when the game state can be changed depending on the stop operation mode, the gaming machine can be used. It is desirable that the gaming machine has a function of outputting a game stop command to the test device to temporarily stop the progress of the game by the test device. When the test device receives the game stop command, the test device pauses the operation before outputting the stop operation signal to the game machine, and notifies that the pause has been stopped. Upon receiving the notification of this suspension, the staff of the testing institution resets which game state to shift to, or manually stops only the one game to shift to the game state desired to be grasped in the test, and then tests. The equipment can be operated again to perform the test. As a result, the time required for the type test can be shortened even in a gaming machine in which the transition of the gaming state is complicated.

[Modified example of this detailed example]
Subsequently, a modified example of this detailed example will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a game flow of a modified example of this detailed example, and FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining an example of a specification using a modified example of this detailed example.

In this detailed example, after the pseudo-bonus (increase section) of the advantageous section ends, the game basically shifts to the normal game (directing section) of the advantageous section, and if the pseudo-bonus can be consecutively villaged, it is switched to each mode. If the pseudo-bonus is not possible (for example, in the end A / end B mode), the game is changed to the pseudo-bonus again under the following conditions, and after a predetermined period (32 games) has elapsed, the normal game in the non-advantageous section is started. It was supposed to be migrated (see FIG. 103, etc.). That is, even after the end of the pseudo-bonus, it was configured to stay in the advantageous section for a certain period of time.

On the other hand, in the modified example (this example) of this detailed example, after the pseudo bonus of the advantageous section (third section which is the increasing section) is completed, the game is basically shifted to the normal game of the non-advantageous section. That is, it is configured so that the advantageous section is not continued after the end of the pseudo bonus and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. Further, in this example, when shifting from a normal game in a non-advantageous section to a normal game in an advantageous section (when winning a lottery for shifting to an advantageous section in a normal game in a non-advantageous section), a pseudo-bonus lottery is won with a high probability ( It shifts to the first section of the advantageous section (directing section), which is in a state where it is relatively easy to shift to the pseudo bonus), and when the first section ends, the pseudo bonus lottery is won with a low probability (relative to the pseudo bonus). It is supposed to shift to the second section of the advantageous section (directing section), which is in a state (it is difficult to shift to). When the setting is changed, even if the player stays in the advantageous section before the setting is changed, the game is started from the normal game in the non-advantageous section, so that it is easy to shift to the first section of the advantageous section even when the setting is changed.

Here, an outline of the game flow of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 123. As shown in FIG. 123, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section (winning the advantageous section), first, the transition to the first section of the advantageous section is performed. As described above, the first section of the advantageous section is a game section with a high expectation that it is determined to shift to the pseudo bonus (third section of the advantageous section). Further, in the first section of the advantageous section, the specified number of games is consumed without shifting to the pseudo bonus (for example, the 100G game in FIG. 124 described later is performed), and the game changes from the first section to the second section. If the transition condition of is satisfied, the transition to the second section of the advantageous section is performed. As described above, the second section of the advantageous section is a game section with a low expectation that it is determined to shift to the pseudo bonus.

When it is decided to shift to the pseudo-bonus in the non-advantageous section, the first section of the advantageous section, and the second section of the advantageous section (pseudo-bonus winning), the transition to the third section of the advantageous section (pseudo-bonus) is performed. .. As described above, the third section of the advantageous section is an increasing section, and information on the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, and the expected value of the net increase in the number of sheets per game is "5". Continue the game. Therefore, the expected value of the net increase in the number of sheets per pseudo bonus is "150 sheets". When the end condition of the pseudo bonus is satisfied (pseudo bonus end), the advantageous section itself ends and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. In this example as well, the above-mentioned normal limit processing (number of games, number of payouts, etc.) can be performed, but when the pseudo-bonus ends and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, these are operated. Since various counters (see FIG. 114 and the like) are also reset (cleared), it is basically unlikely that the above-mentioned normal limit processing will operate. In other words, in this example, the player can play the game in the advantageous section (particularly, the increasing section) without worrying that the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the operation of the normal limit processing. It has become.

In this example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the non-advantageous section, it is basically assumed to shift to the first section of the advantageous section, but the second is not limited to this. It may shift to a section. For example, in the advantageous section transition lottery in the non-advantageous section, there may be a case where the winning is transferred to the first section of the advantageous section and a case where the winning is transferred to the second section of the advantageous section. Further, the distribution probability may be different between the non-advantageous section after the end of the pseudo bonus and the non-advantageous section after the setting change. Further, for example, in the advantageous section transition lottery in the non-advantageous section, when the game shifts to the first section of the advantageous section by winning, the game period in which the first section continues is further determined by the lottery (or a plurality of predetermined ones). (For example, a game period of 10 games, 20 games, 50 games, 100 games, 300 games, etc.) may be selected. By doing so, while diversifying the expectation when shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, only the predetermined period (for example, 100G in FIG. 124 described later) after the player finishes the pseudo-bonus or changes the setting. As a result of playing a game and stopping the game after the elapse of the period, it is possible to prevent the operation of the gaming machine from being reduced.

Next, an example of the specification using this example will be described with reference to FIG. 124. In addition, in FIG. 124, the “winning type when the number of games is reached” means, for example, a game period (number of released games) in which it is determined to shift to a pseudo bonus when shifting from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section. It shows the specifications that are decided and the start condition of the pseudo bonus is satisfied when the decided game period is exhausted, and the "every game lottery type" is predetermined for each game in the advantageous section. It is determined whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus with the winning probability (cancellation probability), and when it is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus, the specification that the start condition of the pseudo bonus is satisfied is shown. .. Further, in this example, 777 games are set as the number of ceiling games regardless of the type, and the start condition of the pseudo bonus is always satisfied when the game period corresponding to the number of ceiling games is exhausted. Further, in this example, in the non-advantageous section, for example, when a winning combination is won, a pseudo-bonus start condition that is not related to the number of released games or the release probability may be set. Further, such a start condition may be set even in an advantageous section.

When shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section (directing section), the player stays in the consecutive villa zone (first section of the advantageous section) for 1 to 100G in the advantageous section (directing section). In the "winning type when the number of games is reached", the distribution probability that any number of games during this period is the number of released games is, for example, 60%. Further, in the "every game lottery type", the cancellation probability during this period is, for example, 1/128. In other words, it is a game section with high expectation that it will be decided to shift the consecutive villa zone to a pseudo bonus.

If the game in the consecutive villa zone is exhausted without shifting to the pseudo bonus, the player stays in the low probability zone (second section of the advantageous section) for 101 to 500 G in the advantageous section (directing section). In the "winning type when the number of games is reached", the distribution probability that any number of games during this period is the number of released games is, for example, 10%. Further, in the "every game lottery type", the cancellation probability during this period is, for example, 1/400. That is, it is a game section with a low expectation that it is decided to shift the low probability zone to a pseudo bonus.

If the game in the low probability zone is digested without shifting to the pseudo bonus, the player stays in the chance zone for 501 to 600 G in the advantageous section (directing section). In the "winning type when the number of games is reached", the distribution probability that any number of games during this period is the number of released games is, for example, 20%. Further, in the "every game lottery type", the cancellation probability during this period is, for example, 1/200. That is, it is a game section in which the degree of expectation that the chance zone is decided to shift to the pseudo bonus is at least higher than that in the low probability zone. By providing such a chance zone before the number of ceiling games is reached, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player even before the number of ceiling games is reached. However, it is possible to continue the low probability zone until the number of ceiling games is reached without providing a chance zone.

If the game in the chance zone is exhausted without shifting to the pseudo bonus, the player stays in the low probability zone again during 601 to 777G in the advantageous section (directing section). In the "winning type when the number of games is reached", the distribution probability that any number of games during this period is the number of released games is, for example, 10%. Further, in the "every game lottery type", the cancellation probability during this period is, for example, 1/400. That is, it is a game section with a low expectation that it is decided to shift the low probability zone to a pseudo bonus. In the "winning type when the number of games is reached", the number of ceiling games is set by setting the number of games to be released at the latest at the 777Gth, and in the "lottery type for each game", the number of the 778Gth (may be the 777G). The number of ceiling games is set by setting the cancellation probability to 100% (1/1).

In this example, the pseudo bonus (the third section of the advantageous section which is the increase section) is assumed to end in 30 games, but the mode of the duration of the increase section is not limited to this. For example, as described in this detailed example and other examples, when a predetermined extension condition is satisfied in the increase section (advantageous state), the increase section (advantageous state) can be extended. It can also be configured to. In addition, when a plurality of pseudo bonuses (for example, pseudo bonus 1, pseudo bonus 2, pseudo bonus 3, etc.) having different durations (for example, 30 games, 50 games, 100 games, etc.) are provided and the pseudo bonus is won, The type may be determined. In this case, in the consecutive villa zone, the type is determined in the order of pseudo-bonus 1> pseudo-bonus 2> pseudo-bonus 3 (that is, pseudo-bonus 1 with a short duration is most likely to be determined). In the low probability zone, the type is determined in the order of pseudo bonus 3> pseudo bonus 2> pseudo bonus 1 (that is, pseudo bonus 3 with a long duration is most likely to be determined), and in the chance zone, it is most likely to be determined. The type may be determined in the order of pseudo-bonus 2> pseudo-bonus 1> pseudo-bonus 3. In this way, it is possible to maintain the expectation of the player even in the game section where the degree of expectation is low.

However, even if it is possible to extend the game period of the pseudo bonus in this way, the extended period exceeds the period until the above-mentioned normal limit processing (for example, the number of games) is activated. You should avoid it. Specifically, for example, by performing a process such as the above-mentioned quasi-limit process (number of games) (see FIG. 114 and the like), even if a predetermined extension condition is satisfied, the extension decision itself is suppressed. Alternatively, the extended period may be appropriately reduced and granted. In addition, the predetermined extension condition is changed before and after the pseudo-bonus game period is continued for a certain period, and the predetermined extension condition is likely to be satisfied before the pseudo-bonus game period is continued for a certain period. After the bonus game period is continued for a certain period of time, it may be difficult to satisfy the predetermined extension condition. It is also possible to adopt other methods as the method for suppressing the extended period.

As described above, according to the game machine of this example, the advantageous state (for example, pseudo bonus) and the specific state (for example, the effect section) are managed as a series of advantageous sections, and when the management period becomes a predetermined period (for example). , When the value of the advantageous section game counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated and the initial state (for example, non-advantageous section). Is controlled by. Further, even when the advantageous state ends before the predetermined period is reached, the initial state is controlled. If it is controlled to the initial state, the management period is initialized. The specific state includes a first specific state (for example, the first section of the advantageous section) having a high expectation of shifting to the advantageous state and a second specific state (for example, the first section of the advantageous section) having a low expectation of shifting to the advantageous state. The second section) is included, but when shifting from the initial state to the specific state, it is controlled to the first specific state. That is, even when the initial state is originally disadvantageous, the expectation of the transition from the initial state to the advantageous state (first specific state) is high, and a series of advantages is further achieved. It is also less likely that the section will be forcibly terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, even if the gaming period in the advantageous state is extended, the extended period does not exceed the period in which a series of advantageous sections are forcibly terminated. ing. That is, while making the game period of the advantageous section variable, it suppresses the extension of the surplus game period. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately suppress the excessively high gambling while maintaining the interest of the game.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (7)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 7) of the game playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 125 to 128. FIG. 125 is a diagram showing an example of a modification of the external structure of the pachislot machine 1 in this example, FIG. 126 is a diagram showing an example of a modification of the symbol arrangement configuration in this example, and FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of modification of the symbol arrangement configuration in this example. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a modification of the internal winning combination configuration in the above, and FIG. 128 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in this example.

First, in the pachi-slot machine 1 described with reference to FIG. 2, three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R are provided, and stop buttons 17L, 17C, and 17R are provided so as to correspond to the three reels 3L, 3C, and 3R. In the pachi-slot machine 1 in the example, as shown in FIG. 125, four reels 3L, 3CL, 3CR, and 3R are provided, and stop buttons 17L, 17CL, 17CR, and 17R are provided corresponding to the four reels 3L, 3CL, 3CR, and 3R. It is supposed to be. That is, in this example, the number of columns in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner is increased. Since the other external structures are basically the same as those described with reference to FIG. 2, the description here will be omitted. Further, the number of columns to be increased may be two or more.

Next, with reference to FIG. 126, an example of a modified example of the symbol arrangement configuration in this example will be described. As described above, in this example, there are four columns in which a plurality of symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Here, in this example, it is assumed that an RB (regular bonus) is provided as a bonus combination, and "BAR-BAR-BAR-BAR" is defined as a combination of the symbols. The RB is also referred to as a "first special accessory". Note that FIG. 126 pays attention to this point, and in order to mainly explain the symbol arrangement configuration of the “BAR” symbol, the description of the symbol arrangement of other symbols is omitted. Other symbols can be appropriately arranged at the blank symbol positions in FIG. 126.

In the "Rules for Certification of Pachinko Machines and Certification of Types, etc.", "Technical Standards for Pachinko Machines (Article 6)" in Attached Table 5 The number of combinations of symbols to be used is 1/500 of the number of combinations of all symbols in a gaming machine provided with a continuous accessory actuating device, and the number of combinations of symbols is 1/500 of the number of combinations of all symbols. In the case of a machine, it must not exceed three-500th of the number of all symbol combinations. " That is, there is a restriction on arranging a combination of symbols related to the first special accessory. The "number of combinations of all symbols" means the number of symbols per reel multiplied by the number of reels. Therefore, when the number of symbols per reel is "20", when three reels are provided, the "number of combinations of all symbols" is "20 x 20 x 20 = 8000", which is four. When a reel is provided, the "number of combinations of all symbols" is "20 x 20 x 20 x 20 = 160000".

When three reels are provided, in the "game machine provided with the accessory continuous operation device", "8000 x 1/500 = 16 ways" arranges the combination of the symbols related to the first special accessory. In the case of a "game machine not provided with a continuous operating device for a character", "8000 x 3/500 = 48 ways" is the upper limit for arranging a combination of symbols related to the first special character. Here, when one line (for example, the center line) is defined as an effective line, in a game in which the RB is won or carried over and the RB can win a prize, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, when trying to win an RB (with a pull-in rate of 100%), for example, as shown in FIG. 126, it is necessary to provide four "BAR" symbols at equal intervals on each reel. Since the "number of combinations of symbols on which the first-class special accessory is activated" is "4 x 4 x 4 = 64 ways", it exceeds the above-mentioned upper limit. That is, when three reels are provided, the RB pull-in rate cannot be set to 100%.

On the other hand, when four reels are provided, in the "game machine provided with the accessory continuous operation device", "1600,000 x 1/500 = 320 ways" arranges the combination of symbols related to the first special accessory. In the case of a "game machine not provided with a continuous operating device for a character", "1600,000 x 3/500 = 960 ways" is the upper limit for arranging a combination of symbols related to the first special character. Here, when one line (for example, the center line) is defined as an effective line, in a game in which the RB is won or carried over and the RB can win a prize, the timing of the stop operation is set. Regardless, when trying to win an RB (with a pull-in rate of 100%), for example, as shown in FIG. 126, it is necessary to provide four "BAR" symbols at equal intervals on each reel. Since "the number of combinations of symbols on which the first-class special accessory is activated" is "4 x 4 x 4 x 4 = 256 ways", it does not exceed the above-mentioned upper limit. That is, when four reels are provided, the RB pull-in rate can be set to 100%.

In addition, by setting the effective line to one line as in this example, the reel stop control for avoiding the duplicate winning that becomes a problem when creating the reel arrangement and the symbol combination required when the effective line is set to a plurality of lines. You can save the trouble of considering. Here, the "reel stop control for avoiding duplicate winnings" means, for example, that when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination won on any effective line is stopped, the other effective line is not won. Since it is not possible to stop the symbol combination corresponding to the small combination or the bonus combination, in such a case, while drawing the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination on the effective line, the symbol combination corresponding to the other combination can be used. At the same time, it means that it is necessary to have a reel arrangement and a symbol combination configuration and reel stop control so that the stop is not displayed on other effective lines. That is, in the case of a model having one effective line, such an examination is unnecessary, so that the design man-hours related to reel control can be significantly reduced.

On the other hand, as described above, in a model in which three reels are provided and one line is defined as an effective line, the RB pull-in rate cannot be set to 100%, but a plurality of effective lines (for example, a cross-up line) can be used. , Cross-down line, small V line of "upper-middle-upper", and small mountain line of "lower-middle-lower"), the left reel and the right reel are the symbols that make up the RB. If there are 3 BAR symbols on the left reel, 4 BAR symbols on the middle reel, and 3 BAR symbols on the right reel, the RB pull-in rate will be 100%. be able to. In this case, the "number of combinations of symbols on which the first-class special accessory will operate" is "3 x 4 x 3 = 36 combinations", and the symbols below "8000 x 3/500 = 48 combinations". Since the number of combinations is set, the RB pull-in rate can be set to 100% in a form conforming to the rules, at least in the "game machine not provided with the accessory continuous operation device". Therefore, such a configuration may be adopted. However, as described above, there is a demerit that the design man-hours are increased when the design man-hours are configured with a plurality of lines, and it can be said that the design man-hours related to the reel control can be reduced by configuring the four reels and one line.

In this example, four reels are provided, for example, one line is defined as an effective line, the combination of RB symbols is defined as "BAR-BAR-BAR-BAR", and the "BAR" symbol is shown in FIG. 126. It is premised on the specification that the RB attraction rate is 100% in the game in which the RB can be won by arranging the RBs at equal intervals. As long as the above upper limit is not exceeded, the combination of RB symbols does not necessarily have to be composed of only a single symbol, and which line is defined as an effective line can be appropriately modified.

Next, with reference to FIG. 127, an example of a modification of the internal winning combination configuration in this example will be described. In this example, as the internal lottery role, the above-mentioned "RB" which is a bonus role, "Batting order bells 1 to 6" which is a small role, and "Rip" which is a replay role are provided, and when none of them wins ( (Except for the state where the RB is carried over) will be "missing". In addition, FIG. 127 shows the coefficient and the winning probability when three sheets are hung. The winning probability indicates up to the second decimal place of the "probability denominator (65536) / coefficient", and strictly speaking, the reciprocal of this (the value indicated by 1 / "winning probability") is the winning probability.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 127, "batting order bells 1 to 6" are the "batting order small roles" already mentioned, and either "batting order 1 to 6" is the correct answer. It is associated as a batting order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct batting order, eight game values are given, and when the stop operation is not performed in the correct batting order, one game value is given according to the timing of the stop operation. It is configured so that it is either played or not given game value (in this case, a "bell spill"). In this example, since four stop buttons are provided, a maximum of 24 correct batting orders can be set. Therefore, for example, "pushing order small winning combination" of "batting order bells 1 to 24" is set. You may do so. The number of correct batting orders can be changed as appropriate.

Further, not only the batting order but also the selection combination may be composed of a symbol to be aimed at a predetermined reel. For example, it is not possible to aim at the left reel at the same time with red 7, blue 7, and white 7 by providing color pushers such as "red 7, bell, bell," "blue 7, bell, bell," and "white 7, bell, bell." It is a specification that navigates the pattern and color that should be aimed at during AT as such an arrangement. In addition, only when the AT of the striking order concept and the AT of the color pressing concept are combined and the correct symbol is pressed on a specific striking order and a specific reel (1 reel, 2 or more reels, or all reels). It is also possible that the correct symbol combinations (design combinations with a large number of payouts, advantageous RTs, and symbol combinations that shift to bonuses) are available. However, when using the concept of color-pressing, there is a disadvantage that players who are not good at pressing are avoided, so if you want to increase the number of choices, it is troublesome because the number of stop operations per single game is large. Even if it is a 4-reel machine, it can be said that it is a specification preferred by a wide range of players if it is composed only of the batting order concept.

As in this example, a maximum of 24 choices can be provided in a 4-reel machine, and a number of batting order choices that cannot be realized in a 3-reel machine can be provided. When the batting order combination is set to 24 choices, the batting order navigation does not occur at normal times, and the symbol combination at the time of the correct batting order of the batting order role is won only at 1/24, so the base value at normal times (out) compared to the 3-reel machine. The ball rate) can be greatly reduced. Further, since the difference in the ball output rate between the AT during the batting order navigation occurrence and the normal time when the batting order navigation does not occur becomes large, it is possible to realize a high net increase while lowering the base value in the normal time. By achieving a low base during normal times, it is possible to balance the payout rate of the game machine as a whole, and at the same time, it is possible to design a ball payout with a higher probability of winning ATs and bonuses than with high base machines. There is a merit that it is possible to realize a feeling of a ball coming out.

Further, the "rip" is a "push order replay" at the time of RT1 described later, "RT transition lip 1" (that is, when the stop operation is performed in the associated correct batting order, the raise lip 1 is won. It shifts to RT2, and when the stop operation is not performed in the associated correct batting order, the maintenance lip is won and RT1 is maintained), and in RT1 described later, a predetermined probability within the set winning probability range. It is configured so that "RT transition lip 1" wins.

Further, the "rip" is a "push order replay" at the time of RT2, which will be described later, "RT transition lip 2" (that is, when the stop operation is performed in the associated correct batting order, the raise lip 2 is won. It shifts to RT3, and when the stop operation is not performed in the associated correct batting order, it wins the lower lip 1 and shifts to RT1). It is configured so that "RT transition lip 2" wins.

Further, the "rip" is a "push order replay" at the time of RT3 described later, "RT transition lip 3" (that is, when the stop operation is performed in the associated correct batting order, the raise lip 3 is won. It shifts to RT4, and when the stop operation is not performed in the associated correct batting order, it wins the lower lip 2 and shifts to RT2). It is configured so that "RT transition lip 3" wins.

Further, the "rip" is the "RT transition lip 4" which is the "push order replay" at the time of RT4 described later (that is, when the stop operation is performed in the associated correct batting order, the maintenance lip is won and the RT4 is won. Is maintained, and when the stop operation is not performed in the associated correct batting order, the player wins the lower lip 3 and shifts to RT3). "RT transition lip 4" is configured to win.

In the game state "RB is in operation", all of "Batting order bells 1 to 6" are duplicated and won (in this case, 8 game values are given regardless of batting order). The winning probability is "1/12. It is set to "00", and the others are "missing". Since "RB is operating" ends when, for example, 4 winnings or 12 games are played, basically, the game value does not increase (increases) during "RB operating". Difficult to do).

In the game states "RT0" and "RT1", "RB" and "Rip" are duplicated and won (in this case, since the replay combination is preferentially stopped, "RB" is not won in the winning game). The winning probability is set to "1 / 65.54", and the total value of the winning probabilities that wins any of "Batting Order Bells 1 to 6" is set to "1 / 2.00" (overlapping with "RB"). (Don't) The probability of winning "Rip" is set to "1 / 7.30", and the others are "Loss" (the probability of "Loss" is "1 / 2.88").

In the game state "RT2", "RB" and "Rip" are duplicated and won (in this case, since the replay role is stopped preferentially, "RB" does not win in the winning game). It is set to "1 / 65.54", and the total value of the winning probabilities of winning any of "Batting order bells 1 to 6" is set to "1 / 2.00" (not overlapping with "RB"). The probability of winning "Rip" is set to "1 / 2.22", and the others are "Loss" (the probability of "Loss" is "1/30.01").

In the game state "RT3", "RB" and "Rip" are duplicated and won (in this case, since the replay role is stopped preferentially, "RB" does not win in the winning game). It is set to "1 / 65.54", and the total value of the winning probabilities of winning any of "Batting order bells 1 to 6" is set to "1 / 2.00" (do not overlap with "RB"). The probability of winning "Rip" is set to "1 / 2.11", and the others are "Loss" (the probability of "Loss" is "1 / 100.05").

In the game state "RT4", "RB" and "Rip" are duplicated and won (in this case, since the replay role is stopped preferentially, "RB" does not win in the winning game). It is set to "1 / 65.54", and the total value of the winning probabilities of winning any of "Batting order bells 1 to 6" is set to "1 / 2.00" (do not overlap with "RB"). The probability of winning "Rip" is set to "1 / 2.08", and the others are "Loss" (the probability of "Loss" is "1 / 300.62").

Next, an example of the flow of the game in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 128. First, when the operation of the RB is completed, the process shifts to RT0. RT0 is a low RT state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is low. In addition, it is a gaming state with a high probability of "loss". At RT0, if "bell spill" is displayed before winning the RB, the process shifts to RT1. RT1 is a low RT state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is low. In addition, it is a gaming state with a high probability of "loss".

In RT1, if "Raise Lip 1" wins before winning RB, it shifts to RT2. RT2 is a medium RT state in which the winning probability of the replay role is medium. In addition, the game state has a medium probability of "missing".

In RT2, if "Raise Lip 2" wins before winning the RB, it shifts to RT3. RT3 is a high RT state in which the winning probability of the replay role is high. In addition, it is a gaming state with a low probability of "loss". On the other hand, in RT2, if "bell spill" is displayed before winning the RB, or if "lower lip 1" wins, the process shifts to RT1.

In RT3, if "Raise Lip 3" wins before winning the RB, it shifts to RT4. RT4 is a high RT state in which the winning probability of the replay role is the highest. In addition, it is a gaming state with the lowest probability of "loss". On the other hand, in RT3, if "bell spill" is displayed before winning the RB, the process shifts to RT1. In addition, when the "lowering lip 2" wins, it shifts to RT2.

In RT4, if "bell spill" is displayed before winning the RB, the process shifts to RT1. In addition, when the "lower lip 3" wins, it shifts to RT3.

In RT0 to RT4, when the RB is won (RB winning), the overlapping replay winning combination wins in the game, so that the RB is carried over (RB is being carried over). In addition, the RT state does not shift in the RB winning. Also, during RB carry-over, the RT state does not shift even if "bell spill", "up lip", "down lip", etc. are displayed. For this reason, during RB carry-over, the RT state at the time of winning the RB is inherited, and the replay role is drawn with the winning probability of the RT state inherited until the RB wins, and the inherited RT state "loss". "Loss" occurs with a probability.

Here, in this example, since the replay role or the small role is stopped preferentially over the RB, if any of the replay roles or the small role is won during the RB carry-over, the RB will not win a prize. .. On the other hand, in this example, when a "loss" occurs during the carry-over of the RB, the RB always wins a prize regardless of the stop operation performed by the player. That is, if the probability of "loss" is high, it is difficult to continue during RB carry-over, and if the probability of "loss" is low, it is easy to continue during RB carry-over. Therefore, the degree of continuation during RB carry-over increases in the order of RT0 / RT1 <RT2 <RT3 <RT4.

If the RB wins during the carry-over of the RB, the RB operates. Then, as described above, when the operation of the RB is completed, the process shifts to RT0. In this example, the gaming state changes in this way.

Then, in this example, the RB carry-over is configured as described above, and the RB carry-over is controlled to the AT state. That is, from the time when the RB is won to the time when the RB wins a prize, information on the stop operation that is advantageous to the player can be notified. In the AT state, when any of "Batting Order Bells 1 to 6" is won, the correct batting order is notified, and as a result, the game value increases. However, the game period in the AT state depends on the degree of continuation during the RB carry-over. That is, when the RB is won at RT0 or RT1, the expected continuation value of the game period in the AT state is about 3 games, and when the RB is won at RT2, the expected continuation value of the game period in the AT state is about 30 games. When the RB is won in RT3, the expected continuation value of the game period in the AT state is about 100 games, and when the RB is won in RT4, the expected continuation value of the game period in the AT state is about 300 games. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the AT state varies depending on which RT state is in the RB. In addition, in RT0 and RT1, since the expected value of continuation of the game period in the AT state is low, even if the player wins the RB, the AT state may not be entered.

From this point of view, the AT state transition condition can be configured as a condition different from the RB winning condition. For example, RT0 is set as a non-advantageous section, RT1 to RT4 are set as an advantageous section (directing section), RB carry-over is set as an advantageous section (first increase section: first AT state (AT state described above)), and RT1 to RT4 are set. During the predetermined period during which the RB is not carried over, it is possible to shift to an advantageous section (second increase section: second AT state).

In RT0 to RT4, when the RB is won, the section shifts to the first increase section, and when the operation of the RB ends, the section shifts from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. Further, when the transition from RT0 to RT1 is performed, the non-advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section (effect section) (at this time, the advantageous section transition lottery (for example, see FIG. 105 (b)) is performed to perform a plurality of modes having different degrees of advantage. You may decide one mode from among them). In the production sections RT1 to RT4, a second increase section transition lottery is performed according to conditions different from the RB win, and if the lottery is won, the second increase section is shifted to a predetermined period (for example, during 30 games). Let me. In the second increase section, the correct batting order is notified when any of "Batting Order Bells 1 to 6" is won, and the correct batting order is notified when any of "RT Transition Lips 1 to 4" is won. NS. As a result, it is possible not only to increase the game value but also to shift or maintain the RT state to an advantageous one.

When the RB is won during the second increase section, it shifts to the first increase section, and when the operation of the RB ends, it shifts from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. On the other hand, when the game period of the second increase section ends without winning the RB, the process returns to the production section. In the returned production section, the second increase section transition lottery may be performed again unless the RB is won.

The effect section, the first increase section, and the second increase section may be managed as a series of advantageous sections described above. However, in this example, since the transition from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is performed when the operation of the RB is completed, the number of games and the number of payouts in the series of advantageous sections are each normal limit processing (for example,). When the operating conditions of (see FIG. 114, etc.; special limit processing and quasi-limit processing can be performed) are satisfied, the advantageous section itself continues until the operation of the RB is completed in terms of control. , At least in the advantageous section after that, the information of the stop operation is not notified. Then, when the operation of the RB is completed (after the RB is won if the RB is not won), the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. In this example, the transition from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is assumed when the operation of the RB is completed, but it is also possible to shift from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section when the RB wins a prize.

In this way, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the carry-over state (for example, during RB carry-over) of the special role (for example, RB), the winning probability of the re-game combination when the special role is won is inherited and inside. The winning role is decided. As a result, the probability of losing in the carry-over state of the special role differs. Then, if a loss occurs in the carry-over state of the special role, the combination of symbols related to the special role is always displayed. Further, the period from winning the special combination to displaying the combination of symbols related to the special combination can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, AT state). That is, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the advantageous state according to the winning probability of the replaying combination when the special combination is won. Therefore, even when the carry-over state of the special role can be controlled to the advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the advantageous state can be varied.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, in addition to the first advantageous state (for example, the first increase section), which starts when the special combination is won and ends when the combination of symbols related to the special combination is displayed, the special A second advantageous state (for example, a second increase section) is provided, which starts under a condition different from that of winning the winning combination and ends under a condition different from that of displaying the combination of symbols related to the special winning combination. May be good. As a result, it can be expected that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state even if the player does not win the special role, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, it is desirable that the display columns of the symbols are four or more columns. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the symbols and provide a gaming machine that does not give a sense of discomfort in the arrangement of the symbols without increasing the man-hours.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 8)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 8) of playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 129 to 131. FIG. 129 is a diagram for conceptually explaining the flow of the game in this example, and FIGS. 130 and 131 are diagrams showing an example of the privilege granting state in this example and the variation example of the state display suggesting the state. Is.

First, an example of the flow of the game in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 129. As already mentioned, it is possible to control various game states, but in this example, it is roughly classified into AT (may be ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. It is assumed that non-AT during non-AT is provided.

During non-AT, when neither the CZ (chance zone) state nor the bonus (special game) state, which will be described later, is in the normal game state. In the normal game state during non-AT, point lottery is performed based on the privilege granting state and the internal winning combination, which will be described later. In addition, when the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed in the normal game state during non-AT, the state shifts to the bonus state during non-AT. Further, the bonus state can be configured as, for example, the above-mentioned "special bonus state". The bonus state can also be configured as, for example, the above-mentioned pseudo bonus (AT state).

In the bonus state during non-AT, points are drawn based on the bonus granting state and the internal winning combination, which will be described later. In the bonus state, the winning probability of the small role increases (or the winning probability of the replay role may increase), which makes it easier to win a specific role. It is configured as a preferential state in which the probability that the point lottery will be given preferential treatment increases. The bonus state ends when a predetermined end condition (a game value exceeding a preset game value number has been given, or a game for a preset game period has been performed, etc.) is satisfied. do. Further, in the normal game state and the bonus state during non-AT, the points given according to the result of the point lottery are accumulated and stored. Further, in the bonus state during non-AT, the AT grant lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination or other preset conditions being satisfied (however, the AT grant probability is lower than that in the CZ state). If the AT grant lottery is won in the bonus state during non-AT, after the end of the bonus state, the game shifts to the normal game state during AT instead of the normal game state during non-AT.

In the normal gaming state during non-AT (or after the end of the bonus state during non-AT), when the accumulated stored points reach the specified points (for example, 50P), the state shifts to the CZ state during non-AT. In this case, the accumulated points are initialized (cleared). In the CZ state during non-AT, the AT grant lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination or other preset conditions being satisfied. If the AT grant lottery is won in the CZ state during non-AT, the game shifts to the normal game state during AT. Further, in the CZ state during non-AT, the end condition of the CZ state (for example, the game of the preset game period has been performed, the end lottery has been won, etc.) is satisfied without winning the AT grant lottery. If so, the game shifts to the normal gaming state during non-AT.

In this example, the privilege given according to the result of the point lottery is explained as a point for shifting to the CZ state, but this is only a form of giving the privilege. The benefits granted according to the result of the lottery are not limited to this. For example, depending on the result of the lottery, it may be decided whether or not to directly shift to the CZ state, or it is possible to shift to the CZ state at least once with one right. It may be decided whether or not to grant the right. Further, for example, depending on the result of the lottery, it may be decided whether or not to directly transfer to AT, or it is possible to transfer to AT at least once with one right. It may be decided whether or not to grant the right to become. Further, for example, the bonus state may be configured as a pseudo-bonus, and whether or not to directly shift to the bonus state may be determined according to the result of the lottery, or at least once with one right. May decide whether or not to grant the right to be able to transition to the bonus state. Further, instead of the privilege related to the payout, a privilege having added value such as directing may be given. That is, the privilege given according to the result of the lottery may be any privilege.

Further, the point may be information on a numerical value managed by adding (subtracting) a predetermined counter, or information indicating which stage the current stage is by setting a plurality of stages in advance. It may be information that indicates which state the current state is by setting a plurality of states in advance. That is, the points may be any information as long as the information is appropriately updated according to the result of the point lottery.

During AT, when it is neither in the CZ state nor in the bonus state, it is in the normal gaming state. In the normal game state during AT, point lottery is performed based on the privilege granting state and the internal winning combination, which will be described later. In addition, when the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is displayed in the normal game state during AT, the state shifts to the bonus state during AT. In the normal game state, the basic configuration is the same between non-AT and AT, but the game value does not increase due to the fact that the stop operation information is not notified during non-AT, which is a relative disadvantage. On the other hand, it is different in that during AT, it becomes a relatively advantageous state in which the game value increases due to the notification of the stop operation information. Further, the probability of giving points in the point lottery may be different between the normal gaming state during non-AT and the normal gaming state during AT.

In the bonus state during AT, points are drawn based on the privilege granting state and the internal winning combination, which will be described later. As in the non-AT, in the normal game state and the bonus state during the AT, the points given according to the result of the point lottery are accumulated and stored. The basic configuration of the bonus state is the same between non-AT and AT, but the bonus state during non-AT is based on the fact that the internal winning combination or other preset conditions are satisfied. The AT grant lottery is performed, whereas the bonus state during AT is different in that the AT extension lottery described later is not performed. However, even in the bonus state during AT, the AT extension lottery can be performed.

In the normal gaming state during AT (or after the end of the bonus state during AT), when the accumulated stored points reach the specified points (for example, 50P), the state shifts to the CZ state during AT. In this case, the accumulated points are initialized (cleared). In the CZ state during AT, the AT extension lottery is performed based on the internal winning combination or other preset conditions being satisfied. If the AT extension lottery is won in the CZ state during AT, the game period in the normal game state during AT is extended according to the winning result. Further, in the CZ state during AT, the end conditions of the CZ state (for example, the game for a preset game period has been performed, the end lottery has been won, etc.) have been satisfied without winning the AT extension lottery. In that case, it shifts to the normal game state during AT.

In the normal game state during AT, a game that has been granted in advance (for example, a period granted as an initial period; 50 games as an example) or an extended game period (the management method is arbitrary as described later) can be played. When this is done, the AT ends, and the game shifts to the normal game state during non-AT. Further, since the normal game state, CZ state, and bonus state during AT are managed as a series of advantageous sections, when the above-mentioned operating conditions for limit processing are satisfied in the series of advantageous sections, the normal game during AT If it is in the state and the CZ state, it shifts to the normal gaming state during non-AT, and if it is the bonus state during AT, it shifts to the bonus state during non-AT. In this case, the point lottery may not be performed in the transferred non-AT bonus state.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this example, the player basically starts the game from the normal gaming state during non-AT, accumulates points in the normal gaming state and bonus state during non-AT, and accumulates the accumulated points. It aims to acquire AT in the CZ state by consuming it and shifting to the CZ state. Then, when shifting from non-AT to AT, points are accumulated in the normal gaming state and bonus state during AT, the accumulated points are consumed to shift to the CZ state, and the AT is extended in the CZ state. .. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this example, the amount of point awarding probability is of great concern to the player.

Next, the privilege grant state in this example will be described. In this example, as an example of the privilege granting state, the point granting probability is given preferential treatment when the internal winning role is a replay role (excluding the replay role as a rare role with a low winning probability, push order replay or unquestioned replay). The point award probability is not given preferential treatment when the internal winning combination is not the replay combination, and the first granting state set when the internal winning combination is the replay combination and the internal winning combination are bells (of the winning probability). The point-giving probability is given preferential treatment when the role is a push-order small role or an unquestioned small role, excluding a specific small role as a low rare role, and the point-giving probability is not given when the internal winning role is not the bell. And, when the second grant state set when the internal winning role is the bell, or when the point granting probability is given preferential treatment regardless of which role the internal winning role is, and when the internal winning role is a rare role. Points when the third grant status is set to and the "loss" that did not win any of the roles (or the case where the role other than the above is "other" that was the internal winning role) It has a fourth grant state in which the grant probability is given preferential treatment, the point grant probability is not given preferential treatment when it is not the "loss", and it is set when the grant probability is "loss".

Then, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the display device 11, at least in the normal gaming state and the bonus gaming state during the non-AT and AT in which the above-mentioned point lottery is performed, the above-mentioned first grant is given. A state display area (MP) for displaying the first display to the fourth display for suggesting the state to the fourth grant state is provided. The point lottery described above may be performed even in the CZ state, and in this case, the state display area (MP) may be provided even in the CZ state during non-AT and AT. That is, the state display area (MP) may be displayed regardless of the gaming state, at least in a state where the privilege can be given.

Here, in FIG. 130, in the "correspondence relationship between the display in the map and the combination", the display (icon) corresponding to the "replay" is the first display for suggesting the first grant state, and is referred to as "bell". The corresponding display (icon) is the second display for suggesting the second grant state, and the display (icon) corresponding to the "rare role" is the third display for suggesting the third grant state. The display (icon) corresponding to "Loss / Other" is the fourth display for suggesting the fourth grant state.

In this example, the privilege granting state for 5 games including the game is determined in advance. For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 130 and 131 (a), the privilege granting state of the game (first game) is determined to be the first granting state, and the privilege granting state after one game (second game) is determined. The second grant state is determined, the privilege grant state after two games (third game) is determined to be the first grant state, and the privilege grant state after three games (fourth game) is the fourth grant state. The privilege granting state after 4 games (5th game) is determined to be the 3rd granting state, and corresponding to this, the 1st in the leftmost area of the status display area (MP) The display is displayed, the second display is displayed in the area to the right of it, the first display is displayed in the area to the right of it, the fourth display is displayed in the area to the right of it, and the rightmost display is displayed. The third display is displayed in the area.

Further, as shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, in the state display area (MP), the leftmost state display icon (hereinafter abbreviated as “the game state display icon”) indicating the privilege granting state of the game is referred to after the next game. A partition line is designed so that it can be easily distinguished from the status display icon indicating the privilege grant status, and the display area of the game status display icon is divided. As a result, it becomes clear which display indicates the game state of the game that the player should pay attention to. In addition, the method for showing the game state display icon so that it can be easily distinguished from other icons may be other than this. For example, the game state display icon may be made larger than other icons, or the game state display icon may be blinked. Further, in other production devices such as making the decorative LED of the game machine emit light in a color corresponding to the game state display icon, or outputting a sound related to a state suggestion such as "If the replay is pulled, chance!" From the speaker. You may notify the privilege granting state of the game.

At this time, as in the example shown in FIG. 131 (b), it is assumed that the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game. In this case, since the privilege granting state in the game is the first granting state, the point granting probability is given preferential treatment in the point lottery. Then, the privilege granting state after one game to four games in this game is advanced, and is set as the privilege granting state after the game to three games in the next game, and the replay role is used as the internal winning role in the game. Depending on the decision, the privilege granting state after 4 games is set to the first granting state. Correspondingly, the second display is displayed in the leftmost area of the status display area (MP), the first display is displayed in the area to the right of the second display, and the first display is displayed in the area to the right of the second display. Four displays are displayed, the third display is displayed in the area to the right of the display, and the first display is displayed in the rightmost area.

The specific flow of the game is as follows. With FIG. 131 (a) continuously displayed from the end of the previous game, the player sequentially performs a bet button operation, a start lever operation, a first stop operation, a second stop operation, and a third stop operation. The rotation of all reels is stopped, and as a result of the game, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination is stopped and displayed on the effective line. After that, an effect is performed according to the point award determination.

For example, the game status display icon (first display corresponding to replay) displayed at the left end of the status display area (MP) emits light, and the added number of points "+5 points" or the like is displayed. That is, when the winning combination corresponding to the privilege granting state of the game is won and the point granting judgment is made under the preferential condition, and when the winning combination does not correspond to the privilege granting state of the game, the point granting judgment is made under the non-preferred condition. It suffices to make it easy for the player to understand whether or not the role corresponding to the state can be won at the right time, assuming that the content of the effect according to the point award determination is different from the case where the point is given. For example, if points are given under preferential conditions, the added points are displayed after the game status display icon flashes strongly, and if the points are not given, the added points are displayed after the game status display icon goes dark. Will be done. By performing such a point addition effect, it is possible to give the player a sense of success that he / she was able to draw the winning role at the right time, and to enhance the interest of the game. Not only do you wait for a winning role with a high probability such as a bonus role or a rare role, but also a winning role with a high probability such as a replay role or a bell role will be given a large value depending on the timing of establishment. It is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous.

Also, in this case, the winning line of the replay is blinked with the back lamp according to this point addition effect, and the decorative LED is made to emit blue which is a color suggesting the replay. It is easier to convey the game characteristics to the player if the effect suggesting that there is a character is also performed.

Then, after the point addition effect is performed, the display mode of FIG. 131 (a) is changed to the display mode of FIG. 131 (b). That is, after the point addition effect, the game state display icon in the leftmost area of the state display area (MP) is hidden, and each state display icon (in FIG. 131 (b)) arranged in the state display area (MP). (2) to (5) move to the left by one, and the icon of the first display in FIG. 131 (6) is displayed in the rightmost area of the status display area (MP) based on the winning of the replay role. NS. In this way, the privilege granting state is directly determined according to the winning combination that has been established, and this is visually clear. Therefore, the player himself or herself actively engages in such a lottery state (lottery map). ) Can be given the feeling of creating. It should be noted that the execution of the point addition effect and the change timing of the status display area (MP) are merely examples, and timings other than the above (for example, immediately after the start lever operation, after the first stop, at the third stop, and the operation invalidation freeze). If there is a production, you may go during the freeze.

On the other hand, as shown in the example shown in FIG. 131 (c), it is assumed that the bell is determined as the internal winning combination in the game. In this case, since the privilege granting state in the game is the first granting state, the point granting probability is not given preferential treatment in the point lottery. Then, the privilege granting state after one game to four games in this game is advanced, and is set as the privilege granting state after the game to three games in the next game, and the bell is determined as the internal winning role in the game. The privilege granting state after 4 games is set to the second granting state according to the fact. Correspondingly, the second display is displayed in the leftmost area of the status display area (MP), the first display is displayed in the area to the right of the second display, and the first display is displayed in the area to the right of the second display. Four displays are displayed, the third display is displayed in the area to the right of the display, and the second display is displayed in the rightmost area. The specific flow of the game is basically the same as that of FIG. 131 (b) described above, and thus the description thereof will be omitted here.

That is, in this example, the privilege granting state in the subsequent predetermined game (in this case, after 4 games) is determined according to the internal winning combination in the game. In addition, the determined privilege granting state is set when the game corresponding to the predetermined game becomes the game in sequence. Although it is time to change the setting, in this case, the privilege granting state is basically initialized, so a predetermined combination of privilege granting states for 5 games may be set, or this A plurality of such combinations may be provided, one of the combinations may be determined by lottery, and the privilege granting state of the determined combination may be set. Of course, the privilege granting state may not be set, and the privilege granting state may be set sequentially as described above, but the former is more difficult to recognize by the player whether or not the setting has been changed. Suitable. From this point of view, the privilege granting state may be initialized even when the power is restored without changing the setting.

In addition, such a determination mode of the privilege granting state shows an example, and other determination modes can also be adopted. For example, the privilege granting state in the next game may be determined according to the internal winning combination in the game. That is, the game in which the privilege granting state determined according to the internal winning combination in the game is set can be any game after the game. In this case, in the state display area (MP), only the suggestion display corresponding to the privilege granting state in the game may be displayed, the suggestion display corresponding to the privilege granting state in the game, and the subsequent privilege. A suggestion display corresponding to the privilege grant status in the game for which the grant status is determined may be displayed.

Further, for example, the period during which the same privilege granting state continues may be set to 5 games, and the privilege granting state may be determined every 5 games according to the internal winning combination at that time. Further, for example, first, a transition lottery (decision on whether or not to shift the privilege granting state) is performed according to the internal winning combination, and when it is decided to shift the privilege granting state, one of the privilege granting states is performed. May be determined so that the determined privilege grant state is maintained until the next transition lottery is held. That is, the privilege granting state determined by one opportunity can be continued over a plurality of games (game period). In this case, in the state display area (MP), only the suggestion display corresponding to the privilege granting state in the period including the game may be displayed, or the suggestion corresponding to the privilege granting state in the period including the game may be displayed. The display and the suggestion display corresponding to the privilege grant status in the subsequent period may be displayed.

Further, in this example, it is basically assumed that the suggestion display is performed in the state display area (MP) according to the determination result of the privilege granting state, but the display mode in the state display area (MP) is limited to this. No. For example, when the game is started, only the suggestion display (for example, (1) in FIG. 131 (a)) corresponding to the privilege grant state of the game is displayed, and when the game is finished, the next game is displayed. Suggestion display corresponding to the privilege grant state (for example, (2) in FIGS. 131 (b) (c)) and suggestion display corresponding to the newly determined specific grant state (for example, FIGS. 131 (b) (c)) ) Is displayed, and the suggestion display corresponding to the privilege granting state of other games (for example, (2) to (5) in the case of FIG. 131 (a), FIG. 131 (b) ( In the case of c), (3) to (5)) may not be displayed. In addition, a suggestion display that does not correspond to the privilege granting state (for example, a display such as "?" That makes it difficult to recognize which privilege granting state is displayed) may be displayed with a predetermined probability.

Further, although the method gives preferential treatment to the point-giving probability in this example, for example, the following preferential method can be adopted as an example. For example, in a game in which the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination, if it is not in the first grant state, "2" points are awarded with a probability of 1/3 and "1" points are awarded with a probability of 2/3. Shall be. Here, in the case of the first grant state, "2" points are granted with a probability of 2/3, and "1" points are granted with a probability of 1/3. That is, the point awarding probability can be given preferential treatment by giving preferential treatment to the awarding probability itself. Further, in the case of the first grant state, "4" points are given with a probability of 1/3, and "2" points are given with a probability of 2/3. That is, the probability of giving points can be given preferential treatment by giving preferential treatment to the number of points given. Further, for example, in a game in which the replay combination is determined as the internal winning combination, points are not awarded if it is not in the first granting state, and if it is in the first granting state, it is predetermined or determined by lottery. It is also possible that at least "1" points or more are awarded.

If the replay combination includes a combination of symbols displayed depending on the batting order or the timing of the stop operation, such as "push order replay", the "push order replay" is the internal winning. In the game determined as a combination, if it is not in the first grant state, and if a specific symbol combination is displayed according to the stop operation performed in the correct batting order or the correct answer timing, there is a 1/3 probability. When "2" points are given and "1" points are given with a probability of 2/3, and a specific symbol combination is not displayed according to the fact that the stop operation was not performed in the correct batting order or the correct answer timing. Is given "1" points with a probability of 1/3, and points cannot be given with a probability of 2/3. That is, the point awarding probability can be changed according to the mode of the player's stop operation (type of combination of symbols related to the replay combination displayed as a result). In this case, points may not be awarded if a specific symbol combination is not displayed according to the fact that the stop operation was not performed in the correct batting order or the correct answer timing. Further, by the above-mentioned preferential treatment method, it is possible to give preferential treatment to the point granting probability in each case in the first granting state. Further, even in the first grant state, if the combination of specific symbols is not displayed according to the fact that the stop operation is not performed in the correct batting order or the correct answer timing, the point grant probability may not be given preferential treatment. That is, in the point-giving lottery, it is possible to decide whether or not to perform the point lottery or whether or not to give preferential treatment according to the combination of the winning symbols. The same applies to the case where the bells include those having different combinations of symbols displayed depending on the batting order or the timing of the stop operation, such as "pushing order small winning combination".

Further, for example, in a game in which the bell is determined as the internal winning combination, if the second grant state is not obtained, "2" points are awarded with a probability of 1/2, and "1" points are granted with a probability of 1/2. Shall be. Here, as described above, in the case of the second grant state, "2" points are granted with a probability of 2/3, and "1" points are granted with a probability of 1/3. Alternatively, it is possible to give "4" points with a probability of 1/2 and give "2" points with a probability of 1/2. Further, for example, in a game in which the bell is determined as an internal winning combination, points are not awarded when the bell is not in the second granting state, and points are predetermined or determined by lottery when the bell is in the second granting state. Can be awarded at least "1" points or more.

Further, for example, in the case of the third grant state, it is assumed that "5" points are given with a probability of 1/3 and "3" points are given with a probability of 2/3 for all combinations. Here, if a rare combination is further determined as an internal winning combination in the third grant state, "10" points may be granted.

In addition, for example, in a game in which loss or the like is determined as an internal winning combination, if it is not in the fourth grant state, "1" points are awarded with a probability of 1/3, and points are not granted with a probability of 2/3. And. Here, as described above, in the case of the fourth grant state, "2" points can be granted with a probability of 2/3, and points can be prevented from being granted with a probability of 1/3. Alternatively, "2" points may be awarded with a probability of 1/3, and "1" points may be awarded with a probability of 2/3. In addition, for example, in a game in which a loss or the like is determined as an internal winning combination, points are not awarded if it is not in the fourth granting state, and if it is in the fourth granting state, it is determined in advance or determined by lottery. It is also possible that at least "1" points or more are awarded.

In this way, according to the gaming machine of this example, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of states (for example, the first grant state to the fourth grant state) related to the grant of benefits (for example, points). .. In addition, a plurality of state suggestion displays (for example, first display to fourth display) can be displayed according to the determined state. Then, the state suggestion display can be displayed for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period according to the determined state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the granting of benefits.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, it is possible to determine the state in the predetermined game in the second period according to the winning combination in the game. That is, the degree of advantage of the game fluctuates according to the player's own game result, and the degree of advantage in the subsequent game is determined. Therefore, the player's expectation is also after the game. It can be maintained and the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, for example, when the first combination (for example, a replay combination) is won in the game, the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the first state (for example, the first grant state). When a second winning combination (for example, a bell) is won in the game state, the state in the predetermined game in the second period is set to the second state (for example, the second grant state). As a result, since the winning combination in the game becomes a chance combination in the subsequent predetermined game, it is possible to make it easier to understand the game property that the subsequent state is generated according to the game result of the player himself / herself. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, when the notification state is not controlled (for example, during non-ART), when the granted privilege has a predetermined result (for example, the specified point is reached), the notification is given. Whether or not to control the state can be determined, and when the state is controlled (for example, during AT), whether or not to extend the notification state when the granted privilege has a predetermined result. Can be determined. That is, regardless of which state it is in, the granting of benefits is configured to be of great concern to the player. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player with respect to the granting of benefits.

In addition, in the gaming machine of this example, in order to further improve the interest of the player, the following measures can be taken. For example, in a gaming state other than the bonus state (particularly, a normal gaming state), it is possible to shift between a plurality of RT states. Specifically, five types of RT states of RT0 to RT4 are provided. In this example, it is assumed that the same as in the other example (No. 7) of the above-mentioned game playability (game specification) is provided as the internal winning combination of each RT state. Further, RT3 is defined as a finite RT with a fixed period, and other RT states are defined as an infinite RT with an infinite period. In addition, the winning probability of the replay combination is the same (1 / 7.3) in any RT state. However, it is also possible to change the winning probability of the replay combination between each RT state.

After the end of the bonus state, it shifts to RT0. RT0 is in an RT state in which "RT transition lip 3" can be won. The "RT transition lip 3" in this example is a rare role in which the raising lip 3 wins regardless of the mode of the stop operation. If a prize is won in the raised lip 3 at RT0, the process shifts to RT3. The RT3 in this example will be described later. On the other hand, if any of "Batting Order Bells 1 to 6" is won before winning "RT Transition Lip 3" and a bell spill is displayed, the process shifts to RT1.

RT1 is in an RT state in which "RT transition lip 1" can be won. If you win the "RT transition lip 1" in RT1 and win the raised lip 1, you will be transferred to RT2. In addition, "RT transition lip 1" is not a rare role.

RT2 is in an RT state in which "RT transition lip 2" can be won. If you win the "RT Transition Lip 2" at RT2 and win the Raise Lip 2, you will transition to RT0. In addition, "RT transition lip 2" is not a rare role. On the other hand, if any of "Batting order bells 1 to 6" is won in RT2 and a bell spill is displayed, the process shifts to RT1. In addition, if the player wins the "RT transition lip 2" in RT2 and wins the lower lip 1, the process shifts to RT1.

RT3 is in an RT state in which "RT transition lip 3" can be won. Note that RT3 is a finite RT that ends when it continues for a predetermined period (for example, for 10 games), but the RT state does not change depending on the combination of displayed symbols, so "bell spill" is displayed. Even if it is done, it does not shift to RT1, and even if it wins the raising lip 3, the game period is not extended. When the game is played for the predetermined period in RT3, the game shifts to RT4.

RT4 is in an RT state in which "RT transition lip 3" and "RT transition lip 4" can be won. If a prize is won in the raised lip 3 at RT4, the process shifts to RT3. In the "RT transition lip 4" in this example, the maintenance lip wins when the batting order is correct, while the lower lip 1 wins when the batting order is incorrect. Also, "RT Transition Lip 4" is not a rare role. In RT4, if any of "Batting order bells 1 to 6" is won and a bell spill is displayed, the process proceeds to RT1. In addition, if the player wins the "RT transition lip 4" at RT4 and wins the lower lip 1, the process shifts to RT1.

Here, in this example, when the rare combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the game, the privilege granting state in the subsequent predetermined game becomes the third granting state. As described above, in the third grant state, the point grant probability is high regardless of the internal winning combination of the game. That is, RT0, RT3 and RT4 in which the "RT transition lip 3" as a rare role can be won are the same as those in RT1 and RT2 in which the "RT transition lip 3" as a rare role cannot be won. 3 The granting state can be easily determined, and as a result, points can be easily granted (for example, a probabilistic state). Further, although RT3 is a finite RT, unlike RT0 and RT4, it does not fall to RT1, so in that sense, points are most likely to be given.

It should be noted that the winning probabilities of "RT transition lip 3" in each of RT0, RT3, and RT4 may be common probabilities or different probabilities. For example, it can be set to "1 / 7.3" for RT3, "1 / 9.2" for RT0 and RT4, and the like. Further, although the probability is low (for example, "1/256"), RT1 and RT2 may also be configured so as to be able to win the "RT transition lip 3". Further, in RT0 and RT4, the winning probability of the rare role "RT transition lip 3" is increased, and in RT3, the winning probability of the replay role which is a rare role and is different from "RT transition lip 3" is increased. May be good. That is, an RT state in which the winning probability of the first rare combination is high and an RT state in which the winning probability of the second rare combination is high may be provided. Further, in this case, the degree of advantage may be different between the privilege granting state set when the first rare role is won and the privilege granting state set when the second rare role is won. can.

Further, by simply setting RT0, RT3 and RT4 to a state in which the winning probability of the replay combination is higher than that of RT1 and RT2, the first grant state is easily determined, and the replay combination is determined in the first grant state. It may be configured as an easy state. Even in this way, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player. In this case, the winning probabilities of the replay combinations in each of RT0, RT3, and RT4 may be common probabilities or different probabilities. For example, it can be set to "1/2" for RT3, "1/4" for RT0 and RT4, and the like. Further, in this case, by setting the bonus state to a state in which the winning probability of the bell is higher than that of the other gaming states, the second grant state is easily determined, and the bell is easily determined in the second grant state. Can be configured. In addition, the RT state can be changed in the bonus state as well. For example, when the bonus state is configured as a "special bonus state", the winning probability of the replay combination is different among any of the first game state, the second game state, and the third game state (that is, the RT state is changed). By doing so, it is possible to create a state in which the first grant state is easily determined during the bonus state, and the replay combination is easily determined in the first grant state, as well as the first. It is also possible to create a state in which the 2 granting state is easily determined, and the bell is easily determined in the 2nd granting state.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this example, for example, a first state (for example, a first grant state) and a second role (for example, a replay role) in which a privilege can be given when the first combination (for example, a replay combination) is won, and a second combination (for example, a replay combination). , Bell), there is a second state (for example, a second grant state) in which a privilege can be given when winning, and when the first start condition is satisfied (for example, when a prize is won in the raising lip 3), the first Until the end condition of 1 is satisfied (for example, until 10 games are played), it is possible to control the first game state (for example, RT3) in which the winning probability of the first combination is increased, and the second start condition is satisfied. In the case (for example, when a bonus combination is won), the winning probability of the second combination increases until the second termination condition is satisfied (for example, until a game value exceeding a preset number of game values is given). It is possible to control the second game state (for example, a bonus state). Then, the state suggestion display is displayed regardless of the game state. That is, it is possible to create a plurality of states in which the easiness of granting the privilege is different. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player with respect to the granting of benefits.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 9)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 9) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 132 and 133. FIG. 132 is a diagram for conceptually explaining the flow of the game in this example, and FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example of a re-lottery mode based on the re-lottery right in this example.

First, an example of the flow of the game in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 132. As already mentioned, it is possible to control various game states, but in this example, it is roughly classified into AT (may be ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. It is assumed that non-AT during non-AT is provided.

During non-AT, when neither the mission state nor the CZ (chance zone) state, which will be described later, is in the normal gaming state. In the normal gaming state during non-AT, a predetermined number of periodic games (for example, 150 games) is subtracted and updated (or may be an addition update) by 1 for each game, and when the game period reaches the number of periodic games. Move to the mission state. Whether or not the number of periodic games has been reached may be managed depending on whether or not the points given as described above have reached the specified points, or the number of winnings of a specific combination (for example, a replay combination) or It may be managed according to the number of times a specific effect is executed.

Further, in the normal gaming state during non-AT, for example, when a rare role (a combination with a relatively low winning probability) is won, and a predetermined normal combination (for example, a replay combination) is performed a predetermined number of times (for example, 3 times). When the above is won in succession, a shortened lottery is usually performed. In the normal shortened lottery, it is decided whether or not to shorten the number of periodic games, and when it is decided to shorten the number of periodic games, the number of games actually shortened is determined, and the number of periodic games is shortened by that amount. NS. As a result, it becomes possible to shift to the mission state earlier than when it is not shortened. Further, for example, when a rare role (a role with a relatively low winning probability) is won, a special shortened lottery is further performed. In the special shortened lottery, it is decided whether or not to shorten the number of periodic games separately from the normal shortened lottery, and when it is decided to shorten the number of periodic games, the number of games actually shortened is determined, and the number of games to be shortened is determined accordingly. The number of periodic games is shortened. It should be noted that the special shortened lottery may be performed even when a predetermined normal combination (for example, a replay combination) is won consecutively for a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more. Further, even when a normal role other than a rare role is won, a normal shortened lottery or a special shortened lottery may be performed, although the probability is low.

For example, when a specific rare role is won, it is decided that the number of periodic games of "10 games" will be shortened by winning the normal shortened lottery, and the periodic game of "20 games" will also be won by the special shortened lottery. If it is decided that the number will be shortened, the number of periodic games will be shortened by "30 games" in the game. The special shortened lottery may be an additional lottery that is performed only when the normal shortened lottery is won, or may be an independent lottery that is performed regardless of whether or not the normal shortened lottery is won. Further, in the normal shortened lottery, not only the number of periodic games shortened, but also whether or not the special shortened lottery is executed, the number of periodic games shortened by the special shortened lottery, and the like may be determined. That is, the results of the normal shortened lottery and the special shortened lottery may be obtained by one lottery.

Further, in the normal gaming state during non-AT, for example, when a rare combination (a combination with a relatively low winning probability) is won, an AT grant lottery is performed. In this example, as a basic game playability during non-AT, it is determined that when the number of games of the periodic game is exhausted in the normal game state, the game shifts to the mission state, and in the mission state, the game shifts to the CZ state (mission success). When it becomes, it shifts to the CZ state, but when it is not decided to shift to the CZ state (it becomes a mission failure), it returns to the normal game state, and it is decided to shift to the AT in the CZ state (CZ success). When it becomes, it shifts to the AT state, but when it is not decided to shift to AT (CZ fails), it returns to the normal gaming state, but the expectation of AT transition even in the normal gaming state during non-AT. The AT grant lottery is to be held so that the player can hold the game. In this case, AT is granted (AT direct hit) without going through the mission state or CZ state. However, in order not to impair the basic game playability, the AT grant lottery in the normal gaming state during non-AT has a lower AT transition probability than the AT grant lottery in the CZ state.

In addition, when a rare role is won in the normal game state during non-AT, the AT grant lottery is first performed, and when the AT grant is decided, the shift to the AT state is performed and the normal shortened lottery or the special shortened lottery is performed. If the AT grant is not decided, the normal shortened lottery or the special shortened lottery may be performed. In addition, a rare role that is the target of the AT grant lottery and a rare role that is the target of the normal shortened lottery or the special shortened lottery can be configured as different rare roles.

As described above, when the number of games of the periodic game is exhausted in the normal game state during non-AT, the game shifts to the mission state during non-AT. The mission state is configured as, for example, a game state of about 10 games, and a CZ-giving lottery is performed. In the CZ grant lottery, in each game in the mission state, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the CZ state based on the internal winning combination, or when the mission state is started, the CZ may be determined in advance. It may be decided whether or not to shift to the state, and in the subsequent mission state, an effect is performed according to the decision result, and it may be notified whether or not to shift to the CZ state in the final game. When the mission state is completed, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the CZ state according to the game result during the mission state. Further, even in the mission state, as in the normal game state, when a rare role is won, an AT grant lottery can be performed.

In this example, the success probability of transitioning from the mission state to the CZ state (the mission is successful) is about 40% (successful twice in every five mission states). However, in this example, when the special shortened lottery is won in the normal game state and the number of periodic games is shortened and the number of periodic games is reached and the state shifts to the mission state, the mission state always shifts to the CZ state. It is decided to do (that is, the probability of success is 100%). For example, when the number of periodic games is 50 games remaining in the normal game state, if the special shortened lottery is won and it is determined that the number of periodic games is shortened by "40 games", then 10 games are played. When shifting to the mission state, the success probability remains at 40% of the normal, but when the number of periodic games is 40 games remaining in the normal game state, a special shortened lottery is won and the number of periodic games is "40". If it is decided that the "game" will be shortened and the mission state is entered, the success rate will fluctuate to 100%. That is, the special shortened lottery has not only a function of shortening the transition period to the mission state but also a function of changing the degree of advantage in the transitioned mission state. The above-mentioned fluctuation of the success probability is only an example. For example, when the normal success probability is 40%, the success probability may be changed to 80%, or between 50% and 100%. It may be changed to the success probability determined by lottery. That is, any aspect can be adopted as long as the success probability is changed to a more advantageous one.

Further, for example, when the mission state is shifted to without being based on the result of the special shortened lottery, the duration of the mission state is about 10 games, but for example, the mission state is shifted based on the result of the special shortened lottery. In some cases, the degree of advantage in the mission state may be changed by setting the duration of the mission state to a longer period than that. In this case, for example, in each game in the mission state, it is determined whether or not the CZ grant lottery shifts to the CZ state based on the internal winning combination, or when the mission state ends, the mission state is in progress. If it is determined whether or not to shift to the CZ state according to the game result of, the success probability can be substantially improved.

As described above, when it is determined to shift to the CZ state in the non-AT mission state, the shift to the non-AT CZ state occurs. The CZ state is configured as, for example, a game state of about 10 games, and an AT grant lottery is performed. In the AT grant lottery, in each game in the CZ state, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the AT state based on the internal winning combination, or when the CZ state is started, the AT may be determined in advance. It may be decided whether or not to shift to the state, and in the subsequent CZ state, an effect is performed according to the decision result, and it may be notified whether or not to shift to the AT state in the final game. When the CZ state is terminated, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the AT state according to the game result in the CZ state.

Further, in this example, the game state is gradually changed from the normal game state to the mission state to the CZ state during non-AT. For example, the mission state is made to function as the CZ state, and in the mission state, the game state is changed. It is also possible to make the AT grant lottery in the CZ state be performed instead of the CZ grant lottery. That is, when the number of periodic games is reached in the normal game state, the game shifts to the mission state as the CZ state, and when it is determined to shift to the AT state as a result of the AT grant lottery in that state, the state shifts to the AT state. It can also be configured to shift and return to the normal gaming state if it is not determined to shift to the AT state. As described above, in this example, the gaming state that is not the advantageous state (AT state) can be configured as the normal state (normal gaming state) and the predetermined state (CZ state), and the normal state (normal gaming state), It can also be configured in a special state (mission state) and a predetermined state (CZ state). Further, these are merely examples, and it is possible to shift to a different state in the middle of the process, or for example, a gaming state can be configured simply in a normal state (normal gaming state) and an advantageous state (AT state).

If it is determined to shift to the AT state as a result of the AT grant lottery in any of the non-AT gaming states, the game first shifts to the initial section during AT. In the initial section, for example, the expected value of increase in the game value per game is set to about 4, and the initial section is configured as a game state in which about 25 games are continued. When the game period of the initial section is exhausted, when the game shifts from non-AT to AT due to the above-mentioned AT direct hit, the game shifts to the second section during AT. In other cases, it shifts to the first section during AT. In each game of the initial section, it may be decided whether or not to shift to the second section based on the internal winning combination, or when the initial section is started, the game shifts to the second section. Whether or not it may be determined, or when the initial section is completed, it may be determined whether or not to shift to the second section according to the game result in the initial section. In this case, when it is decided to shift to the second section, it may shift to the second section, and when it is not decided, it may shift to the first section. That is, during the initial section, whether or not to set the second section after the end thereof may be determined by, for example, lottery.

In the first section during AT, for example, the preparation state configured as a production section in which information on the stop operation related to the addition of the game value is basically not notified and the game continues for about 25 games, and the game value per game The expected increase value is set to about 4, and it is composed of a pseudo-bonus state configured as an increase section in which about 40 games continue. When shifting from the initial section to the first section, the preparation state of the first section is first controlled. In the preparatory state of the first section, for example, the first section continuous lottery is performed based on whether it is decided that a specific batting order is notified when a specific replay combination or a specific replay combination is won.

In the preparation state of the first section, if the first section continuous lottery is won (for example, the batting order in which the combinations of the symbols of "7" are aligned is notified), the state shifts to the pseudo bonus state of the first section. When the game in the pseudo-bonus state of the first section is completed, the game shifts to the preparation state of the first section again, and the continuous lottery of the first section is performed again in the preparation state of the shifted first section. That is, the first section continuation lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not the first section continues, and also a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus (looping the pseudo bonus). be. In the preparatory state of the first section, when the game period is exhausted without winning the first section continuous lottery, the state shifts to the pullback state during non-AT. The pullback state will be described later. Here, in the first section, at a predetermined time (for example, at the time of winning the AT grant lottery, at the start of the initial section, during the initial section, at the end of the initial section, at the start of the first section, etc.), the first section The winning probability of the continuous lottery (that is, the continuation rate of the first section) is set, but this continuation rate is lower than the continuation rate of the second section (for example, the maximum probability is 70% and the continuation is less than that). The rate may be set by lottery, or may be uniformly set to 50%). Therefore, from the viewpoint of this continuation rate, the second section is configured as a gaming state that is more advantageous than the first section.

In addition, in the pseudo-bonus state of the first section, an AT promotion lottery is performed. When winning the AT promotion lottery, after the end of the pseudo-bonus state of the first section, the state shifts to the preparation state of the second section, and in the transferred second section, at a predetermined time (for example, at the time of winning the AT promotion lottery, the first At any time, such as at the end of the pseudo-bonus of one section or at the start of the second section), the winning probability of the second section continuous lottery (that is, the continuation rate of the second section) is more advantageous than the continuation rate of the first section. (For example, the maximum probability may be 90%, and the continuation rate less than that (at least the continuation rate more advantageous than the continuation rate of the first section before the transition) may be set by lottery, or uniformly. 80% may be set). If the AT promotion lottery is won in the pseudo-bonus state of the first section, the pseudo-bonus state of the second section may be entered. Further, the AT promotion lottery may be performed even in the preparation state of the first section. In this case, when the AT promotion lottery is won, the state may be shifted to the preparation state of the second section, or may be shifted to the pseudo bonus state of the second section.

Further, in the AT promotion lottery, it has been decided that, for example, in one pseudo-bonus state, information on the stop operation is notified when a specific internal winning combination is won or a specific internal winning combination is won. It is also possible to configure the lottery result to be the winning result when a special transition condition is satisfied, such as, or a pseudo-bonus state of multiple times (for example, 4 times) (in this case, for example, a pseudo-bonus as a premise). In any pseudo-bonus state (it is necessary to loop the state four times or more), the lottery result can be configured to be the winning result when a special transition condition is satisfied. That is, it can be configured so that the transition to the second section can be expected regardless of whether or not the first section continues, and the degree of expectation of transition to the second section increases as the first section continues. It can also be configured to rise.

In the second section during AT, for example, the preparation state configured as a production section in which information on the stop operation related to the addition of the game value is basically not notified and the game continues for about 25 games, and the game value per game The expected increase value is set to about 4, and it is composed of a pseudo-bonus state configured as an increase section in which about 40 games continue. When shifting from the initial section to the second section, the preparation state of the second section is first controlled. In the preparation state of the second section, for example, the second section continuous lottery is performed based on whether it is decided that a specific batting order is notified when a specific replay combination or a specific replay combination is won.

In the preparation state of the second section, if the second section continuous lottery is won (for example, the batting order in which the combinations of the symbols of "7" are aligned is notified), the state shifts to the pseudo bonus state of the second section. When the game in the pseudo-bonus state of the second section is completed, the game shifts to the preparation state of the second section again, and the second section continuous lottery is performed again in the preparation state of the shifted second section. That is, the second section continuation lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not the second section continues, and also a lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the pseudo bonus (looping the pseudo bonus). be. In the preparation state of the second section, when the game period is exhausted without winning the second section continuous lottery, the game shifts to the normal game state during non-AT. In this case, it may shift to the pullback state during non-AT. Further, in the second section, a predetermined time (for example, at the time of winning the AT grant lottery, at the start of the initial section, during the initial section, at the end of the initial section, at the start of the second section, etc. At the time as described above), the winning probability of the second section continuous lottery (that is, the continuation rate of the second section) is set. Further, as described above, the continuation rate of the second section is set to be relatively higher than the continuation rate of the first section.

As described above, when the first section during AT is completed, the state shifts to the pullback state during non-AT. The pullback state is configured as, for example, a game state of about 3 games, and an AT pullback lottery is performed. In the AT pull-back lottery, for example, a winning combination is won when a rare role is won in the pull-back state, and a non-winning is achieved when the game period is exhausted without winning a rare role. If the AT pull-back lottery is won, the state shifts to the pseudo-bonus state of the first section during AT (at that time, the continuation rate of the first section is determined again). On the other hand, if the AT pull-back lottery is not won, the game shifts to the normal gaming state during non-AT. If the AT pull-back lottery is won, the state may shift to the preparation state of the first section during AT. Further, in the AT pullback lottery, in each game in the pullback state, it may be determined whether or not the player can return to the first section based on the internal winning combination, or when the pullback state is started, it may be determined in advance. Whether or not it is possible to return to the first section is determined, and in the subsequent pullback state, an effect is performed according to the decision result, and even if it is notified whether or not to return to the first section in the final game. Alternatively, when the pullback state is terminated, it may be determined whether or not the player can return to the first section according to the game result during the pullback state.

Next, with reference to FIG. 133, an example of the re-lottery mode based on the re-lottery right in this example will be described. In this example, in both the non-AT and AT gaming states, for example, when a rare combination (a combination with a relatively low winning probability) is won, and a predetermined normal combination (for example, a replay combination) is determined. When the winning number of times (for example, 3 times) or more is won in succession, the re-lottery right granting lottery is performed. Grant of re-lottery right If you win the lottery, you will be granted one re-lottery right. When a lottery for granting re-lottery rights is won, a plurality of re-lottery rights may be granted depending on the lottery result. Further, the conditions for the re-lottery right grant lottery can be performed even when the conditions other than the above are satisfied. That is, in this example, when the preset conditions for granting the re-lottery right are satisfied, all of those configured to be able to grant at least one or more re-lottery rights can be adopted. In addition, the information indicating the granted re-lottery right shall be retained until the re-lottery is actually performed (until other initialization conditions such as setting change are satisfied).

In this example, the re-lottery right is as follows: (1) In the normal game state during non-AT, if the above-mentioned normal shortened lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the lottery is executed again (re-lottery). Is used to). That is, in the normal game state during non-AT, if the re-lottery right is granted by the time the normal shortened lottery is performed, if the normal shortened lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is performed again. The lottery right is consumed and the lottery is re-lottered. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned normal shortened lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the re-lottery right is carried over until the next lottery that is the target of the re-lottery is not won. In the case of re-lottery, the lottery may be performed with the same winning probability as the lottery probability in the normal shortened lottery that has already been performed, or the lottery probability may be higher than the lottery probability in the normal shortened lottery that has already been performed. The lottery may be performed, or the lottery may be performed with a winning probability lower than the lottery probability in the normal shortened lottery that has already been performed. When the normal shortened lottery is won by the re-lottery, the number of periodic games is shortened by the determined number of games as in the normal normal shortened lottery.

In this example, in the normal game state during non-AT, the above-mentioned special shortened lottery and AT-granted lottery are not subject to re-lottery, but they are subject to re-lottery as in the case of normal shortened lottery. You can also do it. In addition, when there are a plurality of lottery targets for re-lottery in the same game state, the re-lottery targets are selected according to the relative winning probability, lottery frequency, lottery order, player's advantage, and the like. The lottery may be prioritized.

Further, in this example, the re-lottery right is (2) in the mission state during non-AT, if the above-mentioned CZ-granting lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the lottery is executed again (re-lottery). Used for lottery). That is, in the mission state during non-AT, if the re-lottery right is granted by the time the CZ grant lottery is performed, and if the CZ grant lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is performed. The rights are consumed and the lottery is re-lottered. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned CZ-granting lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the re-lottery right is carried over until the next lottery that is the target of the re-lottery is not won. In the case of re-lottery, the lottery may be performed with the same winning probability as the lottery probability in the CZ-granted lottery that has already been performed, or the lottery probability may be higher than the lottery probability in the CZ-granted lottery that has already been performed. The lottery may be performed, or the lottery may be performed with a winning probability lower than the lottery probability in the CZ-granted lottery that has already been performed. When the CZ-giving lottery is won by the re-lottery, the process shifts to the CZ state in the same manner as the normal CZ-giving lottery. In addition, the re-lottery right may function as the right to redo the mission state itself. Specifically, if the specified number of games is exhausted due to non-winning in the CZ grant lottery in the initial mission state, and if the re-lottery right is granted, the mission state can be performed again from the first game. It may be.

Further, in this example, the re-lottery right is (3) in the CZ state during non-AT, if the above-mentioned AT grant lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the lottery is executed again (re-lottery). Used for lottery). That is, in the CZ state during non-AT, if the re-lottery right is granted by the time the AT grant lottery is performed, and if the AT grant lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is performed. The rights are consumed and the lottery is re-lottered. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned AT grant lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the re-lottery right is carried over until the next lottery that is the target of the re-lottery is not won. In the case of re-lottery, the lottery may be performed with the same winning probability as the lottery probability in the AT-granted lottery that has already been performed, or the lottery probability may be higher than the lottery probability in the AT-granted lottery that has already been performed. The lottery may be performed, or the lottery may be performed with a winning probability lower than the lottery probability in the AT-granted lottery that has already been performed. When the AT grant lottery is won by the re-lottery, the process shifts to the initial section during AT as in the normal AT grant lottery. In addition, in the initial section during AT, for example, when the transition lottery to the second section is performed, such a transition lottery can also be the target of the re-lottery.

In the CZ state during non-AT, the winning probability of the AT grant lottery may fluctuate during the state (that is, a plurality of situations having different AT grant expectations are created). For example, in the 1st to 9th games, the number of times the AT grant lottery is executed (the number of winning judgments) is increased, and the AT grant lottery is performed for the number of times in the final game. , "20%", "40%", "80%", "100%", etc. If the specifications are such that the AT grant lottery is performed according to the AT winning expectation, it is possible to create a plurality of situations in which the AT grant expectation is different.

Then, if the AT grant lottery in the initial CZ state becomes a non-win (CZ failure) and the re-lottery is performed, at least the AT grant expectation is not lower than the situation before the failure. good. For example, if the number of winning determinations in the initial CZ state increases to 3 times and then fails, the number of winning determinations at the time of re-lottery may be set to 3 times. Alternatively, the number of winning determinations may be re-lottered with the lower limit of 3 times, and the number of winning determinations of 3 times or more may be re-determined, and then the re-lottery may be performed. Further, for example, when the AT winning expectation in the initial CZ state has risen to "40%" and then fails, the AT winning expectation at the time of re-lottery may be set to "40%". Alternatively, the AT winning expectation may be re-lottered with "40%" as the lower limit, the AT winning expectation of "40%" or more may be re-determined, and then the re-lottery may be performed.

Further, the re-lottery right may function as a right to redo the CZ state itself. Specifically, when the specified number of games is exhausted due to non-winning in the AT grant lottery in the initial CZ state (for example, in the final game described above), and when the re-lottery right is granted, The CZ state may be performed again from the first game. In this case, for example, as in the above example, if the number of winning judgments in the initial CZ state increases to 3 times and then fails, in the CZ state of redoing, the number of winning judgments starts from 3 times and 1 In the ninth game, the lottery for increasing the number of winning determinations is performed, and then the AT grant lottery is performed in the final game. Further, for example, as in the above-mentioned example, when the AT winning expectation in the initial CZ state has risen to "40%" and then fails, the AT winning expectation is "40%" in the redoing CZ state. Starting from, in the 1st to 9th games, a lottery for increasing the expectation of AT winning may be performed, and then a lottery for granting AT may be performed in the final game. Assuming that the CZ state is redone, the state in which the AT grant expectation is high in the CZ state is reverted to the state in which the expectation is relatively low (for example, in the above example, the number of winning judgments and the AT winning expectation). However, there is a risk that a sense of loss will occur, and in this way, such a sense of loss can be suppressed. In addition, the re-lottery right allows the re-lottery to be performed in a manner with a higher degree of expectation, so that the player's interest can be further improved.

Further, in this example, the re-lottery right is (4) if the above-mentioned AT promotion lottery is performed in the first section during AT but the lottery is not won, the lottery is executed again (re-lottery). Used for lottery). That is, in the first section during AT, if the re-lottery right is granted by the time the AT promotion lottery is performed, if the AT promotion lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is performed. The rights are consumed and the lottery is re-lottered. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned AT promotion lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the re-lottery right is carried over until the next lottery that is the target of the re-lottery is not won. In the case of re-lottery, the lottery may be performed with the same winning probability as the lottery probability in the AT promotion lottery that has already been performed, or the lottery probability may be higher than the lottery probability in the AT promotion lottery that has already been performed. The lottery may be performed, or the lottery may be performed with a winning probability lower than the lottery probability in the AT promotion lottery that has already been performed. When the AT promotion lottery is won by the re-lottery, the process shifts to the second section during the AT in the same manner as the normal AT promotion lottery.

In this example, in the first section during AT, the above-mentioned first section continuous lottery is not subject to re-lottery, but it can also be subject to re-lottery as in the case of AT promotion lottery. .. Further, in this example, in the second section during AT, the above-mentioned second section continuous lottery is not subject to re-lottery, but this can also be subject to re-lottery.

Further, in this example, the re-lottery right is (5) in the pull-back state during non-AT, if the above-mentioned AT pull-back lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the lottery is executed again (re-lottery). Used for lottery). That is, in the pull-back state during non-AT, if the re-lottery right is granted by the time the AT pull-back lottery is performed, and if the AT pull-back lottery is performed but the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is performed. The rights are consumed and the lottery is re-lottered. On the other hand, when the above-mentioned AT pull-back lottery is performed and the lottery is won, the re-lottery right is carried over until the next lottery that is the target of the re-lottery is not won. In the case of re-lottery, the lottery may be performed with the same winning probability as the lottery probability in the AT pull-back lottery that has already been performed, or the lottery probability may be higher than the lottery probability in the pull-back promotion lottery that has already been performed. The lottery may be performed, or the lottery may be performed with a winning probability lower than the lottery probability in the AT pullback lottery that has already been performed. When the AT pull-back lottery is won by the re-lottery, the process shifts to the first section during the AT in the same manner as the normal AT pull-back lottery. Further, the re-lottery right may function as a right to redo the pullback state itself. Specifically, if the AT pull-back lottery in the initial pull-back state results in a non-winning and the specified number of games is exhausted, and if the re-lottery right is granted, the pull-back state can be performed again from the first game. It may be.

It should be noted that the re-lottery in this example is merely a re-lottery, and for example, when the re-lottery right is granted, the lottery result of the lottery that is the target of the re-lottery is not determined as the winning result. As described above, the winning may be substantially confirmed by making the lottery performed with a winning probability higher than the lottery probability in the lottery already performed.

Further, the conditions under which various lottery is performed in this example (the same applies to other examples) are not limited to those described above. That is, in playing a game, for example, in relation to the game result obtained by the player, such as the type of the internal winning combination in one or more games, the procedure of the stop operation, the type of the winning combination, or a combination thereof. One or more conditions that can be set can be appropriately set as execution conditions in each lottery.

Further, when the re-lottery right is granted and the lottery to be re-lottered is not won, the player may be able to select whether or not to perform the re-lottery. For example, when the normal shortened lottery is not won in the normal game state during non-AT, and the number of remaining games in the periodic game number is small, it is selected not to use the re-lottery right, and then during non-AT. In some cases, the probability of starting the AT state can be increased by choosing to use the re-lottery right in the CZ grant lottery or the AT grant lottery when the mission state or the CZ state is reached. Further, for example, when the AT promotion lottery is not won in the first section during AT, the re-lottery right is used when it can be estimated that the continuation rate set in the first section during AT is high. If you choose not to use it, and then when the first section during AT ends and you are in the pullback state during non-AT, if you choose to use the re-lottery right in the AT pullback lottery, it will be during AT instead. In some cases, the game period can be extended. That is, it is also possible to allow the player to select the time when the granted re-lottery right is used. In this case, for example, in a game in which re-lottery can be performed, if the player plays the game with two cards, the re-lottery is not performed, and if the game is played with three cards, the re-lottery is performed. If the player makes the first right stop, the re-lottery is not performed, and if the player makes the first left stop, the re-lottery is performed. It suffices to make it possible to select whether or not to use the re-lottery right as appropriate in a manner linked to the game operation. Further, in this case, in the game in which the re-lottery can be performed, the mode of the game operation in which the re-lottery is performed and the mode in which the re-lottery is not performed are not performed so that the player can appropriately select whether or not to perform the re-lottery. The mode of the game operation and (or at least one of the modes of the game operation) may be notified.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of this example, a plurality of different lottery (for example, various lottery shown in FIG. 132) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and a specific right (for example, a re-lottery right) can be executed. Can be given. Then, when a specific right is granted and one of the lottery is executed and the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is executed for the lottery. That is, regardless of which lottery is performed, the player can have a sense of expectation including the re-lottery if the specific right is granted. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of different lottery in which the player has an advantage, and regardless of which lottery is performed, the player's expectation can be continued and the player's interest can be improved.

The lottery subject to re-lottery includes, for example, a cycle period for shifting from a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state during non-AT) to a predetermined state (for example, a mission state during non-AT and a CZ state). It can be configured to include a normal shortened lottery which is a shortened lottery of the above, and an AT grant lottery which is a transition lottery for shifting from a predetermined state to an advantageous state (for example, during AT). That is, even if the state and the lottery target are different, the re-lottery based on the specific right can be executed. As a result, regardless of the game situation, the player's expectation can be maintained and the player's interest can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, a specific lottery (for example, an AT grant lottery) for shifting from a predetermined state (for example, a CZ state during non-AT) to an advantageous state (for example, during AT) can be executed. Yes, the specific lottery is a lottery that is subject to re-lottery. Here, in the predetermined state, for example, a first situation in which the expectation of winning a specific lottery is low (for example, a situation in which the number of winning determinations is small or the expectation of winning an AT is low) and a specific situation than this first situation. There is a second situation in which the expectation of winning the lottery is high (for example, a situation in which the number of winning judgments is high or the expectation of winning the AT is high), and the re-lottery is performed when the predetermined state is the second situation. In this case, the re-lottery does not assume that the expectation of winning the specific lottery is lower than that of the second situation. That is, the degree of expectation in a predetermined state is inherited even in the re-lottery. As a result, in the case of re-lottery, the expectation of the target lottery is maintained, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, the normal shortened lottery is a lottery for shortening the cycle period for shifting from the normal state (for example, the normal gaming state during non-AT) to the special state (for example, the mission state during non-AT). And a special shortened lottery is feasible, and a predetermined lottery (for example, a CZ-giving lottery) for shifting from a special state to a predetermined state (for example, a CZ state during non-AT) is feasible. Here, the normal shortened lottery and the predetermined lottery are lottery targets for re-lottery. In addition, when the special state is changed due to the lottery result of the special shortened lottery, the state is always changed to the predetermined state. As a result, it is possible to make the expectation of transition to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a predetermined state) various by a plurality of different lottery, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the player. Further, even if the state and the lottery target are different, the re-lottery based on the specific right can be executed. As a result, regardless of the game situation, the player's expectation can be maintained and the player's interest can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the normal state (for example, the normal gaming state or the CZ state during non-AT), the AT grant lottery for shifting to the advantageous state (for example, during AT) can be executed. At the same time, in a specific state (for example, a pullback state during non-AT) that shifts after the end of the advantageous state, an AT pullback lottery for shifting to the advantageous state again can be executed. The AT grant lottery and the AT pullback lottery are lottery targets for re-lottery. As a result, it is possible to make the expectation of transition to a predetermined gaming state (for example, an advantageous state) various by a plurality of different lottery, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

The lottery to be re-lottered includes, for example, a transition lottery for shifting from the first advantageous state (for example, the first section during AT) to the second advantageous state (for example, the second section during AT). It can be configured to include the AT promotion lottery. That is, even if the state and the lottery target are different, the re-lottery based on the specific right can be executed. As a result, regardless of the game situation, the player's expectation can be maintained and the player's interest can be improved.

Further, even when the re-lottery is executed, it can be configured so that the target lottery may not be won. As a result, the player plays the game with a sense of tension at both the lottery and the re-lottery, so that the interest in the re-lottery can be further improved.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 10)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 10) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 134 to 137. FIG. 134 is a diagram for conceptually explaining the flow of the game in this example, and FIG. 135 is a diagram showing an example of the AT grant probability setting and the right grant lottery for the advantageous right in this example. Is a diagram showing an example of a privilege example at the time of granting an advantageous right in this example, and FIG. 137 is a diagram showing an example of an effect example at the time of granting an advantageous right in this example.

First, an example of the flow of the game in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 134. As already mentioned, it is possible to control various game states, but in this example, it is roughly classified into AT (may be ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified. It is assumed that non-AT during non-AT is provided.

During non-AT, it is basically in a normal gaming state. In the normal game state during non-AT, any of a plurality of AT lottery tables (for example, tables A to C described later) provided in advance at the end of AT, when the setting is changed, or when other setting conditions are satisfied. The AT lottery table is set (grant probability setting). In the AT lottery table, the AT winning probability (granting probability) is defined for each predetermined period (for example, every 40 games). Then, in the normal game state during non-AT, the AT grant lottery (initial period grant lottery) is performed based on the current game period and the AT winning probability specified in the set AT lottery table. When the AT grant lottery is performed, the precursory period is set according to the presence or absence of the winning, and if it is decided to grant the AT after the precursory period elapses, the process shifts to the initial section during AT. Further, in the normal gaming state during non-AT, the right grant lottery is performed when a specific grant condition is satisfied. In the right grant lottery, it is decided whether or not to grant the advantageous right. The details will be described later.

The initial section during AT is composed of, for example, a first initial section in which an expected increase in game value per game is set to about 6 cards and continues for about 45 games, and a second initial section in which about 30 games continue. Will be done. Here, when shifting from the normal gaming state during non-AT to the initial section during AT, if it is not determined to shift to the first section after the end of the initial section (it is determined to shift to the CZ state). If it is), it will be the first initial section, and if it is decided to shift to the first section after the end of the initial section, it will be the second initial section.

In the first initial section, for example, when a rare combination (a combination with a relatively low winning probability) is won, and a predetermined normal combination (for example, a replay combination) is continuously performed a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more. When the AT promotion lottery is won, the AT promotion lottery may be performed, and when the AT promotion lottery is won, the game may be shifted to the second initial section. In this case, the second initial section shifted from the first initial section may continue for about 30 games as described above (that is, the period is shortened when viewed from the first initial section), or the first As in the initial section, about 45 games may be continued.

Further, in the initial section of the AT, for example, the expected value of increase in the game value per game is set to about 6 without providing a distinction such as the first initial section and the second initial section, and about 40 games are uniformly continued. It can also be configured as a playing state. In this case, when shifting from the normal gaming state during non-AT to the initial section during AT, if it is not decided to shift to the first section after the end of the initial section, for example, the above-mentioned AT promotion lottery The same lottery as in the above is performed, and when the lottery is won, the first section may be shifted to after the end of the initial section, and when the lottery is not won, the CZ state may be shifted to the CZ state after the end of the initial section. That is, in the initial section, a transition lottery may be performed to determine which state to transition to after the end. In any case, when the game of the preset game period is performed in the initial section, the initial section ends and the state shifts to the determined post-end state (for example, the first section or the CZ state). (State setting at the end).

After the end of the initial section during AT, if it is determined to shift to the CZ state during non-AT, the transition to the CZ state during non-AT is performed. This CZ state during non-AT is a state in which it is determined whether or not to shift to the first section or the second section during AT after the end of the initial section during AT, although it is during non-AT. A waiting state waiting to shift to these states, a ready state preparing to shift to these states, or (a series of an initial section during AT and a first or second section during AT). It is a gaming state that functions as an extension determination state in which it is determined whether or not to extend (continue) the AT state (as an AT section).

The CZ state during non-AT is configured as a gaming state in which, for example, about 40 games are continued, and although information on the stop operation is not notified, it is determined whether or not to shift to the first section or the second section during AT. NS. In the CZ state during non-AT, for example, when a predetermined normal combination (for example, a replay combination) is won, the first section grant lottery is performed. In the CZ state during non-AT, if the first section grant lottery is won, the process shifts to the first section during AT (CZ success). That is, the AT state is extended. It should be noted that the first section may be shifted from the next game of the game winning the first section grant lottery in the non-AT CZ state, or the specified number of games (for example, in the non-AT CZ state). , About 40 games), the result of the first section grant lottery (or the second section grant lottery described later) is finally notified, and the game may be shifted from the next game.

Further, in the CZ state during non-AT, for example, when the specified number of games are played without winning the first section grant lottery, or when the rare role is won, the second section grant lottery is performed. .. In the CZ state during non-AT, if the second section grant lottery is won, the process shifts to the second section during AT (CZ failure / transition to the second section). That is, the AT state is extended. In addition, in the CZ state during non-AT, when the specified number of games are played without winning either the first section grant lottery or the second section grant lottery, the normal game state during non-AT is entered. Transition (CZ failure / non-transition of the second section).

If it is decided to shift to the first section during AT after the end of the initial section during AT, or if the first section grant lottery is won in the CZ state during non-AT, during AT Move to the first section. In the first section during AT, for example, the expected value of increase in the game value per game is set to about 6, and the first section is configured as a game state in which about 8 games are continued per set. In the first section during AT, the first section continuous lottery is performed. In the first section continuous lottery, for example, when a specific normal combination (for example, a specific replay combination) is won and a specific combination of symbols (for example, a special symbol alignment) is displayed, or a freeze effect is performed. Is determined, and it is determined that the first section is continued when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed during the freeze effect. That is, when the first section continuation lottery is won, it is determined that the first section is continued (extended) until the next set.

In the first section during AT, the first section continuous lottery is continuously won, and for example, when 30 sets of games are played (continuation for a predetermined period), the process shifts to the ED (ending) section during AT. The ED section during AT is configured as a game state (ending state) in which, for example, an expected increase value of the game value per game is set to about 6 cards, and about 40 games are continued. In addition, in the first section during AT, when the game of the set is digested by being non-winning in the first section continuous lottery without shifting to the ED section (non-continuation for a predetermined period), and the ED section during AT. When a specified number of games (for example, about 40 games) are played in the above, the AT state ends and the game shifts to the normal game state during non-AT.

By the way, since the first section during AT is as short as 8 games per set, if the first section continuous lottery during 8 games is not won, the increase section is short if the game immediately shifts to the normal gaming state during non-AT. Players may be dissatisfied with the fact that it is over and there is no chance of a return. Therefore, if the first section continuous lottery is not won in the eight games of the first section during AT, the subsequent predetermined period (for example, 20 games) is shifted to the pullback CZ state (not shown), and this pullback is performed. In the CZ state, the first section continuous lottery may be continuously performed (or the first section grant lottery may be performed). Then, when the pullback CZ state is won in the first section continuous lottery (or the first section grant lottery is won), the pullback CZ state is terminated in the game and the game shifts to the first section during AT. At this time, the same effect (freeze effect, etc.) as when the continuous lottery is won in the first section (or when the grant lottery is won in the CZ state) may be performed to give a sense of unity of the effect. , Different productions may be performed to give a variety of productions. On the other hand, if the predetermined end condition (for example, the end of 20 games) is satisfied without winning the first section continuous lottery (or without winning the first section grant lottery) in the pullback CZ state, the non-AT Shift to the normal game state inside. When the pullback CZ state is provided, the pullback CZ state is an advantageous section and is included in a series of advantageous sections. Therefore, when the pullback CZ state is terminated, the advantageous section ends and is not advantageous. It suffices to shift to the interval and to initialize all AT-related parameters accordingly.

In the pullback CZ state, the first section continuous lottery may be performed under the same conditions as the first section during AT, or the first section continuous lottery may be performed under different conditions. Alternatively, the first section grant lottery may be performed under the same conditions as the CZ state during non-AT, or the first section grant lottery may be performed under different conditions. Further, when the first section during AT ends without winning the first section continuous lottery without providing a dedicated state as the pullback CZ state, the state shifts to the non-AT CZ state shown in FIG. 134 again. It may be made to. In this case, the same data can be used as the AT lottery data for both the continuous CZ and the first hit CZ, which leads to a reduction in the capacity of the main program.

Further, the pullback CZ state can be set to "during non-AT" or "a state in which the occurrence frequency of navigation is suppressed more than during normal AT although it is in AT". This also applies to the CZ state described above. In the latter state, how often the navigation occurs if the net increase per game is suppressed at least compared to during normal AT, such as a decrease in game value, maintenance of the status quo, or a slight increase. It is also possible to set. In this example, since the high net increase of 6 cards per game is set during normal AT, if the high net increase state is set up to the middle of CZ, in order to entertain whether or not to continue in the CZ period due to the ball ejection design. It becomes difficult to secure a sufficient game period. Therefore, in CZ, it is desirable to suppress the frequency of navigation occurrence, reduce the game value, maintain the status quo, or slightly increase it. However, when the pullback CZ state is set to a short period (for example, a pullback final challenge of about 1 to 3 games), a high net increase section equivalent to that during normal AT may be used.

In the CZ state during non-AT, if the second section grant lottery is won, the process shifts to the second section during AT. In the second section during AT, for example, the expected value of increase in game value per game is set to about 6, until the above-mentioned normal limit processing (number of payouts) is activated and the AT state ends (or It is configured as a continuous gaming state (may be until the maximum value of the number of payouts reaches a preset predetermined value of 2400 or less). In this case, at least the initial section during AT, the CZ state during non-AT, and the second section during AT are managed as the above-mentioned series of advantageous sections. In the second section during AT, when the above-mentioned normal limit processing (number of payouts) is activated (or when the maximum value of the number of payouts reaches a preset predetermined value within 2400 sheets), AT The state ends, and the game shifts to the normal gaming state during non-AT.

As described above, in the gaming machine of this example, the player basically starts the game from the normal gaming state during non-AT, wins the initial section grant lottery according to the set grant probability, and is in AT. Aim to move to the initial section. Then, in the initial section during AT or the CZ state during non-AT after that, the AT state is extended by shifting to the first section or the second section during AT. Therefore, in the gaming machine of this example, the high or low probability of granting, which is the degree of expectation of shifting from non-AT (normal gaming state) to AT (initial section), is of great concern to the player.

Next, an example of setting the AT grant probability in this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. First, as shown in "Example of grant probability in table" in FIG. 136, in this example, the grant probabilities are, for example, "3%", "10%", "20%", "33%", and " It is assumed that "50%", "75%", "100%" and "100% + AT" are provided. Here, in the AT lottery table (for example, tables A to C shown in FIG. 135) in this example, it is assumed that any of the above grant probabilities is set every 40 games (predetermined period). do.

In the initial section grant lottery in this example, a lottery may be performed every time a predetermined period elapses to determine whether or not to shift to the initial section according to the grant probability corresponding to the predetermined period. A lottery may be made as to whether or not to shift to the initial section. In the former case, for example, when table A is set, when the number of games since the setting is the 41st game, there is a 3% probability of winning the initial section grant lottery, and a 97% probability of initial. It will not be won in the section grant lottery (grant probability "3%"). In addition, when the number of games since the setting is the 81st game, there is a 20% probability that the initial section grant lottery will be won, and an 80% probability that the initial section grant lottery will not be won (grant probability "20%"). "). Further, for example, when the table B is set, when the number of games since the setting is the 41st game, there is a 20% probability of winning the initial section grant lottery, and an 80% probability of granting the initial section. It will be a non-winning lottery (grant probability "20%"). In addition, when the number of games since the setting is the 81st game, there is a 3% probability that the initial section grant lottery will be won, and a 97% probability that the initial section grant lottery will not be won (grant probability "3%"). ").

On the other hand, in the latter case, for example, when the table A is set, when the number of games since the setting is 41 to 80 games, the total expected value that wins the initial section grant lottery in this period is When it becomes 3% (grant probability "3%") and the number of games since it is set is 81 to 120 games, the total expected value that wins the initial section grant lottery during this period is 20% (grant). Probability "20%"). Further, for example, when the table B is set, when the number of games since the setting is 41 to 80 games, the total expected value of winning the initial section grant lottery during this period is 20% ( When the number of games since the setting is 81 to 120 games, the total expected value of winning the initial section grant lottery is 3% (grant probability "3%"). "). In any case, the above-mentioned grant probabilities (that is, the expected degree of AT grant) are "3%", "10%", "20%", as shown in "Example of in-table grant probability" in FIG. 136. It increases in the order of "33%", "50%", "75%", and "100%". In addition, "100% + AT" indicates that it is determined in advance to shift to the first section without shifting to the CZ state after the end of the initial section. That is, although it is confirmed that the grant probability "100%" will shift to the initial section, the privilege of shifting to the CZ state in principle after the end of the initial section is granted, whereas the grant probability "100% + AT" Is a privilege having a different degree of advantage in that it is confirmed that it will shift to the initial section and the privilege of shifting to the first section after the end of the initial section is given.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136, an example of a lottery for granting the right of advantage and a privilege example at the time of granting the right will be described. As described above, in this example, in the normal gaming state during non-AT, a right grant lottery is performed in which it is determined whether or not to grant the advantageous right. The right-granting lottery is, for example, when a rare role (a role with a relatively low winning probability) is won, and when a predetermined normal role (for example, a replay role) is won a predetermined number of times (for example, three times) or more in a row. In this example, when 40 games (predetermined period) are set as one unit, for example, three units (this number of units) can be used instead of or together with this. Is optional), so that the right-granting lottery is always performed at least once within 120 games (specific period), which is the game period.

In an example of the right-granting lottery shown in FIG. 135, for example, it is determined at each predetermined period whether or not to perform the right-granting lottery in the next predetermined period. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given. First, in the example of the right-granting lottery shown in FIG. 135, it is assumed that the table A is set as the AT lottery table.

When the number of games is 1 to 40 games, the period is managed as the "first zone" because it is the first predetermined period of the specific period. At this time, whether or not to perform the right grant lottery at any time during the "first zone" (for example, at the start or end of the final game, or at the start or end of the first or middle game). Is decided. In this example, in the "first zone", it is determined that the right grant lottery will be performed in the next zone (next predetermined period). Therefore, in the next predetermined period in which the number of games is 41 to 80 games, at an arbitrary time (for example, at the start or end of the middle or final game after the precursory period has elapsed, or at the start of the first game, or At the end, etc.), a lottery for granting rights will be held. In the right-granting lottery, the right to gain an advantage is granted with a predetermined probability, but there are cases where the right is not won, and in this case, the right to gain an advantage is not granted. In addition, when it is decided to perform the right grant lottery, the information indicating the "number of times" of the zone is initialized regardless of whether or not the advantage right is finally granted. Therefore, in this case, the period in which the number of games is 41 to 80 is the first predetermined period of the specific period, and is managed as the "first zone".

In the "zone 1st time" where the number of games is 41 to 80 games, it is not decided to perform the right grant lottery, and in the "zone 2nd time" where the number of games is 81 to 120 games, the right grant lottery may be performed. If it is not decided, it is always decided to perform the right grant lottery in the "third zone" in which the number of games is 121 to 160 games. Therefore, in the next predetermined period in which the number of games is 161 to 200 games, the right grant lottery is performed at an arbitrary time. In this way, in this example, the right grant lottery is always performed at least once within a specific period. It should be noted that the lottery for granting rights can be configured to be performed "with a high probability" instead of "always". Further, in this example, the specific period is configured to be the game period for three units when the predetermined period is one unit, but it may be configured to be the same game period as the predetermined period. However, a specific period (for example, 100 games) may be managed independently of the predetermined period. These period settings can be appropriately modified and set according to the specifications.

Further, in this example, in the target predetermined period, it is determined whether or not the right grant lottery is performed in the next predetermined period, but whether or not the right grant lottery is performed in the target predetermined period. It may be decided whether or not the right grant lottery will be held in the predetermined period after the next time. In addition, for example, when deciding whether or not to perform a right grant lottery based on the winning of a rare role or a normal role, for each of the "zone 1st", "zone 2nd", and "zone 3rd". The winning probabilities may be different. In this case, the winning probability may increase as the zone progresses. Further, in the case of the right grant lottery, the winning probabilities may be different for each of the "zone 1st time", "zone 2nd time", and "zone 3rd time". In this case, the winning probability may increase as the zone progresses. In this way, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player even when the right-granting lottery is not easily performed.

When the right to be advantageous is granted as a result of the right grant lottery, for example, the following benefits are granted. In an example of the privilege at the time of granting the right shown in FIG. 136, when the advantageous right is granted, for example, if the grant probability set in the predetermined period is "20%", the grant is more advantageous than that. It is changed to the probability of "50%". Further, for example, if the grant probability set in the predetermined period is "33%", the grant probability is changed to "75%", which is more advantageous than that. For example, if the grant probability set in a predetermined period is "3%", it is changed to "20%", which is a more advantageous grant probability. That is, when a plurality of stages of grant probabilities are provided, the stage is increased when the advantage right is granted. In this example, when the advantage right is granted, the grant probability is increased by two stages, but the stage of increasing may be one stage or three or more stages. In addition, the stage of raising may be further determined by lottery.

Further, when the grant probability is "100%", it can be increased to "100% + AT" for one stage, but even if a predetermined privilege corresponding to the remaining one stage is granted. good. In this case, for example, predetermined benefits such as extension of the game period of the initial section, extension of the game section of the first section, easy continuation of the first section, and easy transition to the second section are given. can do. Further, when the grant probability is "100% + AT", the stage of the grant probability cannot be increased. Therefore, as in the above, a predetermined privilege corresponding to the two stages may be granted, for example. , The advantage right may be retained (stocked) until the next opportunity for the advantage right to be used.

Further, the mode in which the player is given a privilege by the advantage right is not limited to the above-mentioned mode. For example, when the advantage right is granted, the AT lottery table may be changed to a table that is more advantageous than the current table, so that the grant probability may be changed to a more advantageous one. Alternatively, by shortening the number of ceiling games (for example, the game period until the grant probability "100%" (or "100% + AT") is set), the grant probability can be changed to a more advantageous one. You may do it. That is, any mode can be adopted as long as the grant probability is changed to a more advantageous one as a result. Further, if the granting of the advantage right results in the player's advantage as a result, for example, the right to shift to the AT state is directly granted, the right to extend the AT state is directly granted, and so on. It is also possible to give the privilege of.

Next, with reference to FIG. 137, an example of an effect example at the time of granting the advantageous right in this example will be described. FIG. 137 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the effect displayed on the display device 11, for example.

First, when it is decided to grant the advantageous right as a result of the right grant lottery, an effect is performed to suggest to the player that the advantageous right has been granted (at the time of the right grant decision). In one example of FIG. 137, for example, a display such as "Right GET!" Is displayed to that effect. It should be noted that when the display is made, the advantage right is granted by constantly displaying, for example, a specific icon or the like until an effect suggesting to the player that the advantage right is used is performed. It may be suggested to the player.

In the effect of the first aspect, a specific effect, which is a continuous effect for notifying the lottery result of the initial section grant lottery, is started following the effect at the time of determining the right grant or after several games have elapsed. In the specific production, the precursor production is first started. Then, an effect is performed that suggests to the player that the advantage right is used at a predetermined time during the execution of the specific effect (for example, at the end of the precursory effect). In one example of FIG. 137, for example, a display such as "exercise of rights!" Is displayed to that effect. That is, in the specific effect of the first aspect, it is suggested that the grant probability in the initial section grant lottery this time was changed to an advantageous one during the execution of the specific effect. After that, at the final stage of the specific effect, the lottery result of the initial section grant lottery will be notified. In one example of FIG. 137, for example, by displaying "WIN", it is shown that the lottery result of the initial section grant lottery was the winning (AT was granted). Then, when the specific effect is completed, the game state shifts to the initial section during AT. In addition, when the effect suggesting to the player that the advantage right is used is performed, the subsequent effect mode is more expected for the player than the case where the effect is not performed. It should be.

Further, in the effect of the second aspect, an effect is performed that suggests to the player that the advantage right is used first, following the effect at the time of determining the grant of the right, or after several games have elapsed. In one example of FIG. 137, for example, a display such as "exercise of rights!" Is displayed to that effect. Subsequently, a specific effect, which is a continuous effect for notifying the lottery result of the initial section grant lottery, is started. In the specific production, the precursor production is first started. That is, in the specific effect of the second aspect, it is suggested that the grant probability in the initial section grant lottery this time was changed to an advantageous one before the start of the specific effect. After that, at the final stage of the specific effect, the lottery result of the initial section grant lottery will be notified. In one example of FIG. 137, for example, by displaying "WIN", it is shown that the lottery result of the initial section grant lottery was the winning (AT was granted). Then, when the specific effect is completed, the game state shifts to the initial section during AT. In addition, when the effect suggesting to the player that the advantage right is used is performed, the subsequent effect mode is more expected for the player than the case where the effect is not performed. It should be.

Further, in the production of the third aspect, although the production at the time of determining the right grant is performed, the specific production is performed without suggesting to the player that the advantage right is used thereafter. That is, in the specific effect of the third aspect, it is not suggested that the grant probability in the initial section grant lottery this time has been changed to an advantageous one. In this case as well, the lottery result of the initial section grant lottery will be notified at the final stage of the specific effect. In one example of FIG. 137, for example, by displaying "WIN", it is shown that the lottery result of the initial section grant lottery was the winning (AT was granted). Then, when the specific effect is completed, the game state shifts to the initial section during AT.

In this example, when the right of advantage is granted, for example, any of the effects of the first to third aspects described above can be executed. It should be noted that which of the first to third aspects of the production is to be performed may be randomly determined, or may be determined according to predetermined conditions. For example, if the grant probability after the change is less than "50%", the effect of the first aspect is more likely to be performed than the effect of the other modes, and if the grant probability after the change is "50%" or more, the effect is more likely to be performed. It is also possible to make it possible to estimate the degree of expectation of the grant probability depending on which mode of the effect is performed, such as making it easier for the second aspect of the effect to be performed than the effect of the other mode. Further, for example, if the grant probability is "100% + AT", it is possible to make it easier to perform the production of the third aspect than the production of the other aspects. In this case, if the production of the third aspect is performed, not only the lottery result of the initial section grant lottery is confirmed to be the winning, but also the transition to the first section is confirmed after the end of the initial section. It may be possible to suggest.

Further, as described above, in this example, when the grant probability is "100%" or when the grant right is granted when the grant probability is "100% + AT", a predetermined privilege is further granted. However, in this case, the production of the third aspect may be performed without fail. In this way, when the production of the third aspect is performed, it is possible to suggest that the AT has been granted and that it has been confirmed that the predetermined privilege will be granted.

In addition, it may be configured to give a predetermined privilege on condition that it is decided to perform the effect of the third aspect corresponding to the grant probability or separately from the grant probability. For example, when it is determined that AT is granted when the grant probability is less than "50%" (or conversely, when it is "50%" or more), the production of the third aspect is further performed. When it is decided to perform the above, the predetermined privilege is given, while when it is decided to perform the production of the first aspect and the second aspect, the predetermined privilege is not given. Can be done. In addition, if it is decided that AT will be granted regardless of which grant probability, and if it is decided to perform the production of the third aspect, the predetermined privilege will be given. On the other hand, if it is decided to perform the effects of the first aspect and the second aspect, the predetermined privilege may not be granted. That is, when the production of the third aspect is performed, a predetermined privilege can be given during AT. In this case, the predetermined privilege is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be, for example, a dramatic privilege such as a story effect that is not normally displayed during AT. That is, the predetermined privilege may be any privilege as long as it can at least improve the interest of the player.

Further, as described above, in this example, the normal gaming state during non-AT, the initial section during AT, the CZ state during non-AT, the first section during AT, the second section during AT, and the AT. The game state of the ED section is provided, but more specifically, the normal game state during non-AT includes the normal game state, which is a non-advantageous section that shifts to the end of AT or the setting change, and the non-advantageous state. There is a normal gaming state, which is an advantageous section (directing section) in which a transition lottery is performed with a high probability in a section and the transition is made when the transition lottery is won. In other words, the CZ state during non-AT is an advantageous section (directing section), and the initial section during AT, the first section during AT, the second section during AT, and the ED section during AT are advantageous. It is a section (increasing section). Then, a plurality of gaming states that are advantageous sections are managed as a series of advantageous sections.

Here, at the end of the AT or when the setting is changed, first, when the normal gaming state which is the non-advantageous section is shifted to, and when the normal gaming state which is the non-advantageous section is changed to the normal gaming state which is the advantageous section, any AT is used. The lottery table is set (that is, the grant probability is set). In addition, the number of ceiling games is set for each AT lottery table. For example, although not shown in FIG. 135, in Table A and Table B, the number of ceiling games is set to "800 games" by setting the grant probability in 761 to 800 games to "100%". ing. Further, for example, as shown in FIG. 135, in Table C, the number of ceiling games is set to "160 games" by setting the grant probability in 121 to 160 games to "100%". However, the method for setting the number of ceiling games is not limited to this. When table A and table B are set, the number of ceiling games is directly set to "800 games", and when table C is set, the number of ceiling games is directly set to "160 games". It may be (see, for example, FIG. 124). In any case, the number of ceiling games functions as an upper limit period during which the game continues in the normal game state, and assuming that the midway grant probability is not taken into consideration, the upper limit is set when table A or table B is set. As a result of the longer period, it is relatively disadvantageous to the player, and when the table C is set, the upper limit period is shortened, which is relatively advantageous to the player.

Then, in this example, when the AT lottery table is set so that the state relatively disadvantageous to the player is unlikely to continue, for example, the AT lottery table in which the upper limit period is set short like Table C is set. Is set with a probability of 50%, and an AT lottery table with a long upper limit period such as Table A and Table C is set with a probability of 50% (these probabilities are examples. It can be any probability). That is, a short upper limit period is set with a relatively high probability. As a result, even when the AT state ends, the player can expect to shift to the AT state again in a relatively short period of time, so that the operation of the gaming machine can be improved.

By the way, the AT lottery table is set not only at the end of AT but also at the time of changing the setting (more specifically, when the normal gaming state which is a non-advantageous section is changed to the normal gaming state which is an advantageous section. , It may be set immediately at the end of AT and at the time of setting change without providing these distinctions). At the end of AT, it is basically an opportunity to arrive according to the game operation of the player, but when the setting is changed, it is basically an opportunity to arrive according to the setting change operation of the clerk of the game store. Therefore, whether or not the AT lottery table with a short upper limit period is set at the end of AT is of great concern to the player, and whether or not the AT lottery table with a short upper limit period is set when the setting is changed. Whether or not it is a big concern on the part of the amusement shop.

Here, in this example, when the AT lottery table is set and the AT lottery table for which the upper limit period is set is set, it is possible to suggest that fact by executing the specific notification. Specifically, when the AT lottery table is set and the AT lottery table with a short upper limit period is set, for example, the above-mentioned state indicator or the above-mentioned stop state notification unit 117 is used for a predetermined period ( For example, a specific notification can be executed by setting a specific display mode (for example, blinking) for about 5 seconds. The notification means used is an example, and an information display 6, an LED 82, a back lamp (not shown), a display device 11, a sub display device 18, a speaker group 84, and the like can also be used.

When the AT lottery table with a short upper limit period is set when the AT ends, if the execution of the specific notification suggests to the player, the player's expectation is maintained and the game is played. It has the advantage of improving motivation. On the other hand, if the specific notification is not executed, it is also suggested that the AT lottery table with a long upper limit period is set. In this case, the player loses the motivation to play and immediately starts playing the game. As a result of quitting, there is a demerit that the operation of the gaming machine may decrease. However, in this example, since the grant probability varies in various ways due to the specifications, it is possible to maintain the player's willingness to play even in this way. Therefore, whether or not to execute the specific notification when the AT lottery table in which the upper limit period is set to be short is set when the AT ends is set may be appropriately set by weighing these. Further, for example, when a player stops playing a game at the end of AT, what kind of advantage the gaming machine has after that is valuable information on the game store side, so that at the end of AT. The target person of the specific notification to be executed may include not only the player but also the clerk of the game store.

In addition, when the AT lottery table is set with the setting change as an opportunity, if the AT lottery table with the short upper limit period is set, the specific notification is executed and the AT lottery table with the long upper limit period is set. If the specific notification is not executed when is set, the game store can grasp the degree of advantage of the game machine whose setting has been changed, so that there is an advantage that sales and operations can be appropriately managed. On the other hand, changing the settings may give the player an excessive advantage and suffer unexpected disadvantages, and as a result, hesitating to change the settings, it is not possible to carry out sales and operations with sharpness due to the setting changes. There is also the disadvantage that there is a risk. In addition, this may be solved by the clerk of the amusement store performing the setting change operation a plurality of times. Therefore, whether or not to execute the specific notification when the AT lottery table in which the upper limit period is set to be set as a trigger of the setting change is set may be appropriately set by weighing these. Also, if the player has an opportunity to witness the setting change, for example, to change the setting to eliminate the error, what kind of advantage the gaming machine has after that is also valuable on the player side. Since it is information, the target person of the specific notification executed when the setting is changed can include not only the clerk of the game store but also the player. Further, from such a viewpoint, the period during which the specific notification is continued may be set to a period of at least about 30 minutes after the opening of the game store, and valuable information may be provided to the player side.

The mode in which the specific notification is executed (or not executed) can be adopted in an appropriate combination, but in this example, for example, as the first mode, both at the end of AT and at the time of setting change, the specific notification is executed (or not executed). When an AT lottery table with a short upper limit period is set, a mode in which specific notification is executed can be adopted. Further, for example, as a second aspect, at the end of AT, no specific notification is executed regardless of which AT lottery table is set, and when the setting is changed, the AT lottery table in which the upper limit period is set short is displayed. When it is set, it is possible to adopt a mode in which the specific notification is executed. In either aspect, it is possible to provide the target person with valuable information regarding the granting of benefits.

As described above, according to the gaming machine of this example, when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, an advantageous state (for example, between 40 games) in a predetermined period (for example, 40 games) of the normal state (for example, a normal gaming state during non-AT) (for example). For example, the granting probability of the AT state) is set, and whether or not to grant the advantageous state is determined according to the set granting probability. Here, when a specific right (for example, an advantageous right) is granted, it is possible to change the grant probability to a more advantageous one. That is, for example, even if a grant probability that is relatively unfavorable to the player is set, the grant probability may be advantageous if a specific right is granted. There is. Therefore, regardless of the set state, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits and improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that the grant probability is set each time a game is played for a predetermined period in the normal state, and when a specific right is granted, the grant probability may be set so as to increase stepwise. can. As a result, the player's expectation may further change depending on the situation in which the specific right is granted, so that the player's interest can be further improved.

Further, in the specific period of the normal state (for example, between 120 games), the determination of whether or not the specific right is granted can be made at least once. As a result, it is possible to give a player who cannot play for a long time a sense of expectation of granting a specific right, so that the player's interest can be further improved while making the gambling property appropriate.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, when a specific effect for notifying whether or not it is decided to grant an advantageous state is executed, it is suggested that the specific right is granted before the start of the specific effect. In some cases, it is suggested that a specific right has been granted during the execution of a specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the production in relation to the granting of specific rights.

In addition, when a specific effect for notifying whether or not it is decided to grant an advantageous state is executed, it may not be suggested that a specific right has been granted, and in this case, a predetermined privilege is granted. Can be configured to As a result, the degree of advantage of the player changes depending not only on whether or not the specific right has been granted, but also on the content of the effect to be executed, so that the player's interest can be further improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, an upper limit period (for example, the number of ceiling games) in which the game continues in the normal state is set according to the set value, and the upper limit in which the game period is set is set. When the period is reached, an advantageous state is given. Then, when the set upper limit period is within the specific period (for example, 160 games), it is possible to execute the specific notification that can suggest that fact. Therefore, it is possible to provide valuable information regarding the granting of benefits.

The upper limit period is set even when the advantageous state ends, but in this case, it can be configured so that the specific notification cannot be executed. This makes it possible to more appropriately provide valuable information regarding the granting of benefits.

As described above, with reference to FIGS. 92 to 124, another example (No. 1 to No. 6) of game playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment will be described, and FIGS. 125 to 137 will be described. The other examples (No. 7 to No. 10) of the playability (game specification) that can be implemented in the pachislot 1 according to the present embodiment have been described with reference to the above. The points that have been mainly described and that have been omitted or briefly explained can be applied by appropriately supplementing the configurations described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified examples. .. It is also possible to combine a part or all of the configurations described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, and the modified example to form the present invention.

[Setting suggestion effect that can be executed in this embodiment]
Next, in addition to the above-described effects, an example of a setting suggestion effect that can be executed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 157. In the present embodiment, for example, it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect in a situation such as when the limiter is activated, but in this example, the setting suggestion effect is further executed during a specific gaming state. The idea is to make it possible and improve the interest of the game.

Here, in this example, as an example of a suggestion effect that is a suggestion notification that suggests the degree of advantage of the player, a setting suggestion effect that suggests a set value (for example, settings 1 to 6) set in the pachislot machine 1 is specified. Although the execution is described according to the execution conditions, the notification content is not limited to the suggestion of the set value. For example, the mode or state (content of the section) in the advantageous section may be suggested, or the current RT state may be suggested. Further, the number of ceiling games, the number of periodic games, the number of points, or the status of granting rights may be suggested. That is, when it is possible to create a situation in which the player's degree of advantage is different in a certain state, the suggestion notification (suggestion effect) that can suggest the current degree of advantage is all applied in this example. It shall be possible.

In this example, since the setting suggestion effect is described as an example of the suggestion effect, the pachislot machine 1 having no AT function (Pachislot 1 without AT function) can easily explain the situation in which the high or low setting value tends to affect the player's degree of advantage. The specifications of the so-called normal A type) will be newly illustrated, and the execution of the setting suggestion effect under the specifications will be described below. However, the specification is only an example, and the setting suggestion effect may be executed in the pachi-slot machine 1 having the AT function.

(Specifications of the gaming machine in this example)
First, the outline of the specifications of the gaming machine of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 138 to 152. FIG. 138 shows an example of the symbol arrangement table and the symbol code table in this example, FIGS. 139 to 142 show an example of the symbol combination table in this example, and FIGS. 143 to 148 show the internal lottery table in this example. An example is shown, and FIGS. 149 to 152 show an example of the internal winning combination configuration in this example.

In this example, each symbol shown in the symbol code table of FIG. 138 is arranged on each reel 3L (left reel), 3C (middle reel), and 3R (right reel) as shown in the symbol arrangement table of FIG. 138. Since the symbol arrangement table and the symbol code table itself have already been described in the description of FIG. 15, the description here will be omitted.

Here, in this example, for example, in the one-card bet state, the above-mentioned center line is defined as an effective line, and in the two-sheet bet state, the above-mentioned cross-up line is defined as an effective line, and the three-sheet bet state. At this time, the above-mentioned center line, top line, bottom line, cross-up line, and cross-down line are defined as effective lines. That is, in the 1-card bet state and the 2-bet state, the effective line is 1 line (however, the line itself is different), and in the 3-card bet state, the effective line is 5 lines. However, these can be changed as appropriate.

Further, in this example, the combination of symbols shown in FIGS. 139 to 142 is defined as a predetermined combination of symbols. Since the symbol combination table itself has already been described in the explanations of FIGS. 19 to 22, the description here will be omitted.

When any combination of symbols "BB01" to "BB03" is displayed on the valid line, the game value is not added, but the game shifts to the BB game state (BB state). The BB state is a game state that is advantageous to the player in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the addition of the game value is increased (see “in BB” in FIG. 148), and more than 285 games are played during the BB state. It ends when value is added. In addition, in the BB state, the game can be played only in the three-card bet state. That is, the number of games that can be started in the BB state is three. Further, the combination of the symbols of "BB01" to "BB03" is a combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination ("F_Red Seven BB", "F_Don BB"). The BB state can be configured as the above-mentioned "special bonus state", as an MB state, or as a pseudo bonus state.

When any combination of symbols "RB01" and "RB02" is displayed on the valid line, the game value is not added, but the game shifts to the RB game state (RB state). The RB state is a game state that is advantageous to the player in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination related to the addition of the game value is increased (see “in RB” in FIG. 148), and eight prizes are won during the RB state. It ends when it occurs or when 12 games are played. Further, in the RB state, the game can be played only in the two-card bet state. That is, the number of games that can be started in the RB state is two. Further, the combination of the symbols of "RB01" and "RB02" is a combination of symbols related to the bonus combination ("F_RB"). The RB state can be configured as a BB state, in this case, as the above-mentioned "special bonus state", as an MB state, or as a pseudo bonus state. You can also do it.

That is, the BB state and the RB state can be configured by any mode as long as the RB state is configured so that the amount of game value that can be imparted is smaller than that of the BB state. Moreover, as long as such a relationship is maintained, the termination condition can be changed as appropriate.

When it is neither in the BB state nor in the RB state, it is a general game. The general game is divided into a non-RT state in which RT1 is not operating and an RT1 state in which RT1 is operating. In this example, RT1 is configured to operate with the end of the BB state and end when 22 games are played in the RT1 state. Further, even before the 22 games are played in the RT1 state, the game ends when the internal winning combination including the bonus combination is determined. The non-RT state is divided into between non-flags in which the bonus combination is not carried over and between flags in which the bonus combination is carried over (more specifically, between flags that differ depending on the type of bonus combination carried over). NS. During the general game, the game can be played in the one-card bet state and the three-card bet state. That is, the number of cards that can be started during a general game is 1 and 3.

In this example, RT is one type of RT1 and is configured to be continuous from the end of the BB state to the play of 22 games, but the mode of RT is not limited to this. For example, the RT itself may not be provided, or a plurality of RTs may be provided. In addition, as an opportunity to activate the RT, it is possible to appropriately adopt an opportunity such as winning a bonus combination, winning a bonus combination, displaying a predetermined combination of symbols between non-flags, and so on. As the trigger for ending, it is possible to appropriately adopt a trigger such as the end of the bonus state, the winning of the bonus combination, and the display of a predetermined combination of symbols between the non-flags. The RT configuration described in other than this example can also be appropriately adopted.

When any combination of symbols "REP01" to "REP29" is displayed on the valid line, the game value is not given, but the re-game is given. That is, the combination of the symbols of "REP01" to "REP29" is a combination of the symbols related to the replay combination.

When a combination of any of the symbols "FRU01" to "FRU171" is displayed on the valid line, the number of games shown in "Payout, etc." of FIGS. 139 to 142 is determined according to the number of inserted sheets (bet state). Value is given. That is, the combination of the symbols of "FRU01" to "FRU171" is the combination of the symbols related to the small combination (game value adding combination).

Further, in this example, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 148, in each game state (including the bet state), each internal winning combination is drawn with a winning probability based on a lottery value according to a set value. Since the internal lottery table itself has already been described in the explanations of FIGS. 16 to 18, the explanation here is omitted, but in this example as well, the probability denominator is "65536", and the "lottery value / "65536" is the winning probability of each internal winning combination. Further, in FIGS. 143 to 148, the details of the symbol combinations (symbol combinations in which derivation display is permitted) corresponding to each internal winning combination are omitted, and the details are described in FIGS. 149 to 152. ..

Further, in FIGS. 143 to 148, for convenience of explanation, among the set values (settings 1 to 6), "1" (setting 1), "2" (setting 2), "5" (setting 5), And only the lottery value of "6" (setting 6) is shown. However, as shown in FIGS. 143 to 148, the set value can be set in four stages of setting 1, 2, 5, and 6, or can be set in fewer stages. Basically, the lottery value is defined so that the setting 1 has the lowest degree of advantage of the player and the setting value becomes higher, so that the winning probability of any of the internal winning combinations increases in at least one of the gaming states. As a result, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of advantage of the player. Therefore, setting 6 gives the player the highest degree of advantage.

Further, in this example, each internal winning combination is configured as shown in FIGS. 149 to 152. When the "○" shown in each column of FIGS. 149 to 152 wins the internal winning combination of "F_△△" shown in the upper column, the derivation display of the symbol combination shown in the left column is permitted. Means.

For example, when "F_Red Seven BB" is won, it is allowed that the symbol combination of "BB01" is displayed. In addition, "F_Red Seven BB", "F_Don BB", and "F_RB" are bonus combinations, and once won, they are configured as carry-over combinations that are carried over until the corresponding symbol combination is displayed. In addition, these bonus roles may overlap with the replay role or the small role (simultaneous winning). For example, "F_Red Seven BB" may be duplicated with "F_Rip A" (in the internal lottery table, "F_Red Seven BB + F_Rip A" means that). , "BB01" and "REP01" to "REP20" symbol combinations are allowed to be displayed. Further, for example, "F_Red Seven BB" may be duplicated with "F_Special Role A" (in the internal lottery table, "F_Red Seven BB + F_Special Role A" means that). In this case, it is permissible to display the symbol combination of "BB01" and "FRU100".

In this example, as in the present embodiment, for example, when the bonus combination and the replay combination are duplicated, the stop control is set so that the symbol combination related to the replay combination is displayed preferentially over the symbol combination related to the bonus combination. Will be done. In addition, as a general rule, the combination of symbols related to the replay combination does not cause any omissions (since the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4 frames (for 4 symbols), the symbols are arranged so that omissions occur with a single symbol combination. In some cases, if the other combinations of symbols that are allowed to be duplicated are combined, no omissions will occur as a result). Therefore, as in the above example, when "F_Red Seven BB + F_Rip A" is won, "BB01" is not displayed on any effective line in the winning game (the allowed state is carried over). Re), any combination of symbols from "REP01" to "REP20" is displayed on any effective line, and a re-game is given.

If there is no difference in profit in that the same replay profit is given regardless of which of "REP01" to "REP20" is displayed, as in "F_Rip A", there is no difference between the symbol combinations. Although it is possible not to set the priority of the stop control, it is also possible to set the priority of the stop control between the symbol combinations in order to improve the game playability. For example, "REP01" to "REP08" are symbol combinations that make it possible to recognize that the replay role has won a prize at first glance, while "REP09" to "REP20" have a small role of "cherry" that wins a prize at first glance. It is a combination of symbols that is recognized as if it were done. Taking advantage of this, when "F_Rip A" is won in a game in which the bonus combination is not duplicated, "REP01" to "REP08" are displayed with priority over "REP09" to "REP20". When the stop control is performed so that the bonus combination is won in duplicate and the "F_Rip A" is won, "REP09" to "REP20" are better than "REP01" to "REP08". Stop control may be performed so that it is displayed preferentially. As a result, the player who normally performs the stop operation aiming at the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 3L does not add the game value even though the "cherry" symbol is stopped on the left reel 3L, and is renewed. When the game is granted, it can be detected that the bonus role is also won. In this way, "REP09" to "REP20" may be made to function as so-called "reach eyes" to enhance the playability.

Further, in this example, as in the present embodiment, for example, when a bonus combination and a small combination are won in duplicate, the symbol combination related to the small combination is stopped so as to be displayed preferentially over the symbol combination related to the bonus combination. Control is done. Here, as for the symbol combination related to the small combination, the symbol combination in which the omission occurs and the symbol combination in which the omission does not occur (since the maximum number of sliding pieces is 4 frames (4 symbols), the omission occurs in a single symbol combination. There are cases where the symbols are arranged in the same way, but there is also a symbol combination (including the fact that no omissions occur as a result when the other allowed symbol combinations are combined). For example, it relates to "F_special role A". The symbol combination of "FRU100" is the former. Therefore, as in the above example, when the "F_Red Seven BB + F_Special Combination A" is won, in the winning game (especially for the left reel 3L and the middle reel 3C), the "F_Special Combination A" is related to "F_Special Combination A". When the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol combination of "FRU100" can be displayed, "BB01" is not displayed on any of the effective lines (the allowed state is carried over), and "FRU100" is displayed. Is displayed on any of the effective lines, and one game value is given.

On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed at the timing when the symbol combination of "FRU100" related to "F_special combination A" can be displayed, the symbol combination of "BB01" related to "F_Red Seven BB" can be displayed at the timing when it can be displayed. When the stop operation is performed, "BB01" may be displayed on any of the effective lines. Further, when the stop operation is not performed at the timing when the symbol combination of "FRU100" related to "F_special combination A" can be displayed, that is the symbol combination of "BB01" related to "F_Red Seven BB". If it is not the timing at which is possible to display, a missing symbol will occur and the symbol combination that will be lost will be displayed. In this case, the stop control may be performed so that the symbol combination that causes the loss becomes a so-called "reach eye".

In addition, when "F_Red Seven BB" and the latter winning combination related to the symbol combination (for example, "F_lantern A") are duplicated, "BB01" is selected in the winning game as in the replay role. It is not displayed on the effective line (the allowed state is carried over), any combination of symbols from "FRU02" to "FRU04" is displayed on which effective line, and the game value of 8 cards is displayed. Granted.

It should be noted that some small wins have different game value amounts (number of payouts) depending on which of the symbol combinations allowed at the same time is displayed. Such small wins In, as a general rule, stop control is performed so that symbol combinations with a large number of payouts are preferentially displayed. However, when the stop operation is performed according to a predetermined procedure (pushing order or stop operation timing), the number of allowed symbol combinations (also referred to as the number of conditional devices) is larger than the number of symbol combinations with a large number of payouts. It is also possible to perform stop control so that the symbol combinations with a small number of payouts are preferentially displayed because of the large number of symbols.

Here, attention is paid to the "F_composite JAC combination" and the "F_single JAC combination" that can be determined as the internal winning combination in the BB state. In the case of winning the "F_composite JAC combination", a predetermined procedure is not defined, and a combination of symbols with a large number of payouts (12 cards) regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation (for example, "" Stop control is performed so that "FRU123" to "FRU170") are displayed on one of the effective lines.

On the other hand, in the case of winning the "F_single JAC role", a predetermined procedure is defined. Specifically, first, the stop operation is performed in the push order of "right, middle, left" (so-called "reverse push"), and then, in the left reel 3L (third stop), the symbol position "9" is in the middle stage. It is defined that the stop operation is performed at a certain timing. When the stop operation is performed in such a procedure, first, the right reel 3R (first stop) and the middle reel 3C (second stop) are stopped so that the "lantern" symbol is located in the middle stage. Then, in the left reel 3L (third stop), when the timing of the stop operation is performed at the same timing as the above, in the left reel 3L (third stop), the "Don 2" symbol is located in the upper and lower stages. At the same time, it stops so that the "Don 1" symbol is located in the middle row. At this time, the symbol combination of "FRU106" is stopped on the center line, and any of the symbol combinations of "FRU107" to "FRU122" is stopped on the top line and the bottom line, respectively. Since the number of payouts for "FRU106" and "FRU107" to "FRU122" is set to 3, the number of payouts in the game is 3 for the center line + 3 for the top line + 3 for the bottom line. = 9 sheets. That is, when the stop operation is performed according to a predetermined procedure, a symbol combination with a smaller number of payouts (than 12 cards) (9 cards) is displayed. However, even if you win the "F_Independent JAC role", if the stop operation is not performed according to the predetermined procedure, as a general rule, the number of payouts will be the same regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation. Stop control is performed so that a large number of symbol combinations (for example, "FRU123" to "FRU170") are displayed on one of the effective lines.

As described above, in this example, the BB state is configured to end with the addition of more than 285 game values. Therefore, in the BB state, if 12 cards are won in all the games, the BB state ends in 24 games (12 cards x 24 times = 288 cards), and the net increase number is 216 cards (288 cards-3 cards). In the BB state, if 9 cards are won in one game and 12 cards are won in all the remaining games, the BB state ends in 25 games (× 24 times). 12 sheets x 23 times = 276 sheets. 276 sheets + 9 sheets x 1 time = 285 sheets. 285 sheets + 12 sheets x 1 time = 297 sheets), and the net increase number is 222 sheets (297 sheets-3 sheets x 25 times). The player can obtain the game value as much as 6 cards. In this example, such technical intervention is imparted during the BB state to enhance the playability. It should be noted that the predetermined procedure, the number of times it is necessary to perform the stop operation in the procedure, the amount of game value added that causes a difference, and the like are not limited to those described above, and can be changed as appropriate.

In addition, attention is paid to "F_RBJAC combination A" and "F_RBJAC combination B" that can be determined as internal winning combinations in the RB state. When winning "F_RBJAC role A", a predetermined procedure is not defined, and a combination of symbols (for example, "FRU01") with a large number of payouts (15 cards) regardless of the push order or the timing of the stop operation. "-" FRU08 ") is displayed on one of the effective lines, so that the stop control is performed.

Further, even when the "F_RBJAC role B" is won, basically a predetermined procedure is not defined. Therefore, when the timing of the stop operation is appropriate (specifically, within the range of the maximum number of sliding pieces (4 symbols), on the effective line, on the left reel 3L, the "replay 1" symbol When it is possible to stop the "Red 7" symbol on the middle reel 3C, and when it is possible to stop the "Replay 2" symbol on the right reel 3R), "FRU171" The symbol combination of "" is displayed, and one game value is given (hereinafter, the case where the stop operation is at the above-mentioned appropriate timing may be described as a "winning procedure"). At this time, the "red 7" symbol is displayed in the middle of the left reel 3L, the "red 7" symbol is displayed in the middle of the middle reel 3C, and the "BAR" symbol is displayed in the middle of the right reel 3R. May be done. On the other hand, if the timing of the stop operation is not the above-mentioned appropriate timing, the game value will not be given due to omission (hereinafter, the case where the stop operation is not the above-mentioned appropriate timing may be described as a "non-winning procedure". ).

As described above, in this example, the RB state is configured to end when eight winnings or 12 games are played. Therefore, in the RB state, the net increase is the largest when the winning of 15 cards is generated 8 times and ended (15 cards x 8 times-2 cards x 8 times = 104 cards). However, this is an assumption when "F_RBJAC role B" has never won, and when "F_RBJAC role B" is won, it is given during the RB state depending on whether or not one prize is generated. The amount of game value to be played is fluctuating.

For example, if "F_RBJAC role B" is won once and "F_RBJAC role A" is won in all the remaining games, one prize is generated for "F_RBJAC role B" in the winning procedure. The net increase is 90 sheets (1 sheet x 1 time + 15 sheets x 7 times-2 sheets x 8 times), while one prize is generated for "F_RBJAC role B" by the non-winning procedure. If this is not done, the game can be played up to 12 times in the RB state, so the net increase is 102 (15 x 8-2 x 9). That is, when the "F_RBJAC role B" is won during the RB state, it is basically advantageous for the player not to generate one prize (perform the stop operation of "Hazushi" so as to cause a loss). Become.

However, in this example, since the RB state is configured to end when 8 winnings are generated or 12 games are played, the non-winning procedure when the "F_RBJAC role B" is won. It is advantageous for the player to perform the stop operation in the game until the player wins the "F_RBJAC role B" four times (that is, the difference between the 12 games and the 8 prizes), and after that. When winning the "F_RBJAC role B", it is more advantageous for the player to perform the stop operation in the winning procedure without performing the stop operation in the non-winning procedure (one piece will be given if the player wins the prize, but the prize will be won. If it is not done, the game value will not be given, and the number of games in the RB state will be reduced only once).

Therefore, in this example, during the RB state, when the "F_RBJAC role B" is won, the stop operation is basically performed in the non-winning procedure to avoid one winning, and the "F_RBJAC role A" is won eight times. It has a game property that it is advantageous for the player to play the game so as to generate 15 prizes 8 times and end the RB state. In addition, if "F_RBJAC role B" is won 5 times or more during the RB state, the stop operation is not performed in the non-winning procedure after that, and the stop operation is performed in the winning procedure to generate one prize. It has a playability that it is more advantageous for the player to make it.

Although it is "F_RBJAC combination B", a special procedure is further defined when the stop operation is performed in the non-winning procedure. This is because the stop operation is first performed at the timing when the symbol position "15" is in the middle stage on the left reel 3L, and then the maximum number of sliding pieces (for 4 symbols) on the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R. In the range, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "BAR" symbol can be stopped on the effective line. If you win the "F_RBJAC role B" and the stop operation is performed by such a special procedure, the "BAR" symbol will stop at the upper and lower rows on the left reel 3L (it will stop at 0 slip pieces). , In the middle reel 3C, the "BAR" symbol stops in the middle stage, and in the right reel 3R, the "BAR" symbol stops in the upper stage. That is, the "BAR" symbols are displayed in the cross-up line ("BAR alignment").

That is, in this example, when the "F_RBJAC role B" is won, one prize is generated if (1) the stop operation is performed in the winning procedure, and (2) a non-winning procedure and a special procedure. If the stop operation is performed in, no prize will be generated and "BAR alignment" will be displayed. (3) Although it is a non-winning procedure, if the stop operation is not performed by a special procedure, a prize will be generated. However, stop control is performed such that "BAR alignment" is not displayed.

Here, focusing on the left reel 3L, when the stop operation is performed by a special procedure (that is, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol position "15" is in the middle stage), the symbol position "15" is used as it is. Is stopped at the position where the symbol is in the middle row, but if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbol position "16" is in the middle row, which is one symbol later than that, the symbol slips 4 frames and the symbol position "20" "Is supposed to stop at the middle position. Then, when the symbol position "20" is stopped at a position in the middle row, the "Replay 1" symbol is stopped on the effective line in the lower row. That is, in the left reel 3L, the timing of the stop operation, which is one symbol later than the special procedure, is configured to be included in the winning procedure.

Then, in this example, for example, in the pachi-slot machine 1 having such specifications, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the cases of (1) and (2) above, and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the case of (3) above. It is configured not to. Specific examples of the setting suggestion effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 153 to 157.

In this example, it has been described that when the "F_RBJAC combination B" is won, the stop control according to any one of (1) to (3) above may be performed according to the stop operation of the player. , The configuration of "F_RBJAC role B" is not limited to this. For example, in this example, "F_RBJAC combination B" is configured as an internal winning combination that allows only the display of the symbol combination of "FRU171", but the display of a plurality of other symbol combinations is also permitted. It can also be configured as an internal winning combination. At this time, for example, the other plurality of symbol combinations are configured as symbol combinations in which one prize is generated.

Then, when the "F_RBJAC combination B" is configured in this way and the "F_RBJAC combination B" is won, (1) the stop operation is performed by the above-mentioned winning procedure (referred to as the "first winning procedure" in this section). If it is done, the symbol combination of "FRU171" is displayed and one prize is generated. (2) The above-mentioned non-winning procedure is limited to the above-mentioned special procedure, and the stop operation is performed by the special procedure. In that case, no winning is generated and "BAR alignment" is displayed. (3) The above-mentioned non-winning procedure other than the above-mentioned special procedure is set as the second winning procedure, and the stop operation is performed in the second winning procedure. In that case, the stop control may be performed such that any of the other plurality of symbol combinations described above is displayed (regardless of the timing of the stop operation) and one prize is generated.

That is, it is possible to avoid winning one prize only when the stop operation of "F_RBJAC combination B" is performed by a special procedure, and avoid winning one prize when the stop operation is performed by a procedure other than the special procedure. If the stop operation is performed by a procedure other than the special procedure and the stop operation is performed by the first winning procedure, "Red 7-Red 7-BAR" is displayed in the middle row. It is also possible to configure so that one prize is generated without stopping such a mode when the stop operation is performed in the second winning procedure while the mode is stopped and one prize is generated. can. Further, even in the case of such a configuration, as described above, the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the cases of (1) and (2) above, and the setting suggestion effect can be executed in the case of (3) above. It should be configured not to.

Further, in this example, the winning probability of "F_RBJAC role B" is set to about "1/8" (see FIG. 148), but this is an example. For example, the winning probability is set to be higher or lower than this. It can be changed as appropriate, such as probability. In addition, the number of payouts when "F_RBJAC role B" wins and a prize is generated is set to one, but this is an example. It can be changed as appropriate, such as setting the number of payouts to an arbitrary number of sheets or less. Even if the number of payouts when a prize is generated is set to at least the number of payouts exceeding the number of inserts (2), and even if a prize is generated when "F_RBJAC role B" is won, it will not be immediately disadvantageous to the player. good. Further, the number of payouts when the "F_RBJAC combination B" wins and a prize is generated may be the same as the number of payments when the "F_RBJAC combination A" wins and a prize is generated. In this way, a player who does not place importance on the setting suggestion effect may be able to proceed with the game without pressing the eyes.

(Determination of setting suggestion effect of this example)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 153, the effect lottery table for determining the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect in the BB state and the RB state in this example will be described. The upper part of FIG. 153 shows an example of the BB medium effect lottery table referred to in the BB state, and the lower part of FIG. 153 shows an example of the RB medium effect lottery table referred to in the RB state. In this example, the determination of the setting suggestion effect is controlled on the sub side, but it may be controlled on the main side.

First, in this example, five types of effect modes 1 to 5 are provided. The production mode 1 is, for example, a production in which a small white firework (small fireworks) is launched and launched, and the production mode 2 is, for example, a white medium fireworks (medium fireworks) is launched. The effect mode 3 is an effect in which a large white firework (large fireworks) is launched and launched, and the effect mode 4 is, for example, a golden color. It is an effect in which a state in which a medium-sized firework is launched and launched is displayed, and an effect mode 5 is an effect in which, for example, a state in which a large golden firework is launched and launched is displayed. It should be noted that these production modes are merely examples.

Then, in the setting suggestion effect of this example, the appearance frequency is set so that the set value can be estimated according to the appearance frequency of these effect modes. The mode that enables the suggestion of the set value is not limited to this. For example, the setting suggestion effect may be performed by determining whether or not the set value itself (or the character corresponding thereto) is directly or indirectly displayed. In addition, other modes that allow at least the player to guess the set value can be appropriately adopted.

The production lottery table during BB will be described. As shown in FIG. 153, the lottery value is assigned to the BB medium effect lottery table so that any of the effect modes 1 to 5 is determined according to the set value. The appearance frequency (determination probability) of the effect modes 1 to 5 is "lottery value / 32768", and the higher the lottery value value, the higher the appearance frequency.

During the BB state, the effect lottery table during BB shown in FIG. 153 is referred to, and the effect mode is uniformly determined without changing the appearance frequency. Although it is an execution condition of the setting suggestion effect in the BB state, in the BB state, a lottery for the effect of each game can be performed, and the effect according to the determined effect mode can be performed, or the BB state is started. At that time, or when the BB state is terminated, a production lottery is performed so that the production according to the determined production mode can be performed, or a specific combination (for example, “F_” with a relatively low winning probability can be performed. "Composite JAC combination". In this case, the production lottery is performed when the "F_composite JAC combination" wins with the same winning probability as the "F_RBJAC combination B"), and it depends on the determined production mode. It is also possible to have the production performed.

In the BB state, if the appearance frequency of the effect mode 1 is high, it can be inferred that the set value may be an odd number. Further, if the appearance frequency of the effect mode 2 is high, it can be inferred that the set value may be an even number. Further, if the appearance frequency of the effect modes 3 to 5 is high, it can be inferred that the set value may be relatively high. Further, when the effect mode 4 appears, it can be inferred that the set value is not "1". However, the appearance frequency of the effect mode 3 is not so different between the set values, and the appearance frequency of the effect mode 4 and the effect mode 5 is kept low even if the setting value is high. Therefore, as compared with the RB state, the reliability of the notification content of the setting suggestion effect (that is, the probability that the effect corresponding to the set value appears. Note that "according to the set value" means, for example, a specific set value. In, the probability of determining a specific effect is set to be relatively high (or low), or the specific effect is set to be performed (or not performed) only at a specific set value. (Meaning a mode in which association with a set value is possible) is not necessarily high.

The production lottery table during RB will be described. As shown in FIG. 153, the lottery value is assigned to the effect lottery table during RB so that one of the effect modes 1 to 5 is determined according to the number of winnings of one piece and the set value. ing. The appearance frequency (determination probability) of the effect modes 1 to 5 is the lottery value / 32768, and the higher the lottery value value, the higher the appearance frequency. In addition, the number of times of winning one piece combination indicates the number of times "F_RBJAC combination B" won in the RB state.

During the RB state, the effect lottery table during RB shown in FIG. 153 is referred to, and the effect mode is determined while the appearance frequency changes according to the number of winnings of one piece. As described above, the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect in the RB state is that the above (1) and (2) are satisfied when the "F_RBJAC combination B" is won in the RB state. The execution condition of the setting suggestion effect in the RB state may be set only when the above (1) is satisfied, or may be set only when the above (2) is satisfied. Alternatively, it can be assumed that no prize was simply generated when the "F_RBJAC role B" was won. Further, in the RB state, it can be set when the number of winnings of one card is 0 (that is, when the RB state is finished without winning the "F_RBJAC winning combination B"). In this case, the setting suggestion effect may be executed when the RB state ends. Further, the reliability of the setting suggestion effect in this case can be set to the highest level, or can be the same as in the case where the number of winnings of one card is 5 or more, and the number of winnings of at least one card is 1 to 1. It can be higher than the case of 2 times.

In the RB state, if the appearance frequency of the effect mode 1 is high, it can be inferred that the set value may be an odd number. Further, if the appearance frequency of the effect mode 2 is high, it can be inferred that the set value may be an even number. Further, if the appearance frequency of the effect mode 4 and the effect mode 5 is high, it can be inferred that the set value may be relatively high. Further, when the effect mode 4 appears, it can be inferred that the set value is not "1". These are similar to the BB state. The effect mode 3 is configured so as not to appear in the RB state.

Here, in the RB state, the relative appearance frequency of the effect mode 4 and the effect mode 5 is higher than that in the BB state, and the appearance frequency is higher in the high setting. That is, in the RB state, the reliability of the notification content of the setting suggestion effect is higher than in the BB state. Further, as the number of winnings of one card increases, these differences become more remarkable. That is, as the number of winnings of one card increases, the reliability of the notification content of the setting suggestion effect increases. However, as described above, if the number of winnings of one card is 5 times or more, it will be disadvantageous to the player unless a prize is generated during the subsequent RB state, so that the number of winnings of one card is 5 times or more. While trying to maximize the reliability when it becomes, the frequency of appearance does not fluctuate any more.

It should be noted that, except that the effect mode 3 is not determined in the RB state, basically the same effect mode is used between the BB state and the RB state, and the RB state is notified rather than the BB state by making the appearance frequency different. It is configured to increase the reliability of the content. That is, at least a part of the notification mode (effect mode) of the suggestion notification (suggestion effect) performed in the RB state and the notification mode (effect mode) of the suggestion notification (suggestion effect) performed in the BB state are common and common. Regarding the notification mode (effect mode) to be performed, the selection probability is made different between the BB state and the RB state. However, it can also be configured so that the effect mode 3 is determined in the RB state. That is, the notification mode (effect mode) of the suggestion notification (suggestion effect) may be common to both the BB state and the RB state. Further, the notification mode (effect mode) of the suggestion notification (suggestion effect) common to the BB state and the RB state may be one type.

(Example of setting suggestion effect of this example)
Subsequently, with reference to FIGS. 154 to 157, an production example of the setting suggestion effect in the RB state in this example will be described. FIG. 154 shows an example of the effect screen in the RB state, FIG. 155 shows an example in which the setting suggestion effect is executed when "BAR alignment" is displayed in the RB state, and FIG. 156 shows the RB state. An example in which the setting suggestion effect is executed when the symbol combination of "FRU171" is displayed is shown in FIG. 157, and both the symbol combination of "BAR alignment" and "FRU171" are displayed in the RB state. An example is shown in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed when there is no setting suggestion effect.

FIG. 154 shows an example of the effect screen in the RB state. During the RB state, for example, the cylinder display area (TB) and the background display area (BG) are displayed on the display device 11. Although the illustration of the effect screen in the BB state is omitted, basically, the effect screen similar to the effect screen in the RB can be displayed. Since the reliability of the setting suggestion effect does not change in the BB state unlike the RB state, the colors of the cylinder display area (TB) and the background display area (BG) may not be changed as described later. For example, in the BB state, the cylinder display area (TB) may be displayed in a predetermined fixed color such as white and the background display area (BG) may be displayed in black.

The cylinder display area (TB) is an effect area in which an image of a cylinder in which fireworks are fired is displayed in the setting suggestion effect, and the number of winnings for one piece (as described above, "F_RBJAC role" during the RB state. The display mode changes according to the number of times that "B" is won). For example, if the number of winnings per card is 0, it is displayed in white, if it is 1-2 times, it is displayed in red, if it is 3-4 times, it is displayed in silver, and after 5 times. If there is, it will be displayed in gold. Of course, it is also possible to change the displayed color each time the number of winnings for one card increases by one. In this cylinder display area (TB), the display mode changes according to the number of winnings of one piece. That is, in the RB state, the number of times that "F_RBJAC combination B" is determined as the winning combination can be notified. Therefore, the player can know how many times the "F_RBJAC role B" has won during the current RB state by looking at the color of the cylinder display area (TB), thereby winning the "F_RBJAC role B". When this is done, it is possible to appropriately select which procedure should be used for the stop operation, and it is also possible to know the current reliability of the setting suggestion effect. The mode of notifying the number of winnings for one card is not limited to this. It suffices that the notification is performed according to the production mode of the setting suggestion effect. For example, the number of winnings for one card may be displayed as it is in numbers or characters, or it may be displayed by the number of characters or the like.

The background display area (BG) is an effect area in which an image of the sky (background) in which fireworks are launched is displayed in the setting suggestion effect, and the display mode changes depending on the number of times the fireworks are lost. Here, the number of single-card winning combinations is defined as the number of times that one winning card is avoided regardless of whether or not it is a special procedure when the "F_RBJAC winning combination B" is won during the RB state. It should be noted that the number of times the one-card winning combination is lost may be defined as the number of times that when the "F_RBJAC winning combination B" is won in the RB state, "BAR alignment" is displayed by a special procedure and one winning card is avoided. , When "F_RBJAC role B" is won in the RB state, "BAR alignment" is displayed by a special procedure and "FRU171" is displayed by the number of times one winning is avoided and the winning procedure to win "FRU171". It may be defined as the number of times that one prize is generated. That is, the number of single-card combination losses may be defined as the number of times the setting suggestion effect is performed. Further, in this example, the number of winning one-card winning combination is notified in the cylinder display area (TB), and the number of winning one-card winning combination is notified in the background display area (BG). Only may be done. In any case, useful information for the player is still notified.

In the background display area (BG), for example, if the number of single-card combination losses is 0, it is displayed in black, if it is 1-2 times, it is displayed in blue, and if it is 3-4 times, it is displayed in green. Is displayed, and if it is 5 times or more, it is displayed in red. Of course, it is also possible to change the displayed color each time the number of single-card combination losers increases by one. In this background display area (BG), the display mode changes according to the number of times the single piece combination is lost. That is, in the RB state, the number of times when "F_RBJAC role B" is determined as the winning combination and no prize is generated, or when "F_RBJAC combination B" is determined as the winning combination and "BAR" It is possible to notify the number of times that "matching" is displayed and no prize is generated, or the number of times that the setting suggestion effect is performed. Therefore, looking at the color of the background display area (BG), the player does not generate a prize when he wins the "F_RBJAC role B" during the current RB state, or how many times the special procedure is successful. It is possible to know whether it was possible or how many times the setting suggestion effect was performed, and by doing so, it is appropriate to decide which procedure should be used to perform the stop operation when the "F_RBJAC role B" is won. You can select it, you can know the current reliability of the setting suggestion effect, and you can also know the degree of skill of your own stop operation. Further, for example, the game can be advanced while selecting whether to emphasize the amount of game value given during the RB state or the number of times the suggestion notification is performed, depending on the game situation. It is also possible to enhance the interest of the game by providing a value that matches the taste of the player. The mode of notifying the number of single-card combination losses is not limited to this. It suffices that the notification is performed according to the production mode of the setting suggestion effect. For example, the number of single-card combination losses may be displayed as it is in numbers or characters, or may be displayed according to the number of characters.

FIG. 155 shows an example in which the setting suggestion effect is executed when "BAR alignment" is displayed during the RB state. First, when the "F_RBJAC role B" is won during the RB state, an effect indicating that the fireworks are ready to be launched is performed. After that, when the stop operation is performed by a special procedure and "BAR alignment" is displayed, the production lottery table during RB (see FIG. 153) is referred to, and the lottery value according to the set value and the extracted random number value for production are referred to. Based on the above, one of the production modes (notification contents) of the production modes 1 to 5 is determined. Then, an effect indicating that the fireworks corresponding to the determined effect mode have been launched is performed. The player can infer the set value from the display mode of the fireworks that have been launched.

FIG. 156 shows an example in which the setting suggestion effect is executed when the symbol combination of “FRU171” is displayed in the RB state. First, when the "F_RBJAC role B" is won during the RB state, an effect indicating that the fireworks are ready to be launched is performed. After that, when the stop operation is performed in the winning procedure (or the first winning procedure) and the symbol combination of "FRU171" is displayed, the effect lottery table during RB (see FIG. 153) is referred to, and the set value is adjusted. One of the production modes 1 to 5 (notification content) is determined based on the lottery value and the extracted random number value for production. Then, an effect indicating that the fireworks corresponding to the determined effect mode have been launched is performed. The player can infer the set value from the display mode of the fireworks that have been launched.

FIG. 157 shows an example in which the setting suggestion effect is not executed when neither of the symbol combinations of “BAR alignment” and “FRU171” is displayed in the RB state. First, when the "F_RBJAC role B" is won during the RB state, an effect indicating that the fireworks are ready to be launched is performed. After that, when a stop operation is performed in a non-winning procedure (or a second winning procedure) that is not a special procedure and a symbol combination other than "BAR alignment" and "FRU171" is displayed, the effect mode (notification content) is determined. Instead, a production is performed to show that the fireworks launch has failed. Therefore, in this case, the player cannot guess the set value.

The production mode may be determined when "F_RBJAC combination B" is determined as the winning combination. In this case, it is reserved in advance that one of the effect modes will be performed at the time of winning, and then the execution conditions of the setting suggestion effect (for example, "BAR alignment" is displayed and "FRU171" is displayed. ) Is satisfied, the setting suggestion effect is performed according to the reserved effect mode, and when the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect is not satisfied, the setting suggestion effect according to the reserved effect mode is not performed (cancelled). Just do it.

Further, the color of the cylinder display area (TB) may change at the time of the start operation (before the stop operation) of the game in which "F_RBJAC combination B" is determined as the winning combination, or the final time. It may be the time when the game result is obtained (after all stops), or the time when the next game is started (before the stop operation). In addition, the color of the background display area (BG) changes when the final game result is obtained in the game in which "F_RBJAC role B" is determined as the winning role (after all stops). It may be the time of the start operation (before the stop operation) of the next game.

(Invention 1 relating to suggestion notification)
As described above, according to the gaming machine of this example, the special gaming state (for example, the RB state) ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of winning is generated. Further, in the special gaming state, a first combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination A") in which a predetermined amount (for example, 15 cards) of game value is given when a prize is generated, and a predetermined amount when a prize is generated. A second combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination B") to which a smaller specific amount (for example, one piece) of game value is given can be determined as a winning combination. Further, when the second winning combination is determined as the winning combination, it is possible to control so that no prize is generated when the player performs a specific stop operation (for example, a special procedure), and the second winning combination is used as the winning combination. It is possible to perform a suggestion notification (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting the degree of advantage of the player when the prize is determined and no prize is generated. Then, the suggestion notification is configured so that the reliability of the notification content increases as the number of times the second combination is determined as the winning combination in the special game state.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, the profit (for example, the game value amount) in the special gaming state fluctuates according to the skill of the player's game operation (for example, stop operation), and the execution frequency of the suggestion notification is executed. Also fluctuates. Then, the reliability is increased every time the suggestion notification is given. Therefore, it is possible to notify the degree of advantage with appropriate reliability while making the most of the fun of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the special gaming state, the number of times when the second combination is determined as the winning combination and no prize is generated (for example, the color in the background display area (BG)) is determined. It is configured to be able to notify. As a result, the player can appropriately recognize, for example, the progress of the game in the special game state and the current reliability of the suggestion notification, so that the player can provide the information desired by the player to enjoy the game. Can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, the special gaming state ends even when a specific number of games (for example, 12 times) more than a predetermined number of games are played. Therefore, the special game state is the second when the second combination is determined as the winning combination and the number of times the prize is not generated is a special number (for example, five times) or more, which is less than the predetermined number. If no prize is generated for the combination, the amount of game value given during the special game state is configured to be disadvantageous to the player. Then, the suggestion notification is configured so that the reliability of the notification content is maximized when the number of times the second combination is determined as the winning combination becomes a special number or more. As a result, for example, even if the number of times the second role is determined as the winning role increases and the special game state ends without the first role winning a predetermined number of times, the interest of the game is enjoyed. It is possible to prevent it from being lowered.

(Invention 2 Related to Suggestion Notification)
As described above, according to the gaming machine of this example, the special gaming state (for example, the RB state) ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of winning is generated. Further, in the special gaming state, when a specific combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination B") is determined as the winning combination, or when the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing (for example, the stop operation is performed by a special procedure). If the player performs the stop operation at a predetermined timing different from the specific timing (for example, if the stop operation is performed in the first winning procedure), the prize is not generated. (For example, the combination of symbols of "FRU171") is displayed to generate a prize, and the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing and a timing different from a predetermined timing (for example, a second prize). When the stop operation is performed in the procedure), a specific symbol combination (for example, a plurality of other symbol combinations) different from the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, and it is possible to control to generate a prize. When the winning combination is determined as the winning combination and no prize is generated, or when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination and the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed and the winning is generated. It is possible to perform suggestion notification (for example, setting suggestion effect) that suggests the degree of advantage of the player. Then, the suggestion notification is configured so that the reliability of the notification content increases as the number of times the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the special game state.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, the profit (for example, the game value amount) in the special gaming state fluctuates according to the skill of the player's game operation (for example, stop operation), and the execution frequency of the suggestion notification is executed. Also fluctuates. Specifically, for example, there are cases where the suggestion notification is performed without generating a prize, a case where a prize is generated and a suggestion notification is performed, and a case where a prize is generated and the suggestion notification is not performed. It is possible. Then, the reliability is increased every time the suggestion notification is given. Therefore, it is possible to notify the degree of advantage with appropriate reliability while making the most of the fun of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the special gaming state, the number of times the specific combination is determined as the winning combination (for example, the color in the cylinder display area (TB)) and the case where the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. The number of times a prize has not been won (for example, a color in the background display area (BG)) can be notified. As a result, the player can appropriately recognize, for example, the progress of the game in the special game state and the current reliability of the suggestion notification, so that the player can provide the information desired by the player to enjoy the game. Can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the special gaming state, a predetermined amount (for example, 15 cards) of a predetermined combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination A") is given a game value when a prize is won. It is possible to determine as a winning combination a specific combination in which a specific amount (for example, one piece) of game value less than a predetermined amount is given when a prize is won. Further, the special gaming state also ends when a specific number of games (for example, 12 times) more than a predetermined number of games are played. Therefore, in the special game state, when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination and the number of times that the prize is not generated is less than the predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or more, the special combination is If no prize is generated, the amount of game value given during the special game state is configured to be disadvantageous to the player. Then, the suggestion notification is configured so that the reliability of the notification content is maximized when the number of times the specific combination is determined as the winning combination is equal to or more than the special number. As a result, for example, even if the number of times a specific combination is determined as a winning combination increases and the special gaming state ends without the predetermined combination winning a predetermined number of times, the interest of the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, in at least one row (for example, reel 3L) of the display rows of symbols, the predetermined timing at which a predetermined combination of symbols can be displayed is one symbol rather than the specific timing. It is configured to include the timing of late stop operations. That is, for example, when a specific role is won, a stop operation is performed so that the suggestion notification is performed without generating a prize, but the timing is slightly later than intended. However, although a prize is generated, it is possible to perform a stop operation by switching so that a suggestion notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being lowered due to the fact that the suggestion notification is not performed.

(Invention 3 relating to suggestion notification)
As described above, according to the gaming machine of this example, the first special gaming state (for example, the RB state) ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of winning is generated. Further, in the first special game state, a first combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination A") in which a predetermined amount (for example, 15 cards) of game value is given when a prize is generated, and a prize is generated. A second combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination B") to which a specific amount (for example, one piece) of game value smaller than the predetermined amount is given can be determined as a winning combination. Further, when the second winning combination is determined as the winning combination, it is possible to control so that no prize is generated when the player performs a specific stop operation (for example, a special procedure), and the second winning combination is used as the winning combination. It is possible to perform a suggestion notification (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting the degree of advantage of the player when the prize is determined and no prize is generated. Further, in the second special gaming state (for example, the BB state), it is possible to perform the suggestion notification even when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied. The first special gaming state can be given a smaller amount of game value than the second special gaming state, but the suggestion notification is performed in the first special gaming state than in the second special gaming state. Is also configured to increase the reliability of the notification content.

That is, according to the gaming machine of this example, the first special gaming state has less profit than the second special gaming state, but when the suggestion notification is executed, its reliability is executed in the second special gaming state. In addition, the profit (for example, the game value amount) in the first special game state fluctuates according to the skill of the player's game operation (for example, stop operation), and the execution frequency of the suggestion notification is executed. Is also configured to fluctuate. Therefore, it is possible to notify the degree of advantage with appropriate reliability while making the most of the fun of the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered even when a special game state in which the profit is smaller occurs.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, in the first special gaming state, the number of times the second combination is determined as the winning combination (for example, the color in the cylinder display area (TB)) and the second combination as the winning combination. It is configured to be able to notify the number of times (for example, the color in the background display area (BG)) that the winning is not generated even if it is determined. As a result, the player can appropriately recognize, for example, the progress of the game in the first special game state and the current reliability of the suggestion notification, so that the player can provide the information desired by the player and play the game. It can enhance the interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this example, at least a part of the notification mode of the suggestion notification in the first special gaming state and the notification mode of the suggestion notification in the second special gaming state are common, and the common notification mode is , The selection probability is configured to be different between the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data of the effect related to the suggestion notification, and it is easy to recognize the difference in the reliability of the suggestion notification between the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state. be able to.

[Other variants]
As described above, the method of managing the duration of ART (advantageous section) is arbitrary. For example, the duration may be managed by the number of games, the duration may be managed by the number of sets, and the duration may be managed by the number of medals paid out during ART or the difference number. The duration may be managed by the number of notifications (number of navigations) that affect the payout of medals during the ART, or the continuation may be determined by the continuation judgment performed at an arbitrary timing during the ART. The period may be managed, or the ART may be terminated when a specific symbol combination is displayed during the ART.
In this case, the target of addition is appropriately adjusted according to the management method of the duration of ART such as the number of games, the number of sets, the number of navigations, the number of differences, and the like.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachislot machine 1, the notification (ART) function is operated under the control of the main (main control board 71) side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the sub (sub control board 72) is not limited to this. The notification (ART) function may be operated by the control on the) side.

Further, the set value may be set to only one step. At this time, the setting change process may be left behind or may be eliminated. When the setting change process is left, only the same setting can be retyped, so that the process is substantially for clearing the RAM. Even when the set value is set to only one step, a mode related to lottery (first hit and / or addition, etc.) in an advantageous state (ART state, etc.) is provided, and the number of times a predetermined winning combination is won with a predetermined probability is counted. However, by switching this mode when the number of times reaches a specified value, it is possible to cause undulations in the ball output.

In this case, the value obtained by multiplying the denominator of the predetermined probability by the specified value is one wave of balls. If the value is specified to be switched at the number of games corresponding to one day, even if the set value is one step, it can be made comparable to a plurality of game machines provided. For example, if the business hours of a day are 11 hours, 11h = 39600 seconds, so if the shortest time required for one game is 4.1 seconds according to the rules, the maximum number of games per day is 39600/4. 1 = about 9695 times. Since it is not realistic to have no breaks (meals and toilets), the number of games per day is considered to be about 8000. By setting the predetermined probability to 1/32 and the specified value to 256, 32 × 256 = 8192, so that the wave of the ball output can be switched in about one day.

Furthermore, if the mode that is advantageous to the player and the mode that is disadvantageous to the player are switched alternately each time the number of times the predetermined combination is won reaches the specified value, the profit will be stable in a two-day cycle. It can contribute to the business of the store. Although the case where the set value is set to one step has been described, the setting value is not limited to one step and can be diverted. More specifically, if the number of set values is not changed, it is possible to make the wave of balls to be ejected more complicated without increasing the number of set values. Also, by reducing the number of set values, it is possible to compensate for the decrease in the set values and the monotony.

Moreover, if the number of set values can be reduced, the data capacity can be reduced accordingly. If the set value of 6 steps can be changed to the set value of 1 step, the data can be reduced to 1/6. In addition, the development cost for designing the desired ball output rate at each stage is also reduced to 1/6. Furthermore, since only those that meet the test are permitted to be used for business, the time required for the test can be shortened.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachislot 1, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the above-mentioned limit processing, a clerk of the amusement store is released (for example, an operation to the reset switch 76, an operation to a door key (not shown)). It may have a stop function that makes it impossible to play until the game is played.

Further, in the above-mentioned pachislot 1, when the advantageous section is forcibly terminated by the above-mentioned limit processing, the credits are automatically settled (that is, all the credited game values are automatically paid out). It may have an automatic settlement function. If the above-mentioned stop function is ON and the automatic settlement function is also ON, the game may be disabled after the automatic settlement, or if the automatic settlement function is ON, the game may be stopped. Even if the function is not ON, the game may be disabled after automatic settlement.

However, even if the above-mentioned stop function and automatic settlement function are executed when the advantageous state (either the above-mentioned bonus state, the increase section, or the advantageous section (including the production section)) ends. good. When the above-mentioned inoperable state occurs during the advantageous section, the area in which the information regarding the advantageous section is stored in the main control board 71 may be initialized according to the inoperable state. .. The player who was playing the game when the game becomes incapable (stopped state) ends the game up to that point, and then opens a favorable platform where another player is stopped. Assuming, for example, if the next player can start the game from the increasing section, the disadvantage on the game store side may become too large. Further, for example, if the clerk must perform an operation (for example, a setting change operation) for initializing an area in which information about an advantageous section is stored before opening to the next player, the game store There is a risk that the operational burden on the side will become too large. Therefore, if the area where the information about the advantageous section is stored is automatically initialized when the stop state is reached, such a problem does not occur, so that the stop function can be easily operated in the amusement store. Become. Regarding the process for initializing the area in which the information about the advantageous section is stored in response to the inability to play, the initialization process when the advantageous section ends is diverted from the program and executed. You can do it like this. In this way, the processing load can be reduced and the program capacity can be saved.

For the above-mentioned ON / OFF switching of the stop function and ON / OFF switching of the automatic settlement function, for example, an existing switch can be used without providing a dedicated switch. For example, as an example, when the setting key type switch 54 is turned on, the stop function is switched ON / OFF each time the stop button 17L is pressed, and the setting key type switch 54 is stopped when the setting key type switch 54 is turned off. The ON / OFF state of the function may be fixed and this state may be stored. Further, for example, when the setting key type switch 54 is turned on, the automatic settlement function is switched ON / OFF each time the stop button 17C is pressed, and the setting key type switch 54 is automatically turned off. The ON / OFF state of the settlement function may be fixed and this state may be stored. It should be noted that the set ON / OFF state of the stop function and the ON / OFF state of the automatic settlement function may not be cleared when the advantageous section ends by executing the limit process. Further, for example, since the stop button and the like are used for playing a game, the above-mentioned stop function can be switched ON / OFF by operating an operating means that is not used for playing a game, and the automatic settlement function can be used. It can also be configured to switch ON / OFF.

It is also possible for the game store to set the number of games and the number of payouts in the advantageous section in which the stop function is executed. In addition, the number of games and the number of payouts in the advantageous section in which the automatic settlement function is executed can be set on the game store side.

Further, when the stop function is executed, it is possible to provide a function of notifying the player to that effect. For example, the display device 11 displays that the advantageous section has ended due to the limit processing, that the operation has been stopped, that it is necessary to call the clerk of the amusement store, that the prize exchange is urged, and the like, or that the speaker group 84 outputs audio. It is possible to have a function to do. Further, when the automatic settlement function is executed, it is possible to provide a function of notifying the player to that effect. For example, the fact that the advantageous section has been completed by the limit processing, that the game can be continued by the game value that is automatically settled but owned, that it is necessary to call the clerk of the game store, or that the prize exchange is urged, etc. It is possible to provide a function of displaying on the display device 11 or outputting audio from the speaker group 84.

<Detailed example (2) of another example (6) of game playability (game specifications)>
Next, a detailed example (No. 2) of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachislot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 236. In this embodiment, another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specifications) has been described with reference to FIGS. 98 and 99. That is, a bonus winning combination (2BB) that wins only in the 2-card state (or with a high probability in the 2-card state) and a bonus that wins only in the 3-card state (or with a high probability in the 3-card bet state). A combination (3BB) is provided to enable the game to be played in a state where 2BB is carried over (between 2BB flags) and a state where 3BB is carried over (between 3BB flags), and in each state. It is a game specification that changes the game playability according to the betting state (whether the betting state is 2 or 3).

Further, in the present embodiment, as a specific example of a gaming machine using such a gaming specification, a detailed example of another example (No. 6) of game playability (gaming specification) with reference to FIGS. 103 to 122. However, in this example (detailed example (No. 2)), another specific example in which game playability (game specifications) is constructed from a viewpoint different from the detailed example will be described. Of the inventions described in this example, those that do not require the specifications of another example (No. 6) of game playability (game specifications) can be appropriately applied to other game playability (game specifications). It shall be. Further, unless otherwise specified in this example, it is assumed that various structures, controls, game specifications, production specifications, etc. already described in FIGS. 1 to 157 can be appropriately applied in this example as well. That is, it is also possible to combine a part or all of the configuration described in this example with a part or all of the configuration described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, the modified example, and the like to obtain the present invention. ..

In this example, four reels 3L, 3CL, 3CR, and 3R are provided as in the case described with reference to FIG. 125, and stop buttons 17L, 17CL, 17CR, and 17R are provided so as to correspond to the four reels 3L, 3CL, 3CR, and 3R. It will be described as being provided. Further, the reel 3L may be described as the first reel, the reel 3CL as the second reel, the reel 3CR as the third reel, and the reel 3R as the fourth reel. Further, in this example, within the frame of the reel display window 4, a line (center line) connecting the middle stage region of the first reel, the middle stage region of the second reel, the middle stage region of the third reel, and the middle stage region of the fourth reel. Is defined as a valid line. However, these are not intended to limit the scope of the invention. The invention according to this example can be applied to a gaming machine provided with three reels, and another line or a plurality of lines may be defined as effective lines. The outline of the appearance structure of this example will be described later with reference to FIG. 232.

[Gameability of this example (detailed example (2))]
First, the flow of the game in this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 and 159. Note that FIG. 158 is a diagram showing a transition flow of the gaming state in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section in this example, and FIG. 159 is a diagram for explaining the transition conditions on the transition flow shown in FIG. 158. In this example, basically, after winning 2BB in a non-flagged 2-card bet state (without winning 2BB) to make it between 2BB flags, the game is played in a 3-card bet state between 2BB flags. Is a specification that is recommended to be performed, and unless otherwise specified, a 3-card bet state between 2BB flags (this is referred to as a "recommended game state", and a unit game in that state is a "recommended game". In addition, it is assumed that the game is performed in the "non-recommended game state" in other states and the unit game in the state is "deprecated game"). Here, for example, when a 2-bet game (a game in a 2-bet state), which is a non-recommended game, is performed between the 2BB flags, the state transition of the advantageous section (various processes related to the advantageous section) is not performed. As a result, the processing load related to the advantageous section may be reduced. Further, when a 2-bet game, which is a non-recommended game, is performed between the 2BB flags, the effect lottery may not be performed, and a predetermined effect dedicated to the two-bet state may be executed without the effect. That is, for the deprecated gaming state, the development man-hours may be reduced by assuming that the effect coefficient is not set or the effect is not created. In addition, if 2BB is mistakenly won in a 2-bet game between 2BB flags, 2BB is exhausted and 2BB is waiting to be established before returning to the recommended game state between 2BB flags (3-card bet state), and a certain number of games. Is not desirable because it requires. Therefore, if 2BB can be won in a 2-bet game between the 2BB flags (for example, if another role such as a small role or a replay role is not won), there is a possibility that 2BB will win. It is preferable to perform an effect suggesting that the player can stop the operation so that the 2BB does not win a prize. Further, in the case of a non-recommended gaming state such as between non-flags in which none of the bonus combinations are established, between 3BB flags, or during bonus operation, a suggestion effect that can identify the gaming state may be performed. For example, a predetermined decorative lamp (not shown, or the above-mentioned information display 6 or the stop state notification unit 117 may be used. The same applies hereinafter) is made to emit blue light between the non-flags, and a predetermined decorative lamp is emitted between the 3BB flags. Is made to emit red light, the predetermined decorative lamp is made to emit green light during the bonus operation, and the predetermined decorative lamp is turned off during the recommended gaming state between the 2BB flags, and the transition to the recommended gaming state is made between the 2BB flags. You may be encouraged to do what you can. However, as already described, it may be configured as a specification in which it is recommended to change the playability depending on the type of bonus combination carried over and the number of bets.

As shown in FIG. 158, in this example, the state in which the player plays a game is roughly classified into a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section. The non-advantageous section (normal / non-advantageous section) is a gaming state (non-AT / non-ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, and is a gaming state that functions as a normal gaming state. Further, the advantageous section is a gaming state (non-AT / non-ART) in which information on a stop operation advantageous for the player is not notified, and an advantageous section (normal / advantageous section) that functions as a normal gaming state, and an advantageous section for the player. It is a gaming state (AT / ART) in which information on an advantageous stopping operation can be notified, and includes an increasing section that functions as an advantageous gaming state.

It should be noted that the normal / non-advantageous section and the normal / advantageous section both function as a normal gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous gaming state, but in the normal / non-advantageous section, in the normal / advantageous section. It differs in that some of the processing related to the advantageous gaming state to be performed cannot be performed. Specifically, for example, in the normal / advantageous section, a process of determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous gaming state can be performed according to the derived result display (combination of symbols displayed as stopped). The processing cannot be performed in the normal / non-advantageous section. However, there is almost no apparent difference in the player playing the game.

Further, the advantageous gaming state as an increase section includes a BB state as a pseudo bonus, an RB state as a pseudo bonus, and a RUSH state recognized as a state different from these pseudo bonuses. Further, in the BB state, as a result of being able to be notified of information on all stop operations during the BB state, information on the SBB state, which is more advantageous to the player than the NBB state, and information on some stop operations during the BB state are notified. As a result, the NBB state, which is more disadvantageous to the player than the SBB state, is included. Further, the RUSH state includes a normal RUSH state and a limiter RUSH state that is specially executed before the limit processing is executed.

(Normal / non-advantageous section)
First, in the normal / non-advantageous section, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. The advantageous section transition lottery is a process for determining whether or not to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section with a predetermined probability. For example, the winning role is a "missing", "reach eye replay", and a definite role that confirms the transition to the increasing section (for example, "pushing order RB role", "BB role", "BAR matching role" described later). Otherwise, it is determined that the next game is shifted to the normal / advantageous section with a predetermined probability (for example, an arbitrary high probability of about 50 to 100%) (see (1) in FIGS. 158 and 159). ).

Further, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the normal / non-advantageous section, it is determined to shift to the NBB state from the next game (see (1) in FIGS. 158 and 159). Here, the "pushing order RB combination" is handled differently in that it does not function as a definite combination in the normal / advantageous section, but functions as a definite combination in the normal / non-advantageous section. This point will be described later.

Further, when the "BB combination" is won in the normal / non-advantageous section, it is determined to shift to the SBB state from the next game (see (1) in FIGS. 158 and 159). In addition, when the "BAR matching combination" is won in the normal / non-advantageous section, it is decided to shift to the RUSH state from the next game (see (1) in FIGS. 158 and 159), and the RUSH stock. "10" is added to. The RUSH stock is a right to extend (continue) the game period in the RUSH state by one set. That is, in the case of winning the "BAR matching combination" in the normal / non-advantageous section, the right to extend the RUSH state for 10 sets is granted. Further, in this example, RUSH stock is described as an example as a right for being controlled to a gaming state in which a player is notified of a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player. Such a right is a result. As long as it enables the player to play a game in such a game state (or extend the game period), the nature of the right may be anything. .. For example, it may be a right that allows the number of games, the number of navigations, the number of differences, etc. to be added directly. In addition, for example, the right to enable the transition to the BB state or the RB state (that is, to win the target transition role, to win a prize in the transition symbol combination, or to make those situations more likely to occur, etc. Includes). That is, the right to be controlled to the gaming state in which the notification of the stop operation mode advantageous to the player is performed may include the right to be controlled to the pseudo-bonus state. In addition, the privilege granted by the generated right may be granted immediately after the grant of the right, or may be granted after a certain period of time.

In addition, when it is decided to shift to either the advantageous section in the normal / non-advantageous section, the RB navigation MAP table selection lottery is performed. The RB navigation MAP table selection lottery is a process for selecting the RB navigation MAP table in the advantageous section, and one RB navigation MAP table is determined by lottery from a plurality of tables from table 0 to table 15. .. The details of the RB navigation MAP table will be described later with reference to FIG. 230.

(Normal / advantageous section)
First, when the "BAR matching combination" is won in the normal / advantageous section, it is decided to shift to the RUSH state from the next game (see (5) in FIGS. 158 and 159), and the addition is added. The value of RUSH stock is determined by lottery. The value of the RUSH stock to be added is one of "1", "2", "3", "5", "10" and "20", but in most cases "3" is added. ..

Further, when the number of digested games reaches the number of ceiling Gs in the normal / advantageous section, it is determined to shift to the RUSH state from the next game (see (5) in FIGS. 158 and 159). , The value of the RUSH stock to be added is determined by lottery. The value of the RUSH stock to be added is one of "1", "2", "3", "5", "10" and "20", but in most cases "1" is added. .. Therefore, when the number of digested games reaches the ceiling G number and shifts to the RUSH state, the expected value of continuation of the RUSH state is lower than when the number of digested games reaches the ceiling G number and shifts to the RUSH state by winning the "BAR matching combination". However, it is also possible to set a continuation expected value of the same level or higher.

In this example, the number of ceiling G is set to, for example, "1150". The number of ceiling G mainly indicates the game period (number of games) digested without shifting to the BB state or the RUSH state in the normal / advantageous section, and the game in the RB state during this game period. The period is also included. For example, the count starts when the normal / non-advantageous section shifts to the normal / advantageous section, and the count is initialized when the normal / advantageous section shifts to the BB state or the RUSH state, while the count is initialized from the normal / advantageous section. When the state shifts to the RB state, the count continues without being initialized. Then, when the game period in the normal / advantageous section including the RB state becomes the "1150" game, the condition for reaching the ceiling G number is satisfied, and the game shifts to the RUSH state from the next game. This also applies when the condition for reaching the ceiling G number is satisfied during the RB state.

Further, when the "BB combination" is won in the normal / advantageous section, it is determined to shift to the BB state from the next game (see (3) in FIGS. 158 and 159). In addition, a BB transition lottery is held in the normal / advantageous section. The BB transition lottery is a process for determining whether or not to shift from the normal / advantageous section to the BB state, and it is determined to shift to the BB state with a predetermined probability. For example, when the winning combination is a rare role other than the "BAR matching role", "BB role", and "pushing order RB role", the winning combination is shifted to the BB state with the winning probability associated with the rare combination. Is determined. In addition, when the BB transition lottery is performed, the precursor G number of up to about 5 games (the game period in which the precursor state for continuing the expectation of the BB win continues) is set, and when the precursor G number is exhausted. If the BB transition lottery is won, the game shifts to the BB state from the next game (see (3) in FIGS. 158 and 159). In addition, in both cases of winning the "BB role" and winning the BB transition lottery, it is determined whether the BB state of the transfer destination is the SBB state or the NBB state. When it is decided to be in the SBB state, the migration destination is in the SBB state (in this case, the value of the RUSH stock may be determined in the same manner as above), and it is decided to be in the NBB state. In that case, the migration destination will be in the NBB state. In addition, when the "BB combination" is won, the SBB state may be fixed.

In addition, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the normal / advantageous section, the RB challenge effect described later is performed. The "pushing order RB combination" is configured so that when the correct answer is given in the pushing order of 4 choices (1st stop) x 3 choices (2nd stop) = 12 choices, the symbol combination of "RB" is stopped and displayed. In the RB challenge production, as a general rule, the correct pressing order is not notified, and the content is produced to encourage the correct answer of the pressing order by oneself to stop and display the symbol combination of "RB". The details of the RB challenge effect will be described later with reference to FIGS. 225 to 227. However, in the RB challenge production, if the parameter of the current RB navigation MAP table is "1", the correct answer pressing order is exceptionally notified. That is, if the stop operation is performed according to the notified push order, the symbol combination of "RB" is stopped and displayed with a 100% probability. Therefore, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the normal / advantageous section, the pushing order is correctly answered by oneself, and the symbol combination of "RB" is stopped and displayed (RB challenge success), or the correct pushing order is notified. When the final stop is performed (when the parameter of the navigation MAP table is "1"), it is determined to shift to the RB state from the next game (see (4) in FIGS. 158 and 159). .. In the latter case, as a result, the transition condition may be that the symbol combination of "RB" is stopped and displayed.

In addition, if you win the "push order RB role" in the normal / advantageous section, but the correct push order is not notified and you do not answer the correct answer by yourself (that is, in the case of RB challenge failure), RUSH A transition lottery will be held. The RUSH transition lottery is a process for determining whether or not to shift to the RUSH state from the normal / advantageous section, and it is determined to shift to the RUSH state with a predetermined probability. For example, it is determined that there is a probability of "1/256" to shift to the RUSH state. In addition, when the RUSH transition lottery is performed, the precursor G number of up to about 50 games (the game period in which the precursor state that keeps the expectation of the RUSH win continues) is set, and when the precursor G number is exhausted. If the RUSH transition lottery is won, the RUSH state is entered from the next game (see (5) in FIGS. 158 and 159). Here, in the normal / advantageous section, when the RUSH transition lottery is won and the number of precursor G is, for example, 5G or more, the number of precursor games is shortened to reduce the number of precursor G to 4G or less. A lottery may be held.

In addition, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the normal / advantageous section, the pushing order is correctly answered by oneself and the symbol combination of "RB" is stopped and displayed (RB challenge success), or the correct pushing order is notified. When the final stop is performed (when the parameter of the navigation MAP table is "1"), the lottery for promotion to the BB state (including the determination of whether the promotion destination is the SBB state or the NBB state) It may be done. For example, in the promotion lottery, it may be decided to shift to the BB state with a predetermined probability, and when the promotion lottery is won, the transition to the BB state may be made from the next game. That is, when the RB challenge effect is performed and the challenge is successful, the resulting transition destination may be in the BB state. In this case, at the start of the next game, the "seven-matched" effect described later may be performed.

In addition, if you win the "push order RB role" in the normal / advantageous section, but the correct push order is not notified and you do not answer correctly in the push order by yourself (that is, in the case of RB challenge failure), BB A transition lottery (including determination of whether the transition destination is in the SBB state or the NBB state) may be performed. For example, in the BB transition lottery, it may be decided to shift to the BB state with a predetermined probability, and when the BB transition lottery is won, the transition to the BB state may be made from the next game. That is, when the RB challenge effect is performed and the challenge fails, the resulting transition destination may be in the BB state. In this case, at the start of the next game, the "seven-matched" effect described later may be performed.

Further, in the normal / advantageous section, the normal / advantageous section is after the end of the BB state (see (7) in FIGS. 158 and 159) and after the end of the RB state (see (9) in FIGS. 158 and 159). , Or after the end of the RUSH state (see (11) in FIGS. 158 and 159), the game period of 50 games is exhausted in the normal / advantageous section, and the BB state, RB state, When it is not decided to shift to any of the RUSH states, the transition from the normal / advantageous section to the normal / non-advantageous section is performed (see (2) in FIGS. 158 and 159). Along with this, various counters related to the advantageous section (for example, control game number counter, control payout number counter, advantageous section game number counter, advantageous section payout number counter, ceiling counter for counting the number of ceiling G, precursors Precursor counters that count the number of G, RUSH stock counters that count the number of RUSH stocks, RB counters that count the number of winning RB winning combinations, etc.) and parameters (for example, parameters that indicate the table number of the RB Navi MAP table), etc. The information is also initialized. This also applies to the case of (13) in FIGS. 158 and 159, which will be described later.

(BB state)
As described above, the BB state is either the SBB state or the NBB state. The BB state is a pseudo-bonus state (that is, during AT), and non-JAC and JAC are provided as states controlled therein. That is, in some models in which the actual bonus state (big bonus) is provided, the bonus state is composed of the BB general game state and the RB game state. Has been done. However, from such a viewpoint, it is also possible to configure the BB state as an actual bonus state (a bonus continuous operation device related to the first-class special bonus).

During non-JAC, the game period is set to 20 games, and when 20 games during non-JAC are digested, the end condition of the BB state is satisfied. A stop operation for establishing a "JAC rip" by winning a specific batting order replay (for example, a replay role that functions as a "JAC replay") that allows the "JAC rip" to be stopped and displayed (established) during non-JAC. When the information of (when all batting order navigation occurs), or when all batting order navigation does not occur but the push order is answered correctly by oneself and "JAC lip" is established, during JAC from the next game Transition. During JAC, the game period during non-JAC does not progress (that is, the number of remaining games during non-JAC is not subtracted). The "push order RB combination" is used as a part of a specific push order replay in the BB state (see FIGS. 228 and 229 described later).

During JAC, the game period is set until the batting order small win wins 5 times (or until the batting order small win is notified 5 times), and when the batting order small win wins 5 times ( Alternatively, when the batting order small win is notified of the push order five times), the JAC period ends, and the game returns to the non-JAC period from the next game. In addition, during JAC, regardless of whether it is in the SBB state or the NBB state, when a batting order small winning combination is won, a batting order navigation that always wins 15 cards is generated. Therefore, during JAC, it becomes easy to increase the game value regardless of whether it is in the SBB state or the NBB state.

Here, in the SBB state, when a specific batting order replay is won during non-JAC, all batting order navigation always occurs. Therefore, in the SBB state, it is easy to shift to JAC. On the other hand, in the NBB state, when a specific push order replay is won during non-JAC, all batting order navigation may or may not occur. Therefore, in the NBB state, it is more difficult to shift to JAC than in the SBB state. The conditions for generating the full batting order navigation at the time of winning a specific push order replay during non-JAC in the NBB state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224.

In addition, in the SBB state, when a batting order small winning combination is won during non-JAC, a full batting order navigation that always wins 15 cards is generated. Therefore, in the SBB state, it becomes easy to increase the game value during non-JAC. On the other hand, in the NBB state, when a batting order small winning combination is won during non-JAC, all batting order navigation may or may not occur. Therefore, in the NBB state, it becomes difficult to increase the game value during non-JAC as compared with the SBB state. The conditions for generating the full batting order navigation at the time of winning the batting order small winning combination during non-JAC in the NBB state will be described later with reference to FIGS. 223 and 224.

Further, when the "BAR matching combination" is won in the NBB state, it is determined to shift to the RUSH state after the end of the NBB state, and the value of the RUSH stock to be added is determined by lottery. The value of the RUSH stock to be added is one of "1", "2", "3", "5", "10" and "20", but in most cases "3" is added. .. If the "BAR matching combination" is won in the SBB state, it has already been decided to shift to the RUSH state after the end of the SBB state, so only the value of the RUSH stock to be added is drawn. That is, even in the SBB state, there is no loss, and it is decided to extend the RUSH state.

In the NBB state, the RUSH transition lottery may be performed. For example, when the winning combination is a rare combination other than the "BAR matching combination" and the "pushing order RB combination", it is decided to shift to the RUSH state with the winning probability associated with the rare combination. It may be. Further, when the RUSH transition lottery is won, the value of the RUSH stock to be added may be determined by the lottery. In addition, when this RUSH transition lottery is won, the transition to the RUSH state may be made immediately after the end of the NBB state, or a maximum of about 50 games of precursor G number is set, and (End of NBB state-normally ... When the precursor G number is exhausted (across the transition to the advantageous section), the transition to the RUSH state may be made from the next game. Further, the same RUSH transition lottery (in this case, the RUSH extension lottery is performed as described above) can be performed even in the SBB state. However, in this case, since the state shifts to the RUSH state immediately after the end of the SBB state, the precursor G number may not be set. Further, the RUSH transition lottery may be performed only at the start (first game) or the end (final game) of the BB state.

Further, in the BB state, when the end condition of the BB state is satisfied, when the end of the SBB state, and when the current RUSH stock value is "> 0", and during the BB state (NBB state), " If the player wins the "BAR matching role", the game shifts to the RUSH state from the next game (see (8) in FIGS. 158 and 159). In this example, when the RUSH state is changed to the BB state, the BB state is always set to the SBB state.

Further, in the BB state, when the end condition of the BB state is satisfied, and if the condition shown in (8) in FIGS. 158 and 159 is not satisfied, the next game shifts to the normal / advantageous section (FIG. 158). And (7) in FIG. 159). However, as described above, when the RUSH transition lottery is performed in the NBB state, there is still a possibility that it is a precursory state after winning the RUSH state even if the transition to the normal / advantageous section remains. , The player's expectation can be maintained.

(RB state)
The RB state is a pseudo-bonus state (that is, during AT), and is regarded as an actual bonus state (regular bonus). Therefore, from such a viewpoint, it is possible to configure the RB state as an actual bonus state (type 1 special accessory). The RB state is defined as the game period until the batting order small winning combination wins 5 times (or until the batting order small winning combination is notified 5 times), and when the batting order small winning combination wins 5 times ( Alternatively, when the batting order is notified five times for the batting order small winning combination), the end condition of the RB state is satisfied. In the RB state, when the batting order small winning combination is won, the all batting order navigation always occurs. Therefore, in the RB state, it becomes easy to increase the game value.

When the "BAR matching combination" is won in the RB state, it is determined to shift to the RUSH state after the end of the RB state, and the value of the RUSH stock to be added is determined by lottery. The value of the RUSH stock to be added is the same as that in the normal / advantageous section.

Further, in the RB state, when the number of digestion games reaches the ceiling G number, it is determined to shift to the RUSH state after the end of the RB state, and the value of the RUSH stock to be added is determined by lottery. NS. The value of the RUSH stock to be added is the same as that in the normal / advantageous section.

In the RB state, the RUSH transition lottery may be performed. For example, when the winning combination is a rare combination other than the "BAR matching combination" and the "pushing order RB combination", it is decided to shift to the RUSH state with the winning probability associated with the rare combination. It may be. Further, when the RUSH transition lottery is won, the value of the RUSH stock to be added may be determined by the lottery. In addition, when this RUSH transition lottery is won, the transition to the RUSH state may be made immediately after the end of the RB state, or a maximum of about 50 games of precursor G number is set (end of the RB state-normally ... When the precursor G number is exhausted (across the transition to the advantageous section), the transition to the RUSH state may be made from the next game. Further, the RUSH transition lottery may be performed only at the start (first game) or the end (final game) of the RB state.

Further, in the RB state, when the end condition of the RB state is satisfied, when the RB state is the RB state which has shifted from the RUSH state, or when it has been determined that the RB state shifts to the RUSH state when the ceiling G number is reached. And, if the player wins the "BAR matching combination" during the RB state, the game shifts to the RUSH state from the next game (see (10) in FIGS. 158 and 159).

Further, in the RB state, when the end condition of the RB state is satisfied, and if the condition shown in (10) in FIGS. 158 and 159 is not satisfied, the next game shifts to the normal / advantageous section (FIG. 158). And (9) in FIG. 159). However, as described above, when the RUSH transition lottery is performed in the RB state, there is still a possibility that it is a precursory state after winning the RUSH state even if the transition to the normal / advantageous section remains. , The player's expectation can be maintained.

(RUSH state)
The RUSH state is a gaming state in which information on a stop operation (stop operation mode) that is advantageous to the player is notified, which is defined as a state different from the pseudo bonus state. In the RUSH state, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won, the correct answer pressing order in which the symbol combination of "RB" is stopped and displayed is always notified (all batting order navigation always occurs). , It is easy to shift to the RB state. In addition, in the RUSH state, when a batting order small winning combination is won, the correct batting order of 15 winning cards is always notified (all batting order navigation always occurs), which increases the game value. Is easy.

Further, in the RUSH state, the game period is continued by the number of RUSH stocks. For example, when the value of the RUSH stock is "= 2", the RUSH stock is consumed by "1" in the first set of the RUSH state, and the RUSH stock is further consumed by "1" in the next set, and at the end of the set. If the RUSH stock is "0", the end condition of the RUSH state is satisfied.

In the RUSH state, the game period (number of games) of the set is determined for each set. For example, at the start of the set, the game period (number of games) of the set is determined by lottery from "10 games", "20 games", and "10 games + 20 games + EX". In making this decision, for example, "10 games" are determined with a probability of "128/256", "20 games" are determined with a probability of "124/256", and "10 games" are determined with a probability of "4/256". +20 games + EX "is decided. Here, "10 games + 20 games + EX" is given a guarantee period of 30 games in total, and after 30 games have been exhausted, a lottery for falling games is performed, and if the lottery for falling games is won, it is applicable. This means that the set ends, but if the fall lottery is not won, the set continues.

In addition, when the "BAR matching combination" is won in the RUSH state, the value of the RUSH stock to be added is determined by lottery. The value of the RUSH stock to be added is the same as that in the RUSH transition lottery in the normal / advantageous section. Further, the RUSH extension lottery may be performed in the RUSH state. In this case, for example, when the winning combination is a rare combination other than the "BAR matching combination", "BB combination", and "pushing order RB combination", the winning combination is added with the winning probability associated with the rare combination. The value of the RUSH stock may be determined by lottery.

In the RUSH state, in the final game of the set (or may be the final game of the final set when the RUSH stock is "0"), the RUSH stock (that is, the final game of the final set) is higher than that of games other than the final game of the set. , The advantage regarding the granting of information on the stop operation (the right to control the game state) in which the information on the stop operation (stop operation mode) advantageous to the player is notified is high.

Specifically, for example, when the set in the RUSH state is "10 games", the value of the RUSH stock to be added when the "JAC replay" and the "reach eye replay" are won only in the 10th game is added. The special grant decision determined by lottery is made, and the special grant decision is not made in the first to ninth games when the "JAC replay" and the "reach eye replay" are won. In the final game when "10 games + 20 games + EX" is decided (that is, the game that has won the fall lottery), the special grant decision is not made.

Here, the "JAC replay" and the "reach eye replay" are not treated as a rare role but as a normal role because the winning probability is not low in total (see, for example, FIG. 176). However, if the final game of the set is won, it is determined that the RUSH state is extended by at least one set. Therefore, in the final game of the set, the expectation of extending the game period in the RUSH state is dramatically increased.

When a special grant decision is made, for example, "1" is added to the value of RUSH stock with a probability of "254/256", and "2" is added to the value of RUSH stock with a probability of "1/256". Then, "3" is added to the value of the RUSH stock with a probability of "1/256". However, the normal role for which the special grant decision is made is not limited to the above-mentioned "JAC replay" and "reach eye replay", and the value of the RUSH stock added at the time of the special grant decision and its winning. Probability is just an example.

In addition, even when the RUSH stock is granted by the special grant decision, when the precursor G number is determined and the precursor G number is exhausted (in the normal / advantageous section after the RUSH state is temporarily terminated), The RUSH stock may be restarted from the next game. In this case, the precursor G number may be set to a maximum of about 50 games as described above to increase the expectation of returning to the RUSH state in the normal / advantageous section, and the maximum number of games may be set to about 1 game so as not to give the player a sense of distrust. You may do so.

Further, when the "BB combination" is won in the RUSH state, it is determined to shift to the BB state from the next game (see (3) in FIGS. 158 and 159). Further, in the RUSH state, a BB transition lottery is performed. For example, when the winning combination is a rare role other than the "BAR matching role", "BB role", and "pushing order RB role", the winning combination is shifted to the BB state with the winning probability associated with the rare combination. Is determined. When the BB transition lottery is performed, a maximum of about 5 games of precursor G is set, and when the precursor G number is exhausted, if the BB transition lottery is won, the game will be in the BB state from the next game. Transition (see (3) in FIGS. 158 and 159). Further, the BB state shifted from the RUSH state is always the SBB state. When shifting from the RUSH state to the BB state (more specifically, the SBB state), the RUSH state is interrupted and the state shifts to the BB state, and the RUSH state is restarted after the BB state ends.

Further, as described above, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the RUSH state, the correct pushing order is always notified. Therefore, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the RUSH state, it is determined to shift to the RB state from the next game (see (12) in FIGS. 158 and 159). In this case, the transition condition may be that the symbol combination of "RB" is actually stopped and displayed. When shifting from the RUSH state to the RB state, the RUSH state is interrupted to shift to the RB state, and the RUSH state is restarted after the end of the RB state. Here, in this example, some processing differs depending on whether the game shifts to the RB state in a game other than the final game of the set in the RUSH state and the final game of the set in the RUSH state shifts to the RB state. It is configured as follows. This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 220 to 222.

Further, in the RUSH state, if the RUSH stock is "0" at the end of the set (that is, when it is determined to end the RUSH state without extension), the end condition of the RUSH state is satisfied. The next game shifts to a normal / advantageous section (see (11) in FIGS. 158 and 159).

(RUSH state for limiter)
In the gaming state of each advantageous section excluding the normal / non-advantageous section, the value of the control payout counter, which started counting from the transition from the normal / non-advantageous section to any of the advantageous sections, is ">2047". When it becomes, or when the value of the control game number counter becomes ">1459", the ending state from the next game to the limiter RUSH state (that is, the advantageous section is forcibly ended by executing the limit processing). (See (6) in FIGS. 158 and 159).

In the limiter RUSH state, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won, the correct answer in which the symbol combination of "RB" is stopped and displayed is not notified, and the pressing order in which "normal rip" is stopped and displayed is notified. Therefore, although it is configured not to shift to the RB state, when the batting order small winning combination is won, the correct batting order of 15 winning cards is always notified (all batting order navigation always occurs). It is easy to increase the game value. Further, in the RUSH state for the limiter, the transition to the BB state is not performed, and the value of the RUSH stock is not added.

If there is a possibility that it will arrive earlier when the value of the control payout counter is "> 2400" (or when the value of the control game counter is "> 1500" in the limiter RUSH state. , This may be included as a condition), the advantageous section ends due to the execution of the limit process, and the next game shifts to the normal / non-advantageous section (see (13) in FIGS. 158 and 159). In this case, as described above, information such as various counters and parameters related to the advantageous section is initialized.

In the RUSH state for the limiter, as an effect mode different from other RUSH states (RUSH-dedicated effect for the limiter), it is suggested that the end conditions are close to suppress the unexpected hit feeling with respect to the end by the limiter, or the limiter is reached. It is advisable to perform an effect of counting down each game from the time when the number of remaining games up to, for example, becomes 3, to the remaining 3 games, the remaining 2 games, the remaining 1 game, the end, etc., so that the period until the end by the limiter can be easily understood. Further, a display congratulating that a large amount of game value has been obtained to reach the limiter, a BGM output, or the like may be performed to enhance the player's feeling of exhilaration. In addition, since reaching the limiter is an event that occurs infrequently, at this time (for example, during the RUSH state for the limiter or at the end of the RUSH state for the limiter), a setting value suggestion effect with high estimation accuracy (setting 4 or more, setting 6 confirmation, etc.) (Including an effect of determining a specific set value that is advantageous to the player) may be generated.

[Symbol arrangement configuration of this example (detailed example (2))]
Subsequently, the symbol arrangement configuration of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 160. FIG. 160 is a diagram showing an example of the symbol arrangement table of this example. Since the symbol arrangement table and the symbol code table itself have already been described with reference to FIG. 15 and the like, the description here will be omitted.

In this example, 9 of "Seven", "BAR", "Rip 1", "Rip 2", "Red bell", "Blue bell", "Bra 1", "Bra 2" and "Bra" are used as the patterns. Use different types of symbols. Further, in this example, as shown in the symbol code table, symbol codes 1 to 9 are assigned to each symbol.

[Symbol combination configuration of this example (detailed example (2))]
Subsequently, the symbol combination configuration of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 161 to 170. 16 to 170 are diagrams showing an example of the symbol combination table of this example. Since the symbol combination table itself has already been described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, the description thereof will be omitted here.

“BB01” and “BB02” are a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination “3BB” (“F_3BB” described later) that wins in a three-card bet state. Further, "BB03" is a combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination "2BB" (described later, "F_2BB"), which is won in a two-card bet state.

"REP01" to "REP144" are combinations of symbols corresponding to the replay combination, and "REP01" to "REP16" are combinations of symbols corresponding to the "BAR matching combination" (for example, "C_BAR lip A_1"). Yes, "REP17" to "REP32" are symbol combinations (for example, "C_BAR fake rip A_1") corresponding to "BAR matching fake roles" (roles in which "BAR" symbols are tempted but not aligned), and "REP33". Is a combination of symbols corresponding to the "BB role" (BB / BB lip) (for example, "C_BB lip"), and "REP34" is the correct push order (RB / RB lip) of the "push order RB role". Is a combination of symbols corresponding to (for example, "C_RB rip"), and "REP35" to "REP38" are combinations of symbols corresponding to the failed pressing order of the "pushing order RB combination" (for example, "C_RB rip_1st"). (Corresponding to "1st x" described later), "REP39" to "REP47" are combinations of symbols corresponding to "chance eyes" (for example, "C_chance eyes 1_1"), and "REP48" to "REP63". Is a combination of symbols corresponding to "normal lip" (for example, "C_middle lip 1"), and "REP64" to "REP95" are combinations of symbols corresponding to "JAC lip" (for example, "C_JAC1-1st_1"). (Corresponding to "1st ○" described later), and "REP96" to "REP144" are combinations of symbols corresponding to "reach eye lip" (for example, "C_reach eye A_1").

"FRU01" to "FRU281" are a combination of symbols corresponding to small winning combinations (roles related to the addition of game value), and "FRU01" to "FRU69" indicate that the game is played in a three-card bet state. (As a premise) It is a combination of symbols corresponding to 15 pieces of prize (for example, "C_middle red bell"), and "FRU70" to "FRU281" are combinations of symbols corresponding to 1 piece of prize (for example, "C_1 piece_A"). Blue Blue Blue_A_1 "). In addition, in the names of "FRU01" to "FRU281", "blue" and "red" are a combination of symbols in which the "blue bell" symbol and the "red bell" symbol are stopped and displayed on the corresponding reels. Means that

"HZR01" to "HZR100" are a combination of symbols corresponding to the deviation (that is, neither the bonus nor the re-game is activated, and the game medium is not given). In this example, as will be described later, stop control is performed by so-called "control control", so that if a so-called "missing" occurs when a specific combination is won, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood. However, in order to ensure the intended playability, some of the combinations of "out of place" symbols are specified in the symbol combination table in advance, and they are preferentially stopped and displayed. "HZR01" to "HZR96" are a combination of symbols corresponding to the omission when a small role is missed (for example, "T_T blue blue blue Koboshi 1"), and "HZR97" to "HZR100" are bonus roles. It is a combination of symbols corresponding to the loss when the omission occurs (for example, "T_BB Koboshi_1st").

The symbol combination information specified in the symbol combination table is information that can be configured as stop allowable symbol combination information. Therefore, as will be described later with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236, at least some reels are connected with a plurality of types of symbols under the “OR” (logical sum) condition (for example, FIGS. 19 to 22). As shown in, when a plurality of types of symbols correspond to at least some reels for the symbols constituting the combination of symbols, each corresponding symbol is set as "/" ("OR" (logical sum) condition). It is also possible to define a group by (meaning) and configure one display combination with a combination of a plurality of patterns) and store it as group-defined data. Here, in FIGS. 161 to 170, although it is not described as such, it is possible to define the group and configure the display combination data as such.

For example, "BB01" and "BB02" can be configured as display combination data (that is, stop allowable symbol combination information) group-defined as "Bra 1-Bra 1 / Bra 3-Seven-Red Bell". .. That is, a plurality of combinations of symbols related to the bonus combination can also be configured as stop allowable symbol combination information defined by one group.

Further, for example, "REP48" to "REP63" are display combination data defined as "Rip1 / Rip2-Rip1 / Rip2-Rip1 / Rip2-Rip1 / Rip2" (that is, Rip2). It can be configured as stop allowed symbol combination information). That is, a plurality of combinations of symbols related to the replay combination can also be configured as stop allowable symbol combination information defined by one group.

Further, for example, "FRU01" and "FRU02" can be configured as display combination data (that is, stop allowable symbol combination information) group-defined as "Seven-BAR / red bell-ANY-ANY". That is, a plurality of combinations of symbols related to the small winning combination can also be configured as stop allowable symbol combination information defined by one group.

Further, for example, "HZR01" to "HZR16" are display combination data defined as "lip 1 / lip 2-blue bell / red bell-blue bell / red bell-blue bell / red bell" (that is, It can be configured as stop allowed symbol combination information). That is, a plurality of combinations of symbols related to the loss can also be configured as stop allowable symbol combination information defined by one group. It should be noted that the stop permissible symbol combination information related to the loss has been devised to further reduce the amount of data. This point will be described later with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236.

[Internal winning combination configuration of this example (detailed example (2))]
Subsequently, the internal winning combination configuration of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 171 to 201. 171 to 177 are views showing an example of the internal lottery table of this example. Since the internal lottery table itself has already been described with reference to FIGS. 16 to 18, the description here is omitted, but the probability denominator is "65536" in this example as well. "Lottery value / 65536" is the winning probability of each internal winning combination. Further, FIGS. 178 to 201 are diagrams showing an example of the correspondence relationship between the internal winning combination and the corresponding symbol combination (that is, the symbol combination in which the derivation display is permitted when each internal winning combination is won). Since FIGS. 178 to 201 basically have the same configuration as those of FIGS. 149 to 152, the description of the figure itself will be omitted.

In FIGS. 171 to 177, each gaming state (between non-flags in which neither 2BB nor 3BB is carried over, between 2BB flags in which 2BB is carried over) and betting state (between 3BB flags in which 3BB is carried over) and betting state (2). The internal lottery table for each of the two bets (state) in which the game is played with one bet (state) and the three bets (state) in which the game is played with three bets is shown. It should be noted that FIGS. 171 to 177 are internal lottery tables for specific set values (“setting 1” in this example), and the description of the internal lottery table for set values other than the specific set values is omitted. ing. As described above, basically, the higher the set value, the more advantageous the lottery for any combination is, but the higher the set value, the more advantageous the lottery for the processing related to the advantageous section. Alternatively, a common table may be used for the internal lottery table so that the internal lottery process can be performed.

"F_3124JAC" to "F_3421JAC" are internal winning roles of "JAC Replay". For example, the stop operation is performed in the indicated push order (for example, in the case of "F_3124JAC", the third reel first stop, the first reel second stop, the second reel third stop, the fourth reel fourth stop). If it is broken, "JAC rip" is stopped and displayed, and if the stop operation is performed in a different pressing order, "normal rip" is stopped and displayed. That is, it constitutes one of the push order replays.

"F_12RB_4123JAC" to "F_43RB_3421JAC" are internal winning combinations that are "JAC replay" in the BB state (more specifically, during non-JAC) and "push order RB combination" in other states. For example, when the stop operation is performed in the push order written on the left side of the character "RB" (for example, in the case of "F_12RB_4123JAC", the first stop on the first reel and the second stop on the second reel), " "RB Lip" is displayed as a stop, and the push order written on the left side of the letters "JAC" (for example, in the case of "F_12RB_4123JAC", the 4th reel 1st stop, the 1st reel 2nd stop, the 2nd reel 3rd When the stop operation is performed at the stop operation (stop, 4th stop of the 3rd reel), the "JAC lip" is displayed as a stop. The details are as shown in FIG. 228. That is, it constitutes one of the push order replays.

"F_2nd lip BB1" and "F_2nd lip BB2" are internal winning combinations of "BB role". When the stop operation is performed in the push order of the first stop of the second reel, the "normal lip" is displayed as a stop. Therefore, for example, in a state where it is not appropriate to display the "BB lip" as a stop (for example, a RUSH state for a limiter), the push order of the first stop of the second reel may be notified. Further, when the stop operation is performed in another pressing order, "BB rip" is stopped and displayed according to the timing of the stop operation. In this case, "RB rip" may be displayed as a stop depending on the timing of the stop operation. That is, it constitutes one of the push order replays. However, in this case, at the start of the next game, the "seven-matched" effect described later may be performed. Further, from such a viewpoint, the RB challenge effect may be performed in the game that wins the "BB role".

"F_2nd Lip BAR Fake" is an internal winning role of "BAR Matching Fake Role". When the stop operation is performed in the push order of the first stop of the second reel, the "normal lip" is displayed as a stop. Therefore, for example, in a state where it is not appropriate to stop and display the "BAR fake clip" (for example, the RUSH state for the limiter), the push order of the first stop of the second reel may be notified. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in another pressing order, "BAR fake rip" is stopped and displayed. That is, it constitutes one of the push order replays.

"F_2nd Lip BAR Alignment" is an internal winning combination of "BAR Alignment Role". When the stop operation is performed in the push order of the first stop of the second reel, the "normal lip" is displayed as a stop. Therefore, for example, in a state where it is not appropriate to stop and display the "BAR alignment lip" (for example, the RUSH state for the limiter), the push order of the first stop of the second reel may be notified. In addition, when the stop operation is performed in another pressing order, the "BAR alignment lip" is stopped and displayed. That is, it constitutes one of the push order replays.

"F_reach eyes_3124JAC" to "F_reach eyes_3421JAC" are "JAC replays" in the BB state (more specifically, during non-JAC), and "reach eyes replay" in other states. It is a role. For example, stop in the indicated push order (for example, in the case of "F_reachth_3124JAC", the third reel first stop, the first reel second stop, the second reel third stop, the fourth reel fourth stop). When the operation is performed, the "JAC lip" is stopped and displayed, and when the stop operation is performed in a different pressing order, the "reach eye lip" (or "normal lip") is stopped and displayed. That is, it constitutes one of the push order replays. The "reach eye replay" is treated as a normal role in the game in which the above-mentioned special grant decision is made, but may be configured to be treated as a rare role in other games.

"F_chance eye 1" and "F_chance eye 2" are internal winning roles of "chance eye". "Chance eye lip" is stopped and displayed regardless of the player's stop operation. The "chance eye" is treated as a rare role.

"F_upper blue bell", "F_middle blue bell" and "F_lower blue bell" are internal winning roles of "blue bell alignment". Regardless of the player's stop operation mode, the "blue bells" are aligned in each line (or may be a different line), and 15 cards are won (2 cards are won in the case of a 2-card bet state). In addition, "Blue Bell Matching" is treated as a rare role.

"F_upper red bell" and "F_middle red bell" are internal winning roles of "red bell alignment". Regardless of the player's stop operation mode, the "red bells" are aligned in each of the indicated lines (or may be different lines), and 15 cards are won (2 cards are won in the case of a 2-card bet state). In addition, "Red Bell Matching" is treated as a rare role.

"F_one-sheet combination A" and "F_one-sheet combination B" are internal winning combinations of "normal one-sheet combination". If the timing of the stop operation (1/2) is appropriate, one prize will be won, and if the timing of the stop operation (1/2) is not appropriate, the prize will be missed. The "normal one-card role" is treated as a normal role, but may be treated as a rare role.

The "F_upper common bell" is the internal winning role of the "common bell". In the 3-card bet state between the 2BB and 3BB flags, 15 cards will be won regardless of the player's stop operation mode. In addition, in a three-card bet state between non-flags, one prize is awarded regardless of the player's stop operation mode. In addition, in the two-card bet state, two cards are won regardless of the player's stop operation mode. The "common bell" is treated as a normal role, but may be treated as a rare role.

The "F_middle-stage common bell" is the internal winning role of the "common bell". In the 3-card bet state between the 2BB and 3BB flags, 15 cards will be won regardless of the player's stop operation mode. In addition, in a 3-card bet state between non-flags, 15 cards will be won regardless of the player's stop operation mode. In addition, in the two-card bet state, two cards are won regardless of the player's stop operation mode. The "common bell" is treated as a normal role, but may be treated as a rare role.

"F_1234 bell_A1" to "F_4321 bell_B2" are internal winning roles of "batting order small role". For example, the stop operation is performed in the indicated push order (for example, in the case of "F_1234 bell_A1", the first stop of the first reel, the second stop of the second reel, the third stop of the third reel, and the fourth stop of the fourth reel). If is performed, 15 cards will be won, and if the stop operation is performed in a different push order, 1 card will be won if the stop operation timing (1/2) is appropriate, and the stop operation will be won. If the timing (1/2) is not appropriate, it will be missed. That is, it constitutes one of the push order small combinations. In the two-card bet state, the push order is no longer a small winning combination, and two cards are won regardless of the player's stop operation mode.

"F_RB 1-sheet combination" is an internal winning combination of "1-sheet combination in BB". In the BB game state (common in 2BB and 3BB. The game can be played only in the 3-card bet state), one prize is awarded regardless of the player's stop operation mode.

"F_RB all roles" is an internal winning role of "15 cards in BB". In the BB game state (common in 2BB and 3BB. The game can be played only in the 3-card bet state), 15 cards will be won regardless of the player's stop operation mode.

In this example, in the BB game state (RB game state in which the game is continuously operating during that period), the internal lottery process is performed with reference to the internal lottery table of FIG. 177, and the combination of the symbols of "2BB" is stopped. In the 2BB game state (during 2BB) that was activated by being displayed, it ended with the end condition that there was more than one payout, and it was activated when the combination of the symbols of "3BB" was stopped and displayed. In the 3BB game state (during 3BB), the game ends on the condition that more than 62 cards have been paid out.

In "F_pseudo-loss 1", the bonus combination is carried over, but the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination is not displayed as a stop (that is, between 3BB flags / 2 bets, or between 2BB flags / 3 bets). In the state), it is the data (internal winning combination) that is set when it becomes "out of place".

"F_pseudo-loss 2" is when the bonus combination is carried over (including the winning game) and the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed (that is, between 3BB flags / 3 bets (non-flags / 3). In the case of (bet state) or 2BB flag / 2 bet state (non-flag / 2 bet state)), if the bonus combination is a single win (“F_3BB” if 3 bet state), 2 This is the data (internal winning combination) set in (when only "F_2BB" is determined in the bet state).

[Stop control configuration of this example (detailed example (2))]
Subsequently, the stop control configuration of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 202 to 219. 202 to 207 are diagrams showing an example of the priority table selection table of this example, and FIGS. 208 to 219 are diagrams showing an example of the priority table of this example.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the stop control configuration, the internal winning combination is determined in the internal lottery process (see S204 etc. in FIG. 56), and the determined internal winning combination is determined in the reel stop setting process (see S209 etc. in FIG. 56). The pull-in priority table selection table number, the pull-in priority table number, the stop table number, etc. are acquired according to the winning combination and the game state, and the pull-in priority storage process during all reel rotation or after some reels are stopped (Fig. In (see S212 of 56, S724 of FIG. 72, etc.), the attraction priority is stored by the acquired attraction priority table selection table number or the table data corresponding to the attraction priority table number, and the stop operation is performed. In the reel stop control process (see FIG. 72, etc.), first, the number of sliding pieces is determined by the table data corresponding to the acquired stop table number, and then within the range of the predetermined number of sliding pieces including the stop start position. For each symbol position (for example, assuming that the stop start position is the number of sliding pieces "0", each symbol position within the range of the number of sliding pieces "1" to "4"), more appropriate sliding is performed according to the stored pull-in priority. It was explained that a search is made for whether or not there is a number of pieces, and if there is a more appropriate number of sliding pieces, the number of sliding pieces is changed to determine the final stop control position, and the target reel is stopped.

Here, performing stop control using table data in which the number of sliding pieces such as a stop table is directly defined in advance is generally called "table control" or the like, and is a predetermined position including a stop start position. It is common to search for which symbol position should be stopped for each symbol position within the range of the number of sliding pieces under certain conditions, and to perform stop control to determine the number of sliding pieces according to the search result. It is called "control control". That is, in the present embodiment, it has been described that "table control" + "control control" is performed as an example of the stop control configuration.

On the other hand, in this example, only "control control" is performed. In particular, in this example, it is assumed that four reels are provided, so if all the stop tables are specified in advance according to the pushing order, the amount of data related to this will be enormous. .. However, this is not intended to limit the invention according to this example. It is just an example of the stop control configuration, and the invention according to this example can be applied regardless of what kind of stop control is performed. For example, "table control" may be performed on the first stopped reel, and then "control control" may be performed on the first stopped reel, or "control control" may be performed on the first stopped to third stopped reels. The "table control" may be performed, and the "control control" may be performed on the fourth stopped reel which is the final stop.

An example of the stop control configuration of this example also basically follows the same flow as described above. Further, in this example, for convenience of explanation, the tables shown in FIGS. 202 to 207 are referred to as "priority table selection tables", and the tables shown in FIGS. 208 to 219 are referred to as "priority tables". Can be a table having the same data structure as the "pull-in priority table selection table" and the "pull-in priority table", respectively, or can be a table having a different data structure. In the former case, it is also possible to perform various stop control-related processes shown in the present embodiment using these tables.

First, the internal winning combination is determined in the internal lottery process (see S204, etc. in FIG. 56), and the priority is given according to the determined internal winning combination and the gaming state in the reel stop setting process (see S209, etc. in FIG. 56). Table selection The table type is acquired. For example, if the game state is "between 2BB flags / 3-bet state", the priority table selection table (No. 1) shown in FIGS. 202 and 203 is used according to the internal winning combination (that is, the "internal winning combination". The information indicating the priority table selection table (of the row (address) corresponding to "" is acquired. Similarly, if the gaming state is "between non-BB flags", information indicating the priority table selection table according to the internal winning combination is acquired from the priority table selection table (No. 2) shown in FIGS. 204 and 205. If the gaming state is another gaming state, information indicating the priority table selection table according to the internal winning combination is acquired from the priority table selection table (No. 3) shown in FIGS. 206 and 207.

In the priority table selection table, as shown in FIGS. 202 to 207, the type of priority table according to the push order for the determined internal winning combination (combination of one or more symbols allowed to be stopped). (Priority table number) is specified. In addition, in FIGS. 202 to 207, for example, in the column of "1XXX", the priority table number when the first reel is first stopped is defined, and in the column of "12XX", the priority table number is defined. , The priority table number when the second reel is secondly stopped after the first reel is first stopped is defined, and the first reel is first stopped in the column of "123 ×", and the first reel is first stopped. After the 2nd reel is second stopped, the priority table number when the 3rd reel is 3rd stopped is specified, and in the column of "1234", the 1st reel is first stopped and the 2nd reel is The priority table number when the 4th reel is 4th stopped after the 2nd stop and the 3rd reel are 3rd stopped is defined.

As a result, the priority table selection table may be configured so that the type of priority table (priority table number) according to the pressing order can be recognized (furthermore, the determined internal winning combination (stop). For the allowed combination of one or more symbols), which symbol combination is stopped according to the pressing order (uniformly if the pressing order does not matter) by what priority (priority). The data structure is not limited to the one described above (the same applies to the priority table described later). In other words, the information defined in the priority table selection table and the priority table described later is stop information for making it possible to identify the combination of symbols to be stopped. That is, it can be said that each process for determining such stop information performed by the main CPU 101 is a process for determining stop allowable symbol combination information according to the determined internal winning combination.

Next, when the stop operation is performed by the player (S714 in FIG. 72 (reel stop control process) is determined to be YES), the stop start position is stored (S718 in FIG. 72), and the reel stop selection process (S719 in FIG. 72) is performed. ), The type of priority table (priority table number) indicated by the data of the acquired priority table selection table is acquired according to the pressing order, and the internal winning combination (stop) determined by the acquired priority table. For the combination of one or more symbols allowed), the symbols at each symbol position within the range of 5 symbols including the stop start position have high priority (priority) according to a predetermined order. We searched whether the symbol corresponds to the combination of symbols (the symbol that is appropriate to stop), and obtained the search result that it has the highest priority (priority) (it is appropriate to stop). The number of sliding pieces at which the reel stops is determined at the (determined) symbol position. The priority (priority) information does not necessarily have to be indispensable. That is, the priority table may be composed of information on whether it is permissible to stop at the symbol position or whether it is not permissible (prohibited) to stop at the symbol position.

The "predetermined order" may be the order in which the search is performed from the one with the smallest number of sliding pieces (for example, "0" → "1" → ... "4"), or the sliding pieces. The search order may be from the one with the largest number (for example, "4"-> "3"-> ... "0"), or the determined pattern (for example, "0"-> "2"-> The search order may be "4"-> "1"-> "3", etc.). Further, when there are a plurality of symbol positions having the same priority (priority order) within the search range, the symbol position having the smaller number of sliding pieces may be the final stop position. , The symbol position with the larger number of sliding pieces may be the final stop position, or the symbol position with the earlier search order is the final stop position according to the "predetermined order". The stop position may be set, or the symbol position later in the search order may be the final stop position.

The symbol combination information defined in the priority table shown in FIGS. 208 to 219 is information that can be configured as stop allowable symbol combination information. In addition, the information shown in each column of "priority" is information that defines the priority (priority) of the corresponding symbol combination (stop allowable symbol combination information), and "1" of "priority" is the most. The priority (priority) is high, and "5" of "priority" has the lowest priority (priority). Further, when the data of "1" is specified in the corresponding symbol combination (stop allowable symbol combination information), the search is performed as described above.

For example, when "F_upper red bell" is determined as the internal winning combination, the combinations of symbols that are allowed to stop are "C_middle red bell" and "C_upper red bell_1-4" (FIGS. 178 to 178). 185), in this case, the priority table (No. 1) (priority table number “0”) shown in FIGS. 208 and 209 is used regardless of the push order (see FIGS. 202 to 207). Then, in the priority table (No. 1) (priority table number "0"), "C_upper red bell_1 to 4" has the highest priority with priority "1", and "C_middle red bell" has priority. The ranking is "2", which is lower in priority than "C_upper red bell_1-4".

Then, if there is a symbol that constitutes each symbol combination in a predetermined order within the range from the stop start position to 4 frames ahead (5 symbols including the stop start position), that is the case. The priorities are compared. For example, when the second reel is first stopped, the symbol "red" constituting "C_middle red bell" is within the range from the stop start position to 4 frames ahead (5 symbols including the stop start position). If there is a "bell" and a symbol "blue bell" that composes "C_upper red bell_1-4", it is decided to stop the "blue bell" symbol in preference to the "red bell" symbol. Will be done. If there is no symbol "red bell" that constitutes "C_middle red bell" and there is a symbol "blue bell" that constitutes "C_upper red bell_1-4", then there is a "blue bell" symbol. Is decided to stop. If there is a symbol "red bell" that constitutes "C_middle red bell" and there is no symbol "blue bell" that constitutes "C_upper red bell_1-4", then (the search target is It is decided to stop the "red bell" symbol (which is the priority of the runner-up). As shown in FIGS. 202 to 207, the priority table used may change depending on the stage of the push order and the stop operation. In this case, the stage of the push order and the stop operation is changed. The symbol to be stopped is determined using the priority table specified in the above.

Here, since the priority table is configured to be commonly used by a plurality of internal winning combinations, it is a combination of symbols that are the search targets (data of "1" is specified). However, if it is not allowed to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the game in the first place, the combination of symbols will not be searched. Further, as the stop operation stage progresses, even if the game is allowed to stop the combination of symbols, the combination of symbols may have already stopped in a form that does not stop. In this case as well, The combination of the symbols is not searched. That is, when stop control is performed using the priority table, is it a combination of symbols that are allowed to stop in the game, or is it a combination of symbols that may still be stopped in the game? Is taken into consideration, and then the priority of the symbol is searched.

[Control in the RUSH state of this example (detailed example (No. 2))]
Subsequently, the control in the RUSH state of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 220 to 222. FIG. 220 is a diagram for explaining an example of the control flow in the RUSH state of this example, and FIG. 221 is a diagram showing an example of the RUSH remaining G number management process for managing the game period in the RUSH state of this example. , FIG. 222 is a diagram illustrating a modified example of the RUSH state of this example.

As described above, in this example, when the game shifts to the RUSH state, the game period is set for each set, for example, "10 games" or "20 games". Further, in the RUSH state, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won, the all batting order navigation may occur and the state may shift to the RB state. In this case, the RUSH state is interrupted and resumed after the end of the RB state.

Further, as described above, in the RUSH state, the special grant decision is not made in the games other than the final game in one set, and the special grant decision is made in the final game in one set. In the special grant decision, RUSH stock is always granted as long as the normal role (normal replay) "JAC replay" or "reach eye replay" is won. That is, when a game other than the final game in one set in the RUSH state is set as the first game state and the final game in one set in the RUSH state is set as the second game state, the second game state is compared with the first game state. Is more advantageous in granting the right to be controlled to the game state in which the player is notified of the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

It should be noted that the special grant decision does not have to be made only for the final game in one set. For example, it may be between the remaining two games including the final game in one set, or as one or more specific games (for example, "7th game", "17th game", etc. ending in "7"). May be good. Further, in the RUSH state, for example, a second game state transition lottery is performed for each game in the first game state, and when this is won, it is determined that the subsequent one or a plurality of games are in the second game state. You may do so.

In this example, the RUSH state is managed by the number of sets (however, the number of games in one set varies), but the management method of the game period is not limited to this. For example, the number of games may be managed, the number of navigations may be managed, or the difference number may be managed. This also applies to the above-mentioned BB state and RB state. That is, if the predetermined update condition is satisfied (for example, if the game management (including the case where the number of games is managed in the set) is satisfied, one game is exhausted, if the number of navigations is managed, the navigation is generated, and the difference number management is performed. If so, the managed game period is updated according to the payment of the game value exceeding the number of bets (the number of games counter is subtracted (added) by 1, and the number of navigation counters is subtracted (added) by 1). , The difference number counter is subtracted (added) by the difference number), any method can be adopted.

In any case, in the RUSH state, it is sufficient to make it possible to control one or a plurality of games to the second gaming state under predetermined conditions. For example, in the case of managing the number of games, the game for which the special grant decision is made can be the final game or a specific game, and in the case of managing the number of navigations, the game for which the special grant decision is made can be the specified number of times. It can be the next game where navigation is performed, or the next game where navigation is performed a specific number of times, and if the difference number management is used, the game for which the special grant decision is made reaches the specified difference number. Or, it can be the next game that has reached a specific difference number.

FIG. 220 (a) shows an example of the basic specifications of such a RUSH state. In FIG. 220 (a), for example, the normal / advantageous section (“normal”) is shifted to the RUSH state, and in this RUSH state, the game period is set to 10 games (“RUSH AT 10 games”). .. Then, basically, the game period progresses for each game ("10"-> "9"-> "8"-> ... "2"-> "1", and the number of remaining games for each game. Is subtracted by 1), and when the number of remaining games becomes 0, the RUSH state ends and the normal / advantageous section is returned. In addition, the 1st to 9th games in this RUSH state (plain frames marked with "10" to "2") are the first game states in which no special grant decision is made, and the 10th game (the final game) (the final game). The shaded frame with the notation "1") is the second game state in which the special grant decision is made. In this example, it is assumed that the number of remaining games is subtracted by 1 after the 4th stop operation (when the stop button at the 4th stop operation is off-edge). However, the number of remaining games may be updated by the addition method. Further, the update time of the number of remaining games is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and may be updated at an arbitrary time after the start operation and before the first stop operation, for example.

Next, FIG. 220 (b) shows an example of a case where the RUSH state (RUSH AT) shifts to the RB state other than the final game (that is, in the first game state). In FIG. 220 (b), for example, in the second game (a plain frame marked with "9"), the "pushing order RB role" is won, and the "RB lip" is established as a result of all batting order navigation. (Pseudo RB winning), the RUSH state is interrupted, the RB state is generated from the next game (pseudo RB), the end condition of the RB state is satisfied, the RB state ends, and the RUSH state is restarted. There is. At this time, in the second game, the number of remaining games in the RUSH state is subtracted by 1, so the RUSH state is restarted from the third game (a plain frame marked with "8").

Next, FIG. 220 (c) shows an example of a case where the RUSH state (RUSH AT) shifts to the RB state in the final game (that is, in the second game state). In FIG. 220 (c), for example, in the tenth game (diagonal frame marked with "1"), the "pushing order RB role" is won, and the "RB lip" is established as a result of all batting order navigation. (Pseudo RB winning), the RUSH state is interrupted, the RB state is generated from the next game (pseudo RB), the end condition of the RB state is satisfied, the RB state ends, and the RUSH state is restarted. There is. At this time, in the 10th game, since the number of remaining games in the RUSH state is subtracted by 1, the RUSH state should end at the same time as the RB state ends.

However, as described above, the final game in the RUSH state is a game in which a special grant decision is made, and it is very advantageous for the player who is determined to extend the RUSH state as long as he wins a specific normal role. It is in a state. On the other hand, although the RB state is also a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, the advantage of the RUSH stock grant decision is inferior to that of the final game in the RUSH state. That is, the second gaming state has a higher degree of advantage in granting the right to be controlled to the gaming state in which the player is notified of the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, as compared with the RB state. Therefore, if the player wins the "push-order RB role" during the RUSH state, the player's interest should be improved, but the player is discouraged and the interest is reduced in the final game. There is.

Therefore, when the final game in the RUSH state is to shift to the RB state, the number of remaining games in the RUSH state is not subtracted, and the 10th game in the RUSH state (the notation of "1" is displayed). We guarantee that we will have the opportunity to make a special grant decision by restarting from the shaded frame that was made. An example of specific control will be described later with reference to FIG. 221.

In FIG. 220 (c), a case where the game shifts to the RB state in response to winning the "pushing order RB combination" in the final game in the RUSH state is described as an example, but the final game in the RUSH state is described. The same control as above shall be performed even when the game shifts to the BB state (SBB state) in response to winning the "BB role". Further, when the BB transition lottery is won in the RUSH state and the precursor G number becomes 0 in the final game to shift to the BB state (SBB state), the same control as described above may be performed. In addition, if the BB transition lottery is won in the RUSH state and the precursor G number is 1 or more in the final game, a special grant decision is made in the final game as it is, and if the RUSH state continues, in the continued RUSH state. When the precursor G number becomes 0, it shifts to the BB state (SBB state), and when the RUSH state does not continue, it shifts to the BB state (SBB state) when the precursor G number becomes 0 in the transitioned normal / advantageous section. ) Should be used. That is, in this example, the BB state is a pseudo-bonus, but it can be carried over across the gaming states in the same way as the actual bonus.

(RUSH remaining G number management process)
Next, the RUSH remaining G number management process executed by the main CPU 101 in the RUSH state will be described with reference to FIG. 221. Note that FIG. 221 is a schematic flowchart illustrating a main part of the RUSH remaining G number management process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the gaming state is in RUSH (S2101). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the RUSH state. In S2101, when the main CPU 101 determines that the gaming state is not in RUSH (when the determination in S2101 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the RUSH remaining G number management process.

On the other hand, in S2101, when the main CPU 101 determines that the gaming state is in RUSH (when the determination in S2101 is YES), the main CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the RUSH remaining G number counter (S2102). The RUSH remaining G number counter is a counter that manages the number of remaining games in the RUSH state. For example, "10" is set at the start of the RUSH state of 10 games.

Next, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RUSH remaining G number counter is 0 (S2103). When the main CPU 101 determines in S2103 that the RUSH remaining G number counter is not 0 (when the determination in S2103 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the RUSH remaining G number management process.

On the other hand, in S2103, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RUSH remaining G number counter is 0 (when the determination in S2103 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the special RUSH transition condition is satisfied (when the determination is YES). S2104). The special RUSH transition condition referred to here means that the above-mentioned "10 games + 20 games + EX" is set. That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not "10 games + 20 games + EX" is set. In S2104, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special RUSH transition condition is satisfied (when the determination in S2104 is YES), the main CPU 101 sets 20 in the special RUSH guaranteed G number counter (S2105), and this RUSH. The remaining G number management process is terminated. After that, the number of remaining games in the RUSH state is managed by this special RUSH guaranteed G number counter (for example, 1 is subtracted by S2102), and when it is determined that the special RUSH guaranteed G number counter is 0, each game falls lottery. Is performed, and if the fall lottery is won, the RUSH state is terminated (or, if the RUSH stock is 1 or more, the RUSH stock is consumed by "1" and continued to the next set). .. As described above, when the special RUSH transition condition is satisfied, the special grant decision is not made in the final game, and therefore the related processes of S2106 and S2107, which will be described later, are not executed.

On the other hand, in S2104, when the main CPU 101 determines that the special RUSH transition condition is not satisfied (NO determination in S2104), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the pseudo bonus transition condition is satisfied (when the special RUSH transition condition is not satisfied). S2106). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the RB state (or the BB state) in the final game (second game state) in the RUSH state. When the main CPU 101 determines in S2106 that the pseudo-bonus transition condition is not satisfied (NO in S2106), the main CPU 101 ends the RUSH remaining G number management process.

On the other hand, in S2106, when the main CPU 101 determines that the pseudo bonus transition condition is satisfied (when the determination in S2106 is YES), the main CPU 101 adds 1 to the RUSH remaining G number counter (S2107). The RUSH remaining G number management process is terminated. That is, in the final game (second game state) in the RUSH state, when the right to control the RB state (or BB state) is granted, a predetermined renewal condition for updating the managed game period is also satisfied. In this case, in order to return to the final game in the RUSH state when restarting, a process of adding 1 to the RUSH remaining G number counter is performed. On the other hand, in a game other than the final game in the RUSH state (first game state), a predetermined update in which the managed game period is updated when the right to control the RB state (or BB state) is granted. When the condition is also satisfied, such processing is prevented.

In this example, in the final game (second game state) in the RUSH state, when the right to control the RB state (or BB state) is granted, the managed game period is updated. If the update condition is also satisfied, in order to return to the final game in the RUSH state when restarting, in the game, 1 is added to the RUSH remaining G number counter once subtracted by 1. In such a case, the method for setting the game period without renewal is not limited to this. For example, the process of S2107 may be executed at any timing until the RUSH state is restarted. Further, for example, the processing of S2106 is performed before the processing of S2102, and if the determination of S2106 is YES, the processing of S2102 is not performed so that the final game in the RUSH state is returned at the time of restart. May be good. Further, for example, if the determination in S2106 is YES, the special return flag is turned on, and if the special return flag is turned on at the end of the pseudo bonus, control is performed so that at least the next game is returned to the second game state. May be good.

(Modification example)
In this example, as one embodiment, the specific game state advantageous to the player is set to the "RB state (or BB state)" which is a pseudo bonus state, and the special game state in which the stop operation mode advantageous to the player is notified is set. The "RUSH state" is defined, the special gaming state includes the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state is "a game other than the final game in the RUSH state", and the second gaming state is the "RUSH state". Although described as "final game", the specific game state, the first game state, and the state corresponding to the second game state are not limited to those described above. That is, there are a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player in some way and a special gaming state that is advantageous to a player different from this, and the special gaming state includes the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and is the first. A relationship in which the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state (or, in addition to this, the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the specific gaming state). As long as the sex is guaranteed, it is possible to correspond to various states. In this modification, the relationship between the specific gaming state, the first gaming state, and the second gaming state will be described with such a purpose.

FIG. 222 (a) shows an example of the basic specifications of the special gaming state. As described above, the special gaming state advantageous to the player includes the first gaming state and the second gaming state, and the second gaming state is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. ing. In addition, "high advantage" means that the expected value of the game value is high, the degree of decrease of the game value is low, the special game state is easily extended (or the right is easily granted), and the specific game state is defined. Various conditions such as easy transition (or easy to be granted the right), or easy transition to another special gaming state (for example, chance zone) different from them (or easy to be granted the right). Can be applied.

Further, the first game state and the second game state may be managed by a common management means (for example, the same number of games counter) for the game period, or may be managed by different management means (for example, different game states). The game period may be managed by the game counter). In any case, in the normal game state (a state that is disadvantageous to the player, a state in which the game value decreases as the game progresses), the first game state transition condition is satisfied after the first game state transition allowable condition is satisfied. If so, it is possible to shift from the normal gaming state to the first gaming state. Further, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift from the normal gaming state to the second gaming state when the second gaming state transition condition is satisfied after the second gaming state transition allowable condition is satisfied.

Further, in the first gaming state, when the second gaming state transition condition is satisfied after the second gaming state transition allowable condition is satisfied, the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state is possible. Further, in the first game state, when the first game state end condition is satisfied (for example, when the game number counter becomes 0), it is possible to shift from the first game state to the normal game state. In this case, it may be possible to shift to the normal gaming state when the transition condition is satisfied after the first gaming state end condition is satisfied, instead of immediately shifting to the normal gaming state. Further, in the second game state, when the second game state end condition is satisfied (for example, when the game number counter becomes 0), the transition from the second game state to the first game state is possible. In this case, the transition to the first gaming state may not be performed immediately, but the transition to the first gaming state may be made when the transition condition is satisfied after the second gaming state end condition is satisfied. Further, in the second gaming state, when the second gaming state end condition is satisfied, it is possible to shift from the second gaming state to the normal gaming state. In this case, it may be possible to shift to the normal gaming state when the transition condition is satisfied after the second gaming state end condition is satisfied, instead of immediately shifting to the normal gaming state.

Further, in the first gaming state, when the specific gaming state transition condition is satisfied after the specific gaming state transition allowable condition is satisfied, the transition from the first gaming state to the specific gaming state is possible. Further, in the second gaming state, if the specific gaming state transition condition is satisfied after the specific gaming state transition allowable condition is satisfied, the transition from the second gaming state to the specific gaming state is possible. Further, in the normal gaming state, it is possible to shift from the normal gaming state to the specific gaming state when the specific gaming state transition condition is satisfied after the specific gaming state transition allowable condition is satisfied. In addition, in the specific game state, when the specific game state end condition is satisfied, it is possible to return to the first game state if it is the specific game state that has shifted from the first game state, and in the specific game state that has shifted from the second game state. If there is, it is possible to return to the second game state. In addition, if it is a specific gaming state that has transitioned from the normal gaming state, in principle, it returns to the normal gaming state, but it is also possible to shift to the special gaming state. Further, when the specific game state end condition is satisfied, the game state may not be immediately returned (shifted) to each game state, and then, when the transition condition is satisfied, the game state may be returned (shifted).

Next, FIG. 222 (b) shows an example of a transition from the first gaming state to the specific gaming state. The normal gaming state shifts to the first gaming state. For example, in this first gaming state, the gaming period is set to 10 games, and the second game of the first gaming state (a plain frame marked with "9"). ), The first game state is interrupted when the specific game state transition allowable condition is satisfied. Here, for example, assuming that the specific game state is a pseudo-bonus state or an actual bonus state, in this game, for example, a bonus confirmation notification such as "victory" or "WIN" is performed on the display device 11. Further, in this game, if a predetermined renewal condition is satisfied, the remaining game period is renewed accordingly. In the example shown in FIG. 222 (b), after the specific game state transition allowable condition is satisfied, the start waiting state (notation of "wait") is set until the specific game state transition condition is satisfied. The start waiting state is a state in which multiple games can be continued. For example, if the specific game state is a pseudo bonus state or an actual bonus state, it is specified that the special symbol alignment is stopped and displayed in the start waiting state. The game state transition condition is satisfied. However, in a game in which the specific game state transition allowable condition is satisfied, the specific game state transition condition is immediately established (or at the start of the next game), and the specific game state transition condition is established (for example, by performing a special symbol alignment effect). It can also be migrated. That is, it is possible not to provide the start waiting state.

The state shifts to the specific game state, the game is performed in the specific game state, and when the condition for ending the specific game state is satisfied, the first game state is restarted. As described above, when the specific game state end condition is satisfied, the player may return to the first game state when the transition condition is satisfied. In addition, after the specific game state end condition is satisfied, it is possible to wait for the return until the transition condition is satisfied. Here, for example, when the specific game state is the actual bonus state and the first game state is ART (high RT), when the low RT is reached after the end of the bonus state, the low RT is started. The state of waiting for return is until the display of the high RT transition result, which is the condition for transition to high RT. Here, in FIG. 222 (b), similarly to FIG. 220 (b), in the first game state, a predetermined update condition is also satisfied in the game in which the right to be controlled to the specific game state is granted. Therefore, the game period of the first game state at the time of resumption is the renewed game period (restarted from the third game of the first game state (the plain frame marked with "8")).

On the other hand, FIG. 222 (c) shows an example of a transition from the second gaming state to the specific gaming state. For example, in this second game state, the game period is set to 5 games, and in the fourth game of the second game state (the shaded frame marked with "2"), the specific game state transition allowable condition is satisfied. , The second game state is interrupted. After that, the specific game state transition condition is satisfied in the start waiting state, the state shifts to the specific game state, the game is performed in the specific game state, the specific game state end condition is satisfied, the specific game state ends, and the second The flow until the gaming state is restarted is the same as in the first gaming state. However, in FIG. 222 (c), as in FIG. 220 (c), in the second gaming state, the predetermined update condition is satisfied in the game in which the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted. Even so, the game period in the second game state at the time of resumption is the game period in which there is no update (the remaining two games (the fourth game in the second game state (the notation of "2" ("2" is written) instead of the remaining one game). It will be restarted from the shaded frame)).

In addition, when shifting from the second gaming state to the specific gaming state, in the case of the specification that the gaming period of the second gaming state at the time of resumption is the gaming period that has not been updated, the second gaming state is higher than the specific gaming state. It is desirable that the specifications have a higher advantage for the player. Assuming that the player's advantage is higher in the specific game state than in the second game state, the player's consciousness is concentrated on the specific game state rather than the number of games in the second game state does not decrease. Because it becomes.

Further, as a further modification, a plurality of types of specific game states may be provided, and the number of games may not be reduced only when the game is interrupted by a predetermined specific game state. For example, when a predetermined specific game state is set to the above-mentioned BB state and a specific specific game state different from this is set to the above-mentioned RB state, and the specific game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is the BB state, FIG. As shown in (c) of 222, the number of games is not reduced and the game is restarted from the remaining 2 games. However, when the specific game state in which the transition condition is satisfied is the RB state, the number of games is subtracted by 1 and the remaining 1 game is used. As it is restarted from the game, it may be made to feel more benefit about the specific game state of the type in which the number of games does not decrease. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the type of specific game state as compared with the conventional method of simply giving a difference in the number of acquired games or the number of games.

(Invention 1 according to this detailed example (No. 2))
As described above, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), when shifting from the first gaming state (for example, a game other than the final game in the RUSH state) to the specific gaming state (for example, the RB state), it is specified. In the first game state restarted after the end of the game state, the game period becomes the updated game period, while the second game state (for example, the final of the RUSH state) in which the player has a higher advantage than the first game state. When shifting from the game) to the specific gaming state, the gaming period is configured so as not to be the updated gaming period in the second gaming state that is resumed after the end of the specific gaming state. That is, in the second gaming state, measures are taken to prevent the gaming period from progressing due to the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, even if the transition condition to a different state is satisfied while the player's advantage is high, the player's sense of loss is reduced to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. be able to.

As the above-mentioned measures, for example, when the game period in the special game state (for example, the RUSH state) is managed by the remaining game number counter, and the value of the remaining game number counter is subtracted by 1 for each game. After the second game state is interrupted by the transition to the specific game state, the process of adding 1 to the value of the remaining game number counter may be executed between the end of the specific game state and the restart. As a result, the above-mentioned measures can be appropriately taken without increasing the control burden more than necessary.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), when shifting from the first gaming state (for example, a game other than the final game in the RUSH state) to the specific gaming state (for example, the RB state), the specific gaming state In the first game state restarted after the end of, the game period becomes the updated game period, while the second game state (for example, the RUSH state) in which the player has a higher advantage than the first game state and the specific game state. When shifting from the final game) to the specific game state, the game period is configured so as not to be the updated game period in the second game state that is restarted after the end of the specific game state. That is, in the second gaming state, measures are taken to prevent the gaming period from progressing due to the transition to the specific gaming state. Here, since the specific gaming state has a lower advantage than the second gaming state, such measures are more preferable. As a result, even if the transition condition to a different state is satisfied while the player's advantage is high, the player's sense of loss is reduced to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. be able to.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), the special gaming state (for example, the RUSH state) is performed with a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) as one set, one of which is a player. The second gaming state has a high advantage of the right (for example, RUSH stock) for being controlled to the gaming state in which the stop operation mode which is advantageous to the player is notified, and the first gaming state is set in other games. Then, when the right to be controlled to the specific game state (for example, the RB state) is granted in the second game state (for example, when the "push order RB combination" is won), the end of the specific game state. After that, it is configured so that the game in the second game state can be performed again. That is, in the second game state, which is one game, when the player shifts to the specific game state without receiving the benefit in the highly advantageous state, the specific game state is given again the opportunity to receive the benefit. After the end, the game shifts to the second game state. As a result, even if the transition condition to a different state is satisfied while the player's advantage is high, the player's sense of loss is reduced to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. be able to.

In the second gaming state, the right to be controlled to the gaming state in which the stop operation mode advantageous to the player is notified is always granted rather than the probability that the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted. By configuring the winning probability of the predetermined combination (for example, "normal replay") to be played to be higher, the second gaming state can be set to a highly advantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the sense of expectation in a state where the player has a high degree of advantage and improve the interest of the game.

[Control in NBB state of this example (detailed example (No. 2))]
Subsequently, the control in the NBB state of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 223 to 224. FIG. 223 is a diagram illustrating an example of the control flow in the NBB state of this example, and FIG. 224 is an NBB non-JAC batting order that controls the notification content of the stop operation mode during the non-JAC in the NBB state of this example. It is a figure which shows an example of the navigation generation processing.

As described above, in this example, when the state shifts to the BB state, the BB state becomes either the NBB state or the SBB state. It should be noted that which state has been shifted to is determined at the start of the BB state (or at an arbitrary time from the transition decision to the start), for example, by the notification lamp (sign omitted) or the first display unit 404 described later. It is announced by the display mode of. Specifically, for example, when the state shifts to the SBB state, the notification lamp “BB” described later lights up and blinks, and “super” is displayed on the first display unit 404, and when the state shifts to the NBB state, it will be described later. The notification lamp "BB" is lit, and "normal" is displayed on the first display unit 404. However, the means used for the notification is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and one or a plurality of other means (for example, the speaker group 84 and the second display unit 405 described later) can be used.

Both the NBB state and the SBB state are composed of non-JAC and JAC, and in JAC, all batting order navigation always occurs when the batting order small winning combination is won, regardless of whether it is the NBB state or the SBB state. Then, by performing the stop operation according to the batting order, it becomes easy to generate 15 prizes 5 times. As for the batting order small winning combination, the correct batting order is 4 choices (1st stop) x 3 choices (2nd stop) x 2 choices (3rd stop) = 24 choices. It is possible to generate 15 prizes with a 100% probability (by performing the stop operation according to the navigation), but if all batting order navigation does not occur, the probability that 15 prizes will occur (correct answer push order by yourself) Since the probability of hitting) is 1/24, it is difficult to generate 15 prizes.

Also, in non-JAC, regardless of whether it is in the NBB state or the SBB state, if you win the "JAC Lip" (or the all batting order navigation that the "JAC Lip" wins will occur), from the non-JAC Move to JAC. Here, the frequency at which all batting order navigation in which the "JAC Lip" wins occurs differs between the NBB state and the SBB state, and the difference in this frequency makes the SBB state more advantageous than the NBB state. ing. In addition, the frequency of all batting order navigation that wins 15 cards differs between the NBB state and the SBB state when a batting order small role is won during non-JAC, and the SBB state changes due to this difference in frequency. It is in a more advantageous state than the NBB state. In addition, the SBB state and the NBB state differ only in the frequency at which all batting order navigations in which "JAC Lip" in non-JAC wins occur, and the frequency in which all batting order navigations in which 15 batting orders in non-JAC occur. It is possible to make the advantage different by not making a difference, and only the frequency of all batting order navigation that will win 15 pieces in non-JAC is different, and " It is also possible to make the advantage different by not making a difference in the frequency of occurrence of all batting order navigation in which "JAC Lip" wins. It is also possible to configure the BB state only in a state such as during non-JAC. In addition, the SBB state is configured only in a state such as during JAC (that is, it is configured as a state in which all batting order navigation occurs when a batting order small winning combination is simply won for 20 games), and the NBB state is in non-JAC. It is also possible to configure the state between and during JAC so that they can be transferred to each other.

First, with reference to FIG. 223, the conditions under which batting order navigation occurs during non-JAC in the NBB state will be described in particular. When shifting from another state to the BB state, regardless of whether it is in the NBB state or the SBB state, it first shifts to the non-JAC state. The game period is set to 20 games during non-JAC, and the BB state ends when 20 games are exhausted during non-JAC. In the SBB state, when a batting order small winning combination is won during non-JAC, all batting order navigation always occurs. On the other hand, in the NBB state, if the batting order small role is won in the first game during non-JAC, all batting order navigation will occur, but after that, 15 pieces will not be won in the previous game, so this time All batting order navigation occurs only when the batting order small role is won in the game.

For example, in the second and subsequent games during non-JAC in the NBB state, the player won the replay role or the normal 1-card role in the previous game (15 cards did not win), and won the batting order small role in this game. In this case, all batting order navigation will occur in this game. Also, in the previous game, I won the batting order small role (because the batting order navigation did not occur, or the batting order navigation occurred but there was a batting order error), but the batting order was incorrect. If 15 batting orders are not awarded and the batting order small role is won in this game, all batting order navigation will occur in this game. Also, in the previous game, the batting order small role was won, all batting order navigation was generated, the push order was correct and 15 pieces were won, and if the batting order small role was won in this game, all in this game. Batting order navigation does not occur. Also, in the previous game, I won the batting order small role, and although all batting order navigation did not occur, the push order was correct (by myself) and 15 pieces were won, and in this game, the batting order small role was won. , In this game, all batting order navigation does not occur.

In this way, in the non-JAC in the NBB state, for the batting order small winning combination, the full batting order navigation occurs specially in the first game in the non-JAC in the NBB state, but the second game in the non-JAC in the NBB state. After that, if 15 cards have not been won in the previous game, all batting order navigation will occur, while if 15 cards have been won in the previous game, all batting order navigation will not occur. In this example, for example, in a non-JAC in the NBB state, a lottery or the like is performed to determine whether or not to generate the all batting order navigation while considering the total acquisition status of the game value of the player. (For example, if the player's game value is less than planned, all batting order navigation is likely to occur, and if it is increasing, all batting order navigation is less likely to occur), but doing so Since the control burden will be enormous, in this example, it is necessary to decide whether or not to generate all batting order navigation in this game by considering only whether or not 15 pieces have been won in the previous game. I have to. However, even if the all batting order navigation does not occur, it is only difficult to generate a 15-card prize, and if the push order can be answered correctly by oneself, a 15-card prize may occur. It should be noted that the same control as in the second and subsequent games can be performed in the first game during non-JAC.

In addition, when "JAC replay" is won during non-JAC, all batting order navigation always occurs in the SBB state, and the system shifts to JAC accordingly (in this case, the resulting "JAC lip" wins. May be included in the conditions for transition to JAC, or may not be included). On the other hand, in the NBB state, if the winning of the "JAC replay" is the first winning in the NBB state, the all batting order navigation occurs, but if it is the second and subsequent winnings in the NBB state, Only the first stop navigation occurs.

In "JAC Replay", the "JAC Lip" wins only when the first stop operation is performed on the 3rd reel or the 4th reel, so the correct batting order is practically correct. 2 choices (1st stop on the 3rd reel or 4th reel) x 3 choices (2nd stop on the remaining reels after the 1st stop) x 2 choices (3rd stop) = 12 choices, Even with this, the probability of making the correct answer on its own (1/12) is still low, so consider the balance so that this does not reduce the interest of the game and does not become excessively advantageous to the player, and in the NBB state, " If you win the "JAC Replay" and the all batting order navigation does not occur, the first stop navigation is generated. Of course, it is also possible to prevent the first stop navigation from occurring.

For example, when the "JAC replay" of any of "F_12RB_4123JAC" to "F_14RB_4213JAC" and "F_31RB_4231JAC" to "F_34RB_4321JAC" is won, if this is the second and subsequent winnings in the NBB state, the first stop is stopped. The first stop navigation to the effect that it should be done for 4 reels occurs. Further, for example, when the "JAC replay" of any of "F_21RB_3124JAC" to "F_24RB_3214JAC" and "F_41RB_3241JAC" to "F_43RB_3421JAC" is won, if this is the second and subsequent wins in the NBB state, the first stop. The first stop navigation to the effect that should be applied to the third reel occurs. As a result, the remaining 3 choices (2nd stop to the remaining reels after the 1st stop) x 2 choices (3rd stop) = 6 choices, and the probability that you can correct the push order by yourself and move to JAC. Is 1/6.

In this way, in the non-JAC in the NBB state, for the "JAC replay", if it is the first win in the NBB state, a special batting order navigation is generated and the process shifts to the JAC, but the NBB state In the case of the second and subsequent wins in, only the first stop navigation will occur, so if the push order can be answered correctly at 1/6, it will shift to JAC on the condition that "JAC Lip" won a prize. If the push order cannot be answered correctly at 1/6, "JAC Lip" will not win and will not shift to JAC. It is also possible to perform the same control as in the case of the first winning in the NBB state as in the case of the second and subsequent winnings in the NBB state.

When shifting from non-JAC to JAC, all batting order navigation occurs 5 times for batting order small wins during JAC regardless of whether it is in the NBB state or SBB state, so the batting order itself is between these states during JAC. There is no superiority or inferiority. When the end of JAC is completed, the game returns to non-JAC, and if it can be transferred to JAC again, it is transferred to JAC, and this is repeated until the number of games in non-JAC is exhausted. However, since the game period during non-JAC does not progress during JAC (the given 20 games are not subtracted), the longer the game in JAC is played (the more times the game is transferred to JAC). ) The player will be given more game value. Therefore, especially in non-JAC in the NBB state, whether or not the player can win the "JAC Lip" by answering the push order correctly at the time of winning the "JAC Replay" becomes a big concern for the player, which is one of the factors to improve the interest. It becomes.

Even during JAC, the probability of occurrence of all batting order navigation may be changed between the SBB state and the NBB state. For example, the SBB state may be more advantageous during JAC, such as 100% in the SBB state and 50% in the NBB state, and the JAC may be 50% in the SBB state and 100% in the NBB state. The NBB state may be more advantageous inside. Further, for example, in the SBB state, the number of occurrences of all batting order navigation is 7 times, and in the NBB state, the number of occurrences of all batting order navigation is 5 times. The NBB state may be more advantageous during JAC, such that the number of occurrences of all batting order navigation is 5 times in the SBB state and the number of occurrences of all batting order navigation is 7 times in the NBB state.

(NBB non-JAC batting order navigation generation processing)
Next, with reference to FIG. 224, the NBB non-JAC batting order navigation generation process executed by the main CPU 101 in the NBB state will be described. Note that FIG. 224 is a schematic flowchart illustrating a main part of the NBB non-JAC batting order navigation generation process.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning combination is a batting order small combination (S2111). In S2111, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning combination is a batting order small combination (when the determination in S2111 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the first G of the NBB start (S2112). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the first game in the non-JAC in the NBB state. In S2112, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not the first G of the NBB start (when the determination in S2112 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the previous payout number counter is "15" (S2113). The previous payout number counter is a counter for identifying whether or not 15 cards have been won in the previous game, and if 15 cards have been won in the previous game, the value is "15". ". That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not 15 cards have been won in the previous game. In S2113, when the main CPU 101 determines that the previous payout number counter is "15" (when the determination in S2113 is YES), the main CPU 101 ends the NBB non-JAC batting order navigation generation process.

In S2112, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is the 1G of the NBB start (when the determination in S2112 is NO), and in S2113, when the main CPU 101 determines that the previous payout number counter is not "15" (S2113 (In the case of NO determination), the main CPU 101 generates a full batting order navigation for the batting order small winning combination (S2114). That is, when the main CPU 101 wins a batting order small winning combination in the first game in the non-JAC in the NBB state, and during the non-JAC in the NBB state, the previous game 15 pieces have not been won, and this game If you win the batting order small role in, 15 cards will be won. Of the correct push order (1st stop 4 choices x 2nd stop 3 choices x 3rd stop 2 choices = 24 choices, it corresponds to the winning batting order small win. Performs processing to notify the correct answer (correct answer pressing order). After the processing of S2114, the main CPU 101 ends the NBB non-JAC batting order navigation generation processing.

In S2111, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning combination is not a batting order small combination (when the determination in S2111 is NO), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning combination is a "JAC replay" (S2115). In S2115, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning combination is not "JAC replay" (when the determination in S2115 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the NBB non-JAC batting order navigation generation process. On the other hand, in S2115, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning combination is "JAC replay" (when the determination in S2115 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the first JAC in the BB (S2116). ). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not it is the first win of the "JAC replay" in the NBB state.

In S2116, when the main CPU 101 determines that the BB is the first JAC (when the determination in S2116 is YES), the main CPU 101 generates a full batting order navigation (S2117), and this NBB non-JAC middle batting order navigation generation process. To finish. That is, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is the first win of "JAC replay" in the NBB state, the correct answer pressing order (first stop 2 choices x second stop) in which the "JAC lip" is won is generated. Of the 3 choices x 3rd stop 2 choices = 12 choices, the process for notifying the winning "JAC replay" "JAC lip" winning order) is performed.

On the other hand, in S2116, when the main CPU 101 determines that the BB is not the first JAC (when the determination in S2116 is NO), the main CPU 101 generates the first stop navigation (S2118), and this NBB non-JAC batting order navigation. End the generation process. That is, when the main CPU 101 determines that it is not the first win of the "JAC replay" in the NBB state, the first stop (third reel or the third reel or the third reel) in the correct answer pressing order in which the winning of the "JAC lip" occurs. A process is performed to notify only the correct pressing order of the 4 reels). In this case, only the fact that the "JAC replay" has been won is notified, and the push order may not be notified.

(Invention 2 according to this detailed example (No. 2))
As described above, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), in the special gaming state (for example, the NBB state) in which the player can be notified of the advantageous stop operation mode, the specific combination (for example, the batting order small combination) The specific stop operation mode (for example, the correct answer pressing order) to which a predetermined number (for example, 15 cards) of game value will be given when winning the game may not always be notified, but it is determined in the immediately preceding unit game. When the number of game values is not given and the specific combination is won in the unit game, the specific stop operation mode is notified. As a result, in a specific game state in which an advantageous stop operation mode is not always notified, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of acquired game values by using a method with a small processing load, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game. ..

When a specific combination is won in the first unit game in which the special game state is started, the specific stop operation mode can be notified regardless of the game value added status in the immediately preceding unit game. As a result, the game value is likely to be given at the initial stage of the special game state, so that the player's discomfort can be reduced even if the situation in which the game value decreases thereafter continues for some time. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), in a special gaming state (for example, NBB state) in which a player can be notified of an advantageous stop operation mode, a specific combination (for example, a batting order small combination) is won. In some cases, the specific stop operation mode (for example, the correct answer pressing order) to which a predetermined number (for example, 15 cards) of game value is given may not always be notified, but the predetermined number of game values are given in the immediately preceding unit game. When the game value is not given and the specific combination is won in the unit game, the specific stop operation mode is notified. The same applies when a specific winning combination is won in the immediately preceding unit game and a specific stop operation mode is notified but a predetermined number of game values are not given. As a result, in a specific game state in which an advantageous stop operation mode is not always notified, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of acquired game values by using a method with a small processing load, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game. .. In addition, even if a stop operation error occurs, it is possible to suppress a downturn in the number of acquired game values including that.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), the first gaming state (for example, the NBB state) and the second gaming state (for example, the SBB state) that can notify the player of the advantageous stop operation mode are Yes, in the first game state, a specific stop operation mode (for example, correct answer pressing order) in which a predetermined number (for example, 15 cards) of game value is given when a specific combination (for example, batting order small combination) is won. ) May not always be notified, but when a predetermined number of game values are not given in the immediately preceding unit game and a specific combination is won in the unit game, the specific stop operation mode is notified and the second game is played. In the state, the specific stop operation mode is notified when the specific combination is won. As a result, a predetermined gaming state (for example, SBB state) in which an advantageous stop operation mode is notified and a specific gaming state (for example, NBB state) in which an advantageous stop operation mode is not necessarily notified can be created by a simple method. In the specific game state, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by suppressing a downward decline in the number of acquired game values by using a method with a small processing load.

[Control in RB challenge production of this example (detailed example (2))]
Subsequently, the control in the RB challenge effect of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 to 227. 225 to 227 are diagrams for explaining an example of the control flow in the RB challenge effect of this example. In addition, a specific push order replay of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229. 228 and 229 are diagrams showing an example of a correspondence relationship between a specific push order replay, a push order, and a stop symbol combination in this example. Further, the RB navigation MAP table of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 230. FIG. 230 is a diagram showing an example of the RB navigation MAP table in this example. Further, the RB history display of this example will be described with reference to FIG. 231. FIG. 231 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of the RB history display in this example.

As mentioned above, in a game that wins the "push order RB role" in the normal / advantageous section, if the push order (12 choices) is answered correctly and the "RB lip" is won, the game shifts to the RB state. be able to. In addition, in a game in which the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the normal / advantageous section, if the parameter corresponding to the number of times the pushing order RB combination is won on the current RB navigation MAP table is "1", the correct pressing order is It is notified and can shift to the RB state.

In this example, in the game in which the "pushing order RB role" is won in the normal / advantageous section, the "RB challenge production" is performed. In this example, the "RB challenge effect" may be performed even in the game in which the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the RUSH state. However, in this case, in the RUSH state, the correct answer pressing order is always notified, and it is possible to shift to the RB state.

Further, in this example, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the normal / non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the BB state regardless of whether the pushing order is correct or not. Here, the normal / advantageous section is a gaming state in which processing related to the advantageous state (increasing section) can be executed according to the derived result display (combination of symbols displayed as stopped), whereas the normal / non-normal / non-normal section. The advantageous section is a gaming state in which processing related to the advantageous state (increasing section) cannot be executed according to the derived result display (combination of symbols displayed as stopped). That is, in the normal / non-advantageous section, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won, it is possible to change the game state due to the factor of winning the "pushing order RB combination", but the "RB lip" wins. It is not possible to change the game state due to the factor of having played. However, this is only a limitation of the specifications, and from the player's point of view, if it is a normal / advantageous section that wins the "pushing order RB role", it may be possible to shift to the RB state. On the other hand, if it is not possible to obtain any profit if the "pushing order RB role" is won in the normal / non-advantageous section, there is a risk that the interest may be reduced or the distrust may be felt.

Therefore, in this example, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the normal / advantageous section, if the "RB lip" can be won even if the pushing order is not notified, the privilege of shifting to the RB state is provided. On the other hand, if the "RB Lip" cannot be won, the privilege of shifting to the RB state is not given, and in the normal / non-advantageous section, it becomes the "push order RB role". In the case of winning, the privilege of shifting to the BB state is given regardless of whether or not the "RB Lip" has won a prize.

In this example, the privilege when the "pushing order RB role" is won in the normal / advantageous section and the "RB lip" can be won is defined as the transition to the RB state, and in the normal / non-advantageous section, " The privilege when winning the "push order RB role" is the transition to the BB state. That is, the contents of the benefits are different. Here, in this example, the main gaming state in which the game is performed is the normal / advantageous section, and the stay period in the normal / non-advantageous section is relatively short. Therefore, when winning the "pushing order RB role" in the normal / non-advantageous section, the content of the privilege is more advantageous than when winning the "pushing order RB role" in the normal / advantageous section. Species Premium benefits are provided. However, this is just an example. For example, the privilege when winning the "pushing order RB role" in the normal / non-advantageous section may be the same RB state as the normal / advantageous section, or the privilege than the normal / advantageous section. The content of is disadvantageous (for example, the upper limit of the number of times of navigation in the RB state is set to 3).

Further, in this example, as described above, since there is almost no difference in appearance between the normal / advantageous section and the normal / non-advantageous section from the viewpoint of the player, the “pushing order RB combination” is used in the normal / non-advantageous section. In the game that wins the game, the same "RB challenge effect" as in the game that wins the "push order RB role" is performed in the normal / advantageous section, so that the player's expectation is raised.

Under such specifications, the RB challenge effect of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 225 to 227. FIG. 225 (a) is a diagram showing the start of the game when, for example, the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the normal / advantageous section, or the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the normal / non-advantageous section. Is. In the game, first, a start lock is executed in which the game operation is invalidated in a predetermined period (for example, 1300 msec) after the start operation. In addition, during the execution of the lock at the start, the notification lamp "CHANGE" (sign omitted), which will be described later, was lit, and the "pushing order RB role" was won (the RB challenge production was started, and the state was changed to the RB state). What you may be able to do) is notified.

Here, FIG. 225 (a) shows a case where the parameter corresponding to the number of winnings of the push order RB combination on the current RB navigation MAP table is "0" in the normal / advantageous section (or the normal / non-advantageous section). This is an example of the production of (case), and the correct answer pressing order is not notified. Specifically, in the first display unit 404 (the reference numeral is omitted in FIGS. 225 to 227), which will be described later, a display such as "???" is displayed in which the correct answer pressing order cannot be recognized. On the other hand, although not shown, when the parameter corresponding to the number of winnings of the push order RB combination on the current RB navigation MAP table is "1" in the normal / advantageous section (or the RB challenge effect is produced even in the RUSH state). At the time of winning the "pushing order RB combination" when it is performed, the correct pressing order is notified. For example, when the winning "pushing order RB combination" is "F_12RB_4123JAC", the first reel is in the correct push order in the first stop of four choices, and the second reel is in the correct push order in the second stop of three choices. Therefore, in the first display unit 404, a display such as "1 2 ---" that can recognize the correct pressing order is made. Similarly, in FIGS. 225 (b) to (f) below, the case where the winning "pushing order RB combination" is "F_12RB_4123JAC" will be described as an example.

FIG. 225 (b) is an example of an effect when the third reel is first stopped, following FIG. 225 (a). Here, the "F_12RB_4123JAC" constitutes the "RB lip" because when the third reel is first stopped, the push order of the first stop is incorrect and the "normal lip" wins a prize. "Seven" symbols are not displayed on the effective line. In other words, it can be recognized that the push order was incorrect (the challenge failed) in the stop symbol. Therefore, in the RB challenge production, in such a case, an production indicating a challenge failure is performed. Specifically, the notification lamp "CHANGE" is turned off and turned off, and the display of the first display unit 404 is also finished. In addition, if you win the "push order RB role" in the normal / non-advantageous section, the game will shift to the BB state from the next game regardless of the push order, but the same effect will be performed in the RB challenge production. It has become. Therefore, a normal player recognizes that the challenge has failed at this point even if he wins the "pushing order RB combination" in the normal / non-advantageous section.

FIG. 226 (c) is an example of an effect when the second reel is first stopped, following FIG. 225 (a). Here, "F_12RB_4123JAC" continues the expectation that "RB rips" may be aligned until the final stop, although the push order of the first stop is incorrect when the second reel is first stopped. In order to make it happen, the "Seven" symbols that make up the "RB Lip" are displayed on the effective line (finally, the "RB Tempai Loss Reel" of "1st x" to "4th x" described later wins a prize. Will be done). That is, it cannot be recognized that the push order was incorrect (the challenge failed) in the stop symbol. Therefore, in the RB challenge production, in such a case, an production indicating the continuation of the challenge is performed. Specifically, the notification lamp "CHANGE" is continuously lit, and the display of the first display unit 404 is also continued. In addition, if you win the "push order RB role" in the normal / non-advantageous section, the game will shift to the BB state from the next game regardless of the push order, but the same effect will be performed in the RB challenge production. It has become.

FIG. 226 (d) is an production example in which the first reel is second-stopped, the third reel is third-stopped, and the fourth reel is fourth-stopped, following (c) of FIG. 226. .. Here, in "F_12RB_4123JAC", when the second reel is first stopped, the first reel is second stopped, the third reel is third stopped, and the fourth reel is fourth stopped, the first stop ~ At the 3rd stop, the "Seven" symbols that make up the "RB Lip" are displayed on the effective line, but at the 4th stop, the "Blue Bell" symbol is displayed on the effective line, and finally the "4th x" "RB Tempai Hazure Lip" has come to win a prize. Therefore, when the first reel is second-stopped and the third reel is third-stopped, an effect indicating the continuation of the challenge is performed as in (b) of FIG. 226, but the fourth reel is When the fourth stop is made, as shown in FIG. 226 (d), an effect indicating a challenge failure is performed. In addition, if you win the "push order RB role" in the normal / non-advantageous section, the game will shift to the BB state from the next game regardless of the push order, but the same effect will be performed in the RB challenge production. It has become. Therefore, a normal player recognizes that the challenge has failed at this point even if he wins the "pushing order RB combination" in the normal / non-advantageous section.

In FIG. 227 (e), following (a) in FIG. 225, the first reel is first stopped, the second reel is second stopped, the third reel is third stopped, and the fourth reel is fourth. This is an example of production when stopped. Here, in the case of "F_12RB_4123JAC", when the first reel is stopped first and the second reel is stopped second, the push order becomes the correct answer, and finally the "RB lip" wins a prize. Therefore, even if the first reel is first stopped, the second reel is second stopped, and the third reel is third stopped (even if the fourth reel is third stopped). (Good), as in (b) of FIG. 226, an effect indicating the continuation of the challenge is performed, and when the 4th reel is stopped 4th (may be the case where the 3rd reel is stopped 4th). Will be directed to show the success of the challenge. Specifically, the notification lamp "RB", which will be described later, lights up, "REG BONUS" is displayed on the first display unit 404, and it is notified that the state shifts to the RB state (that right has been granted). In addition, if you win the "push order RB role" in the normal / non-advantageous section, the game will shift to the BB state from the next game regardless of the push order, but the same effect will be performed in the RB challenge production. It has become. Therefore, a normal player recognizes that even if he wins the "pushing order RB combination" in the normal / non-advantageous section, the challenge is successful and the player shifts to the RB state at this point.

FIG. 227 (f) is a diagram showing the start of the next game of the game in which the RB challenge effect is performed, following FIG. 225 (b), FIG. 226 (d), or FIG. 227 (e). .. As mentioned above, if you win the "push order RB role" in the normal / non-advantageous section, if the challenge fails in the RB challenge production, or even if the challenge succeeds, the BB state will start from the next game. Will be started. Alternatively, when the "BB role" is won in the normal / advantageous section, the RB challenge effect can be performed in the game. Alternatively, if the "pushing order RB combination" is won in the normal / advantageous section, a BB transition lottery is further performed, and it is decided to win the BB transition lottery and shift to the BB state from the next game. In addition, the RB challenge effect can be performed in the game. FIG. 227 (f) shows an example of the effect of shifting to the BB state in the next game of the game in which the RB challenge effect is performed.

In the game (the next game of the game in which the RB challenge effect is performed), first, a start lock is executed in which the game operation is invalidated in a predetermined period (for example, 1300 msec) after the start operation. In addition, a special reel effect is performed during the execution of the lock at the start. In the special reel effect, each reel of the 1st to 4th reels rotates in the reverse direction, and the "Seven" symbols constituting the combination of the "BB" symbols (BB lip) are displayed side by side (temporarily stopped). It is a "seven-matched" production. Further, the notification lamp "BB", which will be described later, is lit (when the notification lamp "RB" is lit, it is turned off and switched to lighting the notification lamp "BB"), and the first display unit 404 is displayed. "BIG BONUS" is displayed, and it is notified that the state will shift to the BB state (that right has been granted). Therefore, the impression that a normal player has failed the challenge but won the BB as if the re-lottery was performed, or the challenge was successful but the BB was further promoted. It is possible to dramatically improve its interest compared to the usual suggestion of transition to a state. It should be noted that the transition to the BB state may be notified only by the lock at the start, or the transition to the BB state is notified by simply switching the lighting of the notification lamp "RB" to the lighting of the notification lamp "BB". It may be done.

Although FIGS. 225 to 227 have described an example of the flow of a series of productions in the RB challenge production, the production contents of the RB challenge production are not limited to those described above. For example, of the above-mentioned effects, only a part of the effects may be performed, or in addition to the above-mentioned effects, for example, by the display on the second display unit 405 or the sound output from the speaker group 84. Further, the production may be performed according to the situation.

(Structure of specific push order replay)
Next, the configuration of the specific push order replay in this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 228 and 229. As already explained, "F_12RB_4123JAC" to "F_43RB_3241JAC" function as "JAC replay" in the BB state (more specifically, during non-JAC), and "push order RB" in other states. It functions as a "role". In this section, the embodiment will be described in particular.

As shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, when "F_12RB_4123JAC" to "F_43RB_3241JAC" function as "JAC replay", the pressing order written on the character side of "JAC" is the correct pressing order, and the correct pressing order. When the stop operation is performed, "JAC Lip" is stopped and displayed. In addition, in FIG. 229, "1st ○", "2nd ○", "3rd ○" and "4th ○" are given as an example of "JAC lip". In addition, when functioning as a "push order RB combination", the push order written on the character side of "RB" becomes the correct push order, and when the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, "RB (RB lip)". Is stopped and displayed. In FIG. 229, "RB" is given as an example of "RB (RB lip)".

In addition, when the stop operation is performed in a pressing order different from both the correct pressing order of "JAC replay" and the correct pressing order of "pushing order RB combination", "normal rip" is stopped and displayed. It is configured so that "RB Tempai Loss Relip" may be stopped and displayed. In FIG. 229, "rip" is given as an example of "normal lip". Further, as an example of "RB Tempai Loss Relip", "1st ×", "2nd ×", "3rd ×" and "4th ×" are mentioned.

In this example, when a specific push order replay is won during non-JAC in the NBB state, at least the first stop navigation is performed (see FIG. 224 and the like). Then, if the remaining 6 choices are answered correctly, the "JAC rip" is stopped and displayed, and if the answer is not correct, the "normal rip" is stopped and displayed. Here, according to the specific push order replay configuration shown in FIGS. 228 and 229, if the stop operation is performed according to the first stop navigation, even if the answer is incorrect in the remaining push order, "RB lip" or "RB Tempai Loss Relip" is not displayed as a stop. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of an event such as "RB lip" being stopped and displayed during the BB state and the player being confused.

Further, in this example, when the specific push order replays shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 are won in the normal / advantageous section (when the RB challenge effect occurs), the push order is irregular due to the stop symbol before the final stop. When it is recognized that the answer is correct (when the "Rip 1" and "Rip 2" symbols that make up the "normal rip" are stopped and displayed), the answer is incorrect depending on the stop symbol at the final stop. It is configured so that there is a case where it is recognized (when the "blue bell" symbol constituting the "RB Tempai Loss Relip" is stopped and displayed). As a result, in the RB challenge production, it is possible to change the expectation in various ways.

Further, in this example, as described above, the specific push order replays shown in FIGS. 228 and 229 can be provided with at least a function as "JAC replay" and a function as "push order RB combination". Therefore, it is possible to suppress the amount of data related to the internal winning combination as compared with the case where these are configured as separate internal winning combinations.

(RB Navi MAP table)
Next, the configuration of the RB navigation MAP table in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 230. As already explained, in the normal / advantageous section, the RB challenge effect is performed when the "push order RB combination" is won, but at this time, the number of push order RB combination winnings on the current RB navigation MAP table is set. When the corresponding parameter is "1", the correct answer pressing order is notified, and it becomes possible to shift to the RB state. The RB navigation MAP table is a table that determines the time when such notification is performed, and the parameter value "0" or "1" is defined according to the number of times the push order RB combination is won.

In this example, when shifting from the normal / non-advantageous section to any of the advantageous sections, the RB navigation MAP table lottery is performed, and any of the tables 0 to 15 shown in FIG. 230 is determined. NS. The determined table is used until one of the advantageous sections ends and the normal / non-advantageous section is entered. In addition, when the setting is changed or other initialization conditions are satisfied, the normal / non-advantageous section is shifted to. Therefore, even in such a case, the normal / non-advantageous section is newly changed to one of the advantageous sections. As a result of the migration process, a new table will be determined.

Further, in the RB navigation MAP table lottery, for example, the tables 0 to 13 are determined with a probability of "18/256", and the table 14 and the table 15 are determined with a probability of "2/256", respectively. That is, the tables 0 to 13 are tables that are relatively easy to determine, and the tables 14 and 15 are tables that are relatively difficult to determine. Further, since the table 14 and the table 15 are tables that are relatively difficult to determine, the table is a table that is highly advantageous to the player.

In addition, the number of times the push order RB combination is won is added by "1" when the "push order RB combination" is won in the normal / advantageous section or the RUSH state. It should be noted that, in the RUSH state, it may be configured so that the addition is not added when the "pushing order RB combination" is won.

As shown in FIG. 230, for example, when the current RB navigation MAP table is determined to be table 0 or table 15, and the "push order RB combination" is first won in the normal / advantageous section (that is, the push order RB). (When the number of winnings is "1"), since the parameter is "1", the correct answer pressing order is notified, and the state shifts to the RB state. After the end of this RB state, when the "push order RB combination" is won again in the normal / advantageous section (that is, when the number of push order RB combination winnings is "2"), the current RB navigation MAP table becomes table 0. If it is determined, the parameter is "0", so the correct push order is not notified, and if the correct push order can be answered by oneself, the state shifts to the RB state, but the correct push order must be answered. If it becomes impossible, it does not shift to the RB state. On the other hand, when the current RB navigation MAP table is determined in the table 15, since the parameter is "1", the correct answer pressing order is notified, and the state shifts to the RB state.

Although not shown in FIG. 230, when the number of times the push order RB winning combination is "16" or more, the parameter is "1" regardless of which table is determined. Therefore, for example, If the "push order RB combination" is won 15 times or more in the normal / advantageous section, the correct push order will always be notified when the "push order RB combination" is won from the next time until the transition to the normal / non-advantageous section. Will be done.

Further, the additional information shown in FIG. 230 is information for determining whether or not to shift to the RUSH state after the transition to the BB state. When the table in which the parameter of the additional information is "0" is determined, it is determined whether or not to shift to the RUSH state as usual in the BB state, and if it is decided to shift to the RUSH state, the end. It shifts to the RUSH state later, but if it is not decided to shift to the RUSH state, it does not shift to the RUSH state after the end. On the other hand, when the table in which the parameter of the additional information is "1" is determined, it is determined that the state shifts to the RUSH state after the end of the BB state. In this sense, the table 14 and the table 15 are more advantageous to the player than the tables 0 to 13. However, the method for increasing the advantage of the table 14 and the table 15 is not limited to this. For example, the table 14 and the table 15 may have a larger number of push order RB winning combinations in which the parameter is "1" as compared with the tables 0 to 13.

(RB history display)
Next, the RB history display in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 231. In this example, in the first display unit 404 described later, as a "push order RB role"("JACreplay") per day (that is, from turning on the power due to the opening of the amusement store to turning off the power due to the closing of the business). It is possible to display the RB history indicating the number of winnings (not including the case of functioning) and whether or not the RB state has been entered at the time of winning.

The RB history display may be automatically displayed on the first display unit 404 in the non-game state, or the effect button 403 (or the effect button 403 described later) described later may be displayed during the non-game state. The operation of the selection button 401 and the decision button 402 may be included), and the display may be displayed when the player requests the display. In this case, the menu screen described later is displayed on the second display unit 405, but neither of them interferes with the display. Further, for example, it may be possible to display the RB history display of the day retroactively from the previous day to about one week ago. Further, the RB history display may be displayed on the second display unit 405 when the player requests the display in the menu screen described later.

In addition, the RB history display can also display the number of winnings including the number of winnings of the "pushing order RB combination" in the RUSH state, and the above-mentioned RB challenge effect (in this case, 100% navigation occurs in the RUSH state). Therefore, the number of times the RB challenge effect is not performed, or even if it is performed, it may not be counted) can be displayed as the number of winnings.

In the example shown in FIG. 231, first, it is shown that the number of winnings of today's "pushing order RB combination" is five times. In addition, it does not shift to the RB state at the time of winning the first "pushing order RB combination", but shifts to the RB state at the time of winning the second "pushing order RB combination", and wins the third "pushing order RB combination". It is sometimes shown that it shifts to the RB state, does not shift to the RB state at the time of winning the fourth "pushing order RB combination", and does not shift to the RB state at the time of winning the fifth "pushing order RB combination". There is.

It should be noted that although it is shown that the state has changed to the RB state at the time of winning the second and third "pushing order RB combination", it is not shown whether or not the correct pushing order has been notified. Therefore, at the time of winning the second and third "pushing order RB roles", did the player shift to the RB state by making the correct answer by himself or the correct answer pushing order was notified and shifted to the RB state? Cannot be recognized. Further, for example, if the case of winning the "pushing order RB combination" in the RUSH state is included, the reason why the correct pressing order was notified was that the parameter on the RB navigation MAP table was "1". It is not possible to recognize whether it is due to the fact that it was in the RUSH state.

Here, in this example, such an RB history display can give the player the pleasure of guessing the current advantage. For example, in the example of FIG. 231, when the number of winnings of the "pushing order RB combination" is the second time, the state shifts to the RB state. Here, if the setting has not been changed, it does not always match, but if the setting has been changed, there is a possibility that the RB state has been entered when the number of times the push order RB winning combination is "2" in the RB navigation MAP table. There is. That is, if the transition to the RB state corresponds to the parameter "1" on the RB navigation MAP table, the table 14 having a relatively high advantage may be determined. On the other hand, when the number of winnings of the "pushing order RB combination" is the third time, the state shifts to the RB state. Here, if the setting is not changed, it does not always match, but if the setting is changed, there is a possibility that the RB state is entered when the number of times the push order RB winning combination is "3" in the RB navigation MAP table. There is. That is, if the transition to the RB state corresponds to the parameter "1" on the RB navigation MAP table, the table 1 having a relatively low advantage may be determined. However, there is a possibility that either one is correct or is in the RUSH state.

Then, the player estimates the current advantage by integrating other histories or the game history displayed on an external data display or the like. In this example, at the start of the BB state, the start of the RB state, and the start of the RUSH state, the external centralized terminal board 47 starts the external data display and the management device (hall computer), respectively. Is output. Therefore, for example, in the example of FIG. 231, when the number of winnings of the "pushing order RB combination" is the third time, the transition to the RB state is in the RUSH state, and the number of winnings of the "pushing order RB combination" is If it can be inferred that the RB state was not entered in the RB state at the second time, it is highly possible that the table 14 is determined as the RB navigation MAP table, so that the player's motivation to play is improved. do. However, even in this case, it is not certain that the table 14 is determined as the RB navigation MAP table because there is a possibility that the answer is correct by oneself.

As described above, in this example, it is possible to display the RB history on the premise of the above-mentioned specifications. As described above, the RB history display does not definitively notify the player's advantage by itself, but can be a factor for the player to estimate the advantage. Therefore, the RB history display can give the player the pleasure of estimating the advantage and improve the motivation to play. It should be noted that the above-mentioned RB history display is performed assuming that the table suggestion effect suggesting the RB navigation MAP table in which the player is staying can be executed in one or more of the normal games (during non-AT), the RB state, the BB state, and the like. In combination with this, it may enhance the interest of table guessing.

(Invention 3 according to this detailed example (No. 2))
As described above, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), the processing relating to the special gaming state (for example, the pseudo-bonus state) in which the player can be notified of the advantageous stop operation mode according to the derived result display. There is a first game state (for example, a normal / advantageous section) in which the process can be executed, and a second game state (for example, a normal / non-advantageous section) in which the process cannot be executed. If a predetermined combination that is the target of the game (for example, a push order RB combination) is won, a privilege is given according to the result of the selection game, and if the predetermined combination is won in the second game state, it is derived. It is configured to grant benefits regardless of the result display. As a result, even when a specific gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section) with certain restrictions is provided, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort.

In addition, a privilege given according to the result of the selection game in the first game state (for example, transition to the RB state) and a privilege given when a predetermined combination is won in the second game state (for example, the BB state). It can be a different benefit from (transition to). As a result, it is possible not only to reduce the sense of discomfort, but also to diversify the playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), a process relating to a special gaming state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) in which a stop operation mode advantageous to the player can be notified according to the derived result display is executed. There is a possible first gaming state (for example, normal / advantageous section) and a second gaming state (for example, normal / non-advantageous section) in which the processing cannot be executed. When the target predetermined combination (for example, push order RB combination) is won, a privilege is given according to the result of the selection game, and when the predetermined combination is won in the second game state, it is derived. It is configured to grant benefits regardless of the result display. Further, when the privilege is given in the second game state, a specific effect (for example, lock at the start) is executed before the stop operation permission of the next game is executed, and the fact is notified. As a result, even when a specific gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section) with certain restrictions is provided, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort. Further, when the privilege is given in the second gaming state, the so-called post-notification notifies the player to that effect, so that the player can be made to think that the notification pattern was originally such a function. The effect will be more pronounced.

Further, when the privilege is given in the second game state, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, a "seven-matched" effect) in which the special result display is derived during the specific effect. As a result, the content of the privilege can be notified to the player in a highly entertaining manner.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), a process relating to a special gaming state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) in which a stop operation mode advantageous to the player can be notified according to the derived result display is executed. There is a possible first gaming state (for example, normal / advantageous section) and a second gaming state (for example, normal / non-advantageous section) in which the processing cannot be executed. When the target predetermined combination (for example, push order RB combination) is won, a privilege is given according to the result of the selection game, and when the predetermined combination is won in the second game state, it is derived. It is configured to grant benefits regardless of the result display. Further, in both the first game state and the second game state, a common predetermined effect (for example, an RB challenge effect) is performed in the unit game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination. As a result, even when a specific gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section) with certain restrictions is provided, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort. Further, by executing the common predetermined effect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the game state at the time of winning the predetermined combination, so that such an action effect becomes more remarkable.

In addition, during the predetermined production, when the result display recognizing that the selection game has failed is displayed in either the first game state or the second game state, the special game state is concerned. If an effect suggesting that the privilege is not given (for example, an effect indicating a challenge failure) is performed, and then in the second game state, the special game state is related until before the stop operation permission of the next game is permitted. An effect that suggests that a privilege is given (for example, a "seven-matched" effect) can be performed. As a result, even if a suggestion of content that the player does not want is made during the predetermined production, the privilege that the player desires may be granted after that, so that the expectation regarding the granting of the privilege can be continued. Can be given.

[Control in the stopped state of this example (detailed example (No. 2))]
Subsequently, the control in the stopped state of this example will be described with reference to FIGS. 232 to 234. As a premise, FIG. 232 is a diagram schematically explaining an example of the appearance structure in this example, and FIG. 233 is a diagram showing an example of a game end stop processing for generating a stop state of this example. FIG. 234 is a diagram showing a display example of the display screen in the stopped state of this example.

In this example, it is possible to generate a stop state (stop state), which is a game-incapable state (disabled state) in which the stop function is exhibited. Here, in this example, even in this stopped state, it is possible to display a menu screen which is a specific display for making it possible to provide game information. The conditions under which the stop state occurs will be described later with reference to FIG. 233, and an example of the menu screen will be described later with reference to FIG. 234.

(Outline of the appearance structure of this example)
First, an example of the appearance structure of this example will be described as a schematic with reference to FIG. 232. In the pachi-slot machine 1 of this example, the basic configuration is the same as that already described, but in order to explain the invention of this example in more detail, the points where the changes have been made will be additionally described.

First, as described above, in this example, the first reel 3L, the second reel 3CL, the third reel 3CR, and the fourth reel 3R are provided, and each of them is provided through the reel display window 4 (not shown in FIG. 232). A mode of variable display and stop display of a plurality of identification information (designs) attached to the reels of the above is configured to be visible. The fluctuation display on the first reel 3L stops when the stop operation on the stop button 17L is performed, and the fluctuation display on the second reel 3CL stops when the stop operation on the stop button 17CL is performed. The fluctuation display on the 3rd reel 3CR is stopped when the stop operation is performed on the stop button 17CR, and the fluctuation display on the 4th reel 3R is stopped when the stop operation is performed on the stop button 17R.

A selection button 401, a decision button 402, and an effect button 403 are provided on a step portion on the way from the surface provided with the reel display window 4 to the surface provided with each stop button. In FIG. 232, the illustration of other operating means (for example, the start lever 16, the MAX bet button 15a, the 1-bet button 15b, etc.) is omitted.

Further, a first display unit 404 is provided above the reel display window 4. The first display unit 404 is used, for example, to display an effect for raising expectations during a game, or to notify an advantageous stop operation mode. Further, it is used to display the above-mentioned RB history display according to the operation of the effect button 403 during non-game. The notification lamp "CHANGE" (reference numeral omitted) is provided on the left side of the first display unit 404, and the notification lamps "BB" and "RB" (code omitted) are provided on the right side of the first display unit 404. Be done. A second display unit 405 is provided above the first display unit 404. The second display unit 405 is used, for example, to display an effect for raising expectations during a game. It is also used to display the menu screen according to the operation of the effect button 403 during non-game. Here, for example, the first display unit 404 is configured as a dot matrix type display device, and the second display unit 405 is configured as a liquid crystal display device. However, the configuration of these display devices is not limited to this. For example, the first display unit 404 may also be configured as a liquid crystal display device. Further, as long as each function can be exhibited, it is possible to adopt a display device of another method (7-segment, organic EL, etc.).

A sensor (not shown) for detecting the operation of the selection button 401, the decision button 402, and the effect button 403 is connected to the sub-control board 72 via the sub-relay board 61, and is connected to the first display unit 404 and the first display unit 404. The 2 display unit 405 is connected to the sub-control board 72 via the liquid crystal relay board 87. As a result, the sub CPU 201 controls the display contents of the first display unit 404 and the second display unit 405, and switches the display contents according to the operation of the selection button 401, the decision button 402, and the effect button 403. Can control.

(Stop processing at the end of the game)
Next, with reference to FIG. 233, the game end stop processing executed by the main CPU 101 will be described. Note that FIG. 233 is a schematic flowchart illustrating a main part of the stop processing at the end of the game. Further, in this example, the stop processing at the end of the game is performed when one game is completed (after all reels are stopped), but the time when the process is executed is not limited to this, and at least the stop is stopped. It can be any time before the start of the game to be in the state.

First, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the next game is a non-advantageous section or a normal / advantageous section (S2121). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the game state in the next game is a game state other than the increase section. In S2121, when the main CPU 101 determines that the next game is not a non-advantageous section or a normal / advantageous section (when the determination in S2121 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end stop processing. That is, the main CPU 101 cannot set the stop state when the game state in the next game is the BB state, the RB state, the RUSH state, or the limiter RUSH state.

On the other hand, in S2121, when the main CPU 101 determines that the next game is a non-advantageous section or a normal / advantageous section (when the determination in S2121 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the RUSH stock is 0. (S2122). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the right to be controlled to the gaming state in which the stop operation mode advantageous to the player is notified is granted. In S2122, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RUSH stock is not 0 (when the determination in S2122 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end stop processing. That is, for example, the main CPU 101 is granted the right to be controlled to the gaming state in which the stop operation mode advantageous to the player is already notified even when staying in the normal / advantageous section. In that case, the stop state cannot be set.

On the other hand, in S2122, when the main CPU 101 determines that the RUSH stock is 0 (when the determination in S2122 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the difference number counter exceeds "12500" (S2123). .. Here, the difference number counter is the difference between the game value used for the game for one day (that is, from the power-on due to the start of business of the game store to the power-off due to the end of business) and the given game value. (Net increment) is configured as a recognizable counter. Therefore, when the difference number counter exceeds "12500", it means that the cumulative difference number in the pachislot machine 1 exceeds 12500 during the business day of the amusement store. The difference number counter can be configured as a counter separate from the above-mentioned advantageous section payout number counter and control payout number counter. In addition, the above-mentioned advantageous section payout number counter or control payout number counter can be configured so as not to be initialized at the end of the advantageous section, and the cumulative difference number can be recognized by using this. Further, it is also possible to store the value of the above-mentioned advantageous section payout number counter or control payout number counter for each predetermined opportunity and calculate the cumulative difference number of sheets. Further, the value of the start or end of which the cumulative difference number is counted by the difference number counter, or the value of the counter that makes a YES determination in S2123 is not limited to the above-mentioned one, and can be set as appropriate.

In S2123, when the main CPU 101 determines that the difference number counter does not exceed "12500" (when the determination in S2123 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the game end stop processing. That is, the main CPU 101 cannot set the stop state, for example, when the cumulative difference number of sheets per day does not exceed 12500 sheets.

On the other hand, in S2123, when the main CPU 101 determines that the difference number counter exceeds "12500" (when the determination in S2123 is YES), the main CPU 101 determines whether or not the winning is other than the replay (S2124). ). That is, the main CPU 101 determines whether or not a prize for the replay combination has occurred in the game. In S2124, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning is not other than the replay (that is, the winning of the replay combination has occurred) (when the determination in S2123 is NO), the main CPU 101 ends the stop processing at the end of the game. do. That is, the main CPU 101 does not make it possible to set the stop state when a winning combination of replays occurs in the game.

On the other hand, in S2124, when the main CPU 101 determines that the winning is other than the replay (that is, the winning of the replay combination has not occurred) (when the determination in S2124 is YES), the main CPU 101 automatically setstle the credit. (S2125). That is, the main CPU 101 operates the above-mentioned automatic settlement function. In this process, the main CPU 101 performs, for example, a process of paying out all the credited medals from the medal payout outlet 24 to the medal tray 25. Further, for example, in the case of a medalless gaming machine described later, it is sufficient to perform a process of changing the credit information (up to 50 cards) to the possessed medal information (information indicating all the retained medals of each player). If the automatic settlement function is not activated together with the stop function, the process may not be performed.

Next, the main CPU 101 activates the stop function (S2126), and ends the stop process at the end of the game. That is, the main CPU 101 controls the game to an incapacitated state (stopped state) that makes it impossible to perform the game. In addition, in order to release the stopped state, it is necessary for the clerk of the game store to change the setting. Therefore, in the case of an operation in which the setting change operation cannot be performed during the business hours, the pachislot machine 1 cannot play the game during the business hours after the business day.

(Display example of the display screen in the stopped state)
Next, a display example of the display screen of the second display unit 405 in the stopped state will be described with reference to FIG. 234. In FIG. 234, the upper row shows an example of the display screen displayed on the second display unit 405 when the stop state is controlled, and the lower row shows the effect button 403 operated in the upper row. An example of the display screen displayed on the second display unit 405 of the time is shown.

First, as shown in the upper part of FIG. 234, when the stop state is controlled, a stop screen indicating that fact is displayed on the second display unit 405. At this time, the speaker group 84 outputs a sound corresponding to the stopped state, and the LED group 85 lights up in a light emitting mode corresponding to the stopped state. Further, on the stop screen, it is shown that the menu screen is displayed by operating the effect button 403 even in the stop state. Further, on the stop screen, it is shown that the game history information, which is one of the game information, can be confirmed even in the stop state. In the stopped state, the display of the stopped screen is basically continued until the stopped state is released. In addition, the sound corresponding to the stop state (hereinafter, may be described as "stop notification sound") is output as a constant sound regardless of the output level (volume) of the game sound set by the player. Is desirable. For example, when the player can select the output level of the desired game sound from three stages of volume "loud", "medium", and "low" from the menu screen, the volume "low" is set. Even in some cases, the occurrence of a stopped state is an event that the clerk of the amusement store should promptly recognize and respond to, so regardless of the result of the volume setting, the volume should be large and constant (for example, volume "loud"). It is desirable to make a sound.

Further, in FIG. 234, "Unimemo" is the name of the information providing service for the player. For example, the player logs in to start the game (may be the case where the game is started without the login operation). By logging out at the end of the game, game history information (for example, information according to the results of various games, such as how many games have been played in total, how many advantageous game states have been generated, and how many cards have been acquired at the maximum). ) Is confirmed or the service that can be acquired is shown. In addition, the game history information includes information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed during the game and the types of music that can be output according to the result of the game (establishment of the opening condition), and the player's mobile terminal. It also includes information about incidental benefits, such as information indicating the types of characters that can be displayed above and the types of songs that can be output.

As the login / logout method in the information providing service described above, various methods can be adopted. For example, a player's mobile terminal may be used to cause the player to read the two-dimensional code displayed on the second display unit 405 so that login / logout can be performed, or the player can be made to log in / out. Enter the password or memorize the password (Specifically, when logging out at the end of the game, a character string of about 4 to 10 digits can be displayed as the password for the next input instead of the two-dimensional code. , It can be acquired by the player by taking a note on a paper medium or taking a picture with a mobile terminal, and the password acquired in this way can be entered at the time of login before the next game start). By doing so, login / logout may be performed. In addition, these methods can be combined as appropriate so that login / logout can be performed.

In this example, when the player performs a predetermined operation at least at the time of logging out (or at the time of confirmation during the process), the two-dimensional code is displayed on the second display unit 405, and the player reads it using the mobile terminal. By doing so, a case where the game history information can be confirmed or acquired will be described as an example.

When the player operates the effect button 403 while the above-mentioned stop screen is displayed, a menu screen is displayed on the second display unit 405 as shown in the lower part of FIG. 234. That is, it is possible to provide game information even in the stopped state. A cursor is displayed on the menu screen, and when the selection button 401 is operated, the cursor moves, and when the enter button 402 is operated when the desired menu position is reached, the desired game information is displayed. It will be displayed on the second display unit 405. The same applies when the player operates the effect button 403 in a non-gaming state that is not in the stopped state.

When the menu "1: Arrangement / Payout Table" is selected / determined, the game information indicating the symbol arrangement in the pachislot 1 and the specified symbol combination and the payout at the time of winning is displayed on the second display unit 405. It can be confirmed with.

When the menu "2: Volume / light amount adjustment" is selected / determined, a setting screen is displayed in which the volume of the sound output from the speaker group 84 and the light amount of the LED group 85 can be adjusted in the pachislot machine 1. Will be done.

When the menu "3: Start Unimemo" is selected / determined, the above-mentioned login will be performed. In this case, the two-dimensional code may be displayed and the login may be performed by reading the code, or the password input screen may be displayed and the login may be performed by inputting the password. good. Further, the login may be performed only when the menu "3: Start Unimemo" is selected / determined.

When the menu "4: Midway confirmation code display" is selected / determined, the midway game history information can be confirmed. In this case, the two-dimensional code may be displayed and the game history information in the middle may be confirmed by reading it, or the password display screen may be displayed and this password may be stored. It may be possible to confirm the game history information in the middle. In addition, the game history information in the middle may be displayed on the second display unit 405 so that the game history information in the middle can be confirmed.

When the menu "5: Code display at the end" is selected / determined, the game history information at the end of the game can be confirmed. In this case, the two-dimensional code may be displayed and the game history information at the end of the game may be confirmed by reading the code, or the password display screen may be displayed and the password may be stored. As a result, the game history information at the end of the game may be confirmed. Further, the game history information at the end of the game may be displayed on the second display unit 405 so that the game history information at the end of the game can be confirmed.

When the menu "6: EXIT" is selected / determined, the display of the menu screen ends. In this case, the display on the second display unit 405 returns to the above-mentioned stopped screen.

As described above, in this example, even in the stopped state, the operation for confirming the game information of the player (for example, the operation for displaying the menu screen, or displaying the two-dimensional code, password, etc.). It is possible to accept the operation for). Since such a directing operation is an operation not related to the game itself, even if such a directing operation can be accepted during the stop state, the stop function is not hindered at all. Moreover, for example, for a player who wants to accumulate game history information, if the game history information cannot be confirmed and acquired due to the activation of the stop function, the motivation to continue playing the game is considerably reduced. Will be done. In particular, in this example, the stop function is activated when the cumulative difference number exceeds 12500 (in other words, when the game result is quite successful for the player). Therefore, such concerns are expected to become more prominent. Therefore, it is considered that such a concern can be eliminated and the convenience of the player can be greatly improved by configuring as in this example.

In addition, as described above, when the stop notification sound is output as a loud sound (when the stop notification sound is continuously output at a loud volume for a certain period of time), the player comes and the clerk of the game store comes. You have to wait in a very noisy state until you release the stop, which is a nuisance to the players on the nearby platform. Therefore, when the menu screen is displayed during the stop state, control such as lowering the volume of the stop notification sound or stopping the output may be possible. By doing so, the player who has been stopped calls the clerk with the clerk call button on the external device normally set in the game store, and then opens the menu screen to notify the stop. You can suppress the sound output and wait without stress, while you can read the two-dimensional code and copy the password.

In this example, it has been described that the menu screen can be displayed by a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the effect button 403) of the player even in the stopped state, but various modifications such as the following are performed. You can also do it.

(Dedicated menu screen at the time of stop)
The menu screen displayed in the stopped state may be a dedicated menu screen at the time of stopping, which is different from the menu screen displayed in the normal time. In the dedicated menu screen, for example, the stop state may be continuously notified from the stop screen, or only a part of the menus may be displayed. In this case, for example, only the above-mentioned menus "5: Code display at the end" and "6: EXIT" may be displayed on the dedicated menu screen. That is, the dedicated menu screen may be configured so that only game information that is expected to be desired by the player at the end of the game due to the occurrence of the stopped state can be provided. In addition, when the dedicated menu screen is displayed, a dedicated BGM is output at the same time, and each lamp (LED) is turned on with a dedicated light emission pattern. May be good.

Further, for example, as described in the present embodiment, a main display device (for example, a display device 11) composed of a relatively large screen and a sub display device (for example, a sub display device) composed of a relatively small screen. When the display device 18) is provided, the menu screen displayed in the normal state shall be displayed on the sub display device, and the dedicated menu screen displayed in the stopped state shall be displayed on the main display device. It may be a thing. Even in this way, since the game does not proceed during the stopped state, no inconvenience occurs, but rather the dedicated menu screen is displayed on a large screen, so that it is possible to improve the convenience of the player. ..

(Voice when operating the menu when stopping)
When the menu screen is displayed in the stopped state, assuming a player who ends the game, when the menu screen is started to be displayed (for example, when the effect button 403 is operated), when it is being displayed or when the display is finished (for example, " At the time of selecting / deciding "6: EXIT"), a voice such as "Thank you for playing" may be output. Further, when the menu screen is displayed in the normal state, such sound may not be output. Further, when the above-mentioned dedicated menu screen is displayed, such a display may be made together with such a sound.

(Payment of credit at the time of suspension)
In this example, when the stopped state occurs, all the medals that are automatically credited by the operation of the automatic settlement function are paid out from the medal payout outlet 24 to the medal tray 25, but after the stopped state occurs. In response to a specific operation (for example, a stop release operation) performed by a clerk of the game store, all the credited medals may be paid out from the medal payout outlet 24 to the medal tray 25. Further, for example, in the case of a medalless gaming machine, which will be described later, credit information (up to 50 cards) can be obtained according to a specific operation (for example, a stop release operation) performed by a clerk of a game store after the stop state occurs. ) May be transferred to the possessed medal information (information indicating all the retained medals of each player). As mentioned above, if the specifications are such that the credit will not be refunded until a specific operation is performed by the clerk of the amusement store, on the above-mentioned stop screen, "the clerk will perform the credit refund operation. A warning display such as "Please wait for a while." May be displayed to prompt the player to wait. Further, in addition to such a warning display, a immersive prevention display or the like may be performed.

(External signal at the time of stop)
When a stop state occurs, the external centralized terminal board 47 outputs a signal that makes it possible to recognize that the stop state has occurred or a signal corresponding to the occurrence of an error to an external management device (hall computer) or the like. The game store may be able to immediately grasp the occurrence of the stopped state.

(External signal during test)
In the type test by a testing institution, it is desirable to output a signal to notify the test equipment when a stop state occurs. In this case, the stopped state can be released without turning off the power by a predetermined operation (for example, an operation to the reset switch 76 or an operation to a door key (not shown)) so that the test can be continued even after the stopped state occurs. You may do so. This makes it possible to prevent the progress of the type test from being hindered by the occurrence of the stop state.

(Invention 4 according to this detailed example (No. 2))
As described above, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), the player can perform a predetermined operation (for example, an effect button) even in the disabled state (for example, the stopped state) in which the game is disabled. When the operation on the 403 is performed, a specific display (for example, a menu screen) for enabling the game information to be provided can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player in the gaming machine capable of generating a state that makes it impossible to play the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), the player can perform a predetermined operation (for example, the effect button 403) even in the disabled state (for example, the stopped state) in which the game is disabled. When the operation) is performed, a specific display (for example, a menu screen) for enabling the game information to be provided can be displayed. Further, when the specific display is displayed and the player further performs a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the selection button 401 and the enter button 402), the game information including the game history information can be confirmed. It is configured so that a special display (for example, a two-dimensional code) can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player in the gaming machine capable of generating a state that makes it impossible to play the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), the player can perform a predetermined operation (for example, the effect button 403) even in the disabled state (for example, the stopped state) in which the game is disabled. When the operation) is performed, a specific display (for example, a menu screen) for enabling the game information to be provided can be displayed. In addition, the disabled state will be shifted depending on the condition based on the difference between the used game value and the granted game value, but the transition condition is that the next game is in a game state that is not advantageous to the player. It is composed. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player in the gaming machine capable of generating a state that makes it impossible to play the game. In addition, for example, when a player is playing a game in an advantageous gaming state due to a change of players, and the condition based on the difference number happens to be satisfied, it is impossible until the advantageous gaming state ends. Since the transition to the disabled state is not performed, it is possible to generate the disabled state in a more appropriate situation, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest due to the occurrence of the disabled state.

[Structure of stop allowable symbol combination information of this example (detailed example (No. 2))]
As described above, the information of the combination of one or more symbols specified in the symbol combination table is the information that can be configured as the stop allowable symbol combination information, and the information of one or more symbols defined in the priority table. The combination information of is information that can be configured as stop allowable symbol combination information. That is, the stop allowable symbol combination information is information used to make it possible to recognize the contents of the combination of symbols permitted to be stopped and displayed (result display permitted to be derived) in the unit game. ..

In this example, in order to ensure the intended playability, "control control" is used as the stop control method, or from various viewpoints such as suppressing an increase in the amount of data related to symbol combination and stop control. The contents of the combination of symbols related to the loss in which no prize is generated are also determined in advance (see FIGS. 169 and 170, etc.). In addition, in determining this, the following measures will be taken as stop-allowable symbol combination information.

(Structure example of stop allowable symbol combination information related to disengagement (No. 1))
First, with reference to FIGS. 235 and 236, a configuration example (No. 1) of stop allowable symbol combination information related to detachment will be described. FIG. 235 is a diagram for explaining the group definition of the stop allowable symbol combination in this example, and FIG. 236 is a diagram for explaining the group definition of the stop allowable symbol combination in the conventional example.

In this example, the small winning combination ("F_1234 bell_A1" to "F_4321 bell_B2") has 24 choices (1st stop: 4 choices x 2nd stop: 3 choices x 3rd stop: 2 choices). It is a combination, and if you win a small combination in the hitting order and the stop operation is performed in the correct pressing order, priority control is given to the number of sheets (as a result, the position where the combination of symbols with a large number of payouts is stopped and displayed is prioritized. (Control to stop) is performed, and basically 12 kinds of different color bells ("C_red red red blue bell", "C_ red red blue red bell", "C_ red red blue blue bell", "C_ red blue red" "Blue Bell", "C_Red Blue Red Red Bell", "C_Red Blue Blue Blue Bell", "C_Blue Red Red Blue Bell", "C_Blue Red Blue Red Bell", "C_Blue Red Blue Blue Bell", "C_Blue Blue" One of "Red Red Bell", "C_Blue Blue Red Blue Bell", and "C_Blue Blue Blue Red Bell") is stopped and displayed, and 15 game values are given.

In this example, there are two types of bell symbols ("red bell" and "blue bell"), so there are a total of 16 combinations of bell-matched symbols that combine these (1st reel: 2 types x 1st reel). 2 reels: 2 ways x 3rd reel: 2 ways x 4th reel: 2 ways) Of these, the same color bells ("C_middle red bell", "C_middle blue bell") are rare roles. Since it is treated as a combination, it is set as a combination of symbols that does not stop at the time of winning a small winning reel. In addition, since a specific set of different colored bells (“C_blue red red red bell”) is treated as a common bell, it is set as a combination of symbols that do not stop when the batting order small winning combination is won (see FIGS. 178 to 201, etc.). .. Further, "red bell-blue bell-blue bell-red bell" is not set as a combination of symbols related to a small winning combination in order to reduce the amount of data (see FIGS. 161 to 170).

Further, in this example, when the batting order small winning combination is won and the stop operation is performed in the incorrect answer pressing order (failed pressing order), the number of conditional devices is prioritized control (the number of combinations of symbols that can be displayed as a result is large). (Control to give priority to the position where the cards are stopped) is performed, and the combination of symbols related to a plurality of winning single cards at the same time is preferentially stopped and displayed, rather than the above-mentioned 12 types of different color bells. Further, since the combination of the symbols related to these plurality of single-card combinations is configured as the combination of the symbols that are missed, if the timing of the player's stop operation is appropriate, the plurality of symbols that are finally won. One of the combinations of symbols related to the one-card combination of the above is stopped and displayed, and one game value is given. On the other hand, if the timing of the player's stop operation is not appropriate, a dropout occurs and the game value. Is not granted. In this case, the combination of symbols related to the detachment is stopped and displayed.

For example, when winning "F_1234 Bell_A1", the push order "1234" (meaning 1st reel 1st stop, 2nd reel 2nd stop, 3rd reel 3rd stop, 4th reel 4th stop) is correct. It is the push order, and if the stop operation is performed in the correct push order, "C_blue blue blue red bell" is stopped and displayed, and 15 cards are won.

Further, in this case, when the stop operation is performed in the push order "1243" or "1423" which is the failure push order, "C_1 sheet_blue blue A blue_A_1" and "C_blue blue blue red bell" are more than "C_blue blue blue red bell". If the stop control is performed so that "C_1 sheet_blue blue A blue_A_2" is preferentially stopped and displayed, and the timing of the stop operation is appropriate at the time of the fourth stop of the third reel, one of these symbols can be combined. When the stop is displayed and one prize is won, if the timing of the stop operation is not appropriate at the time of the 4th stop of the 3rd reel, a dropout will occur and of "T_T blue blue blue Koboshi 1" to "T_red red red T Koboshi 2" Any combination of symbols (in this case, for example, "T_blue blue T blue koboshi 1" or "T_blue blue T blue koboshi 2") is stopped and displayed.

Further, in this case, when the stop operation is performed in the push order "1342", "1432" or "1324" which is the failure push order, "C_1 sheet_blue A red" is more than "C_blue blue blue red bell". Stop control is performed so that "blue_A_1" and "C_1 sheet_blueA red-blue_A_2" are preferentially stopped and displayed, and the stop operation is performed when the second reel is stopped at the fourth stop (when the second reel is stopped at the third stop). If the timing is appropriate, one of the combinations of symbols will be stopped and displayed, and one prize will be won. The timing of the stop operation must be appropriate when the second reel is stopped at the fourth stop (when the second reel is stopped at the third stop). For example, a combination of any of the symbols "T_T blue blue blue Koboshi 1" to "T_red red red T koboshi 2" (in this case, for example, "T_blue T red blue Koboshi 1" or "T_" Blue T Red Blue Koboshi 2 ”) is stopped and displayed.

Further, in this case, the push order which is the failure push order, the second reel first stop "20 ○○", the third reel first stop "30 ○○", and the fourth reel first stop "40 ○○" When the stop operation is performed with "", the stop control is performed so that "C_1 sheet A_1st_1" to "C_1 sheet A_4th_16" are preferentially stopped and displayed over "C_blue blue blue red bell". , If the timing of the stop operation is appropriate at the 4th stop, one of the combinations of symbols will be displayed as a stop and one prize will be won. Then, the combination of any of the symbols "T_Koboshi_1st_1" to "T_Koboshi_4th_8" is stopped and displayed. For example, "1st" means that the first reel (which may be at the time of the fourth stop or the first to third stops) may be missed, and "2nd" means that the second reel (at the time of the fourth stop). However, it means that a miss can occur at the first to third stops), and "3rd" means that a miss occurs at the third reel (may be at the fourth stop or at the first to third stops). "4th" means to obtain, and means that the omission may occur in the 4th reel (may be at the time of the 4th stop or at the time of the 1st to 3rd stop).

Then, in this example, for example, the combination of symbols related to the deviation that can be stopped and displayed when the above-mentioned omission occurs is specified in advance, but the number of combinations of the symbols is enormous. Therefore, we have decided to devise ways to appropriately compress the amount of data.

As shown in FIG. 235, in this example, for example, the combination of symbols related to the detachment is defined as "NZR01" to "NZR16", and these are group-defined as "Group 1" of the stop allowable symbol combination information. And I try to store the data. That is, in each reel, a plurality of different symbol combinations in which each of the plurality of different symbols has a logical sum relationship are stored as one grouped data connected by the "OR" condition.

Here, the combination of the symbols related to the loss displayed when the item is dropped (spilled stitch) is the combination of the symbols related to the number priority control described above (for example, the combination of the symbols related to the winning of 15 pieces such as the matching of different colored bells). Alternatively, it is determined by the correspondence relationship with the combination of symbols related to the above-mentioned condition device number priority control (for example, the combination of symbols related to one winning combination such as one winning combination).

From this point of view, for example, the combination of symbols of "HZR02", "HZR06", "HZR10" and "HZR14" is a combination of symbols that is not always necessary in this example, and the above-mentioned conditions It is a combination of symbols that does not stop even when the number of devices priority control is performed (as a result of the above-mentioned control control, the stop display is not performed as a result). Although not shown in FIGS. 235 and 236, "HZR21", "HZR22", "HZR29", "HZR30", "HZR37", "HZR38", "HZR45", "HZR46", "HZR53" , "HZR55", "HZR61" and "HZR63" are the same.

However, in this example, the amount of data to be stored is compressed by intentionally specifying the combination of these unstoppable symbols. Since the combination of symbols related to the out-of-order does not give any privilege to the player, even such a data structure does not affect the fairness of the game. Further, even if the combination of symbols related to the detachment that is not stopped may be stopped by mistake, the same applies. Therefore, even with such a data structure, the design man-hours do not increase significantly.

A conventional example in which the configuration is not configured as in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 236. As shown in FIG. 236, for example, the combination of the symbols of "HZR02", "HZR06", "HZR10" and "HZR14" is a combination of symbols that does not stop, and therefore is not defined as the symbol combination data. In this case, even if these are group-defined as stop-allowable symbol combination information, it is necessary to store at least four grouped data of "group A" to "group D".

On the other hand, if it is configured as in this example, only one data grouped as stop allowable symbol combination information is required. Similarly, if at least "HZR01" to "NZR64" are configured as in this example, only four data are grouped as stop allowable symbol combination information. Similarly, "HZR65" to "HZR96" can also be stored as grouped data. It should be noted that the grouping may be appropriately performed for a combination of a plurality of patterns that can be grouped. That is, when a plurality of different symbol combinations in which a plurality of different symbols are in a logical sum relationship are defined in at least one reel, the symbol combination that is not stopped is included in the combination as a result. If data compression is possible, grouping should be included, and if it is not necessary to include symbol combinations that will not be stopped, grouping may be performed as usual.

In this example, the combination of a plurality of symbols related to the outliers shown in the symbol combination table can be defined as data grouped as stop allowable symbol combination information. In addition, a plurality of combinations of symbols related to the outliers shown in the priority table can be defined as data grouped as stop allowable symbol combination information. In addition, the data defined in this way can include a combination of symbols that are not actually stopped. In this example, by adopting such a data structure, it is possible to reduce the amount of information regarding the symbol combination. Further, at the time of stop control, for example, the number of processes required for the search process (or priority setting process) can be reduced, so that the processing load can be reduced.

In tables other than these, stop permissible symbol combination information can be specified with the same configuration. For example, when the internal winning combination is determined and a table for calling the permissible symbol combination data is provided correspondingly, the stop permissible symbol combination information can be similarly specified in such a table. That is, the stop permissible symbol combination information defined as the grouped data in this example can be used for various purposes necessary for the progress of the game.

Further, in this example, the combination of a plurality of patterns related to the loss, which is grouped as the stop allowable symbol combination information, is described as the combination of the symbols related to the loss when the omission occurs. The combination of symbols related to a plurality of types of outliers may be a combination of symbols that may be stopped and displayed in the case of mere outliers (that is, when none of the winning combinations are won). It may be a combination of symbols that may be stopped and displayed in the case of "F_pseudo-loss 1" or "F_pseudo-loss 2". Further, a combination of symbols related to a plurality of replay combinations may be configured as such, or a combination of symbols related to a plurality of small combinations may be configured as such. Similarly, a combination of symbols related to a plurality of bonus combinations may be configured as such. That is, the stop permissible symbol combination information in this example can be configured as defining a plurality of symbol combinations corresponding to the determination result (internal winning combination) of the combination determining means in one group. Further, in this case, the determination result of the winning combination means includes both the determination of one of the winning combinations and the determination of the winning combination without winning any of the winning combinations. Can be done. In short, the plurality of symbol combinations defined by one group in the stop allowable symbol combination information may be any symbol combination as long as it plays a common or related role in the game.

(Invention 5 according to this detailed example (No. 2))
As described above, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), the stop allowable symbol combination information referred to in the stop control includes a plurality of symbol combinations corresponding to the determination result of the combination determination means in one group. The specified stop permissible symbol combination information (for example, the stop permissible symbol combination information "group 1" shown in FIG. 235) is included, and the specific stop permissible symbol combination information is logical for each of a plurality of different symbols in at least one reel. A plurality of symbol combinations that form a sum relationship are defined, and the plurality of symbol combinations are configured so that the symbol combinations that are not stopped by the stop control may be included. That is, it is possible to specify more symbol combinations in one group by making it possible to include symbol combinations that are not stopped in the specific stop allowable symbol combination information. As a result, the amount of information regarding the symbol combination can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), the stop permissible symbol combination information referred to in the stop control includes a specific mode (for example, correct answer pressing) at the time of winning a predetermined combination (for example, a small winning combination). Specific stop permissible symbol combination information (for example, figure) that defines a plurality of symbol combinations corresponding to so-called spills (losses) that are displayed as a stop due to the fact that the stop operation was not performed in order). The stop permissible symbol combination information "group 1") shown in 235 is included, and the specific stop permissible symbol combination information defines a plurality of symbol combinations in which a plurality of different symbols are ORed in at least one reel. At the same time, the plurality of symbol combinations may include symbol combinations that are not stopped by the stop control. That is, it is possible to specify more symbol combinations in one group by making it possible to include symbol combinations that are not stopped in the specific stop allowable symbol combination information. As a result, the amount of information regarding the symbol combination can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced. Further, by making the symbol combination defined in this way a so-called spilled eye, it is possible to stop the symbol in a more comfortable manner even when the predetermined game value is not given.

Further, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), the stop allowable symbol combination information referred to in the stop control includes a specific stop allowable symbol combination that defines a plurality of symbol combinations corresponding to the loss in one group. Information (for example, the stop permissible symbol combination information “group 1” shown in FIG. 235) is included, and the specific stop permissible symbol combination information includes a plurality of different patterns in which each of a plurality of different symbols has a logical sum relationship in at least one reel. The symbol combinations are defined, and the plurality of symbol combinations may include symbol combinations that are not stopped by the stop control. Further, at least one reel is configured to perform stop control by so-called control control. That is, it is possible to specify more symbol combinations in one group by making it possible to include symbol combinations that are not stopped in the specific stop allowable symbol combination information. As a result, the amount of information regarding the symbol combination can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced. Further, such an action effect becomes more remarkable when the stop control is performed by the so-called control control.

(Structure example of stop allowable symbol combination information related to disengagement (Part 2))
Next, a configuration example (No. 2) of the stop allowable symbol combination information related to the detachment will be described. In the above-mentioned configuration example (No. 1), the stop permissible symbol combination information related to the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed when a small winning combination is won and the omission occurs has been described, but in this configuration example (No. 2), , The stop permissible symbol combination information related to the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed when the bonus combination is won (or when the bonus combination is carried over) and the omission occurs will be described.

In this example, in the 2BB flag / 3 bet state or the 3BB flag / 2 bet state, if no winning combination other than the bonus combination is won, the data indicating the internal winning combination is "F_pseudo loss". 1 ”. Basically, the player does not win 2BB in the 3-card bet state and does not win the 3BB in the 2-card bet state, so that the player looks like a mere "missing". Therefore, when "F_pseudo-loss 1" is determined, the combination of symbols related to normal deviation (including the above-mentioned spilled stitch) may be stopped and displayed.

Further, in this example, in the 3BB flag / 3-bet state (game that wins 3BB in the 3-bet state) or in the 2BB flag / 2-bet state (game that wins 2BB in the 2-bet state). If no winning combination other than the bonus combination is won, the data indicating the internal winning combination is "F_pseudo-loss 2". In this case, if the stop operation is performed at the timing when the symbols constituting the combination of the symbols related to the winning bonus combination can be stopped and displayed on each reel, the combination of the symbols is stopped and displayed and the BB game is played. While shifting to the state, if the stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbols constituting the symbol combination related to the winning bonus combination cannot be stopped and displayed on at least one reel, the symbol combination is changed. Although the stop is not displayed and the game does not shift to the BB game state, in this example, the actual bonus state (BB game state) is not necessarily advantageous to the player as compared with each game state in the increase section. There is no such thing (see FIG. 177, etc.), and it is better to play the game without stopping and displaying the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination.

Therefore, in this case, the game is performed in a state in which the combination of symbols related to the outliers, which is different from the normal combination of the symbols related to the outliers, is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the symbols related to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed. It becomes necessary to suggest this to the player. In this example, for such a purpose, the combination of the symbols of "HZR97" to "HZR100" is defined as the combination of the symbols related to the detachment. In addition, it is not limited to the playability as in this example, and for example, when the actual bonus state is the playability that is advantageous to the player, it is related to the so-called "reach eye" or "chance eye". For the purpose of suggesting to the player that the combination of symbols can be stopped and displayed and the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed, the symbols "HZR97" to "HZR100" are used as the combination of symbols related to the loss. It is also possible to specify the combination of.

In this example, as a combination of symbols related to such an outlier, "HZR97" consisting of "Seven-ANY-ANY-ANY", "HZR98" consisting of "ANY-Seven-ANY-ANY", and "ANY-ANY-" It defines "HZR99" consisting of "Seven-ANY" and "HZR100" consisting of "ANY-ANY-ANY-Red Bell" (see FIGS. 170 and 201, etc.). In addition, "ANY" indicates that any symbol may be used.

That is, in this example, the basic form of the combination of symbols related to the outlier, which suggests that the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination can be stopped and displayed, is defined as "Seven-Seven-Seven-Red Bell", and this is divided. Therefore, it is defined as a combination of symbols of "HZR97" to "HZR100". This makes it possible to reduce the amount of information related to symbol combination and stop control, and to reduce the processing load.

For example, when "F_pseudo-loss 2" is determined between 2BB flags / 2 bets, the combination of "C_BB2" symbols related to 2BB is defined as "Bra 2-Bra 2-Bra 2-Bra 2". Therefore, each reel (symbol position "11" on the first reel, symbol position "0" on the second reel, symbol position "19" on the third reel, symbol position "13" on the fourth reel) is ". When the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "Bra 2" symbol can be stopped and displayed, the combination of the symbols related to 2BB is stopped and displayed. Further, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "Bra 2" symbol cannot be stopped and displayed on each reel, the above-mentioned "Seven-Seven-Seven-Red Bell" is stopped and displayed.

In this case, for example, on the first reel, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "bra 2" symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the "bra 2" symbol is stopped and displayed, but on the second and fourth reels, the "bra 2" symbol is stopped and displayed. If the stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbol cannot be stopped and displayed and the "Bra 2" symbol is not displayed as a stop, the stop type is "Bra 2-Seven-Seven-Red Bell" based on the above-mentioned basic shape. I want to. Further, for example, in the second reel, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "bra 2" symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the "bra 2" symbol is stopped and displayed, but in the first, third and fourth reels, " If the stop operation is performed at a timing when the "Bra 2" symbol cannot be stopped and displayed and the "Bra 2" symbol is not displayed as a stop, the stop type is "Seven-Bra 2-Seven-Red" based on the above-mentioned basic shape. I want to say "bell".

Further, for example, in the third reel, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "bra 2" symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the "bra 2" symbol is stopped and displayed, but in the first, second and fourth reels, " If the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "Bra 2" symbol cannot be stopped and the "Bra 2" symbol is not displayed as a stop, the stop type is the "Seven-Seven-Bra 2-Red" based on the above-mentioned basic shape. I want to say "bell". Further, for example, in the 4th reel, the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "Bra 2" symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the "Bra 2" symbol is stopped and displayed, but in the 1st to 3rd reels, the "Bra 2" is displayed. If the stop operation is performed at a timing when the symbol cannot be stopped and displayed and the "Bra 2" symbol is not displayed as a stop, the stop type should be "Seven-Seven-Seven-Bra 2" based on the above-mentioned basic shape. ..

In this way, when the symbols that make up the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination are stopped and displayed on some reels, but the symbols that make up the combination of symbols related to the bonus combination are not stopped and displayed on other reels. , If you want to stop and display the combination of symbols related to a specific outlier, if you do not specify the stop allowable symbol combination information (information about the combination of symbols) as in this example, specify all the combinations of the symbols in advance. It will be necessary to keep it. For example, the above-mentioned "Bra2-Seven-Seven-Red Bell", "Seven-Bra2-Seven-Red Bell", "Seven-Seven-Bra2-Red Bell", and "Seven-Seven-Seven-Bra 2". ] Etc. need to be defined in advance as a combination of symbols. However, these are only a part, for example, if the "Bra 2" symbol is stopped and displayed on the 2 reels and the "Bra 2" symbol is not stopped and displayed on the remaining 2 reels, the "Bra 2" symbol is displayed on the 3 reels. When the stop display is displayed and the "Bra 2" symbol is not displayed on the remaining 1 reel, the "Bra 2" symbol is stopped and displayed on any reel according to all reels and their push order (24 ways). It is necessary to specify the combination of symbols in consideration of the case where the "Bra 2" symbol is not stopped and displayed on which reel.

However, if all such combinations of symbols are specified, the amount of information will be enormous, and the number of combinations of symbols to be searched will increase even in the above-mentioned priority table, for example. , The processing load will also increase. Therefore, in this example, not all such symbol combinations are specified, but are divided and specified as symbol combinations including "ANY" to reduce the amount of information related to symbol combinations and stop control, and to reduce the processing load. It is possible to reduce.

For example, in the above example, when the stop operation is performed on the first reel and the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "Bra 2" symbol can be stopped and displayed, "C_BB2" ("BB03"). ") Data is referred to, and the" Bra 2 "design is stopped. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "Bra 2" symbol cannot be stopped and displayed, the data of "T_BB Koboshi_1st" ("HZR97") is referred to and the "Seven" symbol is stopped. ..

Further, when the stop operation is performed on the second reel, and when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "Bra 2" symbol can be stopped and displayed, the data of "C_BB2" ("BB03") is displayed. Referenced, the "Bra 2" symbol is stopped. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "Bra 2" symbol cannot be stopped and displayed, the data of "T_BB Koboshi_2nd" ("HZR98") is referred to and the "Seven" symbol is stopped. ..

Further, when the stop operation is performed on the third reel, and when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "Bra 2" symbol can be stopped and displayed, the data of "C_BB2" ("BB03") is displayed. Referenced, the "Bra 2" symbol is stopped. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "Bra 2" symbol cannot be stopped and displayed, the data of "T_BB Koboshi_3rd" ("HZR99") is referred to and the "Seven" symbol is stopped. ..

Further, when the stop operation is performed on the fourth reel, and when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "Bra 2" symbol can be stopped and displayed, the data of "C_BB2" ("BB03") is displayed. Referenced, the "Bra 2" symbol is stopped. On the other hand, when the stop operation is performed at the timing when the "Bra 2" symbol cannot be stopped and displayed, the data of "T_BB Koboshi_4th" ("HZR100") is referred to and the "Red bell" symbol is stopped. NS.

That is, in a game in which the display of the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination is allowed, the combination of a plurality of symbols related to a specific outlier displayed when the combination of symbols corresponding to the bonus combination cannot be displayed is exclusive. Only one reel specifies a specific symbol (for example, "Seven" symbol or "Red Bell" symbol) that is different from the special symbol related to the bonus combination (for example, "Bra 2" symbol), and any of the remaining reels It is stipulated that a symbol may be used, and stop control is performed with the stop allowable symbol combination information defined in this way.

In this example, the combination of the symbols related to the specific loss as described above has been described as defining the combination of the four symbols corresponding to the number of reels, but the combination of the symbols related to such a specific loss has been described. The combination can be appropriately increased or decreased as necessary. For example, it is possible to collectively specify a combination of symbols related to a plurality of outliers by specifying only one combination of symbols related to the outliers for which "ANY" is defined for at least one reel (combination of symbols rather than being specified individually). The amount of information about the information can be reduced), and in such a case, the same action and effect as described above are achieved.

Further, in this example, the combination of the symbols related to the specific loss as described above is described as the combination of the symbols related to the loss when the bonus combination is missed. The combination of symbols related to the loss may be a combination of symbols that may be stopped and displayed in the case of a simple loss (when the non-flags are removed), or a stop display in the case of "F_pseudo-loss 1". It may be a combination of symbols that may be used. Further, not only the bonus combination but also the combination of the symbols related to the loss when the replay combination or the small combination is missed may be used. For example, the combination of symbols related to a specific outlier in which "ANY" is defined for at least one reel in this example is when a spill is displayed at the time of winning a batting order small winning combination (pushing order is incorrect and stops). It may be a combination of symbols that can be displayed when the operation timing is not appropriate), or when a normal small winning combination that may be missed occurs. In this way, the number of symbol combinations for stop control that should be referred to at the time of winning these small winning combinations may be saved. Further, the combination of symbols related to one or more replay combinations may be configured as such, or the combination of symbols related to one or more small combinations may be configured as such. Similarly, a combination of symbols related to one or more bonus combinations may be configured as such. That is, the combination of specific symbols for which "ANY" is defined for at least one reel in this example can be configured as a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the determination result (internal winning combination) of the combination determining means. Further, in this case, the determination result of the winning combination means includes both the determination of one of the winning combinations and the determination of the winning combination without winning any of the winning combinations. Can be done. In short, the specific symbol combination for which "ANY" is defined for at least one reel may be any symbol combination as long as it plays a specific role in the game. Further, when a specific combination of such specific symbols is exclusively specified only on one reel and a plurality of combinations of symbols which may be any symbol are specified on the remaining reels, each symbol is specified. Any symbol combination may be used as long as the combination is a symbol combination that plays a common or related role in the game. Further, the stop permissible symbol combination information indicating the combination of symbols related to a specific outlier as described above is also used as data for calling, for example, the internal winning combination and the permissible symbol combination data correspondingly. be able to. That is, the stop permissible symbol combination information indicating the combination of symbols related to a specific deviation in this example can be used for various purposes necessary for the progress of the game.

(Invention 6 according to this detailed example (No. 2))
As described above, according to the gaming machine of the detailed example (No. 2), the special combination is supported in the game in which the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, the bonus combination “2BB”) is permitted. When the symbol combination cannot be displayed, it is possible to display a specific symbol combination (for example, "T_BB Koboshi_1st" to "T_BB Koboshi_4th") corresponding to the loss, and the specific symbol combination can be displayed on at least one or more reels. It may be a symbol, and is configured as a symbol combination in which a specific symbol (for example, a "seven" symbol or a "red bell" symbol) different from the special symbol is defined in the remaining reels. As a result, the amount of information regarding the symbol combination can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this detailed example (No. 2), in a game in which the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, the bonus combination "2BB") is permitted, the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is allowed. When cannot be displayed, it is possible to display a specific symbol combination (for example, "T_BB Koboshi_1st" to "T_BB Koboshi_4th") corresponding to the loss, and the specific symbol combination can be any symbol on at least one or more reels. Often, the remaining reels are configured as a symbol combination in which a specific symbol (for example, a "seven" symbol or a "red bell" symbol) different from the special symbol is defined. Further, the specific symbol combination can be displayed even when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination cannot be displayed during the stop operation. As a result, the amount of information regarding the symbol combination can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced. Further, even when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped, the symbol combination more in line with the intention can be stopped.

Further, according to the gaming machine of this detailed example (No. 2), in a game in which the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, the bonus combination "2BB") is permitted, the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is allowed. When cannot be displayed, it is possible to display a specific symbol combination (for example, "T_BB Koboshi_1st" to "T_BB Koboshi_4th") corresponding to the loss, and there are a plurality of types of specific symbol combinations, each of which is exclusively one. Only on the reels, a specific symbol (for example, a "seven" symbol or a "red bell" symbol) different from the special symbol is defined, and the remaining reels are configured as a symbol combination that may be any symbol. As a result, the amount of information regarding the symbol combination can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced. Further, such an action effect becomes more remarkable as the number of reels increases.

The specific symbol may be arranged at a position where the special symbol can be displayed on each of the plurality of reels when the special symbol cannot be displayed. As a result, even when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped, the symbol combination more in line with the intention can be stopped. In particular, it is suitable when it is desired to suggest to the player that the combination of symbols related to the special role can be stopped and displayed.

[Other examples of game playability (game specifications) (No. 11)]
Subsequently, another example (No. 11) of playability (game specifications) that can be implemented in the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 237 to 245. FIG. 237 is a diagram conceptually explaining the flow of the game in this example.

Of the inventions described in this example, those that do not require the specifications of another example (No. 11) of game playability (game specifications) can be appropriately applied to other game playability (game specifications). It shall be. Further, unless otherwise specified in this example, it is assumed that various structures, controls, game specifications, production specifications, etc. already described in FIGS. 1 to 236 can be appropriately applied in this example as well. That is, it is also possible to combine a part or all of the configuration described in this example with a part or all of the configuration described in the present embodiment, each of the other examples, the modified example, and the like to obtain the present invention. ..

As shown in FIG. 237, in this example, it is possible to increase the game value by notifying the player of an advantageous stop operation mode (stop operation information) as a state in which the player plays a game. A special state (AT state) and a normal state (non-AT state) in which the game value cannot be increased by notifying the player of an advantageous stop operation mode are provided. In addition, a specific state (CZ state) in which the expectation of transition to the special state is higher than that of the normal state is provided. In this example, the main CPU 101 makes it possible to control at least one of these states. In this example, the normal state may be described simply as "normal", the special state may be described simply as "AT", and the specific state may be described simply as "CZ". Further, as the notification means for notifying the player of the advantageous stop operation mode, the various notification means described above can be used.

Further, in this example, as a game section in which the player plays a game, an advantageous section capable of notifying the stop operation mode advantageous to the player and a non-advantageous section in which the stop operation mode advantageous to the player cannot be notified. And are provided. In this example, the main CPU 101 can control at least one of these sections. In the advantageous section, a state in which notification of a stop operation mode that is actually advantageous to the player can be continuously executed for a certain period of time is a special state, and the special state is configured as an increasing section that functions as the above-mentioned advantageous gaming state. NS. Further, in the advantageous section, a state in which the notification of the stop operation mode advantageous to the player is not basically executed is a normal state, and the normal state is configured as a normal advantageous section functioning as the above-mentioned normal game state. .. The specific state may be a state that can be controlled in the non-advantageous section, or may be a state that can be controlled when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section (that is, at the start of the advantageous section), or during the advantageous section. Depending on the fact that the specific condition is satisfied, the state may be controlled while maintaining the advantageous section. Details will be described later. When the specific state is controlled during the advantageous section, the specific state is basically configured as a normal advantageous section that functions as the above-mentioned normal gaming state as in the normal state, but as described above, it is usually It is configured as a state in which the expectation of transition to the special state is higher than that of the state (that is, the probability of transition to the advantageous gaming state is high).

Here, the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section will be described again. The requirements for the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section in the following description are merely examples, and if at least one of the requirements is relaxed or tightened, the invention of this example is appropriately modified and applied accordingly. It is possible.

(Non-advantageous section)
(1) It is not possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode such as push order navigation.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change), or when the initialization condition such as the above-mentioned "RAM error" is satisfied, a non-advantageous section is set as the initial state.
(3) When the above-mentioned various limit processes are executed in the advantageous section (that is, a predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) ) Is a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 sheets)), a non-advantageous section is set as an initial state. It should be noted that the non-advantageous section may be set on the condition that the predetermined value is referred to and the predetermined value is a specific update value even before the predetermined value becomes the specified value. Further, when a predetermined end condition is satisfied during the advantageous section and the end is determined (for example, when the lottery for the end of the advantageous section is won), the non-advantageous section may be set on that condition. Details will be described later.
(4) In the non-advantageous section, the process related to the advantageous section (for example, the process of determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (whether or not to win the advantageous section transition lottery)) referred to the determined internal winning combination. Only processing is possible, and it is not possible to perform processing that refers to various parameters other than the internal winning combination, such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the non-advantageous section (or the advantageous section before the transition). Can not. It should be noted that which internal winning combination is determined can be determined by directly referring to the data indicating the internal winning combination such as the winning number, or the sub-flags generated or converted from the data of the internal winning combination (multiple combinations). It is also possible to indirectly refer to the data indicating the internal winning combination, such as (one data to be determined).
(5) The non-advantageous section is basically one state, and a plurality of states cannot be set within the non-advantageous section. For example, the non-advantageous section after the end of the advantageous section cannot be set as the non-advantageous section A, the non-advantageous section after the setting change cannot be set as the non-advantageous section B, and so on. However, under certain conditions, a plurality of states may be set within the non-advantageous section. Details will be described later.

(Advantageous section)
(1) It is possible to notify the player of an advantageous stop operation mode such as push order navigation. Therefore, it is possible to control the AT state.
(2) When the set value is changed (setting change), or when the initialization condition such as the above-mentioned "RAM error" is satisfied, the advantageous section cannot be set as the initial state.
(3) When the above-mentioned various limit processes are executed in the advantageous section (that is, a predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) ) Is a specified value (for example, 1500 games or 2400 sheets)), it is necessary to end the advantageous section.
(4) In the advantageous section, the process related to the advantageous section (for example, the process of determining whether or not to shift the state during the advantageous section (whether or not to win the AT lottery, the CZ transition lottery, or the advantageous section end lottery)) , Not only the processing referring to the determined internal winning combination, but also the processing referring to various parameters other than the internal winning combination such as the derived result display (combination of symbols) and the number of games in the advantageous section can be performed. In addition to the above, various parameters that can be referred to include, for example, an internal winning combination, a derived result display (combination of symbols), a value of points given according to the number of games in an advantageous section, and RT. It is also possible to adopt the detection timing of the state or the stop operation of any of the reels. These are also examples.
(5) A plurality of states can be set within the advantageous section. For example, it is possible to set a state such as a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a CZ state that easily shifts to the AT state, or an AT state in which the expected value of the game value increase becomes positive when the stop operation is performed according to the notification. .. Further, for example, in response to the determination of the transition to the CZ state in the normal state, the CZ precursor is set as a standby state until the transition to the CZ state is actually performed, and a precursor effect suggesting the transition to the CZ state can be performed. According to the determination of the AT state transition in the state, the normal state, or the CZ state, it is set as a standby state until the actual transition to the AT state is performed, and a precursor effect suggesting the transition to the AT state is performed. The state such as the AT precursor state to be obtained can also be set according to the playability.
(6) Provide an advantageous section lamp (section notification means) capable of recognizing whether the section is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section, and notify that the advantageous section is in progress when the advantageous section lamp is lit. (If the advantageous section lamp is off, it can be notified that the non-advantageous section is in progress). The advantageous section lamp basically starts lighting when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, and continues to light until the transition to the non-advantageous section, but the lighting start timing is not limited to this. For example, if the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section (the advantageous section has started), but the transitioned advantageous section is in the normal state, the lighting does not start, and the lighting starts from the first AT state. You may try to do it. If the shifted advantageous section is in the AT state, lighting may be started from that time.

In most cases, the player starts the game from the normal state. The normal state is basically an advantageous section, but it is a disadvantageous normal advantageous section for the player, and it is determined whether or not to shift to the special state (for example, AT transition judgment) by referring to the various parameters described above. It is said. When it is determined that the state is to be shifted to the special state (after the precursor period is exhausted if the precursor period is set), the transition to the special state is performed (AT start condition is satisfied). As will be described later, when basically not shifting to a specific state at the time of setting change, it is also possible to control the non-advantageous section shifted according to the setting change as a normal state. However, in this case, as described above, the only parameter that can be referred to is the internal winning combination.

Further, when the determination result of shifting to the special state is not obtained, the determination of whether or not to shift to the specific state (for example, CZ transition determination) is performed with reference to the various parameters described above. When it is determined that the state is to be shifted to the specific state (after the precursor period is exhausted if the precursor period is set), the transition to the specific state is performed (CZ start condition is satisfied). It should be noted that the determination of whether or not to shift to the special state and the determination of whether or not to shift to the specific state may be performed separately, or the determination result of 1 (for example, the determination result of shifting to the special state). , It may be performed so that either a judgment result of shifting to a specific state or a judgment result of not shifting to any of them can be obtained).

Here, in this example, for example, it is possible to perform two types of CZ transition determination. One is, for example, a CZ transition determination according to an internal winning combination (or a derived result display may be used). In the normal state, which is an advantageous section, a CZ transition lottery is performed for each game with a winning probability associated with the internal winning combination, and when the CZ transition lottery is won, the transition to a specific state is maintained while maintaining the advantageous section. Let me.

The other is a CZ transition determination according to the end of the advantageous section. For example, in the normal state, which is an advantageous section, a predetermined point value is subtracted (or added) at each predetermined opportunity, and when the predetermined point value becomes a specific update result, it is advantageous. Whether or not to end the section is determined. Then, when it is determined that the advantageous section is terminated (after the precursor period is exhausted if the precursor period is set), the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. Then, the predetermined period at the start of the advantageous section when the non-advantageous section is changed to the advantageous section again, or the non-advantageous section itself can be configured as a specific state. That is, the shift to the non-advantageous section may satisfy the CZ start condition. In this example, when the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it always shifts to the specific state. That is, the non-advantageous section functions as a CZ transition confirmed state. In this case, when the predetermined period at the start of the advantageous section when the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section is set to the specific state, the advantageous section of the transition destination to be transferred from the non-advantageous section is always controlled as the specific state. You can do it. However, when the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, at least the state is set to be easier to shift to the specific state than the normal state, but the state may not be determined until the transition to the specific state is made.

A specific example of the CZ transition determination according to the termination of the advantageous section will be described. For example, in the normal state, the predetermined point value is set to "300", and the predetermined point value is deducted by "1" for at least one game regardless of the internal winning combination. In addition, when the internal winning combination is a specific winning combination, a subtraction lottery is performed, and when the winning combination is won, a value exceeding "1" is subtracted (for example, when the replay winning combination is won, "10" is always subtracted and rare. At the time of winning a role, "20" to "100" shall be subtracted by lottery). In addition, in the normal state, it is possible to shift to a high-probability state in which a predetermined point value is easily subtracted, and in the high-probability state, the value to be subtracted per game is higher than in the non-high-probability state. can. In the normal state, the current predetermined point value may be displayed to the player.

Then, when the predetermined point value becomes "0", the advantageous section end lottery is performed, and when the lottery is won, the precursor period (for example, any of 0 to 16 games) is determined. In the precursory period, the transition to a specific state (or the degree of expectation of whether or not to transition) is suggested, and the advantage of the specific state in the case of transition is suggested, and it is specified when the game in the precursory period is performed. It is notified that the state will shift to the non-advantageous section, and the state shifts to the specific state according to the shift to the non-advantageous section. On the other hand, if the lottery is not won, a false (gase) precursory period is determined, and in the precursory period, a transition to a specific state (expectation of whether or not to transition) is suggested and (actually). It is suggested that the advantage of the specific state when it shifts to (although it does not shift to), and it is notified that it will not shift to the specific state when the game of the precursory period is performed, and it is advantageous without shifting to the non-advantageous section. The section is maintained and the normal state is maintained. At this time, "300" is set to the predetermined point value again. In this way, a maximum of 300 games from when "300" is set to a predetermined point value until when it becomes "0" can be set as a game of one cycle.

The same flow is basically applied to the CZ transition determination according to the above-mentioned internal winning combination. For example, when a rare role is won, a CZ transition lottery is performed, and if the lottery is won, a precursory period is determined, and in the precursory period, the degree of expectation of transition to a specific state (or whether or not to transition). ) Is suggested, the advantage of the specific state in the case of transition is suggested, and it is notified that the transition to the specific state is performed when the game of the precursory period is performed, and the advantageous section is maintained and the specific state is changed. Migrate. On the other hand, if the lottery is not won, a false (gase) precursory period is determined, and in the precursory period, a transition to a specific state (expectation of whether or not to transition) is suggested and (actually). The advantage of the specific state in the case of transition is suggested, it is notified that it will not shift to the specific state when the game of the precursory period is performed, and the normal state is maintained while the advantageous section is maintained. Is maintained. At this time, the initial value "300" may be reset for the predetermined point value, or the value in the process of subtraction may be maintained.

Further, as the specific state, a plurality of specific states (for example, CZ1 and CZ2 described later) having different advantages of the special state transition probability are provided, but the case of transitioning to the specific state via the non-advantageous section is non-existent. It is easier to select a specific state with a higher probability than when shifting to a specific state without going through the advantageous section. However, these may be selected with the same probability, or may be shifted to a specific state unique to each (for example, if the route is via a non-advantageous section, the transition to CZ2, which has a high advantage, is always performed. If it is not via a non-advantageous section, it will definitely shift to CZ1 with a low advantage).

The CZ transition determination according to the termination of the above-mentioned advantageous section is merely a specific example, and it is possible to impart a game property different from the above-mentioned game property. For example, in the normal state of the advantageous section, the advantageous section end lottery is performed with the winning probability associated with the internal winning combination for each game, and when the advantageous section end lottery is won, the advantageous section is terminated. It is also possible to shift to a non-advantageous section and shift to a specific state accordingly.

If the player can satisfy the CZ start condition in the normal state, the game can be performed in the specific state. As described above, the specific state is a state in which the expectation of transition to the special state is higher than that of the normal state. In addition, the specific state can be configured as a normal advantageous section or a non-advantageous section (except when the transition is made while maintaining the advantageous section during the advantageous section). Further, if the probability of transition to a specific state (for example, the probability of winning a lottery at the end of an advantageous section) is set to be higher as the set value is higher, the higher the set value is, the more advantageous the player is. Can be configured.

In the specific state, it is determined whether or not to shift to the special state (for example, AT transition determination) by referring to the various parameters described above in a mode having a higher advantage than the normal state. Then, in the specific state, if it is determined that the state is to be shifted to the special state before the CZ end condition is satisfied, the state is shifted to the special state (AT start condition is satisfied). On the other hand, if the CZ end condition is satisfied without the AT start condition being satisfied, the state shifts to the normal state (CZ end condition is satisfied / AT start condition is not satisfied).

A specific example of playability in a specific state will be described. The specific state is configured as, for example, a state in which the game continues for 30 games, a state in which the expectations can be increased in the 1st to 25th games, and a state in which the AT lottery is possible in the 26th to 30th games. In the expected degree increase possible state, for example, it is possible to increase the AT winning probability in the AT lottery possible state, and in the AT lottery possible state, the AT win finally determined through the game in the expected degree increaseable state. AT lottery is done with probability. For example, it is assumed that a plurality of ranks such as 10%, 20%, 25%, 40%, 50%, 75%, and 100% are provided as AT lottery probability ranks. At the time of transition to a specific state, one of these ranks is set as the initial rank. Then, in the expected degree increase possible state, when the specific result display (specific symbol combination) is derived (or when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination), the set rank is increased by one step. When the game is performed in the state where the expectation level can be increased in this way, the rank is determined in the final game in the state where the expectation level can be increased. Then, in the AT lottery available state, the AT lottery is performed according to the determined rank. In the AT lottery possible state, the AT lottery may be performed for each game, or the AT lottery is performed only in the first game in the AT lottery possible state, and the result of the AT lottery is the remaining games. It may be notified.

Further, although it is a method of making the advantage of the special state transition probability in a specific state different, the above-mentioned initial rank can be made different according to the type of the transferred specific state. For example, CZ1 has an initial rank of 10%, CZ2 has an initial rank of 20%, CZ3 has an initial rank of 25%, and so on. Further, for example, the probability that a specific state configured as in the above-mentioned specific example (this is usually referred to as CZ or CZ1) becomes CZ successful as a whole and shifts to a special state (AT winning probability, AT transition expectation). The value) is set to about 40%, while the probability that a specific state with a higher advantage (this is referred to as upper CZ or CZ2) becomes CZ successful as a whole and shifts to a special state is about 75%. It is also possible to make the advantages different by setting. In the latter case, the specific state with high advantage is similarly configured as a state that continues for 30 games, but AT lottery is performed with a certain probability for each game without providing a state in which the expectation level can be increased. Can be. Further, the playability in these specific states is only a specific example, and it is possible to impart a playability different from the above-mentioned playability.

When the player can satisfy the AT start condition in the normal state or the specific state, the game can be performed in the special state. As described above, the special state is an advantageous state in which the game value can be increased. Further, in the special state, a game period of 30 games per set is set, and it is determined for each set whether or not to continue to the next set (or whether or not the number of sets is stocked), and the continuation is performed. It will be extended until it is decided not to. The special state may be managed according to the number of games and the difference number. In this case, whether or not to extend the game may be determined by determining whether or not to add the number of games or the difference in the number of games during the special state. Further, in the special state, for example, the expected value of increase in the game value per game is set to about 2.4.

In the special state, when the game of the granted game period ends without extending the game period, it basically shifts to the normal state (AT end condition is satisfied, CZ start condition is not satisfied). That is, when the special state ends, if the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied, the special state in the advantageous section returns to the normal state in the advantageous section while maintaining the advantageous section.

On the other hand, in the special state, when the special state ends by executing the various limit processes described above, the state shifts to the specific state (AT end condition is satisfied / CZ start condition is satisfied). That is, since the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied by executing the various limit processes described above, the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section, and as a result, shifts to the specific state.

In this example, for example, "1500" is set as the number of games in which the number of games limiter operates, and "2400" is set as the number of payouts in which the number limiter operates. Then, the expected value of increase in the game value per game in the special state is set to about 2.4. Therefore, if the advantageous section is controlled to a special state all the time, the number limiter operates before the number of games limiter at the stage when about 1000 games are played, and the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, if the advantage section is controlled to the normal state all the time and is controlled to the special state when 1000 games are exhausted, even if it is controlled to the special state all the time thereafter, the number limiter is set at the stage when 500 games are played. The game number limiter is activated before the advantageous section ends. That is, even if it is convenient for control, if the normally advantageous section that is not advantageous to the player is controlled to the increasing section after being prolonged, the player is treated disadvantageously even if it is controlled to the increasing section. There is.

Therefore, in this example, it is possible to shift to a specific state with a high expectation of transition to a special state via a non-advantageous section. The values of the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter are initialized when the transition to the non-advantageous section is performed, and the counting is started when the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section is started. This is because if the state can be shifted, the possibility of receiving the above-mentioned disadvantageous treatment can be reduced.

From this point of view, when the special state ends, for example, before the value of the advantageous section game number counter that counts the number of games digested in the advantageous section becomes "1500", it is "1000". If the above is the case, the advantageous section may be terminated and the section may be shifted to the non-advantageous section. In this case, as in the case where the special state is terminated by executing the various limit processes described above, the transition to the specific state may be performed via the non-advantageous section (AT end condition is satisfied / CZ start condition is satisfied). .. Similarly, when the special state ends, the advantageous section may be ended and the section may be shifted to the non-advantageous section regardless of the values of the various limiters. That is, it may shift to a special state, and when the special state ends, it may shift to a non-advantageous section each time. Then, in these cases as well, the transition to the specific state may be made via the non-advantageous section (AT end condition is satisfied / CZ start condition is satisfied).

Further, although the description is omitted in the above, the advantageous section is terminated by executing the above-mentioned various limit processes (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500") in the normal state. Similarly, in the case, the state may shift to a specific state via the non-advantageous section (CZ start condition is satisfied). Further, although the explanation is omitted in the above, in a specific state (limited to the one that has transitioned while maintaining the advantageous section during the advantageous section), the execution of the various limit processes described above (for example, the number of games in the advantageous section counter). Similarly, when the advantageous section ends due to the value of "1500"), the state may shift to a specific state via the non-advantageous section (CZ start condition is satisfied). In this case, since the transition from the specific state to the specific state is performed, a series of effects during the specific state (effect during CZ) is continued in the production, and the state is switched internally. Alternatively, the effect during the specific state (effect during CZ) may be newly started in conjunction with the switching of the state.

As described above, in this example, the player starts the game from the normal state, and since the expectation that the game is changed to the special state (direct hit) in the normal state is not high, basically, the lottery for the end of the advantageous section is won. Aim to shift to a specific state via a non-advantageous section. In the normal state, the game period until the advantageous section end lottery is performed can be changed, so the game is played with a sense of expectation so that the game period can be shortened. When the lottery for the end of the advantageous section is won and the state shifts to the specific state via the non-advantageous section, the AT lottery is won in the specific state, and the aim is to shift to the special state. If the AT lottery is won and the special state is entered, the special state aims to be extended in the special state. Here, when the player shifts to the specific state via the non-advantageous section and shifts from the specific state to the special state, the player executes the limit process because there is a margin in the game period until the limit process is activated. It is possible to aim for the continuation of the special state without fear that the special state will be forcibly terminated. When the special state continues, the limit processing is executed as a result, and the special state is forcibly terminated (or before the limit processing is executed, but as described above, the player is treated disadvantageously. Even if the value related to the limit processing that is set not to receive is a specific value and the special state ends), it shifts to the specific state via the non-advantageous section after the end. That is, when the special state ends under the above-mentioned conditions, it is not simply disadvantageous, but the expectation of the transition to the special state is high, and the pullback of the special state can be expected. Such a game flow is the basic game flow in this example.

(Example of transition transition between advantageous section and non-advantageous section 1)
Next, with reference to FIG. 238, the transition transition example 1 of the advantageous section / non-advantageous section in this example will be described. The transition transition example 1 is an example in which the non-advantageous section functions as a CZ transition confirmed state. In addition, in FIGS. 238 to 242, the distinction between the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section, and the state controlled at that time are described by using the expression "ball ejection state". It can also be expressed as a "directing state", a "directing game state", or a "control state". In addition, the content of the production performed in each ball ejection state is explained in the "Production" column.

First, when the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (normal), a normal time effect including a display during the normal state is performed. The normal time production is, for example, a production in which it is difficult to recall that the expectation of the transition to the AT state is high, or that the production is in an advantageous state such as the AT state. Although not shown, AT lottery is performed in the advantageous section (normal). When the AT lottery is won in the advantageous section (normal), a precursor period until the transition to the advantageous section (AT) is set. During this precursory period, the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (AT precursor). In the advantageous section (AT precursor), an AT winning notification effect similar to the AT winning notification effect during CZ, which will be described later, is performed, and it is notified whether or not to shift to the AT state. In the advantageous section (normal), even if the AT lottery is not won, if a predetermined opportunity occurs, a precursory period is similarly set, and the AT winning notification effect can be performed.

(1) In the advantageous section (normal), when the above-mentioned advantageous section end condition is satisfied (for example, winning the advantageous section end lottery), a precursor period until the transition to the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) is set. .. During this precursory period, the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (end precursor). In the advantageous section (end precursor), for example, when the precursor period is set to 8 games, in the first 5 games, the transition to the CZ state (or the CZ transition expectation degree or the advantage of the CZ state at the time of CZ transition) ) Is performed. Then, in the final three games, a continuous effect of notifying whether or not to finally shift to the CZ state is performed. The continuous production is composed of a production such as a battle production, and in the first to third games, it is shown that the ally character and the enemy character battle, and a predetermined rule (for example, the number of attacks of the ally character is large). ) Suggests the degree of expectation of CZ transition. Then, in the case of shifting to the CZ state, a character such as "CZ acquisition" is displayed along with the appearance of the ally character winning at the end of the third game, and it is notified that the transition to the CZ state is performed. On the other hand, if the game does not shift to the CZ state, a character such as "failure" is displayed at the end of the third game as well as a state in which the ally character is defeated, and it is notified that the game does not shift to the CZ state.

As described above, when the cycle of the game period is determined by the predetermined point value, the number of remaining games (remaining point value) until the predetermined point value becomes "0" is a predetermined value (for example). When it becomes "16"), it may be shifted to an advantageous section (precursor of end). At this time, in the precursory period, the number of remaining games (remaining point value) until the predetermined point value becomes "0" may be set. Further, as described above, when the game number limiter operates in the advantageous section (normal) and the advantageous section ends, the number of remaining games until the game number limiter operates is a predetermined value (for example, "16"). ), It may be shifted to an advantageous section (precursor of end). At this time, in the precursory period, the number of remaining games until the game number limiter is activated may be set.

(2) When the game of the set precursor period is performed in the advantageous section (end precursor), the advantageous section ends and the ball ejection state from the next game becomes the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). At this time, various parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized. Further, when the advantageous section lamp is lit, the advantageous section lamp is turned off. When the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) is set, the CZ preparation effect (CZ transition standby effect) including the CZ preparation screen display is performed until the advantageous section is started. In the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), the advantageous section transition lottery is performed, and the advantageous section start condition is satisfied with a high probability (for example, refer to the general medium bonus internal intermediate advantageous section transition lottery table of FIG. 244 described later). ). Therefore, it is about 1 to 3 games to stay in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). In most cases, the CZ state is entered at the start of the advantageous section, but the AT may hit directly. In this case, the AT state is entered at the start of the advantageous section. In the following, a case of shifting to the CZ state at the start of the advantageous section, which is the main flow, will be described.

(3) In the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), when the advantageous section start condition is satisfied, the ball ejection state becomes the advantageous section (CZ) from the next game. In the advantageous section (CZ), the CZ middle effect including the CZ state middle display is performed. The CZ medium effect is, for example, an effect that can be recalled as having a high degree of expectation for the transition to the AT state. In addition, AT lottery is performed in the advantageous section (CZ).

(4) When the AT lottery is won in the advantageous section (CZ), a precursory period until the transition to the advantageous section (AT) is set. During this precursory period, the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (AT precursor). In the advantageous section (AT precursor), during the remaining CZ state game period (or may be before or after the game digestion in the CZ state), for example, during CZ, which is the same effect as the above-mentioned continuous effect. The AT winning notification effect is performed, and it is notified whether or not to shift to the AT state. In the advantageous section (CZ), even if the AT lottery is not won, if a predetermined opportunity occurs, a precursory period is similarly set, and the AT winning notification effect during the CZ can be performed.

(5) In the advantageous section (AT precursor), when the game for the set precursor period is performed, if the AT lottery is won, the ball ejection state from the next game becomes the advantageous section (AT). At this time, the advantageous section lamp lights up. If the AT lottery is not won, the ball ejection state will be an advantageous section (normal) from the next game. However, in the latter case, if the game period in the CZ state still remains, it is possible to return to the advantageous section (CZ). In the advantageous section (AT), the production during AT including the display during AT state is performed. The production during AT is, for example, a production that can recall an advantageous state. In addition, when the privilege given according to the player's stop operation mode changes, the player is notified of the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

(6) In the advantageous section (AT), when the game of the given game period including the extended period is performed, the advantageous section ends and the next game starts when the above-mentioned advantageous section end condition is satisfied. The ball ejection state becomes a non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). At this time, various parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized. At this time, the advantageous section lamp is turned off. When the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) is set, the CZ preparation effect (CZ transition standby effect) including the CZ preparation screen display is performed until the advantageous section is started. After that, the game is performed by repeating the above-mentioned transition.

(Modification example 1)
In the transition transition example 1 of the advantageous section / non-advantageous section in this example, the precursor effect and the continuous effect are performed in the advantageous section (end precursor), and the CZ preparation effect is performed in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). It is supposed to be done. Here, in the precursor effect and the continuous effect, it is possible to suggest the degree of expectation of transition to the CZ state, and it is also possible to suggest the advantage in the CZ state when the state shifts to the CZ state. The middle advantage (the degree of expectation of which CZ state to shift to when there are multiple states with different advantages as CZ states) is determined by the result of the advantageous section transition lottery in the non-advantageous section. Strictly speaking, the lottery result cannot be notified during the advantageous section before passing through the non-advantageous section.

Therefore, in the present modification 1, the expectation degree effect that appropriately reflects the result of the advantageous section transition lottery in the non-advantageous section is performed. As a specific example, the first control method performs a series of effects in the advantageous section (precursor of end) and the subsequent non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), and is performed in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). When the advantage of the advantageous section (CZ) is determined according to the result of the advantageous section transition lottery (when it is determined to shift from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section), an effect suggesting the type of CZ state is produced. It is intended to be done.

In the first control method, for example, a precursory effect is performed in an advantageous section (end precursor), but even if the transition from the advantageous section (end precursor) to the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) is performed, the advantageous section (CZ transition is confirmed). ) Will be continued until the decision is made. Then, when the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) shifts to the advantageous section (CZ) and the advantage thereof is determined, it is notified that the shift to the CZ state is performed, and at that time, or thereafter, the CZ Make sure that the advantage of the state is notified. In this case, for example, when the advantage of CZ1 <CZ2 <CZ3 is set, the characters "CZ acquisition" are first displayed in white in the final game of the precursory effect, and then the transition destination is CZ1. For example, the character is changed to blue and displayed, if the migration destination is CZ2, the character is changed to yellow and displayed, and if the migration destination is CZ3, the character is changed to red and displayed. The notification may be performed.

In this way, the same precursor effect is performed in the advantageous section (precursor of the end) and the subsequent non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). Since it becomes difficult to recognize that the transition has occurred, the player can play the game without discomfort even if the game is capable of transitioning to the highly advantageous CZ state via the non-advantageous section. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation in the CZ state. In addition, at the end of the precursory state, or after the end, it is possible to shift to the CZ state after performing the expectation degree effect that appropriately reflects the result of the advantageous section transition lottery, so that the expectation degree is more comfortable. It becomes possible to perform a production.

In the above, as a mode in which a series of effects are performed in the advantageous section (end precursor) and the subsequent non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), the precursor effect performed during the advantageous section (end precursor) is the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). Although the explanation is given by taking as an example the continuation even in the CZ transition confirmed state), the mode in which the series of effects is performed is not limited to this. For example, the precursor effect is performed until two games before the end of the advantageous section (end precursor), and then the continuous effect is performed, and the continuous effect is continuously performed even in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). The production content of the continuous production is adjusted so that the final game of the continuous production is the final game of the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), and the transition to the CZ state in the final game and its advantage are notified. You can also do it. In addition, if it is difficult to recognize that the player is in a different state between the advantageous section (precursor of the end) and the subsequent non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), there is some commonality or relevance. Is also included in performing a series of productions.

Further, in the second control method as a specific example, a series of effects are performed in a specific period of an advantageous section (precursor of end), a subsequent non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), and a subsequent advantageous section (CZ). Therefore, when the game of the specific period is performed in the advantageous section (CZ), an effect suggesting the type of the CZ state determined in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) is performed. .. The specific period can be set to any number of games, for example, about 1 to 5 games, but in order to control this specific period, a ball ejection state different from the advantageous section (CZ) (for example, an advantageous section (for example, advantageous section) CZ precursors)) via non-advantageous sections may be provided. In this case, (A) advantageous section (precursor of end) → (B) non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) → (C) advantageous section (CZ precursor via non-advantageous section) → (D) advantageous section (CZ) It is assumed that the transition control is sequentially performed, and a series of effects may be performed between (A) and (C).

In the second control method, for example, a precursor effect is performed in an advantageous section (end precursor), and the precursor effect is continued even if the transition from the advantageous section (end precursor) to the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). At the same time, even if the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) is shifted to the advantageous section (CZ), the precursor effect is continued for a specific period. Then, when the game for a specific period is performed, the player shifts to the CZ state and the advantage of the CZ state according to the lottery result of the advantageous section transition lottery already determined in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). Make sure that the degree is notified.

Further, for example, a precursory effect is performed in an advantageous section (end precursor), and even if the advantageous section (end precursor) shifts to a non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), the precursory effect is continued and the non-advantageous section (non-advantageous section (end precursor)). When shifting from the advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) to the advantageous section (CZ), it is first notified that the transition to the CZ state is performed, and then the precursor effect is produced during a specific period of the advantageous section (CZ) or in the final game thereof. The advantage of the CZ state may be notified by performing one game production or continuous production related to the above.

Further, for example, the precursor effect is performed until two games before the end of the advantageous section (end precursor), and then the continuous effect is performed, and the continuous effect is the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) and the advantageous section after that (CZ transition confirmed state). The production content of the continuous production is adjusted so that the final game of the continuous production is the final game of the specific period of the advantageous section (CZ), which is continuously performed even in the specific period of CZ), and the CZ state in the final game. It is also possible to be notified of the transition to and its advantage. Further, in this case, as described above, the time when the transition to the CZ state is notified and the time when the advantage of the CZ state is notified can be set to different times.

(Modification 2)
Further, in the transition transition example 1 of the advantageous section / non-advantageous section in this example, the non-advantageous section is configured as the CZ transition confirmed state so that the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section always shifts to the CZ state. , Even when the predetermined initialization conditions are satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play and the interest in the game, but the shift to the non-advantageous section is required. However, this is not the only method that raises the expectations of players.

For example, as the ball ejection state in the advantageous section, (A) advantageous section (normal), (B) advantageous section (during release), (C) advantageous section (after release), and (D) advantageous section (AT) (that is, , "AT state"). Then, during the advantageous section, the stock lottery of the AT right, which is the right that the AT state can be performed for one set, is performed. In addition, the probability of winning the stock lottery of AT rights is about 1/50 to 1/100.

In most cases, the player starts the game from (A) advantageous section (normal). (A) In the advantageous section (normal), if the number of stocks of AT rights is 1 or more, the stock release lottery (AT lottery) performed according to the internal winning combination (or the derived result display) is performed for each game. If the lottery is won, the stock is consumed and the state shifts to the AT state. However, in the (A) advantageous section (normal), the probability of winning the stock release lottery (AT lottery) is set low (for example, about 1/400), so the prize is not frequently won. Further, in (A) advantageous section (normal), the number of ceiling games (for example, 999 games, which may be changed depending on the mode) is provided, and the stock release lottery (AT lottery) is not won. When the number of games played on the ceiling game is played, the stock is consumed and the game shifts to the AT state.

When it is determined to shift to the AT state, when the AT state is started, or when the AT state ends, the state of the transition destination after the end of the AT state is determined. At this time, if (A) the advantageous section (normal) is before the start of the AT state (that is, it is the first hit of the AT state) and the number of stocks of the AT right is 1 or more, for example. , (A) advantageous section (normal) is determined with a probability of 1/2, while (B) advantageous section (during release) is determined with a probability of 1/2. (A) When the advantageous section (normal) is decided, unfortunately the AT state does not stay in a row. On the other hand, (B) the advantageous section (during release) is set as a state of shifting to the AT state within 100 games (the number of ceiling games is set within 100 games) based on the stocked AT right, and (B). ) When the advantageous section (during release) is determined, it is possible to make the AT state continuous. If the number of AT rights in stock is 0, the process shifts to (C) advantageous section (after release). However, in this case, there may be a case of shifting to (A) advantageous section (normal). If (A) advantageous section (normal) is before the start of the AT state and (B) does not shift to the advantageous section (during release) after the end of AT, the advantageous section is terminated and the section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. You may do so.

(B) When the AT state is entered in the advantageous section (during release) (that is, when the AT state is in a row), if the number of stocks of AT rights is 1 or more, after the end of the AT state, (B) The advantageous section (during release) is always determined. On the other hand, when the number of stocks of AT rights is 0, the (C) advantageous section (after release) is always determined after the end of the AT state. That is, once the transition to (B) advantageous section (during release) occurs, the AT state continues until the number of stocks of AT rights becomes 0, and then (C) advantageous section (after release) occurs. (C) In the advantageous section (after release), the stock release lottery (AT lottery) is basically not performed (although it may be performed), but 98 games have been played since the end of AT. Occasionally, it is set as a state in which the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section.

Here, in the non-advantageous section, as an advantageous section transition lottery, for example, (A) advantageous section (normal) is determined with a probability of 1/2, while (B) advantageous section (release) is determined with a probability of 1/2. Middle) is decided. In addition, since the stock lottery of AT rights cannot be performed in the non-advantageous section (rather, the number of stocks of AT rights is 0 due to the initialization process at the time of transition to the non-advantageous section), the number of stocks of AT rights is used here. To be determined regardless of whether is 1 or more. In addition, when it is decided in the advantageous section transition lottery to shift to (B) advantageous section (during release) so that at least the number of stocks of AT rights remains 0 and does not shift to (B) advantageous section (during release). In the decision, one or more AT rights may be granted.

As described above, in the modified example 2, when shifting to the non-advantageous section and shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the player who normally does not shift only through the AT state, enables the AT state to be consecutively villaged. It is configured so that it may shift to a favorable state (for example, (B) advantageous section (during release)). Even in this way, even if the section shifts to the non-advantageous section after the AT-state consecutive villa is completed, the AT-state consecutive villa can be expected again, so that the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the non-advantageous section is established. Even when shifting to a section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest.

In the modified example 2, as the advantageous section end conditions for shifting to the non-advantageous section, (1) setting change, (2) operation of limit processing, and (3) (C) advantageous section (after release) for a predetermined period (for example). , 98 games) can be adopted, but as will be described later, (1) may not be adopted as an advantageous section end condition. Further, as described above, the fact that the AT state has ended (more specifically, when the AT state has ended, (B) the transition to the advantageous section (during release) has not occurred) is also adopted as the advantageous section end condition. Alternatively, (A) an advantageous section end lottery may be performed in the advantageous section (normal), and the winning of the lottery may be adopted as an advantageous section end condition.

(Transition transition example 2 of advantageous section / non-advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 239, the transition transition example 2 of the advantageous section / non-advantageous section in this example will be described. The transition transition example 2 is an example in which the non-advantageous section functions as a CZ state.

First, when the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (normal), a normal time effect including a display during the normal state is performed. The control in the advantageous section (normal), the control for shifting from the advantageous section (normal) to the advantageous section (end precursor) ((1) in FIG. 239), and the production in the advantageous section (end precursor) are basic. Since it is the same as that in the transition transition example 1 described above, the description here will be omitted.

(2) When the game is played in the advantageous section (precursor of the end) for the set precursor period, the advantageous section ends and the ball ejection state becomes the non-advantageous section (CZ state) from the next game. At this time, various parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized. Further, when the advantageous section lamp is lit, the advantageous section lamp is turned off. When it is a non-advantageous section (CZ state), a CZ middle effect including a CZ state middle display is performed. The CZ medium effect is, for example, an effect that can be recalled as having a high degree of expectation for the transition to the AT state. Further, in the non-advantageous section (CZ state), the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. In this example, the advantageous section transition lottery constitutes an AT lottery.

For example, to explain using the example of the general middle bonus internal middle advantage section transition lottery table of FIG. 244, which will be described later, in the non-advantageous section (CZ state), "replay + bonus", "3 bells + bonus", " If you win either "9 Bells + Bonus" or "Loss + Bonus" (normal role), you do not decide to move to the advantageous section and win "Unquestioned Bell + Bonus" (CZ failure role) In that case, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section (normal), and if any of "cherry + bonus", "watermelon + bonus" and "chance eye + bonus" (CZ successful role) is won, the advantageous section Decide to shift to (AT precursor) (or advantageous section (AT)). That is, if the CZ success role can be won before winning the CZ failure role, it is possible to shift to the AT state, while the CZ failure role is won before the CZ success role is won. In some cases, the playability can be such that the state cannot be changed to the AT state. The winning probabilities of the CZ failure combination and the CZ success combination can be set as appropriate. For example, if the winning probability of the CZ failure combination is set to about 1/30, the non-advantageous section (CZ) is substantially the same as the expected value that the CZ state continues for 30 games in the advantageous section (CZ). State) can be continued.

However, the lottery mode of the advantageous section transition lottery in the non-advantageous section (CZ state) and the transition mode to the advantageous section are not limited to this. For example, when the normal combination is won, the interval may be shifted to the advantageous section (CZ). That is, the non-advantageous section (CZ state) itself is also in a state where the expectation of the AT state transition is high, but even if the AT state transition is not determined and the transition to the advantageous section is performed, the CZ state itself is continued. May be good. Further, for example, when the CZ failure combination is won, the section is not immediately shifted to the advantageous section (normal), but when the section is shifted to the advantageous section, the section is shifted to the advantageous section (precursor of gassing), and the advantageous section (precursor of gassing) is shifted. ), It is possible to finally shift to the AT state in the advantageous section (AT precursor) after the expectation effect such as whether or not to shift to the AT state is performed in the same manner as in the advantageous section (AT precursor). Although it is notified and shifts to the AT state, in the advantageous section (precursor of gassing), it may be shifted to the advantageous section (normal) notified that it will not finally shift to the AT state. Further, for example, as in the transition transition example 1 described above, it is assumed that the advantageous section start condition is satisfied with a high probability, and any one of "3 bells + bonus", "9 bells + bonus", and "loss + bonus". If you win the game, you may shift to the advantageous section (normal), but if you win another role, you may shift to the advantageous section (AT precursor) (or the advantageous section (AT)). That is, in the non-advantageous section (CZ state), the playability can be such that the transition to the AT state is confirmed by the replay combination or the rare combination winning.

(3) In the non-advantageous section (CZ state), when the AT lottery as the advantageous section transition lottery is won, the precursor period until the transition to the advantageous section (AT) is set. During this precursory period, the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (AT precursor). In the advantageous section (AT precursor), the AT winning notification effect during CZ is performed. In addition, in this CZ middle AT hit notification effect, for example, it may be notified whether or not the display finally shifts to the AT state while the display such as the CZ state display is taken over, or the above-mentioned continuous effect may be performed. The same effect as the above may be performed. The same applies to the case where the above-mentioned advantageous section (precursor of gassing) is provided. That is, the display in the CZ state may be continuously performed for at least a predetermined period after shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. In addition, this predetermined period may be set according to the set precursor period.

(4) In the advantageous section (AT precursor), when the game for the set precursor period is performed, if the AT lottery is won, the ball ejection state from the next game becomes the advantageous section (AT). At this time, the advantageous section lamp lights up. If the AT lottery is not won, the ball ejection state will be an advantageous section (normal) from the next game. In any case, at this time, the CZ state display that has been performed during the precursory period may be terminated. In the advantageous section (AT), the production during AT including the display during AT state is performed. The production during AT is, for example, a production that can recall an advantageous state. In addition, when the privilege given according to the player's stop operation mode changes, the player is notified of the stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player.

(Example 3 of transition transition between advantageous section and non-advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 240, the transition transition example 3 of the advantageous section / non-advantageous section in this example will be described. The transition transition example 3 is an example in which the non-advantageous section functions as a CZ transition confirmed state and has a plurality of CZ states having different advantages. Further, in this example, the transition of the ball ejection state will be mainly described.

When the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (normal), the CZ transition lottery is performed. The CZ transition lottery includes a normal CZ transition lottery (hereinafter, referred to as "CZ transition determination 1") for shifting to the CZ state while maintaining the advantageous section, and a non-advantageous section for ending the advantageous section. Includes a CZ transition lottery (hereinafter, referred to as "CZ transition determination 2") as an advantageous section end lottery for shifting to the CZ state via. The CZ transition determination 1 and the CZ transition determination 2 may be performed by the same lottery process (determination process), or may be performed by separate lottery processes. Further, in the latter case, the lottery processing may be performed in an order advantageous to the player, or only one of the lottery processing may be performed depending on the situation. Further, in the former case, such a lottery process may be performed by changing the lottery table used depending on the situation.

Here, the relationship between the normal CZ and the upper CZ will be described again. As described above, both the normal CZ and the upper CZ are specific states in which the expectation of the AT state transition is higher than that of the normal state. The probability is about 75%, and the upper CZ is more advantageous than the normal CZ. Basically, there is no difference in the advantage between the normal CZ that shifts via the non-advantageous section and the normal CZ that shifts via the non-advantageous section, at least in terms of AT winning probability, and the shift does not go through the non-advantageous section. There is no difference in the degree of advantage between the upper CZ that is used and the upper CZ that is transferred via the non-advantageous section, at least in terms of AT winning probability. However, when the transition is made without the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter are not initialized. Therefore, if the AT state is entered and the AT state continues for a long time, the limit processing is performed. The period until the AT state is forcibly terminated by the operation of is shortened. On the other hand, in the case of shifting via the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section game number counter and the advantageous section payout number counter are initialized at the time of shifting to the non-advantageous section, so that the AT state is temporarily shifted and the AT state is maintained. If it continues, the period until the AT state is forcibly terminated by the operation of the limit processing becomes long. That is, in this respect, it is more advantageous to shift via a non-advantageous section.

Therefore, for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter is "500" or less, since there are still 1000 games or more until the game number limiter is activated, only the CZ transition determination 1 is performed or the CZ is performed in the CZ transition lottery. The configuration can be such that the transition determination 1 and the CZ transition determination 2 are performed. On the other hand, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter exceeds "500", the number of games is less than 1000 until the game number limiter is activated. Therefore, in the CZ transition lottery, only the CZ transition determination 2 is performed. can do. Here, as a branch value for branching the control, the value "500" of the advantageous section game number counter is set as an example, but the branch value can be set to any value. Is. Further, a branch value (for example, "1000") can be set not only for the advantageous section game number counter but also for the advantageous section payout number counter.

It is also possible to change the degree of advantage (of AT winning probability) depending on whether it is via a non-advantageous section or a non-advantageous section. Some variations will be described below.
(A) The normal CZ transferred via the non-advantageous section is more advantageous than the normal CZ transferred via the non-advantageous section.
(B) The normal CZ transferred via the non-advantageous section is more advantageous than the normal CZ transferred via the non-advantageous section.
(C) The upper CZ transferred via the non-advantageous section is more advantageous than the upper CZ transferred via the non-advantageous section.
(D) The upper CZ transferred via the non-advantageous section is more advantageous than the upper CZ transferred via the non-advantageous section.
In (E), (C), and (D), when the upper CZ is more advantageous, the more advantageous upper CZ is a confirmed CZ in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed (that is, the AT winning probability is 100%). (Or so that it may be a definite CZ).
(F) In (A) to (D), when it is less than the above-mentioned branch value (or less than this), it is not advantageous, and when it is more than or more than the branch value (or more than this), it is advantageous.
In (G) (A) to (D), when it is less than (or less than) the branch value described above, it is advantageous, and when it is more than (or more than) the branch value, it is not advantageous.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned (A) to (G) (or various methods for varying the degree of advantage already described in the present embodiment and other examples) can be appropriately combined to create playability. be. As an example, the playability in which (C), (E) and (G) are combined will be described.

First, in the advantageous section (normal), the CZ transition lottery is possible, and when the CZ transition lottery is won, the CZ state shifts to the CZ state after a precursory period. At this time, it is possible to shift to the normal CZ or to the higher CZ. Here, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter is "500" or less, if it is determined to shift to the higher CZ as a result of the CZ shift determination 1, the higher CZ may be set as the final CZ. (For example, 1/4 at the time of determining the transition to the upper CZ is a definite CZ). On the other hand, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter exceeds "500" and it is determined to shift to the higher CZ as a result of the CZ shift determination 1, the higher CZ is not set as the final CZ. In this case, control may be performed to convert the final determination result and shift to the non-advantageous section. Alternatively, as described above, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter exceeds "500", only the CZ transition determination 2 may be performed. With such playability, the CZ state is determined when there is not much merit in going through the non-advantageous section at the time of transition to the CZ state (for example, there are still 1000 games or more until the operation of the number of games limiter). By making it possible to become CZ, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player, and when there is a merit to go through the non-advantageous section (the number of games limiter is less than 1000 games until the operation). By making the transition to the AT state after passing through the non-advantageous section as much as possible, the situation that the period until the AT state is forcibly terminated when the transition to the AT state occurs will occur. It can be suppressed.

(1) In the advantageous section (normal), when it is determined to shift to the normal CZ based on the result of the CZ transition determination 1, a precursor period until the shift to the normal CZ is set. In this precursory period, the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (usually a precursor of CZ). Further, when it is determined to shift to the upper CZ based on the result of the CZ transition determination 1, a precursor period until the shift to the upper CZ is set. During this precursory period, the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (precursor of the upper CZ). Further, when it is determined based on the result of the CZ transition determination 2 that the advantageous section is terminated and the transition to the non-advantageous section is made, the precursor period until the transition to the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) is set. Will be done. During this precursory period, the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (end precursor).

(2) In the advantageous section (normal CZ precursor), when the game for the set precursor period is performed, the ball ejection state from the next game becomes the advantageous section (normal CZ) while the advantageous section is maintained.

(3) When the AT lottery is won in the advantageous section (usually CZ), a precursor period until the transition to the advantageous section (AT) is set. During this precursory period, the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (AT precursor). In the advantageous section (usually CZ), even if the AT lottery is not won, a precursory period may be set in the same manner when a predetermined opportunity occurs. During this precursory period, the ball ejection state may be set to be an advantageous section (a precursory precursor).

(4) In the advantageous section (AT precursor), when the game for the set precursor period is performed, the ball ejection state becomes the advantageous section (AT) from the next game. At this time, if the AT state is first transitioned to during the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp is lit (unless the first transition to the AT state is performed during the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp is already lit. Is). In addition, in the case of an advantageous section (precursor), the ball ejection state will be the advantageous section (normal) from the next game.

(5) When the game of the set precursor period is performed in the advantageous section (precursor of the upper CZ), the ball ejection state from the next game becomes the advantageous section (upper CZ) while the advantageous section is maintained.

(6) When the AT lottery is won in the advantageous section (upper CZ), a precursor period until the transition to the advantageous section (AT) is set. During this precursory period, the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (AT precursor). In the advantageous section (upper CZ), even if the AT lottery is not won, a precursory period may be set in the same manner when a predetermined opportunity occurs. During this precursory period, the ball ejection state may be set to be an advantageous section (a precursory precursor). Further, as described above, the upper CZ may be a definite CZ, and in this case, it is sufficient to always shift to an advantageous section (AT precursor). Alternatively, when the upper CZ becomes a definite CZ, it may be shifted to the advantageous section (AT) without shifting to the advantageous section (AT precursor).

(7) In the advantageous section (AT precursor), when the game for the set precursor period is performed, the ball ejection state becomes the advantageous section (AT) from the next game. At this time, if the AT state is first transitioned to during the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp is lit (unless the first transition to the AT state is performed during the advantageous section, the advantageous section lamp is already lit. Is). In addition, in the case of an advantageous section (precursor), the ball ejection state will be the advantageous section (normal) from the next game.

(8) In the advantageous section (precursor of the end), when the game of the set precursor period is performed, the advantageous section ends and the ball ejection state from the next game becomes the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). At this time, various parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized. Further, when the advantageous section lamp is lit, the advantageous section lamp is turned off. In the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), the advantageous section transition lottery is performed. The flow around this is basically the same as that in the transition transition example 1 described above, but in the advantageous section transition lottery, the transition destination of the advantageous section may be a normal CZ or a higher CZ (for example). (See the lottery table for transitioning to the advantageous section for internal medium bonus in FIG. 244, which will be described later).

(9) In the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), when the advantageous section start condition is satisfied, if it is decided to shift to the normal CZ, the ball ejection state becomes the advantageous section (normal CZ) from the next game. When it is decided to shift to the upper CZ, the ball ejection state becomes the advantageous section (upper CZ) from the next game. In the advantageous section (normal CZ) and the advantageous section (upper CZ), the AT lottery is performed according to the respective AT winning probabilities. It should be noted that the point that it may be shifted to the advantageous section (precursor of Gase) is the same as the above.

(10) In the advantageous section (normal CZ) and the advantageous section (upper CZ), when the AT lottery is won, a precursor period until the transition to the advantageous section (AT) is set. During this precursory period, the ball ejection state is an advantageous section (AT precursor). In the advantageous section (AT precursor), during the remaining CZ state game period, for example, the CZ middle AT hit notification effect, which is the same effect as the above-mentioned continuous effect, is performed to notify whether or not the AT state is entered. Will be done. In the advantageous section (CZ), even if the AT lottery is not won, if a predetermined opportunity occurs, a precursory period is similarly set, and the AT winning notification effect during the CZ can be performed.

(11) In the advantageous section (AT precursor), when the game for the set precursor period is performed, the ball ejection state becomes the advantageous section (AT) from the next game. At this time, the advantageous section lamp lights up.

It should be noted that the advantageous section is not via the non-advantageous section (in the case of (2) and (5) in FIG. 240) or via the non-advantageous section (in the case of (9) in FIG. 240). During (normal CZ), basically, the normal CZ middle effect including the normal CZ state middle display is commonly performed. Further, during the advantageous section (upper CZ), the upper CZ middle effect including the upper CZ state display is basically performed in common. That is, it is difficult to recognize whether the transition to the CZ state is due to the result of the CZ transition determination 1 or the result of the CZ transition determination 2. In this way, for example, when there is a difference in the advantages of the two as described above, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged even if the CZ state has a low advantage. It should be noted that the common production does not necessarily have to be performed. For example, as the normal CZ medium effect, there are a normal CZ medium effect 1 and a normal CZ medium effect 2, and when the non-advantageous section is not passed, the normal CZ medium effect 1 is likely to be selected, but the normal CZ medium effect 2 May be selected, and when the route is via a non-advantageous section, the normal CZ medium effect 2 is likely to be selected, but the normal CZ medium effect 1 may be selected, and a common effect may be performed. You can do it like this. This is also the case when the upper CZ middle effect 1 and the upper CZ middle effect 2 are provided as the upper CZ middle effect.

However, in the case of passing through the non-advantageous section, the above-mentioned CZ preparation effect (CZ transition standby effect) is performed in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). Depending on whether or not it is via a non-advantageous section, it may be recognized. Therefore, when the CZ state is shifted to without the non-advantageous section, the same CZ preparation effect may be performed at the start of the CZ state, for example, for about one game. Alternatively, an output for performing the CZ preparation effect during the transition from the advantageous section (precursor of normal CZ) or advantageous section (precursor of upper CZ) to the advantageous section (normal CZ) or advantageous section (upper CZ). The ball state (for example, an advantageous section (CZ pseudo preparation)) may be set for one game. Alternatively, the precursory effect and the continuous effect performed in the advantageous section (normally the precursor of the CZ) or the advantageous section (the precursor of the upper CZ) are set to be completed one game before the final game in the ball-out state. The CZ preparation effect may be performed in the final game in the ball state. Further, there may be a pattern in which the CZ preparation effect continues for two games or a pattern in which the CZ preparation effect continues for three games.

Further, instead of the CZ preparation effect, the effect at the time of introducing CZ may be performed. Here, the effect at the time of introducing CZ does not matter whether the transition to the CZ state is via the non-advantageous section or the non-advantageous section, and the transition destination is the normal CZ or the upper CZ state. Regardless of whether or not, the production will always be performed at the start of about 1 to 3 games at the start of CZ. After the start effect is performed, if the transition destination is the normal CZ, the normal CZ middle effect may be started, and if the transition destination is the upper CZ, the upper CZ middle effect may be started. In the case of non-via the non-advantageous section, as described above, if the CZ introduction effect is performed at the start of the CZ state, between the precursor period and the CZ state, or from the final game of the precursor period. Similarly, in the case of passing through the non-advantageous section, the effect at the time of introducing the CZ may be performed at the start of the non-advantageous section, between the non-advantageous section and the CZ state, or from the final game of the precursory period.

It is also possible not to perform the CZ preparation effect in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). However, if the advantageous section lamp is already lit when shifting to the non-advantageous section, it will be turned off. In this case, the player can recognize whether or not the player has passed through the non-advantageous section. There is. Therefore, when shifting from the advantageous section (precursor of end) to the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), if the advantageous section lamp is turned off, the CZ preparation effect is performed in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). If the advantageous section lamp is not turned off (that is, it is not lit yet), the CZ preparation effect may not be performed in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state).

In the transition transition example 3, the case where the non-advantageous section functions as the CZ transition confirmed state (that is, the case of the transition transition example 1 described above) is taken as an example, and the case where the non-advantageous section shifts to the CZ state via the non-advantageous section is taken as an example. And the case of transitioning to the CZ state via the non-advantageous section have been described, but this is intended to exclude the case where the non-advantageous section functions as the CZ state (that is, the case of the transition transition example 2 described above). No. That is, the case of shifting to the CZ state via the non-advantageous section described in this example is applicable even if the non-advantageous section functions as the CZ state. However, as described above, since a plurality of states cannot be basically set in the non-advantageous section, in this case, the non-advantageous section may always be controlled by the upper CZ. Alternatively, the non-advantageous section may always be controlled by the normal CZ.

(Example 4 of transition transition between advantageous section and non-advantageous section)
Next, the transition transition example 4 of the advantageous section / non-advantageous section in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 241. The transition transition example 4 is an example in which the non-advantageous section functions as a CZ transition confirmed state, and the cycle of the game period is determined by a predetermined point value. Further, in this example, the transition of the ball ejection state will be mainly described.

As described above, in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), when the advantageous section start condition is satisfied, if it is decided to shift to the normal CZ, the ball ejection state is the advantageous section (normal CZ) from the next game. Then, when it is decided to shift to the upper CZ, the ball ejection state becomes the advantageous section (upper CZ) from the next game. In the advantageous section (normal CZ) and the advantageous section (upper CZ), the AT lottery is performed according to the respective AT winning probabilities. In FIG. 241 for convenience of explanation, it is omitted that each precursor period is set.

(1) When the AT lottery is won in the advantageous section (normal CZ) and the advantageous section (upper CZ), the ball ejection state becomes the advantageous section (AT) while the advantageous section is maintained. At this time, the advantageous section lamp lights up. On the other hand, in the advantageous section (normal CZ) and the advantageous section (upper CZ), when the CZ end condition is satisfied without winning the AT lottery (for example, 30 games are played), the advantageous section is maintained. The ball-out state becomes an advantageous section (normal) as it is. In this case, a maximum of 300 games (the number of games from the start of the advantageous section is 31G to 330G) after the end of the CZ state is the first cycle (first cycle). In FIG. 241 for convenience of explanation, it is omitted that the game period per cycle may be shortened.

(2) In the advantageous section (normal), when the game for the first cycle is performed (when the first cycle ends), an AT lottery is performed, and if this is won, the advantageous section is maintained. The ball-out state is the advantageous section (AT). Further, if the AT lottery is not won, the CZ transition determination 1 is performed, and if it is determined to shift to the CZ state as a result of this determination, the ball ejection state is advantageous while the advantageous section is maintained. It is an interval (CZ) (more specifically, it is either a normal CZ or a higher CZ). In this case, the CZ transition determination 2 can also be performed as described above. Further, even during the game period of the first cycle, an AT lottery or a CZ transition lottery is appropriately performed, and if the lottery is won, the state can be shifted to the winning state. If it is not decided to shift to the AT state or the CZ state, the second cycle (second cycle) is between the next maximum of 300 games (the number of games from the start of the advantageous section is 331G to 630G). ).

(3) In the advantageous section (normal), when the game for the second cycle is performed (when the second cycle ends), the CZ transition determination 2 is performed, and as a result of this determination, it is determined to shift to the CZ state. If this is the case, the advantageous section is terminated to shift to the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), and the ball ejection state is set to the advantageous section (CZ) via the non-advantageous section (more specifically, Usually either CZ or higher CZ). In this example, when the second cycle ends, the value of the advantageous section game number counter exceeds the above-mentioned branch value, so that the CZ transition determination 1 is not performed. Also, for the same purpose, AT lottery is not performed. However, it is also possible to make these judgments and lottery. The same applies during the game period of the second cycle. If it is not decided to shift to the CZ state via the non-advantageous section, the next maximum 300 games (the number of games from the start of the advantageous section is 631G to 930G) is the third cycle (third cycle). ).

(4) In the advantageous section (normal), when the game for the third cycle is performed (when the third cycle ends), the CZ transition determination 2 is performed, and as a result of this determination, it is determined to shift to the CZ state. If this is the case, the advantageous section is terminated to shift to the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), and the ball ejection state is set to the advantageous section (CZ) via the non-advantageous section (more specifically, Usually either CZ or higher CZ). At this time, the point that the CZ transition determination 1 and the AT lottery are not performed is the same as when the second cycle ends. However, it is also possible to make these judgments and lottery. The same applies during the game period of the third cycle. If it is not decided to shift to the CZ state via the non-advantageous section, the next maximum 300 games (the number of games from the start of the advantageous section is 931G to 1230G) is the fourth cycle (fourth cycle). ).

(5) In the advantageous section (normal), when the game for the fourth cycle is performed (when the fourth cycle ends), the ball ejection state becomes the advantageous section (ceiling AT) while the advantageous section is maintained. .. In the advantageous section (ceiling AT), when the game for the fourth cycle is performed in the advantageous section without being controlled by the advantageous section (AT), the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1500". It is a ceiling AT state as a relief for Hamari, in which the limit processing according to the number of games is activated and the AT state is controlled until the advantageous section ends. The game period until the advantageous section (ceiling AT) is started basically includes a period in which the advantageous section is maintained and becomes an advantageous section (CZ), but the period is included. It can also be excluded. That is, in the advantageous section, the advantageous section (ceiling AT) may be started when the period that was the advantageous section (normal) becomes the gaming period for the fourth cycle.

Further, although not shown in FIG. 241, in the advantageous section, the advantageous section (AT) is shifted to, the advantageous section (AT) is extended and continued, and the advantageous section (AT) remains, for example. , When the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes "1400" or more, or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes "2160" or more, the same ball is discharged until any of the limit processing is activated. Is an advantageous section (ceiling AT). In this case, the advantageous section (ceiling AT) is in the AT state as the ending state described above.

In the advantageous section (ceiling AT), a special AT state effect (for example, an ending effect) including a dedicated special AT state state display indicating that the special AT state is in progress is performed. Here, the advantageous section (ceiling AT) continues for about 100 games when it is performed in the ending state, and continues for about 270 games in the above example when it is performed in the ceiling AT state. Further, as described above, in the first to fourth cycles of the advantageous section (normal), the game period during each cycle may be shortened, and in this case, the game period may be continued for a longer period.

(Control example 1 of special AT production and related production)
In the special AT production, the number of games remaining until the AT state ends due to the operation of various limit processing (if the limit processing according to the number of payouts operates faster, the remaining number of payouts is expected to increase net per 1G. It is possible to produce the content according to the value (divided by 2.4 sheets). For example, when the advantageous section (ceiling AT) is started when the number of remaining games is less than 100, the character A appears and the special AT in-game effect 1 with a blue background is performed. If the advantageous section (ceiling AT) is started when the number of remaining games is 100 games or more and less than 200 games, the character B appears and the special AT middle effect 2 with a yellow background is performed. If the advantageous section (ceiling AT) is started when the number of remaining games is 200 games or more and less than 300 games, the character C appears and the special AT middle effect 3 with a green background is performed. If the advantageous section (ceiling AT) is started when the number of remaining games is 300 or more, the character D appears and the special AT middle effect 4 with a red background is performed. Together with or in place of these, it is possible to directly or indirectly suggest a guideline for the number of remaining games.

Then, in the advantageous section (ceiling AT), one of the limit processes is activated, and when the advantageous section (ceiling AT) ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), the non-advantageous section In (CZ transition confirmed state), an effect related to the effect during the special AT performed during the advantageous section (ceiling AT) is performed. For example, when the special AT during effect 1 is performed during the advantageous section (ceiling AT), the character A appears in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), and the CZ preparation effect (or the blue background) becomes a blue background. , Directed when CZ is introduced). When the special AT middle effect 2 is performed during the advantageous section (ceiling AT), the character B appears in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), and the CZ preparation effect (or CZ) becomes a yellow background. (Direction at the time of introduction) will be performed. When the special AT middle effect 3 is performed during the advantageous section (ceiling AT), the character C appears in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), and the CZ preparation effect (or CZ) becomes a green background. (Direction at the time of introduction) will be performed. When the special AT middle effect 4 is performed during the advantageous section (ceiling AT), the character D appears in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), and the CZ preparation effect (or CZ) becomes a red background. (Direction at the time of introduction) will be performed. It should be noted that the method of performing these related effects is only an example, and any related effects may be performed as long as the effects can at least remind the player of a specific relationship.

Further, not only in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), but also in the advantageous section (CZ) shifted from the non-advantageous section, the effect related to the special AT in-process effect may be similarly performed. For example, when the special AT middle effect 1 is performed in the advantageous section (ceiling AT), the character A appears in the advantageous section (CZ) and the CZ medium effect with a blue background is performed. When the special AT middle effect 2 is performed in the advantageous section (ceiling AT), the character B appears in the advantageous section (CZ) and the CZ medium effect with a yellow background is performed. When the special AT middle effect 3 is performed in the advantageous section (ceiling AT), the character C appears in the advantageous section (CZ) and the CZ medium effect with a green background is performed. When the special AT middle effect 4 is performed in the advantageous section (ceiling AT), the character D appears in the advantageous section (CZ) and the CZ medium effect with a red background is performed.

In the transition transition example 4, the case where the non-advantageous section functions as the CZ transition confirmed state (that is, the case of the transition transition example 1 described above) is described as an example, but the non-advantageous section is in the CZ state. Even in the case of functioning as (that is, in the case of the above-mentioned transition transition example 2), the same related effect can be performed. That is, the CZ medium effect performed in the non-advantageous section (CZ state) may be a related effect according to the effect content of the special AT medium effect.

(Control example 2 of special AT production and related production)
In the above control example 1, it is possible to make the production content of the special AT production different according to the number of remaining games, and it is assumed that it corresponds to the production content of the special AT production that is performed after that. Although this has been described, another control example will be described below. In this example, it is not always necessary to make the production content of the special AT production different according to the number of remaining games. Further, the special AT-time effect may be the same effect as the normal AT-time effect.

This is a case where the advantageous section (AT) normally ends due to the digestion of the number of games for the number of sets given before the various limit processes are activated, and after the end of the advantageous section (AT), the non-advantageous section (CZ) When it is assumed that the transition is made to the transition confirmed state), the effect transitions in the order of AT during effect → CZ preparation effect → CZ during effect. At this time, the display on the display device 11 transitions in the order of AT state display → CZ preparation screen display → CZ state display. Further, when the transition to the non-advantageous section (CZ state) is made after the end of the advantageous section (AT), the effect transitions from the AT-during effect to the CZ-during effect. At this time, the display on the display device 11 transitions from the AT state display to the CZ state display.

On the other hand, in this example, when the advantageous section (ceiling AT) is regulated by the operation of various limit processing, the production transition is different from the above, in order to enhance the interest in the production aspect in particular. be. Specifically, in the state after the end, a special effect including a special display is performed.

When it is decided to shift to the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) after the end of the advantageous section (ceiling AT), the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) and the subsequent advantageous section (CZ) (both may be used. Either one may be used), for example, the special AT production can be continued as it is. Specifically, for example, when the special AT production is configured as a story production performed over a plurality of games, the story production can be continued. Further, for example, the effect during the special AT state can be terminated, but the display during the special AT state can be continued. Specifically, for example, characters such as "waiting for AT end" or "AT continuation chance" are displayed together with the special AT state display, and it can be recognized that the advantageous section (ceiling AT) has ended, but the outer shape The upper part can be produced as if the advantageous section (ceiling AT) is continuing. These are just examples. That is, in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) after the end of the advantageous section (ceiling AT) and the subsequent advantageous section (CZ) (either of them may be used), the effect transition at the normal end Any related effect may be performed as long as it is recognizable that is a different transition and an effect related to the special AT effect is performed. Further, from such a viewpoint, the line is performed in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) after the end of the advantageous section (ceiling AT) and the subsequent advantageous section (CZ) (either of them may be used). It is desirable that the special display to be displayed is at least different from the display in the normal state or the display in the CZ state.

Further, when the transition to the non-advantageous section (CZ state) is made after the end of the advantageous section (ceiling AT), for example, in the non-advantageous section (CZ state), for example, the production during the special AT is continued as it is. Can be made to. Further, for example, the effect during the special AT state can be terminated, but the display during the special AT state can be continued.

Here, the special effect ends, for example, when the CZ state ends without winning the AT lottery (or when the non-advantageous section ends without winning the AT lottery), and then the advantageous section (usually). ), But when a special production is being performed, if the AT lottery is won and the section shifts to the advantageous section (AT), an unusual production may also be performed. can.

For example, when a special effect is being performed and the AT lottery is won to shift to the advantageous section (AT), characters such as "AT restart!" Or "Continued success!" Are displayed, and the AT state is displayed on the outside. Can be made to produce an effect as if the AT state was restarted or continued. Originally, the advantageous section (AT) shifted after the end of the advantageous section (ceiling AT) is in the AT state of the first hit, and the advantageous section (ceiling AT) is not restarted or continued, but in terms of production. By displaying that these are a series of advantageous gaming states, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the game performance via the non-advantageous section.

In the advantageous section (AT) shifted in this way, the normal AT-time effect may be performed, or the special AT-time effect may be resumed or continued. Further, when the AT-time effect or the special AT-time effect is being performed, the display device 11 displays the cumulative number of continuous games (the number of sets) and the cumulative number of acquired games during the AT state. The cumulative number of continuous games and the cumulative number of acquired games in the AT state are managed by the control of the sub (sub-control board 72) side, and are initialized (cleared to 0) in principle when the AT state ends. However, when the special effect is being performed, these are not initialized, and when the special effect is performed, the AT lottery is won and the section shifts to the advantageous section (AT). In the AT state (externally, restarted or continued AT state), these counts may be continuously performed. That is, by accumulating and counting these numerical values in the advantageous section (ceiling AT) and the advantageous section (AT) that is hit for the first time thereafter, it is suggested to the player as if a series of advantageous gaming states are continuing. You may do so.

(Example 5 of transition transition between advantageous section and non-advantageous section)
Next, with reference to FIG. 242, the transition transition example 5 of the advantageous section / non-advantageous section in this example will be described. Since the transition transition example 5 is basically the same transition of the ball ejection state as the transition transition example 4 described above, the description of that part will be omitted.

In the transition transition example 5, when the advantageous section start condition is satisfied in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state), the AT winning probability in the advantageous section (CZ) and the AT winning probability in each of the first to fourth cycles are satisfied. And the non-advantageous section transition probability (the winning probability of the advantageous section end lottery) are set in advance as a combination of probability information (hereinafter, will be described as "MAP").

For example, suppose that the first MAP is set when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section. In the first MAP, the AT winning probability of the advantageous section (CZ) is set to "medium", the AT winning probability of the first cycle is set to "high", and the AT winning probability of the second cycle is set to "medium". It is set so that the AT winning probability of the third cycle is set to "low" and the AT winning probability of the fourth cycle is not set (that is, the AT lottery is not performed). In addition, the non-advantageous section transition probability of the first cycle is set to "low", the non-advantageous section transition probability of the second cycle is set to "medium", and the non-advantageous section transition probability of the third cycle is set to "high". It is set, and the non-advantageous section transition probability of the 4th cycle is set to "low".

Therefore, when the first MAP is set, the advantageous section (CZ) becomes an advantageous section (usually CZ), and the AT lottery is won with a medium (for example, about 40%) probability. When the AT lottery is not won in the advantageous section (normal CZ) and the process shifts to the first cycle, the non-advantageous section transition probability is "low" in this first cycle, so that the CZ state is entered via the non-advantageous section. Although the probability of winning is low, the probability of winning the AT is "high", so the probability of transitioning to the AT state is high. Therefore, even if the player cannot shift to the AT state in the CZ state, if the first MAP is set, the player can have the expectation of shifting to the AT state in the first cycle thereafter. It has become. Further, when the transition from the first cycle to the second cycle is performed, the non-advantageous section transition probability and the AT winning probability are both "medium" in this second cycle, so that both have a moderate expectation and are non-advantageous. There are cases where the state shifts to the CZ state and cases where the state shifts to the AT state via the section. Further, when shifting from the second cycle to the third cycle, the AT winning probability is "low" in this third cycle, so that the probability of shifting to the AT state is low, but the probability of shifting to the non-advantageous section is "high". Therefore, the probability of shifting to the CZ state via the non-advantageous section is high. Therefore, the player can have a feeling of expectation of the transition to the CZ state in the third cycle. However, if the game is performed in the 4th cycle by shifting from the 3rd cycle to the 4th cycle, it will be an advantageous section (ceiling AT). Therefore, if it is desired to shift to the advantageous section (ceiling AT), It is hoped that the CZ state will not be entered in this third cycle. That is, the high or low probability of transition to the non-advantageous section in the third cycle is an important factor that influences the occurrence of the ceiling AT state. Further, when the third cycle is shifted to the fourth cycle, the AT winning probability is not set in the fourth cycle, so that the AT state is not shifted. Further, since the non-advantageous section transition probability is "low", the probability of transitioning to the CZ state via the non-advantageous section is low. Therefore, the player can have a feeling of expectation of the ceiling AT state.

Further, for example, it is assumed that the second MAP is set when shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. In the second MAP, the AT winning probability of the advantageous section (CZ) is set to "high", the AT winning probability of the first cycle is set to "low", and the AT winning probability of the second cycle is set to "low". It is set so that the AT winning probability of the third cycle is set to "low" and the AT winning probability of the fourth cycle is not set (that is, the AT lottery is not performed). In addition, the non-advantageous section transition probability of the first cycle is set to "low", the non-advantageous section transition probability of the second cycle is set to "low", and the non-advantageous section transition probability of the third cycle is set to "low". It is set, and the non-advantageous section transition probability of the 4th cycle is set to "low".

Therefore, when the second MAP is set, the advantageous section (CZ) becomes the advantageous section (upper CZ) and wins the AT lottery with a high probability (for example, about 75%). However, when the AT lottery is not won in the advantageous section (upper CZ) and the process shifts to the first cycle, the AT winning probability is set to "low" in the subsequent first to fourth cycles (fourth cycle). Since the probability of transition to the non-advantageous section is also set to "low", the probability of transitioning to the AT state and the probability of transitioning to the CZ state are low, and the probability of transitioning to the AT state at the start of the advantageous section is low. If it cannot be made to do so, after that, the game is basically aimed at the ceiling AT state.

It should be noted that the above-mentioned No. 1 MAP and No. 2 MAP are merely examples of MAPs that can be set in this example, and it goes without saying that other MAPs in which probability information is set can be provided in a manner different from these. Nor.

That is, depending on whether either "medium" or "high" (or "low" may be present) is set as the AT winning probability in the advantageous section (CZ), the AT state transition of the CZ state in the MAP Expectations can be different.

In addition, if the AT state transition expectation for each cycle of the normal state in the MAP differs depending on whether "low", "medium", or "high" is set as the AT winning probability in the first to fourth cycles. Can be made. Further, by not setting the AT winning probability depending on the cycle, it is possible to prevent the transition to the AT state in that cycle. Further, depending on whether "low", "medium", or "high" is set as the non-advantageous section transition probability in the first to fourth cycles, the CZ state transition expectation for each cycle of the normal state in the MAP. Can be different. Further, by not setting the non-advantageous section transition probability depending on the cycle, it is possible to prevent the transition to the CZ state (via the non-advantageous section) in that cycle.

Then, in the MAP, depending on which of these probability information is combined, the time when the situation with high or low expectation of transition to the AT state or CZ state occurs can be changed according to the set MAP. At the same time, the degree of expectation of transition to the ceiling AT state can be changed, so that the playability can be diversified. It should be noted that the effect of indirectly suggesting which MAP was decided to the player is executed every time a predetermined opportunity is established, thereby giving the player the pleasure of guessing the type of the decided MAP. The motivation and interest in the game may be increased, or the player's expectation may be maintained by basically not suggesting it to the player. Further, the player may be able to guess or determine which MAP he / she is staying in as the information indicating the AT winning probability and the non-advantageous section transition probability in each cycle. In this case, on the information providing screen for the player displayed when the effect button (for example, the effect button 403) is operated while the game is not in progress, the cycle already digested from the time of transition to the advantageous section and the digestion are in progress. Information (cycle-related information) indicating the AT winning probability and the non-advantageous section transition probability for the cycle of In addition, MAP information that can be selected is also displayed, and it is estimated that an advantageous cycle may come as a specification that allows the player to narrow down the MAP type from the cycle-related information as to which MAP is in progress. You may try to give them the pleasure of doing it. As the cycle-related information, either one of the AT winning probability and the information indicating the non-advantageous section transition probability may be notified or suggested. In addition, on the information provision screen for players, the type of CZ won in the past cycle is notified, and information that can be used as a clue to estimate the set value and the stay MAP is provided, which is strategic when the player selects the game table. You may enjoy choosing a platform.

In this example, in the MAP, the AT winning probability and the non-advantageous section transition probability in each state are set in the first to fourth cycles. That is, the MAP is configured as transition probability information that determines the establishment probability of the transition condition of the special state for each cycle, and also determines the establishment probability of the end condition of the advantageous section for each cycle (the establishment probability of the transition condition of the specific state). Although it is configured as end probability information, the setting method of each probability information is not limited to this. For example, in the MAP, in the first to fourth cycles, only the AT winning probability in each state may be set. That is, it may be configured only as transition probability information. Further, for example, in the MAP, in the first to fourth cycles, only the non-advantageous section transition probability in each state may be set. That is, it may be configured only as end probability information.

The transition transition example 5 is described by taking as an example the case where the non-advantageous section functions as the CZ transition confirmed state (that is, the case of the transition transition example 1 described above), but the non-advantageous section is in the CZ state. The MAP can be set in the same manner even when it functions as (that is, in the case of the transition transition example 2 described above). In this case, when the non-advantageous section (CZ state) shifts to the advantageous section (normal) without winning the AT lottery, the transition probability information and the end in the first to fourth cycles of the advantageous section (normal) after the transition. The MAP that defines only the probability information, the transition probability information, or the end probability information may be determined.

(Example of transition transition of game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 243, an example of transition transition of the gaming state in this example will be described. In this example, it is assumed that, for example, the general medium bonus is not internal, the general medium bonus is internal, and the bonus is operating as the gaming state. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the game can be played only in a three-card bet state, for example.

General medium bonus between non-flags When a bonus (bonus role) is won and a special result display (special symbol combination) corresponding to the bonus is derived in the winning game (bonus winning) If), it shifts during the bonus operation. If the end condition is satisfied during the bonus operation (when the bonus operation ends), the process shifts to the general non-internal bonus.

When a bonus (bonus role) is won and a special result display (special symbol combination) corresponding to the bonus is not derived in the winning game in the general medium bonus non-internal between non-flags (bonus non-winning) (When), it shifts to the inside of the general medium bonus between the flags. During the general bonus inside, it continues until the special result display (special symbol combination) corresponding to the carried-over bonus is derived.

Here, inside the general medium bonus, when a replay role or a small role is won, the normal result display corresponding to the winning replay role or the small role has priority over the special result display corresponding to the carried-over bonus. Stop control is performed so that it is derived. Therefore, the inside of the general bonus is configured as a gaming state in which it is difficult to derive the result display corresponding to the bonus.

The method that makes it difficult to derive the result display corresponding to the bonus is not limited to this. In addition to the above, the following methods can also be adopted. For example, in this example, as will be described later, in the general middle bonus non-internal, the bonus is won independently with a probability of about 1/10, so that the winning game may be a bonus prize. However, the bonus may not be won alone, but may be won at the same time as the replay role or the small role, and may be configured so that the winning game does not win a bonus. In addition, for example, in this example, as will be described later, there is a probability of losing about 1/10 inside the general middle bonus (that is, the bonus carried over in the game is won alone). Therefore, in the winning game, it is configured so that a bonus prize may be won. May be configured so as not to generate a game in which a bonus prize can be won by raising the value and preventing the loss from occurring.

In this way, in this example, the basic game state in which the game is played is set to the inside of the general middle bonus. That is, it is not the game property of increasing the game value during the bonus operation, but the game property of increasing the game value by the operation of the AT state regardless of the operation of the bonus. From this point of view, in this example, the bonus can be a non-increasing / decreasing bonus or a decreasing bonus.

(Specification example when changing settings)
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 243, a specification example 1 and a specification example 2 at the time of setting change will be described. In the specification example 1 at the time of setting change, when the game state before the setting change is in the general middle bonus non-internal, the setting value is changed (setting change), or the above-mentioned "RAM error" or the like is initialized. When the condition is satisfied, the game state does not change in the process at the time of setting change, and the game state after the setting change is in the general middle bonus non-internal. In addition, if the setting value is changed (setting change) while the game state before the setting change is inside the general bonus, or if the initialization condition such as the above-mentioned "RAM error" is satisfied, In the process when the setting is changed, the game state does not change, and the game state after the setting change is inside the general bonus. In addition, if the setting value is changed (setting change) while the game state before the setting change is in the bonus operation, or if the initialization condition such as the above-mentioned "RAM error" is satisfied, the setting is changed. In the processing of time, the bonus operation is cleared, and the game state after the setting change is changed to the general middle bonus non-internal.

Further, in the specification example 2 at the time of setting change, when the game state before the setting change is in the non-internal bonus during general, and when the game state before the setting change is in the bonus operation, the same as in the above specification example 1. On the other hand, when the game state before the setting change is inside the bonus during general, control different from the above specification example 1 is performed. Specifically, when the game state before the setting change is inside the general bonus, the setting value is changed (setting change), or the initialization condition such as the above-mentioned "RAM error" is satisfied. In the process when the setting is changed, the bonus flag is cleared, and the game state after the setting change is changed to the general middle bonus non-internal. In this example, the above specification example 2 is adopted as the specification when the setting is changed.

(Example of advantageous section transition lottery for each game state)
Next, with reference to FIG. 244, an example of the advantageous section transition lottery for each gaming state in this example will be described.

As described above, in this example, the basic game state in which the game is played is set to be inside the general middle bonus, and when the initialization conditions such as setting change are satisfied, the general middle bonus is not inside. Further, as described above, in this example, in the advantageous section, when the initialization conditions such as setting change are satisfied, when various limit processes are executed, and before the execution of various limit processes, the predetermined end conditions are satisfied. When the end is decided, the section will be shifted to the non-advantageous section.

That is, when various limit processes are executed in the advantageous section inside the general middle bonus, or when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the execution of the various limit processes and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. While the game state of the non-advantageous section is maintained inside the general bonus, if the initialization conditions such as setting change are satisfied and the player shifts to the non-advantageous section, the game state of the non-advantageous section is the general bonus. It will transition to non-internal.

The upper part of FIG. 244 shows an example of an advantageous section transition lottery table for the general middle bonus internal middle use, which is referred to at the time of the advantageous section transition lottery in the non-advantageous section inside the general middle bonus. In the lottery result column, "no transition" indicates that the section does not shift to the advantageous section (that is, the non-advantageous section is maintained), and "to CZ1" shifts to the advantageous section (normal CZ). Indicates that "to CZ2" indicates that it is determined to move to the advantageous section (upper CZ), and "to normal" indicates that it shifts to the advantageous section (normal) (that is, , Indicates that it is decided to shift to the normal state without shifting to the CZ state or the AT state), and "to AT precursor" means to shift to the advantageous section (AT) (that is, AT by direct hit). It indicates that the transition to the state) will be decided.

In addition, in the winning combination column, "replay + bonus" indicates that "replay" has been determined as the internal winning combination within the general medium bonus between the flags. In addition, "+ bonus" indicates that as a result of the bonus being carried over, the bonus is also determined in duplicate as an internal winning combination in the game. Further, "about 1/7" indicates that the winning probability of "replay" is about 1/7 in the general bonus. The same applies to the following winning combinations, and the description of this part will be omitted below. "3 bells + bonus" indicates that "3 bells" has been decided as the internal winning role, and "9 bells + bonus" indicates that "9 bells" has been decided as the internal winning role. Shown, "Unquestioned Bell + Bonus" indicates that "Unquestioned Bell" was determined as the internal winning role, "Cherry + Bonus" indicates that "Cherry" was determined as the internal winning role, and "Watermelon" "+ Bonus" indicates that "Watermelon" has been determined as the internal winning role, "Chance eye + Bonus" indicates that "Chance eye" has been determined as the internal winning role, and "Loss + Bonus" , Indicates that the game was "lost".

On the other hand, the lower part of FIG. 244 shows an example of a general middle bonus non-internal middle-use advantageous section transition lottery table, which is referred to at the time of the advantageous section transition lottery in the non-advantageous section in the general middle bonus non-internal. Since the lottery result column is the same as that in the above-mentioned general middle bonus internal middle advantage section transition lottery table, the description here is omitted.

In addition, in the winning combination column, "replay" indicates that "replay" has been determined as an internal winning combination in the general medium bonus non-internal between non-flags. In addition, unlike the above, since the bonus is not carried over here, there is no notation of "+ bonus", but the basic composition of the winning combination is about 1/10, except that the "bonus" is a single winning. Since it is the same as the above, the description here will be omitted.

The configuration of the winning combination described above is only an example, but for example, "replay" is a replay combination, and regardless of the stop operation mode, the replay combination is won and the replay is activated. In addition, for example, "3 bells" is a 6-choice push order small winning combination, and if the stop operation mode is the correct push order, a prize is generated in which the game value of 3 cards is paid out, and the incorrect push order is obtained. In this case, a prize is generated that pays out one game value, or a combination is configured so that the game value is not paid out due to omission. In addition, for example, "9 bells" is a 6-choice push order small winning combination, and if the stop operation mode is the correct push order, a prize is generated that pays out 9 game values, and the incorrect push order is obtained. In this case, a prize is generated that pays out one game value, or a combination is configured so that the game value is not paid out due to omission. Further, for example, the "unquestioned bell" is usually a small winning combination, and is a winning combination in which nine game values are paid out regardless of the stop operation mode.

In addition, for example, "cherry" is usually a small winning combination, and if the stop operation mode is the correct answer pressing position, a prize will be paid out for one game value, and if it is the incorrect answer pressing position, it will be missed. It is a role that is configured so that the game value is not paid out due to the occurrence of. In addition, for example, "watermelon" is usually a small role, and if the stop operation mode is the correct answer pressing position, a prize will be generated that pays out three game values, and if it is the incorrect answer pressing position, it will be missed. It is a role that is configured so that the game value is not paid out due to the occurrence of. Further, for example, the "chance eye" is usually a small winning combination, and is a winning combination in which three game values are paid out regardless of the stop operation mode. In addition, for example, "unquestioned bell", "cherry", "watermelon", and "chance eye" are roles that function as so-called rare roles such that AT direct hit may occur. Further, for example, when the "bonus" is a bonus combination and other combinations are not determined in duplicate, a bonus prize is generated when the stop operation mode is the correct answer pressing position, and the incorrect answer pressing position occurs. Is a role that is configured so that no bonus prizes will occur due to omissions.

As described above, when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section except when the initialization condition such as the setting change is satisfied, the non-advantageous section is inside the general middle bonus, and FIG. The advantageous section transition lottery is performed with reference to the general medium bonus internal intermediate advantageous section transition lottery table shown in the upper row. In this case, at least "to normal" is not determined, and "to CZ1" or "to CZ2" is configured to be determined with high probability. That is, the non-advantageous section is configured as a state in which it is possible to make an advantageous special decision regarding the transition to the special state. In the lottery table, "to the AT precursor", which is a direct hit of the AT state, can be determined, but this may not be determined. That is, it can be configured to shift to the CZ state with a 100% probability.

On the other hand, when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section when the initialization condition such as the setting change is satisfied, the non-advantageous section becomes the general middle bonus non-internal, and the general shown in the lower part of FIG. 244. Medium Bonus Non-internal Medium Advantageous Section Transition Lottery The advantageous section transition lottery is performed with reference to the table. In this case, at least "to CZ1" or "to CZ2" is not determined, and "to normal" is determined with high probability. That is, the non-advantageous section is configured as a state in which it is not possible to make an advantageous special decision regarding the transition to the special state. In the lottery table, "to the AT precursor", which is a direct hit of the AT state, can be determined, but this may not be determined. Further, although "no transition" is always determined when the "bonus" is determined as the internal winning combination, "to normal" may be determined without fail. That is, it can be configured to shift to the normal state with a probability of 100%.

It should be noted that when the non-advantageous section is inside the general medium bonus, it is more advantageous than when the non-advantageous section is inside the general medium bonus (when the non-advantageous section is inside the general medium bonus non-internal). This is not the only method (which is more disadvantageous than when the non-advantageous section is inside the general bonus). As a result, when the non-advantageous section is inside the general middle bonus, the CZ state is not controlled when the non-advantageous section shifts from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section than when the non-advantageous section is inside the general middle bonus. If the probability of controlling to the normal state becomes high, the probability can be set as appropriate.

For example, when the non-advantageous section is inside the general bonus, "replay" ("replay + bonus"), "3 bells" ("3 bells + bonus"), and "9 bells" ("9" If you win any of the "Bell + Bonus"), in the general middle bonus internal middle advantage section transition lottery table shown in the upper part of Fig. 244, "no transition" is determined with a probability of "100/256". However, this cannot be determined, for example, "to CZ1" is determined with a probability of "255/256", and "to CZ2" is determined with a probability of "1/256". If you win these normal roles, you may always shift to the CZ state. That is, when winning these normal combinations in the non-advantageous section, the player may always shift to the CZ state if the general middle bonus is inside, and always shift to the normal state if the general middle bonus is not inside. ..

Further, in the general middle bonus non-internal middle advantage section transition lottery table shown in the lower part of FIG. 244, when the "bonus" is determined as the internal winning combination, "no transition" is always determined (the non-advantageous section is maintained). However, as described above, it is possible to make sure that "to normal" is determined so that the state always shifts to the normal state.

In the general middle bonus non-internal middle advantage section transition lottery table shown in the lower part of FIG. 244, when "bonus" is determined as an internal winning combination, "no transition" is always determined (non-advantageous section is maintained). Even if the non-advantageous section is inside the general bonus (for example, when the setting is changed), it is possible to shift to the inside of the general bonus while maintaining the non-advantageous section. This is to leave room.

As described above, when the non-advantageous section is in the general middle bonus non-internal, the "bonus" is determined as the internal winning combination with a probability of about 1/10, but the advantageous section transition lottery determines from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. The probability of transitioning to (for example, advantageous section (normal)) (for example, advantageous section is started) is higher than that. Therefore, basically, after shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the "bonus" is determined as the internal winning combination in the advantageous section, and the gaming state shifts from the general medium bonus non-internal to the general medium bonus internal. In most cases. However, in the non-advantageous section, if a "bonus" can be won before shifting to the advantageous section and the bonus can be non-winning, the non-advantageous section may be inside the general middle bonus. If it is configured, it may be possible to shift to a state in which a special decision that is advantageous for the transition to a special state can be made even under a situation such as when a setting is changed. It becomes possible to maintain the expectation of the person.

That is, from the viewpoint of suppressing the occurrence of a situation in which the player is excessively advantageous under the circumstances such as when the setting is changed, it is desirable not to leave such a room. From the viewpoint of maintaining the expectation of the player while suppressing it, it is desirable to leave such a room. This should be applied as appropriate in consideration of market trends and regulatory conditions.

From the former point of view, for example, in the general middle bonus non-internal, which is a non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section is maintained until the "bonus" is determined as the internal winning combination, and the "bonus" is the internal winning. When it is decided as a role, "to normal" is always decided so that it always shifts to the normal state.

(Modification example)
As described above, in this example, two game states, that is, inside the general middle bonus and inside the general middle bonus are provided, and when the non-advantageous section is inside the general middle bonus, that is, for example, various limit processing is performed. When the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section due to the execution, or when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the execution of various limit processes, the advantageous section ends and becomes the non-advantageous section. In the case of a transition, the non-advantageous section is made to be advantageous, while the non-advantageous section is in the general middle bonus non-internal, that is, for example, the advantageous section ends due to a setting change and is non-advantageous. It was configured so that the non-advantageous section would not be advantageous when shifting to the section, but such control is possible even if the gaming state is increased, and thereby the game playability is achieved. In some cases, it can be further diversified. Therefore, in this modified example, an example in which the gaming state between non-flags is increased as the gaming state will be described.

In this example, during the general medium bonus, which is the game state between the flags, and during the general medium bonus, which is the game state between the non-flags (this is referred to as "non-internal medium initial game state" in this example). In addition, a non-internal middle transition game state, which is a game state between non-flags, is provided.

Similar to the above, when the initialization condition such as the setting change is satisfied, the game state is first controlled to the non-internal middle initial game state. Non-internal medium In the initial game state, if a "bonus" is determined as an internal winning combination, and if the game does not win a bonus, immediately (for example, at the end of the game or from the next game), the general medium bonus is internal. Migrate to. On the other hand, in the non-internal middle initial game state, a predetermined state transition combination (for example, a predetermined replay combination or a specific small combination may be used) before the "bonus" is determined as the internal winning combination. In the case of a predetermined replay combination, the non-internal middle initial game state may be configured as an RT state in which the winning probability of the predetermined replay combination is high), and a predetermined result display (predetermined symbol combination) is performed. ) Is derived (Note that when the predetermined state transition combination is won, the predetermined result display may be derived regardless of the player's stop operation mode, or the player's stop operation mode is the predetermined mode. (For example, the predetermined result display may be derived in the case of the left first stop), while the predetermined result display may not be derived in the case of a non-predetermined mode (for example, other than the left first stop). ), Transition to the game state after the transition from the next game to the non-internal middle transition.

If the "bonus" is determined as the internal winning combination in the non-internal middle transition post-game state, the game state is not changed during the non-internal middle transition post-game state, and the non-internal middle transition post-game state ends. Sometimes it shifts to the inside of the general bonus. The non-internal middle transition post-game state is configured to end when a game is played for a predetermined period (for example, 10 games) after the start. Further, when the game state after the non-internal middle transition ends without the "bonus" being determined as the internal winning combination during the non-internal middle transition post-game state, the game shifts to the non-internal middle initial game state.

Further, also in this example, when the initialization condition such as the setting change is satisfied, the game section shifts from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section. Then, in the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed in the same manner as described above, and when the advantageous section start condition is satisfied, the process shifts to any advantageous section. Here, in this example, the gaming state of the non-advantageous section thus shifted may be a non-internal middle initial gaming state or a non-internal middle transition post-game state. Then, in this example, it is possible to make the transition mode to the advantageous section different depending on whether the gaming state of the non-advantageous section becomes the non-internal middle initial gaming state or the non-internal middle transition post-game state.

That is, when the initialization condition such as the setting change is satisfied and the player shifts to the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section is in the non-internal middle initial gaming state. Even if the non-advantageous section is in the non-internal middle initial gaming state, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed by referring to the general middle bonus non-internal middle-use advantageous section transition lottery table shown in the lower part of FIG. 244. Alternatively, the advantageous section transition lottery may be performed with a different probability. For example, the probability of transition to the CZ state when the non-advantageous section is in the non-internal middle initial gaming state is lower than when the non-advantageous section is inside the general middle bonus, but after the non-advantageous section is in the non-internal middle transition. It may be higher than when it is in the gaming state. Further, as will be described later, since there is a high probability of shifting to the gaming state after the non-internal middle transition, the advantageous section transition lottery is not performed (that is, all the winning combinations) when the non-advantageous section is in the non-internal middle initial gaming state. The advantageous section transition lottery may be performed by referring to the advantageous section transition lottery table in which "no transition" is always determined.

In the non-internal middle-initial game state of the non-advantageous section, for example, the winning probability of a predetermined state transition combination is set to about 1 / 1.5 (what is "replay", "3 bells" or "9 bells"? When configuring as different replay combinations, the winning probabilities may be appropriately lowered to secure the coefficient of the predetermined state transition combination. For example, "3 bells" and "9 bells" may be set to the predetermined states. It may be configured as a transition combination. When "3 bells" and "9 bells" are configured as predetermined state transition combinations, in the game state between non-flags, these are not push order small combinations but normal. It is assumed that the stop control is performed so as to be a small winning combination, and in the stop control, a prize is generated which is the payout of one game value regardless of the stop operation mode. The combination of symbols related to the winning prize may be displayed as the predetermined result described above). Therefore, after being controlled to the non-internal middle initial gaming state of the non-advantageous section, a predetermined result display is derived in about 1 to 2 games, and the non-internal middle transition state is entered after the non-advantageous section. In this case, when a predetermined state transition combination is won in the non-internal middle initial gaming state of the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section is maintained by making sure that "no transition" is determined in the advantageous section transition lottery. It should be done. On the other hand, since the winning probability of the "bonus" is about 1/10, which is lower than that, the probability of winning before the predetermined state transition combination is low, but the "bonus" is tentatively higher than the predetermined state transition combination. If you can win the prize first, you will move to the inside of the general bonus inside the non-advantageous section. That is, in the non-internal middle initial game state of the non-advantageous section, even if the initialization condition such as the setting change is satisfied, there is room to be transferred to the general medium bonus internal where the transition probability of the CZ state is high.

In the game state after the non-internal middle transition of the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section transition lottery is performed with reference to the general middle bonus non-internal middle-use advantageous section transition lottery table shown in the lower part of FIG. 244. That is, the same advantageous section transition lottery as that in the general medium bonus non-internal of the non-advantageous section described above is performed. It should be noted that various modifications of the above-mentioned general medium bonus non-internal medium advantageous section transition lottery table can also be applied here. Here, in the non-internal middle transition post-game state, even if the "bonus" is won as described above, the game state does not immediately shift to the general middle bonus internal until the non-internal middle transition post-game state ends. Is maintained. Then, in the advantageous section transition lottery in the game state after the non-internal middle transition of the non-advantageous section, "to normal" is basically determined. That is, when a predetermined result display is derived in the non-internal middle initial gaming state of the non-advantageous section and the game shifts to the non-internal middle transition post-game state of the non-advantageous section, it is non-advantageous during the non-internal middle transition post-game state. It is configured so that the section shifts from the section to the advantageous section, and the transition destination becomes the advantageous section (normal).

That is, in this example, at least when the non-advantageous section is in the non-internal middle transition post-game state, the CZ state when the non-advantageous section shifts from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section than when the non-advantageous section is inside the general middle bonus. It can be configured so that the probability of controlling to the normal state is high without controlling. The probability can be set as appropriate.

In addition, in this example, when winning a normal combination in a non-advantageous section, the player always shifts to the CZ state if it is inside the general middle bonus, and always shifts to the normal state if it is in the game state after the non-internal middle transition. Can be configured.

(Example of processing at the end of advantageous section)
Next, an example of the processing at the end of the advantageous section in this example will be described with reference to FIG. 245.

As described above, in this example, in the advantageous section, when the initialization conditions such as setting change are satisfied, when various limit processes are executed, and before the execution of various limit processes, the predetermined end conditions are satisfied and the process ends. When it is determined, it shifts to the non-advantageous section, and when it shifts to the non-advantageous section, various parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized. Here, the advantageous section end-time processing described is a flowchart showing an outline of the advantageous section end-time processing for initializing various parameters related to the advantageous section.

First, specification example 1 will be described. When shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section (or when the non-advantageous section is newly set as the game section), the main CPU 101 first clears all the parameters related to the advantageous section (SE101). In this process, parameters used for control during the advantageous section (related to the advantageous section), such as the type of payout state, the number of CZ games, the number of AT games, the counter for the number of advantageous section games, and the counter for the number of payouts in the advantageous section, are used. All are initialized. Next, the main CPU 101 shifts the gaming section to the non-advantageous section (SE102), and ends the processing at the end of the advantageous section.

That is, in the specification example 1, since the parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized before the transition to the non-advantageous section, it is impossible to recognize what kind of situation was in the advantageous section before the transition when shifting to the non-advantageous section. .. Therefore, in the non-advantageous section, for example, the lottery process such as the advantageous section transition lottery is uniformly performed regardless of the situation of the advantageous section before the transition. However, as already described, the processing content may be branched depending on the type of game state.

On the other hand, in the specification example 2, since the parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized after the transition to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to recognize what kind of situation was in the advantageous section before the transition when shifting to the non-advantageous section. There is. As a result, in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to perform processing according to the situation of the advantageous section before the transition. An example is shown below.

When transitioning from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section (or when a non-advantageous section is newly set as a game section), first, the main CPU 101 refers to the parameters related to the advantageous section and refers to the non-advantageous section of the transition destination. The state is determined (SE201). Next, the main CPU 101 shifts the gaming section to the non-advantageous section (SE202). Next, the main CPU 101 clears all the parameters related to the advantageous section (SE203), and ends the processing at the end of the advantageous section.

Subsequently, an example of transition control of a non-advantageous section using the above specification example 2 will be described. In the following, transition control examples 1 to 3 will be described as an example. Further, the main point of the above specification example 2 is that when the transition to the non-advantageous section is performed, some decision can be made according to the situation in the advantageous section before the transition to the non-advantageous section before the parameters related to the advantageous section are initialized. However, the content is not limited to the content shown in the flowchart of the above specification example 2.

(Transition control example 1)
For example, as described above, as the CZ state, a normal CZ and a higher CZ having different expectations for transition to the AT state are provided. Further, regarding the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section A and the non-advantageous section B are provided so that at least which section can be recognized. The non-advantageous section A and the non-advantageous section B can be set so that at least the probabilities that the advantageous section start conditions are satisfied have the same probability, or they can be set to have different probabilities.

Then, when the advantageous section end condition (non-advantageous section start condition) is satisfied in the advantageous section, it is determined whether to shift to the non-advantageous section A or the non-advantageous section B, and the state of the determined non-advantageous section is reached. Migrate. It should be noted that which non-advantageous section to shift to is determined by the probability according to the situation of the advantageous section before the transition to the non-advantageous section. For example, when the advantageous section before the transition is an advantageous section (AT), the non-advantageous section A is determined with a probability of 50%, and the non-advantageous section B is determined with a probability of 50%. Further, for example, when the advantageous section before the transition is an advantageous section (ceiling AT), the non-advantageous section A is determined with a probability of 25%, and the non-advantageous section B is determined with a probability of 75%. Further, for example, when the advantageous section before the transition is the first cycle and the second cycle of the advantageous section (normal), the non-advantageous section A is determined with a probability of 80%, and the non-advantageous section has a probability of 20%. Section B is determined. Further, for example, when the advantageous section before the transition is the third cycle and the fourth cycle of the advantageous section (normal), the non-advantageous section A is determined with a probability of 20%, and the non-advantageous section has a probability of 80%. Section B is determined. Further, for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter in the advantageous section before the transition is "500" or less, the non-advantageous section A is determined with a probability of 80%, and the non-advantageous section has a probability of 20%. B is determined. Further, for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter in the advantageous section before the transition exceeds "500", the non-advantageous section B is determined with a probability of 100%. It should be noted that these are merely examples, and it is possible to determine whether to shift to one of them with a probability set appropriately by combining them or referring to various parameters related to the advantageous sections other than these as appropriate.

Then, when shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section A, when the non-advantageous section A is set to the CZ transition confirmed state, the advantageous section of the transition destination is controlled to be the advantageous section (normal CZ), and the non-advantageous section A is set. When the section A is the CZ state itself, the CZ state is controlled to be the normal CZ. On the other hand, when shifting from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section B, when the non-advantageous section B is in the CZ transition confirmed state, the advantageous section of the transition destination is controlled to be the advantageous section (upper CZ), which is non-advantageous. When the section B is the CZ state itself, the CZ state is controlled to be the upper CZ. That is, it is possible to control so that the advantage of the CZ state is determined according to the type of the shifted non-advantageous section.

In addition, when the advantageous section end condition (non-advantageous section start condition) is satisfied in the advantageous section, it is determined whether to shift to the non-advantageous section A or the non-advantageous section B, and the precursor period is set (that is,). , Shift to the advantageous section (end precursor)), after the game of the precursor period is performed, shift to the state of the determined non-advantageous section, and in the precursor period, depending on the type of the non-advantageous section , An effect suggesting the advantage of the CZ state may be performed. For example, when the non-advantageous section of the transition destination is determined to be the non-advantageous section B and becomes the precursor period, the CZ is higher than when the non-advantageous section of the transition destination is determined to be the non-advantageous section A and becomes the precursor period. It suffices to facilitate the production that suggests that the advantage of the state is high. In this way, even in the case of shifting to the CZ state via the non-advantageous section, it is possible to appropriately suggest the advantage of the CZ state during the advantageous section before the transition to the non-advantageous section.

(Transition control example 2)
As described above, the advantageous section (normal) (that is, the normal state) is basically a disadvantageous state for the player, especially in terms of the increase / decrease in the game value, and the advantageous section (AT) (or the advantageous section (or the advantageous state). Ceiling AT)) (ie, a special state) is basically an advantageous state for the player. Here, if the non-advantageous section is configured as the CZ transition confirmed state or the CZ state itself, the CZ state (that is, the specific state) is at least a state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state. In comparison of the three states, the special state and the non-advantageous section, the player's advantage is set higher in the order of the normal state, the non-advantageous section, and the special state.

Then, in the transition control 2, in consideration of this point, when the initialization condition such as the setting change is satisfied, if the advantageous section before the setting change is in a special state, it shifts to the non-advantageous section, while before the setting change. If the advantageous section is in the normal state, control is performed so as not to shift to the non-advantageous section. If various limit processes are executed, or if a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the execution of various limit processes, the non-advantageous section should be shifted regardless of the type of advantageous section. Just do it. That is, only when the initialization condition such as the setting change is satisfied, if the state before the setting change is advantageous to the player, it is terminated, and if it is disadvantageous, it is continued. May be good.

Further, as a condition for performing such control, an additional condition may be provided. For example, if the advantageous section before the setting change is in the normal state and the value of the advantageous section game number counter in the advantageous section is "500" or less, it is prevented from shifting to the non-advantageous section, and in other cases, it is prevented. It may be shifted to a non-advantageous section.

As an example of specific control, for example, in SE201 of the specification example 2 of FIG. 245, it is determined whether or not the start of the processing at the end of the advantageous section is due to the establishment of the initialization condition such as the setting change. However, when it is determined that the initialization condition such as the setting change is satisfied, it is further determined whether or not the advantageous section before the setting change is in the normal state, and when it is determined that it is in the normal state, at least By terminating the processing at the end of the advantageous section without performing the processing of S-E202 and S-E203, control can be performed so that the normal state is continued.

(Transition control example 3)
As described above, in this example, in the non-advantageous section, MAP, which is a combination of various probabilities, can be set for the transition probability information and the end probability information in the advantageous section to be transferred. Then, in this transition control example 3, when this MAP is set, the set MAP is changed according to the trigger (in other words, the state before the transition to the non-advantageous section) that causes the transition to the non-advantageous section. I am trying to make it possible.

For example, when the advantageous section ends and shifts to the non-advantageous section, the MAP referred to in the new advantageous section transitioning from the non-advantageous section shall be determined. Alternatively, when transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, the MAP referred to in the advantageous section shall be determined. At that time, the parameters related to the advantageous section can be referred to.

For example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter in the advantageous section before the transition to the non-advantageous section is "1500" or more, or when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter is "2400" or more, It is determined that the advantageous section has been completed by executing various limit processes. Further, for example, when the advantageous section before the transition to the non-advantageous section is an advantageous section (precursor of end), it is determined that the advantageous section has been completed by winning the lottery to end the advantageous section. Further, for example, when such a parameter is initialized by a setting change (or, a parameter indicating that the setting has been changed may be stored at the time of setting change), an initial setting change or the like may be stored. It is determined that the advantageous section has been completed by the establishment of the conversion condition.

Then, when it is determined that the advantageous section has been completed by executing various limit processing or winning the advantageous section end lottery, the transition probability information and the end probability information (either of them may be used) or one of them. When the MAP in which (possibly present) is relatively advantageous is determined and it is determined that the advantageous section is terminated due to the establishment of initialization conditions such as setting change, the transition probability information and the end probability information (both) MAPs that are relatively disadvantageous (which may or may be either) are determined. The transition probability information and the end probability information (which may be both or either one) specified by the determined MAP are the CZ state and the first to fourth cycles as described above. It may determine the AT winning probability and the non-advantageous section transition probability for each, or at least determine only the AT winning probability in the CZ state, or AT throughout the first to fourth cycles. It may determine the winning probability and the non-advantageous section transition probability (either of them may be used or either of them may be used). Further, since the MAP can be configured as having various variations as described above, the MAP is determined when it is determined that the advantageous section has been completed by at least executing various limit processing or winning the advantageous section end lottery. However, any MAP configuration can be adopted as long as it is advantageous as compared with the MAP determined when it is determined that the advantageous section is terminated due to the establishment of the initialization condition such as the setting change.

(Specification example 1 for explaining the stay ratio in each state)
Next, in this example, the stay ratio and the like in each state when the non-advantageous section is set to the CZ transition confirmed state will be described with reference to Specification Example 1. Here, the average number of games that can be played per 50 medals is "50 games", the winning probability of AT is "1/480", and the net increase in the number of games per game during AT is "2.4 cards / game". The average number of games acquired per AT is "480", the payout rate is "100%", and the average number of games per AT is "480 / 2.4 = 200 games". The average number of games stayed per non-advantageous section (inside the general bonus) is "5 games".

It should be noted that the value of the winning probability of AT is a statistical winning probability obtained by synthesizing all the winnings such as the winning via CZ and the winning not via CZ. Further, "per AT" does not mean per AT set, but refers to a series of increasing sections from the start of AT (the start of the increasing state) to the end of AT and the transition to the non-advantageous section. In addition, a non-increasing section (a section in which medals are maintained at the current level or a section in which medals decrease) may occur in the middle of the increasing section.

In this case, the design value (average value statistically obtained by simulation) of the number of staying games in each state is as follows.
-Average number of games stayed (1) Non-advantageous section: 5 games on average (2) Advantageous section (CZ) + advantageous section (normal): 475 games on average (3) Advantageous section (AT): 200 games on average

Assuming that the number of medals decreases on average by one per game, (1) non-advantageous section and (2) advantageous section (CZ) + advantageous section (normal) are totaled and 480 games are digested to obtain 480 medals. It is a cycle of consuming, (3) recovering 480 medals in 200 games in the advantageous section (AT), and then shifting to the non-advantageous section. The total number of games per cycle is 5 + 475 + 200 = 680 games. Of course, there are cases where the non-advantageous section shifts to CZ and the AT is immediately won at the CZ, and there are cases where the transition occurs to the advantageous section (AT) without going through the advantageous section (normal), but statistically On average, the average number of staying games is as described above. Also, the average of 5 games in the non-advantageous section does not mean that the transition probability from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section is 1/5, but the non-advantageous section → advantageous section (CZ) and the advantageous section (normal) → non-advantageous section. It is a value calculated statistically including the case where the state transitions through the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section a plurality of times before shifting to the advantageous section (AT).

This value is expressed as a ratio (ratio) as follows. The notation is a value rounded to the third decimal place.
・ Average stay ratio (1) Non-advantageous section: Approximately 0.74% (= 5 ÷ 680)
(2) Advantageous section (CZ) + Advantageous section (normal): Approximately 69.85% (= 475 ÷ 680)
(3) Advantageous section (AT): Approximately 29.41% (= 200/680)

In this way, the stay ratio in the non-advantageous section is extremely low. In addition, the percentage of stays in advantageous sections is extremely high (about 99% in total). Therefore, there is no limit to the ratio of the advantageous section ratio in the operation rules for gaming machines, and the ratio of the instructed accessory (the ratio of the payout during bonus operation and the payout during AT to the total payout) satisfies the value specified in the operation rule. It is designed as a specification according to the rule (for example, less than 70%).

In terms of production, the non-advantageous section is designed to perform effects related to the CZ standby screen and the previous AT, and continuous production dedicated to the non-advantageous section (AT or CZ winning notification performed over multiple games). It is desirable to have an appropriate production composition that matches the stay ratio, without providing production).

In addition, by making the section staying in the non-advantageous section extremely short as described above, the section staying in the advantageous section where AT-related processing can be performed under various conditions becomes longer than the non-advantageous section, and points are given or the ceiling is used. The percentage of players who can play while aiming for AT winnings will increase, and the variety and interest of games can be increased compared to AT machines that stay in non-advantageous sections for a long time. Further, since the non-advantageous section also functions as a gaming state linked to the advantageous section (CZ), it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest during the non-advantageous section.

In addition, the concept of "time to get rid of" has become widespread among players these days. "At the time of disappointment" is to find out when the so-called capture site has the lowest expected value in the progress of the game, that is, when the disadvantageous condition for the player is, by collecting information from the hall data and the capture magazine. As a result, players are increasingly using smartphones, tablets, etc. to confirm when the model they are playing is "dumb" and then end the game in that state. Operation rule that after the advantageous section (AT), it is necessary to shift to the non-advantageous section, and when shifting from the advantageous section (AT) to the non-advantageous section, the lamp of the advantageous section that is lit must be turned off. In addition, in the case of a model in which the non-advantageous section is "at the time of failure", the player who confirms that the advantageous section lamp is turned off immediately after the end of the advantageous section (AT) often stops the game. In such a situation, the players who have won the game medals at the AT are less likely to continue hitting, giving the visitor the impression that there are not many medals on the entire island of the game machine, further reducing the motivation to play. There was a vicious cycle of ending up.

In the specifications described so far, even if the section shifts from the advantageous section (AT) to the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section is in the CZ or CZ transition confirmed state, so that the transition time to the non-advantageous section may be the "time of failure". No. In addition, even if the CZ after the non-advantageous section results in an AT non-winning, it has already been shifted to the advantageous section, and it is possible to set a mode in which the hit is close at the start of the advantageous section. The player cannot specify the "time of disappointment". As a result, the specifications are such that the player who has won the medal at AT can be motivated to continue playing.

(Specification example 2 for explaining the stay ratio in each state)
The difference from the above-mentioned specification example 1 is that the net increase in the number of sheets during AT is as high as 8. Here, the average number of games that can be played per 50 medals is set to "50 games", the winning probability of AT is set to "1/480", and the net increase in the number of games per game during AT is set to "8 / game". The average number of games obtained per AT is "480", the payout rate is "100%", the average number of games per AT is "480 ÷ 8 = 60 games", and the normal (inside the general bonus) The average number of games stayed per non-advantageous section (inside) is "5 games".

In this case, the above-mentioned design values and the like are as follows.
-Average number of staying games (1) Non-advantageous section: Average 5 games (2) Advantageous section (CZ) + Advantageous section (normal): Average 475 games (3) Advantageous section (AT): Average 60 games = 1 cycle: 540 Game = 5 + 475 + 60
・ Average stay ratio (1) Non-advantageous section: Approximately 0.93% (= 5 ÷ 540)
(2) Advantageous section (CZ) + Advantageous section (normal): Approximately 87.86% (= 475 ÷ 540)
(3) Advantageous section (AT): Approximately 11.11% (= 60 ÷ 540)

As described above, in the specification example 2, the stay ratio in the advantageous section (AT) is lowered as compared with the specification example 1, and the stay ratio in other states is increased by that amount. Since the total ratio of non-advantageous sections, advantageous sections (CZ), and advantageous sections (normal), where medals are decreasing, is close to 90% of the total game, various ATs are used to suppress the decline in interest in this section. By increasing the staying ratio of the advantageous section where the related processing is allowed and increasing the interest of the non-advantageous section as the CZ transition confirmed state, it is possible to achieve the effect of suppressing the reduction of the player's willingness to play.

(About the end sign and the number of games in the non-advantageous section)
The number of games in the advantageous section (precursor of the end) and the non-advantageous section will be described with an example. The advantageous section (end sign) substantially functions as a CZ confirmation sign, and during this period, an expectation effect such as a so-called sign effect is performed to expect a CZ win. If it is too long, it gives the player the impression that it has been delayed. Therefore, it is desirable to set the number of games that can be digested in a few minutes, for example, within 32 games, as the number of games in the precursory period. Then, at the end of the advantageous section (precursor of the end), an effect of notifying the winning of the CZ may be performed, and in the non-advantageous section, an effect indicating that the CZ transition is confirmed may be performed. ..

In addition, since the number of medals is still reduced in the non-advantageous section even though the CZ transition is confirmed, it is desirable that the number of staying games is as short as possible in the non-advantageous section. This is because the player feels uncomfortable if the number of medals is significantly reduced from the appearance of the CZ hit to the start of the CZ. For example, it is preferable to average about 3 games until the start of CZ, that is, the transition to the advantageous section, and at least the number of games in the non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) is shorter than the number of games set as the advantageous section (precursor of end). It is desirable to be a thing.

(About the direct hit AT probability in the advantageous section and the AT winning probability in the non-advantageous section)
The direct hit AT probability in the advantageous section and the AT winning determination in the non-advantageous section will be described with an example. Here, the direct hit AT refers to the probability of hitting the AT (becomes a direct hit to the AT) without going through the CZ. It should be noted that the precursory period (advantageous section (AT precursor)) may or may not be set before the start of AT. Further, here, it is assumed that the upper CZ is a definite CZ, and it is not considered that the higher CZ does not win the AT. Further, here, it is not considered that the fixed CZ winning probability and the direct hit AT probability fluctuate according to the cycle and the number of games in the advantageous section.

-Winning probability in advantageous section (normal) (1) Normal CZ winning probability: 1/250
(2) AT winning ratio in normal CZ: 40%
(3) AT winning probability via normal CZ: 1/625 (= 1/250 x 40%)
(4) Confirmed CZ winning probability: 1/2000
(5) Direct hit AT probability: 1/8192
(6) Synthetic AT winning probability: 1/450

Here, the "normal CZ winning probability" is a design value including both the CZ winning via the non-advantageous section (described later) and the case where the CZ is obtained while the advantageous section is continued without passing through the non-advantageous section. Is. Any CZ winning route may be adopted for the model, such as a lottery based on the internal winning combination, a CZ lottery when the number of periodic games in the advantageous section is reached, and a lottery according to the points in the advantageous section. It is a value obtained by synthesizing the winning probabilities of normal CZ from all the winning triggers of. Since it is relatively easy to win, we will usually aim for CZ in the advantageous section (normal).

Further, the "AT winning ratio in the normal CZ" is a percentage indicating the ratio of the AT winning in the normal CZ. The success of the normal CZ (whether or not to win the AT) may be determined by drawing at the start of the normal CZ or at the time of entering the normal CZ, or by referring to the internal winning combination in the normal CZ or the stopped symbol combination. Also, various methods described above can be appropriately adopted. Normally, CZ is the main route of the AT winning, which accounts for a large proportion of the AT winning in the entire gaming machine (the AT hitting method that the player most often encounters). If this success rate is too low, it becomes difficult for the player to understand what to expect, so it is desirable to set the degree of expectation in the range of about 20% to 80%. Further, the "AT winning probability via the normal CZ" is the probability that the AT will occur via the normal CZ calculated from the "normal CZ winning probability" and the "AT winning ratio in the normal CZ".

Further, the "determined CZ winning probability" is the probability that the higher-ranking CZ whose AT is determined at the time of transition to the CZ will win. This probability can be said to be one of the AT winning probabilities. Apparently, the same effect as that of the normal CZ may be performed to have a case of being a definite CZ internally, or the definite CZ may be clearly notified as a definite CZ as an effect different from the normal CZ.
In addition, during the final CZ, if the player is simply waiting for the AT, the direct hit AT win may simply be waited for and the interest may be reduced. It is preferable to perform a lottery to increase the number of AT games, a lottery to increase the number of initial AT stocks, a lottery to increase the AT continuation rate, and other judgments and decisions to extend or facilitate the extension of AT).

Further, the "direct hit AT probability" is the probability of winning an AT without going through any CZ or non-advantageous section. Compared to the case of passing through CZ, AT is started immediately after winning the AT or AT is started after the end of the precursor, so CZ precursor → CZ → AT (or CZ precursor → CZ → AT precursor → AT), etc. Compared to winning via CZ, which can pull (sustain) the sense of expectation while digesting the number of games to some extent in multiple stages until AT starts, AT precursor → AT etc. The period during which expectations can be drawn before the start of AT is shortened. Here, if the AT precursor is made extremely long (for example, 100 games), it seems that the sustainability of the expectation will be solved, but if the precursor game is too long, the expectation will continue to be fueled endlessly. A situation arises in which it is difficult to hit, which in turn causes annoyance to the player. Therefore, if this AT direct hit is used as the main route for the AT win, there is a sense of expectation in the advantageous section (normal) that occupies most of the game, compared to the case where the main route for the AT win is usually via CZ. The number of games (precursor or CZ) that can be played is shortened. Therefore, in this specification example, it is designed with a low probability of 1/8192 and has a premium winning pattern. Further, the setting 1 is 1/8192, but if the setting is 6, a setting difference such as 2048 may be provided. In this way, when an AT occurs on a rare route (an AT winning route that is difficult for the player to encounter), the player can be given the impression that it is an unexpected hit, and that alone can enhance the interest of the game. However, this may also make it possible to give fun such as setting guessing.

-AT winning probability of non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state) (1) Normal CZ winning probability: 1/3
(2) AT winning ratio in normal CZ: 40%
(3) Confirmed CZ winning probability: 1/50
(4) Direct hit AT probability: 1/200

The non-advantageous section is a state in which the transition to CZ or higher is confirmed (strictly speaking, the transition to CZ or higher is confirmed), although it is substantially in the CZ transition confirmed state. AT may start without going through. The phrase "CZ transition confirmed state" used in the explanation so far is not intended to completely exclude the transition to AT unless it goes against the purpose of the invention, and a privilege of at least CZ value is guaranteed. It is the intention of being in a state of being done.

Since the average number of games staying in one non-advantageous section is very short, for example, about 2.79 games, even if the direct hit AT probability is set high, the normal CZ wins before that and the non-advantageous section ends. There is no problem because the ratio of doing is high. For example, if you win an internal winning role such as a strong cherry (for example, 1/400) or a strong chance (for example, 1/400) in a non-advantageous section, you can draw a so-called rare role in this section even if it is a short section such as a direct hit AT confirmation. The benefits may be great, and the range of gameplay may be expanded.

(About the connection of production when shifting from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section)
As described above, it is desirable that a series of effects are performed in the advantageous section (precursor of the end) or the advantageous section (AT) and the subsequent non-advantageous section (CZ transition confirmed state). Here, an example of a production that can be adopted as a series of productions will be further illustrated. In the following description, "before the end of the advantageous section" refers to both the advantageous section (precursor of the end) and the advantageous section (AT).

(1) Production example 1: A related production is executed before the end of the advantageous section and in the non-advantageous section immediately after the end.
(2) Production example 2: A related production is executed in the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section (CZ) immediately after the non-advantageous section.
(3) Effect example 3: A related effect is executed in the non-advantageous section before the end of the advantageous section, the non-advantageous section immediately after the end, and the advantageous section (CZ) immediately after that.

Here, executing a series of effects means displaying the same character, the same image, the same background image, the same stage image, etc. (one of them or a plurality of them). A related image that is not the same may be displayed, the same BGM or a related BGM may be played, or the lamp pattern may be the same or related, or an image display device may be used. When there are a plurality of (for example, the display device 11 and the sub display device 18), the auxiliary image display device (for example, the sub display device 18) continues to display a display suggesting that the state is in a series. But it may be. The effect execution means and the effect content are not limited to these examples, and an effect that can suggest to the player that the player is in a series of gaming states (at least that the advantageous state continues to some extent) can be presented through a plurality of gaming states. It does not have to be exactly the same in the front and back states as long as it is generated.

(About game characteristics using advantageous section lamps)
In the advantageous section (end sign), raise the expectation of whether or not the transition to the non-advantageous section is won by continuous production or precursor effect, and at the timing when the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (end sign) becomes 0. At the same time, the winning notification effect of the non-advantageous section transition is performed, and if a success pattern is displayed in the effect, the process shifts to the non-advantageous section and the transition to the CZ is confirmed. Here, when the advantageous section lamp is lit in the advantageous section (precursor of end), the stop operation (stop operation to stop the last reel in rotation) which is the third stop of the game in which the advantageous section ends is performed. When the stop button is released, the advantageous section lamp turns off.

Therefore, an effect pattern is provided in which the advantageous section lamp is turned off before the winning result is notified in the winning notification effect of the transition to the non-advantageous section, and the image display device is developed by focusing on the advantageous section lamp. It may be possible to create the enjoyment of being able to see the state transition before the result is obtained in the production. Specifically, the winning notification effect will end after the next game of the game in which the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (precursor of the end) becomes 0 (the advantageous section lamp turns off after the third stop of this game). By executing the effect, it is possible to realize a game-like property in which the advantageous section lamp is turned off while the winning notification effect is progressing over a plurality of games.

Alternatively, in a game in which the number of remaining games in the advantageous section (precursor of the end) becomes 0 (the advantageous section lamp turns off after the third stop of this game), the winning notification effect of completing one game is executed, or the winning notification effect over a plurality of games is executed. If the player hits at a normal progress speed, such as when the final game of the notification effect is executed and the time scale of the effect is 15 seconds after the start of the game until the winning result is known, it is approximately 4.1 per game. Since it is about 2 to 5 seconds, the player grasps that the transition to the non-advantageous section is confirmed by turning off the advantageous section lamp (successful production) before the winning notification is executed by video or the like. A specification may be provided in which a possible effect pattern is provided as at least one of the winning notification effect patterns. With such specifications, advanced users who know that the state transition can be grasped by turning off the advantageous section lamp will be able to detect the state transition in a way that is difficult for beginners to notice, and will be able to immerse themselves in a sense of superiority. ..

It is more effective to make the advantageous section lamp more conspicuous than the 7-segment LED that notifies the credit and the number of bets because it becomes easier for the player to pay attention to the advantageous section lamp. For example, the LED of the advantageous section lamp may be made to emit light with a higher brightness than the 7-segment LED that notifies the credit or the number of bets, or the advantageous section lamp may be arranged near the center in the left-right direction of the housing to the player's line of sight. It may be easy to enter, or it may be decorated (for example, with a conspicuous color) around the advantageous section lamp so as to be conspicuous.

On the other hand, if there is only an effect pattern in which the advantageous section lamp is turned off during the winning notification effect as described above, if the advantageous section lamp continues to be lit without being turned off, it is not possible to shift to the non-advantageous section. Since it is confirmed that the winning is won, the advantageous section lamp can be turned off during the winning notification effect (depending on the stop operation timing), and there is also a pattern in which the advantageous section lamp does not turn off during the winning notification effect. It is desirable to have them together.

Further, when a failure result is displayed in the winning notification effect in the game in which the advantageous section lamp is turned off, the transition to the non-advantageous section may be notified as a revival effect may occur in the next game. Further, when such a revival effect is provided, the revival effect may not occur if the advantageous section lamp is lit when the failure result is displayed in the winning notification effect.

Here, on the premise of the specification that the advantageous section lamp does not light up until the start of the increasing section, that is, the advantageous section (AT), the advantageous section lamp becomes the advantageous section (precursor of the end) when the advantageous section lamp is not lit in the first place, and the winning notification effect is executed. If this is the case, there is no possibility that the player will recognize the transition to the non-advantageous section before the result display in the production by turning on / off the advantageous section lamp, so that the advantageous section lamp is in the off state. Resurrection effects can be performed with or without it. In this way, it is desirable that the mode of the precursory effect is determined by referring to whether the advantageous section lamp is lit or not lit even in the advantageous section (precursor of the end). I can say.

(About signal output from the external terminal board)
When the non-advantageous section is a specification in which CZ is set, and the non-advantageous section is a specification in which a CZ transition confirmed state (a CZ or higher transition confirmed state may be included). A predetermined signal may be output from the external terminal plate (for example, the external centralized terminal plate 47) when the non-advantageous section is started or when the advantageous section ends. As a result, the hall side can grasp the number of occurrences of the non-advantageous section, and it becomes easy to grasp whether or not the gaming machine has been hit. In addition, when the number of hamari games of the game machine (the number of games digested by non-winning in AT or CZ) is displayed on the so-called data display, the data display is the number of hamari games when the signal is received. May be a signal that can be reset to 0 games. This allows the player to infer from the data display how much the non-advantageous section has won in the past.

In the case of a medalless gaming machine that does not use game media (medals or gaming balls) and only plays with game value (credits), a non-advantageous section occurs in the credit lending device (sand) instead of the external terminal board. It may be possible to output a signal to the effect (or generate) to transmit the occurrence of the non-advantageous section to the hall computer via the sand. In addition, the signal is not transmitted when a setting change, ram clear, or initialization due to a ram abnormality occurs, and a non-advantageous section occurs as CZ (or CZ transition confirmed state) while the normal game is in progress. The signal may be output only in the case. However, the signal may be output even when a non-advantageous section occurs due to a setting change, ram clearing, or initialization due to a ram abnormality, so that the exact number of occurrences of the non-advantageous section can be grasped on the hall side.

(When the gaming machine has a gaming history viewing function)
If there is a game history viewing function that displays the number of ATs and CZs won in the past, the number of games up to the winning, etc. on the information providing screen for players of the gaming machine, the information providing screen will be displayed to the non-advantageous section. It may also be displayed that a migration has occurred.

(Invention 1 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When the transition from the advantageous section to the advantageous section and when the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, it is possible to control the specific state (for example, the CZ state) in which the expectation of the transition to the special state is higher than that of the normal state. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest.

In the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section start condition is satisfied with a high probability, a precursory period is set when transitioning from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, and it may be possible to suggest a transition to a specific state during the precursory period. .. As a result, even when the transition to the specific state is performed via the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suggest the transition to the specific state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in the advantageous section, a precursor period may be set even when a specific condition is satisfied and the transition to the specific state is made, and it may be possible to suggest the advantage of the transition specific state during the precursor period. As a result, it is possible to appropriately show the player the degree of expectation of the special state transition in both cases of transitioning to the specific state via the non-advantageous section and transitioning to the specific state without passing through the non-advantageous section. It will be possible.

Further, when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, it is always controlled to the specific state, and it may be possible to suggest that the state is in the preparation state of the specific state during the non-advantageous section. As a result, the transition to the specific state is confirmed by the transition to the non-advantageous section, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play and the interest in the game, and the transition to the specific state is achieved via the non-advantageous section. It is possible to show the transition in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, when the special state ends, it is before the predetermined value (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter) reaches the specified value (for example, "1500" or more), but the specific value (for example, "1000" or more). If it is, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section, and the predetermined value may be initialized in any case of shifting to the non-advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which a game is performed in a state where a predetermined value is close to a specified value in an advantageous section. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

(Invention 2 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When the advantageous section can be controlled to a specific state (for example, CZ state) in which the expectation of transition to the special state is higher than that of the normal state and the transition from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is performed, a predetermined precursor period (for example, an advantageous section (end precursor)). )) Is set, and the specific state display (for example, the display during the CZ state) performed in the specific state can be continued even in a predetermined period after the transition to the advantageous section. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest.

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the special state in the specific state, it shifts to the advantageous section and the specific precursor period (for example, the advantageous section (AT precursor)) is set, and the specific state is displayed. During the section, a predetermined period during which the specific state display continues may be set according to the set specific precursor period. As a result, the non-advantageous section is set to a specific state, and even when the specific state display is performed over the advantageous section, it is possible to perform the effect in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

(Invention 3 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When the transition from the advantageous section to the advantageous section and when the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, it is possible to control the specific state (for example, the CZ state) in which the expectation of the transition to the special state is higher than that of the normal state. Further, as the advantageous section end condition, a predetermined value (for example, a value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) which is updated as the game progresses in the advantageous section has become a specified value, and It includes not only that the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, but also that the special state is terminated. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest.

In the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section start condition is satisfied with a high probability, a precursory period is set when transitioning from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, and it may be possible to suggest a transition to a specific state during the precursory period. .. As a result, even when the transition to the specific state is performed via the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suggest the transition to the specific state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in the advantageous section, a precursor period may be set even when a specific condition is satisfied and the transition to the specific state is made, and it may be possible to suggest the advantage of the transition specific state during the precursor period. As a result, it is possible to appropriately show the player the degree of expectation of the special state transition in both cases of transitioning to the specific state via the non-advantageous section and transitioning to the specific state without passing through the non-advantageous section. It will be possible.

Further, the predetermined value may be initialized in any case of transition to the non-advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which a game is performed in a state where a predetermined value is close to a specified value in an advantageous section. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

(Invention 4 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When shifting from an advantageous section to an advantageous section, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a CZ state) in which the expectation of a special state transition is higher than that of a normal state, and a precursory period (for example) until the transition from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section is made. , Advantageous section (precursor of end)) and the subsequent non-advantageous section, a series of effects are performed, and it is possible to suggest the type of the specific state determined when transitioning from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. Further, even when shifting to a specific state via a non-advantageous section, it is possible to suggest the advantage of the specific state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

It should be noted that the precursory period from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section (end precursor)), the subsequent non-advantageous section and the specific period of the subsequent advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section (CZ via the non-advantageous section)). In the precursor)), a series of effects may be performed, and it may be possible to suggest the type of the specific state determined when the game for a specific period is performed. This also makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest in the game even when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. Further, even when shifting to a specific state via a non-advantageous section, it is possible to suggest the advantage of the specific state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

(Invention 5 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When the transition from the advantageous section to the advantageous section and when the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, it is possible to control the specific state (for example, the CZ state) in which the expectation of the transition to the special state is higher than the normal state, and the specific condition is set. When it is established, if the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section is a specific value (for example, "500" or less), the transition to the special state is confirmed as the special specific state. May become. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. In addition, when shifting to a specific state without going through a non-advantageous section, it may be more advantageous than when shifting to a specific state via a non-advantageous section, so when the advantageous section is maintained. It is also possible to raise the expectations of the players.

When shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, it is always controlled to a specific state, and during the non-advantageous section, a suggestion effect (for example, CZ preparation effect) suggesting that the state is in the preparation state of the specific state is provided. Although it is performed, the suggestion effect may be performed even when a specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section and the state shifts to a specific state. As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the transition to the specific state is via a non-advantageous section, and the player feels uncomfortable to shift to the specific state while maintaining a sense of expectation. Can be shown in a manner that does not give.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, the specific state of transition via the non-advantageous section may be performed in the non-advantageous section. As a result, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, the specific state performed in the non-advantageous section can be different from the specific state performed in the advantageous section, for example, in terms of the degree of expectation and the lottery method, so that the playability is further improved. It can be diverse.

In addition, it may be possible to perform section notification that can recognize which section is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in grasping the state of the player by making the notification more diverse.

(Invention 6 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When shifting from an advantageous section to an advantageous section, or when a specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, CZ state) in which the expectation of a special state transition is higher than that of the normal state, and the non-advantageous section The same effect may be performed during the specific state regardless of whether the transition from the advantageous section to the advantageous section or the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. In addition, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the transition to the specific state is via a non-advantageous section.

Further, in the gaming machine of this example, the specific state of transition via the non-advantageous section may be performed in the non-advantageous section. As a result, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, the specific state performed in the non-advantageous section can be different from the specific state performed in the advantageous section, for example, in terms of the degree of expectation and the lottery method, so that the playability is further improved. It can be diverse.

In addition, it may be possible to perform section notification that can recognize which section is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section. Further, the section notification may not be started until the first special state is reached after the transition to the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in grasping the state of the player by making the notification more diverse.

(Invention 7 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to control the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section to a specific state (for example, CZ state) in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than the normal state for a predetermined period. , In the advantageous section, when the game is played for a specific period without being controlled by the special state, a predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout). It is possible to control the special special state (for example, the ceiling AT state) until the value of the number counter becomes a specified value and shifts to the non-advantageous section. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. In particular, when an advantageous state such as a special special state is terminated, such an action effect becomes more remarkable.

In the special special state, a specific effect (for example, an effect during the special AT) is performed according to the remaining game period until the predetermined value reaches the specified value, and in the non-advantageous section shifted after the end of the special special state. It may be possible to perform an effect related to the specified effect performed. As a result, even when shifting from the special special state to the specific state via the non-advantageous section, it is possible to perform a series of effects in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, it is possible to control to a specific state even when a specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, and when the specific condition is controlled according to the transition to the non-advantageous section, the specific condition is set during the advantageous section. The specific state may be more advantageous than the case where it is established and controlled to the specific state. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest due to the forced termination of the advantageous section. In particular, when an advantageous state such as a special special state is terminated, such an action effect becomes more remarkable.

(Invention 8 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to control the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section to a specific state (for example, CZ state) in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than the normal state for a predetermined period. , Specific control controlled according to the predetermined value (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section in the special state. In the state, it is possible to perform a special display different from the normal state display (for example, the normal state display) and the specific state display (for example, the CZ state display). As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. Further, even when the state shifts from the special state to the specific state via the non-advantageous section, it is possible to perform a series of effects in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, when shifting from the specific state in which the special display is performed to the special state, a display indicating that the special state has resumed or continued may be performed when the transition to the special state is performed. As a result, the above-mentioned effects become more remarkable.

(Invention 9 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to control the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section to a specific state (for example, CZ state) in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than the normal state for a predetermined period. , When transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, the probability of establishing the advantageous section end condition for each predetermined cycle (for example, the first to fourth cycles) in the advantageous section is determined, and the determined advantageous section end condition is determined. The end probability information of one of a plurality of end probability information (for example, MAP) in which at least a part of the probability of establishment of is different is determined. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. Further, since it is possible to change the advantageous section end probability (that is, the non-advantageous section transition probability and the specific state transition probability) for each predetermined cycle, it is possible to further diversify the game playability.

In the normal state, it is assumed that whether or not to control the special state is determined until the game of a predetermined cycle is performed a specific number of times (for example, three times), and as the game progresses in the advantageous section. The predetermined value to be updated (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) may be initialized in any case of transition to the non-advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which a special state is started when a predetermined value is close to a specified value in an advantageous section. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the advantageous section, it may be possible to shift to the non-advantageous section even when the special state ends. As a result, the above-mentioned effects become more remarkable.

(Invention 10 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, when the non-advantageous section is the first gaming state (for example, inside the general middle bonus) which is the carry-over state of the bonus combination, it is advantageous for the transition to the special state (for example, AT state). On the other hand, if the non-advantageous section is in the second gaming state (for example, in the general middle bonus non-internal), the special decision can be made. do not. Then, when the setting is changed, it is controlled to the second gaming state of the non-advantageous section, and the probability that the advantageous section is started in the non-advantageous section is higher than the probability that the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination. do. That is, when the non-advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section due to the setting change, the non-advantageous section is unlikely to be advantageous to the player, but when the non-advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section regardless of the setting change, the non-advantageous section becomes the player. Make it easy to be advantageous to. As a result, even when the predetermined initialization conditions are satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, the player's willingness to play and the interest in the game are suppressed from being lowered, and the game is properly operated at the game store. be able to.

In addition, when the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination in the second gaming state which is the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section may be maintained. That is, even if the non-advantageous section is changed due to the setting change, if the bonus combination can be won first, there is room for the non-advantageous section to be advantageous to the player. May be good. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even when the setting is changed.

Further, the first gaming state may be configured as a gaming state in which it is difficult to derive a result display corresponding to the bonus combination. That is, the basic gaming state in which the game is performed may be set to the first gaming state, and when the non-advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section in the first gaming state, the non-advantageous section may be likely to be advantageous to the player. As a result, the above-mentioned effects become more remarkable.

(Invention 11 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, when the setting is changed, the non-advantageous section is controlled to the second gaming state (for example, in the general middle bonus non-internal middle) which is not the carry-over state of the bonus combination. Then, when the non-advantageous section is in the second gaming state, it is in a special state (for example, AT) than in the case where the non-advantageous section is in the first gaming state (for example, inside the general middle bonus) in which the bonus combination is carried over. State) The probability of being controlled to a normal state is increased without controlling to a specific state (for example, CZ state) with a high expectation of transition. That is, it is difficult to control to a specific state where the expectation of special state transition is high when shifting to a non-advantageous section due to a setting change, but it is controlled to the specific state when shifting to a non-advantageous section regardless of a setting change. Make it easy. As a result, even when the predetermined initialization conditions are satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, the player's willingness to play and the interest in the game are suppressed from being lowered, and the game is properly operated at the game store. be able to.

When a predetermined winning combination (for example, a normal winning combination) is determined as a winning combination in the non-advantageous section, the player always shifts to the specific state in the first gaming state, and always shifts to the normal state in the second gaming state. You may do so. That is, at least when a predetermined combination is won, the transition to the specific state may be confirmed in the first gaming state, and there may be no room for the transition to the specific state in the second gaming state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where a specific state is controlled by changing the setting, so that a game store can perform more appropriate operation.

Further, when the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination in the second gaming state which is a non-advantageous section, the normal state may be always shifted. That is, even if the bonus combination is won in the second game state, there may be no room for transition to the specific state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where a specific state is controlled by changing the setting, so that a game store can perform more appropriate operation.

In addition, in the second gaming state, which is a non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section is maintained until the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination, it is always shifted to the normal state. good. In this way, even if the bonus combination is won in the second game state, there may be no room for transition to the specific state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where a specific state is controlled by changing the setting, so that a game store can perform more appropriate operation.

Further, the first gaming state may be configured as a gaming state in which it is difficult to derive a result display corresponding to the bonus combination. That is, the basic gaming state in which the game is performed may be set to the first gaming state, and when the non-advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section in the first gaming state, the non-advantageous section may be likely to be advantageous to the player. As a result, the above-mentioned effects become more remarkable.

(Invention 12 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, when the setting is changed, the non-advantageous section is controlled to the second gaming state (for example, the non-internal middle initial gaming state) which is not the carry-over state of the bonus combination. Further, if the predetermined result display is derived before winning the bonus combination in the second gaming state, the control is also performed in the third gaming state (for example, the gaming state after the transition between non-internal middle), which is not the carry-over state of the bonus combination. Further, in the third game state, the game state is maintained until the game is played for a predetermined period (for example, 10 games). Then, when the non-advantageous section is in the third gaming state, it is in a special state (for example, AT) than in the case where the non-advantageous section is in the first gaming state (for example, inside the general middle bonus) in which the bonus combination is carried over. State) The probability of being controlled to a normal state without being controlled to a specific state (for example, CZ state) with a high expectation of transition is increased, and the probability that a predetermined result display is allowed to be derived in the second game state is increased. , Make the bonus role higher than the probability that it will be decided as the winning role. That is, when the section shifts to the non-advantageous section due to the setting change, the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is facilitated, so that it is difficult to control the specific state with a high expectation of the transition to the special state. As a result, even when the predetermined initialization conditions are satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, the player's willingness to play and the interest in the game are suppressed from being lowered, and the game is properly operated at the game store. be able to.

When a predetermined combination (for example, a normal combination) is determined as a winning combination in the non-advantageous section, it is always shifted to the specific state in the first gaming state, and is always shifted to the normal state in the third gaming state. You may do so. That is, at least when a predetermined combination is won, the transition to the specific state may be confirmed in the first gaming state, and there may be no room for the transition to the specific state in the third gaming state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where a specific state is controlled by changing the setting, so that a game store can perform more appropriate operation.

Further, when the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination in the second gaming state which is the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section may be maintained. That is, even if the non-advantageous section is shifted due to the setting change, there is room for the non-advantageous section to be advantageous to the player if the bonus combination can be won first in the second gaming state. There may be. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even when the setting is changed.

Further, when the non-advantageous section is in the second gaming state, the probability of controlling to a specific state when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section is higher than in the case where the non-advantageous section is in the third gaming state. good. That is, even when the section shifts to the non-advantageous section due to the setting change, the degree of expectation of shifting to the specific state may be increased in the second gaming state until the transition to the third gaming state. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even when the setting is changed.

Further, the first gaming state may be configured as a gaming state in which it is difficult to derive a result display corresponding to the bonus combination. That is, the basic gaming state in which the game is performed may be set to the first gaming state, and when the non-advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section in the first gaming state, the non-advantageous section may be likely to be advantageous to the player. As a result, the above-mentioned effects become more remarkable.

(Invention 13 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, when it is decided to shift from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, the first non-advantageous section (for example, non-advantageous section A) and the second non-advantageous section (for example, non-advantageous section) When it is determined which of B) to shift to and the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, if the non-advantageous section is the first non-advantageous section, the advantageous section is put into the first specific state (for example, normal CZ). If the non-advantageous section is the second non-advantageous section, the advantageous section is controlled to the second specific state (for example, upper CZ). That is, the advantage of the specific state with high expectation of transition to the special state (for example, AT state) in the advantageous section changes depending on the state of the non-advantageous section. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest.

In the first non-advantageous section and the second non-advantageous section, the probability that the advantageous section start condition is satisfied may be set to the same probability. As a result, even when a plurality of non-advantageous section states are provided, the transition control itself to the advantageous section is not changed, so that not only the control burden can be reduced, but also the fairness of the game can be ensured.

In addition, when it is decided to shift from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, a precursory period is set, and during the precursory period, the advantage of the specific state to be shifted according to the type of the determined non-advantageous section is suggested. It may be possible. As a result, even when the player shifts to the specific state via the non-advantageous section, the advantage of the specific state can be appropriately shown to the player.

Further, after shifting from the advantageous section to the first non-advantageous section or the second non-advantageous section, the initialization process for the advantageous section (for example, SE203 of the advantageous section end processing shown in FIG. 245) is executed. You may. That is, it may be possible to control the state in the non-advantageous section by referring to the situation of the advantageous section before the transition to the non-advantageous section. This makes it possible to perform control during the non-advantageous section in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

(Invention 14 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by satisfying the advantageous section end condition, and the player's advantage is set higher in the order of the normal state, the non-advantageous section, and the special state. , When the setting is changed, if the state before the setting change is a special state, it is shifted to the non-advantageous section, and if the state before the setting change is the normal state, it is controlled not to shift to the non-advantageous section. That is, if the state before the setting change is a special state that is advantageous to the player, the special state is terminated and at least shifted to a non-advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, while before the setting change. If the state of is a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, the normal state is maintained. As a result, even when the predetermined initialization conditions are satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, the player's willingness to play and the interest in the game are suppressed from being lowered, and the game is properly operated at the game store. be able to.

(Invention 15 according to this example (No. 11))
According to the gaming machine of this example, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. When the setting is changed from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, the transition probability information that determines the special state transition probability in the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section becomes relatively disadvantageous, except for the setting change. When shifting from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section, the above-mentioned transition probability information in the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section is configured to be relatively advantageous. As a result, even when the predetermined initialization conditions are satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, the player's willingness to play and the interest in the game are suppressed from being lowered, and the game is properly operated at the game store. be able to.

The inventions 1 to 15 according to this example and the other inventions shown above are merely examples of inventions that can be extracted from each embodiment, and new inventions can be obtained by combining some or all of the configurations thereof. It can also be. In addition, the purpose, task, or effect shown in each is also an example, and in the end, it is possible to improve the interest of the game within the range of the established rules, and the game, between players, or with a player. If it is possible to contribute to the development of the industry related to gaming machines, such as being able to ensure fairness with the store, being able to reduce the control load of gaming machines, the amount of information, or manufacturing costs, there are various types. The purpose, task or action effect can be adopted.

[Additional production that can be performed in this embodiment]
Next, in addition to the above-mentioned effects, an example of an additional effect that can be executed in the present embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, it has been described that it is possible to control the AT state (advantageous state) in which a stop operation mode advantageous to the player can be notified by various examples. It was also explained that the game period in which the AT state is continued can be added by satisfying the addition condition, and can be extended as a result. In this example, it is intended to further improve the interest of the additional production performed in the situation where such an addition occurs.

Further, in this example, as the push order small winning combination, the pushing order small winning combination 1 to 6 which is a 6-choice pushing order small winning combination and the pushing order small winning combination 7 to 9 which is a 3-choice pushing order small winning combination are provided. In the push order small winning combination 1, "left middle right" is the correct push order and 9 cards are paid out, and in the pushing order small winning combination 2, "left and right middle" is the correct answer pushing order and 9 cards are paid out. In the role 3, "middle left and right" is the correct push order and 9 cards are paid out, and in the push order small role 4, "middle right and left" is the correct answer push order and 9 cards are paid out, and the push order small role 5 is " It is assumed that "right, middle, left, and right" are in the correct push order and 9 cards are paid out, and in the push order small winning combination 6, "right, middle, and left" are in the correct answer push order, and 9 cards are paid out. In addition, in the push order small winning combination 7, "left first stop" is the correct push order and 9 cards are paid out, and in the pushing order small winning combination 8, "middle first stop" is the correct answer pushing order and 9 cards are paid out. Therefore, for the push order small winning combination 9, "right first stop" is the correct push order, and 9 cards are paid out. The number of payouts when the correct answer is in the push order is an example. It is also possible to make the number of payouts at the time of the correct answer in the push order different between the push order small wins 1 to 6 and the push order small wins 7 to 9.

Then, in the AT state, for example, when the push order small winning combination 1 is won, the numerical value "1" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the stop operation information such as "123" is notified on the display device 11 on the sub side. Will be done. Further, when the push order small winning combination 2 is won, the numerical value "2" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the stop operation information such as "132" is notified on the display device 11 on the sub side. Further, when the push order small winning combination 3 is won, the numerical value "3" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the stop operation information such as "213" is notified on the display device 11 on the sub side. Further, when the push order small winning combination 4 is won, the numerical value "4" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the stop operation information such as "231" is notified on the display device 11 on the sub side. When the push order small winning combination 5 is won, the numerical value "5" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the stop operation information such as "312" is notified on the display device 11 on the sub side. Further, when the push order small winning combination 6 is won, the numerical value "6" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the stop operation information such as "321" is notified on the display device 11 on the sub side. Further, when the push order small winning combination 7 is won, the numerical value "7" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the stop operation information such as "1 − −" is notified on the display device 11 on the sub side. Further, when the push order small winning combination 8 is won, the numerical value "8" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the stop operation information such as "-1-" is notified on the display device 11 on the sub side. Further, when the push order small winning combination 9 is won, the numerical value "9" is displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, and the stop operation information such as "--1" is notified on the display device 11 on the sub side.

Further, in the AT state, when one of the push order small winning combinations 1 to 9 is won, an additional lottery for adding the game period in the AT state can be performed, and the lottery is won. In that case, the additional period associated with the winning or separately determined by lottery is added to the game period in the AT state. Here, in the AT state, if any of the push order small winning combination 1 to 9 is won and the additional lottery is won, the player's game operation (for example, stop operation) for a predetermined period (for example, about 2 seconds) ) Is executed (a specific lock state occurs). Further, in the AT state, even if one of the push order small winning combinations 1 to 9 is won but the additional lottery is not won, the specific lock is executed with a predetermined probability.

In the AT state, when the specific lock is executed by winning any of the push order small winning combinations 1 to 9 and also winning the additional lottery, the above-mentioned stop operation information is not yet notified immediately after the start operation. First, the reach effect is performed on the display device 11. The reach effect is an effect indicating that the same symbol is stopped (that is, in a tempai state) in the left and right display columns of the three display columns, and the symbol is changing in the middle display column. In the reach production, the type of design is different depending on the type of small winning combination. For example, when the push order small winning combination 1 is won, the symbol showing the number "1" is displayed in the tempai state, and when the pushing order small winning combination 2 is won, the number "2" is shown. When the symbol is displayed in the tempai state and the push order small winning combination 3 is won, the symbol indicating the number "3" is displayed in the tempai state, and when the pushing order small winning combination 4 is won, the symbol is displayed. , The symbol showing the number "4" is displayed in the tempai state, and when the push order small winning combination 5 is won, the symbol showing the number "5" is displayed in the tempai state and the push order is small. When the winning combination 6 is won, the symbol indicating the number "6" is displayed in the tempai state, and when the winning the push order small winning combination 7 is won, the symbol indicating the number "7" is displayed in the tempai state. When the push order small winning combination 8 is won, the symbol indicating the number "8" is displayed in the tempai state, and when the pushing order small winning combination 9 is won, the number "9" is displayed. The symbol indicating "" is displayed in the tempai state. Such a reach effect is continued while the specific lock is being executed.

On the other hand, in the AT state, if one of the push order small wins 1 to 9 is won and the additional lottery is not won but the specific lock is executed, the reach effect is performed in the same manner as above, but it is displayed there. The symbols to be made are different from the correspondence relationship described above. For example, when the push order small winning combination 1 is won, the symbol showing the number "2" is displayed in the tempai state, and when the pushing order small winning combination 2 is won, the number "3" is shown. When the symbol is displayed in the tempai state and the push order small winning combination 3 is won, the symbol indicating the number "4" is displayed in the tempai state, and when the pushing order small winning combination 4 is won, the symbol is displayed. , The symbol showing the number "5" is displayed in the tempai state, and when the push order small winning combination 5 is won, the symbol showing the number "6" is displayed in the tempai state, and the push order is small. When the winning combination 6 is won, the symbol indicating the number "1" is displayed in the tempai state, and when the winning the push order small winning combination 7 is won, the symbol indicating the number "8" is displayed in the tempai state. When the push order small winning combination 8 is won, the symbol indicating the number "9" is displayed in the tempai state, and when the pushing order small winning combination 9 is won, the number "7" is displayed. The symbol indicating "" is displayed in the tempai state. Such a reach effect is continued while the specific lock is being executed.

Next, when the specific lock is terminated, the instruction monitor on the main side and the display device 11 on the sub side start notifying the information of the stop operation according to the type of the winning push order small combination described above. At this time, the symbol showing the same numerical value as the numerical value displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side is stopped in the display column that has been changed in the reach effect. That is, when the additional lottery is won, the symbol corresponding to the display column inside is stopped in conjunction with the numerical value being displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, so that the symbol alignment effect is performed. Therefore, it is possible to notify that an addition has occurred due to the pattern matching effect. On the other hand, if the additional lottery is not won, the symbols corresponding to the display columns inside are stopped in conjunction with the numerical values being displayed on the instruction monitor on the main side, so that the symbols are unevenly produced. Therefore, it is possible to notify that the addition did not occur due to the uneven design effect. If the notification of the stop operation information and the reach effect (and the subsequent pattern matching effect and pattern mismatching effect) are performed on the same display device 11, the player may find it difficult to understand. Therefore, when performing on the same display device 11, the areas where the respective displays are performed may be divided, and the reach effect (and the subsequent pattern-aligned effect and pattern-unmatched effect) may be subordinated. It may be performed on the display device 18.

In recent gaming machines, it is common that the control device on the main side manages the advantageous state (AT state) in which the information on the stop operation can be notified, and along with this, the information on the stop operation is also provided on the main side. Notification means (instruction monitor) capable of notification is provided.

However, the information of the stop operation is not directly notified by the notification means on the main side, and may be indirectly notified in a manner uniquely corresponding to the information of the stop operation. In this case, even if it may be unavoidable in terms of specifications that the notification is performed in such a manner, it is considered that there is room for devising ways to improve the interest by utilizing the notification by the notification means on the main side. .. According to this example, in a gaming machine in which information on a stop operation can be notified by the control of the main control side that controls the progress of the game, a gaming machine capable of performing a highly interesting effect in conjunction with the notification is provided. Is possible.

[Application to other gaming machines]
Further, in the present embodiment, the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described as an example of the gaming machine, but the gaming machine to which the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied is not limited to this. For example, features other than the features peculiar to pachislot, such as features related to reel stop control based on a stop operation, can be applied to a gaming machine called "pachinko", and the same effect can be obtained. That is, the invention according to the present embodiment can be applied to any gaming machine capable of playing a game (controlling a game) according to a player's game operation (operation).

[Other expandability of gaming machines according to the present embodiment]
In the pachislot 1 of the present embodiment, the player's medal insertion operation (that is, the operation of inserting the hand-held medal into the medal insertion slot 14 or the credited medal is inserted into the MAX bet button 15a or the 1-bet button 15b. If the game is started by (operation of inserting) and the medal is paid out when the game is finished, the hopper device 51 is driven to pay out the medal from the medal payout outlet 24, or credit. The form to be used has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this.

For example, the present invention is applied to all forms in which a player inputs a game medium necessary for a game, a game is performed based on the game medium, and a privilege is given (for example, a medal is paid out) based on the result of the game. be able to. That is, not only the game medium is input (hanged) and the game medium is paid out by the physical movement of the player, but also the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) itself is the game medium owned by the player. It may be possible to play a game without a medal by electromagnetically managing the above. Further, it may be a game medium management device that is mounted (connected) to the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71) and manages the game medium to electromagnetically manage the game medium owned by the player. ..

In this case, the game medium management device is a device having a ROM and an RWM (or RAM) and provided in the game machine, and bidirectionally communicates with an external game medium handling device (not shown) via a predetermined interface. It is connected so that it can be connected, and a prize is awarded for the operation of lending the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the game medium necessary for the player to perform the operation of inserting the game medium) or the role of paying out the game medium (that is, the operation of providing the game medium). When the combination is established), the game medium payout operation (that is, the action of making the player acquire the game medium necessary for paying out the game medium), or the game medium to be used for the game. It suffices that the operation of recording electromagnetically can be performed. Further, the game medium management device not only manages the actual number of game media, but also displays the number of game media held on the front surface of the pachislot machine 1, for example, based on the management result of the number of game media. A number display device (not shown) may be provided to manage the number of game media displayed on the possessed game medium number display device. That is, the game medium management device may be capable of recording and displaying the total number of game media that the player can use for the game by an electromagnetic method.

Further, in this case, the game medium management device has a performance that allows the player to freely transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media to an external game medium handling device, and the player. In addition to the case of direct operation, when the number of recorded game media cannot be reduced, and when an external connection terminal plate (not shown) is provided between the device and an external game medium handling device. It is desirable that the player has the ability to transmit a signal indicating the number of recorded game media only through the external connection terminal plate.

In addition to the above, the gaming machine is provided with a lending operating means, a return (settlement) operating means, and an external connection terminal plate that can be operated by the player, and the gaming medium handling device is provided with a slot for valuable value such as banknotes and a recording medium. (For example, IC card) insertion slot, non-contact communication antenna for depositing electronic money from mobile terminals, other operating means such as lending operation means, return operation means, external connection terminal board on the game medium handling device side It may be provided (neither is shown).

As a flow of the game at that time, for example, the player deposits valuable value to the game medium handling device by any method, and subtracts a predetermined number of valuable values based on the operation of any of the above lending operation means. Then, the game medium corresponding to the valuable value subtracted from the game medium handling device to the game medium management device is increased. Then, the player plays a game, and if a game medium is required, the above operation is repeated. After that, a predetermined number of game media are acquired as a result of the game, and when the game is finished, the number of game media is transmitted from the game medium management device to the game medium handling device by operating one of the return operation means, and the game is played. The medium handling device discharges a recording medium on which the number of game media is recorded. The game medium management device clears the number of game media stored by itself when the number of game media is transmitted. The player takes the discharged recording medium to a prize counter or the like for exchanging prizes, or moves the game table to play a game based on the game medium recorded on another table.

In the above example, all the gaming media are transmitted to the gaming media handling device, but only the number of gaming media desired by the player is transmitted on the gaming machine or the gaming media handling device side, and the gaming medium possessed by the player is transmitted. It may be divided and processed. Further, not only the recording medium is discharged, but cash or a cash equivalent may be discharged, or the recording medium may be stored in a mobile terminal or the like. Further, the game medium handling device may be capable of inserting a member recording medium of the game store and storing the member recording medium in the member recording medium so that the game can be replayed at a later date.

Further, in the game machine or the game medium handling device, a lock operation for locking the game medium or valuable value data communication can be executed on the game medium handling device or the game medium management device by operating a predetermined operating means (not shown). May be good. In that case, the player may be stored by setting information such as a one-time password that only the player can know, or by an imaging means provided in the game machine or the game medium handling device.

As described above, the game medium management device may be capable of playing games only without a medal, or the game medium is inserted (hanged) by the physical movement of the player, and the game medium is played. It may be a form in which the game is paid out, a form in which the game is possible without a medal, or a form in which the game is possible in both forms. In this case, the game medium management device may adopt a method of directly controlling the selector 66 and the hopper device 51 described above, or these are controlled by the main control circuit 90 (main control board 71). Based on the transmission of the control result, a method is adopted that enables control in which the total number of game media that the player can use for the game is recorded by an electromagnetic method and displayed. You can also.

Further, in the above, the case where the game medium management device is applied to the pachi-slot machine 1 has been described. However, in the slot machine and the enclosed game machine using the above-mentioned game ball, the game medium management device is similarly provided and the player It is also possible to manage the game medium of.

As described above, by providing the above-mentioned game medium management device, it is possible to reduce the number of selectors 66, hopper devices 51, etc. inside the game machine as compared with the case where the game medium is physically used for the game. Not only can the cost and manufacturing cost be reduced, but also the player can be prevented from coming into direct contact with the gaming medium, the gaming environment can be improved, noise can be reduced, and the number of devices can be reduced. It also reduces the power consumption of. In addition, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts through the game medium and the slot and payout port of the game medium. That is, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve various environments surrounding the gaming machine.

<Supplementary note (summary of the present invention)>
[Game machines with the first to fourth configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, if it is not in an advantageous state (for example, ART state) that is advantageous to the player, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and if it is in the advantageous state, the advantageous state is determined. It is known that it is possible to perform a lottery as to whether or not to continue (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-240017).

However, in the gaming machines shown above, there are few variations in determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and it is required to devise ways to further enhance the interest.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest in continuing a state advantageous to the player.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following first configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns and a plurality of effective lines are set, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with check and medal payout processing).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, the main (Decision of ally type by CPU101) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol display area (for example, a symbol display area 4) in which a predetermined area is visible for the symbol display means and one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area.
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with check and medal payout processing).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
A special line setting means capable of setting one or a plurality of special lines formed by connecting straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area. When,
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the special lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. (Determining the type of ally) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.

The continuation degree determining means changes the continuation degree to a degree disadvantageous to the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means in the advantageous state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following second configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns and a plurality of effective lines are set, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
Specific when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied in the advantageous state (for example, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state and the right acquisition state transition lottery is won in the right acquisition lottery state). A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control a specific state (for example, a right acquisition state) that is advantageous to the player for a period of time, and
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, the main (Decision of ally type by CPU101) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.
The specific state is a state in which it is possible to determine whether or not a specific right (for example, a permanent right or a limited right) is granted.
The determination line determining means is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination line is determined based on the given specific right.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol display area (for example, a symbol display area 4) in which a predetermined area is visible for the symbol display means and one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area.
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with check and medal payout processing).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
Specific when a specific advantageous condition is satisfied in the advantageous state (for example, when it is determined to shift to the right acquisition lottery state in the line battle state and the right acquisition state transition lottery is won in the right acquisition lottery state). A specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control a specific state (for example, a right acquisition state) that is advantageous to the player for a period of time, and
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
A special line setting means capable of setting one or a plurality of special lines formed by connecting straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area. When,
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the special lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. (Determining the type of ally) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.
The specific state is a state in which it is possible to determine whether or not a specific right (for example, a permanent right or a limited right) is granted.
The determination line determining means is a gaming machine characterized in that the determination line is determined based on the given specific right.

The specific state is a state in which the specific right can be granted in a number exceeding the upper limit number (for example, 2) that can be determined as the determination line by the determination line determining means.
When the specific right equal to or greater than the upper limit that can be determined as the determination line is granted, the determination line determining means determines the determination line for the upper limit using the specific right for the upper limit.
The continuation degree determining means is the continuation degree if the specific right does not remain when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means in the advantageous state. The above-described gaming machine, characterized in that it is possible to change the degree of continuation to a degree disadvantageous to the player and not to change the degree of continuation to a degree disadvantageous to the player if the specific right remains. ..

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following third configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed in a plurality of columns and a plurality of effective lines are set, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, the main (Decision of ally type by CPU101) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.
Further special rights granting means (eg, main CPU 101) that can determine to grant special rights (eg, permanent rights) when special favorable conditions are met (eg, winning a permanent right acquisition lottery). Prepare,
The determination line determining means
When the special right is granted by the special right granting means, any one of the plurality of effective lines is always determined as the determination line among the plurality of effective lines.
When the special right is not granted by the special right granting means, when determining the determination line, one or more of the effective lines is referred to as the determination line. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to decide whether or not to play.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A symbol display area (for example, a symbol display area 4) in which a predetermined area is visible for the symbol display means and one or a plurality of effective lines are set in the predetermined area.
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit giving means (winning by the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the effective line. It is a gaming machine equipped with check and medal payout processing).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, the advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
A special line setting means capable of setting one or a plurality of special lines formed by connecting straight lines or polygonal lines so as to pass through any one of the symbols displayed in the symbol display area. When,
In the advantageous state, the determination line determining means (for example, by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether one or a plurality of the special lines are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. (Determining the type of ally) and
In the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Means (eg, determination of enemy status by the main CPU 101), including
When the predetermined period elapses, it is determined whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuity degree determining means.
Further special rights granting means (eg, main CPU 101) that can determine to grant special rights (eg, permanent rights) when special favorable conditions are met (eg, winning a permanent right acquisition lottery). Prepare,
The determination line determining means
When the special right is granted by the special right granting means, one of the plurality of the special lines is always determined as the determination line.
When the special right is not granted by the special right granting means, when determining the determination line, one or more of the special lines is referred to as the determination line. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to decide whether or not to play.

The continuation degree determining means changes the continuation degree to a degree disadvantageous to the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means in the advantageous state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period. )When,
In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and
Based on the establishment of the predetermined advantageous condition, it is possible to shift the gaming state in the advantageous state to the first gaming state (for example, RT2 state), and a combination of special symbols in the advantageous state (for example, a combination of symbols in the advantageous state (RT2 state). For example, when the RT3 transition (RT3 transition) is displayed, the gaming state transition control means (for example, RT check by the main CPU 101) that can shift the gaming state in the advantageous state to the second gaming state (for example, the RT3 state) is displayed. Processing), and equipped with
The means for determining the continuation of the advantageous state is
When a specific combination of symbols is displayed in the advantageous state, the continuity degree determining means capable of changing the continuation degree of the advantageous state to a degree advantageous to the player (for example, determination of the enemy status by the main CPU 101). ) Including
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the internal winning combination determining means determines a specific internal winning combination in which a combination of the specific symbols can be displayed is higher in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state. ..

The continuation degree determining means can change the continuation degree to a degree disadvantageous to the player when a predetermined combination of symbols is displayed in the advantageous state.
The internal winning combination determining means can determine a predetermined internal winning combination in which the combination of the predetermined symbols can be displayed in the first gaming state, and can determine the predetermined internal winning combination in the second gaming state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it does not.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state in an advantageous section), one or a plurality of lines (regardless of whether they are effective lines) are related to a change in the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. It is possible to decide whether to use the judgment line, and in the advantageous state, when a specific combination of symbols (for example, "replay" or "bell" symbol alignment) is displayed on the determined judgment line, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Can be changed to a degree that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to determine whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the determined degree of continuation.

As a result, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state can be changed according to the determination result of the determination line, so that it is possible to improve the interest in the continuation of the advantageous state for the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of "hit lip") is displayed on the determined determination line in the advantageous state, the degree of continuation of the advantageous state Can be changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

As a result, the tension in the advantageous state can be increased, the game in the advantageous state does not become monotonous, and the interest in continuing the advantageous state for the player can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the determination result regarding the determination line regarding the change in the continuation degree of the advantageous state changes depending on whether or not the right is granted in the specific state (for example, the right acquisition state). ing. That is, it is possible to determine the determination line based on the rights granted in the specific state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the right of the upper limit number or more of the determination line is granted in the specific state, first, the determination line of the upper limit number is determined by using the right of the upper limit number. Then, in the advantageous state, when a predetermined combination of symbols (for example, a combination of symbols of the "shot lip") is displayed on the determined determination line, if the granted right does not remain, the advantageous state If the degree of continuation of the above is changed to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player and the granted right remains, it is possible not to change the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to a degree that is disadvantageous to the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special right (for example, a permanent right) is granted, a plurality of determination lines are always determined, and when the special right is not granted, the determination line is determined. When determining, one or more lines are determined as determination lines.

As a result, the role of each gaming state in the advantageous state can be diversified, and the degree of continuation of the favorable state can be varied in various ways. be able to.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to shift the gaming state in the advantageous state (for example, the line battle state in the advantageous section) to the first gaming state (for example, RT2 state), and a special symbol. (For example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, it is possible to shift the gaming state in the advantageous state to the second gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Specific internal winning combinations (eg, "F_middle rip 1" and "F_middle rip 1") in which a specific combination of symbols (for example, a combination of "middle rip" symbols) can be displayed. The probability of determining any of 2) is higher in the RT3 state than in the RT2 state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first gaming state, a predetermined combination of symbols that changes the degree of continuation of the advantageous state to a degree that is advantageous to the player (for example, a combination of symbols of the "shot lip"). It is possible to determine a predetermined internal winning combination (for example, "F_shot lip") in which is possible to be displayed, and in the second gaming state, it is not possible to determine this predetermined internal winning combination.

As a result, in the advantageous state, the degree of the player's advantage further varies depending on which game state the player is in, so that the games in the advantageous state can be made more diverse and more advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the continuation of the state.

[Game machine with a fifth configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a player wins a predetermined internal winning combination in which the degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the game control circuit is advantageous in notifying the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player. In the state, the broadcastable information that enables the notification of the stop operation procedure is transmitted to the effect control circuit, and in the normal state in which the stop operation procedure advantageous to the player is not notified, the stop operation is performed. It is known that information that makes it impossible to notify the procedure according to the above procedure can be transmitted to the effect control circuit (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-144568).

However, in the gaming machine shown above, for example, a predetermined internal winning combination may have a plurality of internal winning combinations such that the combination of displayed symbols is different even if the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is the same. In the case of including, there is a problem that although the effect of notifying the procedure of the stop operation can be performed, the effect related to the combination of the displayed symbols cannot be performed.

Here, it is conceivable that the game control circuit transmits the type of the internal winning combination to the effect control circuit in detail, but in this case, there arises a problem that the control load of the game control circuit increases. Become.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of performing a more appropriate effect without increasing the control load.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. Winning check / medal payout processing) and
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means (for example, a display device 11 controlled by a sub CPU 201) for executing the effect.
With an information transmission means (for example, communication data transmission processing by the main CPU 101) capable of transmitting predetermined information (for example, a winning combination number) regarding the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means to the effect executing means. ,
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), an advantage that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified for a predetermined period. A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When the stop operation is performed in the first stop operation procedure (for example, "batting order 1"), a specific symbol combination is displayed on the first line (for example, the top line) in the symbol display means. The first internal winning combination (for example, "F_upper left bell 1") and
When the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the first stop operation, the second internal winning is that the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the second line (for example, the center line) in the symbol display means. The role (for example, "F_middle left bell 1") and
When the stop operation is performed in the second stop operation procedure (for example, "batting order 3"), a third combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the first line in the symbol display means. With the internal winning combination (for example, "F_upper middle bell 1"),
When the stop operation is performed in the procedure of the second stop operation, a fourth internal winning combination (for example, "for example,""a combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the second line in the symbol display means. F_middle bell 1 ") and can be determined as an internal winning combination.
The information transmitting means is
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determining means determines the first internal winning combination or the third internal winning combination, the first information (for example, the winning combination number "23" is used as the predetermined information. ”) And send
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determining means determines the second internal winning combination or the fourth internal winning combination, the second information (for example, the winning combination number "24" is used as the predetermined information. ”) And send
The effect executing means is a gaming machine characterized in that different effects can be executed when the first information is transmitted and when the second information is transmitted.

In the advantageous state, it is possible to determine whether one or a plurality of the lines including the first line and the second line are used as the determination line regarding the fluctuation of the degree of continuation of the advantageous state. Judgment line determination means (for example, determination of ally type by the main CPU 101)
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the determination line determined by the determination line determining means, the continuation degree can be changed to a degree advantageous to the player. Determining means (for example, determining the enemy status by the main CPU 101),
Advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, continuous lottery by the main CPU 101) that determines whether or not to continue the advantageous state based on the continuation degree determined by the continuation degree determining means when the predetermined period elapses. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is equipped with.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, when the stop operation is performed in "batting order 1", "F_upper left bell 1" in which the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the top line and "batting order" When the stop operation is performed at "1", the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the center line, "F_middle left bell 1", and when the stop operation is performed at "batting order 3", the top The combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the line. When the stop operation is performed in "F_upper middle bell 1" and "batting order 3", the combination of "bell" symbols is displayed on the center line. "F_middle middle bell 1" can be determined at least as an internal winning combination, and in an advantageous state, for example, when "F_upper left bell 1" or "F_upper middle bell 1" is determined, the winning is won. "23" is transmitted as the winning combination number, and when "F_middle left bell 1" or "F_middle middle bell 1" is determined, "24" is transmitted as the winning combination number. Then, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute different effects according to the transmitted winning combination number.

As a result, for example, in an advantageous state (for example, a line battle state in an advantageous section), when the player has a game property in which the degree of advantage of the player varies depending on the line on which the symbol is displayed, the displayed symbol Since the effect related to the combination can be performed, a more appropriate effect can be performed without increasing the control load.

[Game machine with the sixth configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, during a specific gaming state that is advantageous to the player, a story of story production that is executed according to the number of transitions to a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player is advanced, that is, advantageous to the player. It is known that the effect content can be changed according to the duration of the state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-187467).

Here, in a gaming machine as shown above, for example, when a player's advantageous state continues for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to perform a special effect (for example, an ending effect) that cannot normally be seen. ..

By the way, such a special production is executed as, for example, giving an additional privilege to the player, but a device for further increasing the player's motivation to play and improving the interest of the production is devised. It is considered that there is room for this.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of increasing a player's motivation to play and improving the interest of production.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following sixth configuration.

A gaming machine (for example, pachislot machine 1) that plays a game by variablely displaying a symbol based on a player's start operation and stopping and displaying a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), an advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) that is advantageous to the player, and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The effect executing means is
When the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means becomes a special period (for example, the game period of the advantageous section is "1200" times or more), a special effect (for example, the ending effect in the ending 2 state) ) Is feasible,
When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied and the predetermined execution condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state), a part of the special effect is executed. A gaming machine characterized in that a special effect (for example, an ending effect in the ending 1 state) can be executed.

In the advantageous state, an advantageous state continuation determining means (for example, continuous lottery by the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state, and
When the advantageous state continuation determination means does not determine to continue the advantageous state, the normal termination means for terminating the advantageous state and the normal termination means.
Even when the advantageous state continuation determining means determines to continue the advantageous state, a specific period (for example, the period in which the advantageous state is controlled by the advantageous state controlling means exceeds the special period). Further provided with a specific termination means for terminating the advantageous state when the regulation monitoring period reaches "1500" times).
The effect executing means is characterized in that the special effect can be executed from the time when the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state control means becomes the special period to the specific period. The gaming machine described above.

Each time the effect executing means is determined by the advantageous state continuation determining means to continue the advantageous state until the period controlled to the advantageous state by the advantageous state controlling means becomes the specific period. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein a suggestion effect suggesting a guideline for a period of time controlled by the advantageous state control means can be executed.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the period controlled in the advantageous state becomes a special period (for example, when the ending 2 state is reached), the special effect can be executed and the special effect can be executed. When it is decided to be controlled in an advantageous state, and when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied (for example, when it is decided to shift to the ending 1 state), a part of the special effect is executed. It is possible to perform special effects.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a predetermined execution condition is satisfied for a special effect that is a part of a special effect that can be normally executed at the end of a game in a state advantageous to the player. If so, it can be executed in the early stage of the game in a state advantageous to the player. As a result, the player will play the game while wanting to see all the special effects, so that the player's motivation to play can be increased and the interest of the effects can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, from the time when the period controlled to the advantageous state becomes a special period to the period when the period controlled to the advantageous state becomes a specific period and the advantageous state ends. , It is possible to perform a special production. As a result, even when the acquisition of the game medium is restricted, it is possible to reduce the deterioration of the player's interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, until the period controlled in the advantageous state becomes a special period, each time it is decided to continue the advantageous state, a guideline for the period controlled in the advantageous state is used. It is possible to execute a suggestion effect that suggests. As a result, the player can generally grasp when the execution of the special effect is started and when the advantageous state ends, so that it is possible to provide the player with appropriate information while enhancing the interest of the game. can.

[Game machines with 7th to 12th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, a continuous effect for notifying whether or not a special role (for example, a bonus role) that enables a transition to a state advantageous to the player (for example, a bonus state) has been determined as an internal winning combination. Is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-79697).

However, whether or not the special role has been decided as the internal winning role can often be inferred not only from the production content of the continuous production but also from the combination of the displayed symbols, so the situation shifts to an advantageous state. It is considered that there is room for further ingenuity in the notification regarding whether or not to do so and the mode of transition to an advantageous state itself.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving interest in transitioning to a state advantageous to the player.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following seventh configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) which is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous state control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , A normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state) when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). The state change control means (for example, the main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
When the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the procedure of the stopping operation advantageous to the player can be notified. When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the case of the first advantageous state and the second normal gaming state, the stop in favor of the player. A gaming machine characterized in that it executes an effect that can notify the operation procedure.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) which is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous state control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , A normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state) when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). The state change control means (for example, the main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
In the specific combination, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed when the stop operation is in a specific mode, and the combination of the specific symbols is not displayed when the stop operation is not in the specific mode. It ’s a winning role,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
When the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the player is asked until the first advantageous state is completed. It is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the advantageous procedure of the stop operation, and when the first advantageous state is the second normal gaming state, any of the plurality of predetermined combinations is determined as the internal winning combination. If so, it is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player until the first advantageous state is completed.
When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination when the first advantageous state is not the gaming state of either the first normal gaming state or the second normal gaming state, the predetermined winning combination is determined. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to execute an effect capable of notifying the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player only for the number of times (for example, once).

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following ninth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, a first advantageous state (for example, a high probability 2 of a normal advantageous section) that is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period (for example, between 9 games) When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), a second advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) which is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state is possible. ), And an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101).
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , A normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state) when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). The state change control means (for example, the main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
When the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, if any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified. When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the case where the first advantageous state is the second normal gaming state, the effect is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute an effect that can notify the procedure of the stop operation,
When the special gaming state ends, the advantageous state control means
When the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the second advantageous state is controlled.
When the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied, the game is controlled to a third advantageous state (for example, a high accuracy 4 state of a normal advantageous section) for a specific period (for example, between 32 games). Machine.

It is possible to set one of a plurality of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) for different degrees of advantage of the player.
The special combination includes a first special combination in which the winning probabilities differ among the plurality of set values, and a second special combination in which the winning probabilities are the same among the plurality of set values.
The predetermined advantageous conditions are
In the case where either the first advantageous state or the third advantageous state is in an advantageous state, either the first special combination or the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination. Is also decided,
When neither the first advantageous state nor the third advantageous state is in the advantageous state, it is not determined whether or not the first special combination is established when it is determined as the internal winning combination. The gaming machine described above.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following tenth configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
When a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it can be controlled to a first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) which is advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, and a predetermined advantage. When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the advantageous state control means (for example, the advantageous state control means) that can be controlled to the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) that is more advantageous to the player than the first advantageous state. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , A normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state) when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). The state change control means (for example, the main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
When the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The advantageous state control means can determine whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state.
The effect executing means is
When any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state, the player is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute an effect that can notify the procedure of the stop operation.
When the special gaming state is controlled in the second advantageous state and any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the special gaming state, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to execute a production that can notify
When the special gaming state is controlled in the first advantageous state and any of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination in the special gaming state, the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player. A gaming machine characterized in that it does not make it possible to perform an effect that can notify.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control the first advantageous state (for example, a normal advantageous section) and a predetermined value. When the advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when the ART lottery is won), the second advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) can be controlled, and a specific symbol combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed. When this is done, it is possible to change the gaming state to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination, the gaming state. Can be transferred to the second normal gaming state (for example, RT5 state). In addition, it is possible to determine a specific role and a special role as internal winning roles at the same time. Then, in the case of the first advantageous state and the first normal gaming state and the second normal gaming state, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified for the predetermined combination (for example, the push order small combination). It has become so.

As a result, in the first advantageous state, there is a higher possibility that the number of game media to be given will increase as compared with the case in the normal state, and the expectation of whether or not to transition to the special game state will also increase. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition to a favorable state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, an appropriate timing), the specific combination of symbols is displayed and the specific combination is not performed in the specific mode. In this case, it is an internal winning combination in which a specific combination of symbols is not displayed, and in the case of the first advantageous state and the RT3 state and the RT5 state, the player for the predetermined combination until the first advantageous state is completed. When the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player is notified and the player is in the first advantageous state and not in the first normal state and the second normal game state, the player is notified of the predetermined combination only for a predetermined number of times (for example, once). The procedure of the advantageous stop operation is notified.

As a result, when the specific combination is won, the degree of advantage and the content of the first advantageous state vary depending on whether or not the special combination is also determined as the internal winning combination and whether or not the combination of the specific symbols is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest in the transition of the state that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the special gaming state (for example, the bonus state) ends, if the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the game shifts to the second advantageous state, and the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied. If not, the game shifts to a third advantageous state (for example, a high-accuracy 4 state in a normal advantageous section) for a specific period (for example, between 32 games).

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the gaming state is either the first advantageous state or the third advantageous state, the winning probability is the same among the plurality of set values (for example, "F_BB3 + F_watermelon"). 2 ”and“ internal winning combination including bonus combination other than “F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2”), and the first special combination (for example, “F_BB3 + F_watermelon 2” and “F_BB4 + F_watermelon 2”) having different winning probabilities among a plurality of set values. Regardless of which case is won, it is determined whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state, but when neither the first advantageous state nor the third advantageous state is in the gaming state, the first special role is assigned. In the case of winning, it is not decided whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state.

As a result, the transition of the subsequent gaming state (advantageous state) can be made more diverse depending on the gaming state and its type when the special role is won. Can be improved.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state of the first advantageous state in which it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the second advantageous state, it is possible to notify the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination. , Even when controlled to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state) in the second advantageous state, it is possible to notify the player of the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination, but the special gaming state is set in the first advantageous state. When controlled, it is not possible to notify the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination.

As a result, it is possible to provide a first advantageous state, which is a gaming section in which the expectation of shifting to the second advantageous state is increased and the possibility that the number of game media to be given is increased is also increased, which is advantageous to the player. It is possible to improve the interest in the transition of the game, and even if such a game section is provided, it is possible to prevent the profit given to the player from becoming excessive, and the player's gambling spirit is enhanced. It is also possible to suppress excessive fanning.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eleventh configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) that variablely displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Based on the player's start operation, the symbol variation means for starting the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the reel rotation start process by the main CPU 101),
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 101) that determines an internal winning combination based on the start operation.
Stop control means (for example, reel stop by the main CPU 101) for stopping the variation display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation. Control processing) and
When the stop control means stops the variable display of the symbol displayed on the symbol display means, the profit-giving means (for example, the main CPU 101) grants a profit according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. It is a gaming machine equipped with a prize check and medal payout process).
Advantageous state control that can control a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") to an advantageous state advantageous to the player (for example, a high probability 2 state of a normal advantageous section) for a predetermined period when the internal winning combination is determined. Means (eg, main CPU 101) and
When a combination of specific symbols corresponding to the specific combination (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state). , A normal game state change control means (for example, RT5 state) capable of changing the game state to the second normal game state (for example, RT5 state) when a special combination (for example, a bonus combination) is determined as an internal winning combination. Main CPU101) and
When a combination of special symbols corresponding to the special combination (for example, a combination of symbols related to a bonus combination) is displayed, a special game capable of changing the gaming state to a special gaming state (for example, a bonus state). The state change control means (for example, the main CPU 101) and
A production execution means (for example, a display device 11) for executing the production is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
A plurality of predetermined combinations (for example, push order small combinations) whose degree of advantage of the player changes depending on the procedure of the stop operation, the specific combination, and the special combination can be determined as internal winning combinations. When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the winning combination of the special combination can be carried over until the combination of the special symbols is displayed.
When the winning combination of the special role is not carried over, the specific combination and the special combination can be determined as the internal winning combination at the same time.
The effect executing means is
In the case of the advantageous state and the first normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, an effect capable of notifying the player of the procedure of the stopping operation which is advantageous to the player. To be executable
In the case of the advantageous state and the second normal gaming state, when any one of the plurality of predetermined winning combinations is determined as the internal winning combination, an effect capable of notifying the player of the procedure of the stopping operation which is advantageous to the player. To be executable
The normal game state change control means is a case where the specific combination is not determined as an internal winning combination at the same time as the special combination, and when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed, a specific period (for example, 8). (Between games), the gaming state is changed to the first normal gaming state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined period is set to a period longer than the specific period (for example, between 9 games).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific combination (for example, "chance eye") is determined as an internal winning combination, it is possible to control the advantageous state (for example, the high accuracy 2 state of the normal advantageous section). When a specific combination of symbols (for example, "RT3 transition") is displayed, the gaming state can be changed to the first normal gaming state (for example, RT3 state), and a special role (for example, RT3 state) can be changed. When the bonus combination) is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to shift the gaming state to the second normal gaming state (for example, RT5 state). In addition, it is possible to determine a specific role and a special role as internal winning roles at the same time. Then, in the advantageous state of the first normal game state and the second normal game state, it is possible to notify the player of the procedure of the stop operation which is advantageous to the player for the predetermined combination (for example, the push order small combination). The period during which the advantageous state can be continued (for example, between 9 games) is set to be longer than the period during which the first normal gaming state can be continued (for example, between 8 games).

As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation regardless of whether or not a specific game state (first normal game state) ends, and thus the interest in the transition of the state advantageous to the player. It can be improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following twelfth configuration.

When a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied (for example, when a bonus combination is won), an advantageous state control means that can control an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) that is advantageous to the player, and
A display means capable of displaying an image (for example, a display device 11) and
A gaming machine provided with a detecting means (for example, a touch sensor 19) capable of detecting a player's operation.
The display means can display a specific image for notifying whether or not the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied.
The specific image is a first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) displayed when the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, and when the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied. Including the displayed second specific image (for example, the same image as the base image),
The first specific image and the second specific image are different in a specific part and are images common to other parts other than the specific part.
When the detection means detects that the player has performed the operation of designating the specific portion when the first specific image is displayed, it notifies that the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied. A gaming machine characterized in that a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") Is displayed on the display means.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is notified whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition (for example, winning a bonus combination) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) advantageous to the player is satisfied. Therefore, when the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the first specific image (for example, an image partially different from the base image) is displayed, and when the predetermined advantageous condition is not satisfied, the second specific image is displayed. It is possible to display an image (for example, the same image as the base image), and when the first specific image is displayed, the player performs an operation to specify a part different from the second specific image. In this case, it is possible to display a special image (for example, a message of "bonus confirmed!") Notifying that the predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to notify whether or not a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied by a new production mode in which a predetermined operation of the player is also involved. Can be planned.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the second specific image is an image that is the same as or similar to a predetermined image in the original work used as the motif of the gaming machine. As a result, the player who is attached to the original work can easily recognize whether or not the predetermined advantageous conditions are satisfied, so that the motivation for playing can be increased and the interest in the production can be further enhanced.

[Game machine with thirteenth configuration]
In a conventional gaming machine, the gaming control device side monitors the time when a specific operating means (for example, a stop button) is pressed (the time counted by the on-edge timer), and that time is sent to the effect control circuit side. As a result, it is known that the content of the production can be changed (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-233278).

However, since it is necessary to mount many effects in recent gaming machines that require diversification of effects, it is required to devise ways to reduce the control load of the effects.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and a gaming machine capable of reducing the control load related to the effect even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of a specific operation means. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following thirteenth configuration.

Operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, stop button),
An operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch) capable of detecting the operation of the operating means, and
A production control means (for example, sub CPU201) for controlling the production is provided.
The effect control means
When the operation detecting means detects an operation (for example, on-edge) of the operating means, the time measurement is started, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses from the start of the time measurement, the first effect (for example, 3 seconds) is produced. Control to generate "Direction 1")
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, control is performed to generate a second effect (for example, "effect 2").
A gaming machine characterized in that if the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined time elapses from the start of the timekeeping, the control for generating the first effect is not performed.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when the operation detecting means detects that the operation of the operating means has been completed (for example, when an off-edge is detected).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, timing is started when an operation of a specific operating means (for example, on-edge) is detected, and when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed from the start of the timing, the first time is taken. Control to execute one effect (for example, "effect 1"), and control to execute a second effect (for example, "effect 2") when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when an off-edge is detected). If the predetermined condition is satisfied before the predetermined time elapses from the start of the timekeeping, it is possible not to control the execution of the first effect.

As a result, even when the effect is changed depending on the operation mode of the specific operation means, the control load related to the effect can be reduced.

[14th configuration gaming machine]
There is known a conventional gaming machine that makes it possible to perform an effect such as notifying an internal winning combination by a light emitting mode of a specific operating means (for example, a stop button) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-82034). See Gazette).

However, it is considered that there is room for further ingenuity in such production.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of enhancing the interest in directing and enhancing the interest in gaming.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fourteenth configuration.

A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that generates an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and
Prior to the occurrence of the advantageous state, a predetermining means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of determining whether to grant the right to allow the occurrence of the advantageous state (for example, winning a bonus combination) and
A gaming machine provided with an effect executing means (for example, a game value display unit (VL)) capable of executing a predetermined effect.
When the pre-determining means determines that the right to allow the occurrence of the advantageous state is granted, the effect executing means notifies that the decision has been made (for example, "number of sheets ahead". "Display effect") can be executed, and a predetermined value (for example, the end of the combination as the number of planned acquisitions) regarding the game value that can be acquired in the advantageous state generated based on the right given by the decision in the specific notification effect. A gaming machine characterized by displaying the value of the number counter.

When the effect executing means displays the predetermined value in the specific notification effect, the display of the predetermined value is continued at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and the game value is acquired in the advantageous state. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the display of the predetermined value is updated based on the acquired gaming value value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when it is decided that the right to allow the occurrence of an advantageous state (for example, a bonus state) is granted (for example, winning a bonus combination), the decision is made. It is possible to execute a specific notification effect to be notified (for example, "number of sheets ahead display effect"), and in this specific notification effect, a predetermined game value that can be acquired in an advantageous state generated based on the right decided to be granted. It is possible to display a value (for example, a value of a number counter for the number of consecutive ends as a planned number of acquisitions).

As a result, it is possible to perform a production that specifically informs the value of the right (winning content) obtained by the player, so that the interest related to the production can be enhanced and the interest related to the game can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the predetermined value is displayed in the specific notification effect, the predetermined value is continuously displayed at least until the occurrence of the advantageous state thereafter, and when the game value is acquired in the advantageous state, the game value is acquired. The display of the predetermined value is updated based on the acquired game value value.

As a result, a series of effects for notifying the value can be appropriately performed before and after the occurrence of the advantageous state, so that the interest in the effects can be further enhanced.

[Game machines with 15th to 18th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, when it is not in an advantageous state (for example, ART state) which is an advantageous game period (advantageous section) for the player, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the advantageous state, and in the advantageous state. In some cases, it is known that a lottery can be performed as to whether or not to continue the advantageous state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-240017).

According to such a gaming machine, the gaming period, which is an advantageous section, varies depending on the setting conditions such as the transition probability of the advantageous state and the high and low of the continuation probability. It has become.

By the way, in such a gaming machine, since the amount of the game value given in the predetermined period is within the range of the predetermined ball output rate, the amount of the game value given per unit game in the advantageous state (the amount of increase in the game value) It is designed so that the indicated slope value) is a constant value.

Therefore, when the amount of game value added per unit game in an advantageous state is set to a relatively high value, if the above setting conditions are also set to be advantageous to the player, the game There is a problem that the gambling of is excessively high.

On the other hand, in order to suppress the gambling of the game, the amount of the game value given per unit game in the advantageous state is set to a relatively low value, and the above setting conditions are disadvantageous to the player. It is possible to set it, but in this case, there is a problem that the interest of the game is significantly reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining the interest of a game while maintaining an appropriate degree of gambling.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following fifteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a player's start operation and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) smaller than the first expected value. Main CPU 101) and
The advantageous state control means is
An advantageous state start determining means capable of determining whether or not to start the advantageous state when the advantageous state is not present,
Including the advantageous state continuation determining means capable of determining whether or not to continue the advantageous state in the case of the advantageous state.
The first expected value control means controls so that the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value for at least a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started.
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state including the predetermined period is the second expected value for at least a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled in such a manner.

The gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous state continuation determining means does not determine to continue the advantageous state for at least the specific period after the advantageous state is continued.

When the advantageous state continuation determining means decides to continue the advantageous state, the advantageous state started based on the determination by the advantageous state start determining means to start the advantageous state ends. A gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous state is continued after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high for a predetermined period after the advantageous state is started, and a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. Can be played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, it may not be decided to continue the advantageous state for a specific period after the advantageous state is continued. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately.

Further, even when it is decided to continue the advantageous state during the advantageous state in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state is temporarily terminated and the advantageous state is continued after a predetermined waiting period has elapsed. You may try to (restart). In this way, not only can the ball output rate be managed more appropriately, but also the interest of the game can be improved with respect to whether or not the advantageous state continues.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following 16th configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a player's start operation and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
Predetermining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state to be displayed, and
A specific notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification notifying that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means is provided.
The advantageous state control means is
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started, and the advantageous state is started.
When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated and the condition is terminated.
If the combination of the special symbols is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied, the advantageous state can be terminated.
The specific notification executing means can display the combination of the special symbols in the game when the advance determination means permits the display of the combination of the special symbols in the advantageous state. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized in that the specific notification can be executed.

A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) lower than the first expected value. With the main CPU101)
In the first expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Control and
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value from the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled so as to be.

The predetermined end condition is established based on the fact that the game has been played for a predetermined period after the start of the advantageous state, or that the game value given after the start of the advantageous state has reached a predetermined amount. A gaming machine characterized by playing.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state ends when a predetermined ending condition is satisfied, or when the special gaming state is entered before the predetermined ending condition is satisfied. Then, in the advantageous state, when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is executed. Therefore, the player can continue the advantageous state by avoiding the transition to the special gaming state as long as it is within the specified predetermined end condition. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

It should be noted that, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state until the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. From the time when the fluctuation condition of the above is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state, it may be possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. In this way, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or the special game. It is also possible to shift to a state, end the advantageous state, and try to get an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Can improve the interest of.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the predetermined termination condition may be terminated when a certain privilege is given to the player (or when it is assumed that the privilege is given). In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following 17th configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a player's start operation and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) lower than the first expected value. Main CPU 101) and
The advantageous state control means is
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started, and the advantageous state is started.
When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated and the condition is terminated.
It is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In the first expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Control and
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value from the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled so as to be.

Predetermining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of the special symbols to be displayed, and
A specific notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification notifying that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means is further provided.
The specific notification execution means is
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermining means between the start of the advantageous state and the establishment of the specific variable condition. , The specific notification can be executed when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied.
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermining means between the time when the specific variable condition is satisfied and the time when the advantageous state is terminated. , The gaming machine characterized in that the specific notification can be executed when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means.

The first expected value control means sets the probability that information about the player's stop operation in the advantageous state is notified as the first probability, and thus the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state. Is controlled so as to be the first expected value,
The second expected value control means sets the probability of being notified of information regarding the player's stop operation in the advantageous state as a second probability lower than the first probability, so that the unit game in the advantageous state A gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of the game value per game is controlled to be the second expected value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state to the establishment of a specific variable condition. From the time when the fluctuation condition of the above is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

In addition, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is sent. It may be executed. In this way, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to further maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the expected value of the game value given in the advantageous state may be adjusted by the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified during the advantageous state. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following eighteenth configuration.

A gaming machine that starts a variable display of a symbol based on a player's start operation and stops a variable display of a symbol based on a player's stop operation.
An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified, and
A first expected value control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to the first expected value (for example, the expected value α).
A second expected value control means (for example, an expected value β) capable of controlling the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state to a second expected value (for example, the expected value β) lower than the first expected value. Main CPU 101) and
The advantageous state control means is
When the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is started, and the advantageous state is started.
When the predetermined termination condition is satisfied, the advantageous state is terminated and the condition is terminated.
It is possible to end the advantageous state when a combination of special symbols that enables the transition to the special gaming state is displayed before the predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In the first expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state becomes the first expected value from the start of the advantageous state until a specific fluctuation condition is satisfied. Control and
In the second expected value control means, the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state is the second expected value from the time when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state. Control so that
Further provided with a special privilege granting means (for example, sub CPU201) capable of granting a special privilege not related to the granting of the game value when the advantageous state ends in response to the display of the combination of the special symbols. A game machine featuring.

Predetermining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining whether or not to allow the combination of the special symbols to be displayed, and
A specific notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification notifying that the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means is further provided.
The specific notification execution means is
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermining means between the start of the advantageous state and the establishment of the specific variable condition. , The specific notification can be executed when the specific fluctuation condition is satisfied.
In the advantageous state, when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the predetermining means between the time when the specific variable condition is satisfied and the time when the advantageous state is terminated. , The gaming machine characterized in that the specific notification can be executed when the combination of the special symbols is permitted to be displayed by the prior determination means.

The first expected value control means sets the probability that information about the player's stop operation in the advantageous state is notified as the first probability, and thus the expected value of the game value per unit game in the advantageous state. Is controlled so as to be the first expected value,
The second expected value control means sets the probability of being notified of information regarding the player's stop operation in the advantageous state as a second probability lower than the first probability, so that the unit game in the advantageous state A gaming machine characterized in that the expected value of the game value per game is controlled to be the second expected value.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to play a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high from the start of the advantageous state to the establishment of a specific variable condition. From the time when the fluctuation condition of the above is satisfied until the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to play the game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low. Further, the advantageous state can be ended with the transition to the special gaming state as an opportunity even before the predetermined end condition is satisfied. Further, when the advantageous state ends with the transition to the special game state, it is possible to give special benefits not related to the addition of the game value. That is, for example, when the player plays a game in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, the player can continue the advantageous state until a predetermined end condition is satisfied, or shift to the special game state. It is also possible to end the advantageous state and obtain an opportunity to play the game again in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively high. In addition, when the player shifts to the special gaming state and ends the advantageous state, a special privilege that is not granted when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the advantageous state is terminated is given, so that the player is in an advantageous state. Can also be given an incentive to terminate early. Therefore, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while making the gambling appropriate.

In addition, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the game is played in a state where the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and when the transition to the special gaming state is possible, a specific notification indicating that fact is sent. It may be executed. In this way, it is possible to clearly indicate to the player that there is an option not to continue the game when the expected value of the game value is relatively low, and it is possible to further maintain the interest of the game.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the expected value of the game value given in the advantageous state may be adjusted by the probability that the information regarding the stop operation of the player is notified during the advantageous state. In this way, the ball output rate can be managed more appropriately with a simple configuration.

[Game machine with 19th configuration]
It is known that conventional gaming machines are in a state in which they can shift to an advantageous state (for example, ART state) that is advantageous to the player every predetermined number of games (that is, every predetermined cycle). (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167197).

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to increase the expectation of transition to an advantageous state at predetermined intervals, and thus it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

However, in such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the period until the transition to the advantageous state is fixed is constant and the change in game playability is scarce.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and by making the period until the state in which the transition to the advantageous state becomes possible can be changed, the playability can be made rich in variation. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A first special role (eg, BB1 in another example of playability (No. 2)), a second special role (eg, BB2 in another example of playability (No. 2)), and a predetermined role (eg, playability). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the push order small combination in another example (No. 2), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variable display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
When the combination of the first special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 in another example (No. 2) of the game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can control to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 2) and end the first special game state when the first special end condition is satisfied. When,
When the combination of the second special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 in another example of the game property (No. 2)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) 2nd special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB2 state in the example (No. 2) and end the second special game state when the second special end condition is satisfied. When,
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation is provided.
When the first special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The first special permission state (for example, the BB1 permission state in another example of playability (No. 2)) in which is permitted is continued.
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state in which is permitted (eg, the BB2 permission state in another example of gameplay (part 2)).
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the first special permission state, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the second special permission state, the first special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In a normal gaming state that is neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state (for example, the general gaming state (CZ state) in another example of gameplay (No. 2)), the first special combination or The second special role can be determined as an internal winning role.
The first special end condition is satisfied when a specified number (for example, more than 285) of game values are given in the first special game state.
In the first special gaming state, when the predetermined winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a predetermined number (for example, 9 cards) of game value is given when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode. On the other hand, if the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, the predetermined number of game values are not given.
At least in the first special gaming state, the period during which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is not notified by the notification means functions as a reduction period in which the game value decreases.
The second special gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases.
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the first special gaming state can be set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized by that.

A gaming machine characterized in that a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the first special gaming state functions as the increase period.

In the first special gaming state, when the symbol display means displays a combination of the first specific symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to RB1 in another example of gameplay (No. 2)), the first specific game A first specific gaming state that can be controlled to start a state (for example, the RB1 state in another example of game playability (No. 2)) and end the first specific gaming state when the first specific end condition is satisfied. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
In the second special gaming state, when the symbol display means displays a combination of the second specific symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to RB2 in another example of gameplay (No. 2)), the second specific game A second specific gaming state that can be controlled to start a state (for example, the RB2 state in another example of game playability (No. 2)) and end the second specific gaming state when the second specific end condition is satisfied. A control means (for example, main CPU 101) is further provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the first special gaming state, the first specific combination (for example, RB1 in another example of game playability (No. 2)) can be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the second special gaming state, the second specific combination (for example, RB2 in another example of game playability (No. 2)) can be determined as the internal winning combination.
When the first specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the first special game state, the first specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The first specific permission state (for example, the RB1 permission state in another example of game playability (No. 2)) in which the combination of is permitted to be displayed is continued.
When the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination in the second special game state, the second specific symbol is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The second specific permission state (for example, the RB2 permission state in another example of game playability (No. 2)) in which the combination of is permitted to be displayed is continued.
In the first special gaming state, the period during which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is not notified by the notification means functions as the reduction period regardless of whether or not the first specific permission state is obtained.
A gaming machine characterized in that, in the second special gaming state, the period of the second specific permission state functions as the increase period.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state, if the second special winning combination is won before the first special winning combination, the second special gaming state is entered and the second special gaming state is the gaming value. Acts as an increasing period of increase. On the other hand, in the normal game state, if the first special role is won before the second special role is won, the process shifts to the first special game state, and the operation information related to the stop operation is not notified in the first special game state. , The first special gaming state functions as a reduction period in which the gaming value decreases.

Therefore, in the normal gaming state, the player can continue the advantageous gaming period by repeating the transition to the second special gaming state without shifting to the first special gaming state, but the first special When the game state is changed, the player cannot continue the advantageous game period unless the first special game state is terminated and the game state is changed to the normal game state.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the first special gaming state, operation information regarding a stop operation in which a predetermined number of gaming values are given when a predetermined winning combination is won is provided. It will be notified. Since the first special game state ends when a predetermined number of game values are given, the end time of the first special game state can be accelerated by being notified of such information. That is, depending on whether or not the operation information related to the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state, the period until the normal gaming state in which the transition to the second special gaming state can be achieved can be changed. Therefore, by making the period until the transition to the advantageous state variable, the playability can be made rich in variety.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the period in which the operation information regarding the stop operation is notified in the first special gaming state may also function as an increasing period. In this way, the interest of the game can be maintained even during the period until the state of transition to the advantageous state is reached.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first special gaming state, it is possible to further shift to the first specific permission state, and in the second special gaming state, it is possible to further shift to the second specific permission state, and the first special gaming state. Then, regardless of whether or not the first specific permission state is set, the period during which the operation information related to the stop operation is not notified is made to function as the decrease period, and in the second special gaming state, the period during which the second specific permission state is set is the increase period. May function as. In this way, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Game machines with 20th to 22nd configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the player shifts to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, while when a predetermined disadvantage condition is satisfied, the conventional gaming machine has a predetermined state which shifts to a disadvantageous state which is disadvantageous to the player. It is known that by repeating the transition from the predetermined state to the advantageous state without shifting to, the advantageous state for the player can be continued (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167197). ).

However, in such a gaming machine, when the player shifts from the predetermined state to the disadvantageous state, the player does not have an advantageous state until the predetermined state is changed again. There was a problem that it would end up.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving motivation and interest in playing.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a twentieth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Internal winning from a plurality of roles including a special role (for example, BB in another example of playability (No. 3)) and a specific role (for example, a push order small role in another example of playability (No. 3)). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining a combination, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variable display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
The gaming states include a normal gaming state (for example, the RT0 state in another example of gaming (No. 3)), a special gaming state (for example, a BB state in another example of gaming (No. 3)), and a specific gaming state (for example, a specific gaming state (3)). For example, having another example of playability (RT1 state in Part 3),
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example of game playability (No. 3)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
The specific game state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, bell spills in another example of game playability (No. 3)) is displayed on the symbol display means, and when the specific end condition is satisfied, the above Specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the specific game state, and
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation is provided.
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continuing the state (eg, the BB allowed state in another example of playability (part 3)),
The specific game state control means starts the specific game state when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the normal game state that is not the special permission state.
The specific end condition is satisfied when a specified number of games (for example, 500 games) are played.
The stop control means
In the specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means, and in the specific mode. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The privilege granting means makes it possible to add a specific number of game values when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to add the specified number of game values.
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the normal gaming state and the specific period in the specific gaming state may be set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized by being possible.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information relating to the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the specific gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special role is won, it is in a special permission state, and in a normal gaming state, it is possible to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. In the case of the specific gaming state, it is not possible to display the combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state until the specific gaming state ends. Further, the specific game state shifts to the specific game state based on the fact that when the specific combination is won in the normal game state that is not the special permission state, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed without the stop operation being performed in the specific mode. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the normal gaming state and the specific period in the specific gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified, and if the stop operation is performed according to the notification, The combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the transition to the special gaming state is performed without shifting to the specific gaming state. Not only is it possible to repeat (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value given when a specific role is won is increased. In addition, when the operation information related to a specific mode is notified in the specific game state, it is not possible to shift to the special game state until the specific game state is completed, but when the specific combination is won. The game value given to is increased. In addition, even if the operation information regarding a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during a specific period, the transition to the special gaming state may be repeated without shifting to the specific gaming state. ..

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether it is in a normal gaming state or a specific gaming state, whether it is a specific period in which operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or whether it is specified in the specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information regarding the above-described aspect is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. By doing so, since the game value may increase even in the specific game state, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game even in the specific game state in which the special game state does not occur.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 21st gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Special roles (eg, BB in another example of gameplay (4)), special roles (eg, MB in another example of gameplay (4)) and specific roles (eg, other examples of gameplay (4)) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the push order small combination in 4), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variable display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, the RT0 state in another example of gaming property (4)), a special gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, a BB state in another example of gaming property (4)), It has a first specific gaming state (for example, the RT1 state in another example of gaming (No. 4)) and a second specific gaming state (for example, the RT2 state in another example of gaming (No. 4)).
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to MB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the first specific gaming state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, bell spills in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, and the specific end condition is satisfied. The first specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the termination of the first specific game state, and
A second specific game capable of controlling to start the second specific game state when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination and to end the second specific game state when the special game state is started. State control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation is provided.
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continuing the state (eg, the BB allowed state in another example of playability (4)),
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The state (for example, the MB-permitted state in another example of playability (No. 4)) is continued, and the state is continued.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the special permission state, the special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the special permission state, the special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, which are neither the special permission state nor the special permission state, the special combination or the special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination.
The first specific game state control means sets the first specific game state when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the special permission state and the normal game state that is not the special permission state. Let's get started
The stop control means
In the second specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is not difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
In the first specific gaming state, which is the special permission state, it is difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means, and in the specific mode. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The privilege granting means makes it possible to add a specific number of game values when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to add the specified number of game values.
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state is set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the first specific gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special role is won, it becomes a special permission state and shifts to the second specific gaming state, and it is difficult to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. On the other hand, if you win a special role, you will be in a special permission state, but the game state will not shift, and if it is the first specific game state, the combination of special symbols will be displayed until the end of the first specific game state. This makes it difficult to shift to the special gaming state, and as a result, makes it difficult to shift to the normal gaming state. In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a combination of specific symbols is displayed without performing a stop operation in a specific mode. Migrate based on. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the specific period in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. For example, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special combination or the special combination is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific game state, if a special role is won and a special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal game state via the special game state.

Under such playability, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is entered without shifting to the first specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat the transition (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value that will be given when a specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the first specific game state, for example, in the case of the special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although it is difficult, the game value given when winning a specific role will increase. In addition, even if the operation information related to a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during the specific period, the transition to the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is performed without shifting to the first specific gaming state. May be possible to repeat.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the first specific gaming state, in what order the special combination, the special combination or the specific combination wins in the normal gaming state, the first specific game. In what order the special role or special role wins in the state, whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific mode in the first specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In this way, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even in the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made to.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 22nd gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
Special roles (eg, BB in another example of gameplay (4)), special roles (eg, MB in another example of gameplay (4)) and specific roles (eg, other examples of gameplay (4)) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including the push order small combination in 4), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variable display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
As the gaming state, a normal gaming state (for example, the RT0 state in another example of gaming property (4)), a special gaming state, a special gaming state (for example, a BB state in another example of gaming property (4)), It has a first specific gaming state (for example, the RT1 state in another example of gaming (No. 4)) and a second specific gaming state (for example, the RT2 state in another example of gaming (No. 4)).
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to BB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the combination of special symbols (for example, the combination of symbols related to MB in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the special gaming state is started and the special end condition is satisfied. A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to end the special game state in the case, and
When the first specific gaming state is started when a combination of specific symbols (for example, bell spills in another example of game playability (No. 4)) is displayed on the symbol display means, and the specific end condition is satisfied. The first specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling the termination of the first specific game state, and
A second specific game capable of controlling to start the second specific game state when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination and to end the second specific game state when the special game state is started. State control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A notification means (for example, an instruction monitor) capable of transmitting operation information regarding a player's stop operation is provided.
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continuing the state (eg, the BB allowed state in another example of playability (4)),
When the special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the special permission allows the combination of the special symbols to be displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. The state (for example, the MB-permitted state in another example of playability (No. 4)) is continued, and the state is continued.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
In the special permission state, the special role cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the special permission state, the special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
In the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, which are neither the special permission state nor the special permission state, the special combination or the special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination.
The first specific game state control means sets the first specific game state when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means in the special permission state and the normal game state that is not the special permission state. Let's get started
The specific end condition is satisfied when a specified number of games (for example, 1500 games) are played, and is not satisfied when the special game state is started.
The stop control means
In the second specific game state, which is the special permission state, it is not difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
In the first specific gaming state, which is the special permission state, it is difficult to display the combination of the special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, it is not possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means, and in the specific mode. When the stop operation is not performed, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The privilege granting means makes it possible to add a specific number of game values when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, and stops in the specific mode. If the operation is not performed, it is not possible to add the specified number of game values.
When a specific notification condition is satisfied, the specific period in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state is set as a period (for example, an advantageous section) in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible.

A gaming machine characterized in that at least a period in which the operation information regarding the specific aspect is notified by the notification means in the first specific gaming state functions as an increasing period in which the game value increases.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a special role is won, it becomes a special permission state and shifts to the second specific gaming state, and it is difficult to display a combination of special symbols and shift to the special gaming state. On the other hand, if a special combination is won, the special permission state is set, but the game state does not shift, and if it is the first specific game state, a specified number of games are played and the first specific game state ends. It is difficult to display the combination of special symbols up to and to shift to the special gaming state, and as a result, it is difficult to shift to the normal gaming state. In addition, in the first specific game state, when a specific combination is won in a special permission state and a normal game state that is not a special permission state, a combination of specific symbols is displayed without performing a stop operation in a specific mode. Migrate based on. Then, when a specific notification condition is satisfied, in the specific period in the normal gaming state and the first specific gaming state, the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified when the specific combination is won, and the stop operation is performed according to the notification. For example, the combination of specific symbols is not displayed, and a specific number of game values are given.

Here, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal gaming state, when the specific combination is won, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed and the special combination or the special combination is won before the transition to the first specific gaming state. Then, when the special permission state (second specific game state) or the special permission state is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state or the special game state. Further, even in the first specific game state, if the special role is won and the special permission state (second specific game state) is reached, the game can be played again in the normal game state via the special game state. .. On the other hand, in the first specific gaming state, if a special combination is won and a special permission state is reached, it becomes difficult to play the game again in the normal gaming state until a predetermined number of games are played.

Under such playability, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is entered without shifting to the first specific gaming state. Not only will it be possible to repeat the transition (that is, to continue the game period that is advantageous to the player), but also the game value that will be given when a specific role is won will increase. In addition, when the operation information regarding a specific mode is notified in the first specific game state, for example, in the case of the special permission state, it is possible to shift to the normal game state via the special game state. Although it is difficult, the game value given when winning a specific role will increase. In addition, even if the operation information related to a specific mode is not notified in the normal gaming state during the specific period, the transition to the special gaming state (or the special gaming state) is performed without shifting to the first specific gaming state. May be possible to repeat.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether it is in the normal gaming state or the first specific gaming state, in what order the special combination, the special combination or the specific combination wins in the normal gaming state, the first specific game. In what order the special role or special role wins in the state, whether or not it is a specific period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the normal gaming state, or the specific mode in the first specific gaming state. It is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player in various ways depending on whether or not the operation information is notified during a specific period. Therefore, it is possible to improve the motivation and interest in playing games.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least the period in which the operation information regarding the specific mode is notified in the first specific gaming state may be made to function as an increasing period in which the gaming value increases. In this way, the game value may increase even in the first specific game state, so that the interest of the game is maintained even in the specific game state in which it is difficult to shift to the normal game state. Can be made to.

[Game machines of the 23rd and 24th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, it is possible to shift to an advantageous state (for example, ART state) that is advantageous to the player when a specific condition is satisfied during the carry-over state of a special role (for example, a bonus combination). (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-73810).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, the amount of game value given per unit game in an advantageous state (inclination value indicating the amount of increase in game value) is designed to be a constant value. Therefore, there is a problem that the change in playability is scarce.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and by making it possible to change the slope value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state, it is possible to make the game playability rich in variation. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be played.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 23rd gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
First special role (for example, BB1 in another example of gameplay (No. 5)), second special role (for example, BB3 in another example of playability (No. 5)), first predetermined role (for example, game). Pushing order small winning combination 1, 3, 5 in another example of sex (No. 5) and second predetermined winning combination (for example, pushing order small winning combination 2, 4, 6 in another example of gameplay (No. 5)) An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of winning combinations including
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variable display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
When the combination of the first special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 in another example (No. 5) of the game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 5), and
When the combination of the second special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB3 in another example of the game property (No. 5)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The second special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB3 state in the example (No. 5), and
It is provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
When the first special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB1 flags in another example of playability (No. 5)).
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB3 flags in another example of playability (No. 5)).
When the internal winning combination determining means is neither in the first special permission state nor in the second special permission state, each of the first special combination and the second special combination overlaps with the other internal winning combination. It can be decided as an internal winning role without doing
The stop control means
In a game in which the first special winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination, and in a game in which another internal winning combination is not determined in the first special permission state, when the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate. It is possible to display the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means.
In a game in which the second special winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and in a game in which another internal winning combination is not determined in the second special permission state, when the timing of the stop operation of the player is appropriate. It is possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means.
In the first special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, a predetermined number (for example, nine) of game values are displayed on the symbol display means regardless of the order of the player's stop operations. Is displayed, and the combination of predetermined symbols to which is given is displayed.
In the first special permission state, when the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means does not display the combination of the predetermined symbols regardless of the order of the stop operation of the player.
In the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the order of the stop operations of the player is appropriate, the symbol display means is made to display the combination of the predetermined symbols. On the other hand, if the player's stop operation order is not appropriate, the symbol display means is not displayed with the combination of the predetermined symbols.
In the second special permission state, when the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and when the order of the stop operations of the player is appropriate, the symbol display means is made to display the combination of the predetermined symbols. On the other hand, if the player's stop operation order is not appropriate, the symbol display means is not displayed with the combination of the predetermined symbols.
When a specific advantageous condition is satisfied, the advantageous state control means can set the advantageous state at least for a specific period in the second special permission state.
In the advantageous state, when either the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the player's stop operation for displaying the combination of the predetermined symbols on the symbol display means is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that the order is notified.

The means for determining the internal winning combination is
The first special combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a first probability (for example, 1/100).
The second special combination is determined as an internal winning combination with a second probability (for example, 1/450) lower than the first probability.
The probability that another internal winning combination is not determined in the first special permission state (for example, 1/4000) is higher than the probability that another internal winning combination is not determined in the second special permission state (for example, 1/65536). A gaming machine characterized by being expensive.

The timing of the stop operation of the player who can display the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means is the timing of the player who can display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it does not overlap with the timing of the stop operation.

In a game in which the first special role or the second special role is determined as the internal winning combination, it is possible to notify that either the first special role or the second special role has been determined as the internal winning combination. However, a predetermined notification executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, a bonus winning notification) that does not enable the notification of the type, and
In the first special permission state, it is possible to notify the symbol display means that the combination of the first special symbols is permitted to be displayed, and in the second special permission state, the symbol display means is described. Further, a specific notification executing means (for example, display device 11) capable of executing a specific notification (for example, bonus type notification) that enables notification that the combination of the second special symbols is permitted to be displayed. A game machine characterized by being equipped.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first special combination or the second special combination is won, another internal winning combination is determined in the game or in the first special permission state or the second special permission state after the winning. The combination of the first special symbol or the combination of the second special symbol cannot be displayed unless the game is played (so-called lost). Further, in the first special permission state, when the first predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the push order, and when the second predetermined combination is won, the predetermined number of game values are given regardless of the push order. Not granted. On the other hand, in the second special permission state, when the first predetermined combination or the second predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the push order is correct, and a predetermined number of games are given if the push order is incorrect. No value is given. Then, at least in the specific period of the second special permission state, it is possible to control the player to an advantageous state in which the information on the stop operation of the player is notified.

That is, if the first special combination is won and the combination of the first special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the first special permission state ends. The profit does not fluctuate, and while the player can receive a certain amount of profit, the profit does not increase dramatically, so even if it becomes advantageous, the amount of increase in the game value is shown. The slope value is relatively low. On the other hand, if the second special combination is won and the combination of the second special symbols is not displayed in the game, the first predetermined combination and the second predetermined combination are pushed in order until the second special permission state ends. The profit will fluctuate depending on the situation, and the player may suffer more disadvantages than the first special permission state. On the other hand, if the profit becomes advantageous, the profit will increase dramatically. The slope value indicating the amount of increase in value is relatively high. Therefore, by making the slope value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in variation.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, the winning probability of the first special combination is made higher than the winning probability of the second special combination, and the probability that the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state is the second. The probability that the combination of the second special symbols can be displayed may be higher than the probability that the combination of the second special symbols can be displayed in the special permission state. That is, the first special permission state may be set to a state in which it is easier to shift and end than the second special permission state, and the second special permission state may be set to a state in which it is harder to shift and end than the first special permission state. In this way, it is possible to maintain the interest of the game while keeping the gambling property moderate.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the combination of the first special symbol related to the first special role and the combination of the second special symbol related to the second special role cannot be aimed at the same time when the player pushes the ball. It may be configured to be arranged at intervals. In this way, the playability can be further varied, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first special role or the second special role is won, the fact that one of them is won is notified, but the type is not notified, and the first special permission state and the first special permission state and In the second special permission state, the type may be notified. In this way, it is possible to notify the information desired by the player while making the game playability more varied.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 24th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A first special role (eg, BB1 in another example of playability (No. 6)), a second special role (eg, BB2 in another example of playability (No. 6)), and a specific role (eg, playability). An internal winning combination determining means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations including "F_lip B" in another example (No. 6), and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
A game including a privilege giving means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of giving a privilege according to a combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means when the variable display of a symbol is stopped by the stop control means. It ’s a machine,
When the combination of the first special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB1 in another example (No. 6) of the game property) is displayed on the symbol display means, the first special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB1 state in the example (No. 6), and
When the combination of the second special symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols related to BB2 in another example of the game property (No. 6)) is displayed on the symbol display means, the second special gaming state (for example, the game property and the like) The second special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling to start the BB2 state in the example (No. 6), and
It is provided with an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
When the first special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB1 flags in another example of playability (No. 6)).
When the second special combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state in which is permitted (eg, between the BB2 flags in another example of playability (No. 6)).
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. When the game value bet is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
The stop control means
When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and in the case of the first special permission state, the combination of the specific symbols with the symbol display means (for example, the chance eye in another example of game playability (No. 6)). ) Is not displayed, and in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means.
The advantageous state control means is
The advantage when the bet game value is the first amount, at least when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. It is possible to decide whether or not to give a state,
A gaming machine characterized in that when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to impart the advantageous state.

The stop control means
When the bet game value is the first amount, in the case of the first special permission state, it is possible to make the symbol display means display the combination of the first special symbols, and the second In the case of the special permission state, it is not possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means.
When the bet game value is the second amount, in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display the combination of the second special symbols on the symbol display means, and the first A gaming machine characterized in that it is not possible to display the combination of the first special symbols on the symbol display means in the case of a special permission state.

The internal winning combination determining means further includes a first predetermined combination (for example, push order bell A in another example of playability (No. 6)) and a second predetermined combination (for example, another example of playability (No. 6)). The push order bell B) in can be determined as the internal winning role,
The stop control means
When the first predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, if the player's stop operation mode is appropriate, the symbol display means is displayed with a combination of predetermined symbols to which a predetermined number of game values are given. If the mode of the player's stop operation is not appropriate, the symbol display means is not displayed with the combination of the predetermined symbols.
When the second predetermined combination is determined as the internal winning combination, and the bet game value is the first amount and the first special permission state, the player is not concerned with the mode of the stop operation. Instead, when the symbol display means displays the combination of the predetermined symbols and the bet game value is the first amount and is in the second special permission state, and the bet game value is the second. In the case of the amount of, if the mode of the player's stop operation is appropriate, the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed, while if the mode of the player's stop operation is not appropriate, the symbol display means is described. Without displaying the combination of predetermined symbols
In the advantageous state, the gaming machine is characterized in that information indicating the mode of the player's stop operation for displaying the combination of the predetermined symbols on the symbol display means is notified.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the bet game value is the first amount, the first special role can be won, but the second special role cannot be won. Further, when the bet game value is the second amount, the second special role can be won, but the first special role cannot be won. Further, when a specific combination is won, the combination of specific symbols can be displayed in the first special permission state, and the combination of specific symbols can be displayed in the second special permission state. Then, when the bet game value is the first amount, whether or not to give an advantageous state when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed. Is decidable, and when the bet game value is the second amount, it is not possible to determine whether or not to give an advantageous state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the bet game value is the first quantity, the combination of the first special symbols can be displayed, but the combination of the second special symbols cannot be displayed. Further, when the bet game value is the second quantity, the combination of the second special symbols may be displayed, but the combination of the first special symbols may not be displayed.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, as a state in which the game is performed, for example, a state in which the game is played in the first special permission state in which the first amount of the game value is bet, and the second special permission state. A state in which a first amount of game value is bet and a game is played, a state in which a second amount of game value is bet and a game is played in a first special permission state, and a second special permission state. It is possible to create a plurality of states, that is, a state in which a second amount of game value is bet and a game is played.

Then, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, in the second special permission state, the state in which the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played is set as the state in which the granting of the advantageous state is given preferential treatment. The state in which the game value of 2 is bet and the game is played is defined as the state in which the advantageous state is not given. That is, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the player depending on which amount of the game value is bet and which special role is won in relation to the granting of the advantageous state. Therefore, by making the slope value indicating the amount of increase in the game value in the advantageous state variable, the game playability can be made rich in variation.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first predetermined combination is won, a predetermined number of game values are given if the answer is correct, regardless of which state the player is in. If the answer is correct, a predetermined number of game values will not be given, and if the second predetermined combination is won, the game will be played with the first amount of game value bet in the first special permission state. For example, a predetermined number of game values may be given regardless of the push order, while in other states, the same control as in the first predetermined combination may be performed. In this way, it is possible to make the state in which the first special permission state is bet and the game is played in the first amount of the game value, and the game value is given preferential treatment at the time of winning the predetermined combination. Therefore, the playability can be made more varied.

[Game machines with 25th to 27th configurations]
In a conventional gaming machine, the winning history for a predetermined number of games can be stored, and when the winning history meets a predetermined condition, a predetermined privilege (for example, a notification right) can be granted. (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-205882).

However, in such a gaming machine, the conditions for granting a predetermined privilege are predetermined. Therefore, for example, when the current winning history cannot satisfy the predetermined conditions, the player does not have any problem. There was a problem that it was not possible to hold expectations and the interest of the game might be reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest of a player with respect to the granting of benefits.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 25th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a first combination (for example, a replay combination) and a second combination (for example, a bell).
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variation display of a symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation is provided. It ’s a game machine,
A first state (for example, a first grant state) in which a privilege (for example, points) can be granted when the first combination is won, and a second state in which the privilege can be granted when the second combination is won. (For example, a second grant state), a state determining means capable of determining any of a plurality of states including, and a state determining means.
A state display means (for example, a state display area (MP)) capable of displaying a state suggestion display including the first display suggesting the first state and the second display suggesting the second state is provided. ,
The state display means is characterized by displaying the state suggestion display according to the determination result by the state determination means for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period. Pachinko machine.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state determining means determines a state in a predetermined game in the second period according to a winning combination in the game.

The state determining means determines the state in the predetermined game of the second period to the first state when the first combination is won in the game, and when the second combination is won in the game, the state determining means determines the state in the predetermined game. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state in the predetermined game of the second period is determined to be the second state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of states (for example, the first granting state to the fourth granting state) related to the granting of benefits (for example, points). In addition, a plurality of state suggestion displays (for example, first display to fourth display) can be displayed according to the determined state. Then, the state suggestion display can be displayed for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period according to the determined state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the granting of benefits.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine the state in the predetermined game in the second period according to the winning combination in the game. That is, the degree of advantage of the game varies according to the result of the player's own game, and the degree of advantage in the subsequent game is determined. As a result, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the game, and the operation of the game machine can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, when the first winning combination is won in the game, the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the first state, and the second winning combination is won in the game state. Is configured so that the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the second state. As a result, since the winning combination in the game becomes a chance combination in the subsequent predetermined game, it is possible to make it easier to understand the game property that the subsequent state is generated according to the game result of the player himself / herself. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 26th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a first combination (for example, a replay combination) and a second combination (for example, a bell).
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variation display of a symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation is provided. It ’s a game machine,
A first state (for example, a first grant state) in which a privilege (for example, points) can be granted when the first combination is won, and a second state in which the privilege can be granted when the second combination is won. (For example, a second grant state), a state determining means capable of determining any of a plurality of states including, and a state determining means.
A state display means (for example, a state display area (MP)) capable of displaying a state suggestion display including the first display suggesting the first state and the second display suggesting the second state.
When the first start condition is satisfied (for example, when a prize is won in the raising lip 3), until the first end condition is satisfied (for example, until 10 games are played), the winning probability of the first combination is A first game state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an RT check process) that can be controlled to an increased first game state (for example, RT3), and
When the second start condition is satisfied (for example, when a bonus combination is won), until the second end condition is satisfied (for example, until a game value exceeding a preset game value number is given). A second game state control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a BB check process) that can be controlled to a second game state (for example, a bonus state) in which the winning probability of the second combination is increased is provided.
Regardless of the gaming state, the state display means displays the state suggestion display according to the determination result by the state determining means for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period. A gaming machine characterized by playing.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state determining means determines a state in a predetermined game in the second period according to a winning combination in the game.

The state determining means determines the state in the predetermined game of the second period to the first state when the first combination is won in the game, and when the second combination is won in the game, the state determining means determines the state in the predetermined game. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state in the predetermined game of the second period is determined to be the second state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of states (for example, the first granting state to the fourth granting state) related to the granting of benefits (for example, points). In addition, a plurality of state suggestion displays (for example, first display to fourth display) can be displayed according to the determined state. Then, the state suggestion display can be displayed for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period according to the determined state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the granting of benefits.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, a first state (for example, a first grant state) and a second role (for example, a replay role) in which a privilege can be given when the first combination (for example, a replay combination) is won, and a second combination (for example, a replay combination). , Bell), there is a second state (for example, a second grant state) in which a privilege can be given when winning, and when the first start condition is satisfied (for example, when a prize is won in the raising lip 3), the first Until the end condition of 1 is satisfied (for example, until 10 games are played), it is possible to control the first game state (for example, RT3) in which the winning probability of the first combination is increased, and the second start condition is satisfied. In the case (for example, when a bonus combination is won), the winning probability of the second combination increases until the second termination condition is satisfied (for example, until a game value exceeding a preset number of game values is given). It is possible to control the second game state (for example, a bonus state). Then, the state suggestion display is displayed regardless of the game state. That is, it is possible to create a plurality of states in which the easiness of granting the privilege is different. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player with respect to the granting of benefits.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine the state in the predetermined game in the second period according to the winning combination in the game. That is, the degree of advantage of the game varies according to the result of the player's own game, and the degree of advantage in the subsequent game is determined. As a result, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the game, and the operation of the game machine can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, when the first winning combination is won in the game, the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the first state, and the second winning combination is won in the game state. Is configured so that the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the second state. As a result, since the winning combination in the game becomes a chance combination in the subsequent predetermined game, it is possible to make it easier to understand the game property that the subsequent state is generated according to the game result of the player himself / herself. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 27th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a first combination (for example, a replay combination) and a second combination (for example, a bell).
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variation display of a symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation is provided. It ’s a game machine,
A first state (for example, a first grant state) in which a privilege (for example, points) can be granted when the first combination is won, and a second state in which the privilege can be granted when the second combination is won. (For example, a second grant state), a state determining means capable of determining any of a plurality of states including, and a state determining means.
A state display means (for example, a state display area (MP)) capable of displaying a state suggestion display including the first display suggesting the first state and the second display suggesting the second state.
When a specific start condition is satisfied (for example, when the AT grant lottery is won), a notification state control means (for example, AT) that controls the player to be in a notification state (for example, AT) in which information on the stop operation can be notified to the player for a specific period. , Main CPU101)
The state display means displays the state suggestion display according to the determination result by the state determination means for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period.
When the notification state is not controlled, the specific start condition is applied when the privilege granted in the first state and the second state has a predetermined result (for example, when a specified point is reached). It is possible to decide whether or not to establish it,
When controlled to the notification state, it is possible to determine whether or not to extend the specific period when the privilege granted in the first state and the second state has the predetermined result. A gaming machine featuring.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state determining means determines a state in a predetermined game in the second period according to a winning combination in the game.

The state determining means determines the state in the predetermined game of the second period to the first state when the first combination is won in the game, and when the second combination is won in the game, the state determining means determines the state in the predetermined game. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the state in the predetermined game of the second period is determined to be the second state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of states (for example, the first granting state to the fourth granting state) related to the granting of benefits (for example, points). In addition, a plurality of state suggestion displays (for example, first display to fourth display) can be displayed according to the determined state. Then, the state suggestion display can be displayed for the first period including the game and the second period after the first period according to the determined state. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player with respect to the granting of benefits.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the notification state is not controlled (for example, during non-ART), when the granted privilege has a predetermined result (for example, the specified point is reached). , Whether or not to control the notification state can be determined, and when the notification state is controlled (for example, during AT), the notification state is extended when the granted privilege has a predetermined result. It is possible to decide whether or not. That is, regardless of which state it is in, the granting of benefits is configured to be of great concern to the player. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the player with respect to the granting of benefits.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to determine the state in the predetermined game in the second period according to the winning combination in the game. That is, the degree of advantage of the game varies according to the result of the player's own game, and the degree of advantage in the subsequent game is determined. As a result, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the game, and the operation of the game machine can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, for example, when the first winning combination is won in the game, the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the first state, and the second winning combination is won in the game state. Is configured so that the state in the predetermined game in the second period becomes the second state. As a result, since the winning combination in the game becomes a chance combination in the subsequent predetermined game, it is possible to make it easier to understand the game property that the subsequent state is generated according to the game result of the player himself / herself. It is possible to further improve the interest of the game.

[Game machines with 28th to 30th configurations]
It is known that a conventional gaming machine can execute a plurality of lottery with different execution conditions, and when one of the lottery is won, a privilege (for example, a notification right) that is advantageous to the player can be given. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-200498).

However, in such a gaming machine, if one of the lottery is won, the interest of the game is enhanced, but if one of the lottery is not won, the interest of the game is not enhanced, and the game becomes monotonous. There was a problem that it was not interesting.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, enables a plurality of different lottery to be performed in the player's advantage, and continues the expectation of the player regardless of which lottery is performed. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of the player.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 28th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variation display of a symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation is provided. It ’s a game machine,
A lottery means capable of executing a plurality of different lottery in favor of the player (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing various lottery shown in FIG. 132).
When a specific grant condition is satisfied, a specific right granting means capable of granting a specific right (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of granting a re-lottery right) and
When the specific right is granted and one of the lottery is executed by the lottery means and the lottery is not won, the re-lottery means for executing the re-lottery for the lottery (for example, the re-lottery). A game machine equipped with a main CPU 101) capable of re-lottery according to the right.

It has a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state during non-AT), a predetermined state (for example, a mission state during non-AT and a CZ state), and an advantageous state (for example, during AT).
It is possible to shift from the normal state to the predetermined state according to the fact that the games have been played during the cycle period (for example, 150 games have been played as the number of cycle games).
It is possible to shift from the predetermined state to the advantageous state depending on the fact that a specific transition condition is satisfied in the predetermined state (for example, winning the AT grant lottery).
The lottery means
In the normal state, it is possible to execute a first lottery (for example, a normal shortened lottery) capable of shortening the cycle period.
In the predetermined state, it is possible to execute a second lottery (for example, an AT grant lottery) capable of satisfying the specific transition condition.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein at least the first lottery and the second lottery are lottery objects to be re-lottered by the re-lottery means.

The gaming machine according to the above-described machine, wherein even if the re-lottery is executed by the re-lottery means, the lottery that is the target of the re-lottery may not be won.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a plurality of different lottery (for example, various lottery shown in FIG. 132) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and a specific right (for example, a re-lottery right) is granted. Is possible. Then, when a specific right is granted and one of the lottery is executed and the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is executed for the lottery. That is, regardless of which lottery is performed, the player can have a sense of expectation including the re-lottery if the specific right is granted. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of different lottery in which the player has an advantage, and regardless of which lottery is performed, the player's expectation can be continued and the player's interest can be improved.

The lottery to be re-lottered includes a first lottery (for example, a normal shortened lottery which is a lottery for shortening the cycle period for shifting from the normal state to a predetermined state) and a second lottery (for example, a predetermined lottery). It can be configured to include an AT-granting lottery, which is a transition lottery for transitioning from a state to an advantageous state. That is, even if the state and the lottery target are different, the re-lottery based on the specific right can be executed. As a result, regardless of the game situation, the player's expectation can be maintained and the player's interest can be improved.

Further, even when the re-lottery is executed, it can be configured so that the target lottery may not be won. As a result, the player plays the game with a sense of tension at both the lottery and the re-lottery, so that the interest in the re-lottery can be further improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 29th gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variation display of a symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation is provided. It ’s a game machine,
A lottery means capable of executing a plurality of different lottery in favor of the player (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing various lottery shown in FIG. 132).
When a specific grant condition is satisfied, a specific right granting means capable of granting a specific right (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of granting a re-lottery right) and
When the specific right is granted and one of the lottery is executed by the lottery means and the lottery is not won, the re-lottery means for executing the re-lottery for the lottery (for example, the re-lottery). It is equipped with a main CPU 101) that can be re-lottery according to the right.
It has a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state during non-AT), a predetermined state (for example, a CZ state during non-AT), and an advantageous state (for example, during AT).
It is possible to shift from the predetermined state to the advantageous state depending on the fact that a specific transition condition is satisfied in the predetermined state (for example, winning the AT grant lottery).
The lottery means
In the predetermined state, it is possible to execute a specific lottery (for example, an AT grant lottery) capable of satisfying the specific transition condition.
The specific lottery is a lottery that is subject to re-lottery by the re-lottery means.
There is a first situation in which the expectation that the specific transition condition is satisfied in the predetermined state is low, and a second situation in which the expectation that the specific transition condition is satisfied is higher than that in the first situation.
When the re-lottery is performed based on the specific right when the specific transition condition is not satisfied from the second situation, the situation in which the specific transition condition is less likely to be satisfied than in the second situation is A gaming machine characterized by not being a lottery.

Has additional special states (eg, mission states during non-AT),
It is possible to shift from the normal state to the special state according to the fact that the games have been played during the periodic period (for example, 150 games have been played as the number of periodic games).
It is possible to shift from the special state to the predetermined state depending on the fact that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the special state (for example, winning the CZ grant lottery).
The lottery means
In the normal state, it is possible to execute a normal shortened lottery capable of shortening the cycle period.
In the normal state, in addition to the normal shortened lottery, a special shortened lottery capable of shortening the cycle period can be executed.
In the special state, it is possible to execute a predetermined lottery (for example, a CZ granting lottery) capable of satisfying the predetermined transition condition.
When the cycle period is shortened according to the lottery result by the special shortened lottery and the state shifts to the predetermined state, the predetermined transition condition is always satisfied in the predetermined state.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein at least the normal shortened lottery and the predetermined lottery are lottery targets for re-lottery by the re-lottery means.

The gaming machine according to the above-described machine, wherein even if the re-lottery is executed by the re-lottery means, the lottery that is the target of the re-lottery may not be won.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a plurality of different lottery (for example, various lottery shown in FIG. 132) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and a specific right (for example, a re-lottery right) is granted. Is possible. Then, when a specific right is granted and one of the lottery is executed and the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is executed for the lottery. That is, regardless of which lottery is performed, the player can have a sense of expectation including the re-lottery if the specific right is granted. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of different lottery in which the player has an advantage, and regardless of which lottery is performed, the player's expectation can be continued and the player's interest can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a specific lottery for shifting from a predetermined state to an advantageous state (for example, an AT-granting lottery) can be executed, and the specific lottery becomes a lottery to be re-lottered. There is. Here, in the predetermined state, for example, there are a first situation in which the expectation of winning the specific lottery is low and a second situation in which the expectation of winning the specific lottery is higher than in the first situation. If the re-lottery is performed in the second situation, the re-lottery does not assume that the expectation of winning the specific lottery is lower than that in the second situation. That is, the degree of expectation in a predetermined state is inherited even in the re-lottery. As a result, in the case of re-lottery, the expectation of the target lottery is maintained, so that the player's interest can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the normal shortened lottery and the special shortened lottery, which are the shortened lottery for the transition from the normal state to the special state, can be executed, and the special state is shifted to the predetermined state. A predetermined lottery for the purpose (for example, a CZ-granting lottery) can be executed. Here, the normal shortened lottery and the predetermined lottery are lottery targets for re-lottery. In addition, when the special state is changed due to the lottery result of the special shortened lottery, the state is always changed to the predetermined state. As a result, it is possible to make the expectation of transition to a predetermined gaming state (for example, a predetermined state) various by a plurality of different lottery, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the player. Further, even if the state and the lottery target are different, the re-lottery based on the specific right can be executed. As a result, regardless of the game situation, the player's expectation can be maintained and the player's interest can be improved.

Further, even when the re-lottery is executed, it can be configured so that the target lottery may not be won. As a result, the player plays the game with a sense of tension at both the lottery and the re-lottery, so that the interest in the re-lottery can be further improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a thirtieth gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variation display of a symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation is provided. It ’s a game machine,
A lottery means capable of executing a plurality of different lottery in favor of the player (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing various lottery shown in FIG. 132).
When a specific grant condition is satisfied, a specific right granting means capable of granting a specific right (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of granting a re-lottery right) and
When the specific right is granted and one of the lottery is executed by the lottery means and the lottery is not won, the re-lottery means for executing the re-lottery for the lottery (for example, the re-lottery). It is equipped with a main CPU 101) that can be re-lottery according to the right.
It has a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state or a CZ state during non-AT), an advantageous state (for example, during AT), and a specific state (for example, a pullback state during non-AT).
It is possible to shift from the normal state to the advantageous state depending on the fact that a specific transition condition is satisfied in the normal state (for example, winning the AT grant lottery).
It is possible to shift from the advantageous state to the specific state according to the end of the game period in the advantageous state.
It is possible to shift from the specific state to the normal state according to the end of the game period in the specific state without satisfying the predetermined transition condition in the specific state (for example, without winning the AT pullback lottery). And
It is possible to shift from the specific state to the advantageous state depending on the fact that the predetermined transition condition is satisfied in the specific state before the game period in the specific state ends.
The lottery means
In the normal state, it is possible to execute a first lottery (for example, an AT grant lottery) capable of satisfying the specific transition condition.
In the specific state, a second lottery (for example, AT pullback lottery) capable of satisfying the predetermined transition condition can be executed.
A gaming machine characterized in that at least the first lottery and the second lottery are lottery objects to be re-lottered by the re-lottery means.

The advantageous state includes a first advantageous state (for example, a first section during AT) and a second advantageous state (for example, a second section during AT) that is more advantageous than the first advantageous state.
It is possible to shift from the first advantageous state to the second advantageous state depending on the fact that a special transition condition is satisfied in the first advantageous state (for example, winning the AT promotion lottery).
The lottery means can execute a third lottery (for example, AT promotion lottery) capable of satisfying the special transition condition in the first advantageous state.
Further, the gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the third lottery is a lottery that is a target of re-lottery by the re-lottery means.

The gaming machine according to the above-described machine, wherein even if the re-lottery is executed by the re-lottery means, the lottery that is the target of the re-lottery may not be won.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a plurality of different lottery (for example, various lottery shown in FIG. 132) that is advantageous to the player can be executed, and a specific right (for example, a re-lottery right) is granted. Is possible. Then, when a specific right is granted and one of the lottery is executed and the lottery is not won, the re-lottery is executed for the lottery. That is, regardless of which lottery is performed, the player can have a sense of expectation including the re-lottery if the specific right is granted. Therefore, it is possible to execute a plurality of different lottery in which the player has an advantage, and regardless of which lottery is performed, the player's expectation can be continued and the player's interest can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal state, the first lottery for shifting to the advantageous state (for example, the AT granting lottery) can be executed, and in the specific state of shifting after the end of the advantageous state. , A second lottery (eg, AT pullback lottery) for shifting to the advantageous state again is feasible. The first lottery and the second lottery are lottery targets for re-lottery. As a result, it is possible to make the expectation of transition to a predetermined gaming state (for example, an advantageous state) various by a plurality of different lottery, and it is possible to further improve the interest of the player.

The lottery subject to the re-lottery may be configured to include a third lottery (for example, an AT promotion lottery which is a transition lottery for shifting from the first advantageous state to the second advantageous state). can. That is, even if the state and the lottery target are different, the re-lottery based on the specific right can be executed. As a result, regardless of the game situation, the player's expectation can be maintained and the player's interest can be improved.

Further, even when the re-lottery is executed, it can be configured so that the target lottery may not be won. As a result, the player plays the game with a sense of tension at both the lottery and the re-lottery, so that the interest in the re-lottery can be further improved.

[Game machines with the thirty-first to thirty-third configurations]
A conventional gaming machine that has a plurality of modes, executes a lottery with a winning probability according to a set mode, and makes it possible to give a privilege (for example, a notification right) advantageous to the player when winning. Is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-200498).

However, in such a gaming machine, for example, when a mode that is disadvantageous to the player is set, the game must be played with a low degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits, which reduces the interest of the player. There was a problem that there was.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and provides a gaming machine capable of maintaining the degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits and improving the interest of the player regardless of the set state. With the goal.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a thirty-first gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variation display of a symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation is provided. It ’s a game machine,
When a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, a probability of granting an advantageous state (for example, AT state) in a predetermined period (for example, between 40 games) of a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state during non-AT) is set and set. An advantageous state granting means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing an initial section grant lottery) capable of determining whether or not to grant the advantageous state according to the grant probability.
When a specific grant condition is satisfied, a specific right granting means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing a right grant lottery) capable of determining whether or not to grant a specific right (for example, an advantageous right), and With
A gaming machine characterized in that when the specific right is granted, the grant probability can be changed to a more advantageous one.

The predetermined determination condition can be satisfied each time the game is played for the predetermined period in the normal state.
The grant probabilities include at least a first probability (eg, grant probability "3%"), a second probability higher than the first probability (eg, grant probability "20%"), and the second. A third probability higher than the probability of (for example, grant probability "50%") can be set.
When the first probability is set when the grant probability is set, and when the specific right is granted, the grant probability can be changed to the second probability. It is possible, and when the second probability is set and the specific right is granted, the granting probability can be changed to the third probability. The gaming machine described above.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific granting condition can be satisfied at least once in a specific period (for example, between 120 games) in the normal state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, an advantageous state grant probability is set in a predetermined period of the normal state (for example, between 40 games), and the advantageous state is given according to the set grant probability. Is decided whether or not to grant. Here, when a specific right (for example, an advantageous right) is granted, it is possible to change the grant probability to a more advantageous one. That is, for example, even if a grant probability that is relatively unfavorable to the player is set, the grant probability may be advantageous if a specific right is granted. There is. Therefore, regardless of the set state, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits and improve the interest of the player.

It should be noted that the grant probability is set each time a game is played for a predetermined period in the normal state, and when a specific right is granted, the grant probability may be set so as to increase stepwise. can. As a result, the player's expectation may further change depending on the situation in which the specific right is granted, so that the player's interest can be further improved.

Further, in the specific period of the normal state (for example, between 120 games), the determination of whether or not the specific right is granted can be made at least once. As a result, it is possible to give a player who cannot play for a long time a sense of expectation of granting a specific right, so that the player's interest can be further improved while making the gambling property appropriate.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 32nd gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variation display of a symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation is provided. It ’s a game machine,
When a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, a probability of granting an advantageous state (for example, AT state) in a predetermined period (for example, between 40 games) of a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state during non-AT) is set and set. An advantageous state granting means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing an initial section grant lottery) capable of determining whether or not to grant the advantageous state according to the grant probability.
When a specific grant condition is satisfied, a specific right granting means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing a right grant lottery) capable of determining whether or not to grant a specific right (for example, an advantageous right), and With
When the specific right is granted, it is possible to change the grant probability to a more advantageous one.
Further provided with a specific effect executing means (for example, a display device 11) capable of executing a specific effect for notifying whether or not it is decided to impart the advantageous state.
When the specific effect is granted, the specific effect executing means includes the specific effect in the first aspect, which suggests that the specific effect has been granted before the start of the specific effect, and the specific effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect in the second aspect, which is suggested to have been granted the specific right during the execution of the above, can be executed.

When the specific effect is granted, the specific effect executing means can execute the specific effect in a third aspect in which it is not suggested that the specific right has been granted.
When it is decided to give the advantageous state and the specific effect in the third aspect is executed by the specific effect executing means, a predetermined privilege can be given in the advantageous state. The gaming machine according to the above, further comprising a privilege granting means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of granting a predetermined privilege).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, an advantageous state grant probability is set in a predetermined period of the normal state (for example, between 40 games), and the advantageous state is given according to the set grant probability. Is decided whether or not to grant. Here, when a specific right (for example, an advantageous right) is granted, it is possible to change the grant probability to a more advantageous one. That is, for example, even if a grant probability that is relatively unfavorable to the player is set, the grant probability may be advantageous if a specific right is granted. There is. Therefore, regardless of the set state, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits and improve the interest of the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific effect for notifying whether or not it is decided to grant an advantageous state is executed, it is suggested that the specific right is granted before the start of the specific effect. In some cases, it is suggested that a specific right has been granted during the execution of a specific effect. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the production in relation to the granting of specific rights.

In addition, when a specific effect for notifying whether or not it is decided to grant an advantageous state is executed, it may not be suggested that a specific right has been granted, and in this case, a predetermined privilege is granted. Can be configured to As a result, the degree of advantage of the player changes depending not only on whether or not the specific right has been granted, but also on the content of the effect to be executed, so that the player's interest can be further improved.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a 33rd gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variation display of a symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation is provided. It ’s a game machine,
When a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, a probability of granting an advantageous state (for example, AT state) in a predetermined period (for example, between 40 games) of a normal state (for example, a normal gaming state during non-AT) is set and set. An advantageous state granting means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing an initial section grant lottery) capable of determining whether or not to grant the advantageous state according to the grant probability.
When a specific grant condition is satisfied, a specific right granting means (for example, a main CPU 101 capable of performing a right grant lottery) capable of determining whether or not to grant a specific right (for example, an advantageous right), and
It is provided with a setting means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a setting change confirmation process) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, settings 1 to 6) for changing the degree of advantage of the player. ,
When the specific right is granted, it is possible to change the grant probability to a more advantageous one.
The advantageous state giving means sets an upper limit period (for example, the number of ceiling games) in which the game continues in the normal state at least in response to a new set value being set by the setting means, and the normal state. When the game period in the above reaches the set upper limit period, it is possible to decide to grant the advantageous state.
When the set upper limit period is within the specific period (for example, 160 games), it is further provided with the specific notification execution means (for example, a status display) capable of executing the specific notification that can suggest that fact. A featured game machine.

The advantageous state granting means sets the upper limit period even when the advantageous state ends.
The game according to the above description, wherein the specific notification executing means does not enable the specific notification to be executed when the upper limit period set in response to the termination of the advantageous state is within the specific period. Machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a predetermined determination condition is satisfied, an advantageous state grant probability is set in a predetermined period of the normal state (for example, between 40 games), and the advantageous state is given according to the set grant probability. Is decided whether or not to grant. Here, when a specific right (for example, an advantageous right) is granted, it is possible to change the grant probability to a more advantageous one. That is, for example, even if a grant probability that is relatively unfavorable to the player is set, the grant probability may be advantageous if a specific right is granted. There is. Therefore, regardless of the set state, it is possible to maintain the degree of expectation regarding the granting of benefits and improve the interest of the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, an upper limit period (for example, the number of ceiling games) in which the game continues in the normal state is set according to the set value, and the upper limit in which the game period is set is set. When the period is reached, an advantageous state is given. Then, when the set upper limit period is within the specific period (for example, 160 games), it is possible to execute the specific notification that can suggest that fact. Therefore, it is possible to provide valuable information regarding the granting of benefits.

The upper limit period is set even when the advantageous state ends, but in this case, it can be configured so that the specific notification cannot be executed. This makes it possible to more appropriately provide valuable information regarding the granting of benefits.

[Game machine of invention 1 according to a detailed example]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the player shifts to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, while when a predetermined disadvantage condition is satisfied, the conventional gaming machine has a predetermined state which shifts to a disadvantageous state which is disadvantageous to the player. It is known that by repeating the transition from the predetermined state to the advantageous state without shifting to, the advantageous state for the player can be continued (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167197). ).

According to such a gaming machine, for example, the predetermined state and the advantageous state function as a series of advantageous sections (gaming period advantageous for the player), and the interest of the game is determined by the degree of continuation of the series of advantageous sections. Is becoming fluctuating.

By the way, in recent years, in such a gaming machine, in order to prevent the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high, when the duration of a series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined upper limit (limit), a series of It has been proposed to install a function (limit function) for forcibly ending the advantageous section.

However, when a gaming machine as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167197 is equipped with such a limit function, the predetermined state is also included in a series of advantageous sections, so that the game in the predetermined state is included. When the period becomes long, the duration of a series of advantageous sections is exhausted in a state where the degree of advantage is lower than that in the above-mentioned advantageous state, and there is a problem that the interest of the game is lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even when the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited, the player can play the game in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a decline in the interest of a game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, and a specific state (for example, 32 games) in which it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state ends. Heaven mode), a predetermined state (for example, end mode) in which it is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state again within the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, the advantageous state, the specific state, and the above. A gaming machine provided with a state control means (for example, a pseudo bonus transition lottery, a mode transition lottery, and a main CPU 101 that performs limit processing) for transition control between an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) different from a predetermined state. And
The state control means shifts to the initial state when a specific limiting condition (for example, an operating condition for limit processing) is satisfied at least in the advantageous state and the specific state.
When it is determined by the state control means that the specific state is controlled after the end of the advantageous state, a period shortening means (for example, a ceiling shortening lottery) capable of determining whether or not to shorten the predetermined period is performed. A gaming machine characterized by having a main CPU 101).

Whether to grant the right to continue the advantageous state (for example, 1G continuous stock) regardless of whether or not the state control means determines that the specific state is controlled after the end of the advantageous state. Further equipped with a right granting means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs 1G continuous lottery) capable of determining whether or not to use it.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the state control means controls the advantageous state again when the right is granted by the right granting means when the advantageous state ends.

The advantageous state, the specific state, and the predetermined state are configured to be controllably configured as a series of advantageous sections.
The specific limiting condition is when the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed. ), Or when the amount of game value given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed. The game machine described above, which is configured to be feasible in).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, the period may be further shortened, and thus a series of advantageous states. Even when the duration of the section is limited, it is possible to prevent the player from deteriorating the interest of the game by allowing the player to play the game in a state where the degree of advantage is as high as possible.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, even if it is not determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, the advantageous state is started again by granting the right. Therefore, it is possible to raise the expectation of the player and improve the interest of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, since the continuation of the series of advantageous sections is limited by the continuous gaming period or the amount of the given gaming value, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high. However, the fairness of the game can be guaranteed.

[Game machine of invention 2 according to a detailed example]
It is known that a conventional gaming machine can execute a so-called freeze effect, and when the freeze effect is executed, it is possible to grant more notification rights than when the freeze effect is not executed (). For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-57735).

According to such a gaming machine, since the duration of an advantageous section (for example, AT) in which advantageous notification can be performed for the player is determined by the notification right, whether or not such a freeze effect is executed. Is a matter of great interest to players.

By the way, in recent years, in such a gaming machine, in order to prevent the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high, when the duration of the advantageous section reaches a predetermined upper limit (limit), the advantageous section is forced. It has been proposed to install a function (limit function) to terminate the game.

However, when such a limit function is installed in a gaming machine as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-57735, for example, the limit function is exhibited after the freeze effect is executed many times, which is an advantageous section. When the game is over, there is a problem that the player feels lost and the interest of the game is lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and provides a gaming machine capable of preventing a decline in the interest of a game while suppressing an excessively high gambling of the game. The purpose is to do.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) that is advantageous for the player, and
A control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, a mode) for varying the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state, and a control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101).
A normal state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, an effect section) according to control information set by the control information setting means, and
The advantageous state and the normal state are set as a series of advantageous sections, and when a specific limiting condition (for example, an operating condition for limit processing) is satisfied in the series of advantageous sections, the initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) is controlled. A gaming machine provided with a possible initial state control means (for example, main CPU 101).
When specific control information (for example, heaven C mode) having a high degree of advantage for the player is set by the control information setting means, it is possible to determine to execute a special effect (for example, a special freeze effect). Equipped with a production determining means (for example, main CPU 101)
The special effect determining means can determine to execute the special effect when the specific control information is first set in the series of advantageous sections, and thereafter in the same series of advantageous sections. A gaming machine characterized in that it is not possible to determine to execute the special effect even when the specific control information is set in.

An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) that is advantageous for the player, and
A control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, a mode) for varying the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state, and a control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101).
A normal state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, an effect section) according to control information set by the control information setting means, and
The advantageous state and the normal state are set as a series of advantageous sections, and when a specific limiting condition (for example, an operating condition for limit processing) is satisfied in the series of advantageous sections, the initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) is controlled. A gaming machine provided with a possible initial state control means (for example, main CPU 101).
When specific control information (for example, heaven C mode) having a high degree of advantage for the player is set by the control information setting means, it is possible to determine to execute a special effect (for example, a special freeze effect). Equipped with a production determining means (for example, main CPU 101)
The control information setting means can set the specific control information triggered by the winning of a specific combination (for example, a "fixed combination"), and can also set the specific control information by an opportunity other than the winning of the specific combination. Can be set and
The special effect determining means can determine to execute the special effect when the specific control information is first set in the series of advantageous sections, triggered by the winning of the specific combination. In a series of advantageous sections, it is not possible to decide to execute the special effect even when the specific control information is set after the winning of the specific combination.
The winning of the specific combination is a gaming machine characterized in that it is an opportunity to determine that it is controlled to the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if control information having a high degree of advantage for the player is set a plurality of times, it is controlled so that the special effect is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the duration of a series of advantageous sections is limited to a certain period. In addition, within a series of advantageous sections, it is determined that the control is performed in an advantageous state, triggered by the winning of a specific combination, and control information having a high degree of advantage for the player may be set. Then, within the same series of advantageous sections, even if such a case occurs a plurality of times, it is controlled so that the special effect is not performed each time. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game while suppressing the gambling of the game from becoming excessively high.

[Amusement machine of Inventions 3 to 6 according to a detailed example]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a specific condition is satisfied during a carry-over state of a special combination (for example, a bonus combination), the player shifts to an advantageous state (for example, an ART state), which is advantageous to the player. It is known that the game value can be increased in the above (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-73810).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a device is made to further diversify the mode of giving an advantageous state. However, the more such measures are taken, the greater the control load and the amount of information regarding the granting of an advantageous state, and therefore it is necessary to take such measures into consideration.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and is a gaming machine capable of diversifying its game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of an advantageous state. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
When the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the main performing the winning check / medal payout process). CPU101) and
A gaming machine including an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
Secondary information (for example, sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section) can be determined according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and two according to the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol display means. Secondary information determining means capable of determining the next information (for example, sub-flag at the time of winning an advantageous section),
An advantageous state giving determination means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a pseudo-bonus transition lottery) that can determine whether or not to give the advantageous state according to the secondary information determined by the secondary information determining means. A gaming machine characterized by being equipped.

A first special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a first special gaming state (for example, a 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A second special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a second special gaming state (for example, a 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the first special symbol until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state (eg, between the 3BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
When the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the second special symbol until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state (eg, between the 2BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. When the game value bet is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When the specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control means is a combination of a predetermined symbol with the symbol display means (for example, in the case of the first special permission state). , "Right-up lip"), and in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means.
The secondary information determining means differs in secondary information (for example, when the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means and when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means). The gaming machine according to the above, wherein "communication lip 1" or "communication lip 2") can be determined.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to give a feeling of expectation regarding the granting of an advantageous state not only when the internal winning combination is determined but also when the combination of symbols is displayed. The playability can be diversified.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the information corresponding to the determined internal winning combination and the information corresponding to the combination of the displayed symbols are both managed as common secondary information, which is advantageous. It is possible to suppress an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of the state.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is possible to change the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in the state. It is possible to further diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of an advantageous state.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
When the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the main performing the winning check / medal payout process). CPU101) and
A gaming machine including an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
A first special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a first special gaming state (for example, a 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A second special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a second special gaming state (for example, a 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the first special symbol until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state (eg, between the 3BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
When the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the second special symbol until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state (eg, between the 2BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. When the game value bet is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When the specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control means is a combination of a predetermined symbol with the symbol display means (for example, in the case of the first special permission state). , "Right-up lip"), and in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means.
The advantageous state control means determines whether or not to give the advantageous state at least when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and when the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Decidable and
The privilege giving means gives the same privilege (for example, replay) in the case where the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means and the case where the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be granted.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is advantageous because the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state can be changed even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in the state. It is possible to further diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the addition of the state. In addition, in a game in which a specific role is determined, the same privilege is given regardless of the special permission state, so even if the game playability is changed, the player directly disadvantages. It is possible to prevent it from being covered.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
When the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the main performing the winning check / medal payout process). CPU101) and
A gaming machine including an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
A first special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a first special gaming state (for example, a 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A second special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a second special gaming state (for example, a 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the first special symbol until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state (eg, between the 3BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
When the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the second special symbol until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state (eg, between the 2BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. When the game value bet is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
The stop control means is described when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is determined as an internal winning combination and is in the second special permission state, and when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode. It is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means, and when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, the symbol display means is made to display the combination of the specific symbols. Without making it possible,
The advantageous state control means determines whether or not to give the advantageous state when the specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized by making it possible.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
When the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the main performing the winning check / medal payout process). CPU101) and
A gaming machine including an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
A first special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a first special gaming state (for example, a 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A second special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a second special gaming state (for example, a 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the first special symbol until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state (eg, between the 3BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
When the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the second special symbol until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state (eg, between the 2BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. When the game value bet is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
The stop control means is described when a specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is determined as an internal winning combination and is in the second special permission state, and when a stop operation is performed in a specific mode. It is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means, and when the stop operation is not performed in the specific mode, the symbol display means is made to display the combination of the specific symbols. Without making it possible,
In the advantageous state control means, when the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means and the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to make the degree of advantage regarding the granting of the advantageous state different from that when the advantage state is not provided.

When the specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control means provides the symbol display means with a combination of predetermined symbols (for example, "upward right lip") in the case of the first special permission state. In the case of the second special permission state, when the stop operation is performed in the specific mode, the symbol display means is displayed with the combination of the specific symbols, and the stop operation is performed in the specific mode. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the symbol display means displays a combination of the predetermined symbols when the symbol is not displayed.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the content of the decision regarding the granting of the advantageous state even if the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in and the mode of the player's stop operation. Therefore, it is possible to further diversify the game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of an advantageous state.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
When the change display of the symbol is stopped by the stop control means, the privilege granting means capable of granting the privilege according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means (for example, the main performing the winning check / medal payout process). CPU101) and
A gaming machine including an advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) in which information regarding a player's stop operation is notified.
A first special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a first special gaming state (for example, a 3BB state) when a combination of first special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 3BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. Control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A second special gaming state in which it is possible to control to start a second special gaming state (for example, a 2BB state) when a combination of second special symbols (for example, a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is displayed on the symbol display means. A control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
When the first special combination (for example, "F_3BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the first special symbol until the combination of the first special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the first special permission state (eg, between the 3BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
When the second special combination (for example, "F_2BB") is determined as the internal winning combination, the symbol display means of the second special symbol until the combination of the second special symbols is displayed on the symbol display means. Continue the second special permission state (eg, between the 2BB flags) where the combination is allowed to be displayed,
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the first amount (for example, three cards), the first special combination is internally won. When the game value bet is a second amount (for example, two cards), the first special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When neither the first special permission state nor the second special permission state is made and the bet game value is the second amount, the second special combination can be determined as an internal winning combination. , When the bet game value is the first amount, the second special combination cannot be determined as an internal winning combination.
When the specific combination (for example, "F_replay A") is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop control means is a combination of a predetermined symbol with the symbol display means (for example, in the case of the first special permission state). , "Right-up lip"), and in the case of the second special permission state, it is possible to display a combination of specific symbols (for example, "parallel lip") on the symbol display means.
The advantageous state control means is
When the combination of the predetermined symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, it is controlled to the first grant state (for example, "stable state").
When the combination of the specific symbols is displayed on the symbol display means, it is controlled to the second grant state (for example, "rough wave state").
Continue the controlled grant state until a predetermined termination condition is met (eg, until a pseudo-bonus transition is determined).
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to determine whether or not to grant the advantageous state according to a controlled granting state.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the predetermined termination condition is satisfied when it is determined to impart the advantageous state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the stop display mode can be changed even when the same specific combination is determined, depending on which special permission state is in, and this is an advantageous state. Since it is possible to change the granting state of the pachinko machine, it is possible to diversify the playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of the advantageous state.

[Amusement machines of Inventions 7 to 12 according to a detailed example]
In the conventional gaming machine, a normal section and an advantageous section can be set as a state in which the game is played, the effect state is set to the AT state (advantageous state) in the advantageous section, and the AT state is set at the end of the advantageous section. In some cases, it is known that the AT state can be forcibly terminated by the initialization process even if the predetermined termination condition for the AT state is not satisfied (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185099). See Gazette).

By the way, with such a gaming machine, although it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high, the advantageous state suddenly ends in the middle of the process, so that the player feels distrust or loss. There was a problem that it may reduce the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that takes into consideration the emotions of the player while suppressing excessively high gambling. do.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the said Regardless of which of the specific states, the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state, and
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the special limit processing (game number) is executed). In the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a second regulating means (for example, a special limit process (number of games)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state is performed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a main CPU 101).

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific period is set shorter than the predetermined period according to the sustainable period of the advantageous state (for example, "55 games").

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the amount of game value given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), the said With the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state regardless of the advantageous state or the specific state. ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. In the case of the advantageous state, the second regulating means (for example, special limit processing (payout)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state when shifting to the specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a main CPU 101) that performs a number).

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific amount is set to be less than the predetermined amount according to the amount of game value that can be imparted in the advantageous state (for example, "275 sheets").

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game granted when the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period or in the series of advantageous sections. When the value amount reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantageous sections When the amount of game value given in the section becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount, and if it is in an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections is terminated when shifting to the specific state.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the sustainable period of the advantageous state or the amount of the game value that can be granted, so that while considering the emotions of the player, It is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely regulated.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the said Regardless of which of the specific states, the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state, and
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the special limit process (game number) is executed). If it is not the advantageous state, the advantageous state is shifted to the advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and the specific state is shifted, the series of advantageous sections are terminated and controlled to the initial state. A gaming machine provided with two regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs special limit processing (number of games)).

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific period is set shorter than the predetermined period according to the sustainable period of the advantageous state (for example, "55 games").

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the amount of game value given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), the said With the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state regardless of the advantageous state or the specific state. ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. When), if it is not the advantageous state, it shifts to the advantageous state, and when the shifted advantageous state ends and shifts to the specific state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated and the initial state is completed. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a second regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs special limit processing (number of payouts)).

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the specific amount is set to be less than the predetermined amount according to the amount of game value that can be imparted in the advantageous state (for example, "275 sheets").

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game granted when the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period or in the series of advantageous sections. When the value amount reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantageous sections When the amount of game value given in the section becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount, if it is not in an advantageous state, it shifts to an advantageous state, and when the transferred advantageous state ends and shifts to a specific state. , I am trying to end a series of advantageous sections.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it in. Further, when ending a series of advantageous sections in this way, if it is not in an advantageous state, it is shifted to an advantageous state and then ended. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific period or the specific amount is set in consideration of the sustainable period of the advantageous state or the amount of the game value that can be granted, so that while considering the emotions of the player, It is possible to prevent the amount of game value given to the player from being extremely regulated.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the said Regardless of which of the specific states, the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state, and
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the special limit process (game number) is executed). In the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a second regulating means (for example, a special limit process (number of games)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state is performed. Main CPU101) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A special period shorter than the specific period can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes the set special period (for example, (When the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the quasi-limit process (number of games) is executed), the third is to suppress the granting of the right by the right granting means in the series of advantageous sections thereafter. A gaming machine provided with a regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of games)).

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the amount of game value given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), the said With the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state regardless of the advantageous state or the specific state. ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. In the case of the advantageous state, when the state shifts to the specific state, the second restricting means (for example, special limit processing (game)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state. The main CPU 101) that performs the number) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A special amount smaller than the specific amount can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and the game value granted in the series of advantageous sections becomes the special amount set. When (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the right is granted by the right granting means in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. A gaming machine provided with a third regulating means for suppressing (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of payouts)).

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game granted when the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period or in the series of advantageous sections. When the value amount reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantageous sections When the amount of game value given in the section becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount, and if it is in an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections is terminated when shifting to the specific state.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights, but the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections is shorter than the specific period, depending on the number of granted rights. When the set special period is reached, or when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous sections is less than the specific amount and becomes the special amount set according to the number of rights granted, thereafter. Granting of rights is suppressed in a series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes the first amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes the value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed). , The main CPU 101 that performs the first regulating means (for example, the normal limit processing (number of payouts)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state regardless of the advantageous state or the specific state. )When,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a second amount smaller than the first amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter is executed as a special limit process (payout number)). When the value reaches Main CPU 101) that performs limit processing (number of games) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A third amount smaller than the second amount can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and the game value amount granted in the series of advantageous sections is set. When the amount reaches 3 (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the right is granted by the right granting means in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. 3rd regulatory means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of payouts)) and
A first counting means (for example, an advantageous section payout number counter) for counting the first amount, and
A second counting means (for example, a control payout number counter) for counting the second amount and the third amount is provided.
When a specific combination (for example, "pushing order bell A") is won, a predetermined amount (for example, 8 cards) of game value is given when the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the correct pressing order). , The predetermined amount of game value is not given unless the stop operation is performed in the specific mode.
The second counting means is characterized in that when the specific combination is won, counting is performed on the assumption that the predetermined amount of game value is given regardless of whether or not the stop operation is performed in the specific mode. A game machine to play.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and when the game value amount given in this series of advantageous sections becomes the first amount, this series of advantageous sections. Is forcibly terminated, but when the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections becomes a second amount less than the first amount, if it is in an advantageous state, it becomes a specific state. At the time of transition, a series of advantageous sections are terminated.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted right, but the game value granted in the series of advantageous sections is less than the second amount and is granted. When the third amount is set according to the number of rights, the granting of rights is suppressed in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least in counting the second amount and the third amount, it should be originally given due to, for example, an operation error of the player or ignoring the instruction. Even if there is a difference between the existing game value amount and the actually granted game value amount, the difference is not taken into consideration and the count is based on the game value amount that was originally supposed to be given. Is supposed to be done. As a result, a series of advantageous sections may be extended more than necessary due to the actions of such a player, and unfairness may occur between the player who has performed such an action and the player who has not performed such an action. Since it is possible to prevent it from being stored, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the said Regardless of which of the specific states, the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state, and
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the special limit process (game number) is executed). In the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a second regulating means (for example, a special limit process (number of games)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state is performed. Main CPU101) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A special period shorter than the specific period can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes the set special period (for example, (When the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the quasi-limit process (number of games) is executed), the third is to suppress the right from being granted by the right granting means in the series of advantageous sections thereafter. It is equipped with a regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of games)).
When winning in the specific state, there is a definite role (for example, "confirmed cherry") in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed.
When the winning combination is won, a combination of special symbols (for example, "fixed cherry lip") can be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, other than the first right stop). When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, the first right stop), the combination of the special symbols is not displayed, and the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, "middle lip") is displayed. Configured to be displayed,
The combination of the predetermined symbols is a combination of symbols that can be displayed even when a combination other than the fixed combination is won.
When the granting of rights by the rights-granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means, and when the determinant is won, the special notification means (for example, a display device) that notifies the specific mode as a procedure of the stop operation. A gaming machine further provided with a sub CPU 201) for displaying a special notification on the eleven.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the amount of game value given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), the said With the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state regardless of the advantageous state or the specific state. ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. In the case of the advantageous state, when the state shifts to the specific state, the second restricting means (for example, special limit processing (game)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state. The main CPU 101) that performs the number) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A special amount smaller than the specific amount can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and the game value amount granted in the series of advantageous sections becomes the special amount set. When (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the right is granted by the right granting means in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. A third regulating means for suppressing (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of payouts)) is provided.
When winning in the specific state, there is a definite role (for example, "confirmed cherry") in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed.
When the winning combination is won, a combination of special symbols (for example, "fixed cherry lip") can be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, other than the first right stop). When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, the first right stop), the combination of the special symbols is not displayed, and the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, "middle lip") is displayed. Configured to be displayed,
The combination of the predetermined symbols is a combination of symbols that can be displayed even when a combination other than the fixed combination is won.
When the granting of rights by the rights-granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means, and when the determinant is won, the special notification means (for example, a display device) that notifies the specific mode as a procedure of the stop operation. A gaming machine further provided with a sub CPU 201) for displaying a special notification on the eleven.

When the granting of the right by the right granting means is not suppressed by the third regulating means, and the winning combination is won, the advantageous state is started from the next game.
The gaming machine according to the above-described machine, characterized in that, when the granting of rights by the rights-granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means and the winning combination is won, the advantageous state is started from the current game. ..

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game granted when the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period or in the series of advantageous sections. When the value amount reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantageous sections When the amount of game value given in the section becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount, and if it is in an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections is terminated when shifting to the specific state.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights, but the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections is shorter than the specific period, depending on the number of granted rights. When the set special period is reached, or when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous sections is less than the specific amount and becomes the special amount set according to the number of rights granted, thereafter. Granting of rights is suppressed in a series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a winning combination is won in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed in a state where the granting of the right is suppressed, a combination of special symbols that can clearly recognize the winning of the fixed combination. Special notification is provided to prevent the display of. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the special notification is performed, the advantageous state that was originally supposed to be started from the next game is started from this game. As a result, the player can be made to perform the stop operation according to the special notification in a natural flow, so that even when such a special notification is performed, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable. can.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period (for example, when the value of the advantageous section game number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), the advantageous state and the said Regardless of which of the specific states, the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of games)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state, and
When the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, when the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the special limit process (game number) is executed). In the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, a second regulating means (for example, a special limit process (number of games)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state is performed. Main CPU101) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A special period shorter than the specific period can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes the set special period (for example, (When the value of the control game number counter becomes a value at which the quasi-limit process (number of games) is executed), the third is to suppress the right from being granted by the right granting means in the series of advantageous sections thereafter. It is equipped with a regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of games)).
When winning in the specific state, there is a definite role (for example, "confirmed cherry") in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed.
When the winning combination is won, a combination of special symbols (for example, "fixed cherry lip") can be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, other than the first right stop). When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, the first right stop), the combination of the special symbols is not displayed, and the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, "middle lip") is displayed. Configured to be displayed,
The combination of the predetermined symbols is a combination of symbols that can be displayed even when a combination other than the fixed combination is won.
When the granting of rights by the rights granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means, and when the determinant is won, the special notification means (for example, a display device) that notifies the specific mode as a procedure of the stop operation. Sub CPU 201) that displays special notification on 11 and
When the granting of rights by the rights granting means is not suppressed by the third regulatory means, and when the combination of the special symbols is displayed, it is possible to perform special notification (for example, the popular power of the special winning sound). When the granting of the right by the right-granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means, and the combination of the special symbols is displayed, the special notification means that does not enable the special notification ( For example, a gaming machine further provided with a sub CPU201) that outputs a special winning sound from the speaker group 84.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation to shift to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A gaming machine having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and capable of controlling the advantageous state and the specific state as a series of advantageous sections.
When the amount of game value given in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount (for example, when the value of the advantageous section payout number counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), the said With the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts)) that terminates the series of advantageous sections and controls the initial state regardless of the advantageous state or the specific state. ,
When the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the special limit process (payout number) is executed. In the case of the advantageous state, when the state shifts to the specific state, the second restricting means (for example, special limit processing (game)) for ending the series of advantageous sections and controlling the initial state. The main CPU 101) that performs the number) and
A right granting means (for example, a 1G continuous lottery) capable of granting a right (for example, 1G continuous stock) capable of extending the advantageous state by a predetermined playable period (for example, "55 games") is performed. )When,
A special amount smaller than the specific amount can be set according to the number of rights granted by the right granting means, and the game value amount granted in the series of advantageous sections becomes the special amount set. When (for example, when the value of the control payout number counter becomes the value at which the quasi-limit process (payout number) is executed), the right is granted by the right granting means in the subsequent series of advantageous sections. A third regulating means for suppressing (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs quasi-limit processing (number of payouts)) is provided.
When winning in the specific state, there is a definite role (for example, "confirmed cherry") in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed.
When the winning combination is won, a combination of special symbols (for example, "fixed cherry lip") can be displayed when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined mode (for example, other than the first right stop). When the stop operation is performed in a specific mode different from the predetermined mode (for example, the first right stop), the combination of the special symbols is not displayed, and the combination of the predetermined symbols (for example, "middle lip") is displayed. Configured to be displayed,
The combination of the predetermined symbols is a combination of symbols that can be displayed even when a combination other than the fixed combination is won.
When the granting of rights by the rights granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means, and when the determinant is won, the special notification means (for example, a display device) that notifies the specific mode as a procedure of the stop operation. Sub CPU 201) that displays special notification on 11 and
When the granting of rights by the rights granting means is not suppressed by the third regulatory means, and when the combination of the special symbols is displayed, it is possible to perform special notification (for example, the popular power of the special winning sound). When the granting of the right by the right-granting means is suppressed by the third regulating means, and the combination of the special symbols is displayed, the special notification means that does not enable the special notification ( For example, a gaming machine further provided with a sub CPU201) that outputs a special winning sound from the speaker group 84.

When the special notification means wins the definite combination, the special notification means does not notify the specific mode, and when the combination of the special symbols is displayed, the special notification means. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the special notification is not performed when the specific mode is notified by the special notification means and the combination of the special symbols is displayed. ..

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the game granted when the game period in the series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined period or in the series of advantageous sections. When the value amount reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated, but when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period, or this series of advantageous sections When the amount of game value given in the section becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount, and if it is in an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections is terminated when shifting to the specific state.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state, and the series of advantageous sections is completed within a certain period of time in a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. It is possible to end it in. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state may be extended by the granted rights, but the gaming period in the series of advantageous sections is shorter than the specific period, depending on the number of granted rights. When the set special period is reached, or when the amount of game value granted in a series of advantageous sections is less than the specific amount and becomes the special amount set according to the number of rights granted, thereafter. Granting of rights is suppressed in a series of advantageous sections. As a result, for example, a right that cannot be consumed by the player is granted, and as a result of forcibly ending a series of advantageous sections in such a state, the player feels distrust or loss. Since this can be prevented, it is possible to consider the emotions of the player while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a winning combination is won in which the transition to the advantageous state is confirmed in a state where the granting of the right is suppressed, a combination of special symbols that can clearly recognize the winning of the fixed combination. Special notification is provided to prevent the display of. In addition, in a state where the granting of rights is not suppressed, it is possible to give a special notification when a combination of special symbols is displayed by winning a fixed combination, while the granting of rights is suppressed. Therefore, when a combination of special symbols is displayed in the winning combination, it is not possible to give a special notification. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling that, for example, the winning of the definite role was a useless winning. In other words, by preventing the player from clearly recognizing the trigger when the advantageous state is started in the state where the grant of the right is suppressed, the game is suppressed while suppressing the excessively high gambling. It is possible to consider the emotions of the person.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, whether or not to perform special notification depending on whether or not the winning combination is won, whether or not a combination of special symbols is displayed, and whether or not special notification is performed. I try to decide. As a result, it is possible to more appropriately manage the situation in which the special notification is performed.

[Game machine of invention 13 according to a detailed example]
In the conventional gaming machine, a normal section and an advantageous section can be set as a state in which the game is played, the effect state is set to the AT state (advantageous state) in the advantageous section, and the AT state is set at the end of the advantageous section. In some cases, it is known that the AT state can be forcibly terminated by the initialization process even if the predetermined termination condition for the AT state is not satisfied (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185099). See Gazette).

By the way, with such a gaming machine, although it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high, the advantageous state suddenly ends in the middle of the process, so that the player feels distrust or loss. There was a problem that it may reduce the interest of the game.

In such a gaming machine, for example, a game is enabled only when the gaming value of the first amount (for example, three cards) is bet, or not only the first amount but also the second amount. Various specifications can be adopted for the specifications of the amount of game value to be bet, such as those that enable the game even if the amount of game value (for example, two) is bet. In general, it is more advantageous for the player when more game value is bet. Therefore, for example, the degree of advantage of the advantageous state is set assuming the case where the first amount of game value is bet. That is, in such a case, betting the first amount of the game value and playing the game is the intended game method, but the game should be played by such a game method. It is considered necessary to devise ways to encourage the players.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and it is emotional to a player who plays a game by a intended game method while suppressing excessively high gambling. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of encouraging a player who does not play a game by the planned game method to play the game by the planned game method by taking consideration.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation of shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. It has an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section), the advantageous state and the specific state can be controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the bet game value is a first amount (for example, three cards). It is a gaming machine capable of playing a game in both the case where the amount is 2 and the case where the amount is a second amount (for example, two pieces) smaller than the first amount.
In both cases where the bet game value is the first amount and the second amount, when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a predetermined period (for example, the advantageous section). When the value of the number of games counter reaches the value at which the normal limit processing (number of games) is executed), the series of advantageous sections is terminated regardless of whether the advantageous state or the specific state is reached. The first regulating means for controlling the initial state (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of games)) and
When the bet game value is the first amount, when the game period in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than the predetermined period (for example, the value of the control game number counter is special limit processing. When (the number of games) reaches a value to be executed), in the case of the advantageous state, when shifting to the specific state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated and the initial state is controlled. A gaming machine provided with two regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs special limit processing (number of games)).

The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation of shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. It has an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section), the advantageous state and the specific state can be controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and the bet game value is a first amount (for example, three cards). It is a gaming machine capable of playing a game in both the case where the amount is 2 and the case where the amount is a second amount (for example, two pieces) smaller than the first amount.
When the bet game value is the predetermined amount in both the case where the bet game value is the first amount and the case where the bet game value is the second amount (the game value amount given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a predetermined amount ( For example, when the value of the advantageous section payout counter becomes a value at which the normal limit processing (payout number) is executed), the series of advantageous sections may be in either the advantageous state or the specific state. (For example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts)) and the first regulating means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs normal limit processing (number of payouts))
When the bet game value is the first amount, when the game value given in the series of advantageous sections becomes a specific amount less than the predetermined amount (for example, the value of the payout number counter for control). Is the value at which the special limit processing (number of payouts) is executed), and when the state is in the advantageous state, the series of advantageous sections is terminated and the initial state is set when the state shifts to the specific state. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a second regulating means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs special limit processing (number of games)).

At least in the series of advantageous sections, the case where the second amount of game value is bet and the game is played is better than the case where the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played. The gaming machine described above, which is characterized by being disadvantageous to the player.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are controlled as a series of advantageous sections, and regardless of the amount of the game value bet and the game is played, the advantageous state is in the series of advantageous sections. When the gaming period reaches a predetermined period, or when the amount of game value given in this series of advantageous sections reaches a predetermined amount, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated. In addition, when the first amount of game value is bet and the game is played, when the game period in this series of advantageous sections becomes a specific period shorter than a predetermined period, or in this series of advantageous sections. When the amount of game value given becomes a specific amount less than a predetermined amount, and if it is in an advantageous state, a series of advantageous sections is terminated when shifting to the specific state. When the game is played with the game value of 2 being bet, such control is not performed.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the first amount of gaming value is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections is not forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state. , It is possible to end a series of advantageous sections within a certain period by a natural flow accompanying the end of the advantageous state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling distrust or loss while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player. It is said. On the other hand, when a second amount of game value is bet and the game is played, a series of advantageous sections may be forcibly terminated in the middle of the advantageous state. Since it is possible to make the player aware that the game was not performed by the specified game method, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game by the intended game method.

In a series of advantageous sections, it is more disadvantageous for the player when the game is played with the second amount of game value bet than when the game is played with the first amount of game value bet. Therefore, by enabling such a warning, it is possible to encourage the player to play the game in a more advantageous state, and to play the game in a game method that the player does not intend. It is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the above.

[Amusement machines of Inventions 14 to 17 according to a detailed example]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a predetermined advantageous condition is satisfied, the player shifts to an advantageous state which is advantageous to the player, while when a predetermined disadvantage condition is satisfied, the conventional gaming machine has a predetermined state which shifts to a disadvantageous state which is disadvantageous to the player. It is known that by repeating the transition from the predetermined state to the advantageous state without shifting to, the advantageous state for the player can be continued (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-167197). ).

According to such a gaming machine, for example, the predetermined state and the advantageous state function as a series of advantageous sections (gaming period advantageous for the player), and the interest of the game is determined by the degree of continuation of the series of advantageous sections. Is becoming fluctuating.

By the way, in such a gaming machine, it is possible to further enhance the interest of the game by making the probability of transition to the advantageous state in the predetermined state variable.

However, for example, when the probability of transition to the advantageous state is high, the player's motivation and interest in playing are improved, while when the probability of transition to the advantageous state is low, the player's game is played. There was a problem that motivation and interest were reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of maintaining a gaming motivation and a hobby even when the transition probability to an advantageous state fluctuates. And.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, and a specific state (for example, 32 games) in which it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period (for example, 32 games) after the advantageous state ends. Heaven mode), the first predetermined state (for example, the end mode) in which it is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state again within the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, and after the end of the advantageous state. A state control means (for example, a state control means for transition control between a second predetermined state (for example, heaven preparation mode), which is more advantageous than the first predetermined state, although it is not determined that the advantageous state will be controlled again within the predetermined period. For example, a gaming machine provided with a main CPU 101) that performs a pseudo bonus transition lottery and a mode transition lottery.
The state control means can control any of the specific state, the first predetermined state, and the second predetermined state when the advantageous state ends.
When the advantageous state is started, notification according to a predetermined mode (for example, lighting of the advantageous section lamp) is started, and the notification is started.
At least within the predetermined period, the notification according to the predetermined mode is continued, and the notification is continued.
When the predetermined period elapses, if the control is performed in the first predetermined state, the notification according to the predetermined mode is terminated, and if the control is performed in the second predetermined state, the notification according to the predetermined mode is issued. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a state notification means (for example, an advantageous section lamp) that can be continued.

The state control means is higher when the advantageous state is controlled from the second predetermined state to the advantageous state and ends, than when the advantageous state is controlled from the first predetermined state to the advantageous state and ends. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it can be controlled to the specific state with a probability.

An advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, and a first predetermined state (for example, end A mode) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state again after the advantageous state ends is a predetermined probability. A state control means for transition control between a second predetermined state (for example, heaven preparation mode) in which the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state again after the end of the advantageous state is a specific probability higher than the predetermined probability. (For example, a gaming machine provided with a pseudo-bonus transition lottery and a main CPU 101 that performs a mode transition lottery).
The state control means can control to either the first predetermined state or the second predetermined state when the advantageous state ends.
When the advantageous state is started, notification according to a predetermined mode (for example, lighting of the advantageous section lamp) is started, and the notification is started.
At least within a predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state, the notification in the predetermined mode is continued, and the notification is continued.
When the predetermined period elapses, if the control is performed in the first predetermined state, the notification according to the predetermined mode is terminated, and if the control is performed in the second predetermined state, the notification according to the predetermined mode is issued. A gaming machine characterized in that it is provided with a state notification means (for example, an advantageous section lamp) that can be continued.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the advantageous state ends, a specific state in which it is determined that the advantageous state is controlled again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, and a predetermined period after the advantageous state ends. The first predetermined state, which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state again within the period, and the first predetermined state, which is not determined to be controlled to the advantageous state again within a predetermined period after the advantageous state is completed, are more advantageous than the first predetermined state. It is possible to control to any of the second predetermined states.

Then, from the time when the advantageous state is started, the same notification is performed in any state during the predetermined period after the advantageous state ends, and when the predetermined period elapses, the first predetermined state is reached. If so, the notification is terminated, and if it is in the second predetermined state, the notification may be continued. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if the notification continues even after a predetermined period has passed after the end of the advantageous state, if the next advantageous state is started, the state shifts to the specific state after the end. Therefore, even if the player does not shift to a specific state after the end of the advantageous state, it is possible to maintain the motivation and interest in playing the game.

In the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the advantageous state ends, the first predetermined state in which the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state again is a predetermined probability, and the probability of being controlled in the advantageous state again is higher than the predetermined probability. It is possible to control to any state of the second predetermined state which is a probability, and it is the same regardless of the state from the time when the advantageous state is started to the predetermined period after the end of the advantageous state. When the notification is performed and the predetermined period elapses, the notification may be terminated if it is in the first predetermined state, and may be continued if it is in the second predetermined state. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) that is advantageous for the player, and
A control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, a mode) for varying the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state, and a control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101).
A gaming machine including a normal state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, an effect section) according to control information set by the control information setting means.
In the normal state, the first effect means (for example, the bet lamp display unit (BL)) capable of executing the first effect (for example, the bet lamp change effect) with different probabilities according to the control information set by the control information setting means. ))When,
A second effect means (for example, a reel side lamp display unit) capable of executing a second effect (for example, a reel side lamp effect) in a different effect mode depending on the number of times the first effect is executed by the first effect means. SL)), a gaming machine characterized by being equipped with.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the second effect is an effect performed in a non-gaming state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal state, the first effect is performed with a different probability according to the expected degree of granting the advantageous state, and further, the second effect is performed in a different effect mode depending on the number of times the first effect is executed. Allows to be done. That is, for example, even if the game is not performed from the beginning in the normal state, it may be possible to estimate the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the first effect and the effect mode of the second effect as clues. It has become. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, since the second effect is performed in the non-gaming state, the effect mode of the second effect can be an effective index for the player who is going to play the game from now on. As a result, it is possible to increase the motivation for playing and improve the operation of the gaming machine.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) that is advantageous for the player, and
A control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, a mode) for varying the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state, and a control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101).
A gaming machine including a normal state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, an effect section) according to control information set by the control information setting means.
In the normal state, the specific effect means (for example, the bet lamp display unit (BL)) capable of executing the specific effect (for example, the bet lamp change effect) with different probabilities according to the control information set by the control information setting means. With
The specific effect means is a bet number display means for displaying the number of bets of the game value.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific effect is executed by changing the display mode of the bet number display means to a display mode different from the usual display mode.

The bet number display means has a plurality of display areas (for example, "BL1" to "BL3") corresponding to the number of bets of the game value, and when the re-game is activated, the display contents of the plurality of display areas are displayed. It is possible to perform a bet effect that changes sequentially,
The above-described game, wherein when the specific effect is executed, when the display contents of the plurality of display areas are sequentially changed in the bet effect, each of them has a display mode different from the usual one. Machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal state, it is possible to perform a specific effect with different probabilities depending on the degree of expectation of granting an advantageous state. That is, there are cases where it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation of granting an advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the specific effect as a clue. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained. Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific effect is performed by changing the display mode of the bet number display. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect device or the like for performing a specific effect, and it is possible to perform the specific effect in a natural flow during the game. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances the motivation for playing and the interest in the game with a general-purpose configuration.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a pseudo bet effect is performed when the re-game is activated, but the specific effect is also performed in a manner in line with the flow of such a bet effect. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the motivation for playing and the interest in the game in a more comfortable manner.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

An advantageous state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control an advantageous state (for example, a pseudo bonus) that is advantageous for the player, and
A control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of setting any one of a plurality of different control information (for example, a mode) for varying the degree of expectation of granting the advantageous state, and a control information setting means (for example, main CPU 101).
A gaming machine including a normal state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a normal state (for example, an effect section) according to control information set by the control information setting means.
In the normal state, the specific effect means (for example, the bet lamp display unit (BL)) capable of executing the specific effect (for example, the bet lamp change effect) with different probabilities according to the control information set by the control information setting means. With
The specific effect means is a bet number display means for displaying the number of bets of the game value.
The bet number display means has a plurality of display areas (for example, "BL1" to "BL3") corresponding to the number of bets of the game value, and when the re-game is activated, the display contents of the plurality of display areas are displayed. It is possible to perform a bet effect that changes sequentially,
When the specific effect is executed, when the display contents of the plurality of display areas are sequentially changed in the bet effect, each of them is set to a display mode different from the usual one.
If an error occurs even when the specific effect is executed, the display contents of the plurality of display areas are not sequentially changed, and the final display content in the bet effect is different from the normal one. A gaming machine characterized in that it is displayed as a display mode.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the normal state, it is possible to perform a specific effect with different probabilities depending on the degree of expectation of granting an advantageous state. That is, there are cases where it is possible to estimate the degree of expectation of granting an advantageous state by using the execution frequency of the specific effect as a clue. As a result, even when the probability of transition to the advantageous state fluctuates, the motivation for playing and the interest in the game can be maintained. Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific effect is performed by changing the display mode of the bet number display. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated effect device or the like for performing a specific effect, and it is possible to perform the specific effect in a natural flow during the game. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect that enhances the motivation for playing and the interest in the game with a general-purpose configuration.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, a pseudo bet effect is performed when the re-game is activated, but the specific effect is also performed in a manner in line with the flow of such a bet effect. As a result, it is possible to produce an effect that enhances the motivation for playing and the interest in the game in a more comfortable manner. Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the specific effect is performed while an error occurs, only the final display content is displayed without following the flow of the bet effect. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a defect and prevent the player from making a difference in the information obtained even when an error occurs.

[Game machine of invention 18 according to a detailed example]
In a conventional gaming machine, as a replay combination, for example, a combination of a first replay combination that wins a prize by displaying a combination of symbols composed of replay symbols and a combination of symbols composed of small combination symbols is displayed. A second replaying role is known to be provided (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-124467).

By the way, in some of such gaming machines, when a player wins a re-gaming combination, it is possible to perform a betting effect in the same manner as during a normal betting operation.

However, in a gaming machine as shown in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-124467, when such a bet effect is performed, for example, a winning combination different from the replaying combination, such as the second replaying combination described above, is awarded. When the stop display mode that can be recognized by the player is displayed, the player can easily recognize that the player has won the re-game combination as in the first re-game combination described above. If a bet effect similar to the case where the possible stop display mode is displayed is performed, there is a problem that the player may be confused.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from being confused even when having a plurality of stop display modes of a replaying combination. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A re-game operating means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of operating the re-game according to the display mode of the re-game combination stop display, and
A gaming machine provided with a bet effect means (for example, a bet lamp display unit (BL)) capable of performing a bet effect when the re-game is activated.
The stop display mode of the re-game combination includes a first stop display mode (for example, a normal re-game display mode) that makes it easy for the player to recognize that the re-game combination is a prize, and a re-game combination. Is to make the player recognize a second stop display mode (for example, a special re-game display mode) that allows the player to recognize that the winning combination is different, and which combination is winning. A third stop display mode (for example, a special replay display mode), which makes it difficult to display
At least, the bet effect means can perform a bet effect of a different effect mode depending on whether the first stop display mode is displayed or the third stop display mode is displayed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

The bet effect means differs depending on whether the first stop display mode is displayed, the second stop display mode is displayed, or the third stop display mode is displayed. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is possible to perform a bet effect in an effect mode.

When a specific re-game combination (for example, "F_confirmed cherry") is won, the first stop display mode is displayed when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined procedure (for example, the first right stop). When the stop operation is performed at a procedure different from the predetermined procedure (for example, other than the first right stop) and at a specific timing (for example, the timing at which the pressing position becomes ○), the second stop display mode is described. Is displayed, and when the stop operation is performed at a procedure different from the predetermined procedure (for example, other than the first right stop) and at a timing different from the specific timing (for example, a timing at which the pressing position ×). Is the gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it is possible to display the third stop display mode.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the player is made to recognize the first stop display mode that makes it easy for the player to recognize that the winning combination is a winning combination, and which combination is winning. Between the third stop display mode, which makes it difficult, or between the first stop display mode, which makes it easy for the player to recognize that the player has won the re-game combination, and the role different from the re-game combination. Between the second stop display mode that allows the player to recognize that the prize is a prize and the third stop display mode that makes it difficult for the player to recognize which combination is the prize. It is possible to make the production mode of the bet production different. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused even when the player has a plurality of stop display modes of the re-game combination.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a specific re-game combination is won, any of the first stop display mode, the second stop display mode, and the third stop display mode may be displayed. For example, it is possible to change the game playability depending on the difference in the stop display mode, but even in such a case, it is possible to perform an appropriate bet effect. Furthermore, the playability can be suggested by the bet effect.

[Game machine of invention 19 according to a detailed example]
A conventional gaming machine has a plurality of music patterns having different composition contents of music, and makes it possible to output a music with one selected music pattern in a specific state (for example, a special game state). Is known (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-142693).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, if an event such as a power failure or an error occurs during a specific state, the output of the music is interrupted. Then, when the event that has occurred is resolved, the output of the music can be restarted from the interrupted point, or can be restarted from the beginning.

However, in any of the restart modes, the player often feels uncomfortable. Therefore, in the music production, when the interruption event occurs and then restarts, further ingenuity is required.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and a gaming machine capable of preventing a player from feeling uncomfortable when resuming after an interruption event occurs in a musical composition. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A music output means (for example, speaker group 84) capable of outputting music in a specific state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) and a music pattern capable of selecting a music pattern output by the music output means from a plurality of music patterns. A gaming machine including a selection means (for example, a sub CPU 201).
The plurality of music patterns include at least a first music pattern composed of a first unique part (for example, an intro part A) and a common part (for example, the music production data 1 shown in FIG. 119 (a)). , A second music pattern composed of the second unique part (for example, the intro part C) and the common part (for example, the music production data 3 shown in FIG. 119 (c)) is included.
The music output means
When the first music pattern is selected, it is possible to repeatedly output the music of the common part after outputting the music of the first unique part.
When the second music pattern is selected, it is possible to repeatedly output the music of the common part after outputting the music of the second unique part.
After any music pattern is selected at a specific timing in the specific state by the music pattern selection means, an interruption event (for example, power failure, error, door opening, etc.) occurs during the specific state. When the output of the music by the music output means is interrupted and the output of the music by the music output means is resumed regardless of which music pattern is selected, the music of the second music pattern is output. A game machine characterized by outputting from the beginning.

The plurality of music patterns notify that the extension of the specific state has been determined.
The first musical composition pattern is a pattern in which the output of the musical composition is started from the time when the specific state is started.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the second music pattern is a pattern in which the output of music is started in the middle of the specific state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, if only the outflow part is different and it is possible to execute a plurality of music productions in which a common music is output, any music production is interrupted. When resuming after an event occurs, a specific musical composition is restarted from the beginning. That is, the mode is the same when the interruption event occurs and then restarts. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort when the music production is restarted after the interruption event occurs.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the musical composition effect is used as an effect of notifying the extension of a specific state. Then, when the interruption event occurs and then restarts, the music production in which the extension of the specific state is notified in the middle is always restarted from the beginning. As a result, it is possible to enhance the interest of the music production and further reduce the discomfort when the production is resumed.

[Game machine of invention 20 according to one detailed example]
In a conventional game machine, if the bet game value is the first amount, it is possible to determine that a predetermined symbol combination is allowed to be displayed, while a specific symbol combination is displayed. It is possible to determine that a particular symbol combination is allowed to be displayed if the bet game value is a second amount, while not being able to determine that it is allowed to be displayed. It is known that it is possible to change the game playability according to the amount of the bet game value by not making it possible to determine that the combination of symbols of is allowed to be displayed (for example). , JP-A-2006-230776).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, while it is possible to change the playability, it is necessary to accurately grasp information on the playability such as the current state and the types of combinations of symbols that are allowed to be displayed. Because it becomes difficult, the difficulty of the game becomes high. Therefore, it is desirable that such information be shown to the player as much as possible.

However, for example, a gaming machine equipped with a display device such as a liquid crystal display can display such information, but a gaming machine not equipped with a display device cannot display such information. In some cases. Further, if such information is displayed on a gaming machine equipped with a display device, the display area of the display device that can be used for the effect may be limited.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of showing information on game playability in a general-purpose configuration.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

It is a gaming machine that can variablely display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and plays a game by stopping the variable display of the symbols according to the stop operation of the player.
Stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) capable of accepting the stop operation of the player, and
In the stop operation means, a first state (for example, "at the time of permission to stop") that enables the player to accept the stop operation, and a second state (for example, "for example") that does not allow the player to accept the stop operation. It is provided with a stop state notification means (for example, stop state notification units 117L, 117C, 117R) capable of displaying which state (“other than when stop is permitted”).
The stopped state notifying means is a gaming machine capable of suggesting information on game playability by the display mode of the first state and the display mode of the second state.

A display determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process and a reel stop control process) capable of determining a combination of symbols that are permitted to be displayed according to the bet game value amount.
The game playability can be changed according to the bet game value amount and the determination result by the display determination means (for example, a 3 bet state between 2BB flags and a 3 bet between 3BB flags). With the main CPU101), which can change the playability depending on the state,
The display determining means
When the bet game value amount is the first amount (for example, 3 cards), it is decided to allow the display of the first special symbol combination (for example, "BB02" which is a combination of symbols related to 3BB). Enable and
Even in a state where the display of the combination of the first special symbols is permitted (for example, between the 3BB flags), in the game in which the bet game value amount is the second amount (for example, two cards), the first 1 It is not possible to decide to allow the display of special symbol combinations,
When the bet game value amount is the second amount, it is possible to determine that the display of the second special symbol combination (for example, "BB01" which is a combination of symbols related to 2BB) is permitted.
Even in a state where the display of the combination of the second special symbols is permitted (for example, between the 2BB flags), the combination of the second special symbols is used in the game in which the bet game value amount is the first amount. It is not possible to decide to allow the display of
The game property changing means is at least when the display of the combination of the first special symbols is permitted and the bet game value amount is the first amount, and when the second special symbol It is possible to change the game playability between when the combination display is permitted and the bet game value amount is the first amount.
The stop state notification means is
According to the display mode of the first state, if the combination of the first special symbol or the combination of the second special symbol can be displayed in this game, it is possible to suggest that fact.
Depending on the display mode of the second state, it is possible to suggest that the display of the combination of the first special symbols is permitted or the display of the combination of the second special symbols is permitted. The gaming machine according to the above.

It is a gaming machine that can variablely display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and plays a game by stopping the variable display of the symbols according to the stop operation of the player.
Stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 17L, 17C, 17R) capable of accepting the stop operation of the player, and
In the stop operation means, a first state (for example, "at the time of permission to stop") that enables the player to accept the stop operation, and a second state (for example, "for example") that does not allow the player to accept the stop operation. A stop state notification means (for example, stop state notification units 117L, 117C, 117R) capable of displaying which state (“other than when stop permission”) is in the state.
A display determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process and a reel stop control process) capable of determining a combination of symbols permitted to be displayed according to a game state (for example, the game state shown in FIG. 120).
With
The stop state notification means is
The display mode of the first state can suggest the determination result by the display determination means.
A gaming machine characterized in that a gaming state can be suggested by the display mode of the second state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, since it is possible to suggest information on game playability by using a notification means for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted, in order to notify information on game playability. There is no need to provide a means for notifying. Therefore, information on game playability can be shown in a general-purpose configuration.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is determined whether or not to allow the display of any kind of special symbol combination according to the bet game value amount. In addition, even if the display of any combination of special symbols is already permitted, whether or not the combination of the special symbols is displayed changes according to the bet game value amount. It has become. In addition, it is possible to change the game playability according to the bet game value amount and which type of special symbol combination is permitted to be displayed. Then, by using a notification means for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted, if there is a combination of special symbols that are permitted to be displayed in this game, that fact is notified and eventually. It is also notified that the display of the combination of special symbols of the type of is permitted. Therefore, even when the game playability is complicated, information on the game playability can be appropriately notified.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it may be possible to suggest a combination of the gaming state and the symbols permitted to be displayed by using the notification means for notifying whether or not the stop operation can be accepted. Thereby, the information desired by the player can be appropriately notified in a general-purpose configuration.

[Game machine of invention 21 according to a detailed example]
In conventional gaming machines, it is known that the payout rate is set to one of the six setting stages, and lottery can be performed based on the set set value (for example, special feature). (See Kai 2004-24557).

However, with such a gaming machine, there is a problem that the gaming store side can select the degree of advantage (gaming property) of the player only within the range of 6 stages, and the range of operation is limited. ..

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of selecting game playability with more options than the number of preset setting stages.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A gaming machine (for example, pachislot machine 1) that can variablely display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and plays a game by stopping the variable display of the symbols according to a player's stop operation.
A setting value determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs a setting change confirmation process) capable of determining one of a setting value of a plurality of stages having different degrees of advantage, and
A winning combination lottery means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination under conditions according to a set value determined by the set value determining means is provided.
The role lottery means
When the first set value (for example, setting 6) is determined by the set value determining means, a specific special combination (for example, bonus 1) can be determined with a predetermined probability.
When the second set value (for example, settings 1 to 5) is determined by the set value determining means, the specific special combination cannot be determined, or the specific special combination is set more than the predetermined probability. Decided with a low probability,
The specific special role is a carry-over role, and even if the set value is newly determined by the set value determining means in the state where the specific special role is carried over, the state is still present. Configured to be maintained
When the second set value is determined by the set value determining means, the degree of advantage is made different between the state in which the specific special combination is carried over and the state in which the specific special combination is not carried over. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible.

When the second set value is determined by the set value determining means in a state where the specific special combination has not been carried over, an operation instruction for transitioning to the state in which the specific special combination has been carried over. The gaming machine according to the above description, further comprising an operation instruction means (for example, a display device 11 for displaying an operation instruction (screen)).

The advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling the advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) advantageous to the player and the information regarding the determination of transition to the advantageous state when the advantageous state ends are initialized. An initialization means (for example, the main CPU 101) is provided, and the advantageous state includes an increasing state in which the game value increases (for example, an increasing section) and a non-increasing state in which the game value does not increase (for example, an effect section). Including, when the second set value is determined by the set value determining means, the state in which the specific special combination is carried over is at least more than the state in which the specific special combination is not carried over. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the average period from the start of the increasing state to the termination of the advantageous state until the initialization by the initialization means is performed is long.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the gaming store side can set one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, 6 stages of settings 1 to 6) in which the degree of advantage of the player is different. Not only can the player's degree of advantage (playability) be selected (from the options for this set value), but also a specific set value (for example, setting 6) is set and a specific special role (for example, setting 6) is set. For example, it is possible to further select the degree of advantage (playability) of the player depending on whether or not the bonus 1) is carried over and which set value is set in the state. Therefore, it is possible to select the playability with more options than the number of preset setting stages.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, by enabling an operation instruction for selecting the advantage degree (gaming ability) of the player, the operator can perform the advantage degree (gaming ability) of the player regardless of the skill. ) Can be selected appropriately. Therefore, even if it is possible to select the playability with more options than the number of preset setting stages, it is possible to prevent the operator from being confused.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when a predetermined set value (for example, settings 1 to 5) is set, the specific special role is carried over when the specific special role is carried over. The average period from the start of at least the increasing state (for example, the increasing section) to the end of the advantageous state (for example, the advantageous section) and the initialization of the information regarding the determination of transition to the advantageous state is longer than that of the non-existing state. By making it longer, it is possible to make the player's degree of advantage different. As a result, the playability can be selected in a manner more interesting to the player, and the interest of the game can be further improved.

[Game machine of invention 22 according to a detailed example]
In the conventional gaming machine, a normal section and an advantageous section can be set as a state in which the game is played, the effect state is set to the AT state (advantageous state) in the advantageous section, and the AT state is set at the end of the advantageous section. In some cases, it is known that the AT state can be forcibly terminated by the initialization process even if the predetermined termination condition for the AT state is not satisfied (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185099). See Gazette).

By the way, with such a gaming machine, although it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming excessively high, the advantageous state suddenly ends in the middle of the process, so that the player feels uncomfortable and enjoys the game. There was a problem that it may decrease.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that takes into consideration the emotions of the player while suppressing excessively high gambling. do.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A gaming machine (for example, pachislot machine 1) that can variablely display a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns and plays a game by stopping the variable display of the symbols according to a player's stop operation.
The advantageous state (for example, a pseudo-bonus) that is advantageous to the player, the specific state (for example, the effect section) in which the degree of expectation of shifting to the advantageous state can be changed, and the advantageous state and the specific state are different. A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) having an initial state (for example, a non-advantageous section) and performing transition control between each state is provided.
The specific state includes a first specific state (for example, the first section of the advantageous section) having a high expectation of shifting to the advantageous state and a second specific state (for example, the advantageous section) having a low expectation of shifting to the advantageous state. 2) and, including
The state control means
In the specific state, when the transition condition to the advantageous state is satisfied (for example, when a pseudo bonus is won), the advantageous state is controlled.
When the advantageous state and the specific state are set as a series of advantageous sections, the game period in the series of advantageous sections is managed, and the management period becomes a predetermined period (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter is normally limited processing (for example). When the number of games) reaches a value to be executed), the initial state is controlled regardless of whether it is in the advantageous state or the specific state.
When the advantageous state ends before the management period reaches the predetermined period, the initial state is controlled.
When controlling to the initial state, the management period is initialized.
A gaming machine characterized in that when the transition condition to the specific state is satisfied in the initial state (for example, when an advantageous section is won), the first specific state is controlled.

The state control means can extend the gaming period of the advantageous state when the extension condition is satisfied in the advantageous state.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein when the gaming period in the advantageous state is extended, the gaming period in the advantageous state can be extended so as not to exceed the predetermined period.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the advantageous state and the specific state are managed as a series of advantageous sections, and when the management period reaches a predetermined period, this series of advantageous sections is forcibly terminated and controlled to the initial state. NS. Further, even when the advantageous state ends before the predetermined period is reached, the initial state is controlled. If it is controlled to the initial state, the management period is initialized. The specific state includes a first specific state having a high expectation of shifting to an advantageous state and a second specific state having a low expectation of shifting to an advantageous state, but when shifting from the initial state to the specific state, It is controlled to the first specific state. That is, even when the initial state is originally disadvantageous, the expectation of the transition from the initial state to the advantageous state (first specific state) is high, and a series of advantages is further achieved. It is also less likely that the section will be forcibly terminated. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable while suppressing the gambling from becoming excessively high, so that it is possible to consider the emotions of the player.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, even if the gaming period in the advantageous state is extended, the extended period does not exceed the period in which a series of advantageous sections are forcibly terminated. ing. That is, while making the game period of the advantageous section variable, it suppresses the extension of the surplus game period. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately suppress the excessively high gambling while maintaining the interest of the game.

[Game machine of invention 23 according to a detailed example]
In conventional gaming machines, it is known that the carry-over state of a special role is set to a high RT state with a high probability of winning a re-game combination, and the high RT state can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, an AT state). (For example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-202330).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, in the carry-over state of the special role, the RT state does not change even when a specific combination of symbols is displayed, for example. Therefore, in the advantageous state, a single RT state is maintained, and there is a problem that the degree of advantage of the advantageous state does not change much.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even when the carry-over state of the special role can be controlled to the advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the advantageous state is varied. The purpose is to provide a gaming machine that can play.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3CL, 3CR, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
When a special role (for example, RB) is determined as an internal winning combination, a carry-over means (for example, during RB carry-over) that controls the special role to the carry-over state (for example, during RB carry-over) until the combination of symbols related to the special role is displayed. For example, the main CPU 101) that stores the carry-over information in the carry-over combination storage area,
When it has at least a first specific state (for example, RT2) and a second specific state (for example, RT3) in which the winning probabilities of the re-game combination are different, and it is not the carry-over state, it is between the states according to the combination of the displayed symbols. Specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 for transitioning the RT state) and
When a specific start condition is satisfied, an advantageous state control means (for example, an AT state) that controls an advantageous state (for example, an AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified until a specific end condition is satisfied. Main CPU101) and
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When the carry-over state is reached in the first specific state, the internal winning combination is determined according to the winning probability of the replaying combination in the first specific state in the carry-over state.
When the carry-over state is reached in the second specific state, the internal winning combination is determined according to the winning probability of the replaying combination in the second specific state in the carry-over state.
The probability of loss differs between when the carry-over state is reached in the first specific state and when the carry-over state is reached in the second specific state.
The combination of symbols related to the special role is configured to be displayed regardless of the mode of the player's stop operation when the loss occurs in the carry-over state.
The particular starting condition can be met if the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination.
A gaming machine characterized in that the specific termination condition can be satisfied when a combination of symbols related to the special combination is displayed.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3CL, 3CR, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
An internal winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining an internal winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variable display of the symbol according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation.
When a special role (for example, RB) is determined as an internal winning combination, a carry-over means (for example, during RB carry-over) that controls the special role to the carry-over state (for example, during RB carry-over) until the combination of symbols related to the special role is displayed. For example, the main CPU 101) that stores the carry-over information in the carry-over combination storage area,
When it has at least a first specific state (for example, RT2) and a second specific state (for example, RT3) in which the winning probabilities of the re-game combination are different, and it is not the carry-over state, it is between the states according to the combination of the displayed symbols. Specific state control means (for example, the main CPU 101 for transitioning the RT state) and
There is at least a first advantageous state (for example, a first increase section) and a second advantageous state (for example, a second increase section) as an advantageous state (for example, an AT state) in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player can be notified. Then, when the first start condition is satisfied, the first advantageous state is controlled until the first end condition is satisfied, and when the second start condition is satisfied, the second end condition is satisfied. The advantageous state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling the second advantageous state is provided.
The means for determining the internal winning combination is
When the carry-over state is reached in the first specific state, the internal winning combination is determined according to the winning probability of the replaying combination in the first specific state in the carry-over state.
When the carry-over state is reached in the second specific state, the internal winning combination is determined according to the winning probability of the replaying combination in the second specific state in the carry-over state.
The probability of loss differs between when the carry-over state is reached in the first specific state and when the carry-over state is reached in the second specific state.
The combination of symbols related to the special role is configured to be displayed without fail regardless of the mode of the player's stop operation when the loss occurs in the carry-over state.
The first starting condition can be satisfied when the special combination is determined as an internal winning combination.
The first termination condition can be satisfied when the combination of symbols related to the special combination is displayed.
The first start condition and the second start condition are different conditions.
A gaming machine characterized in that the first end condition and the second end condition are different conditions.

The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the symbol display means is configured to be capable of variablely displaying the plurality of symbols in four or more rows.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the carry-over state of the special role, the winning probability of the re-game combination when the special role is won is inherited and the internal winning combination is determined. As a result, the probability of losing in the carry-over state of the special role differs. Then, if a loss occurs in the carry-over state of the special role, the combination of symbols related to the special role is always displayed. In addition, it is possible to control the period from winning the special role to displaying the combination of symbols related to the special role in an advantageous state. That is, it is possible to change the degree of advantage of the advantageous state according to the winning probability of the replaying combination when the special combination is won. Therefore, even when the carry-over state of the special role can be controlled to the advantageous state, the degree of advantage of the advantageous state can be varied.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in addition to the first advantageous state, which starts when the special role is won and ends when the combination of symbols related to the special role is displayed, the special role is won. May be provided with a second advantageous state that starts under different conditions and ends under conditions different from the display of the combination of symbols related to the special combination. As a result, it can be expected that the game will be controlled in an advantageous state even if the player does not win the special role, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, it is desirable that the display columns of the symbols are four or more columns. As a result, it is possible to increase the degree of freedom in arranging the symbols and provide a gaming machine that does not give a sense of discomfort in the arrangement of the symbols without increasing the man-hours.

[Game machine of invention 24 according to a detailed example]
In a conventional gaming machine, when a specific condition is satisfied during a carry-over state of a special combination (for example, a bonus combination), the player shifts to an advantageous state (for example, an ART state), which is advantageous to the player. It is known that the game value can be increased in the above (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-73810).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, in order to enhance the interest of the game, a device is made to further diversify the mode of giving an advantageous state. However, the more such measures are taken, the greater the control load and the amount of information regarding the granting of an advantageous state, and therefore it is necessary to take such measures into consideration.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and is a gaming machine capable of diversifying its game playability while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information related to the granting of an advantageous state. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information, and a result display can be derived by starting and then stopping the variable display on the variable display unit, and a privilege corresponding to the derived result display can be given. A gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1)
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a specific combination (for example, "F_common bell" in another control example (No. 3)), and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
The winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the stop control process) for stopping the fluctuation of the variable display unit according to the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. ,
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls a special game state (for example, an advantageous state) in which the notification means is allowed to execute the notification.
A specific game state control means (for example, a rough wave state) for controlling a first specific game state (for example, a stable state) and a second specific game state (for example, a rough wave state) to which different advantages are given when executing the process related to the special game state. Main CPU101) and
In the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the stop control means detects a stop operation in a specific display row (for example, the left reel 3L) at the first timing. When the first result display (for example, the first output) is derived and the detection is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second result display different from the first result display (for example, the second output) is performed. It is possible to derive the eye),
The specific game state control means
In a non-specific gaming state (for example, an initial state) that is neither the first specific gaming state nor the second specific gaming state, when the first result display is derived, the first specific gaming state is entered. Controlled, and when the second result display is derived, it is controlled to the second specific gaming state.
In the first specific game state, when the first result display is derived, the first specific game state is maintained, and when the second result display is derived, the process shifts to the second specific game state. Let me
A gaming machine characterized in that the second specific gaming state is maintained even when either the first result display or the second result display is derived in the second specific gaming state.

A variable display unit capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information, and a result display can be derived by starting and then stopping the variable display on the variable display unit, and a privilege corresponding to the derived result display can be given. A gaming machine (for example, pachislot 1)
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a specific combination (for example, "F_common bell" in another control example (No. 3)), and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
The winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the stop control process) for stopping the fluctuation of the variable display unit according to the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. ,
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls a special game state (for example, an advantageous state) in which the notification means is allowed to execute the notification.
A first specific gaming state (for example, EX state), a second specific gaming state (for example, a stable state), and a third specific gaming state (for example, a rough wave state) to which different degrees of advantage are given when executing the processing related to the special gaming state. ) Is provided with a specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 101).
In the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the stop control means detects a stop operation in a specific display row (for example, the left reel 3L) at the first timing. When the first result display (for example, the first output) is derived and the detection is performed at a second timing different from the first timing, the second result display different from the first result display (for example, the second output) is performed. It is possible to derive the eye),
The specific game state control means
When the first result display is derived in a non-specific gaming state (for example, an initial state) that is neither the first specific gaming state, the second specific gaming state, nor the third specific gaming state. It is controlled to the first specific gaming state, and when the second result display is derived, it is controlled to the second specific gaming state.
In the first specific game state, when the first result display is derived, the first specific game state is maintained, and when the second result display is derived, the process shifts to the third specific game state. Let me
In the second specific gaming state, when the second result display is derived, the second specific gaming state is maintained, and when the first result display is derived, the third specific gaming state is entered. A gaming machine characterized by letting you play.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first specific gaming state (for example, the stable state) and the second specific gaming state (for example, the advantageous state) are given different degrees of advantage when executing the processing related to the special gaming state (for example, the advantageous state). Rough wave state) is provided, and the specific combination (for example, "F_common bell" in another control example (No. 3)) is displayed as the first result (for example, the first roll) or the stop operation mode of the player. The second result display (for example, the second output) can be derived. Then, in the non-specific game state (for example, the initial state), when the first result display is derived, it is controlled to the first specific game state, and when the second result display is derived, the second specific game state is derived. In the first specific game state, when the first result display is derived, the first specific game state is maintained, and when the second result display is derived, the process shifts to the second specific game state. , In the second specific game state, the second specific game state is maintained even when either the first result display or the second result display is derived. As a result, it is possible to give the player room to select the playability with a simple configuration, so that the playability can be suppressed while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the granting of the advantageous state. Can be diversified.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first specific gaming state (for example, the EX state) and the second specific gaming state (for example, the EX state) to which different degrees of advantage are given when executing the processing related to the special gaming state (for example, the advantageous state). For example, a stable state) and a third specific gaming state (for example, a rough wave state) are provided, and a specific combination (for example, “F_common bell” in another control example (No. 3)) depends on the player's stop operation mode. The first result display (for example, the first result) or the second result display (for example, the second result) can be derived. Then, in the non-specific game state (for example, the initial state), when the first result display is derived, the control is performed to the first specific game state, and when the second result display is derived, the second specific game state is derived. In the first specific game state, when the first result display is derived, the first specific game state is maintained, and when the second result display is derived, the process shifts to the third specific game state. , In the second specific game state, when the second result display is derived, the second specific game state is maintained, and when the first result display is derived, the process shifts to the third specific game state. Will be done. As a result, it is possible to give the player room to select the playability with a simple configuration, so that the playability can be suppressed while suppressing an increase in the control load and the amount of information regarding the granting of the advantageous state. Can be diversified.

[Game machine of Invention 1 to Invention 3 relating to suggestion notification]
There is known a conventional gaming machine capable of performing a setting suggestion effect capable of suggesting a set value at the end of a BB gaming state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-245403).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, when the player's advantage degree is notified as in the setting suggestion effect described above, if the notification content is too straightforward, the game is played when the player's advantage degree is low. On the other hand, if the content of the notification is too euphemistic, it may make it difficult for the player to enjoy the pleasure of guessing the set value. Therefore, in the case of notifying the degree of advantage of such a player, it is important how to set the reliability.

Further, in such a gaming machine, it is inherently interesting that the profit fluctuates according to the gaming operation (for example, stopping operation) of the player, but the notification of the degree of advantage of the player is notified by the player. If it is performed separately from the game operation, there may be a problem that such fun is diminished.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of notifying the degree of advantage with appropriate reliability while making the most of the fun of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variation display of a symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation is provided. It ’s a game machine,
A special gaming state (for example, RB state) is started when the special condition is satisfied, and the special gaming state is terminated when a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) of winnings are generated in the special gaming state. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of transmitting various information to the player is provided.
In the special gaming state, the winning combination determining means includes a first combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination A") in which a predetermined amount (for example, 15 cards) of game value is given when a winning occurs, and a winning combination. A second combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination B") to which a specific amount (for example, one piece) of game value less than the predetermined amount is given when it occurs can be determined as a winning combination.
The stop control means can be controlled so as not to generate a prize when the player performs a specific stop operation (for example, a special procedure) when the second combination is determined as the winning combination.
The notification means is a suggestion notification (for example, setting suggestion) that suggests the degree of advantage of the player when the second combination is determined as the winning combination and no prize is generated in the special gaming state. It is possible to perform (directing),
The suggestion notification is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the special gaming state, the higher the number of times the second combination is determined as the winning combination, the higher the reliability of the notification content.

In the special gaming state, the notification means can notify the number of times (for example, the color in the background display area (BG)) when the second combination is determined as the winning combination and no prize is generated. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that.

The special game state control means also terminates the special game state even when a specific number of games (for example, 12 times) more than the predetermined number of times is played in the special game state.
The special gaming state is the case where the second combination is determined as the winning combination and the number of times the prize is not generated is a special number (for example, 5 times) or more, which is less than the predetermined number. If no prize is generated for the second role, the amount of game value given during the special game state is configured to be disadvantageous to the player.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the suggestion notification has the highest reliability of the notification content when the number of times the second combination is determined as the winning combination is equal to or greater than the special number.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the special gaming state (for example, the RB state) ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of winning is generated. Further, in the special gaming state, a first combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination A") in which a predetermined amount (for example, 15 cards) of game value is given when a prize is generated, and the above-mentioned place when a prize is generated. A second combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination B") to which a specific amount (for example, one piece) of game value less than a fixed amount is given can be determined as a winning combination. Further, when the second winning combination is determined as the winning combination, it is possible to control so that no prize is generated when the player performs a specific stop operation (for example, a special procedure), and the second winning combination is used as the winning combination. It is possible to perform a suggestion notification (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting the degree of advantage of the player when the prize is determined and no prize is generated. Then, the suggestion notification is configured so that the reliability of the notification content increases as the number of times the second combination is determined as the winning combination in the special game state.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the profit (for example, the game value amount) in the special gaming state fluctuates according to the skill of the player's game operation (for example, stop operation), and the execution frequency of the suggestion notification is executed. Also fluctuates. Then, the reliability is increased every time the suggestion notification is given. Therefore, it is possible to notify the degree of advantage with appropriate reliability while making the most of the fun of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the special gaming state, the number of times that the winning combination is not generated even when the second combination is determined as the winning combination (for example, the color in the background display area (BG)) is determined. It is configured to be able to notify. As a result, the player can appropriately recognize, for example, the progress of the game in the special game state and the current reliability of the suggestion notification, so that the player can provide the information desired by the player to enjoy the game. Can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the special gaming state ends even when a specific number of games (for example, 12 times) more than a predetermined number of times is played. Therefore, the special game state is the second when the second combination is determined as the winning combination and the number of times the prize is not generated is a special number (for example, five times) or more, which is less than the predetermined number. If no prize is generated for the combination, the amount of game value given during the special game state is configured to be disadvantageous to the player. Then, the suggestion notification is configured so that the reliability of the notification content is maximized when the number of times the second combination is determined as the winning combination becomes a special number or more. As a result, for example, even if the number of times the second role is determined as the winning role increases and the special game state ends without the first role winning a predetermined number of times, the interest of the game is enjoyed. It is possible to prevent it from being lowered.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variation display of a symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation is provided. It ’s a game machine,
A special gaming state (for example, RB state) is started when the special condition is satisfied, and the special gaming state is terminated when a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) of winnings are generated in the special gaming state. Special game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of transmitting various information to the player is provided.
In the stop control means, when a specific combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination B") is determined as the winning combination, or when the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing (for example, the stop operation is performed by a special procedure). If), the winning is not generated, and if the player performs the stop operation at a predetermined timing different from the specific timing (for example, if the stop operation is performed in the first winning procedure), the predetermined timing is specified. (For example, the combination of symbols of "FRU171") is displayed to generate a prize, and the player performs a stop operation at a timing different from the specific timing and the predetermined timing (for example, the first 2 When the stop operation is performed in the winning procedure), a specific symbol combination (for example, a plurality of other symbol combinations) different from the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, and it is possible to control to generate a winning. can be,
In the special gaming state, the notification means is the case where the specific combination is determined as the winning combination and no prize is generated, and the case where the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. When a combination of symbols is displayed and a prize is won, it is possible to perform a suggestion notification (for example, a setting suggestion effect) that suggests the degree of advantage of the player.
The suggestion notification is a gaming machine characterized in that, in the special gaming state, the higher the number of times the specific combination is determined as the winning combination, the higher the reliability of the notification content.

The notification means is the case where the specific combination is determined as the winning combination (for example, the color in the cylinder display area (TB)) and the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the special gaming state. The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the number of times a prize has not been won (for example, a color in a background display area (BG)) can be notified.

In the special gaming state, the winning combination determining means can determine a predetermined combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination A") and the specific combination as winning combinations.
The predetermined winning combination is a winning combination in which a predetermined amount (for example, 15 cards) of game value is given when a prize is won.
The specific combination is a winning combination in which a specific amount (for example, one piece) of game value smaller than the predetermined amount is given when a prize is won.
The special game state control means also terminates the special game state even when a specific number of games (for example, 12 times) more than the predetermined number of times is played in the special game state.
The special gaming state is defined when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination and the number of times the prize is not generated is a special number (for example, 5 times) or more, which is less than the predetermined number. If no prize is generated for the role, the amount of game value given during the special game state is configured to be disadvantageous to the player.
In the suggestion notification, when the number of times the specific combination is determined as the winning combination is equal to or greater than the special number, the reliability of the notification content is highest.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein in at least one row of the symbol display means (for example, reel 3L), the predetermined timing includes a timing of a stop operation one symbol later than the specific timing.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the special gaming state (for example, the RB state) ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of winning is generated. Further, in the special gaming state, when a specific combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination B") is determined as the winning combination, or when the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing (for example, the stop operation is performed by a special procedure). If the player performs the stop operation at a predetermined timing different from the specific timing (for example, if the stop operation is performed in the first winning procedure), the prize is not generated. (For example, the combination of symbols of "FRU171") is displayed to generate a prize, and the player performs a stop operation at a specific timing and a timing different from a predetermined timing (for example, a second prize). When the stop operation is performed in the procedure), a specific symbol combination (for example, a plurality of other symbol combinations) different from the predetermined symbol combination is displayed, and it is possible to control to generate a prize. When the winning combination is determined as the winning combination and no prize is generated, or when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination and the predetermined combination of symbols is displayed and the winning is generated. It is possible to perform suggestion notification (for example, setting suggestion effect) that suggests the degree of advantage of the player. Then, the suggestion notification is configured so that the reliability of the notification content increases as the number of times the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the special game state.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the profit (for example, the game value amount) in the special gaming state fluctuates according to the skill of the player's game operation (for example, stop operation), and the execution frequency of the suggestion notification is executed. Also fluctuates. Specifically, for example, there are cases where the suggestion notification is performed without generating a prize, a case where a prize is generated and a suggestion notification is performed, and a case where a prize is generated and the suggestion notification is not performed. It is possible. Then, the reliability is increased every time the suggestion notification is given. Therefore, it is possible to notify the degree of advantage with appropriate reliability while making the most of the fun of the game.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the special gaming state, the number of times the specific combination is determined as the winning combination (for example, the color in the cylinder display area (TB)) and the case where the specific combination is determined as the winning combination. The number of times a prize has not been won (for example, a color in the background display area (BG)) can be notified. As a result, the player can appropriately recognize, for example, the progress of the game in the special game state and the current reliability of the suggestion notification, so that the player can provide the information desired by the player to enjoy the game. Can be enhanced.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the special gaming state, a predetermined amount (for example, 15 cards) of a predetermined combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination A") is given a game value when a prize is won. It is possible to determine as a winning combination a specific combination in which a specific amount (for example, one piece) of game value less than a predetermined amount is given when a prize is won. Further, the special gaming state also ends when a specific number of games (for example, 12 times) more than a predetermined number of games are played. Therefore, in the special game state, when the specific combination is determined as the winning combination and the number of times that the prize is not generated is less than the predetermined number of times (for example, 5 times) or more, the special combination is If no prize is generated, the amount of game value given during the special game state is configured to be disadvantageous to the player. Then, the suggestion notification is configured so that the reliability of the notification content is maximized when the number of times the specific combination is determined as the winning combination is equal to or more than the special number. As a result, for example, even if the number of times a specific combination is determined as a winning combination increases and the special gaming state ends without the predetermined combination winning a predetermined number of times, the interest of the game is reduced. It is possible to prevent it from happening.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in at least one row (for example, reel 3L) of the symbol display rows, the predetermined timing at which the predetermined symbol combination can be displayed is one symbol rather than the specific timing. It is configured to include the timing of late stop operations. That is, for example, when a specific role is won, a stop operation is performed so that the suggestion notification is performed without generating a prize, but the timing is slightly later than intended. However, although a prize is generated, it is possible to perform a stop operation by switching so that a suggestion notification is performed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered due to the fact that the suggestion notification is not performed.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and a symbol display area 4) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A winning combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations, and
A stop control means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs reel stop control processing) capable of stopping the variation display of a symbol based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means and the player's stop operation is provided. It ’s a game machine,
The first special gaming state (for example, RB state) is started in response to the establishment of the first special condition, and a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of winning is generated in the first special gaming state. A first special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that terminates the first special game state, and
The second special gaming state (for example, the BB state) is started in response to the establishment of the second special condition, and the end condition is satisfied in the second special gaming state (for example, more than 285 cards have been paid out). A second special game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that terminates the second special game state according to the situation.
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of transmitting various information to the player is provided.
The winning combination determining means includes a first combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination A") to which a predetermined amount (for example, 15 cards) of game value is given when a prize is generated in the first special gaming state. A second combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination B") in which a specific amount (for example, one piece) of game value smaller than the predetermined amount is given when a prize is won can be determined as a winning combination.
The stop control means can be controlled so as not to generate a prize when the player performs a specific stop operation (for example, a special procedure) when the second combination is determined as the winning combination.
In the first special gaming state, the notification means suggests a suggestion notification (for example, a suggestion notification suggesting the degree of advantage of the player when the second combination is determined as the winning combination and no prize is generated. It is possible to perform the suggestion notification (setting suggestion effect), and when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied in the second special gaming state, the suggestion notification can be performed.
The first special gaming state is configured so that the amount of game value that can be granted is smaller than that of the second special gaming state.
The gaming machine characterized in that the suggestion notification is performed in the first special gaming state with higher reliability of the notification content than in the case where the suggestion notification is performed in the second special gaming state.

In the first special gaming state, the notification means determines the number of times the second combination is determined as the winning combination (for example, the color in the cylinder display area (TB)) and the second combination as the winning combination. In some cases, the number of times a prize has not occurred (for example, the color in the background display area (BG)) can be notified.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein in the first special gaming state, the higher the number of times the second combination is determined as the winning combination, the higher the reliability of the notification content.

In the first special gaming state, the notification means can select the notification content of the suggestion notification from a plurality of notification modes (for example, effect modes 1 to 5), and the second special game state. In, the notification content of the suggestion notification can be selected from a plurality of notification modes (for example, effect modes 1 to 5).
At least a part of the notification mode of the suggestion notification performed in the first special gaming state and the notification mode of the suggestion notification performed in the second special gaming state are common, and the common notification mode is the first. The gaming machine described above, wherein the selection probability can be different between the special gaming state and the second special gaming state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first special gaming state (for example, the RB state) ends when a predetermined number of times (for example, eight times) of winning is generated. Further, in the first special game state, the first combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination A") in which a predetermined amount (for example, 15 cards) of game value is given when a prize is generated, and the case where a prize is generated. A second combination (for example, "F_RBJAC combination B") to which a specific amount (for example, one piece) of game value smaller than the predetermined amount is given can be determined as a winning combination. Further, when the second winning combination is determined as the winning combination, it is possible to control so that no prize is generated when the player performs a specific stop operation (for example, a special procedure), and the second winning combination is used as the winning combination. It is possible to perform a suggestion notification (for example, a setting suggestion effect) suggesting the degree of advantage of the player when the prize is determined and no prize is generated. Further, in the second special gaming state (for example, the BB state), it is possible to perform the suggestion notification even when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied. The first special gaming state can be given a smaller amount of game value than the second special gaming state, but the suggestion notification is performed in the first special gaming state than in the second special gaming state. Is also configured to increase the reliability of the notification content.

That is, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first special gaming state has less profit than the second special gaming state, but when the suggestion notification is executed, its reliability is executed in the second special gaming state. In addition, the profit (for example, the game value amount) in the first special game state fluctuates according to the skill of the player's game operation (for example, stop operation), and the execution frequency of the suggestion notification is executed. Is also configured to fluctuate. Therefore, it is possible to notify the degree of advantage with appropriate reliability while making the most of the fun of the game. In addition, it is possible to prevent the interest of the game from being lowered even when a special game state in which the profit is smaller occurs.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the first special gaming state, the number of times the second combination is determined as the winning combination (for example, the color in the cylinder display area (TB)) and the second combination as the winning combination. It is configured to be able to notify the number of times (for example, the color in the background display area (BG)) that the winning is not generated even if it is determined. As a result, the player can appropriately recognize, for example, the progress of the game in the first special game state and the current reliability of the suggestion notification, so that the player can provide the information desired by the player and play the game. It can enhance the interest.

Further, according to the gaming machine having the above configuration, at least a part of the notification mode of the suggestion notification in the first special gaming state and the notification mode of the suggestion notification in the second special gaming state are common, and the common notification mode is provided. , The selection probability is configured to be different between the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the amount of data of the effect related to the suggestion notification, and it is easy to recognize the difference in the reliability of the suggestion notification between the first special gaming state and the second special gaming state. be able to.

[Game machine of invention 1 according to one detailed example (No. 2)]
In the conventional gaming machine, it is possible to execute a notification game state in which information on a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified and an additional game state in which the number of games in the notified game state is added, and a bonus is provided in the additional game state. It is known that when a winning combination is won, a specific number of games is added while the additional game state is terminated (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-78985).

By the way, in such a gaming machine, a state such as an additional gaming state is a state that becomes a big showcase in the flow of the game. However, in the gaming machines shown above, although a specific number of games is added when the bonus combination is won, the added gaming state ends, so such a state cannot be fully enjoyed. There was a problem.

In addition, if the player's sense of loss due to the end of the additional game state is to be compensated for by making the privilege when winning the bonus role in the additional game state extremely large, the additional game state will occur in the first place. Since it is difficult to design a high probability and a winning probability of a bonus role, there is also a problem that the degree of freedom in ball ejection design is reduced.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even when a transition condition to a different state is satisfied while the player has a high advantage, the player feels a loss. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the interest of a game by reducing the number of slingshots.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of the detailed example (No. 2)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, the first display unit 404) capable of notifying a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling a specific game state (for example, an RB state) that is advantageous to the player and a special game state (for example, a RUSH state) for which notification is performed by the notification means.
A management means for managing the game period in the special game state (for example, a RUSH remaining G number counter) and
A renewal means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs RUSH remaining G number management processing) for renewing the game period managed by the management means according to the establishment of a predetermined renewal condition is provided.
The special gaming state includes a first gaming state (for example, a game other than the final game in the RUSH state) and a second gaming state (for example, the final game in the RUSH state).
The second gaming state has a higher advantage in granting the right (for example, RUSH stock) for being controlled to the gaming state in which the notification is performed by the notification means, as compared with the first gaming state.
When the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted in the first gaming state (for example, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won), the first gaming state is interrupted and the specific gaming state is interrupted. , And after the end of the specific gaming state, the first gaming state is restarted.
When the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is interrupted to shift to the specific gaming state, and after the end of the specific gaming state, the second gaming state is completed. It restarts the game state,
In the first game state, when the predetermined renewal condition is also satisfied in the game to which the right to be controlled to the specific game state is granted, the game period of the first game state at the time of resumption depends on the renewal means. It will be the game period that was updated,
In the second gaming state, when the predetermined renewal condition is also satisfied in the game to which the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted, the gaming period of the second gaming state at the time of resumption depends on the renewal means. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to have a gaming period that has not been renewed.
The management means is a remaining game number counter that counts the number of remaining games in the special gaming state.
The update means updates the value of the remaining game counter by 1 for each game.
The right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is interrupted to shift to the specific gaming state, and the second gaming state is completed after the end of the specific gaming state. When resuming
Even in a game in which the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted in the second gaming state, the value of the remaining game number counter is subtracted by 1 by the updating means, and after the subtraction is performed, the first 2. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein a process of adding 1 to the value of the remaining game number counter (for example, the process of S2107 of FIG. 221) can be executed until the gaming state is restarted.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the game shifts from the first gaming state (for example, a game other than the final game in the RUSH state) to the specific gaming state (for example, the RB state), it is restarted after the end of the specific gaming state. In one game state, the game period becomes the updated game period, while the second game state (for example, the final game in the RUSH state), which has a higher advantage for the player than the first game state, shifts to the specific game state. In the case, in the second game state restarted after the end of the specific game state, the game period is configured so as not to be the updated game period. That is, in the second gaming state, measures are taken to prevent the gaming period from progressing due to the transition to the specific gaming state. As a result, even if the transition condition to a different state is satisfied while the player's advantage is high, the player's sense of loss is reduced to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. be able to.

As the above-mentioned measures, for example, when the game period in the special game state (for example, the RUSH state) is managed by the remaining game number counter, and the value of the remaining game number counter is subtracted by 1 for each game. After the second game state is interrupted by the transition to the specific game state, the process of adding 1 to the value of the remaining game number counter may be executed between the end of the specific game state and the restart. As a result, the above-mentioned measures can be appropriately taken without increasing the control burden more than necessary.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of the detailed example (No. 2)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, the first display unit 404) capable of notifying a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling a specific game state (for example, an RB state) that is advantageous to the player and a special game state (for example, a RUSH state) for which notification is performed by the notification means.
A management means for managing the game period in the special game state (for example, a RUSH remaining G number counter) and
A renewal means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs RUSH remaining G number management processing) for renewing the game period managed by the management means according to the establishment of a predetermined renewal condition is provided.
The special gaming state includes a first gaming state (for example, a game other than the final game in the RUSH state) and a second gaming state (for example, the final game in the RUSH state).
The second gaming state has a higher advantage in granting the right (for example, RUSH stock) for being controlled to the gaming state in which the notification is performed by the notification means, as compared with the first gaming state.
The second gaming state has a higher advantage than the specific gaming state in terms of granting the right to be controlled to the gaming state in which the notification is performed by the notification means.
When the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted in the first gaming state (for example, when the "pushing order RB combination" is won), the first gaming state is interrupted and the specific gaming state is interrupted. , And after the end of the specific gaming state, the first gaming state is restarted.
When the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is interrupted to shift to the specific gaming state, and after the end of the specific gaming state, the second gaming state is completed. It restarts the game state,
In the first game state, when the predetermined renewal condition is also satisfied in the game to which the right to be controlled to the specific game state is granted, the game period of the first game state at the time of resumption depends on the renewal means. It will be the game period that was updated,
In the second gaming state, when the predetermined renewal condition is also satisfied in the game to which the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted, the gaming period of the second gaming state at the time of resumption depends on the renewal means. A gaming machine characterized by being configured to have a gaming period that has not been renewed.
The management means is a remaining game number counter that counts the number of remaining games in the special gaming state.
The update means updates the value of the remaining game counter by 1 for each game.
The right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted in the second gaming state, the second gaming state is interrupted to shift to the specific gaming state, and the second gaming state is completed after the end of the specific gaming state. When resuming
Even in a game in which the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted in the second gaming state, the value of the remaining game number counter is subtracted by 1 by the updating means, and after the subtraction is performed, the first 2. The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein a process of adding 1 to the value of the remaining game number counter (for example, the process of S2107 of FIG. 221) can be executed until the gaming state is restarted.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the game shifts from the first gaming state (for example, a game other than the final game in the RUSH state) to the specific gaming state (for example, the RB state), it is restarted after the end of the specific gaming state. In one game state, the game period becomes the updated game period, while the specific game starts from the second game state (for example, the final game in the RUSH state) in which the player has a higher advantage than the first game state and the specific game state. When shifting to the state, in the second game state restarted after the end of the specific game state, the game period is configured so as not to be the updated game period. That is, in the second gaming state, measures are taken to prevent the gaming period from progressing due to the transition to the specific gaming state. Here, since the specific gaming state has a lower advantage than the second gaming state, such measures are more preferable. As a result, even if the transition condition to a different state is satisfied while the player's advantage is high, the player's sense of loss is reduced to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. be able to.

As the above-mentioned measures, for example, when the game period in the special game state (for example, the RUSH state) is managed by the remaining game number counter, and the value of the remaining game number counter is subtracted by 1 for each game. After the second game state is interrupted by the transition to the specific game state, the process of adding 1 to the value of the remaining game number counter may be executed between the end of the specific game state and the restart. As a result, the above-mentioned measures can be appropriately taken without increasing the control burden more than necessary.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of the detailed example (No. 2)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, the first display unit 404) capable of notifying a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and
A game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) capable of controlling a specific game state (for example, an RB state) that is advantageous to the player and a special game state (for example, a RUSH state) for which notification is performed by the notification means. With
The special game state is performed with a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) as one set, and the first game state (for example, a game other than the final game in the RUSH state) and the second game state (for example, the final game in the RUSH state) are performed. Including games)
The second gaming state has a higher advantage in granting the right (for example, RUSH stock) for being controlled to the gaming state in which the notification is performed by the notification means, as compared with the first gaming state.
The second gaming state is one game in the special gaming state.
When the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted in the second gaming state, the transition to the specific gaming state is made after the grant of the right, and the second gaming state is reached after the end of the specific gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by transition.
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a predetermined combination (for example, "normal replay") is provided.
The combination determining means can determine the predetermined combination as a winning combination in the second gaming state with a higher probability than the probability that the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted in the second gaming state. can be,
The above-described above, wherein when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the second gaming state, the right to be controlled to the gaming state in which the notification is performed by the notification means is always granted. Gaming machine.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the special gaming state (for example, the RUSH state) is performed with a predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games) as one set, and one of the games has a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player. The second game state has a high advantage of the right to be controlled to the notified game state (for example, RUSH stock), and the first game state is set in other games. Then, when the right to be controlled to the specific game state (for example, the RB state) is granted in the second game state (for example, when the "push order RB combination" is won), the end of the specific game state. After that, it is configured so that the game in the second game state can be performed again. That is, in the second game state, which is one game, when the player shifts to the specific game state without receiving the benefit in the highly advantageous state, the specific game state is given again the opportunity to receive the benefit. After the end, the game shifts to the second game state. As a result, even if the transition condition to a different state is satisfied while the player's advantage is high, the player's sense of loss is reduced to suppress the decline in the interest of the game. be able to.

In the second gaming state, the right to be controlled to the gaming state in which the stop operation mode advantageous to the player is notified is always granted rather than the probability that the right to be controlled to the specific gaming state is granted. By configuring the winning probability of the predetermined combination (for example, "normal replay") to be played to be higher, the second gaming state can be set to a highly advantageous gaming state. As a result, it is possible to dramatically increase the sense of expectation in a state where the player has a high degree of advantage and improve the interest of the game.

[Game machine of invention 2 according to one detailed example (No. 2)]
It is known that a conventional gaming machine can control during a big bonus to either a super big in which an advantageous stop operation mode is notified for winning a specific small winning combination or a normal big in which the notification is not made. (For example, see JP-A-2003-265689).

However, in such a gaming machine, since the number of acquired gaming values differs depending on the state during the big bonus, it is possible to enjoy the sharp gameplay, but for example, the gaming value during the normal big. If the number of acquisitions is too small, there is a problem that the player's willingness to play may be discouraged.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and in a specific gaming state in which an advantageous stop operation mode is not always notified, a method with a small processing load is used to suppress a downward movement in the number of acquired game values. By doing so, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decline in the interest of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give a gaming value according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of the detailed example (No. 2)).
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a specific combination (for example, a batting order small combination), and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
The winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the stop control process) for stopping the fluctuation of the variable display unit according to the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. ,
A notification means (for example, the first display unit 404) capable of notifying a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling a special game state (for example, NBB state) in which execution of notification by the notification means is permitted is provided.
The stop control means has a predetermined number (for example, 15 sheets) when the stop operation detection means detects a specific stop operation mode (for example, correct answer pressing order) in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as a winning combination. ), And when a non-specific stop operation mode (for example, failure push order) different from the specific stop operation mode is detected, the game value is less than the predetermined number. At least one of the first non-specific result display to be given or the second non-specific result display to which the game value is not given can be derived.
The notification means is
In the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the special game state, the specific stop operation mode is not necessarily notified.
In the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the special game state, if the predetermined number of game values are not given in the unit game immediately before the unit game, the notification of the specific stop operation mode is notified. A gaming machine characterized by doing.
When the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the first unit game in which the special game state is started, the notification means of the specific stop operation mode regardless of the game value added status in the immediately preceding unit game. The gaming machine described above, which is characterized by performing notification.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in a special gaming state (for example, NBB state) in which a player can be notified of an advantageous stop operation mode, a predetermined number (for example, a batting order small winning combination) is won when a specific combination (for example, a batting order small combination) is won. , 15) The specific stop operation mode (for example, the correct answer pressing order) to which the game value is to be given may not always be notified, but the predetermined number of game values are not given in the immediately preceding unit game. In this case, when a specific combination is won in the unit game, the specific stop operation mode is notified. As a result, in a specific game state in which an advantageous stop operation mode is not always notified, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of acquired game values by using a method with a small processing load, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game. ..

When a specific combination is won in the first unit game in which the special game state is started, the specific stop operation mode can be notified regardless of the game value added status in the immediately preceding unit game. As a result, the game value is likely to be given at the initial stage of the special game state, so that the player's discomfort can be reduced even if the situation in which the game value decreases thereafter continues for some time. Furthermore, it is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the game.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give a gaming value according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of the detailed example (No. 2)).
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a specific combination (for example, a batting order small combination), and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
The winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the stop control process) for stopping the fluctuation of the variable display unit according to the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. ,
A notification means (for example, the first display unit 404) capable of notifying a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling a special game state (for example, NBB state) in which execution of notification by the notification means is permitted is provided.
The stop control means has a predetermined number (for example, 15 sheets) when the stop operation detection means detects a specific stop operation mode (for example, correct answer pressing order) in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as a winning combination. ), And when a non-specific stop operation mode (for example, failure push order) different from the specific stop operation mode is detected, the game value is less than the predetermined number. At least one of the first non-specific result display to be given or the second non-specific result display to which the game value is not given can be derived.
The notification means is
In the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the special game state, the specific stop operation mode is not necessarily notified.
In the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the special game state, if the predetermined number of game values are not given in the unit game immediately before the unit game, the notification of the specific stop operation mode is notified. Do,
In the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the special game state, the case where the predetermined number of game values are not given in the unit game immediately before the unit game is the case where the specific combination is specified in the immediately preceding unit game. This includes the case where the winning combination is determined as the winning combination and the specific stop operation mode is notified by the notification means, but the player performs the non-specific stop operation mode and the predetermined number of game values are not given. A game machine characterized by that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in a special gaming state (for example, NBB state) in which a player can be notified of an advantageous stop operation mode, a predetermined number (for example, a batting order small winning combination) is won when a specific combination (for example, a batting order small combination) is won. , 15) The specific stop operation mode (for example, the correct answer pressing order) to which the game value is to be given may not always be notified, but the predetermined number of game values are not given in the immediately preceding unit game. In this case, when a specific combination is won in the unit game, the specific stop operation mode is notified. The same applies when a specific winning combination is won in the immediately preceding unit game and a specific stop operation mode is notified but a predetermined number of game values are not given. As a result, in a specific game state in which an advantageous stop operation mode is not always notified, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the number of acquired game values by using a method with a small processing load, thereby suppressing a decrease in the interest of the game. .. In addition, even if a stop operation error occurs, it is possible to suppress a downturn in the number of acquired game values including that.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give a gaming value according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of the detailed example (No. 2)).
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a specific combination (for example, a batting order small combination), and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
The winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the stop control process) for stopping the fluctuation of the variable display unit according to the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. ,
A notification means (for example, the first display unit 404) capable of notifying a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and
A game state control means (for example, main CPU 101) for controlling a first game state (for example, NBB state) and a second game state (for example, SBB state) in which execution of notification by the notification means is permitted is provided.
The stop control means has a predetermined number (for example, 15 sheets) when the stop operation detection means detects a specific stop operation mode (for example, correct answer pressing order) in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as a winning combination. ), And when a non-specific stop operation mode (for example, failure push order) different from the specific stop operation mode is detected, the game value is less than the predetermined number. At least one of the first non-specific result display to be given or the second non-specific result display to which the game value is not given can be derived.
The notification means is
In the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the first game state, the specific stop operation mode is not necessarily notified.
In the unit game in which the specific combination is determined as the winning combination in the first game state, if the predetermined number of game values are not given in the unit game immediately before the unit game, the notification of the specific stop operation mode is given. And
A gaming machine characterized in that in a unit game in which the specific combination is determined as a winning combination in the second gaming state, the specific stop operation mode is notified.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, there are a first gaming state (for example, NBB state) and a second gaming state (for example, SBB state) in which a player can be notified of an advantageous stop operation mode. , A specific stop operation mode (for example, correct answer pressing order) in which a predetermined number (for example, 15 cards) of game value is given when a specific combination (for example, batting order small combination) is won may not always be notified. However, when a predetermined number of game values are not given in the immediately preceding unit game, the specific stop operation mode is notified when the specific combination is won in the unit game, and in the second game state, the specific combination is won. When this happens, the specific stop operation mode is notified. As a result, a predetermined gaming state (for example, SBB state) in which an advantageous stop operation mode is notified and a specific gaming state (for example, NBB state) in which an advantageous stop operation mode is not necessarily notified can be created by a simple method. In the specific game state, it is possible to suppress a decline in the interest of the game by suppressing a downward decline in the number of acquired game values by using a method with a small processing load.

[Game machine of invention 3 according to one detailed example (No. 2)]
It is known that conventional gaming machines have made it possible to play a so-called selection game in which a privilege is given when a player can hit the correct answer pressing order in a situation where the correct answer pressing order is not notified. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2009-261795).

In the gaming machine shown in JP-A-2009-261795, for example, when the stopping operation is performed in the correct pressing order at the time of winning a predetermined winning combination in a predetermined gaming state, a stop operation mode advantageous to the player can be notified. While the privilege of increasing the number of games in the special game state is given, such a privilege is not given when the stop operation is performed in the order of incorrect release.

By the way, in recent years, in such a gaming machine, there is a case where a specific gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section) in which processing related to a special gaming state is not allowed by referring to a combination of displayed symbols, a pushing order, or the like is provided. There is.

However, even in such a specific game state, if the player performs the stop operation in the order of pressing the correct answer when the above-mentioned predetermined combination is won, the combination of symbols related to the privilege grant may be stopped and displayed. There is. In this case, there is a problem that the player feels uncomfortable because the combination of such symbols is stopped and displayed even though the privilege is not given.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and provides a gaming machine capable of reducing a player's discomfort even when a specific gaming state with certain restrictions is provided. With the goal.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give a gaming value according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of the detailed example (No. 2)).
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a predetermined combination (for example, a push order RB combination), and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
The winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the stop control process) for stopping the fluctuation of the variable display unit according to the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. ,
A notification means (for example, the first display unit 404) capable of notifying a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and
A special gaming state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) in which notification by the notification means is allowed to be executed, and a first gaming state (for example, normal) in which processing related to the special gaming state can be executed according to the derived result display. A game state control means (for example, main) that controls a second game state (for example, a normal / non-advantageous section) that does not enable the processing related to the special game state to be executed according to the derived result display. With CPU101)
The stop control means displays a specific result (for example, RB lip) when the stop operation detection means detects a specific stop operation mode (for example, correct answer pressing order) in a unit game in which the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination. Can be derived, and when a non-specific stop operation mode different from the specific stop operation mode (for example, incorrect answering order) is detected, the specific result display cannot be derived.
When the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the first gaming state, when the specific result display is derived, the privilege related to the special gaming state is given, but the specific result display is not derived. In that case, it is configured so that the privilege related to the special gaming state is not given.
When the predetermined winning combination is determined as the winning combination in the second gaming state, the privilege related to the special gaming state is given regardless of whether or not the specific result display is derived. A game machine to play.
In the first game state, the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination, and the privilege related to the special game state (for example, transition to the RB state) given when the specific result display is derived, and the second game The gaming machine according to the above, which is different from the privilege related to the special gaming state (for example, transition to the BB state) given when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first gaming state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) capable of executing a process related to a special gaming state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) in which a player can be notified of a stop operation mode advantageous to the player according to the derived result display. For example, there are a normal / advantageous section) and a second gaming state (for example, a normal / non-advantageous section) in which the processing cannot be executed. , If you win the push order RB role), the privilege will be given according to the result of the selected game, and if you win the predetermined combination in the second game state, the privilege will be given regardless of the derived result display. It is configured to grant. As a result, even when a specific gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section) with certain restrictions is provided, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort.

In addition, a privilege given according to the result of the selection game in the first game state (for example, transition to the RB state) and a privilege given when a predetermined combination is won in the second game state (for example, the BB state). It can be a different benefit from (transition to). As a result, it is possible not only to reduce the sense of discomfort, but also to diversify the playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give a gaming value according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of the detailed example (No. 2)).
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a predetermined combination (for example, a push order RB combination), and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
The winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the stop control process) for stopping the fluctuation of the variable display unit according to the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. ,
A notification means (for example, the first display unit 404) capable of notifying a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and
A special gaming state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) in which notification by the notification means is allowed to be executed, and a first gaming state (for example, normal) in which processing related to the special gaming state can be executed according to the derived result display. A game state control means (for example, main) that controls a second game state (for example, a normal / non-advantageous section) that does not enable the processing related to the special game state to be executed according to the derived result display. With CPU101)
The stop control means displays a specific result (for example, RB lip) when the stop operation detection means detects a specific stop operation mode (for example, correct answer pressing order) in a unit game in which the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination. Can be derived, and when a non-specific stop operation mode different from the specific stop operation mode (for example, incorrect answering order) is detected, the specific result display cannot be derived.
When the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the first gaming state, when the specific result display is derived, the privilege related to the special gaming state is given, but the specific result display is not derived. In that case, it is configured so that the privilege related to the special gaming state is not given.
When the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the second gaming state, the privilege related to the special gaming state is given regardless of whether or not the specific result display is derived.
When the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the second game state, the player's game operation is invalid for a predetermined period until the stop operation detection means can detect the stop operation in the next unit game. A gaming machine further comprising a specific effect executing means (for example, a main CPU 101 that controls the first to fourth reels) capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a lock at the start).
In the first game state, the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination, and the privilege related to the special game state (for example, transition to the RB state) given when the specific result display is derived, and the second game The gaming machine according to the above, which is different from the privilege related to the special gaming state (for example, transition to the BB state) given when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the state.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein during the specific effect, an effect (for example, a "seven-aligned" effect) in which a special result display is derived to the variable display unit can be further executed.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first gaming state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) capable of executing a process related to a special gaming state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) in which a player can be notified of a stop operation mode advantageous to the player according to the derived result display. For example, there are a normal / advantageous section) and a second gaming state (for example, a normal / non-advantageous section) in which the processing cannot be executed. , If you win the push order RB role), the privilege will be given according to the result of the selected game, and if you win the predetermined combination in the second game state, the privilege will be given regardless of the derived result display. It is configured to grant. Further, when the privilege is given in the second game state, a specific effect (for example, lock at the start) is executed before the stop operation permission of the next game is executed, and the fact is notified. As a result, even when a specific gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section) with certain restrictions is provided, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort. Further, when the privilege is given in the second gaming state, the so-called post-notification notifies the player to that effect, so that the player can be made to think that the notification pattern was originally such a function. The effect will be more pronounced.

In addition, a privilege given according to the result of the selection game in the first game state (for example, transition to the RB state) and a privilege given when a predetermined combination is won in the second game state (for example, the BB state). It can be a different benefit from (transition to). As a result, it is possible not only to reduce the sense of discomfort, but also to diversify the playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.
Further, when the privilege is given in the second game state, it is possible to execute an effect (for example, a "seven-matched" effect) in which the special result display is derived during the specific effect. As a result, the content of the privilege can be notified to the player in a highly entertaining manner.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give a gaming value according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of the detailed example (No. 2)).
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a predetermined combination (for example, a push order RB combination), and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
The winning combination determined by the combination determining means and the stop control means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs the stop control process) for stopping the fluctuation of the variable display unit according to the stop operation mode detected by the stop operation detecting means. ,
A notification means (for example, the first display unit 404) capable of notifying a stop operation mode advantageous to the player, and
A special gaming state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) in which notification by the notification means is allowed to be executed, and a first gaming state (for example, normal) in which processing related to the special gaming state can be executed according to the derived result display. A game state control means (for example, main) that controls a second game state (for example, a normal / non-advantageous section) that does not enable the processing related to the special game state to be executed according to the derived result display. With CPU101)
The stop control means displays a specific result (for example, RB lip) when the stop operation detection means detects a specific stop operation mode (for example, correct answer pressing order) in a unit game in which the predetermined combination is determined as a winning combination. Can be derived, and when a non-specific stop operation mode different from the specific stop operation mode (for example, incorrect answering order) is detected, the specific result display cannot be derived.
When the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the first gaming state, when the specific result display is derived, the privilege related to the special gaming state is given, but the specific result display is not derived. In that case, it is configured so that the privilege related to the special gaming state is not given.
When the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the second gaming state, the privilege related to the special gaming state is given regardless of whether or not the specific result display is derived.
A common predetermined effect (for example, RB challenge) in the unit game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the first game state and the unit game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the second game state. A gaming machine further provided with a predetermined effect executing means (for example, a sub CPU 201 that controls a notification lamp or the like) capable of executing the effect).
In the first game state, the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination, and the privilege related to the special game state (for example, transition to the RB state) given when the specific result display is derived, and the second game The gaming machine according to the above, which is different from the privilege related to the special gaming state (for example, transition to the BB state) given when the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination in the state.
In either of the first gaming state and the second gaming state during the predetermined effect, the stop operation detecting means detects the non-specific stop operation mode, and the specific result display is displayed. If it cannot be derived, an effect suggesting that the privilege related to the special gaming state is not given (for example, an effect indicating a challenge failure) is performed, and then, in the case of the second gaming state, Before the stop operation detecting means can detect the stop operation in the next unit game, an effect suggesting that a privilege related to the special game state is given (for example, a "seven-matched" effect) is performed. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that it is played.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the first gaming state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) capable of executing a process related to a special gaming state (for example, a pseudo-bonus state) in which a player can be notified of a stop operation mode advantageous to the player according to the derived result display. For example, there are a normal / advantageous section) and a second gaming state (for example, a normal / non-advantageous section) in which the processing cannot be executed. , If you win the push order RB role), the privilege will be given according to the result of the selected game, and if you win the predetermined combination in the second game state, the privilege will be given regardless of the derived result display. It is configured to grant. Further, in both the first game state and the second game state, a common predetermined effect (for example, an RB challenge effect) is performed in the unit game in which the predetermined combination is determined as the winning combination. As a result, even when a specific gaming state (for example, a non-advantageous section) with certain restrictions is provided, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort. Further, by executing the common predetermined effect, it is possible to make it difficult to recognize the game state at the time of winning the predetermined combination, so that such an action effect becomes more remarkable.

In addition, a privilege given according to the result of the selection game in the first game state (for example, transition to the RB state) and a privilege given when a predetermined combination is won in the second game state (for example, the BB state). It can be a different benefit from (transition to). As a result, it is possible not only to reduce the sense of discomfort, but also to diversify the playability and improve the enjoyment of the game.
In addition, during the predetermined production, when the result display recognizing that the selection game has failed is displayed in either the first game state or the second game state, the special game state is concerned. If an effect suggesting that the privilege is not given (for example, an effect indicating a challenge failure) is performed, and then in the second game state, the special game state is related until before the stop operation permission of the next game is permitted. An effect that suggests that a privilege is given (for example, a "seven-matched" effect) can be performed. As a result, even if a suggestion of content that the player does not want is made during the predetermined production, the privilege that the player desires may be granted after that, so that the expectation regarding the granting of the privilege can be continued. Can be given.

[Game machine of invention 4 according to one detailed example (No. 2)]
In a conventional gaming machine, when the difference between the total number of used gaming media and the total number of payout gaming media (so-called difference number) reaches a predetermined value (for example, 10,000 sheets), the game cannot be continued (so-called). It is known that it is possible to put it in a stopped state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2004-135838).

Further, there is known a conventional gaming machine capable of displaying a guide menu screen capable of providing game information according to a player's operation (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-114090).

By the way, in the above-mentioned stopped state, all the operations of the player are generally treated as invalid. Therefore, for example, a gaming machine as shown in JP-A-2004-135838 may not be able to provide game information as shown in JP-A-2018-114090. In such a case, there is a problem that the convenience of the player is lowered.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and is a gaming machine capable of improving the convenience of a player in a gaming machine capable of generating a state in which it is impossible to play a game. The purpose is to provide.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give a gaming value according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of the detailed example (No. 2)).
A difference recognition means (for example, a difference number counter) capable of recognizing the difference between the game value used in the game and the given game value, and
When the difference number recognized by the difference number recognizing means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when the difference number counter reaches a value exceeding "12500"), the game is disabled. The disabling state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the disabling state (for example, the stopped state), and
Production operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, production button 403, selection button 401, enter button 402, etc.)
A display means (for example, a second display unit 405) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a menu screen) for making it possible to provide game information according to the operation of the effect operation means is provided. ,
The display means is a gaming machine capable of displaying the specific display in response to an operation of the effect operating means even when the display means is controlled to the disabled state.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, even in the disabled state (for example, the stopped state) in which the game is disabled, when the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, the operation for the effect button 403). Is configured to be able to display a specific display (for example, a menu screen) for making it possible to provide game information. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player in the gaming machine capable of generating a state that makes it impossible to play the game.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give a gaming value according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of the detailed example (No. 2)).
A difference recognition means (for example, a difference number counter) capable of recognizing the difference between the game value used in the game and the given game value, and
When the difference number recognized by the difference number recognizing means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when the difference number counter reaches a value exceeding "12500"), the game is disabled. The disabling state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the disabling state (for example, the stopped state), and
Production operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, production button 403, selection button 401, enter button 402, etc.)
A display means (for example, a second display unit 405) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a menu screen) for making it possible to provide game information according to the operation of the effect operation means is provided. ,
The game information includes game history information according to the game result of the player.
Even when the display means is controlled to the disabled state, the specific display can be displayed according to the operation of the effect operation means, and the specific display is displayed. If so, a special display (for example, a two-dimensional code) is displayed so that the player can confirm the game information including the game history information in response to the operation of the effect operation means. A gaming machine characterized by making it possible.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, even in the disabled state (for example, the stopped state) in which the game is disabled, when the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, the operation for the effect button 403). Is configured to be able to display a specific display (for example, a menu screen) for making it possible to provide game information. Further, when the specific display is displayed and the player further performs a predetermined operation (for example, an operation on the selection button 401 and the enter button 402), the game information including the game history information can be confirmed. It is configured so that a special display (for example, a two-dimensional code) can be displayed. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player in the gaming machine capable of generating a state that makes it impossible to play the game.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give a gaming value according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of the detailed example (No. 2)).
A difference recognition means (for example, a difference number counter) capable of recognizing the difference between the game value used in the game and the given game value, and
When the difference number recognized by the difference number recognizing means satisfies a predetermined condition (for example, when the difference number counter reaches a value exceeding "12500"), the game is disabled. The disabling state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the disabling state (for example, the stopped state), and
Production operation means that can be operated by the player (for example, production button 403, selection button 401, enter button 402, etc.)
A display means (for example, a second display unit 405) capable of displaying a specific display (for example, a menu screen) for making it possible to provide game information according to the operation of the effect operation means is provided. ,
Even when the display means is controlled to the disabled state, the specific display can be displayed according to the operation of the effect operation means.
As the gaming state, at least, a specific gaming state (for example, an increase section) capable of notifying the player of an advantageous stop operation mode and a non-specific gaming state (for example, a normal / non-advantageous section or a normal section) different from the specific gaming state.・ Has an advantageous section)
The disabling state control means is the disabling state when the difference number recognized by the difference number recognizing means satisfies the predetermined condition and the gaming state in the next game is the non-specific gaming state. A gaming machine characterized by being controlled to.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, even in the disabled state (for example, the stopped state) in which the game is disabled, when the player performs a predetermined operation (for example, the operation for the effect button 403). Is configured to be able to display a specific display (for example, a menu screen) for making it possible to provide game information. In addition, the disabled state will be shifted depending on the condition based on the difference between the used game value and the granted game value, but the transition condition is that the next game is in a game state that is not advantageous to the player. It is composed. As a result, it is possible to improve the convenience of the player in the gaming machine capable of generating a state that makes it impossible to play the game. In addition, for example, when a player is playing a game in an advantageous gaming state due to a change of players, and the condition based on the difference number happens to be satisfied, it is impossible until the advantageous gaming state ends. Since the transition to the disabled state is not performed, it is possible to generate the disabled state in a more appropriate situation, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the interest due to the occurrence of the disabled state.

[Game machine of invention 5 and invention 6 according to one detailed example (No. 2)]
In a conventional gaming machine, it is known that a value obtained by logically summing the symbol identification information corresponding to each of a plurality of symbols can be defined as the symbol identification information in the symbol determination table (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-23260 (see).

However, it is considered that there is room for further improvement in such a method.

The present invention has been made in view of these points, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the amount of information regarding symbol combinations and reducing the processing load.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A plurality of reels (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations according to a player's start operation, and
A stop information determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs each process for determining stop information) capable of determining stop allowable symbol combination information according to a winning combination determined by the combination determining means.
In response to the player's stop operation, the stop permissible symbol combination information determined by the stop information determining means is referred to, and the variation display of each of the plurality of reels is displayed within a predetermined number of sliding pieces (for example, 4 pieces). A gaming machine equipped with a stop control means for stopping (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs stop control processing) (for example, a pachislot machine 1 in a detailed example (No. 2)).
The stop allowable symbol combination information is specific stop allowable symbol combination information (for example, stop allowable symbol combination information “Group 1” shown in FIG. 235, which defines a plurality of symbol combinations corresponding to the determination result of the combination determination means in one group. ”) Including
The specific stop permissible symbol combination information defines a plurality of symbol combinations in which each of a plurality of different symbols has a logical sum relationship in at least one of the reels.
A gaming machine characterized in that the plurality of symbol combinations defined in the specific stop allowable symbol combination information may include symbol combinations that are not stopped by the stop control means.

According to the game machine having the above configuration, the stop permissible symbol combination information referred to in the stop control includes the specific stop permissible symbol combination information (which defines a plurality of symbol combinations corresponding to the determination result of the combination determining means in one group. For example, the stop allowable symbol combination information “group 1”) shown in FIG. 235 is included, and the specific stop allowable symbol combination information includes a plurality of different symbols in which each of a plurality of different symbols has a logical sum relationship in at least one reel. The combination is defined, and the plurality of symbol combinations may include a symbol combination that is not stopped by the stop control. That is, it is possible to specify more symbol combinations in one group by making it possible to include symbol combinations that are not stopped in the specific stop allowable symbol combination information. As a result, the amount of information regarding the symbol combination can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A plurality of reels (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations according to a player's start operation, and
A stop information determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs each process for determining stop information) capable of determining stop allowable symbol combination information according to a winning combination determined by the combination determining means.
In response to the player's stop operation, the stop permissible symbol combination information determined by the stop information determining means is referred to, and the variation display of each of the plurality of reels is displayed within a predetermined number of sliding pieces (for example, 4 pieces). A gaming machine equipped with a stop control means for stopping (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs stop control processing) (for example, a pachislot machine 1 in a detailed example (No. 2)).
The stop allowable symbol combination information includes specific stop allowable symbol combination information (for example, stop allowable symbol combination information "group 1" shown in FIG. 235) that defines a plurality of kinds of symbol combinations corresponding to loss in one group.
The specific stop permissible symbol combination information defines a plurality of symbol combinations in which each of a plurality of different symbols has a logical sum relationship in at least one of the reels.
The plurality of symbol combinations specified in the specific stop allowable symbol combination information may include symbol combinations that are not stopped by the stop control means.
The stop information determining means is used when the player's stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, correct answer pressing order) when the combination determining means determines a predetermined combination (for example, a batting order small combination) as a winning combination. Predetermined stop permissible symbol combination information can be determined as the stop permissible symbol combination information for making it possible to display a predetermined symbol combination (for example, a set of different colored bells) to which a predetermined game value (for example, 15 sheets) is given (for example). , The priority table number "0" can be selected), and the predetermined symbol combination is displayed when the player's stop operation is performed in a non-specific mode (for example, failure batting order) different from the specific mode. The specific stop permissible symbol combination information can be determined as the stop permissible symbol combination information for not enabling (for example, priority table numbers "1" to "4" can be selected).
When the combination determining means determines the predetermined combination as the winning combination, the stop control means refers to the predetermined stop allowable symbol combination information when the player's stop operation is performed in the specific mode. The variation display of each of the plurality of reels is stopped, and when the player's stop operation is performed in the non-specific mode, the variation display of each of the plurality of reels is stopped with reference to the specific stop allowable symbol combination information. A game machine characterized by being able to do.

According to the game machine having the above configuration, the stop operation is performed in a specific mode (for example, the correct answer pressing order) at the time of winning a predetermined combination (for example, a small winning combination) in the stop allowable symbol combination information referred to in the stop control. Specific stop permissible symbol combination information (for example, stop permissible symbol combination shown in FIG. 235) that defines a plurality of kinds of symbol combinations corresponding to so-called spills (losses) that are stopped and displayed due to failure. The information "group 1") is included, and the specific stop permissible symbol combination information includes a plurality of symbol combinations in which a plurality of different symbols are ORed in at least one reel, and the plurality of combinations are defined. The symbol combination of is configured so that the symbol combination that is not stopped by the stop control may be included. That is, it is possible to specify more symbol combinations in one group by making it possible to include symbol combinations that are not stopped in the specific stop allowable symbol combination information. As a result, the amount of information regarding the symbol combination can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced. Further, by making the symbol combination defined in this way a so-called spilled eye, it is possible to stop the symbol in a more comfortable manner even when the predetermined game value is not given.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A plurality of reels (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations according to a player's start operation, and
A stop information determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs each process for determining stop information) capable of determining stop allowable symbol combination information according to a winning combination determined by the combination determining means.
In response to the player's stop operation, the stop permissible symbol combination information determined by the stop information determining means is referred to, and the variation display of each of the plurality of reels is displayed within a predetermined number of sliding pieces (for example, 4 pieces). A gaming machine equipped with a stop control means for stopping (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs stop control processing) (for example, a pachislot machine 1 in a detailed example (No. 2)).
The stop allowable symbol combination information includes specific stop allowable symbol combination information (for example, stop allowable symbol combination information "group 1" shown in FIG. 235) that defines a plurality of kinds of symbol combinations corresponding to loss in one group.
The specific stop permissible symbol combination information defines a plurality of symbol combinations in which each of a plurality of different symbols has a logical sum relationship in at least one of the reels.
The plurality of symbol combinations specified in the specific stop allowable symbol combination information may include symbol combinations that are not stopped by the stop control means.
When the stop control means stops the symbol combination corresponding to the loss, each symbol within the range of the predetermined number of sliding pieces from the symbol position when the player performs the stop operation on at least one of the reels. The position symbols are searched according to a predetermined order to see if they correspond to the symbol combinations specified in the specific stop allowable symbol combination information, and the symbol combinations specified in the specific stop allowable symbol combination information are obtained. A gaming machine characterized in that the reel is stopped at a symbol position for which a search result of matching is obtained.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, the stop permissible symbol combination information referred to in the stop control includes the specific stop permissible symbol combination information (for example, FIG. 235) in which a plurality of symbol combinations corresponding to the loss are defined as one group. The stop allowable symbol combination information "group 1") is included, and the specific stop allowable symbol combination information defines a plurality of symbol combinations in which each of a plurality of different symbols is ORed in at least one reel. At the same time, the plurality of symbol combinations may include symbol combinations that are not stopped by the stop control. Further, at least one reel is configured to perform stop control by so-called control control. That is, it is possible to specify more symbol combinations in one group by making it possible to include symbol combinations that are not stopped in the specific stop allowable symbol combination information. As a result, the amount of information regarding the symbol combination can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced. Further, such an action effect becomes more remarkable when the stop control is performed by the so-called control control.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A plurality of reels (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a special combination (for example, "2BB" which is a bonus combination) according to a player's start operation. When,
A stop information determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs each process for determining stop information) capable of determining stop allowable symbol combination information according to a winning combination determined by the combination determining means.
In response to the player's stop operation, the stop permissible symbol combination information determined by the stop information determining means is referred to, and the variation display of each of the plurality of reels is displayed within a predetermined number of sliding pieces (for example, 4 pieces). A gaming machine equipped with a stop control means for stopping (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs stop control processing) (for example, a pachislot machine 1 in a detailed example (No. 2)).
The symbol combination (for example, "C_BB2") corresponding to the special combination corresponds to the special symbol (for example, "C_BB2") when the player's stop operation is performed at a non-specific timing different from the specific timing on at least one of the reels. , "Bra 2" symbol) is configured as a symbol combination that is not displayed,
In a game in which the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is permitted, the stop information determining means cannot display the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination, and the specific symbol combination corresponding to the loss (for example, "T_BB Koboshi"). It is possible to determine the specific stop permissible symbol combination information for displaying "_1st" to "T_BB Koboshi_4th") (for example, priority table numbers "1" to "4" can be selected).
The specific symbol combination may be any symbol on at least one or more of the reels, and a specific symbol (for example, a "seven" symbol or a "red bell" symbol) different from the special symbol is defined in the remaining reels. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured as a combination of symbols.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in a game in which the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, "2BB" which is a bonus combination) is permitted, if the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination cannot be displayed, it is lost. It is possible to display the corresponding specific symbol combination (for example, "T_BB Koboshi_1st" to "T_BB Koboshi_4th"), and the specific symbol combination may be any symbol on at least one or more reels, and is special for the remaining reels. It is configured as a symbol combination in which a specific symbol different from the symbol (for example, a "seven" symbol or a "red bell" symbol) is defined. As a result, the amount of information regarding the symbol combination can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A plurality of reels (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a special combination (for example, "2BB" which is a bonus combination) according to a player's start operation. When,
A stop information determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs each process for determining stop information) capable of determining stop allowable symbol combination information according to a winning combination determined by the combination determining means.
In response to the player's stop operation, the stop permissible symbol combination information determined by the stop information determining means is referred to, and the variation display of each of the plurality of reels is displayed within a predetermined number of sliding pieces (for example, 4 pieces). A gaming machine equipped with a stop control means for stopping (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs stop control processing) (for example, a pachislot machine 1 in a detailed example (No. 2)).
The symbol combination (for example, "C_BB2") corresponding to the special combination corresponds to the special symbol (for example, "C_BB2") when the player's stop operation is performed at a non-specific timing different from the specific timing on at least one of the reels. , "Bra 2" symbol) is configured as a symbol combination that is not displayed,
In a game in which the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is permitted, the stop information determining means cannot display the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination, and the specific symbol combination corresponding to the loss (for example, "T_BB Koboshi"). It is possible to determine the specific stop permissible symbol combination information for displaying "_1st" to "T_BB Koboshi_4th") (for example, priority table numbers "1" to "4" can be selected).
The specific symbol combination may be any symbol on at least one or more of the reels, and a specific symbol (for example, a "seven" symbol or a "red bell" symbol) different from the special symbol is defined in the remaining reels. It is configured as a symbol combination,
In a game in which the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is permitted, the stop control means displays the special symbol in the first stop operation and cannot display the special symbol after the next stop operation. A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to control to stop the specific symbol combination by referring to the specific stop allowable symbol combination information.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in a game in which the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, "2BB" which is a bonus combination) is permitted, if the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination cannot be displayed, it is lost. It is possible to display the corresponding specific symbol combination (for example, "T_BB Koboshi_1st" to "T_BB Koboshi_4th"), and the specific symbol combination may be any symbol on at least one or more reels, and is special for the remaining reels. It is configured as a symbol combination in which a specific symbol different from the symbol (for example, a "seven" symbol or a "red bell" symbol) is defined. Further, the specific symbol combination can be displayed even when the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination cannot be displayed during the stop operation. As a result, the amount of information regarding the symbol combination can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced. Further, even when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped, the symbol combination more in line with the intention can be stopped.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A plurality of reels (for example, the first to fourth reels) capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of symbols in a plurality of columns, and
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a special combination (for example, "2BB" which is a bonus combination) according to a player's start operation. When,
A stop information determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs each process for determining stop information) capable of determining stop allowable symbol combination information according to a winning combination determined by the combination determining means.
In response to the player's stop operation, the stop permissible symbol combination information determined by the stop information determining means is referred to, and the variation display of each of the plurality of reels is displayed within a predetermined number of sliding pieces (for example, 4 pieces). A gaming machine equipped with a stop control means for stopping (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs stop control processing) (for example, a pachislot machine 1 in a detailed example (No. 2)).
The symbol combination (for example, "C_BB2") corresponding to the special combination corresponds to the special symbol (for example, "C_BB2") when the player's stop operation is performed at a non-specific timing different from the specific timing on at least one of the reels. , "Bra 2" symbol) is configured as a symbol combination that is not displayed,
In a game in which the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is permitted, the stop information determining means cannot display the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination, and the specific symbol combination corresponding to the loss (for example, "T_BB Koboshi"). It is possible to determine the specific stop permissible symbol combination information for displaying "_1st" to "T_BB Koboshi_4th") (for example, priority table numbers "1" to "4" can be selected).
There are a plurality of types of the specific symbol combinations, and a specific symbol (for example, a "seven" symbol or a "red bell" symbol) different from the special symbol is defined only in one reel exclusively, and the remaining reels. A gaming machine characterized in that it is configured as a combination of symbols that may be any symbol.
In a game in which the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination is permitted, the stop control means cannot display the special symbol on the reel that is the target of the player's stop operation, the specific stop allowable symbol combination. It is possible to control the display of the specific symbol on the reel by referring to the information.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the specific symbol is arranged at a position where the special symbol can be displayed on each of the plurality of reels when the special symbol cannot be displayed.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in a game in which the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination (for example, "2BB" which is a bonus combination) is permitted, if the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination cannot be displayed, it is lost. It is possible to display the corresponding specific symbol combinations (for example, "T_BB Koboshi_1st" to "T_BB Koboshi_4th"), and there are multiple types of specific symbol combinations, each of which is exclusively a special symbol only on one reel. Different specific symbols (for example, "seven" symbols or "red bell" symbols) are defined, and the remaining reels are configured as a symbol combination that may be any symbol. As a result, the amount of information regarding the symbol combination can be reduced and the processing load can be reduced. Further, such an action effect becomes more remarkable as the number of reels increases.

The specific symbol may be arranged at a position where the special symbol can be displayed on each of the plurality of reels when the special symbol cannot be displayed. As a result, even when the symbol combination corresponding to the loss is stopped, the symbol combination more in line with the intention can be stopped. In particular, it is suitable when it is desired to suggest to the player that the combination of symbols related to the special role can be stopped and displayed.

[Game machines of Inventions 1 to 9 and 13 according to another example (No. 11)]
In a conventional gaming machine, a non-advantageous section (normal section) and an advantageous section can be set as a state in which a game is played, an AT state can be set in the advantageous section, and a predetermined number of times have been set since the advantageous section started. When a game is played or when a specific number of games have been played since the end of the AT state, the initialization process is executed to shift to the non-advantageous section, and in this initialization process, the lottery state of the AT lottery is performed. Is known to be initialized to a low probability state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185099).

By the way, with such a gaming machine, while it is possible to suppress excessively high gambling, there is a problem that the player's motivation and interest in playing may be reduced when shifting to a non-advantageous section. was there.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the player shifts to a non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that can be planned.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
Specific state control means capable of controlling to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state when the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section and when a specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section. (For example, a main CPU 101) and a gaming machine.
The predetermined start condition is satisfied with a high probability in the non-advantageous section, and the predetermined start condition is satisfied.
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined, a precursor period is set, and the player shifts to the non-advantageous section according to the play of the set precursor period.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein it is possible to suggest a transition to the specific state during the precursory period.
When the specific condition is satisfied in the advantageous section, the precursor period is set, and the specific state is controlled according to the game of the set precursor period.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein it is possible to suggest the advantage of the specific state to be shifted during the precursory period.
When shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, it is always controlled to the specific state.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein it is possible to suggest that the non-advantageous section is in the prepared state of the specific state.
The advantageous section end control means shifts to the non-advantageous section when the special state ends, before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, but when the predetermined value becomes a specific value. Is possible,
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the predetermined value is initialized in any case of shifting to the non-advantageous section.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When the transition from the advantageous section to the advantageous section and when the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, it is possible to control the specific state (for example, the CZ state) in which the expectation of the transition to the special state is higher than that of the normal state. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest.

In the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section start condition is satisfied with a high probability, a precursory period is set when transitioning from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, and it may be possible to suggest a transition to a specific state during the precursory period. .. As a result, even when the transition to the specific state is performed via the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suggest the transition to the specific state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in the advantageous section, a precursor period may be set even when a specific condition is satisfied and the transition to the specific state is made, and it may be possible to suggest the advantage of the transition specific state during the precursor period. As a result, it is possible to appropriately show the player the degree of expectation of the special state transition in both cases of transitioning to the specific state via the non-advantageous section and transitioning to the specific state without passing through the non-advantageous section. It will be possible.

Further, when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, it is always controlled to the specific state, and it may be possible to suggest that the state is in the preparation state of the specific state during the non-advantageous section. As a result, the transition to the specific state is confirmed by the transition to the non-advantageous section, so that it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's willingness to play and the interest in the game, and the transition to the specific state is achieved via the non-advantageous section. It is possible to show the transition in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, when the special state ends, it is before the predetermined value (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter) reaches the specified value (for example, "1500" or more), but the specific value (for example, "1000" or more). If it is, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section, and the predetermined value may be initialized in any case of shifting to the non-advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which a game is performed in a state where a predetermined value is close to a specified value in an advantageous section. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
The non-advantageous section is provided with a specific state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling the non-advantageous section to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state.
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined in the advantageous section, a predetermined precursor period (for example, an advantageous section (end precursor)) is set, and the game of the set predetermined precursor period is performed. To the non-advantageous section according to
During the predetermined precursor period, it is possible to suggest a transition to the specific state, and it is notified that the transition to the specific state will occur in the final game.
In the specific state, a specific state display (for example, a CZ state display) is performed, and the specific state display is performed continuously for at least a predetermined period after shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. A game machine to be.
When it is determined to shift to the special state in the specific state, the transition to the advantageous section is performed and a specific precursor period (for example, an advantageous section (AT precursor)) is set, and the set specific precursor period is set. It shifts to the special state according to the game being played,
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein during the advantageous section in which the specific state display is performed, the predetermined period in which the specific state display continues is set according to the set specific precursor period. ..

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When the advantageous section can be controlled to a specific state (for example, CZ state) in which the expectation of transition to the special state is higher than that of the normal state and the transition from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is performed, a predetermined precursor period (for example, an advantageous section (end precursor)). )) Is set, and the specific state display (for example, the display during the CZ state) performed in the specific state can be continued even in a predetermined period after the transition to the advantageous section. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest.

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the special state in the specific state, it shifts to the advantageous section and the specific precursor period (for example, the advantageous section (AT precursor)) is set, and the specific state is displayed. During the section, a predetermined period during which the specific state display continues may be set according to the set specific precursor period. As a result, the non-advantageous section is set to a specific state, and even when the specific state display is performed over the advantageous section, it is possible to perform the effect in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
Specific state control means capable of controlling to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state when the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section and when a specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section. (For example, main CPU 101)
The gaming machine characterized in that the advantageous section end control means can shift to the non-advantageous section even when the special state ends in the advantageous section.
The predetermined start condition is satisfied with a high probability in the non-advantageous section, and the predetermined start condition is satisfied.
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined, a precursor period is set, and the player shifts to the non-advantageous section according to the play of the set precursor period.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein it is possible to suggest a transition to the specific state during the precursory period.
When the specific condition is satisfied in the advantageous section, the precursor period is set, and the specific state is controlled according to the game of the set precursor period.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein it is possible to suggest the advantage of the specific state to be shifted during the precursory period.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the predetermined value is initialized in any case of shifting to the non-advantageous section.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When the transition from the advantageous section to the advantageous section and when the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, it is possible to control the specific state (for example, the CZ state) in which the expectation of the transition to the special state is higher than that of the normal state. Further, as the advantageous section end condition, a predetermined value (for example, a value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) which is updated as the game progresses in the advantageous section has become a specified value, and It includes not only that the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, but also that the special state is terminated. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest.

In the non-advantageous section, the advantageous section start condition is satisfied with a high probability, a precursory period is set when transitioning from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, and it may be possible to suggest a transition to a specific state during the precursory period. .. As a result, even when the transition to the specific state is performed via the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suggest the transition to the specific state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in the advantageous section, a precursor period may be set even when a specific condition is satisfied and the transition to the specific state is made, and it may be possible to suggest the advantage of the transition specific state during the precursor period. As a result, it is possible to appropriately show the player the degree of expectation of the special state transition in both cases of transitioning to the specific state via the non-advantageous section and transitioning to the specific state without passing through the non-advantageous section. It will be possible.

Further, the predetermined value may be initialized in any case of transition to the non-advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult for a situation in which a game is performed in a state where a predetermined value is close to a specified value in an advantageous section. It is possible to suppress the decrease.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
A specific state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state when the non-advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section is provided.
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined in the advantageous section, a precursor period (for example, an advantageous section (end precursor)) is set, and the game is performed in the set precursor period. To shift to the non-advantageous section
In the non-advantageous section, which of the plurality of specific states having different advantages is controlled is determined.
A series of effects are performed in the precursor period and the subsequent non-advantageous section, and it is possible to suggest the type of the specific state determined at the time of transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. A game machine to be.
A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
A specific state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state when the non-advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section is provided.
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined in the advantageous section, a precursor period (for example, an advantageous section (end precursor)) is set, and the game is performed in the set precursor period. To shift to the non-advantageous section
In the non-advantageous section, which of the plurality of specific states having different advantages is controlled is determined.
A series of effects are performed during the precursory period, the subsequent non-advantageous section, and the subsequent specific period of the advantageous section, suggesting the type of the specific state determined when the game of the specific period is performed. A gaming machine characterized by being capable of.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When shifting from an advantageous section to an advantageous section, it is possible to control a specific state (for example, a CZ state) in which the expectation of a special state transition is higher than that of a normal state, and a precursory period (for example) until the transition from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section is made. , Advantageous section (precursor of end)) and the subsequent non-advantageous section, a series of effects are performed, and it is possible to suggest the type of the specific state determined when transitioning from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. Further, even when shifting to a specific state via a non-advantageous section, it is possible to suggest the advantage of the specific state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

It should be noted that the precursory period from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section (end precursor)), the subsequent non-advantageous section and the specific period of the subsequent advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section (CZ via the non-advantageous section)). In the precursor)), a series of effects may be performed, and it may be possible to suggest the type of the specific state determined when the game for a specific period is performed. This also makes it possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest in the game even when the predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section. Further, even when shifting to a specific state via a non-advantageous section, it is possible to suggest the advantage of the specific state without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
Specific state control means capable of controlling to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state when the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section and when a specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section. (For example, main CPU 101)
When the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, but when the predetermined value is a specific value (for example, "500" or less), the above. A gaming machine characterized in that it may be in a special specific state (for example, a fixed CZ) in which the transition to a special state is fixed.
When shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, it is always controlled to the specific state.
During the non-advantageous section, a suggestion effect (for example, CZ preparation effect) suggesting that the state is in the preparation state of the specific state is performed.
The gaming machine according to the above-described machine, wherein the suggestion effect may be performed even when the specific condition is satisfied and the state shifts to the specific state during the advantageous section.
A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
Specific state control means (for example, main) that can control to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state when the transition to the non-advantageous section and the specific condition are satisfied during the advantageous section. With CPU101)
When the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, but when the predetermined value is a specific value (for example, "500" or less), the above. A gaming machine characterized in that it may be in a special specific state (for example, a fixed CZ) in which the transition to a special state is fixed.
The gaming machine according to the above, further comprising a section notification means capable of recognizing which section of the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When the transition from the advantageous section to the advantageous section and when the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, it is possible to control the specific state (for example, the CZ state) in which the expectation of the transition to the special state is higher than the normal state, and the specific condition is set. When it is established, if the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section is a specific value (for example, "500" or less), the transition to the special state is confirmed as the special specific state. May become. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. In addition, when shifting to a specific state without going through a non-advantageous section, it may be more advantageous than when shifting to a specific state via a non-advantageous section, so when the advantageous section is maintained. It is also possible to raise the expectations of the players.

When shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, it is always controlled to a specific state, and during the non-advantageous section, a suggestion effect (for example, CZ preparation effect) suggesting that the state is in the preparation state of the specific state is provided. Although it is performed, the suggestion effect may be performed even when a specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section and the state shifts to a specific state. As a result, it is difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the transition to the specific state is via a non-advantageous section, and the player feels uncomfortable to shift to the specific state while maintaining a sense of expectation. Can be shown in a manner that does not give.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific state of transition via the non-advantageous section may be performed in the non-advantageous section. As a result, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, the specific state performed in the non-advantageous section can be different from the specific state performed in the advantageous section, for example, in terms of the degree of expectation and the lottery method, so that the playability is further improved. It can be diverse.

In addition, it may be possible to perform section notification that can recognize which section is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in grasping the state of the player by making the notification more diverse.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
Specific state control means capable of controlling to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state when the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section and when a specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section. (For example, main CPU 101)
It is characterized in that the same effect may be performed during the specific state regardless of whether the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section or the case where the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section. A game machine to be.
A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
Specific state control means (for example, main) that can control to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state when the transition to the non-advantageous section and the specific condition are satisfied during the advantageous section. With CPU101)
A gaming machine characterized in that the same effect may be performed during the specific state regardless of whether the transition to the non-advantageous section or the case where the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section. ..
Further provided with a section notification means capable of recognizing which section of the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section is provided.
The section notification means is characterized in that when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, the notification is started from the first time when the special state is reached, and the notification is continued until the transition to the non-advantageous section. The gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When shifting from an advantageous section to an advantageous section, or when a specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, it is possible to control to a specific state (for example, CZ state) in which the expectation of a special state transition is higher than that of the normal state, and the non-advantageous section The same effect may be performed during the specific state regardless of whether the transition from the advantageous section to the advantageous section or the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. In addition, it is possible to maintain a sense of expectation by making it difficult for the player to recognize whether or not the transition to the specific state is via a non-advantageous section.

Further, in the gaming machine having the above configuration, the specific state of transition via the non-advantageous section may be performed in the non-advantageous section. As a result, in addition to the above-mentioned ones, the specific state performed in the non-advantageous section can be different from the specific state performed in the advantageous section, for example, in terms of the degree of expectation and the lottery method, so that the playability is further improved. It can be diverse.

In addition, it may be possible to perform section notification that can recognize which section is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section. Further, the section notification may not be started until the first special state is reached after the transition to the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to improve the interest in grasping the state of the player by making the notification more diverse.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
When shifting to the non-advantageous section, the specific state in which the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section can be controlled to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state for a predetermined period. A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
When a game is played for a specific period (for example, for the first to fourth cycles) without being controlled by the special state in the advantageous section, the predetermined value becomes the specified value and becomes the non-advantageous section. A gaming machine characterized in that it can be controlled to a special special state (for example, an advantageous section (ceiling AT)) until the transition.
In the special special state, a specific effect (for example, an effect during a special AT) is performed according to the remaining game period until the predetermined value reaches the specified value, and the non-advantageous section shifted after the end of the special special state. In the above-mentioned gaming machine, the above-described gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to perform an effect related to the specific effect performed.
The specific state control means enables control to the specific state even when a specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section.
When the specific state is controlled in response to the shift to the non-advantageous section, the specific state is more advantageous than the case where the specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section and the specific state is controlled. The gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to control the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section to a specific state (for example, CZ state) in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than the normal state for a predetermined period. , In the advantageous section, when the game is played for a specific period without being controlled by the special state, a predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout). It is possible to control the special special state (for example, the ceiling AT state) until the value of the number counter becomes a specified value and shifts to the non-advantageous section. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. In particular, when an advantageous state such as a special special state is terminated, such an action effect becomes more remarkable.

In the special special state, a specific effect (for example, an effect during the special AT) is performed according to the remaining game period until the predetermined value reaches the specified value, and in the non-advantageous section shifted after the end of the special special state. It may be possible to perform an effect related to the specified effect performed. As a result, even when shifting from the special special state to the specific state via the non-advantageous section, it is possible to perform a series of effects in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In addition, it is possible to control to a specific state even when a specific condition is satisfied during the advantageous section, and when the specific condition is controlled according to the transition to the non-advantageous section, the specific condition is set during the advantageous section. The specific state may be more advantageous than the case where it is established and controlled to the specific state. As a result, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest due to the forced termination of the advantageous section. In particular, when an advantageous state such as a special special state is terminated, such an action effect becomes more remarkable.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
When shifting to the non-advantageous section, the specific state in which the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section can be controlled to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state for a predetermined period. A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
In the normal state, the normal state display (for example, the display in the normal state) is performed, and in the specific state controlled according to the satisfaction of the predetermined end condition in the normal state, the specific state display (for example, in the CZ state) is performed. Display) is performed, and in the specific state controlled according to the predetermined value becoming the specified value in the special state, it is possible to perform a special display different from the normal state display and the specific state display. A gaming machine characterized by being.
In the special special state, a specific effect (for example, an effect during a special AT) is performed according to the remaining game period until the predetermined value reaches the specified value, and the non-advantageous section shifted after the end of the special special state. In the game machine, it is possible to perform an effect related to the specific effect performed.
When shifting from the specific state in which the special display is performed to the special state, it is possible to display that the special state has resumed or continued when shifting to the special state. The gaming machine described above.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to control the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section to a specific state (for example, CZ state) in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than the normal state for a predetermined period. , Specific control controlled according to the predetermined value (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section in the special state. In the state, it is possible to perform a special display different from the normal state display (for example, the normal state display) and the specific state display (for example, the CZ state display). As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. Further, even when the state shifts from the special state to the specific state via the non-advantageous section, it is possible to perform a series of effects in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

Further, when shifting from the specific state in which the special display is performed to the special state, a display indicating that the special state has resumed or continued may be performed when the transition to the special state is performed. As a result, the above-mentioned effects become more remarkable.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) becomes the specified value, and the predetermined value. An advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined before the value becomes the specified value.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
When shifting to the non-advantageous section, the specific state in which the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section can be controlled to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state for a predetermined period. A state control means (for example, main CPU 101) is provided.
When transitioning from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the probability of establishment of the predetermined end condition for each predetermined cycle (for example, the first to fourth cycles) in the advantageous section is determined, and the predetermined predetermined period is defined. A gaming machine characterized in that one end probability information out of a plurality of end probability information (for example, MAP) having at least a part different from the probability of satisfying the end condition is determined.
In the normal state, before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, until the game of the predetermined cycle is performed a specific number of times (for example, three times), it is determined whether or not to control the special state. Made,
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the predetermined value is initialized in any case of shifting to the non-advantageous section.
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein the advantageous section end control means can shift to the non-advantageous section even when the special state ends in the advantageous section.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section end condition, and in the non-advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section by the establishment of the advantageous section start condition. When shifting to the advantageous section, it is possible to control the non-advantageous section or the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section to a specific state (for example, CZ state) in which the expectation of transition to the special state is higher than that of the normal state for a predetermined period. , When transitioning from a non-advantageous section to an advantageous section, the probability of establishing the advantageous section end condition for each predetermined cycle (for example, the first to fourth cycles) in the advantageous section is determined, and the determined advantageous section end condition is determined. The end probability information of one of a plurality of end probability information (for example, MAP) in which at least a part of the probability of establishment of is different is determined. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest. Further, since it is possible to change the advantageous section end probability (that is, the non-advantageous section transition probability and the specific state transition probability) for each predetermined cycle, it is possible to further diversify the game playability.

In the normal state, it is assumed that whether or not to control the special state is determined until the game of a predetermined cycle is performed a specific number of times (for example, three times), and as the game progresses in the advantageous section. The predetermined value to be updated (for example, the value of the advantageous section game number counter or the advantageous section payout number counter) may be initialized in any case of transition to the non-advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to generate a situation in which a special state is started when a predetermined value is close to a specified value in an advantageous section. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, in the advantageous section, it may be possible to shift to the non-advantageous section even when the special state ends. As a result, the above-mentioned effects become more remarkable.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, an advantageous section end control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when a predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined.
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
A specific state control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of controlling a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state when the non-advantageous section is shifted to the advantageous section is provided.
The specific state includes a first specific state (for example, normal CZ) and a second specific state (for example, upper CZ) having different advantages.
The non-advantageous section includes a first non-advantageous section (for example, non-advantageous section A) and a second non-advantageous section (for example, non-advantageous section B).
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined in the advantageous section, it is determined whether to shift to the first non-advantageous section or the second non-advantageous section.
When shifting from the first non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the transition to the first specific state is performed, and when shifting from the second non-advantageous section to the advantageous section, the transition to the second specific state is performed. A gaming machine featuring.
The first non-advantageous section and the second non-advantageous section are described above, wherein the probability that the predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined by the advantageous section start control means is set to the same probability. Gaming machine.
When the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined in the advantageous section, a precursor period (for example, an advantageous section (end precursor)) is set, and the game is performed in the set precursor period. To shift to the non-advantageous section
The gaming machine according to the above description, wherein it is possible to suggest the advantage of the specific state according to the determined type of the non-advantageous section during the precursory period.
After shifting from the advantageous section to the first non-advantageous section or the second non-advantageous section, the initialization process for the advantageous section (for example, SE203 of the advantageous section end processing shown in FIG. 245) is executed. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when it is decided to shift from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, the first non-advantageous section (for example, the non-advantageous section A) and the second non-advantageous section (for example, the non-advantageous section) When it is decided which of B) to shift to and the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section, if the non-advantageous section is the first non-advantageous section, the advantageous section is put into the first specific state (for example, normal CZ). If the non-advantageous section is the second non-advantageous section, the advantageous section is controlled to the second specific state (for example, upper CZ). That is, the advantage of the specific state with high expectation of transition to the special state (for example, AT state) in the advantageous section changes depending on the state of the non-advantageous section. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to the non-advantageous section, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's willingness to play and interest.

In the first non-advantageous section and the second non-advantageous section, the probability that the advantageous section start condition is satisfied may be set to the same probability. As a result, even when a plurality of non-advantageous section states are provided, the transition control itself to the advantageous section is not changed, so that not only the control burden can be reduced, but also the fairness of the game can be ensured.

In addition, when it is decided to shift from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section, a precursory period is set, and during the precursory period, the advantage of the specific state to be shifted according to the type of the determined non-advantageous section is suggested. It may be possible. As a result, even when the player shifts to the specific state via the non-advantageous section, the advantage of the specific state can be appropriately shown to the player.

Further, after shifting from the advantageous section to the first non-advantageous section or the second non-advantageous section, the initialization process for the advantageous section (for example, SE203 of the advantageous section end processing shown in FIG. 245) is executed. You may. That is, it may be possible to control the state in the non-advantageous section by referring to the situation of the advantageous section before the transition to the non-advantageous section. This makes it possible to perform control during the non-advantageous section in a manner that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

[Amusement machines of Inventions 10 to 12, Inventions 14 and 15 according to another example (No. 11)]
In a conventional gaming machine, a non-advantageous section (normal section) and an advantageous section can be set as a state in which a game is played, an AT state can be set in the advantageous section, and a predetermined number of times have been set since the advantageous section started. When a game is played or when a specific number of games have been played since the end of the AT state, the initialization process is executed to shift to the non-advantageous section, and in this initialization process, the lottery state of the AT lottery is performed. Is known to be initialized to a low probability state (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-185099).

By the way, with such a gaming machine, while it is possible to suppress excessively high gambling, there is a problem that the player's motivation and interest in playing may be reduced when shifting to a non-advantageous section. was there.

Of course, it is conceivable that the non-advantageous section is simply made more advantageous than the normal state, but in this case, there is a problem that proper operation may not be performed at the amusement store.

The present invention has been made in view of such a point, and even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to a non-advantageous section, the player's willingness to play and interest in playing the game are reduced. The purpose is to provide a game machine that can be operated appropriately at a game store while suppressing this.

In order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A setting means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a setting change confirmation process) capable of setting any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, settings 1 to 6) that determines the degree of advantage of the player, and
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a bonus combination, and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, the advantageous section end control means capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when any set value is set by the setting means or when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined. (For example, main CPU 101) and
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
There is a first game state (for example, inside the general middle bonus) which is the carry-over state of the bonus combination, and a second game state (for example, inside the general middle bonus is not inside) which is not the carry-over state of the bonus combination. When any of the set values is set by the means, the game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) for controlling the second game state is provided.
When the non-advantageous section is in the first gaming state, it is possible to make an advantageous special decision regarding the transition to the special state, while when the non-advantageous section is in the second gaming state, the said Without making it possible to make special decisions,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the advantageous section start control means determines the start is higher than the probability that the combination determining means determines the bonus combination as a winning combination.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein when the combination determining means determines the bonus combination as a winning combination in the second gaming state which is the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section is maintained.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the first gaming state is configured as a gaming state in which it is difficult to derive a result display corresponding to the bonus combination.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the non-advantageous section is in the first gaming state (for example, inside the general middle bonus) in which the bonus combination is carried over, it is advantageous for the transition to the special state (for example, AT state). On the other hand, if the non-advantageous section is in the second gaming state (for example, in the general middle bonus non-internal), the special decision can be made. do not. Then, when the setting is changed, it is controlled to the second gaming state of the non-advantageous section, and the probability that the advantageous section is started in the non-advantageous section is higher than the probability that the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination. do. That is, when the non-advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section due to the setting change, the non-advantageous section is unlikely to be advantageous to the player, but when the non-advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section regardless of the setting change, the non-advantageous section becomes the player. Make it easy to be advantageous to. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to a non-advantageous section, appropriate operation is performed at the game store while suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation and interest in playing. be able to.

In addition, when the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination in the second gaming state which is the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section may be maintained. That is, even if the non-advantageous section is changed due to the setting change, if the bonus combination can be won first, there is room for the non-advantageous section to be advantageous to the player. May be good. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even when the setting is changed.

Further, the first gaming state may be configured as a gaming state in which it is difficult to derive a result display corresponding to the bonus combination. That is, the basic gaming state in which the game is performed may be set to the first gaming state, and when the non-advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section in the first gaming state, the non-advantageous section may be likely to be advantageous to the player. As a result, the above-mentioned effects become more remarkable.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A setting means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a setting change confirmation process) capable of setting any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, settings 1 to 6) that determines the degree of advantage of the player, and
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a bonus combination, and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, the advantageous section end control means capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when any set value is set by the setting means or when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined. (For example, main CPU 101) and
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
There is a first game state (for example, inside the general middle bonus) which is the carry-over state of the bonus combination, and a second game state (for example, inside the general middle bonus is not inside) which is not the carry-over state of the bonus combination. When any of the set values is set by the means, the game state control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the second game state and
With a specific state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control a specific state (for example, a CZ state) in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section. , With
When the non-advantageous section is in the second gaming state, the specific state is not controlled when the non-advantageous section shifts from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section as compared with the case where the non-advantageous section is in the first gaming state. , A gaming machine characterized in that the probability of controlling to the normal state is increased.
When the combination determining means determines a predetermined combination (for example, a normal combination) as a winning combination in the non-advantageous section, if it is the first gaming state, it always shifts to the specific state, and if it is the second gaming state, it is always shifted to the specific state. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it always shifts to the normal state.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein when the combination determining means determines the bonus combination as the winning combination in the second gaming state, which is the non-advantageous section, the combination is always shifted to the normal state.
In the second gaming state, which is the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section is maintained until the combination determining means determines the bonus combination as the winning combination, and the combination determining means determines the bonus combination as the winning combination. In the case, the gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that the normal state is always shifted.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the first gaming state is configured as a gaming state in which it is difficult to derive a result display corresponding to the bonus combination.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the setting is changed, the non-advantageous section is controlled to the second gaming state (for example, in the general middle bonus non-internal middle) which is not the carry-over state of the bonus combination. Then, when the non-advantageous section is in the second gaming state, it is in a special state (for example, AT) than in the case where the non-advantageous section is in the first gaming state (for example, inside the general middle bonus) in which the bonus combination is carried over. State) The probability of being controlled to a normal state is increased without controlling to a specific state (for example, CZ state) where the expectation of transition is high. That is, it is difficult to control to a specific state where the expectation of special state transition is high when shifting to a non-advantageous section due to a setting change, but it is controlled to the specific state when shifting to a non-advantageous section regardless of a setting change. Make it easy. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to a non-advantageous section, appropriate operation is performed at the game store while suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation and interest in playing. be able to.

When a predetermined winning combination (for example, a normal winning combination) is determined as a winning combination in the non-advantageous section, the player always shifts to the specific state in the first gaming state, and always shifts to the normal state in the second gaming state. You may do so. That is, at least when a predetermined combination is won, the transition to the specific state may be confirmed in the first gaming state, and there may be no room for the transition to the specific state in the second gaming state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where a specific state is controlled by changing the setting, so that a game store can perform more appropriate operation.

Further, when the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination in the second gaming state which is a non-advantageous section, the normal state may be always shifted. That is, even if the bonus combination is won in the second game state, there may be no room for transition to the specific state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where a specific state is controlled by changing the setting, so that a game store can perform more appropriate operation.

In addition, in the second gaming state, which is a non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section is maintained until the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination, and when the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination, it is always shifted to the normal state. good. In this way, even if the bonus combination is won in the second game state, there may be no room for transition to the specific state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where a specific state is controlled by changing the setting, so that a game store can perform more appropriate operation.

Further, the first gaming state may be configured as a gaming state in which it is difficult to derive a result display corresponding to the bonus combination. That is, the basic gaming state in which the game is performed may be set to the first gaming state, and when the non-advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section in the first gaming state, the non-advantageous section may be likely to be advantageous to the player. As a result, the above-mentioned effects become more remarkable.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A setting means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a setting change confirmation process) capable of setting any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, settings 1 to 6) that determines the degree of advantage of the player, and
A combination determining means (for example, a main CPU 101 that performs an internal lottery process) capable of determining a winning combination from a plurality of combinations including a bonus combination, and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, the advantageous section end control means capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when any set value is set by the setting means or when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined. (For example, main CPU 101) and
In the non-advantageous section, an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, and
The first game state (for example, inside the general middle bonus) which is the carry-over state of the bonus combination, the second game state (for example, the non-internal middle initial game state) and the third game state (for example, the non-internal middle initial game state) which is not the carry-over state of the bonus combination. For example, there is a non-internal middle transition post-game state), and when any of the set values is set by the setting means, the second game state is controlled, and in the second game state, the combination determining means When the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination, the first gaming state is immediately controlled, and a predetermined result display is derived before the combination determining means determines the bonus combination as the winning combination in the second gaming state. In that case, the third game state is started, and when the game is played for a predetermined period (for example, 10 games) in the third game state, the third game state is ended, and in the third game state. When the combination determining means determines the bonus combination as the winning combination, the gaming state controlling means (for example, the main CPU 101) that controls the first gaming state by the end of the third gaming state.
With a specific state control means (for example, main CPU 101) that can control a specific state (for example, a CZ state) in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section. , With
At least when the non-advantageous section is in the third gaming state, control to the specific state when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section as compared with the case where the non-advantageous section is in the first gaming state. Instead, increase the probability of controlling to the normal state,
A gaming machine characterized in that the probability that the derivation of the predetermined result display is permitted in the second gaming state is higher than the probability that the combination determining means determines the bonus combination as a winning combination in the second gaming state. ..
When the combination determining means determines a predetermined combination (for example, a normal combination) as a winning combination in the non-advantageous section, if it is the first gaming state, it always shifts to the specific state, and if it is the third gaming state, it is always shifted to the specific state. The gaming machine according to the above, characterized in that it always shifts to the normal state.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein when the combination determining means determines the bonus combination as a winning combination in the second gaming state which is the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section is maintained.
When the non-advantageous section is in the second gaming state, the probability of controlling to the specific state when the non-advantageous section shifts from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section is higher than when the non-advantageous section is in the third gaming state. The gaming machine described above, characterized in that the height is raised.
The gaming machine according to the above, wherein the first gaming state is configured as a gaming state in which it is difficult to derive a result display corresponding to the bonus combination.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, when the setting is changed, the non-advantageous section is controlled to the second gaming state (for example, the non-internal middle initial gaming state) which is not the carry-over state of the bonus combination. Further, if the predetermined result display is derived before winning the bonus combination in the second gaming state, the control is also performed in the third gaming state (for example, the gaming state after the transition between non-internal middle), which is not the carry-over state of the bonus combination. Further, in the third game state, the game state is maintained until the game is played for a predetermined period (for example, 10 games). Then, when the non-advantageous section is in the third gaming state, it is in a special state (for example, AT) as compared with the case where the non-advantageous section is in the first gaming state (for example, inside the general middle bonus) in which the bonus combination is carried over. State) The probability of being controlled to a normal state without being controlled to a specific state (for example, CZ state) with a high expectation of transition is increased, and the probability that a predetermined result display is allowed to be derived in the second game state is increased. , Make the bonus role higher than the probability that it will be decided as the winning role. That is, when the section shifts to the non-advantageous section due to the setting change, the transition from the second gaming state to the third gaming state is facilitated, so that it is difficult to control the specific state with a high expectation of the transition to the special state. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to a non-advantageous section, appropriate operation is performed at the game store while suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation and interest in playing. be able to.

When a predetermined combination (for example, a normal combination) is determined as a winning combination in the non-advantageous section, it is always shifted to the specific state in the first gaming state, and is always shifted to the normal state in the third gaming state. You may do so. That is, at least when a predetermined combination is won, the transition to the specific state may be confirmed in the first gaming state, and there may be no room for the transition to the specific state in the third gaming state. As a result, it is possible to reduce the number of cases where a specific state is controlled by changing the setting, so that a game store can perform more appropriate operation.

Further, when the bonus combination is determined as the winning combination in the second gaming state which is the non-advantageous section, the non-advantageous section may be maintained. That is, even if the non-advantageous section is shifted due to the setting change, there is room for the non-advantageous section to be advantageous to the player if the bonus combination can be won first in the second gaming state. There may be. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even when the setting is changed.

Further, when the non-advantageous section is in the second gaming state, the probability of controlling to a specific state when the non-advantageous section shifts to the advantageous section is higher than in the case where the non-advantageous section is in the third gaming state. good. That is, even when the section shifts to the non-advantageous section due to the setting change, the degree of expectation of shifting to the specific state may be increased in the second gaming state until the transition to the third gaming state. As a result, it is possible to maintain the player's expectation even when the setting is changed.

Further, the first gaming state may be configured as a gaming state in which it is difficult to derive a result display corresponding to the bonus combination. That is, the basic gaming state in which the game is performed may be set to the first gaming state, and when the non-advantageous section shifts to the non-advantageous section in the first gaming state, the non-advantageous section may be likely to be advantageous to the player. As a result, the above-mentioned effects become more remarkable.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A setting means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a setting change confirmation process) capable of setting any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, settings 1 to 6) that determines the degree of advantage of the player, and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, the advantageous section end control means capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when any set value is set by the setting means or when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined. (For example, main CPU 101)
The player's advantage is set higher in the order of the normal state, the non-advantageous section, and the special state.
When any set value is set by the setting means, the advantageous section end control means shifts to the non-advantageous section if the state before setting is the special state, and the non-advantageous section if the state is the normal state. A gaming machine characterized by not shifting to an advantageous section.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased. In the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the non-advantageous section by satisfying the advantageous section end condition, and the player's advantage is set higher in the order of the normal state, the non-advantageous section, and the special state. , When the setting is changed, if the state before the setting change is a special state, it is shifted to the non-advantageous section, and if the state before the setting change is the normal state, it is controlled not to shift to the non-advantageous section. That is, if the state before the setting change is a special state that is advantageous to the player, the special state is terminated and at least shifted to a non-advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state, while before the setting change. If the state of is a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, the normal state is maintained. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to a non-advantageous section, appropriate operation is performed at the game store while suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation and interest in playing. be able to.

Further, in order to achieve the above object, according to the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to provide a gaming machine having the following configuration.

A variable display unit (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R) capable of variable display of a plurality of types of identification information and a result display derived by stopping the variable display after starting the variable display on the variable display unit are derived. It is a gaming machine that can give benefits according to the result display (for example, pachislot 1 of another example of gameplay (No. 11)).
A setting means (for example, the main CPU 101 that performs a setting change confirmation process) capable of setting any one of the setting values of a plurality of stages (for example, settings 1 to 6) that determines the degree of advantage of the player, and
A stop operation detecting means (for example, a stop switch board 80) capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means (for example, a display device 11) capable of notifying a player of an advantageous stop operation mode, and
A section control means (for example, the main CPU 101) that can be controlled to any section of the non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and the advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means (eg, main CPU 101) and
In the advantageous section, the advantageous section end control means capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section when any set value is set by the setting means or when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined. (For example, main CPU 101) and
The non-advantageous section includes an advantageous section start control means (for example, main CPU 101) capable of shifting to the advantageous section when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined.
In the non-advantageous section, it is possible to determine one of a plurality of transition probability information in which different transition probability information is defined as the special state transition probability at least in a predetermined period after the transition to the advantageous section. The first transition probability information is determined in the non-advantageous section that has been shifted in response to the establishment of the predetermined end condition, and the non-advantageous section that has been shifted in response to the setting of any of the set values by the setting means. The gaming machine is characterized in that the second transition probability information having a lower special state transition probability than the first transition probability information is determined.

According to the gaming machine having the above configuration, in the advantageous section, either a special state in which the gaming value can be increased (for example, an AT state) or a normal state in which the gaming value cannot be increased cannot be increased. When the transition from the advantageous section to the non-advantageous section is made by changing the setting, the transition probability information that determines the special state transition probability in the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section becomes relatively disadvantageous, and other than the setting change. When shifting from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section, the above-mentioned transition probability information in the advantageous section shifted from the non-advantageous section is configured to be relatively advantageous. As a result, even when a predetermined initialization condition is satisfied and the section shifts to a non-advantageous section, appropriate operation is performed at the game store while suppressing a decrease in the player's motivation and interest in playing. be able to.

1 ... Pachislot, 3L, 3C, 3R ... Reel, 4 ... Reel display window, 6 ... Information display, 11 ... Display device, 17L, 17C, 17R ... Stop button, 18 ... Sub display device, 71 ... Main control board, 72 ... Sub control board, 90 ... Main control circuit, 91 ... Microprocessor, 101 ... Main CPU, 102 ... Main ROM, 103 ... Main RAM, 107 ... Arithmetic circuit, 114 ... First serial communication circuit, 115 ... Second serial Communication circuit, 200 ... Sub control circuit, 201 ... Sub CPU 201, 301 ... First interface board, 302 ... Second interface board

Claims (2)

A variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information, and a result display can be derived by starting and then stopping the variable display on the variable display unit, and a privilege corresponding to the derived result display can be given. It ’s a gaming machine,
A stop operation detecting means capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player,
A section control means that can be controlled to any section of a non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and an advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section becomes the specified value, and before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined. When this is done, the advantageous section end control means capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section end control means,
In the non-advantageous section, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, the advantageous section start control means capable of shifting to the advantageous section and
The non-advantageous section is provided with a specific state control means capable of controlling the non-advantageous section to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state .
Prior Symbol specific state, specific state display is performed, the specific status display, after shifting the said advantageous interval from non Advantageously section, but may be line Ukoto continuously at least a predetermined period,
When it is decided to shift to the special state in the specific state, the shift to the advantageous section and the specific precursor period are set, and the game is performed according to the set specific precursor period. Move to a special state,
A gaming machine characterized in that during the advantageous section in which the specific state display is performed, the predetermined period in which the specific state display continues is set according to the set specific precursor period. A variable display unit capable of variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information, and a result display can be derived by starting and then stopping the variable display on the variable display unit, and a privilege corresponding to the derived result display can be given. It ’s a gaming machine,
A stop operation detecting means capable of detecting a stop operation for stopping the variable display of the variable display unit, and
A notification means capable of notifying a stop operation mode that is advantageous to the player, and
A section control means that can be controlled to any section of a non-advantageous section that cannot be notified by the notification means and an advantageous section that can be notified by the notification means.
The advantageous section is controlled to either a special state in which the game value can be increased by the notification by the notification means or a normal state in which the game value cannot be increased by the notification by the notification means. Possible state control means and
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined value updated with the progress of the game in the advantageous section becomes the specified value, and before the predetermined value becomes the specified value, the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined. When this is done, the advantageous section end control means capable of shifting to the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section end control means,
In the non-advantageous section, when a predetermined start condition is satisfied and the start is determined, the advantageous section start control means capable of shifting to the advantageous section and
The non-advantageous section is provided with a specific state control means capable of controlling the non-advantageous section to a specific state in which the expectation of the special state transition is higher than that of the normal state.
In the advantageous section, when the predetermined end condition is satisfied and the end is determined, a predetermined precursor period is set, and the player shifts to the non-advantageous section according to the play of the set predetermined precursor period. ,
During the predetermined precursor period, it is possible to suggest a transition to the specific state, and it is notified that the transition to the specific state will occur in the final game.
In the specific state, the specific state display is performed, and the specific state display can be continuously performed for at least a predetermined period after shifting from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section.
When it is decided to shift to the special state in the specific state, the shift to the advantageous section and the specific precursor period are set, and the game is performed according to the set specific precursor period. Move to a special state,
Wherein the above in advantageous interval specified status display is being performed, Yu Technical machine wherein said predetermined period is set to the specific state display continues in accordance with the specific aura period set.

Images